-A=.

AMERICAN SOCIETY
HI .

FOR

TESTING MATERIALS
AFFILIATED WITH THE

INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION FOR TESTING A\ATERIALS

A.S.T.M. STANDARDS

NOTICE

ial attention is called to the blank letter of recom-

mendation for membership in the Society, and the application

blank for membership bound in the back of this pamphlet.

It is hoped that members will put these blanks to good use as

occasion offer-

n
M»_^.

AMERICAN SOCIETY
Ml .

FOR

TESTING MATERIALS
AFFILIATED WITH THE

INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION FOR TESTING MATERIALS

A.S.T.M. STANDARDS
ISSUED TRIENNIALLY

1918

EDITED UNDER THE REGULATIONS GOVERNING PUBLICATIONS

Office of the Society: University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, P«. '/ /J / /

PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY

 Entered according to Act of Congress by the
American Society fob Testing Materials,
in the office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.

4-01
 CONTENTS
PAGE
General Information concerning the Society 15

STANDARDS ADOPTED BY THE SOCIETY. 1

In the serial designations prefixed to the following titles, the initial letter
indicative of the general classification and the first number are permanent.
The final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in
the case of revision, the year of last revision. Thus, the standards which
were adopted as standard or revised during the past year are designated by
the final number 18.

A. Ferrous Metals.

Steel.

(See also Wrought Iron: A 56-18.)

Standard Specifications for:

A 1-14. Carbon-Steel Rails 20

A 2-12. Open-hearth Steel Girder and High Tee Rails 29
A 3-14. Low-Carbon-Steel Splice Bars 34
A 4-14. Medium-Carbon-Steel Splice Bars 37
A 5-14. High-Carbon-Steel Splice Bars 41
A 6-14. Extra-High-Carbon-Steel Splice Bars 45
A 49-15. Quenched High-Carbon-Steel Splice Bars 49
A 50-16. Quenched Carbon-Steel Track Bolts 53
A 51-16. Quenched Alloy-Steel Track Bolts 57
A 65-18. Steel Track Spikes 61
A 66-18. Steel Screw Spikes 63
A 7-16. Structural Steel for Bridges 65
A 8-16. Structural Nickel Steel 72
A 9-16. Structural Steel for Buildings 79
A 10-16. Structural Steel for Locomotives 86
A 1 1-16. Structural Steel for Cars 92
A 12-16. Structural Steel for Ships 98
A 13-14. Rivet Steel for Ships 104
A 14-16. Carbon-Steel Bars for Railway Springs 109
A 68-18. Carbon-Steel Bars for Railway Springs, with Special
Silicon Requirements 112

1
Por a Ltet of Standards in Continuous Numeric Sequence, Bee pp. 10-14.

(3)
4 Contents.

Standard Specifications for: PAGB

A 58-16. Carbon-Steel Bars for Vehicleand Automobile Springs — 1 15
A 59-16. Silico-Manganese-Steel Bars for Automobile and Railway
Springs 118
A 60-16. Chrome- Vanadium-Steel Bars for Automobile and Railway
Springs 121
A 61-16. Helical Steel Springs for Railways 124
A 62-16. Elliptical Steel Springs for Railways 131
A 69-18. Elliptical Steel Springs for Automobiles 140
A 15-14. Billet-Steel Concrete Reinforcement Bars 148
A 16-14. Rail-Steel Concrete Reinforcement Bars 152
A 17-18. Carbon-Steel and Alloy-Steel Blooms, Billets and Slabs
for Forgings 155
A 18-18. Carbon-Steeland Alloy-Steel Forgings ._
160
A 19-18. Quenched-and- Tempered Carbon-Steel Axles, Shafts, and
Other Forgings for Locomotives and Cars 169
A 63-18, Quenched-and-Tempered Alloy-Steel Axles, Shafts, and
Other Forgings for Locomotives and Cars 178
A 20-16. Carbon-Steel Forgings for Locomotives 187
A 21-18. Carbon-Steel Car and Tender Axles 192
A 22-16. Cold-Rolled Steel Axles 196
A 57-16. Wrought Solid Carbon-Steel Wheels for Steam Railway
Service 200
A 25-16. Wrought Solid Carbon-Steel Wheels for Electric Railway
Service 208
A 26-16. Steel Tires 215
A 27-16. Steel Castings 220
A 28-18. Lap- Welded and Seamless Steel Boiler Tubes for Loco-
motives 226
A 52-18. Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel and Wrought-Iron Boiler
Tubes for Stationary Service » 232
A 53-18. Welded Steel Pipe 240
A 29-18. Automobile Carbon and Alloy Steels 245
A 30-18. Boiler and Firebox Steel for Locomotives 253
A 31-14. Boiler Rivet Steel 259
A 32-14. Cold-Drawn Bessemer Steel Automatic Screw Stock 264
A 54-15. Cold-Drawn Open-hearth Steel Automatic Screw Stock.. 266

Standard Tests for:

A 34-18. Magnetic Properties of Iron and Steel 268

Standard Methods for:

A 33-14. Chemical Analysis of Plain Carbon Steel 275

A 55-15. Chemical Analysis of Alloy Steels 299
 1

Contents. 5

Recommended Practice for: page

A 35-11. Annealing of Miscellaneous Rolled and Forged Carbon-
Steel Objects 328
A 36-14. Annealing of Carbon-Steel Castings 334
A 37-14. Heat Treatment of Case-Hardened Carbon-Steel Objects. 336

Wrought Iron.

(See also Steel: A 52-18.)

Standard Specifications for:

A 38-18. Lap-Welded Charcoal-Iron Boiler Tubes for Locomotives. 338
A 72-18. Welded Wrought-Iron Pipe 342
A 39-18. Staybolt Iron , 347
A 40-18. Engine-Bolt Iron 351
A 41-18. Refined Wrought-Iron Bars 355
A 42-18. Wrought-Iron Plates rf
360
A 56-18. Iron and Steel Chain 363
A 73-18. Wrought-Iron Rolled or Forged Blooms and Forgings for
Locomotives and Cars 369

Pig Iron, Cast Iron, and Finished Castings.

Standard Specifications for:

A 43-09. Foundry Pig Iron ^ . . . 373
A 44-04. Cast-Iron Pipe and Special Castings 377
A 74-18. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 387
A 45-14. Cast-Iron Locomotive Cylinders. 393
A 46-05. Cast-Iron Car Wheels 397
A 47-15. Malleable-Iron Castings 403
A 48-18. Gray-Iron Castings 406

Standard Methods for:

A 64-16. Sampling and Analysis of Pig and Cast Iron 410

B. Non-Ferrous Metals.
Standard Specifications for:
B 4-13. Lake Copper Wire Bars, Cakes, Slabs, Billets, Ingots, and
Ingot Bars 430
B 5-13. Electrolytic Copper Wire Bars, Cakes, Slabs, Billets, .

Ingots, and Ingot Bars 434

B 6-18. Spelter.. 437
B 7-14. Manganese-Bronze Ingots for Sand Castings 444
B 10-18. The Alloy: Copper, 88 per cent; Tin, 10 per cent; Zinc,
2 per cent 447
B 1-15. Hard-Drawn Copper Wire 45
6 Contents.

Standard Specifications for: page

B 2-15. Medium Hard-Drawn Copper Wire 460
B 3-15. Soft or AnnealedCopper Wire ! 467
B 8-16. Bare Concentric-Lay Copper Cable: Hard, Medium-Hard
or Soft 472
B 9-16. High-Strength Bronze Trolley Wire, Round and Grooved:
40 and 65-per-cent Conductivity 477
B 11-18. Copper Plates for Locomotive Fireboxes 481
B 12-18. Copper Bars for Locomotive Staybolts 485
B 13-18. Seamless Copper Boiler Tubes 488
B 14-18. Seamless Brass Boiler Tubes ,
492
B 15-18. Brass Forging Rod 496
B 16-18. Free-Cutting Brass Rod for Use in Screw Machines 499

C. Cement, Lime, Gypsum, and Clay Products.

Standard Specifications fcr:

C 9-17. Standard Specifications and Tests for Portland Cement. . 503
C 10-09. Natural Cement 523
C 4-16. Drain Tile 526
C 5-15. Quicklime 543
C 6-15. Hydrated Lime 546
C 7-15. Paving Brick 549
C 19-18. Fire Tests of Materials and Construction 561

Standard Definitions of:

C 8-15. Terms Relating to Sewer Pipe 566

D. Miscellaneous Materials.
Standard Specifications for:
D 1-15. Purity of Raw Linseed Oil from North American Seed. . . 570
D 11-15. Purity of Boiled Linseed Oil from North American Seed. 573
D 12-16. Purity of Raw Tung Oil 579
D 13-15. Turpentine 581
D 17-16. Foundry Coke 584
D 10-15. Yellow-Pine Bridge and Trestle Timbers 588
D 14-15. 2f-in. Cotton Rubber-Lined Fire Hose for Private Depart-
ment Use 592
D 26-18. 2\, 3, and 3|-in. Double-Jacketed Cotton Rubber- Lined
Fire Hose for Public Fire Department Use 597
D 46-18. Air-Line Hose for Pneumatic Tools 602

Standard Tests for:

D 28-17. Paint Thinners other than Turpentine 606
D 29-17. Shellac 610
 Contents. 7

Standard Tests for: PAGE

D 47-18. Lubricants 617
D 2-08. Abrasion of Road Material 623
D 3-18. Toughness of Rock 625
D 30-18. Determination of Apparent Specific Gravity of Coarse
Aggregates 628
D 4-1 1. Soluble Bitumen 630
D 5-16. Penetration of Bituminous Materials 632
D 6-16. Loss on Heating of Oil and Asphaltic Compounds 635

Standard Methods for:

D 34-17. Routine Analysis of White Pigments 637

D 49-18. Routine Analysis of Dry Red Lead 649
D 50-18. Routine Analysis of Yellow, Orange, Red, and Brown
Pigments Containing Iron and Manganese 655
D 7-18. Making a Mechanical Analysis of Sand or Other Fine
Highway Material, except for Fine Aggregates Used in
Cement Concrete 663
D 18-16. Making a Mechanical Analysis of Broken Stone or Broken
Slag, except for Aggregates Used in Cement Concrete. . 665
D 19-16. Making a Mechanical Analysis Sand or
of Mixtures of
Other Fine Material with Broken Stone or Broken
Slag, except for Aggregates Used in Cement Concrete 666
D 35-18. Form of Specifications for Certain Commercial Grades of
Broken Stone 668
D 20-18. Distillation of Bituminous Materials Suitable for Road
Treatment 669
D 21-16. Sampling of Coal 673
D 22-16. Laboratory Sampling and Analysis of Coal 679
D 37-18. Laboratory Sampling and Analysis of Coke 709
D 38-18. Sampling and Analysis of Creosote Oil 721
D 15-15. Testing of Cotton Rubber-Lined Hose 736

Standard Definitions of:

D 16-15. Terms Relating to Paint Specifications 746

D 8-18. Terms Relating to Materials for Roads and Pavements 750
D 9-15. Terms Relating to Structural Timber 7'55

E. Miscellaneous Subjects.
Standard Methods for:

E 1-18. Testing 759

8 Contents.

DATA RELATIVE TO COMMITTEES AND PUBLICATIONS.

PAGE
Officers and Members Committee
of Executive 775
Tabular List of Standing Committees 776
Personnel of Standing Committees 778
Regulations Governing Standing Committees 830
Basis of Cooperation between Various Government Branches and the
Standing Committees of the Society 841
Regulations Governing the Form but not the Substance of Standards . . . 844
Regulations Governing Papers, Committee Reports and Discussions 855
List of Standards 859
List of Tentative Standards 881
Price List of Publications 888
Index of the Standards 892

STANDARDS APPLICABLE TO LOCOMOTIVES.

Steel.

Standard Specifications for:

A 10-16. Structural Steel for Locomotives 86
A 14-16. Carbon-Steel Bars for Railway Springs 109
A 68-18. Carbon-Steel Bars for Railway Springs with Special
Silicon Requirements 112
A 59-16. Silico-Manganese-Steel Bars for Automobile and Railway
Springs 118
A 60-16. Chrome- Vanadium-Steel Bars for Automobile and Railway
Springs 121
A 61-16. Helical Steel Springs for Railways 124
A 62-16. Elliptical Steel Springs for Railways 131
A 17-18. Carbon-Steel and Alloy-Steel Blooms, Billets and Slabs
for Forgings 155
A 18-18. Carbon-Steel and Alloy-Steel Forgings 160
A 19-18. Quenched-and-Tempered Carbon-Steel Axles, Shafts, and
Other Forgings for Locomotives and Cars 169
A 20-16. Carbon-Steel Forgings for Locomotives 187
A 63-18. Quenched-and-Tempered Alloy-Steel Axles, Shafts, and
Other Forgings for Locomotives and Cars 178
A 21-18. Carbon-Steel Car and Tender Axles 192
A 57-16. Wrought Solid Carbon-Steel Wheels for Steam Railway
Service 200
A 26-16. Steel Tires 215
A 27-16. Steel Castings, Class B (Special Requirements for Castings
for Railway Rolling Stock) 220
A 28-18. Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel Boiler Tubes for Loco-
motives 226
 Contents. 9

Standard Specifications for: PAGE

A 53-18. Welded Steel Pipe 240
A 30-18. Boiler and Firebox Steel for Locomotives 253
A 31-14. Boiler Rivet Steel 259

Wrought Iron.

Standard Specifications for:

A 38-18. Lap-Welded Charcoal-Iron Boiler Tubes for Locomotives 338
A 72-18. Welded Wrought-Iron Pipe 342
A 39-18. Staybolt Iron 347
A 40-18. Engine-Bolt Iron 351
A 41-18. Refined Wrought-Iron Bars 355
A 42-18. Wrought-Iron Plates 360
A 73-18. Wrought-Iron Rolled or Forged Blooms and Forgings for
Locomotives and Cars 369

Cast Iron.

Standard Specifications for:

A 45-14. Cast-Iron Locomotive Cylinders 393
A 46-05. Cast-iron Car Wheels 397
A 47-15. Malleable-Iron Castings 403
A 48-18. Gray-Iron Castings 406

Non-Ferrous Metals.

Standard Specifications for:

B 11-18. Copper Plates for Locomotive Fireboxes 481
B 12-18. Copper Bars for Locomotive Staybolts 485
B 13-18. Seamless Copper Boiler Tubes 488
B 14-18. Seamless Brass Boiler Tubes 492
 LIST OF STANDARDS
IN.

CONTINUOUS NUMERIC SEQUENCE.

A. Ferrous Metals.
PAGE
A 1-14. Standard Specifications for Carbon-Steel Rails 20
A 2-12. Standard Specifications for Open-hearth Steel Girder and
High Tee Rails 29
A 3-14. Standard Specifications for Low-Carbon-Steel Splice Bars 34
A 4-14. Standard Specifications for Medium-Carbon-Steel Splice Bars 37
A 5-14. Standard Specifications for High-Carbon-Steel Splice Bars. . .41
A 6-14. Standard Specifications for Extra-High-Carbon-Steel Splice
Bars 45
A 7-16. Standard Specifications for Structural Steel for Bridges 65
A 8-16. Standard Specifications for Structural Nickel Steel 72
A 9-16. Standard Specifications for Structural Steel for Buildings. ... 79
A 10-16. Standard Specifications for Structural Steel for Locomotives 86
A 11-16. Stanard Specifications for Structural Steel for Cars 92
A 12-16. Standard Specifications for Structural Steel for Ships 98
A 13-14. Standard Specifications for Rivet Steel for Ships 104
A 14-16. Standard Specifications for Carbon-Steel Bars for Railway
Springs 109
A 15-14. Standard Specifications for Billet-Steel Concrete Reinforce-
ment Bars 1 48

A 16-14. Standard Specifications for Rail-Steel Concrete Reinforcement

Bars 152
A 17-18. Standard Specifications for Carbon-Steel and Alloy-Steel
Blooms, Billets, and Slabs for Forgings 155
A 18-18. Standard Specifications for Carbon-Steel and Alloy-Steel
Forgings 160
A 19-18, Standard Specifications for Quenched-and-Tempered Carbon-
Steel Axles, Shafts, and Other Forgings for Locomotives
and Cars 169
A 20-16, Standard Specifications for Carbon-Steel Forgings for Loco-
motives 187
A 21-18, Standard Specifications for Carbon-Steel Car and Tender
Axles 192
A 22-16, Standard Specifications for Cold-Rolled Steel Axles 196
A 23. —
Discontinued Replaced by Specification A 57
A 24. —
Discontinued Replaced by Specification A 57
A 25-16, Standard Specifications for Wrought Solid Carbon-Steel
Wheels for Electric Railway Service 208

(10)
 1

Contents. 11

PAGE
A 26-16. Standard Specifications for Steel Tires 215
A 27-16. Standard Specifications for Steel Castings 220
A 28-18. Standard Specifications for Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel
Boiler Tubes for Locomotives 226
A 29-18. Standard Specifications for Automobile Carbon and Alloy
Steels 245
A 30-18. Standard Specifications for Boiler and Firebox Steel for
Locomotives 253
A 31-14. Standard Specifications for Boiler Rivet Steel 259
A 32-14. Standard Specifications for Cold-Drawn Bessemer Steel
Automatic Screw Stock 264
A 33-14. Standard Methods for Chemical Analysis of Plain Carbon
Steel 275
A 34-18. Standard Tests for Magnetic Properties of Iron and Steel. . 268
A 35--11. Recommended Practice for Annealing of Miscellaneous
Rolled and Forged Carbon-Steel Objects 328
A 36- -14, Recommended Practice for Annealing of Carbon-Steel Cast-
ings 334
A 37- -14. Recommended Practice for Heat Treatment of Case-Hardened
Carbon-Steel Objects 336
A 38- -18. Standard Specifications for Lap-Welded Charcoal-Iron Boiler
Tubes for Locomotives 338
A 39- -18. Standard Specifications for Staybolt Iron 347
A 40-18. Standard Specifications for Engine-Bolt Iron 35
A 41- -IK. Standard Specifications for Refined Wrought-Iron Bars 355
A 42- -1,8. Standard Specifications for Wrought-Iron Plates 360
A 43-09. Standard Specifications for Foundry Pig Iron 373
A 44-04. Standard Specifications for Cast-Iron Pipe and Special Cast-
ings 377
A 45- 14. Standard Specifications for Cast-Iron Locomotive Cylinders 393
A 46-05. Standard Specifications for Cast-Iron Car Wheels 397
A 47--l.s. Standard Specifications for Malleable-Iron Castings 403
A 48- -18. Standard Specifications for Gray-Iron Castings 406
A 49- -15. Standard Specifications for Quenched High-Carbon-Stecl
Splice Bars 49
A 50-16. Standard Specifications for Quenched Carbon-Steel Track
Bolts 53
51-16. Standard Specifications for Quenched Alloy-Steel Track Bolts 57
52-18. Standard Specifications for Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel
and Wrought-Iron Boiler Tubes for Stationary Service... 232
53-18. Standard Specifications for Welded Steel Pipe 240
54-15. Standard Specifications for Cold-Drawn Open-hearth Steel
Automatic Screw Stock 266
55-15. Standard Methods for Chemical Analysis of Alloy Steels 299
56-18. Standard Specifications for Iron and Steel 'ha in
< 363
57-16. Standard Specifications for Wrought Solid Carbon-Steel
Wheels for Steam Railway Sreviee 20o
12 Contents.

PAGE

A 58-16. Standard Specifications for Carbon-Steel Bars for Vehicle

and Automobile Springs 115
A 59-16. Standard Specifications for Silico-Manganese-Steel Bars for
Automobile and Railway Springs 118
A 60-16. Standard Specifications for Chrome- Vanadium-Steel Bars for
Automobile and Railway Springs 121

A 61-16. Standard Specifications for Helical Steel Springs for Railways 124
A 62-16. Standard Specifications for Elliptical Steel Springs for Rail-
ways 131

A 63-18. Standard Specifications for Quenched-and-Tempered Alloy-

Steel Axles, Shafts, and Other Forgings for Locomotives
and Cars 178
A 64-16. Standard Methods for Sampling and Analysis of Pig and Cast
Iron 410
A 65-1S. Standard Specifications for Steel Track Spikes 61

A 66-18. Standard Specifications for Steel Screw Spikes 63

A 68- -IS. Standard Specifications for Carbon-Steel Bars for Railway
Springs with Speical Silicon Requirements 112

A 69-18. Standard Specifications for Elliptical Springs for Automobiles 140

A 72- -18. Standard -Specifications for Welded Wrought-Iron Pipe 342
A 73- -IS Standard Specifications for Wrought-Iron, Rolled or Forged
Blooms and Forgings for Locomotives and Cars 369
A 74-18. Standard Specifications for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.. 387

B. Non-Ferrous Metals.

B 1-15. Standard Specifications for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire 45

B 2-15. Standard Specifications for Medium Hard-Drawn Copper Wire 460
B 3-15. Standard Annealed Copper Wire
Specifications for Soft or 467 . . .

B 4-13. Standard Specifications for Lake Copper Wire Bars, Cakes,

Slabs, Billets, Ingots and Ingot Bars 430
B 5-13. Standard Specifications for Electrolytic Copper Wire Bars,
Cakes, Slabs, Billets, Ingots and Ingot Bars 434
B 6-18. Standard Specifications for Spelter 437
B 7-14. Standard Specifications for Manganese-Bronze Ingots for
Sand Castings 444
B 8-16. Standard Specifications for Bare Concentric-Lay Copper
Cable: Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft 472
B 9-16. Standard Specifications for High-Strength Bronze Trolley
Wire, Round and Grooved: 40 and 65 -per-cent Conductivity 477
B 10-18. Standard Specifications for the Alloy: Copper, 88 per cent;
Tin, 10 per cent; Zinc, 2 per cent 447
B 11-18. Standard Specifications for Copper Plates for Locomotive
Fireboxes 481
B 12-18, Standard Specifications for Copper Bars for Locomotive
Staybolts 485
 Contents. 13

PAGE
B 13-18. Standard Specifications for Seamless Copper Boiler Tubes. . . 488
B 14-18. Standard Specifications Seamless Brass Boiler Tubes 492
B 15-18. Standard Specifications for Brass Forging Rod 496
B 16-18. Standard Specifications for Free-Cutting Brass Rod for Use
in Screw Machines 499

C. Cement, Lime, Gypsum and Clay Products.

c 1 Discontinued —Replaced by Specifications C 9 and C 10
c 2. Discontinued —Replaced by Specification C 19
c 3. Discontinued — Replaced by Specification C 19
c 4-16. Standard Specifications for Drain Tile 526
c 5-15. Standard Specifications for Quicklime 543
c 6-15. Standard Specifications for Hydrated Lime 546
c 7-15. Standard Specifications for Paving Brick 549
c 8-15. Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Sewer Pipe 566
c 9-17. Standard Specifications and Tests for Portland Cement 503
c 10-09. Standard Specifications for Natural Cement 523
c 19-18. Standard Specifications for Fire Tests of Materials and Con-
struction 561

D. Miscellaneous Materials.

D 1-15. Standard Specifications for Purity of Raw Linseed Oil from

North American Seed 570
D 2-08. Standard Test for Abrasion of Road Material 623
D 3-18. Standard Test for Toughness of Rock 625
D 4-11. Standard Test for Soluble Bitumen 630
D 5-16. Standard Test for Penetration of Bituminous Materials 632
D 6-16. Standard Test for Loss on Heating of Oil and Asphaltic Com-
pounds 635
D 7-18. Standard Method for Making a Mechanical Analysis of Sand
or Other Fine Highway Material, except for Fine Aggregates
Used in Cement Concrete 663
D 8-18. Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Materials for
Roads and Pavements 750
D 9-15. Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Structural Timber 755
D 10-15. Standard Specifications for Ycllow-I ine Bridge and Trestle
Timbers 588
D 1 1-15. Standard Specifications for Purity of Boiled Linseed Oil from .

North American Seed 573

D 12-16. Standard Specifications for Purity of Raw Tung Oil 576
D 13-15. Standard Specifications for Turpentine 581
D 14-15. Standard Specifications for 2f-in. Cotton Rubber-Lined Fire
Hose for Private Department Use 592
D 15-15. Standard Methods for Testing of Cotton Rubber-Lined Hose 736
14 Contents.

PAGE
D 16-15. Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint Specifications 746
D 17-16. Standard Specifications for Foundry Coke 584
D 18-16. Standard Method for Making a Mechanical Analysis of
Broken Stone or Broken Slag, except for Aggregates Used
in Cement Concrete 665
D 19-16. Standard Method for Making a Mechanical Analysis of
Mixtures of Sand or Other Fine Material with Broken
Stone or Broken Slag, except for Aggregates Used in Cement
Concrete 666
D 20-18. Standard Method for Distillation of Bituminous Materials
Suitable for Road Treatment 669
D 21-16. Standard Methods for Sampling of Coal 673
D 22-16. Standard Methods for Laboratory Sampling and Analysis of
Coal 679
D 26-18. Standard Specifications for 2|, 3 and 3| in. Double-Jacketed
Cotton Rubber-Lined Fire Hose for Public Fire Depart-
ment Use 597
D 28-17. Standard Tests for Paint Thinners other than Turpentine. . . 606
D 29-17. Standard' Tests for Shellac. 610
D 30-18. Standard Test for Determination of Apparent Specific Gravity
of Coarse Aggregates 628
D 34—17. Standard Methods for Routine Analysis of White Pigments. 637.

D 35-18. Standard Form of Specifications for Certain Commercial

Grades of Broken Stone 668
D 37-18. Standard Methods for Laboratory Sampling and Analysis of
Coke 709
D 38-18. Standard Methods for Sampling and Analysis of Creosote Oil 721
D 46-18. Standard Specifications for Air-Line Hose for Pneumatic
Tools 602
D 47-18. Standard Tests for Lubricants 617
D 49-18. Standard Methods for Routine Analysis of Dry Red Lead .... 649
D 50-18. Standard Methods for Routine Analysis of Yellow, Orange,
Red and Brown Pigments Containing Iron and Manganese 655

E. Miscellaneous Subjects.

E 1-18. Standard Methods for Testing 759

 American Society for Testing Materials
Affiliated with the

International Association for Testing Materials.

GENERAL INFORMATION.

American Society for Testing Materials.

—
Purpose. The purpose of the Society is the promotion of
knowledge of the materials of engineering, and the standardiza-
tion of specifications and methods of testing.
Membership. —Membership may be held by individuals,
firms, corporations, technical or scientific societies, companies,
There are three classes of mem-
teaching faculties, and libraries.
bership: Honorary Members, Members and Junior Members.
A Junior Member must be less than thirty years of age and his
status is changed to that of Member when he attains that age.
A Junior Member is entitled to the full privileges of membership
at a reduction in dues, except that he may not hold office.

Applications for membership on behalf of others than

filed

individuals should have indicated on the same the name and

official title of the personal representative to whom the publica-
tions are to be sent, and by whom the voting privilege will be
exercised.

Meetings. —The Society holds a general meeting annually.

Additional meetings may
be held at the discretion of the Execu-
tiveCommittee, or upon the written request of twenty-five (25)
members.
Standing Committees. —The work of the Society is done
largely through its standing committees, who present reports
and recommendations at the annual meeting. One of the
most important functions of the Society is the adoption of .

(l) "Standards," which include specifications, tests, methods,

and definitions; and (2) "Recommended Practice." The
procedure involved is set forth in the Regulations Governing
Standing Committees. In general, proposed new Standards
1

'Se« p. RIO, under " Standards."

(15)
16 General Information.

or proposed changes in existing Standards are published for

one or more years in the Proceedings as Tentative Standards
before taking action towards their formal adoption. A list of
the Standards of the Society is given on pages 859-880, and of
the Tentative Standards on pages 881-887.
On committees dealing with subjects having a commercial
bearing, either an equal numeric balance is maintained between
the representatives of producing and non-producing interests, or
the latter are allowed to predominate with the acquiescence of
the former. Unattached experts are classed as representatives of
non-producing interests.
The personnel of the standing committees is given on
pages 778-829.
Publications. —From 1910 to 1916, inclusive, the Society
published its —subject to yearly
standards revision —annually
in the collective Year-Book. In 1916 it was decided
form of a
to issue the standards in collective form biennially in the even
years, instead of annually, under the general title "A.S.T.M.
Standards." The first volume under this arrangement was
issued in 1916 (752 pp.); the second (908 pp.) will appear in
1918. At the 1918 annual meeting it was decided to publish
the Book of A.S.T.M. Standards triennially instead of biennially.
The next edition following the 1918 edition will accordingly be
published in 1921.
In addition to the publication of its standards, the Society
issues annually (l) Proceedings of about 1200 pages in two
parts, which Part I contains the committee reports and
of
and Part II the technical papers presented
tentative standards,
at the annual meeting; (2) a Membership List of about 300
pages, containing also the personnel of standing committees,
lists of the standards and tentative standards, and general
information concerning the Society; and (3) circulars to mem-
bers, of which some eight or ten are issued at irregular intervals
during the year.
Every member receives the above publications by virtue of
his membership. The Proceedings and the book of A.S.T.M.
Standards are supplied in cloth binding without added charge.
They may be obtained in half-leather binding at an additional
charge of $1.00 a volume or a total added charge of $3.00.
 General Information. 17

Although all of the tentative standards appear in Part I

of the Proceedings, of which every member receives a copy,
these tentative standards are also published in a separate volume
under the title "A.S.T.M. Tentative Standards" for the con-
venience of those who desire to use them in that form. The
firstedition of this publication appeared in 1917 (358 pp.) and
the second will be issued in 1918 (about 300 pp.).
The standards andtentative standards of the Society
may be obtained in separate pamphlet form at prices depending
upon the number of copies required. (See page 888.)
The Society has also issued the following special publica-
tions, to which more detailed reference will be found on pages
889 and 891: (l) an Index of Volumes I to XII of the Pro-
ceedings; (2) the Reports from 1903 to 1914 of Committee D-l
on Preservative Coatings for Structural Materials; and (3) a
Memorial Volume commemorative of Charles B. Dudley, late
President of the Society.
The price list of all the publications of the Society is given
on pages 888-891.
Dues. —The dues per annum are $15 for Members and $7.50
for Junior Members (individuals under 30 years of age), the
fiscal year commencing on January
1. There is no initiation
fee. Life membership may
be purchased by individuals by the
payment of a sum calculated according to age under the Table
of Expectancy based upon the American Experience Table of
Mortality. Membership in perpetuity may be purchased by
corporations, firms, etc., by the payment of $300.
A person elected after six months of the fiscal year have
expired is required to pay only one-half of the annual dues,
which entitles him to a copy of the current book of A.S.T.M.
Standards but does not entitle him to a copy of the Proceedings
for that year. He may, however, exercise his privilege of paying
a full year's dues and receive the Proceedings.

International Association for Testing Materials. 1

Membership. — Members of the American Society are eligible

for membership in the International Association without other
1
Thr act? vl tie* f.f the - u ... entirely *':ij>^nded since
19!4. owi- g to
18 General Information.

formality than the filing of an application for membership and the

payment of dues. The dues are $4 per annum, the fiscal year
commencing on January 1. Life membership may be pur-
chased for thesum of $75.
—
The International Association holds Congresses
Congresses.
triennially. Thus far six such Congresses have been held. The
Sixth Congress was held in New York City in September, 1912.
The Seventh Congress, which was to have been held in Petro-
grad, August 12-17, 1915, has been indefinitely postponed pend-
ing the termination of the European war.
Publications, (a) Proceedings. —Since 1908 the Interna-
tional Association for Testing Materials has published its Pro-
ceedings in the form of pamphlets, issued at irregular intervals.
The pamphlets published between Congress years contain the
minutes of Council meetings, official communications, member-
ship lists, the personnel of technical committees, etc., while those
issued during Congress years contain committee reports and
the advance papers to be presented at the Congress. Every
member of the Association receives, by virtue of his member-
ship, all publications issued by the Association subsequent to the
date of his membership.
(b) Congress Reports. —The Proceedings of the First Con-
gress, held in Zurich in 1895; the Second Congress, held in
Stockholm in 1897; and the Third Congress, held in Budapest
in 1901, were published (in part) in French and German in the
periodical Les Materiaux de Construction {Baumaterialienkunde) ,

edited by H. Giessler, Stuttgart, 1896-1902. This publication

has been discontinued.
The English edition of the Proceedings of the Fifth Con-
gress, held in Copenhagen in 1909, is out of print.
The English editions Proceedings of the Fourth Congress,
held in Brussels in 1906, and of the Sixth Congress, held in New
York City in 1912, may be obtained from the McGraw-Hill
Book Company, 239 West Thirty-ninth Street, New York.
The publications of the Association are also printed in
German and French. Any inquiries concerning the publications
in these languages should be addressed to the International
Association for Testing Materials, 50 Nordbahnstrasse, Vienna,
Austria.
 A.S.T.M. STANDARDS
CONSISTING OF

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARD TESTS,

STANDARD METHODS, STANDARD
DEFINITIONS, RECOMMENDED
PRACTICE
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CARBON-STEEL RAILS.

Serial Designation: Al-14.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 1 ; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1901; Revised, 1907, 1908, 1909, 1914.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for phosphorus in acid steels shall be raised 0.01 per cent
above the values given in these specifications. This shall be effective during
the period of the war and until otherwise ordered by the Society.

I. INSPECTION.
Access to 1 . Inspectors representing the purchaser shall have free
Works *
entry to the works of the manufacturer at all times while the
contract is being executed, and shall have all reasonable facilities
afforded them by the manufacturer to satisfy them that the
rails have been made and loaded in accordance with the terms
of the specifications.
Place of 2. All tests and inspections shall be made at the place of
Tests.
manufacture, prior to shipment and shall be so conducted as
not to interfere unnecessarily with the operations of the mill.

II. MATERIAL.
Material. 3. The material shall be steel made by the Bessemer or

open-hearth process, as provided by the contract.

(20)
 .

Serial Designation: A 1-14. 21

III. CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS.

4. The chemical composition of each heat of the steel from Chemical
which the rails are rolled, determined as prescribed in Section Com P° B,tlon -

6, shall be within the following limits:

Bessemer Steel.

Weights, lb. per yd.

Elements Considered.
50-69, incl. 70 - 84, incl. 85- 100, incl. 101 - 120. inol

0.37-0.47 0.40-0.50 0.45-0.55 0.45-0.65

0.80-1.10 0.80-1.10 0.80-1.10 0.80-1.10
Phosphorus, max., per cent 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10
Silioon, max., per cent. . . 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20

Open-Hearth Steel.

0.50-0.63 0.53-0.66 0.62-0.75 0.62-0.75

0.60-0.90 0.60-0.90 0.60-0.90 0.60-0. 90
Phosphorus, max., per cent 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04

Silicon, max., per cent. . . . 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20

5. It is desired that the percentage of carbon in an entire Averaga

order of rails shall average as high as the mean percentage Carbon,

between the upper and lower limits specified.

6. In order to ascertain whether the chemical composition Analyses,
is in accordance with the requirements, analyses shall be fur-

nished as follows:
(a) For the Bessemer process, the manufacturer shall
furnish to the inspector, daily, carbon determinations for each
heat before the rails are shipped, and two chemical analyses
every 24 hours representing the average of the elements, carbon,
manganese, silicon, phosphorus, and sulfur contained in the
steel, one for each day and night turn respectively. These
analyses shall be made on
drillings taken from the ladle test
ingot not less than beneath the surface.
| in.
(b) For the open-hearth process the manufacturer shall

furnish the inspector with a chemical analysis of the elements,

carbon, manganese, silicon, phosphorus, and sulfur for each heat.
(c) On request of the inspector, the manufacturer shall
furnish a portion of the test ingot for check analysis.
 22 Specifications for Carbon-Steel Rails.

IV. PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS.

Physical 7. Tests shall be made to determine:
Qualities
(a) Ductility or toughness as opposed to brittleness;
(b) Soundness.
Method of 8. The physical qualities shall be determined by the drop
Testing.
test.
Drop-Testing 9. The drop-testing machine shall be the standard of the
Machine.
American Railway Engineering Association.
(a) The tup shall weigh 2000 lb., and have a striking face
with a radius of 5 in.

(b) The anvil block shall weigh 20,000 lb., and be sup-
ported on springs.
(c) The supports for the test pieces shall be a part of, or
firmly secured to, the anvil. These supports
be spaced shall
3 ft. between centers for rails 100 lb. per yd. or less in weight
and 4 ft. for rails over 100 lb. per yd. in weight. The bearing
surfaces of the supports shall have a radius of 5 in.
Pieces for 10. Drop tests shall be made on pieces of rail not less than
Drop Tests.
4 ft. and not more than 6 ft. long. These test pieces shall be
cut from the top end of the top rail of the ingot, and marked
on the base or head with gage marks 1 in. apart for 3 in. each
side of the center of the test piece, for measuring the ductility
of the metal.
Temperature of 11. The temperature of the test pieces shall be between
Test Pieces.
60 and 100° F.
Height of 12. The test piece shall ordinarily be placed head upwards
Drop.
on the supports, and be subjected to impact of the tup falling
free from the following heights:

Weight of Rail, Height of Drop,

lb. per yd. ft.

50 - 60 inclusive 15
61- 79 " 16
80- 90 " 17
91-100 " 18
101-120 " 21

Elongation or 13. (a) Under impacts, the rail under one or more blows
Ductility.
shall show at least 6 per cent elongation for one inch or 5
per cent each for two consecutive inches of the 6-in. scale,
marked as described in Section 10.
 SerialTDesignatton: A 1-14. 23

(6) A sufficient number of blows shall be given to deter-

mine the complete elongation of the test piece of at least every
fifth heat of Bessemer steel, and of one out of every three test
pieces of a heat of open-hearth steel.
14. It is desired that the permanent set after one blow Permanent Set.

under the drop test shall not exceed that in the following table,
and a record shall be made of the information:

Permanent Set, in.

(measured by middle ordinate
Weight, ! Moment of in a length of 3 ft.).
Section. lb. per yd. Inertia.
Bessemer Open-Hearth
Process. Procesa.

A.R.A. -A 100 48.94 1.65 1.45

A.R.A. -B 100 41.30 2.05 1.80

A.R.A. -A 90 38.70 1.90 1.65

A.R.A. -B 90 32.30 2.20 2.00

A.R.A. -A 80 28.80 2.85 2.45

A.R.A. -B 80 25.00 3.15 2.86
A.R.A. -A 70 21.05 3.50 a in

A.R.A. -B 70 18 60
. « . 85

15. Test pieces which do not break under the first or subse- Test to
quent blows shall be nicked and broken, to determine whether Destruction,
the interior metal is sound. The words "interior defect" in
the following sections shall be interpreted to mean seams,
laminations, cavities, or interposed foreign matter made visible
by the destruction test, saws or drills.
16. One piece shall be tested from each heat of Bessemer Besaemer-

Steel. Process Drop

Teat.
(a) If a test piece does not break at the first blow and
shows the required elongation (Section 13), all the rails of the
heat shall be accepted, provided that the test piece when broken
does not show interior defect.
(b) If, however, the test piece shows interior defect, the
other test requirements having been met, all the top rails of the

heat shall be accepted as special rails and further test shall be

made on the second rails, as described in Paragraph (d) of this
section.
(c) If the test piece breaks at the first blow or does not
 24 Specifications for Carbon-Steel Rails.

show the required elongation (Section 13), all the top rails of
the heat shall be rejected.
(d) A second test shall then be made of the test piece
selectedby the inspector from the top end of any second rail
or the bottom end of any top rail of the same heat, preferably
the same ingot. If the test piece does not break at the first
blow and shows the required elongation (Section 13), all the
remainder of the rails of the heat shall be accepted, provided
that the test piece when broken does not show interior defect.
(e) however, the test piece shows interior defect, the
If,

other test requirements having been met, all the second rails
of the heat shall be accepted as special rails and further test
shall be made on the third rails, as described in Paragraph (g)
of this section.
(/) If the test piece breaks at the first blow or does not
show the required elongation (Section the second rails
13), all
of the heat shall be rejected.
(g) A third test shall then be made of the test piece selected
by the inspector from the top end of any third rail or the bottom
end of any second rail of the same heat, preferably the same
ingot. If the test piece does not break at the first blow and
shows the required elongation (Section 13), all the remainder
of the rails of the heat shall be accepted, provided that the test
piece when broken does not show interior defect.
(h) If, however, the test piece shows interior defect, the
other test requirements having been met, all the remainder of
the rails of the heat shall be accepted as special rails.
(i) If the test piece breaks at the first blow or does not

show the required elongation (Section 13), all the remainder

of the rails of the heat shall be rejected.
Open-Hearth- Test pieces shall be selected from the second, middle
17.
Process
an(j j f u jj ^g^
as j.
f eacn open-hearth heat.

(a) If two of these test pieces do not break at the first

blow and both show the required elongation (Section 13), all
of the rails of the heat shall be accepted, provided that none
of the three test pieces when broken shows interior defect.
(b) If, however, any one of the three test pieces shows
interior defect, the other test requirements having been met,
all the top rails of the heat shall be accepted as special rails and
 Serial Designation: A 1 - 14. 25

further test shall be made on the second rails, as described in

Paragraph (d) of this section.

(c) If two of the test pieces break at the first blow or do

not show the required elongation (Section 13), all the top rails
of the heat shall be rejected.
(d) A second test shall then be made from three test pieces
selected by the inspector from the top end of any second rails

or the bottom end of any top rails of the same heat, preferably
the same ingots. If two of the test pieces do not break at the
first blow and both show the required elongation (Section 13),

all the remainder of the rails of the heat shall be accepted, pro-
vided that none of the three test pieces when broken shows
interior defect.
(e) however, any one of the three test pieces shows
If,

interior defect, the other test requirements having been met,

all the top rails of the heat shall be accepted as special rails and

further test shall be made on the third rails, as described in

Paragraph (g) of this section.
(/) If two of the test pieces break at the first blow or do
not show the required elongation (Section 13), all the second
rails of the heat shall be rejected.
(g) A
third test shall then be made from three test pieces
selected by the inspector from the top end of any third rails
or the bottom end of any second rails of the same heat, prefer-
ably the same ingots. If two of the test pieces do not break
at the first blow and both show the required elongation (Section
13), all the remainder of the rails of the heat shall be accepted,
provided that none of the test pieces when broken shows interior
defect.
(h) however, any one of the three test pieces shows
If,

interior defect, the other test requirements having been met,

all the remainder of the rails of the heat shall be accepted as
special rails.
(t) If two of the test pieces break at the first blow or do.

not show the required elongation (Section 13), all the remainder
of the rails of the heat shall be rejected.
18. No. 1 classification rails shall be free from injurious No. l Rails,

defects and flaws of all kinds.

19. (a) Rails which by reason of surface imperfections, No. 2 Raiii.
 26 Specifications for Carbon-Steel Rails.

or for causes mentioned in Section 30 hereof, are not classed

as No. 1 rails will be accepted as No. 2 rails; but No. 2 rails
which contain imperfections in such number or of such char-
acter as will, in the judgment of the inspector, render them
unfit for recognized No. 2 uses, will not be accepted for shipment.
(b) No. 2 rails to the extent of 5 per cent of the whole

order will be received. All rails accepted as No. 2 rails shall

have the ends painted white, and shall have two prick-punch
marks on the side of the web near the heat number near the end
of the rail, so placed as not to be covered by the splice bars.
Special Rails. 20. Rails accepted as special rails in accordance with
Sections 16 and 17, shall have the ends painted blue and shall
have three prick-punch marks on the side of the web near the
heat number, so placed as not to be covered by the splice bars.

V. DETAILS OF MANUFACTURE.
Quality of 21. The entire process of manufacture shall be in accord-
Manufacture.
ance with the best current state of the art.
Bled Ingots. 22. Bled ingots shall not be used.
Discard. 23. There shall be sheared from the end of the bloom,
formed from the top of the ingot, sufficient metal to secure
sound rails.

Lengths. The standard length of the rails shall be 33 ft., at a

24.
temperature of 60° F. Ten per cent of the entire order will
be accepted in shorter lengths varying by 1 ft. from 32 to 25
ft. A variation of \ in. from the specified lengths will be
allowed, except that for 15 per cent of the order a variation of
f in. from the specified lengths will be permitted. No. 1 rails
less than 33 ft. long shall have the ends painted green.
Shrinkage. 25. The number of passes and speed of the train shall be
so regulated that on leaving the rolls at the final pass the tem-
perature of the rail will not exceed that which requires a shrinkage
allowance at the hot saws, for a rail 33 ft. in length, and of
100-lb. section, of 6f in., and | in. less for each 10-lb. decrease
in section or \ in. more for each 10-lb. increase in section.
Coohng. 26. The
bars shall not be held for the purpose of reduc-
ing their temperature, nor shall any artificial means of cooling
them be used after they leave the finishing pass. Rails, while
on the cooling beds, shall be protected from snow and water.
 Serial Designation: A 1 - 14. 27

27. The section of conform as accurately as

rails shall Sections,

possible to the templet furnished by the

railroad company.
A variation in height of ^j in. less or -^ in. greater than the
specified height, and ys m m
width of flange, will be permitted;
-

but no variation shall be allowed in the dimensions affecting

the fit of the splice bars.
The weight of the rails specified in the order shall be
28. Weight,
maintained as nearly as possible, after complying with Section
27. A variation of 0.5 per cent from the calculated weight
of section, as applied to an entire order, will be allowed.
29. Rails accepted will be paid for according to actual Payment,
weights.
30. (a) The hot-straightening shall be carefully done, so straightening,

that gagging under the cold presses will be reduced to a min-

imum. Any rails coming to the straightening presses showing
sharp kinks or greater camber than that indicated by the middle
ordinate of 4 in. in 33 ft. for A. R. A. type of sections, or 5 in.
for A. S. C. E. type of sections, will be at once classed as No. 2
rails. The distance between the supports of rails in the straight-
ening presses shall not be less than 42 in. The supports shall
have flat surfaces and be out of wind.
(b) Rails heard to snap or check while being straightened

shall be at once rejected.

31. Circular holes for joint bolts shall be drilled to con- Drilling,

form to the drawing and dimensions furnished by the railroad

company. A variation of -^ m larger than the specified size
-

of holes will be allowed.

32. (a) All rails shall be smooth on the heads, straight in Finishing,

line and surface, and without any twists, waves or kinks. They
shall be sawed square at the ends, a variation of not more than

jV in. being allowed, and burrs shall be carefully removed.

(b) Rails improperly drilled or straightened, or from which
the burrs have not been removed, shall be rejected, but may be
accepted after being properly finished.
(c) When any finished rail shows interior defect at either
end, or in any drilled hole, the entire be rejected.
rail shall
33. (a) The name of the weight and
the manufacturer, Branding,
type of rail, and the month and year of manufacture, shall
be rolled in raised letters and figures on the side of the web.
 I

28 * Specifications for Carbon-Steel Rails.

The number of the heatand a letter indicating the portion of

the ingot from which the rail was made, shall be plainly stamped
on the web of each rail, where it will not be covered by the
splice bars. The top rails shall be lettered "A," and the
succeeding ones "B," "C," "D," etc., consecutively; but in case
of a top discard of 20 or more per cent, the letter "A" will be
omitted. All markings of rails shall be done so effectively that
the marks may be read as long as the rails are in service.
{b) Open-hearth rails shall be branded or stamped "0. H."

in addition to the other marks.

Separate 34. All classes of rails shall be kept separate from each
Classes.
other.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR

OPEN-HEARTH STEEL GIRDER AND HIGH TEE RAILS.

Serial Designation: A 2 - 12.
These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 2; the
finalnumber indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case
of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1912.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for phosphorus in acid steels shall be raised 0.01 per cent
above the values given in these specifications. This shall be effective during
the period of the war and until otherwise ordered by the Society.

I. MANUFACTURE.
1. The steel shall be made by the open-hearth process. Process.

The entire process of manufacture and testing shall accord

with the best current practice.
2. Bled ingots, and ingots or blooms which show the effects Bled ingots,

of injurious treatment, shall not be used.

3. A sufficient discard from the top of each ingot shall be Discard,

made at any stage of the manufacture to obtain sound rails.

When finished rails show piping, they may be cut to shorter
lengths until all evidence of this is removed.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

4. The steel shall conform to either of the following require- chemical

composition.
ments as to chemical composition, as specified in the order:
(29)
 30 Specifications for Girder and High Tee Rails.
Class A. Class B.
Carbon, per cent , 0.60-0.75 0.70-0.85
Manganese, per cent 0.60-0.90 0.60-0.90
Silicon, per cent not over 20
. not over 20
.

Phosphorus, per cent " " 0.04 " " 0.04

Ladle 5. To
determine whether the material conforms to the
Analyses.
requirements specified in Section 4, an analysis shall be made
by the manufacturer from a test ingot taken during the pouring
of each melt. Drillings for analysis shall be taken not less than
I in. beneath the surface of the test ingot. A copy of this
analysis shall be given to the purchaser or his representative.
Check 6. A check analysis may be made from time to time by
Analyses.
the purchaser from a test ingot or drillings therefrom furnished
by the manufacturer.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Drop Tests. 7. (a) The -test specimen shall be tested on a drop-test
machine recommended by the American Railway
of the type
Engineering Association. The specimen shall be placed head
upwards on the supports of the machine, and shall not break
when tested with one blow in accordance with the following
conditions:

Distance _. . .
Height of Drop.
Temperature between Weight
Weight and Height of Rail. of , Specimen, Supports, ofTup.
deg. Fahr. ft
lb.

Rails weighing over 100 lb. per yd.

and over 7 in. in depth 60 120
All other sections 60 120

The atmospheric temperature at the time of testing

(b)

shall be recorded in the test report.

(c) The testing shall proceed concurrently with the opera-

tion of the works.

Test Specimens. 8. (a) Three rails, each from the top of one of three
ingots from each melt, shall be selected by the inspector, and
a test specimen shall be taken from each of two of these.
(b) Drop test specimens shall not be less than 4 nor more

than 6 ft. in length.

Number of Tests. 9. Two drop tests shall be made from each melt.
 ;

Serial Designation: A 2 - 12. 31

10. If the result of the drop) test on only one of the two Retests.

specimens representing the a melt, does not conform

rails in

to the requirements specified in Section 7, a retest on a specimen

from the third rail selected shall be made and this shall govern
the acceptance or rejection of the rails from that melt.

IV. STANDARD SECTIONS, LENGTHS, AND WEIGHTS.

11. (a) The cold templet of the manufacturer shall con- Section,

form to the specified section as shown in detail on the drawing

of the purchaser, and shall at all times be maintained perfect.
(6) The section of the rail shall conform as accurately as
possible to the templet, and within the following tolerances:
(1) The height shall not vary more than ^j in. under nor
more than yj in. over that specified.
(2) The over-all width of head and tram shall not vary
more than | in. from that specified. Any variation
which would affect the gage line more than yj in.
will not be allowed.

(3) The width of base shall not vary more than f in. under
that specified for widths less than 6\ in.; y$ in. under
for a width of 6\ in.; and \ in. under for a width
of 7 in.
(4) Any variation which would affect the fit of the splice
bars will not be allowed.
(5) The base of the rail shall be at right angles to the web
and the convexity shall not exceed -^ hi.
(c) When necessary on account of the type of track con-

struction, and notice to that effect has been given to the manu-
facturer, special care shall be taken to maintain the proper
position of the gage line with respect to the outer edge of the
base.
12. (a) Unless otherwise specified, the lengths of rails at a Length,
temperature of 60° F. shall be 60 and 62 ft. for those sections
in which the weight per yard will permit.
(b) The lengths shall not vary more than } in. from those

specified.
(c) Shorter lengths, varying by even feet down to 40 ft.,

wilJ be accepted to the extent of 10 per cent by weight of the

entire order.
 32 Specifications for Girder and High Tee Rails.

Weight. 13. (a) The weight of the rails per yard as specified in the
order shall be maintained as nearly as possible after conform-
ing to the requirements specified in Section 11.
(b) The total weight of an order shall not vary more than
0.5 per cent from that specified.
(c) Payments shall be based on actual weights.

V. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Straightening. 14. (a) Rails on the hot beds shall be protected from water
or snow, and shall be carefully manipulated to minimize cold
straightening.
(b) The distance between the rail supports in the cold-
straightening presses shall not be less than 42 in., except as may

be necessary near, the ends of the rails. The gag shall have
rounded corners to avoid injury to the rails.
Drilling and .15. (a) Circular holes for joint bolts, bonds, and tie rods
Punching.
shall be drilled to conform to the drawings and dimensions
furnished by the purchaser.
(b) In Class Athe tie-rod holes may be punched.
rails
Milling. 16. The ends be milled square laterally and vertically,
shall
but the base may be undercut yj in.
Finish. 17. (a) Rails shall be smooth on the head, straight in line
and surface without any twists, waves, or kinks, particular
attention being given to having the ends without kinks or drop.
(b) All burrs or flow caused by drilling or sawing shall be

carefully removed.
(c) Rails shall be free from gag marks and other injurious
defects of cold-straightening.

VI. CLASSIFICATION OF RAILS.

No. 1 Rails. 18. Rails which are free from injurious defects and flaws
of all kinds shall be classed as No. 1 Rails.
No. 2 Rails. 19. (a) Rails which are rough on the head or which by
reason of surface or other imperfections are not classed as No.
1 rails, shall be classed as No. 2 rails; provided they do not,

in the judgment of the inspector, contain imperfections in such

number and of such character as to render them unfit for No. 2
rail uses, and provided they conform to the requirements speci-

fied in Section 11.

 Serial Designation: A 2-12. 33

(b) Rails which have flaws in the head exceeding \ in. in

depth, or in the base exceeding $ in. in depth, shall not be
classed as No. 2 raiis.
(c) No. 2 rails will be accepted to the extent of 10 per
cent by weight of the entire order.

VII. MARKING AND LOADING.

20. (a) The name
or brand of the manufacturer, the year Marking,
u
and month manufacture, the letters
of O. H.," the weight
of the rail, and the section number, shall be legibly rolled in
raised letters and figures on the web. The melt number shall
be legibly stamped on each rail where it will not be covered
subsequently by the joint plates.
(b) Both ends of all short-length No. 1 rails shall be painted
green.
Both ends of all No. 2 rails shall be painted white and
shallhave two heavy center-punch marks on the web at each end
at such a distance from the end that they will not be covered
subsequently by the joint plates.
21. Rails shall be loaded in the presence of the inspector,
(a) Loading,
and be handled in such a manner as not to bruise the
shall
flanges or cause other injuries.
(b) Rails of each class shall be placed together in loading.

(c) Rails shall be paired as to length before shipment.

VIII. INSPECTION.
22. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have inspection,

tree entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the material ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests and
inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to
shipment, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere un-
necessarily with the operation of the works.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
LOW-CARBON-STEEL SPLICE BARS. .

Serial Designation : A 3 - 14.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 3; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case
of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1901; Revised, 1909, 1912, 1913, 1914.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for phosphorus in acid steels shall be raised 0.01 per cent
above the values given in these specifications. This shall be effective during
the period of the war and until otherwise ordered by the Society.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 1. The steel may be made by the Bessemer, open-hearth,

or any other process approved by the purchaser.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 2. The steel shall conform to the following requirements

composition.
as tQ cnemica i composition:

,-., , [ Bessemer not over 0.10 per cent

PhOSph ° rUS '
( Open-hearth " 0.05 "

Ladle 3. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the

Analyses.
manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon, man-
ganese, phosphorus and sulfur. This analysis shall be made
from a test ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The
chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to the
(34)
 Serial Designation: A 3-14. 35

purchaser or his representative, and shall conform to the

requirements specified in Section 2.
4. An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a Check
An&lvscs
finished splice bar representing each melt. The phosphorus
content thus determined shall not exceed that specified in
Section 2 by more than 25 per cent:

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

5. The splice bars shall conform to the following require- Tension Tests,

ments as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 55 000 - 65 000

Elongation in 8 in., min., per cent 25

6. The test specimen shall bend cold through 180 deg. flat Bend Tests,

on without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.

itself
7. Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken from Test Specimens,

the finished rolled bars. Tension test specimens shall be of

8-in. gage length. Bend tests may be made of an unpunched
splice bar, flattened if necessary.
8. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from Number of Tests,
each melt.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or devel-
ops flaws, it may
be discarded and another specimen substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test speci-

men is less than that specified in Section 5 and any part of

the fracture is outside the middle third of the gage length, as
indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before
testing, a retest shall be allowed.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

9. (a) The splice bars shall be smoothly rolled, true to tern- Workmanship,
plet, and shall accurately fit the rails for which they are intended.
The bars shall be sheared to length, and the punching and
notching shall conform to the dimensions specified by the pur-
chaser. A variation of -fa from the specified size and loca-
in.

tion of holes, and of § in. from the specified length of splice

bar, will be permitted. Any variation from a straight line in
a vertical plane shall be such as will make the bars high in the
center. The maximum camber in either plane shall not exceed

tV in. in 24 in., except as specified in Paragraph (b).

 36 Specifications for Low-Carbon Splice Bars.

For splice bars for girder and high tee rails, any varia-
(b)

tion from a straight line in a vertical plane shall be such as will

make the bars high in the center, and the maximum camber
in this plane shall not exceed -^ in. in 24 in. Any variation
from a straight line in a horizontal plane shall be such as will
make the bars convex toward the web of the rail, and the maxi-
mum camber in this plane shall not exceed j3^ in. in 24 in.
Finish. 10. The finished splice bars shall be free from injurious
defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
Marking. 11. The name or brand of the manufacturer and the year
of manufacture shall be rolled in raised letters and figures on
the side of the rolled bars, and a portion of this marking shall
appear on each finished splice bar.

VI-. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 12. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
is

works which concern the manufacture of the splice bars ordered.

The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the splice bars are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests
(except check analyses) and inspection shall be made at the
place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise speci-
fied, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily
with the operation of the works.
Rejection. 13. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
tests made in accordance with Section 4 shall be reported within
five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Splice bars which show injurious defects subsequent

to their acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be re-

jected, and the manufacturer shall be notified.
Rehearing. 14. Samples tested in accordance with Section 4, which
represent rejected splice bars, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction
with the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim
for a rehearing within that time.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION FOR TESTING MATERIALS.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
MEDIUM-CARBON-STEEL SPLICE BARS.

Serial Designation : A 4- 14.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 4; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1913; Revised, 1914.

In view cf the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of "war,

the rejection limits for phosphorus in acid steels shall be raised 0.01 per cent
above the values given in these specifications. This shall be effective during
the period of the war and until otherwise ordered by the Society.

I. MANUFACTURE.
1. The steel shall be made by
the open-hearth process. Process.

2. (a) The splice bars may

be punched, slotted, and, in the Finishing,

case of special designs, shaped either hot or cold.

(b) Bars that are punched, slotted or shaped cold shall

be subsequently annealed.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements chemical
Com P° 8ition -

as to chemical composition:

Carbon not under . 30 per cent

Phosphorus not over . 04 "

4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle

nftyse8-
manufacturer to determine thehe Jpercentages of carbon, man-
(37)
 38 Specifications for Medium-Carbon Splice Bars.

ganese, phosphorus and sulfur. This analysis shall be made

from taken at least | in. beneath the surface of a test
drillings
ingot obtained during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 3.
Check 5. An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a
Analyses.
finished splice bar representing each melt. The phosphorus
content thus determined shall not exceed that specified in
Section 3 by more than 25 per cent.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 6. The splice bars shall conform to the following minimum
requirements as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 68 000

1 600 000
Elongation in -2 in., per cent
Tens. str.
but in no case under 20 per cent.

Bend Tests. 7. The bend test specimen specified in Section 8 shall bend
cold through 180 deg. around a pin the diameter of which is

equal to twice the thickness of the specimen, without cracking

on the outside of the bent portion.
Test Specimens. 8. Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken from
the finished bars. Tension test specimens shall conform to the
dimensions shown in Fig. 1. The ends shall be of a form to fit
the holders of the testing machine in such a way that the load
shall be axial. specimens may be | in. square in sec-
Bend test
tion, or rectangular in section with two parallel faces as rolled.
Optional Bend 9. If preferred by the manufacturer and approved by the
Tests.
purchaser, the following bend test may be substituted for that
described in Section 7: A piece of the finished bar shall bend
cold through 90 deg. around a pin the diameter of which is equal
to twice the greatest thickness of the section, without cracking
on the outside of the bent portion.
Number of Tests. 10. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from
each melt.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or

develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen

substituted.
 H

Serial Designation: A 4-14. 39

(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test

specimen than that specified in Section 6 and any part
is less

of the fracture is more than f in. from the center of the gage
length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen
before testing, a retest shall be allowed.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

11. (a) The splice bars shall be smoothly rolled, true to temp- Workmanship,
let, and shall accurately fit the rails for which they are intended.
The bars shall be sheared to length, and the punching and notch-
ing shall conform to the dimensions specified by the pur-

Radius
not less
k- -
tf — -K V-

'
7 1
1

[< —2 Gage Length ~

Note - The Gage Length, Parallel Portions and Fillets shall be as Shown,
but the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of
fhe Testing Machine.

Fig. 1.

chaser. A variation of -fa in. from the specified size of holes,

of tV m - fr° m the specified location of holes, and of \ in.
from the specified length of splice bar, be permitted.
will
Any variation from a straight line in a vertical plane shall be
such as will make the bars high in the center. The maximum
camber in either plane shall not exceed tV m m
- 24 in-, except as
specified in Paragraph (b).

(b) For splice bars for girder and high tee rails, any variation

from a straight line in a vertical plane shall be such as will make

the bars high in the center, and the maximum camber in this
plane shall not exceed -fc in. in 24 in. Any variation from a
straight line in a horizontal plane shall be such as will make
 40 Specifications for Medium-Carbon Splice Bars.

the bars convex toward the web of the rail, and the maximum
camber in this plane shall not exceed tV 24 in.m m
-

Finish. 12. The finished splice bars shall be free from injurious
defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
Marking. i3. The name or brand of the manufacturer and the year
of manufacture shall be rolled in raised letters and figures on
the side of the rolled bars, and a portion of this marking shall
appear on each finished splice bar.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION,

inspection. 14. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free
entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
is being performed, toall parts of the manufacturer's works

which concern the manufacture of the splice bars ordered. The

manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reason-
able facilities to satisfy him that the splice bars are being fur-
nished in accordance with these specifications. All tests (except
check analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place of
manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and
shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operation of the works.
Rejection. 15. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
tests made in accordance with Section 5 shall be reported
within five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Splice bars which show injurious defects subsequent to

their acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected,

and the manufacturer shall be notified.
Rehearing. 16. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which
represent rejected splice bars, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for
a rehearing within that time.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
HIGH-CARBON-STEEL SPLICE BARS.

Serial Designation: A 5 - 14.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 5 ; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1913; Revised, 1914.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for phosphorus in acid steels shall be raised 0.01 per cent
above the values given in these specifications. This shall be effective during
the period of the war and until otherwise ordered by the Society.

I. MANUFACTURE.
1. The steel shall be made by
the open-hearth process. Process.
2. The be punched, slotted and, in the
splice bars shall Finishing,

case of special designs, shaped at a temperature not less than

750° C.
II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.
3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements as Chemical
omposi ion
to chemical composition:

Carbon not under . 45 per cent

Phosphorus not over . 04

4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle

na y8es *
manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon, man-
ganese, phosphorus and sulfur. This analysis shall be made
from drillings taken at least | in. beneath the surface of a test
(41)
 42 Specifications for High-Carbon Splice Bars.

ingot obtained during the pouring of the melt. The chemical

composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 3.
Check 5. An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a
Analyses. The phosphorus
finished splice bar representing each melt.
content thus determined shall not exceed that specified in
Section 3 by more than 25 per cent.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 6. The splice bars shall conform to the following minimum
requirements as to tensile properties:
Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 85 000
Elongation in 2 in., per cent • 14

Bend Tests. 7. The bend test specimen specified in Section 8 shall bend
cold through 90 deg. around a pin the diameter of which is

equal to three times the thickness of the specimen, without

cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
Test Specimens. 8. Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken from

the finished bars. Tension test specimens shall conform to

the dimensions shown in Fig. 1. The ends shall be of a form
to fit the holders of the testing machine in such a way that the
load shall be axial. Bend test specimens may be \ in. square in
section, or rectangular in section with two parallel faces as rolled.
Optional Bend 9. If preferred by the manufacturer and approved by the
Tests.
purchaser, the following bend test may be substituted for that
described in Section 7: A piece of the finished bar shall bend
cold through 45 deg. around a pin the diameter of which is equal
to three times the greatest thickness of the section, without
cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
Number of Tests. 10. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from
each melt
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or
develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test speci-
men is less than that specified in Section 6 and any part of
the fracture is more than f in. from the center of the gage length,
 Serial Designation: A 5-14. 43

as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before

testing, a retest shall be allowed.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

11. (a) The splice bars shall be smoothly rolled, true to Workmanship,
templet, and shall accurately fit which they are
the rails for
intended. The bars shall be sheared to length, and the punching
and notching shall conform to the dimensions specified by the
purchaser. A variation of ^2 in. from the specified size of holes,
of xg- in. from the specified location of holes, and of | in. from the
specified length of splice bar, will be permitted. Any variation
Radius
not less
than a -
2-

(< —2 Gage Length-->{

Note - The Gage length, Parallel Portions and Fillets shall be as Shown,
but Ihe Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of

the Testing Machine.

Fig. 1.

from a straight line in a vertical plane shall be such as will make

the bars high in the center. The maximum camber in either
plane shall not exceed tV in- in 24 in., except as specified in

Paragraph (6).
(b) For splice bars for girder and high tee rails, any varia-

tion from a straight line in a vertical plane shall be such as will

make the bars high in the center, and the maximum camber
in thisplane shall not exceed in. in 24 in.^ Any variation
from a straight line in a horizontal plane shall be such as will
make the bars convex toward the web of the rail, and the maxi-
mum camber in this plane shall not exceed tV in. in 24 in.
12. The finished splice bars shall be free from injurious Finish,

defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.

 44 Specifications for High-Carbon Splice Bars.

V. MARKING.
Marking. 13. The name or brand of the manufacturer and the year
of manufacture shall be rolled in raised letters and figures on
the side of the rolled bars, and a portion of this marking shall
appear on each finished splice bar.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 14. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free
entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works
which concern the manufacture of the splice bars ordered. The
manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reason-
able facilities to satisfy him that the splice bars are being fur-
nished in accordance with these specifications. All tests (except
check analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place of
manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and
shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operation of the works
Rejection. 15. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
tests made in accordance with Section 5 shall be reported
within five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Splice bars which show injurious defects subsequent to

their acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected,

and the manufacturer shall be notified.
Rehearing. 16. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which
represent rejected splice bars, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for
a rehearing within that time.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
EXTRA-HIGH-CARBON-STEEL SPLICE BARS.

Serial Designation : A 6-14.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 6; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1913; Revised, 1914.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for phosphorus in acid steels shall be raised 0.01 per cent
above the values given in these specifications. This shall be effective during
the period of the war and until otherwise ordered by the Society.

I. MANUFACTURE.
1. The be made by the open-hearth process.
steel shall Process.

2. The
splice bars shall be punched, slotted, sheared and, Finishing,

in the case of special designs, shaped at a temperature not less

than 750° C; except that bars may be cold-sawed to length.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. The steel shall conform to the following requirement as Chemical
Composition.
tO Chemical Composition:

Phosphorus not over 0.04 per cent

4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle

nayses -

manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon, man-

ganese, phosphorus and sulfur. This analysis shall be made
(45)
 46 Specifications for Extra-High- Carbon Splice Bars.

from drillings taken at least £

beneath the surface of a test
in.
ingot obtained during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirement
specified in Section 3.
Check
Analyses.
5. An analysis may
be made by the purchaser from a
finished splice bar representing each melt.The phosphorus
content thus determined shall not exceed that specified in
Section 3 by more than 25 per cent.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 6. The splice bars shall conform to the following minimum
requirements as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 100 000

Elongation in 2 in., per cent 10

Bend Tests. 7. The bend' test specimen specified in Section 8 shall bend
cold through 60 deg. around a pin the diameter of which is equal
to three times the thickness of the specimen, without cracking
on the outside of the bent portion.
Test Specimens, 8. Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken from

the finished bars. Tension test specimens shall conform to

the dimensions shown in Fig. 1 The ends shall be of a form to
.

fit the holders of the testing machine in such a way that the load

shall be axial. Bend test specimens may be \ in. square in

section, or rectangular in section with two parallel faces as rolled.
Optional Bend 9. If preferred by the manufacturer and approved by the
Tests.
purchaser, the following bend test may be substituted for that
described in Section 7: A piece of the finished bar shall bend
cold through 30 deg. around a pin the diameter of which is equal
to three times the greatest thickness of the section, without
cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
Number of Tests. 10. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from
each melt.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or

develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen

substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test speci-
men is less than that specified in Section 6 and any part of
 — A

Ser!al Designation: A 6-14. 47

the fracture more than £ in. from the center of the gage length,
is

as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before

testing, a retest shall be allowed.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

11. (a) The splice bars shall be smoothly rolled, true to Workmanship,
templet, and shall accurately fit the rails for which they are
intended. The bars
shall be sheared to length, and the punching
and notching conform to the dimensions specified by the
shall
purchaser. A variation of yj in. from the specified size of holes,
of yV in. from the specified location of holes, and of £ in. from the

Radius
not less
than ^-. k- H'~~ >i

(tl
— "
)'

<
T I
1
1

\<-—2"C'je Length —

Note •- The Gagelength, Parallel Portions and Fillers shall be as Shown,

but the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of
the Testing Machine.
Fig. 1.

specified length of splice bar, will be permitted. Any variation

from a straight line in a vertical plane shall be such as will make
the bars high in the center. The maximum camber in either
plane shall not exceed ye m - * n 24 in., except as specified in Para-
graph (b).

(b) For splice bars for girder and high tee rails, any varia-
tion from a straight line in a vertical plane shall be such as will
make the bars high in the center, and the maximum camber
in this plane shall not exceed ^
Any variation from
in. in 24 in.

a straight line in a horizontal plane shall be such as will make

the bars convex toward the web of the rail, and the maximum
camber in this plane shall not exceed tV in. in 24 in.

12. The finished splice bars shall be free from injurious FinUh.
defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.
 48 Specifications for Extra-High- Carbon Splice Bars.

V. MARKING.
Marking. 13, Xhe name or brand of the manufacturer and the year
of manufacture shall be rolled in raised letters and figures on
the side of the rolled bars, and a portion of this marking shall
appear on each finished splice bar.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 14. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the splice bars ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the splice bars are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests
(except check analyses) and inspection shall be made at the
place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise speci-
fied, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily

with the operation of the works.

Rejection. 15. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
tests made in accordance with Section 5 shall be reported within
five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Splice bars which show injurious defects subsequent

to their acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected,

and the manufacturer shall be notified.
Rehearing. 16. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which
represent rejected splice bars, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for
a rehearing within that time.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association tor Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
QUENCHED HIGH-CARBON-STEEL SPLICE BARS.

Serial Designation: A 49-15.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 49; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for phosphorus in acid steels shall be raised 0.01 per cent
above the values given in these specifications. This shall be effective during
the period of the war and until otherwise ordered by the Society.

I. MANUFACTURE.
1. The steel shall be made by
the open-hearth process. Process.
2. The be punched, slotted and, in the case Finishing and
splice bars shall
of special designs, shaped at a temperature not less than Heat Treatment
750° C, and subsequently quenched.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements as Chemical
Composition.
to Chemical Composition:

Carbon not over 0. 60 per cent

Manganese " " 0.80 "
Phosphorus " " 0.04

4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle Analyses,

manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon, man-
 :

50 Specifications for Quenched Splice Bars.

ganese, phosphorus and sulfur. This analysis shall be made

from taken at least | in. beneath the surface of a test
drillings
ingot obtained during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 3.
Check Analyses. 5. An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a
finished splice bar representing each melt. The phosphorus
content thus determined shall not exceed that specified in
Section 3 by more than 25 per cent.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 6. (a) The splice bars shall conform to the following mini-
mum requirements as to tensile properties
Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 100 000
Yield point, " 65 000
Elongation in 2 in., per cent 10

(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam of the testing machine.
Bend Tests. 7. The bend test specimen specified in Section 8 shall bend
cold through 90 deg. around a pin the diameter of which is equal
to three times the thickness of the specimen, without cracking
on the outside of the bent portion.
Test Specimens. 8. Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken from

the finished bars. Tension test specimens shall conform to the

dimensions shown in Fig. 1. The ends shall be of a form to fit
the holders of the testing machine in such a way that the load
shall be axial. Bend test specimens may be £ in. square in
section, or rectangular in section with two parallel faces as
rolled, with corners rounded to a radius not over tV m -

Optional Bend 9. If preferred by the manufacturer and approved by the

Tests.
purchaser, the following bend test may be substituted for that
described in Section 7 A piece of the finished bar shall bend
:

cold through 45 deg. around a pin the diameter of which is

equal to three times the greatest thickness of the section, with-
out cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
Number of Tests. 10. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from
each melt.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or
 Serial Designation: A 49-15. 51

develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen sub-

stituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
specimen than that specified in Section 6 and any part
is less

of the fracture is more than f in. from the center of the gage
length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen
before testing, a retest shall be allowed.
11. If the results of the physical tests of any test lot do not Retests.

conform to the requirements specified, the manufacturer may

re-treat such lot one or more times and retests shall be made as
specified in Section 10.

Radius
not less
i"
than a -
r " 24

2 Gage Length — H

Note-- The Gagelength, Parallel Portions and Fillets shall be as Shown,

but the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of
the Testing Machine.

Fig. 1.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

12. The splice bars shall be smoothly rolled, true to templet, Workmanship,
and shall accurately fit the rails for which they are intended.
The bars shall be sheared to length, and the punching and notch-
ing shall conform to the dimensions specified by the purchaser.
A variation of -^ in. from the specified size of holes, of ^ in. from
the specified location of holes, and of £ in. from the specified
length of splice bar, will be permitted. Any variation from a
straight fine in a vertical plane shall be such as will make the bars
high in the center. The maximum camber in either plane shall
not exceed tV in. in 24 in.

13. The finished splice bars shall be free from injurious Finish,

defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.

 52 Specifications for Quenched Splice Bars.

V. MARKING.
Marking. 14. The nameor brand of the manufacturer and the year of
manufacture be rolled in raised letters and figures on the
shall
side of the rolled bars, and a portion of this marking shall appear
on each finished splice bat.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 15. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free
entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works
which concern the manufacture of the splice bars ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the splice bars are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests
(except check analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place
of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified,
and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with
the operation of the works.
Rejection. 16. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
tests made in accordance with Section 5 shall be reported within
five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Splice bars which show injurious defects subsequent to

their acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected,

and the manufacturer shall be notified.
Rehearing. 17. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which
represent rejected splice bars, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 :

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
QUENCHED CARBON-STEEL TRACK BOLTS.

Serial Designation: A 50-16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 50; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915; Revised, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for phosphorus in acid steels shall be raised 0.01 per cent
above the values given in these specifications. This shall be effective during
the period of the war and until otherwise ordered by the Society.

I. MANUFACTURE.
1. (a) The steel for the bolts shall be made by the open- Process,
hearth process.
(b) The steel for the nuts shall be made by the Bessemer or
open-hearth process.
2. The bolts shall enter the quenching medium at a temper- Finishing and
ature not less than 790° C. The threads may be rolled either Heat Treatment,
hot or cold.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. The steel for the bolts shall conform to the following chemical
requirements as to chemical composition Composition.

Carbon not under .30 per cent

Phosphorus not over 0.04
(S3)
 54 Specifications for Carbon-Steel Track Bolts.

Ladle Analyses. 4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the

manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon, man-

ganese, phosphorus and sulfur. This analysis shall be made
from drillings taken at least | in. beneath the surface of a test
ingot obtained during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 3.
Check Analyses. 5. An analysis may
be made by the purchaser from a
finished bolt representing each melt. The phosphorus content
thus determined shall not exceed that specified in Section 3 by
more than 25 per cent.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 6. (a) The bolts shall conform to the following minimum
requirements as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 100 000

Yield point, " " 70 000
Elongation in 2 in., per cent 12

(b) Nuts shall be capable of developing the strength of the

finished bolt up to its yield point.
(c) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the
beam of the testing machine.
Bend Tests. 7. Full-size bolts shall bend cold through 45 deg. around a
pin the diameter of which equal to the diameter of the bolt,
is

without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.

Test Specimens. 8-. Tension test specimens shall be taken from the finished

bolts and shall conform to the dimensions shown in Fig. 1.

The ends shall be of a form to fit the holders of the testing
machine in such a way that the load shall be axial.
Number of Tests. 9. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from

each lot of 50 kegs or fraction thereof.

(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or

develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen

substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
specimen is less than that specified in Section 6 (a) and any part
of the fracture more than £ in. from the center of the gage
is

length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen

 Serial Designation: A 50-16. 55

before testing, or if the bend test specimen breaks in the threaded

portion, a retest shall be allowed.
10. If the results of the physical tests of any test lot do not Retests

conform to the requirements specified, two additional tension

and two additional bend tests shall be made from such lot, all of
which shall conform to the requirements specified.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

The bolts and nuts shall conform to the dimensions

11. Workmanship,
specified by the purchaser. They shall be neatly formed, free
from fins or nickings. The head shall be concentric with, and
Radius
not less 1

than g- -. k~- ^4
\ i 1

l>

T \ f i

i
i
>

k- 2 Gage Length -H
-

Note - The GageLength, Parallel Portions and Fillets shall be as Shown,

but the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of
the Testing Machine.

Fig. 1.

firmly joined to, the body of the bolt, with the under side of
the head at right angles to the body of the bolt. The threads
shall be sharp and true to gage and of the pattern specified by
the purchaser. The nuts shall fit the bolts tightly so as to
require a wrench not more than 10 in. in length to turn them down
without distorting the threads or twisting the bolts. The nuts
shall be screwed on before shipping, a sufficient number of turns
to hold them on to destination. A variation of under and ^m -

^j in. over the specified diameter of the body of the bolt will be
permitted. The diameter of the rolled threads shall not exceed the
diameter of the body of the bolt more than tV m f° r l" m bolts - -

and &in. for 1-in. bolts. The length of the bolt under the
head shall not vary more than \ in. from that specified. A
 56 Specifications for Carbon-Steel Track Bolts.

variation in the dimensions of the elliptical shoulders under the

head of the bolt of £$ in. from the specified size will be per-
mitted. A taper of the shoulder of ^ in. will be permitted.
Finish. 12. The finished bolts and nuts shall be free from injurious
defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
Marking. 13. A letter or brand indicating the manufacturer shall be
pressed on the head of the bolt when it is formed.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 14. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free
entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser is
being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works which
concern the manufacture of the bolts and nuts ordered. The
manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reason-
able facilities to satisfy him that the bolts and nuts are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests
(except check analyses) and inspection shall be made at the
place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified,
and shall be so conducted as to not interfere unnecessarily with
the operation of the works.
Rejection. 15. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
tests made in accordancewith Section 5 shall be reported within
five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Bolts and nuts which show injurious defects subsequent

to their acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected,

and the manufacturer shall be notified.
Rehearing. 16. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which
represent rejected bolts and nuts, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
QUENCHED ALLOY-STEEL TRACK BOLTS.

Serial Designation : A 5 1 - 16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 51; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915; Revised, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

be rejection limits for phosphorus in acid steels shall be raised 0.01 per cent
above the values given in these specifications. This shall be effective during
the period of the war end until otherwise ordered by the Society.

I. MANUFACTURE.
1. (a) The steel for the bolts shall be made by the open- Process,

hearth or electric process.

(b) The steel for the nuts shall be made by the Bessemer
or open-hearth process.
2. The bolts shall enter the quenching medium at a tern- Finishing and
Heat Treatirem
perature of not less than 790° C. The threads may be rolled -

either hot or cold.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. The steel for the bolls shall conform to the following Chemical
Composition.
requirement as to chemical composition :

Phosphorus not over 0.035 per cent.

4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle Analyses,

manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon, man-
(57)
 58 Specifications for Alloy-Steel Track Bolts.

ganese, phosphorus and sulfur, and any other elements used to

obtain the physical properties specified in Sections 6 and 7.
This analysis shall be made from drillings taken at least § in.
beneath the surface of a test ingot obtained during the pouring
of the melt. The chemical composition thus determined shall
be reported to the purchaser or his representative, and shall
conform to the requirement specified in Section 3.
Check Analyses. 5. An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a

finished bolt representing each melt. The phosphorus content

thus determined shall not exceed that specified in Section 3 by
more than 25 per cent.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 6. (a) The bolts shall conform to the following minimum
requirements as to tensile properties:
Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 110 000
" "
Yield point,, 85 000
Elongation in 2 in., per cent 12

(b) Nuts shall be capable of developing the full strength

of the finished bolt up to its yield point.
(c) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the
beam of the testing machine.
Bend Tests. 7. Full-size bolts shall bend cold through 90 deg. around
a pin the diameter of which is equal to the diameter of the bolt,

without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.

Test Specimens. 8. Tension test specimens shall be taken from the finished

bolts and shall conform to the dimensions shown in Fig. 1. The

ends shall be of a form to fit the holders of the testing machine
insuch a way that the load shall be axial.
Number of Tests. 9. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from

each lot of 50 kegs or fraction thereof.

(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or
develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
specimen is less than that specified in Section 6 (a) and any
part of the fracture is more than f in. from the center of the

gage length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the

specimen before testing, or if the bend test specimen breaks in
the threaded portion, a retest shall be allowed.
 Serial Designation: A 51-16. 59

10. If the results of the physical tests of any test lot do not Retests.

conform to the requirements specified, two additional tension

and two additional bend tests shall be made from such lot, all
of which shall conform to the requirements specified.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

The bolts and nuts shall conform to the dimensions
11. Workmanship,
specified by the purchaser. They shall be neatly formed, free
from fins or nickings. The head shall be concentric with, and
firmly joined to, the body of the bolt, with the under side of
the head at right angles to the body of the bolt. The threads
shall be sharp and true to gage and of the pattern specified by

Radius
not less 1

2-/
than j--. >,
i

. i 1

_b

"\
r ;

2 Gage Length— >\

Note - The Gage Length, Parallel Portions and Fillets shall be as Shown,
bul the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of
the Testing Machine.

Fig. 1.

the purchaser. The nuts shall fit the bolts tightly so as to

require a wrench not more than 10 in. in length to turn them
down without distorting the threads or twisting the bolts. The
nuts shall be screwed on before shipping, a sufficient number
of turns to hold them on to destination. A variation of 3V in.
under and ^j in. over the specified diameter of the body of the
bolt will be permitted. The diameter of the rolled threads shall
not exceed the diameter of the body of the bolt more than
3^ in. for \-m. bolts and 332 in. for 1-in. bolts. The lenglh of
the bolt under the head shall not vary more than \ in. from that
specified. A variation in the dimensions of the elliptical
shoulders under the head of the bolt of 3^ in. from the sped-
 60 Specifications tor Alloy-Steel Track Bolts.

fied size will be permitted. A taper of the shoulder of -fa in.

will be permitted.
Finish. 12. The finished bolts and nuts shall be free from injurious
defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
Marking. 13. A letter or brand indicating the manufacturer shall be
pressed on the head of the bolt when it is formed.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 14, The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the bolts and nuts
ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of
cost, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the bolts and
nuts are being furnished in accordance with these specifications.
All tests (except check analyses) and inspection shall be made
at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise
specified,and shall be so conducted as to not interfere unneces-
sarily with the operation of the works.
Rejection. 15. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
tests made in accordance with Section 5 shall be reported within
five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Bolts and nuts which show injurious defects subsequent

to their acceptance at tne manufacturer's works will be rejected,

and the manufacturer shall be notified.
Rehearing. 16. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which
represent rejected bolts and nuts, shall be preserved for two
weeks from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction
with the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim
for a rehearing within that time.
AMExRICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
STEEL TRACK SPIKES.

Serial Designation: A 65 - 18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 65; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1916; Adopted, 1918.

I. MANUFACTURE.
1. The steel may be made by the Bessemer or open-hearth process,
process.

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

2. The full-size finished spikes, or the full-size bars from Tension Tests
which the spikes are made, shall conform to the following
minimum requirements as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 55 000

Yield point, lb. per sq. in 0.5 tens. sir.
Elongation in 2 in., per cent 25

3. (a) The body of the full-size finished spikes shall bend Bend Tests,
cold through 180 deg. flat on itself, without cracking on the
outside of the bent portion.
(b) The head of the full-size finished spikes shall bend
backward to the line of the face of the spike, without cracking
on the outside of the bent portion.
 62 Specifications for Track Spikes.

Numbtr of Teit«. 4. (a) One tension and one bend test of each kind shall be
made from each lot of 10 tons or fraction thereof.
(b) If any test specimen develops flaws, it may be discarded

and another specimen substituted.

R«t««u. 5. If any tension test specimen breaks more than J in.
from the center of the gage length, a retest shall be allowed.

III. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Workmanship. 6. The spikes shall conform to the dimensions specified

by the purchaser. A variation of £% in. under the specified

dimension of the body of the spike, measured from the face to
the back, and a variation of ^2 m over the specified dimension
-

of the body of the spike, measured across the face, will be per-
mitted. A variation of ^
in. over and £$ in. under the specified

dimensions of the head of the spike will be permitted. A varia-

tion of I in. from the specified length of the spike, measured
from the under side of the head to the point, will be permitted.
A variation of 1 deg. in the specified angle of the under side
of the head of the spike will be permitted.
Finish. 7. The finished spikes shall be free from injurious defects

and shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 8. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
is

works which concern the manufacture of the spikes ordered.

The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the spikes are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests
and inspection be made at the place of manufacture prior
shall
to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so con-
ducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of
the works.
Rejection. 9. Spikes which show injurious defects subsequent to their

acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected, and

the manufacturer shall be notified.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
STEEL SCREW SPIKES.

Serial Designation: A 66 - 18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 66; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1916; Adopted, 1918.

I. MANUFACTURE.
1. The steel may be made by the Bessemer or open-hearth Process,

process.
2. The heads of the spikes shall be formed and the threads Finishing,

rolled at a temperature not less than 750° C.

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. The full-size finished spikes shall conform to the follow- Tension Tests,

ing minimum requirements as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 60 000
Yield point, lb. per sq. in 0.5 tens. str.
Elongation in 2 in., per cent 20

4. The full-size finished spikes shall bend cold through Bend Tests.

90 deg. around a pin the diameter of which is equal to three

times the diameter of the spike, without cracking on the outside
of the bent portion.
5. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from Number of Tests,
each lot of 100 kegs or fraction thereof.
(63)
 64 Specifications for Screw Spikes.

(b) If any spike tested develops flaws, it may be discarded

and another spike substituted.
Retesta. 6. (a) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test spike
is less than that specified in Section 3, a retest shall be allowed.
(b) If any tension test spike breaks more than f in. from

the center of the gage length, a retest shall be allowed.

III. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Workmanship. 7. The spikes shall conform to the dimensions specified by
the purchaser. The head be concentric with, and firmly
shall
joined to, the body of the spike. The threads shall be sharp
and true to gage and of the pattern specified by the purchaser.
A variation of ^
in. over and under the specified diameter of

the unthreaded portion of the body of the spike will be per-

mitted. A variation of -^ in. over the specified diameter of the
threaded portion of the spike will be permitted. A variation
of j% in. under' and £ in. over in the reach of the head of the
spike will be permitted. A variation of i in. from the specified
length of the spike will be permitted.
Finish. 8. The finished spikes shall be free from injurious defects

and shall have a workmanlike finish.

IV. MARKING.
Marking. 9. A letter or brand indicating the manufacturer shall be
pressed on the head of the spike while it is being formed.

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 10. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
is

works which concern the manufacture of the spikes ordered.

The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the spikes are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests
and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to
shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted
as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
Rejection. 11. Spikes which show injurious defects subsequent to
their acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected..

and the manufacturer shall be notified.

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BRIDGES.
Serial Designation: A 7-16.
These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 7; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1901; Revised, 1905, 1909, 1913, 1914, 1915, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

1. The Standard Specifications for Steel Castings (Serial steel Castings.

Designation: A 27),
adopted by the American Society for
Testing Materials, shall govern the purchase of steel castings
for bridges. Unless otherwise specified, Class B castings,
medium grade, shall be used.

I. MANUFACTURE.
2. The steel shall be made by the open-hearth process Process.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements chemical
as tO Chemical Composition: Composition.

Structural Stkbl. Rivet Steel.

nu ,
J Acid not over 0.06 not over 0.04 per cent
Phosphorus
F < _ .
,, „ - „ „
l
,,
\ Basic 0.04 0.04
Sulfur " " 0.05 " " 0.045 "
 .

66 Specifications for Steel for Bridges.

Ladle 4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the

Analyses.
manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon, man-
ganese, phosphorus and sulfur. This analysis shall be made
from a test ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The
chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to the
purchaser or his representative, and shall conform to the
requirements specified in Section 3
Check 5. Analyses may
be made by the purchaser from finished
Analyses.
material representing each melt. The phosphorus and sulfur
content thus determined shall no exceed that specified in
Section 3 by more than 25 per cent.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 6. (a) The material shall conform to the following require-
ments as to tensile properties:

Properties Considered. Structural Rivet •

Steel. Steel.

55 000 - 65 000a 46 000 - 56 000

0.5 tens. str.

1 500 0006 1 500 000

Tens. str. Tens. str.

22

o See Paragraph (b).

b See Section 7.

(b) In order to meet the required minimum tensile strength

of full-size annealed eyebars, the purchaser may determine the
tensile strength to be obtained in specimen tests; the range shall
not exceed M,000 lb. per sq. in., and the maximum shall not
exceed 74,000 lb. per sq. in. The material shall conform to the
requirements as to physical properties other than that of tensile
strength, specified in Sections 6, 7 and 8(b).
(c)The yield point shall be determined by the drop of
the beam of the testing machine.
Modifications in 7. For structural steel over £ in. in thickness, a deduc-
(a)
Elongation.
tion of from the percentage of elongation in 8 in. specified in
1

Section 6 (a) shall be made for each increase of | in. in thick-

ness above f in., to a minimum of 18 per cent.
(b) For structural steel under ^
in. in thickness, a deduc-

tion of 2.5 from the percentage of elongation in 8 in. specified

 ) A '

Serial Designation: A 7 - 16. 67

in Section 6 (a) shall be made for each decrease of tV m - U1

thickness below x\ in.

8. (<z) The
specimen for plates, shapes, and bars, except Bend
test Tests,

as specified in Paragraphs (b),(c) and (d), shall bend cold through

180 deg. without cracking on the outside of the bent portion,

as follows: For material f in. or under in thickness, flat on
itself; for material over f in. to and including l\ in. in thick-

ness, around a pin the diameter of which is equal to the thick-

ness of the specimen; and for material over lj in. in thickness,
around a pin the diameter of which is equal to twice the
thickness of the specimen.
(b) The test specimen for eyebar flats shall bend cold

A i

,*?#: {Parallel Section} |

f<~—About 3"~M \J& f\not

I

less than 9'y\

—Y~
About 2

l<i"+f- /">!< etc.^i'y,

| |

|
I k 3"—
k About Id" — >|

Fig. 1.

through 180 deg. without cracking on the outside of the bent

portion as follows: For material f in. or under in thickness,
around a pin the diameter of which is equal to the thickness of
the specimen; for material over f in. to and including \\ in
in thickness, around a pin the diameter of which is equal to twice
the thickness of the specimen; and for material over l£ in. in
thickness, around a pin the diameter of which is equal to three
times the thickness of the specimen.
(c) The test specimen for pins, rollers and other bars,
when prepared as specified in Section 9 (c), shall bend cold through
180 deg. around a 1-in. pin without cracking on the outside of
the bent portion.
(d The test specimen for rivet steel shall bend cold through
 68 Specifications for Steel for Bridges.

180 deg. flat on itself without cracking on the outside of the bent
portion.
Test Specimens 9. Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken from
(a)
rolled steel in the condition in which it comes from the rolls,
except as specified in Paragraph (b).
(b) Tension and bend test specimens for pins and rollers

shall be taken from the finished bars, after annealing when anneal-
ing is specified.
(c) Tension and bend testspecimens for plates, shapes and
bars, except as specified in Paragraphs (d), (e) and (/), shall be
of the full thickness of material as rolled. They may be machined
Radius .

not less

,
"}

r
T I
i

p£ —2 Gaas Length

Note - The Gagelength, Parallel Portions and Fillets shall be as Shown,

bui the Ends may be ofany Form which will Fit the Holders of
the Testing Mach

Fig. 2.

to the form and dimensions shown in Fig. 1, or with both edges

parallel; except that bend test specimens for eyebars fiats may
have three rolled sides.
(d) Tension and bend test specimens for plates, and tension
test specimens for eyebar flats, over 1? in. in thickness may
be machined to a thickness or diameter of at least f in. for a
length of at least 9 in.

Tension test specimens for pins, rollers and bars (except

(e)

eyebar flats) over Hin. in thickness or diameter may conform to

the dimensions shown in Fig. 2. In this case, the ends shall be
of a form to fit the holders of the testing machine in such a way
that the load shall be axial. Bend test specimens may be
1 by \ in. in section. The axis of the specimen shall be located
 .

Serial Designation: A 7 - 16. 69

at any point midway between the center and surface and shall
be parallel to the axis of the bar.
(/) Tension and bend test specimens for rivet steel shall
be of the full-size section of bars as rolled.
10. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from Number of Tests,
each melt; except that material from one melt differs § in. or
if

more in thickness, one tension and one bend test shall be made
from both the thickest and the thinnest material rolled.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or devel-

ops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen substituted.

(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test

specimen is less than that specified in Section 6(a) and any part
of the fracture is more than f in. from the center of the gage
length of a 2-in. specimen or is outside the middle third of the
gage length of an 8-in. specimen, as indicated by scribe scratches
marked on the specimen before testing, a retest shall be allowed.

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WEIGHT AND THICKNESS.

1 1 The cross-section or weight of each piece of steel shall not Permissible
vary more than 2.5 per cent from that specified; except in the
case of sheared plates, which shall be covered by the following
permissible variations. One cubic inch of rolled steel is assumed
to weigh 0.2833 lb.
(a) When Ordered to Weight per Square Foot: The weight
of each lot 1 in each shipment shall not vary from the weight
ordered more than the amount given in Table I.
When Ordered to Thickness: The thickness of each plate
(b)

shallnot vary more than 0.01 in. under that ordered.

The overweight of each lot 2 in each shipment shall not
exceed the amount given in Table II.

V. FINISH.

12. The finished material shall be free from injurious defects Finish,
and shall have a workmanlike finish.

•The term "lot" applied to Table I means all of the plates of each group width and
group weight.
2
The term "lot" applied to Table II means all of the platej of each group width and
group thicknem.
 ——

70 Specifications for Steel for Bridges.

Table I. Permissible Variations of Plates Ordered to Weight.

Permissible Variations in Average Weights per Square

Foot op Plates for Widths Given,
Expressed in Percentages of Ordered Weiqht3

Ordered 48 to 00 to 72 to 84 to 96 to 10S to 120 to Ordered

| 132 in.
Weight, Under 60 in., 72 84 in., 96 in., 108 in., 120 in., 132 in., Weight,
in., or
lb. pek 8q. ft. 48 in.
excl. excl. excl. lb. per bq. ft.
excl. |
excl. excl. excl. over.

Under.

si
>
Under.

>>
o -3
>
-3
a > a i •o
a
aa
o>
Over.
13 a > a >
O o 3 O o o O 3 O 3
Under 5 5 3 5.5 3 6-3 7 3

5 to 7.5 excl 4.5 3 5 3 5.53 6 3

7.5 " 10 " 4 3 4.53 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 7.5 " 10 "

10 " 12.5 " 3 5 2.5 4 3 4.53 5 3 5 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 " 12.5 "

12.5 " 15 " 3 2.5 3.5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3 12.5 " 15 "
,5 8 3

15 " 17.5 " 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5 5 3 6 3 7 3 15 " 17.5 "

2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2 53.5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 17.5 " 20 "

25 " 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 20 " 25 "

25 ' 30 " 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 25 " 30 '•

30 " 40 " 2 2" 2 2 2 1 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 4 3 4.5 3 30 " 40 '

40 or over 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 4 3 40 or over

Notb. —The weight per square foot of individual plates shall not vary from the ordered weight by more
tnan 1} times the amount given in this table.

Table II. Permissible Overweights of Plates Ordered to Thickness.

Permissible Excess in Average Weights per

Square Foot of Plates for Widths Given,
Ordered expressed in Percentages of Nominal Weights Ordered
Thickness, Thickness,
in. IN.
48 to 60 to 72 to 84 to 96 to 108 to 120 to 132 in.
Under
60 in., 72 in., S4in., 96 in., 108 in., 120in., 132in., or
48 in.
excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. over.

Under 1/8 9 10 12 14 Under 1/8

1/8 to 3/16 excl. 8 9 10 12 1/8 to 3/16 excl.

3/16 " 1/4 " 7 8 9 10 12 3/16 " 1/4 "

1/4 " 5/16 " 6 7 S 9 10 12 14 16 19 1/4 " 5/16 '•

5/16 " 3/8 " 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 17 5/10 " 3/8 "

3/8 " 7/16 " 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 3/8 " 7/16 "

7/16 " 1/2 " 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 7/16 " 1/2 "

1.2 '•
6/8 " 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 11 1/2 " 5/8 "

5/8 " 8/4 " 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9- 5/8 " 3/4 "

3/4 " 1 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 3/4 " 1

1 or over 2.5 2.5 3 3.5 1 4 4.5 5 6 7 1 or over

 Serial Designation: A 7 - 16. 71

VI. MARKING.
13. The name or brand of the manufacturer and the melt Marking,
number shall be legibly stamped or rolled on all finished material,
except that rivet and lattice bars and other small sections
shall, when loaded for shipment, be properly separated and
marked for identification. The identification marks shall be
legibly stamped on the end of each pin and roller. The melt
number shall be legibly marked, by stamping if practicable,
on each test specimen.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

14. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have inspection,

free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the material ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests
(except check analyses) and inspection shall be made at the
place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise speci-
fied, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily
with the operation of the works.
15. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,
tests made in accordance with Section 5 shall be reported within
five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Material which shows injurious defects subsequent to

its acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected,

and the manufacturer shall be notified.

16. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which Rehearing,
represent rejected material, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for
a rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA, U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
STRUCTURAL NICKEL STEEL.
Serial Designation: A 8-16.
These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 8 ; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1912; Revised, 1913, 1914, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.
I. MANUFACTURE
Process. 1. The steel shall be made by
the open-hearth process.
Discard. 2. A be made from each ingot in-
sufficient discard shall
tended for eyebars to secure freedom from injurious piping and
undue segregation.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
Composition.
ag tQ ^gj^aj composition:
Structural Steel. Rivet Steel.
Carbon not over 0.45 not over 0. 30 per cent

Manganese " " 0.70 0.60

„, . /Acid... " " 0.05 " " 0.04
Phosphorus M ., „ „
| Bask oQ4 Q03
Sulfur " " 0.05 " " 0.045
Nickel not under 3 25 . not under 3 25 .

(72)
 :

Serial Designation: A 8-16. 73

4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle

na yses '

manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements

specified in Section 3. This analysis shall be made from a test
ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 3.
5. Analyses may be made by the purchaser from finished Check
Anal y ses
material representing each melt. The chemical composition -

thus determined shall conform to the requirements specified

in Section 3.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

6. (a) The material shall conform to the following require- Tension Tests.

ments as to tensile properties

Eye Bars and Eye Bars'* and

Plates,Shapes Rollers.e Pins,*
Properties Considered. Rivet Steel. and Bars. Unannealed. Annealed

Tensile strength, lb. por sq.

in 70000-80000 85000-100000 95000-110000 90000-105000
Yield point, min., lb. per sq.
in 45 000 50 000 55 000 52 000
Elongation in 8 in., min.,
1500OOO 15000006 15000 006
per cent 20
Elongation in 2 in., min., Ten8 8tr
-
- Ten8 8tr'
- Tens. str.

per cent 16 20
Reduction of area, min., per
cent 40 25 25 35

a Teats of annealed specimens of eye bars shall made for information only.
be
'See Section 7.
e
Elongation shall be measured In 2 in.

(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam of the testing machine.
For plates, shapes, and unannealed bars over 1 in. in Modifications
7. in

thickness, a deduction of 1 from the percentage of elongation Elongation,

specified in Section 6 (a) shall be made for each increase of

J in. in thickness above 1 in., to a minimum of 14 per cent.

8. All broken tension test specimens shall show either a. character of

silky or a very fine granular fracture, of uniform color, and free Fracture -

from coarse crystals.

9. (a) The test specimen for plates, shapes and bars shall Bend Tests,

bend cold through 180 deg. without cracking on the outside of

 74 Specifications for Structural Nickel Steel.

the bent portion, as follows: For material f in. or under in

thickness, around a pin the diameter of which is equal to the
thickness of the specimen; and for material over £ in. in thick-
ness, around a pin the diameter of which is equal to twice the
thickness of the specimen.
(b) The test specimen for pins and rollers shall bend cold

through 180 deg. around a 1-in. pin without cracking on the

outside of the bent portion.
(c) The test specimen for rivet steel shall bend cold through

180 deg. flat on itself without cracking on the outside of the

bent portion.

{Parallel Section) |

About 3' [not less than 9").^

f
.V

|<^>j<-
/" efc.ik + x
: ->l<

I k--,--*"..---^ '

About Id"

Fig. 1.

Drift Tests. 10. Punched rivet holes pitched two diameters from a
planed edge shall stand drifting until the diameter is enlarged
50 per cent, without cracking the metal.
Test Specimens, 11. (a) Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken
from the finished material. Specimens for pins shall be taken
after annealing.
(b) Tension and bend specimens for plates, shapes and
test
bars, except as specified in Paragraph
(c), shall be of the full

thickness of material as rolled. They may be machined to the

form and dimensions shown in Fig. 1, or with both edges parallel;
except that bend test specimens shall not be less than 2 in. in
width, and that bend test specimens for eyebar flats may have
three rolled sides.
 H

Serial Designation: A 8-16. 75

(c) Tension and bend specimens for plates and bars

test
(except eyebar flats) thickness or diameter may
over l\ in. in

be machined to a thickness or diameter of at least £ in. for a

length of at least 9 in.

(d) The and bend test specimens for pins

axis of tension
and rollers shall from the surface and parallel to the
be 1 in.

axis of the bar. Tension test specimens shall conform to the

dimensions shown in Fig. 2. The ends shall be of a form to fit
the holders of the testing machine in such a way that the load
shall be axial. Bend test specimens shall be 1 by \ in. in section.
(e) Tension and bend test specimens for rivet steel shall

be of the full-size section of bars as rolled.

Radius
|

not less
tfranf.. k H

(<—2 Gage Length ~

Note - The Gageiength, Parallel Portions and F/l/els shall be as She wn,
hul Ihe Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of
the Testing Machine.

Fig. 2.

12. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from Number of Tests

each melt; except that material from one melt differs § in.
if

or more in thickness, one tension and one bend test shall

be made from both the thickest and the thinnest material
rolled.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or
develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test speci-
men than that specified in Section 6 (a) and any part of
is less

the fracture is more than £ in. from the center of the gage length
of a 2-in. specimen or is outside the middle third of the
 76 Specifications for Structural Nickel Steel.

gage length of an 8-in. specimen, as indicated by scribe

scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a retest
shall be allowed.

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WEIGHT AND THICKNESS.

Permissible 13. The cross-section or weight of each piece of steel shall not
vary more than 2.5 per cent from that specified; except in the
case of sheared plates, which shall be covered by the following
permissible variations. One cubic inch of rolled steel is assumed
to weigh 0.2833 lb.

(a) When Ordered to Weight per Square Foot: The weight

of each lot 1 in each shipment shall not vary from the weight
ordered more than the amount given in Table I.
When Ordered to Thickness: The thickness of each plate
(b)

shallnot vary more than 0.01 in. under that ordered.

The overweight of each lot 2 in each shipment shall not
exceed the amount given in Table II.

V. FINISH.
F»nish. 14. The finished material shall be free from injurious
defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.

VI. MARKING.
Marking. 15. The name brand of the manufacturer and the melt
or
number shall be legibly stamped or rolled on all finished
material, except that rivet and lattice bars and other small
sections shall, when loaded for shipment, be properly separated
and marked for identification. The identification marks shall
be legibly stamped on the end of each pin and roller. The
melt number shall be legibly marked, by stamping if practi-
cable, on each test specimen.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 16. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-

1
The term "lot" applied to Table II means a'l of the plates of each group width and
group thickness.
2 The term "lot"
applied to Table I means all of the plates of each group width and
group weight.
 5 5 5

Serial Designation: A 8-16. 77

Table I. —Permissible Variations of Plates Ordered TO Weight.

Permissible Variations in Average Weights per Square

Foot of Plates for Widths Given,
Expressed in Percentages of Ordered Weights.

Ordered 48 to 00 to 72 to 84 to 9'Uo 108 to 120 to 132 in. Ordered

W eight,
1

\\ BIGHT, Under 60 in., 72 in., 84 in., 96 in., 108 in., 120 in., 132 in.,1 or
LB . PER 8Q. FT. 48 in.
excl. excl. excl. LB. PER SQ. FT.
excl. excl. excl. excl. over.

. . .
C -
"O fc
1

1
T3
5i
£j -T> h T3
Li
"O h -a fe
1

-5 S>
~ u
> > a t- a a
O P O P O P £ 1 O i-3 O i-> O J
!= t> »
It, der 5 5 3 5.5 3 3 7 3
1

5 to 7.5 excl. 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3.

7. 5 " 10 " 4 3 4.53 5 3 5 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 " 10

7.5 '

10 " 12.5 " 3.52.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3 3 3 9 3 10 " 12.5 '

12. 5 " 15 " 3 2.53. 5I2. 4 3 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 12.5 " 15 '

J4.5
IS " 17.5 " 2.52.53 2.5 3.5 2.54 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3 15 " 17.5 '

17. 5 " 20 " 2.52 2 5 2.5 3 2.53.5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 17.5 " 20 '

20 " 25 " 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.53 2.5 3 . 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 20 " 25 '

25 " 30 " 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 . 3 2.5 3.5 3 1 3 !..' 3 5 3 25 " 30 '

30 " 40 " 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.52 2.5 2 5 3 2 5 3.5 3 4 3 4.5 3 30 " 40 *

40 or over 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 J 5 2.5 3 2.5 3 5 3 4 3 40 or over

Note. —The weight per square foot of individual plates shall not vary from the ordered weight by more
than 1J times the amount given in this table.

Table II. —Permissible Overweights 3F Plates Ordered to Thickness.

Permissible Excess in Av eragb Weights per

Sqvare Foot of Plates for Widths Given,
Ordered expressed in Percentages of Nominal Weights Ordered
Thicknfbs, Thickness,
in. IN.
48 to 60 to 72 to 84 to 96 to 108 to 120 to 132 in.
Under
60 in., 72 in., 84 in., 96 in., 108 in., 120in., 132 in., or
48 in.
excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. over.

Under 1/8 9 10 12 14 Under 1/8

1/8 to 3/16 excl. 8 9 10 12 1/8 to 3/16 excl.

3/16 " 1/4 " 7 8 9 10 12 3/16 " 1/4 "

1/4 " 6/16 " 6 7 8 9 10 12 11 16 19 1/4 " 6/16 "

" 3/8 "

5/ Hi 6 6 7 8 9 1 1
12 14 17 5/16 " 3/8 "

3/8 " 7/16 " 4.5 5 6 7 8 10 12 15 3/8 " 7/16 "

7/10 " 1/2 " 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 7/16 " 1/2 "

1/2 " 5/8 " 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 11 1/2 " 5/8 "

5/8 " 3/4 " 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 5/8 " 3/4 "

3/4 " 1 2.6 3 3.5 1 4.5 5 6 7 8 3/4 " 1

1 or over 2.5 2 6 3 3 5 4 4 5 E 6 7 1 or over

 78 Specifications for Structural Nickel Steel.

chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's

works which concern the manufacture of the material ordered.

The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests
(except check analyses) and inspection shall be made at the
place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise speci-
fied, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily

with the operation of the works.

Rejection. 17. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
tests made in accordance with Section 5 shall be reported within
five working days from the receipt of samples.
{b) Material which shows injurious defects subsequent to

its acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected,

and the manufacturer shall be notified.

Rehearing. 18. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which
represent rejected material, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for
a rehearing within that time.

VIII. FULL-SIZE TESTS.

Tests of 19. (a) Full-size tests of annealed eyebars shall conform to
the following requirements as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 85 000-100 000

Yield point, min., " " 48 000
Elongation in 18 ft., min., per cent 10
Reduction of area .
" " 30

(6) The yield point shall be determined by the halt of the

gage of the testing machine.
 . :

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA.. U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR

STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS

Serial Designation: A 9-16.
These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 9; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1901; Revised, 1909, 1913, 1914, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all' steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

I. MANUFACTURE.
1. (a) Structural steel, except as noted in Paragraph (b), Process,

may be made by the Bessemer or the open-hearth process.

(b) Rivet steel, and steel for plates or angles over J in. in
thickness which are to be punched, shall be made by the open-
hearth process.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

2. The steel shall conform to the following requirements Chemical
Com P° 8itio11
as to chemical composition .

Structural Steel. Rivet Steel.

Di u I Bessemer ...
. not over 0. 10 per
r cent
Phosphorus < ,.

[ Open-hearth . . 0.06 not over 0.06 per cent

Sulfur " " 0.045 "
 80 Specifications for Steel for Buildings.

Ladle 3. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the

Analyses.
manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon, man-
ganese, phosphorus and sulfur. This analysis shall be made
from a test ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The
chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to the
purchaser or his representative, and shall conform to the
requirements specified in Section 2.
Check 4. Analyses may be made by the purchaser from finished
Analyses.
material representing each melt. The phosphorus and sulfur
content thus determined shall not exceed that specified in
Section 2 by more than 25 per cent.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 5. (a) The material shall conform to the following require-
ments as to tensile properties:

Properties Considered. Structural Steel. Rivet 8teel.

85 000 - 65 000 46 000 - 66 000

0.5 tens. str.

a
1 400 000 1 400 000
Tens. str. Tens. str.

22

a
See Section 6.

(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam of the testing machine.
Modifications in 6. For structural steel over f in. in thickness, a deduc-
(a)
Elongation.
tion of from the percentage of elongation in 8 in. specified
1

in Section 5(a) shall be made for each increase of $ in. in thick-

ness above f in., to a minimum of 18 per cent.
(b) For structural steel under ^
in. in thickness, a deduc-

tion of 2.5 from the percentage of elongation in 8 in. specified

in Section 5(a) shall be made for each decrease of ^ in. in
thickness below & in.

Bend Tests. 7. (a) The

specimen for plates, shapes and bars, except
test
as specified in Paragraphs (b) and (c), shall bend cold through
180 deg. without cracking on the outside of the bent portion,
as follows: For material f in. or under in thickness, flat on itself;
for material over £ in. to and including 1 £ in. in thickness, around
 —

Serial Designation: A 9-16. 81

a pin the diameter of which is equal to the thickness of the

specimen; and for material over l£ in. in thickness, around a
pin the diameter of which is equal to twice the thickness of the
specimen.
(b) The test specimen for pins, and other bars, when
rollers

prepared as specified in Section 8(e), shall bend cold through

180 deg. around a 1-in. pin without cracking on the outside of
the bent portion.
(c) The test specimen for rivet steel shall bend cold through
180 deg. flat on itself without cracking on the outside of the
bent portion.

{ Parallel Secf-/on\

-About 3 — »J \^o° \notles5than9"\

£
2'
About

I k 'd" >l '

About 16"

Fig. 1.

8. (a) Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken Test Specimens,

from rolled steel in the condition in which it comes from the rolls,

except as specified in Paragraph (b).

(b)Tension and bend test specimens for pins and rollers

shall be taken from the finished bars, after annealing when
annealing is specified.
(c) Tens on and bend
;
specimens for plates, shapes
test
and bars, except as specified in Paragraphs (d), (e) and (/), shall
be of the full thickness of material as rolled; and may be machined
to the form and dimensions shown in Fig. 1, or with both edges
parallel.
(d) Tension and bend test specimens for plates over 1^ in.
 82 Specifications for Steel for Buildings.

in thickness may be machined to a thickness or diameter of

at least f in. for a length of at least 9 in.
(e) Tension specimens for pins, rollers and bars over l\
test
in. in thickness or diameter may conform to the dimensions
shown in Fig. 2. In this case, the ends shall be of a form to
fit the holders of the testing machine in such a way that the load

shall be axial. Bend test specimens may be 1 by \ in. in section.

The axis of the specimen shall be located at any point midway
between the center and surface and shall be parallel to the axis
of the bar.
(/") Tension and bend test specimens for rivet steel shall
be of the full-size section of bars as rolled.

Radius
not less
2-

ft \J
? ^

f
i
7 I
\
j

p= —2 Gage Length -~*\

Note - The Gage Length, Parallel Portions and Fillets shall be as Shown,
bur the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of
the Testing Machine.

Fig. 2.

Number of Tests. 9. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from

each melt; except that if material from one melt differs | in.
or more in thickness, one tension and one bend test shall be
made from both the thickest and the thinnest material rolled.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or
develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test speci-
men is less than that specified in Section 5 (a) and any part of
the fracture isf in. from the center of the gage length
more than
of a 2-in. specimen or is outside the middle third of the gage
length of an 8-in. specimen, as indicated by scribe scratches
marked on the specimen before testing, a retest shall be allowed.
 Serial Designation: A 9 - 16. 83

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WEIGHT AND THICKNESS.

10. The cross-section or weight of each piece of steel shall Permissible
anatlons -

not vary more than 2.5 per cent from that specified; except in
the case of sheared plates, which shall be covered by the
following permissible Variations. One cubic inch of rolled steel
is assumed weigh 0.2833 lb.
to
(a) When Ordered to Weight per Square Foot: The weight
of each lot in each shipment shall not vary from the weight
1

ordered more than the amount given in Table I.

(b) When Ordered to Thickness: The thickness of each plate

shall not vary more than 0.01 in. under that ordered.
The overweight of each lot2 in each shipment shall not
exceed the amount given in Table II.

V. FINISH.
11. The finished material shall be free from injurious defects Finish,

and shall have a workmanlike finish.

VI. MARKING.
12. The name
or brand of the manufacturer and the melt Marking,
number be legibly stamped or rolled on all finished material,
shall
except that rivet and lattice bars and other small sections shall,
when loaded for shipment, be properly separated and marked
for identification. The identification marks shall be legibly
stamped on the end of each pin and roller. The melt number
shall be legibly marked, by stamping if practicable, on each
test specimen.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

13. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have inspection,

free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturers'
works which concern the manufacture of the material ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all

reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being

The term "lot" applied to Table

' I means all of the plates of each group width and
group weight.
The term "lot" applied to Table II means alt of the plates of each group width and
group thicl
 —

84 Specifications for Steel for Buildings.

Table L- —Permissible Variations of Plates Ordered TO Weight.

Permissible Yarlitions in Average Weights per Square

Foot op Plates for Widths Given,
Expressed in Percentages of Ordered Weights.

Ordered 48 to 60 to 72 to 84 to 96 to 108 to 120 to 132 in. Ordered

WlIQHT, Under 60 in., 72 in., 84 in., 96 in., 108 in., UOiu., 132 in., or Weight,
LB. PER 6Q. rT. 48 in.
excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. over.
LB. PER 8Q. ft.

£
'3 a9 T3 0 -? -5 •a
> a > > a > e > c > a
o o O - O O> z z P O
5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3

4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3

7.5 " 10 " 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 7.5 " 10 "

10 " 12.5 " 3 5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 " 12.5 "

12.5 " 15 " 3 2.53.5 2.5 4 3 4.5]3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 12.5 " 15 "

15 " 17.5 " 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 2.5|4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3 15 " 17.5 "

17.5 "20 " 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.53.5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3' 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 17.5 " 20 "

20 " 25 " 2 2 2 5 2 2.5 2 5 3 2.5 3.5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 20 " 25 "

25 " 30 " 2 2 2 2 2 5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 4 3 1.5 3 5 3 25 " 30 "

30 " 40 " 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2 5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 4 3 4.5 3 30 " 40 "

40 or over 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 4 3' 40 or over

Note. —The weight per square foot of individual plates shall not vary from the ordered weight by more
than \\ times the amount given in this table.

Table II. Permissible Overweights of Plates Ordered to Thickness.

Permissible Excess in Average Weights per

Square Foot of Plates for Widths Given,
Ordered Expressed in Percentages of Nominal Weights. Ordered
Thick nebs, Thickness,
IN.
48 to 60 to 72 to 84 to 96 to 108 to 120 to 132 in.
Under
60 in., 72 in., 84 in., 96 in., 108 in., 120in., 132in.,
48 in.
excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl.

Under 1/8 9 10 12 14 Under 1/8

1/8 to 3/16 excl. 8 9 10 12 1/8 to 3/16 excl.

3/16 " 1/4 " 7 8 9 10 12 3/16 " 1/4

1/4 5/16 " 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 1/4 6/16

5/16 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 5/16 3/8

3/8 '
7/l« " 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 3/8 7/16
1 " 4.5
7/16 1/2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7/16 1/2
1
" 4.5
1/2 5/8 3.5 4 5 6 7 8 9 1/2 5/8
1 " 4.5
5/8 3/4 3 3.5 4 5 6 7 8 5/8 3/4

3/4 1 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 3/4 1

1 or over 2.5 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 1 or over

 Serial Designation: A 9-16. 85

furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests

(except check analyses) and inspection be made at the
shall
place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise speci-
fied, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily
with the operation of the works.
14. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,

tests made in accordance with Section 4 shall be reported within

five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Material which shows injurious defects subsequent to

its acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected,

and the manufacturer shall be notified.

15. Samples tested in accordance with Section 4, which Rehearing,

represent rejected material, shall be preserved for two weeks

from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for
a rehearing within that time.
 :

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR LOCOMOTIVES.
Serial Designation : A 10-16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 10; the final
number indicates -the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1912; Revised, 1913, 1914, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

Basis of 1. These specifications apply to shapes, plates (except

Purchase.
boiler and firebox plates) and bars over £ in. in thickness.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 2. The steel shall be made by the open-hearth process.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS

Chemical 3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
Composition.
as tQ cnem } ca composition
i

Phosphorus not over 0.05 per cent

Sulfur " " 0.05

Ladle 4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the

Analyses.
manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon, man-
ganese, phosphorus and sulfur. This analysis shall be made
(86)
 :

Serial Designation: A 10-16. 87

from a test ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The
chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to the
purchaser or his representative, and shall conform to the require-
ments specified in Section 3.
5. Analyses may be made by the purchaser from finished Check
Anal y ses
material representing each melt. The phosphorus and sulfur
-

content thus determined shall conform to the requirements

specified in Section 3.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

6. (a) The material shall conform to the following require- Tension Tests,
ments as to tensile properties

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 55 000 - 65 000

Yield point, min., " " 0.5 tens. str.

500 000
c., .•
Elongation o
in 8
• •
in.,
•
min., per cent
* 1
—
(See Section 7)
Tens -
str -

(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam of the testing machine.
7. (a) For material over f in. in thickness, a deduction of 1 Modifications in
Elon 8 ation -
from the percentage of elongation specified in Section 6 (a) shall
be made for each increase of | in. in thickness above f in., to a
minimum of 18 per cent.
(b) For material under ys m m - thickness, a deduction of
2.5 from the percentage of elongation in 8 in. specified in Section
6 (a) shall be made for each decrease of tV m - in thickness below
tV in.

8. The test specimen shall bend cold through 180 deg. Bend Tests,
without cracking on the outside of the bent portion, as follows:
For material f in. or under in thickness, flat on itself; for
material over f in. to and including l£ in. in thickness, around
a pin the diameter of which is equal to the thickness of the
specimen; and for material over l\ in. in thickness, around a
pin the diameter of which is equal to twice the thickness of the
specimen.
9. (a) Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken from Test Specimens,
the finished rolled material.
(b) Tension and bend test specimens, except as specified

in Paragraph (c), shall be of the full thickness of material as

 '

88 Specifications for Structural Steel for Locomotives.

rolled; and may be machined to the form and dimensions

shown in Fig. 1, or with both edges parallel.
Tension and bend test specimens for plates and bars over
(c)

1^ in. in thickness or diameter may be machined to a thickness

or diameter of at least f in. for a length of at least 9 in.
Number of Tests. 10. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from
each melt; except that if material from one melt differs f in.
or over in thickness, one tension and one bend test shall be
made from both the thickest and the thinnest material rolled.
Shapes less than 1 sq. in. in section, and bars less than ^ sq.
in. in section, need not be subjected to a tension test.

I
„ <v>J *v? (Parallel Section) \

3 -—* v$*
I

(<-— About ?\notlessthan9") \

. H . About 2

1<|j|<- /"-•>!<- etc.-yk + x

'

I k- 'd"~-i
About 18"

Fig. l.

(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or

develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
specimen than that specified in Section 6 (a) and any part
is less

of the fracture is outside the middle third of the gage length,

as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before
testing, a retest shall be allowed.

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WEIGHT AND THICKNESS.

Permissible 1 1 . The cross-section or weight of each piece of steel shall not
Variations.
vary more than 2.5 per cent from that specified; except in the
 Serial Designation: A 10- 16. 89

case of sheared plates, which shall be covered by the following

permissible variations. One cubic inch of rolled steel is assumed
to weigh 0.2833 lb.

(a) When to Weight per Square Foot:

Ordered The weight
of each lot 1 in each shipment shall not vary from the weight
ordered more than the amount given in Table I.
(b) When Ordered to Thickness: The thickness of each plate

shall not vary more than 0.01 in. under that ordered.
The overweight of each lot 2 in each shipment shall not
exceed the amount given in Table II.

V. FINISH.
12. The finished material shall be free from injurious defects Finish,

and shall have a workmanlike finish.

VI. MARKING.
13. The name or brand of the manufacturer and the melt Marking,

number shall be legibly stamped or rolled on all finished material,

except that small sections shall, when loaded for shipment, be
properly separated and marked for identification. The melt
number shall be legibly marked, by stamping if practicable, on
each test specimen.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

14. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have inspection,

free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the material ordered.
The manufacturer .shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being fur-
nished in accordance with these specifications. All tests (except
check analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place of
manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified,
and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with
the operation of the works.

1
The term "lot" applied to Table I means all of the plates of each group width and
reight.
* The term "lot" applied to Table II means all of the plates of each group width and
group thickness.
 —

90 Specifications for Structural Steel for Locomotives.

Table I.- —Permissible Variations of Plates Ordered TO Weight.

Permissible Variations in Average Weights per Square

Foot of Plates for Widths Given,
Expressed in Percentages of Ordered \\ eights.

Ordered 48 to 60 to 72 to 84 to 96 to 108 to 120 to 13: in. Ordered

Weight, Under 84 in., 96 in., 108 120 in., 132 in., Weight,
60 in., 72 in., 1
in., c r
lb. per 8q. ft. 48 in. excl. exel. excl. excl. excl. excl. ov er.
lb. per sq. ft.
excl. I

-a i T3 •a -a aa > -5 > a
53
> a :- a > a > a > CI

o P o & O P 5 1
c P 6 P o P O P o P
5 3 5 5^3 6 3 7 a

4 5 2 5 3 5.5 3 6 3

" 10 "
7.5 " 10
r
" 4 ^ <1 i T 3 5 5 3 ft 3 7 S s 3 1
7.5

10 " 12.5 " 3.5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 " 12.5 "

12.5 " 15 " 3 2.5 3.5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.53 6 3 7 3 8 3 12.5 " 15 "

15 " 17.5 " 2.5 2.53 2.5 3.5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3 15 " 17.5 "

17.5 " 20 " 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 2.54 3 4.5 3 -
5 3 5.5 3 6 3 17.5 " 20 "

20 " 25 " 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 20 " 25 "

25 " 30 " 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 25 " 30 "

30 " 40 " 2 2 2- 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 5 3 2.5 3.5 3 4 3 '.4.5 3 30 " 40 "

40 or over 2 2 2 2 2 J 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 4 3 40 or over

I

Note.— The weight per square foot of individual plates shall not vary from the ordered weight by more
than li times the amount given in this table.

Table II. Permissible Overweights of Plates Ordered to Thickness.

Permissible Excess in Average Weights per

Square Foot of Plates for Widths Given,
Ordered Expressed in Percentages of Nominal Weights Ordered
Thickness, Thickness,
in. IN.
48 to 60 to 72 to 84 to 96 to 108 to 120 to 132 in.
Under
60 in., 72 in., 84 in., 96 in., 108 in., 120in., 132 in., or
48 in.
excl. excl. excl. excl. over.
excl. excl. excl.

Under 1/8 9 10 12 14 Under 1/8

1/8 to 3/16 excl. 8 9 10 12 1/8 to 3/16 excl.

3/16 " 1/4 " 7 8 9 10 12 3/16 " 1/4 "

" 5/16 "

1/4 " 5/16 " 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 19 1/4

5/16 " 3/8 " 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 17 5/16 " 3/8 "

" 10 12 " 7/16 "

3/8 " 7/16 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 15 3/8

7/16 " 1/2 " 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 7/16 " 1/2 "

1/2 " 5/8 " 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 11 1/2 " 5/8 "

5/8 " 3/4 " 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 5/8 " 3/4 "

3/4 " 1 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 3/4 " 1

1 or over 2.5 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 1 or over

 Serial Designation: A 10-16. 91

15. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,

tests made inaccordance with Section 5 shall be reported within

five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Material which shows injurious defects subsequent to

its acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected,

and the manufacturer shall be notified.

16. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which Rehearing,

represent rejected material, shall be preserved for two weeks

from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction
with the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim
for a rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR CARS.
Serial Designation : A 11-16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation All; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1914; Revised, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

Material 1- These specifications apply to shapes, plates and bars

Covered. over | in. in thickness.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 2. The steel shall be made by the open-hearth process.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
Composition.
as to chemical composition:
Structural Steel,
and Plates for Rivet Steel.
Cold Pressing.
_, . /Acid not over 0.06 not over 0.04 percent
Phosphorus .
„ „ „ „ „
| Bas c Q04 0Q4
Sulfur " " 0.05 " " 0.045

Ladle 4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the

Analyses.
manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon, man-
(92)
 Serial Designation: A 11-16. 93

ganese, phosphorus and sulfur. This analysis shall be made

from a taken during the pouring of the melt.
test ingot The
chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to the
purchaser or his representative, and shall conform to the
requirements specified in Section 3.
5. Analyses may be made by the purchaser from finished Cbeck

material representing each melt. The phosphorus and sulfur Anal y ses -

content thus determined shall not exceed that specified in

Section 3 by more than 25 per cent.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

6. (a) The material shall conform to the following require- Tension Tests,

ments as to tensile properties:

Properties Considered. Structural Rivet Plates for Cold

Steel. Steel. Pressing.

50 000 - 65 000 45 000 - 60 000 48 000 - 58 000

0.5 tens. str. . 5 tens. str.

1500 000 1500 000 1500 000

Tens. str. Tens. str. Tens. str.

1
See Section 7.

(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam of the testing machine.
7. (a) For material over f in. in thickness, a deduction of Modifications in
Elon s atlon
1 from the percentage of elongation specified in Section 6 (a) -

shall be made for each increase of | in. in thickness above $ in.,

to a minimum of 18 per cent.
(b) For material under & in. in thickness, a deduction of
2.5 from the percentage of elongation in 8 in. specified in Section
6 (a) shall be made for each decrease of xV i n in thickness below
-

ttt in.

8. (a) The test specimen for structural steel shall bend cold Bend Tests,

through 180 deg. without cracking on the outside of the bent

portion, as follows: For material
or under in thickness,
4- in.
flat on itself; and including l\ in. in
for material over f in. to
thickness, around a pin the diameter of which is equal to the
thickness of the specimen; and for material over l\ in. in thick-
ness, around a pin the diameter of which is equal to twice the
thickness of the specimen.
 "

94 Specifications for Steel for Cars.

(b) The test specimen for rivet steel and plates for cold
pressing shall bend cold through 180 deg. flat on itself without
cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
Test Specimens. 9. (a) Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken from
the finished rolled material.
(b) Tension and bend test specimens, except as specified in

Paragraph (c), shall be of the full thickness of material as rolled;

and may be machined to the form and dimensions shown in Fig.
1, or with both edges parallel.

(c) Tension and bend test specimens for plates and bars

over 1^ in. in thickness or diameter may be machined to a thick-

ness or diameter of at least in. for a length of at least 9 in.
-f

p--— About 3
„
— .
i

sJ
# ( Parallel Section)
\notlessthan9"S*\
\

H J About 2

About I6

Fig. 1.

Number of Teste. 10. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from
each melt; except that if material from one melt differs f in. or
more in thickness, one tension and one bend test shall be made
from both the thickest and the thinnest material rolled. Shapes
less than 1 sq. in. in section, and bars, except rivet rods, less
than i sq. in. in section, need not be subjected to a tension test.
(ft) If any test specimen shows defective machining or
develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
specimen is less than that specified in Section 6 (a) and any
 .

Serial Designation: A 11-16. 95

is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works

which concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The

part of the fracture is outside the middle third of the gage
length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen
before testing, a retest shall be allowed.

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WEIGHT AND THICKNESS.

1 1 The cross-section or weight of each piece of steel shall not Permissible

vary more than 2.5 per cent from that specified; except in the
case of sheared plates, which shall be covered by the following
permissible variations. One cubic inch of rolled steel is assumed
to weigh 0.2833 lb.
(a) When Ordered to Weight per Square Foot: The weight
of each lot 1 in each shipment shall not vary from the weight
ordered more than the amount given in Table I.
(b) When Ordered to Thickness: The thickness of each plate

shall not vary more than 0.01 in. under that ordered.
The overweight of each lot 2 in each shipment shall not
exceed the amount given in Table II.

V. FINISH.
12. The finished material shall be free from injurious Finish,

defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.

VI. MARKING.
13. The name
or brand of the manufacturer and the melt Marking,
number be legibly rolled or stamped on all finished material,
shall
except that rivet bars and other small sections shall, when loaded
for shipment, be properly separated and marked for identifica-
tion. The melt number shall be legibly marked, by stamping
if practicable, on each test specimen.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

14. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have inspection,

free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser

•The term "lot" applied to Table I means all of the plates of each group width and
group weight.
'The term "lot" applied to Table II means all of the plates of each group width and
group thickness.
 —— i

96 Specifications for Steel for Cars.

Table I. Permissible Variations of Plates Ordered to Weight.

Permissible Yarlations in Average Weights per Square

Foot of Plates for Widths Given,
Expressed in Percentages of Ordered Weights.

Ordered 96 to 108 to 120 to 132

Ordered
48 to 60 to 72 to 84 to in.
Weight, Under 120 in., 132 in., or
Weight,
60 in., 72 in., 84 in., 96 in., 108 in.,
lb. per 8q. ft. 48 in. excl. excl. excl. over.
LB. PER 8Q. ft.
excl. excl. excl. excl.

63
-5 -a 13 — -5 — 9
-J
> a > c > - > S > = > a
5 o P O o P O p o P o P o p O
Under 5 5 3 5.5^ g 3 7 3

5 to 7.5 excl. 4.5 3 5 3 T 5 3 fi ^ 5 to 7.5 excl.

5 }
" 10 "
7.5 " 10 " 4.53 7 3 8 3 7.5
•>,

4 3 5 3 5 6

10 " 12.5 " 3 S 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.6 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 " 12.5 "

" 15 "
12.5 " 15 " 3 2.5'3.52.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5 6 3 3 7 3 8 3
J12.5

15 " 17.5 " 2.5 2.53 2.5 3 5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3 15 " 17.5 "

" 20 "
17.5 " 20 " 2 .-
2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3 5 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 17.5
2.5J4
20 " 25 " 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3 .5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 20 " 25 "

25 " 30 " 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 J .5 3 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 25 " 30 "

" 40 " 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3 5 3 4 3 4.5 3 30 " 40 "

30 2

40 or over 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3 4 3 40 or over

3.5J

Note.—The weight per square foot of individual plates Bhall not vary from the ordered weight by more
than 1J times the amount given in this table.

Table II. Permissible Overweights of Plates Ordered to Thickness.

Permissible Excess in Average Weights per

Square Foot of Plates for Wtdths Given,
Ordered Expressed in Percentages of Nominal Weights. Ordered
ThICENEBS, Thickness,
in. in.
48 to 60 to 72 to 84 to 96 to 108 to 120 to 132 in.
Under
60 in., 72 in., 84 in., 96 in., 108 in., 120 in., 132in., or
48 in.
excl. excl. excl. excl. over.
excl. excl. excl.

Under 1/8 9 10 12 14 Under 1/8

1/8 to 3/16 excl. 8 9 10 )2 1/8 to 3/16 excl.

3/16 " 1/4 " 7 8 10 12 3/16 " 1/4 "

1/4 " 5/16 " 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 19 1/4 " 5/18 "

5/16 " 3/8 " 6 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 17 5/16 " 3/8 "

3/8 " 7/16 " 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 3/8 " 7/16 "

7/16 " 1/2 " 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 7/16 " 1/2 "

1/2 " 6/8 " 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 11 1/2 " 5/8 "

5/8 " 3/4 " 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 5/8 " 3/4 "

3/4 " 1 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 3/4 " 1

1 or over 2.5 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 1 or over

 Serial Designation: A 11-16. 97

manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable

facilities to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in
accordance with these specifications. All tests (except check
analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place of manu-
facture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall
be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the opera-
tion of the works.
15. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,

tests made inaccordance with Section 5 shall be reported within

five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Material which shows injurious defects subsequent to

its acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected,

and the manufacturer shall be notified.

16. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which Rehearing,
represent rejected material, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for
a rehearing within that time.
 .

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR SHIPS. 1

Serial Designation: A 12-16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 12; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1901; Revised, 1909, 1913, 1914, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining" materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 1. The steel shall be made by the open-hearth process.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 2. The steel shall conform to the following requirements

Composition.
ag to c h em i ca i composition:

tm. i [Acid not over 0.06 per cent

Phosphorus
y ^
* . ,. n „, „
"
\ Basic " " 0.04
Sulfur " " 0.05 "

Ladle 3. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the

Analyses.
manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon, man-
• Notb. —
The requirements for castings for ships have been especially provided for in
the Standard Specifications for Steel Castings (Serial Designation: A 27), adopted by the
American Society for Testing Materials (see pp. 220-225).

(98)
 Serial Designation: A 12-16. 99

ganese, phosphorus and sulfur. This analysis shall be made

from a taken during the pouring of the melt.
test ingot The
chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to the
purchaser or his representative, and shall conform to the
requirements specified in Section 2.
4. Analyses may be made by the purchaser from finished check

material representing each melt. The phosphorus and sulfur AnaJ y 8es -

content thus determined shall not exceed that specified in

Section 2 by more than 25 per cent.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

5. (a) The material shall conform to the following require- Tension Tests,

ments as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 58 000-68 000

Yield point, min., " " 0.5 tens. str.

Elongation in 8 in., min., per cent

(See Section 6.)
Tens - str.

(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam of the testing machine.
6. (a) For material over f in. in thickness, a deduction of Modifications in
ongat on *
1 from the percentage of elongation specified in Section 5 (a)
shall be made for each increase of | in. in thickness above £ in.,
to a minimum of 18 per cent.
(b) For material \ in. or under in thickness, the elongation
shall be measured on a gage length of 24 times the thickness of
the specimen.
7. The test specimen shall bend cold through 180 deg. Bend Tests,

without cracking on the outside of the bent portion, as follows:

For material £ in. or under in thickness, around a pin the diameter
of which is equal to the thickness of the specimen; for material
over | in. to and including 1-J in. in thickness, around a pin the
diameter of which is equal to 1 \ times the thickness of the speci-
men; and for material over \\ in. in thickness, around a pin
the diameter of which is equal to twice the thickness of the
specimen
8. (a) Tension and bend
specimens shall be taken from
test Test Specimens,
the finished rolled material, and
be annealed or other-
shall not
wise treated, except as specified in Paragraph (b).
 100 Specifications for Structural Steel for Ships.

(b) Tension and bend test specimens for material which

is to be annealed or otherwise treated before use, shall be cut
from properly annealed or similarly treated short lengths of the
full section of the piece.
(c) Tension and bend test specimens, except as specified

in Paragraph (d), shall be of the full thickness of material as

rolled and may be machined to the form and dimensions shown
;

in Fig. 1, or with both edges parallel.

(d) Tension and bend test specimens for plates and bars
over \\ in. in thickness or diameter may be machined to a
thickness or diameter of at least f in. for a length of at least
9 in.

'

I k- 'd"~~A
k- •
About Id"
i

Fig. 1.

Number of Tests. 9. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from

each melt; except that if material from one melt differs f in. or
more in thickness, one tension and one bend test shall be made
from both the thickest and the thinnest material rolled.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or

develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen

substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
specimen is less than that specified in Section 5 (a) and any part
of the fracture is outside the middle third of the gage length,
as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before
testing, a retest shall be allowed.
 Serial Designation: A 12-16. 101

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WEIGHT AND THICKNESS.

10. The cross-section or weight of each piece of steel shall not Permissible
anatl0n8 -
vary more than 2.5 per cent from that specified; except in the
case of sheared plates, which shall be covered by the following
permissible variations. One cubic inch of rolled steel is assumed
to weigh 0.2833 lb.

(a) When to Weight per Square Foot:

Ordered The weight
of each lot 1 in eachshipment shall not vary from the weight
ordered more than the amount given in Table I.
(b) When Ordered to Thickness: The thickness of each plate

shall not vary more than 0.01 in. under that ordered.
The overweight of each lot 2 in each shipment shall not
exceed the amount given in Table II.

V. FINISH.
11. The finished material shall be free from injurious Finish,
defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.

VI. MARKING.
12. The name or brand of the manufacturer and the melt Marking,
number shall be legibly rolled or stamped on all finished material.
The melt number shall be legibly stamped on each test specimen.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

13. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have inspection,
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works
which concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The
manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable
facilities to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in
accordance with these specifications. All tests (except check
analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place of manu-
facture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall
be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the opera-
tion of the works.

1
The term "lot" applied to Table I means all of the plates of each group width and
group weight.
'The term "lot" applied to Table II means all of the plates of each group width and
group thickness.
 ——

102 Specifications for Structural Steel for Ships.

Table I. Permissible Variations of Plates Ordered to Weight.

Permissible Variations in Average Weights per Square

Foot of Plates for Widths Given, „
Expressed in Percentages of Ordered Weights.

Ordered 48 to 60 to 72 to 84 to 96 to 108 to 120 to 132 in.

Ordered
Weight, Under 60 in., 72 in., 84 in., 96 in., 108 in., 120 in., 132 in., or Weight,
LB. PER By. FT. 4Sin. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. over. lb. per 8q. ft.

i c i
-o -5
£ i -5 3
S3

a c > =1 C
a > > c a
5 P 6 P o P 5 P P o P O p 1 P 1 P
Under S 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3

5 to 7.5 excl 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3

7.5 "10 " 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 3 7 3 8 3 7.5 " 10 "

10 " 12.5 " 3.5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 " 12.5 "

12.5 " 15 " 3 2.5 3.5 2.5 4 3 1.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 12.5 " 15 "

15 " 17.5 " 2.5 2.5 3 2.53.5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 7 3 15 " 17.5 "

17.5 " 20 " 2.5 2 2.5 2.53 2.5 3.5:2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 6 3 17.5 " 30 "

20 " 25 " 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 2.5 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 5.5 3 20 " 25 "

25 " 30 " 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.:. 3 4 3 4.5 3 5 3 25 " 30 "

30 " 40 " 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.52 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 4 3 4.5 3 30 " 40 "

40 or over 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2 5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 4 3 40 or over

Note. —The weight per square foot of individual plates shall not vary from the ordered weight by more
than 1| times the amount given in this table.

Table II. Permissible Overweights of Plates Ordered to Thickness.

Permissible Excess in Average Weights per

Square Foot of Plates for Widths Given,
Expressed in Percentages of Nominal Weights.
Ordered Ordered
Thickness, in. 1
Thickness, in.
48 to 60 to 72 to 84 to 96 to 108to!120to 132 in.
Under
60 in., 72 in., 84 in., 96 in., 108 in., 120in., 132in.. or
48 in. excl. over.
excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. !

Under 1/8 9 10 12 14 Under 1/8

1/8 to 3/16 excl. 8 | 9 10 12 _ 1/8 to 3/16 excl.

3/16 " 1/4 " 7 8 9 10 12 .. 3/16 " 1/4 "

1/4 " 5/16 " 6 ! 7 8 9 10 12 14 ,

16 19 1/4 " 5/16 "

5/16 " 3/8 " 5 6 7 ; 8 9 10 12 14 17 5/16 " 3/8

3/8 " 7/16 " 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 3/8 " 7/16 "

7/16 " 1/2 " 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 7/16 " 1/2 "

1/2 " 5/8 " 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 11 1/2 " 5/8 "

5/8 " 3/4 " 3 3.5 4 4.6 5 6 7 8 9 5/8 " 3/4 "

3/4 " 1 2.5 3 1 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 3/4 " 1

1 or over 2.5 2.5 3 3.5 4 4 5 5 6 7 1 or over

i
 Serial Designation: A 12-16. 103

14. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,

tests made in accordance with Section 4 shall be reported within

five working days from the receipt of samples
(b) Material which shows injurious defects subsequent to

its acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected,

and the manufacturer shall be notified.

15. Samples tested in accordance with Section 4, which Rehearing,

represent rejected material, shall be preserved for two weeks

from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for
a rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
RIVET STEEL FOR SHIPS.

Serial Designation: A 13-14.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 13; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1901; Revised, 1909, 1913, 1914.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of v.ar,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

A. Requirements for Rolled Bars.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 1. The steel shall be made by the open-hearth process.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 2. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
omposition.
ag tQ q^^qq} composition:

Acid not over °- 06 P er cent

Phosphorous
V /
\Basic " " 0.04
Sulfur " " 0.045

Ladle 3. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the

Analyses.
manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon, man-
(104)
 Serial Designation: A 13-14. 105

ganese, phosphorus and sulfur. This analysis shall be made

from a taken during the pouring of the melt.
test ingot The
chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to the
purchaser or his representative, and shall conform to the
requirements specified in Section 2.
4. Analyses may be made by the purchaser from finished Check
nayses -

bars representing each melt. The phosphorus and sulfur con-

tent thus determined shall not exceed that specified in Section 2
by more than 25 per cent.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

5. (a) The bars shall conform to the following requirements Tension Tests.

as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 55 000 - 65 000

Yield point, min., " " 0.5 tens. str.
Elongation in 8 in., min., per cent 1 500 000
(See Section 6.) Tens. str.

(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam of the testing machine.
6. For bars over f in. in diameter, a deduction of 1 from Modifications in
on 8 atlon -
the percentage of elongation specified in Section 5 (a) shall be
made each increase of I in. in diameter above £ in.
for
7. The test specimen shall bend cold through 180 deg. Bend Tests,

flat on itself without cracking on the outside of the bent

portion.
8. Tension and bend test specimens shall be of the full-size Test Specimens,
section of bars as rolled.
9. (a) Two tension and two bend tests shall be made from Number of Tests,
each melt, each of which shall conform to the requirements
specified; if bars from one melt differ § in. or
except that
more one tension and one bend test shall be made
in diameter,
from both the greatest and the least diameters rolled.
(6) If any test specimen develops flaws, it may be discarded
and another specimen substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test

specimen is less than that specified in Section 5 (a) and any part
of the fracture is outside the middle third of the gage length,
as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before
testing, a retest shall be allowed.
 106 Specifications for Rivet Steel for Ships.

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER.

Permissible 10. The diameter of bars 1 in. or under in diameter shall not
Variations.
vary more than 0.01 in. from that specified; the diameter of bars
over 1 in. to and including 2 in. in diameter shall not vary more
than ^ in. under nor more than ^2 m - oy er that specified.

V. FINISH.
Finish. 11. The finished bars shall be free from injurious defects
and shall have a workmanlike finish.

VI. MARKING.
Marking. 12. Rivet bars shall, when loaded for shipment, be prop-
erly separated and marked with the name or brandmanu- of the
facturerand the melt number for identification. The melt
number shall be legibly marked on each test specimen.

.VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 13. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free
entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works
which concern the manufacture of the bars ordered. The manu-
facturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable
facilities to satisfy him that the bars are being furnished in
accordance with these specifications. All tests (except check
analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place of manu-
facture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall
be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operation of the works.
Rejection. 14. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based
on tests made in accordance with Section 4 shall be reported
within five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Bars which show injurious defects subsequent to their

acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected, and the

manufacturer shall be notified.
Rehearing. 15. Samples tested in accordance with Section 4, which
represent rejected bars, shall be preserved for two weeks from the
date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 Serial Designation: A 13-14. 107

B Requirements for Rivets.

VIII. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

16. A copy of the results of tension tests of the rolled bars Test Certificate
of Rolled Bar8,
from which the rivets were made shall be furnished for each lot
of rivets.
17. required in Section 16 cannot be
If the test certificate Tension Tests,
furnished, the rivets shall conform to the requirements as to
tensile properties specified in Sections 5 and 6, except that the
elongation shall be measured on a gage length as great as the
length of the rivets tested will permit.
18. The rivet shank shall bend cold through 180 deg. flat Bend Tests,

on itself, as shown in Fig. 1. without cracking on the outside of

the bent portion.

Fig. 1. Fig 2

19. The rivet head shall flatten, while hot, to a diameter Flattening Tests.
2\ times the diameter of the shank, as shown in Fig. 2, without
cracking at the edges.
20. (a) When required in accordance with Section 17, Number of Tests,
one tension test shall be made from each size ineach lot of rivets
offered for inspection.
(b) Three bend and three flattening tests shall be made

from each size in each lot of rivets offered for inspection, each of
which shall conform to the requirements specified.

IX. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

21. The rivets shall be true to form, concentric, and shall be Workmanship,
made in a workmanlike manner.
22. The finished rivets shall be free from injurious defects. Finish.
 108 Specifications for Rivet Steel for Ships.

X. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 23. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free
entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works which
concern the manufacture of the rivets ordered. The manu-
facturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable
facilities to satisfy him that the rivets are being furnished in
accordance with these specifications. All tests and inspection
shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment,
unless otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
Rejection. 24. Rivets which show injurious defects subsequent to their
acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected, and
the manufacturer shall be notified.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CARBON-STEEL BARS FOR RAILWAY SPRINGS.

Serial Designation: A 14-16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 14; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revison.

Adopted, 1914; Revised, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

1. These specifications cover two classes of carbon-steel Material

Covered
bars to be used for the manufacture of railway springs, deter-
-

mined by the carbon ranges specified in Section 3. The choice

of the class of bar to be used for the manufacture of any spring
will depend on the design of the spring and the and
stresses
service for which it is intended. The purposes for which these
classes are frequently used are as follows:

Class A, for elliptical and helical springs;

Class B, for helical springs.

I. MANUFACTURE
2. The steel may be made by the open-hearth, crucible or Process,

electric process.

(109)
 :

110 Specifications for Spring Steel.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements as
omposi ion.
tQ c ]iem j ca j composition

Elements Considered. Class A. Class B.

Carbon, per cent 0.90-1.10 0.95-1.15

Manganese, max., per cent. 0.50 0.50

Phosphorus, max., per cent. 0.05 0.05

Sulfur, max., per cent 0.05 0.05

Ladle 4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the

Analyses.
manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements
specified in Section 3. This analysis shall be made from a test
ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 3.
Check 5. An analysis may
be made by the purchaser from a
Analyses.
The chemical composition
finished bar representing each melt.
thus determined shall conform to the requirements specified
in Section 3.

III. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS.

Permissible 6. The permissible variations in the width and thickness of
Variations.
the bars shall be agreed upon by the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
IV. FINISH.
Finish. 7. The finished bars shall be free from injurious defects
and shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
Marking. 8. The bars shall, when loaded for shipment, be properly
separated and marked with the name or brand of the manufac-
turer and the melt number for identification.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 9. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free
entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
 Serial Designation: A 14-16. Ill

is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works

which concern the manufacture of the bars ordered. The manu-
facturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable
facilities to satisfy him that the bars are being furnished in
accordance with these specifications. All tests (except check
analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place of manu-
facture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall
be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the opera-
tion of the works.
10. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,

tests made in accordance with Section 5 shall be reported within

five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Bars which show injurious defects subsequent to their

acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected, and the

manufacturer shall be notified.
11. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which Rehearing,
represent rejected bars, shall be preserved for two weeks from
the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 :

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CARBON-STEEL BARS FOR RAILWAY SPRINGS
WITH SPECIAL SILICON REQUIREMENTS.
Serial Designation: A 68-18.
These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 68; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1916; Adopted, 1918.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

Material 1. These specifications cover two classes of carbon-steel

Covered,
b^g with special silicon requirements to be used for the manu-
facture of railway springs, determined by the carbon ranges
specified in Section 3. The choice of the class of bar to be used
for the manufacture of any spring will depend on the design of
the spring and the stresses and service for which it is intended.
The purposes for which these classes are frequently used are as
follows

Class A, for elliptical and helical springs;

Class B, for helical springs.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Procwa. 2. The steel may be made by the open-hearth, crucible or
electric process.
(112)
 Serial Designation: A 68-18. 113

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements as Chemical
, . , ... Composition.
to chemical composition:

Elbhxnts Considerkd. Class A. Cuss B.

Carbon, per cent 0.90-1.10 0.95-1 15

Manganese, max., per cent. 0.50 0.50

PhoephoniB, max., per cent. 0.05 0.05

Sulfur, max., per cent 0.05 0.05

Silicon, per cent 0.25-0.50 0.25-0.50

4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle Analyses,

manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements

specified in Section 3. This analysis shall be made from a test
ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 3.
5. An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a fin- Check Analyses,

ished bar representing each melt. The chemical composition

thus determined shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 3.

III. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS.

6. The permissible variations in the width and thickness of Permissible
Vanatlons
the bars shall be agreed upon by the manufacturer and the
-

purchaser.

IV. FINISH.

7. The finished bars shall be free from injurious defects Finish,

and shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
8. The when loaded for shipment, be properly
bars shall, Marking,

separated and marked with the name or brand of the manu-

facturer and the melt number for identification.
 114 Specifications for Spring Steel.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 9. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free
entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
isbeing performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works which
concern the manufacture of the bars ordered. The manufacturer
shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable facilities to
satisfy him that the bars are being furnished in accordance with
these specifications. All tests (except check analyses) and
inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to
shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted
as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
Rejection. 10. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
tests made in accordance with Section 5 shall be reported within
five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Bars which show injurious defects subsequent to their

acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected, and

the manufacturer shall be notified.
Rehearing. 11. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which
represent rejected bars, shall be preserved for two weeks from
the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 .

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CARBON-STEEL BARS FOR VEHICLE AND
AUTOMOBILE SPRINGS.
Serial Designation: A 58-16.
These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 58; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

These specifications cover two classes of carbon-steel Material

1

Covered
bars to be used for the manufacture of vehicle and automobile
-

springs, determined by the carbon ranges specified in Section 3.

The choice of the class of bar to be used for the manufacture of
any spring will depend on the design of the spring and the stresses
and service for which it is intended, the purposes for which
these classes are frequently used are as follows:

Class A, for vehicle springs;

Class B, for automobile springs.

I. MANUFACTURE.
2. The steel may be made by the open-hearth, crucible or Process,

electric process.

(115)
 16 Specifications for Spring Steel.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements as
Composition.
tQ c iiem i ca i composition:

Elements Considered. Class A. Class B.

Carbon, per cent . 85-1 .05 0.90-1.05

Manganese, per cent 0.25-0.50 0.25-0.50

Acid ;
0.05 0.05
f
Phosphorus, max., per cent]
IBasio 0.05 0.04

Sulfur, max., per cent 0.05 0.05

Ladle 4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the

Analyses.
manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements
specified in Section 3. This analysis shall be made from a test
ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 3.
Check 5. An analysis may
be made by the purchaser from a
Analyses.
finished bar representing each melt.The chemical composition
thus determined shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 3.

III. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS.

Permissible 6. The permissible variations in the width and thickness of
Variations.
the bars shall be agreed upon by the manufacturer and the
purchaser.

IV. FINISH.

Finish. 7. The finished bars shall be free from injurious defects

and shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
Marking. 8. The bars shall, when loaded for shipment, be properly

separated and marked with the name or brand of the manu-

facturer and the melt number for identification.
 Serial Designation: A 58-16. . 117

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

9. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have inspection,

free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the bars ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the bars are being fur-
nished in accordance with these specifications. All tests (except
check analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place of
manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and
shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with
the operation of the works.
10. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,

tests made inaccordance with Section 5 shall be reported within

fiveworking days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Bars which show injurious defects subsequent to their

acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected, and

the manufacturer shall be notified.
11. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which Rehearing,
represent rejected bars, shall be preserved for two weeks from
the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests, themanufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time
 .

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
SILICO-MANGANESE-STEEL BARS FOR AUTOMOBILE
AND RAILWAY SPRINGS.

Serial Designation: A 59-16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 59; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in tune of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

Material These specifications cover two classes of silico-manganese-

1
Covered.
steel bars to be used for the manufacture of automobile and
railway springs, determined by the chemical composition speci-
fied in Section 3. The choice of the class of bar to be used for
the manufacture of any spring will depend on the design of the
spring and the stresses and service for which it is intended.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 2. The steel may be made by the open-hearth, crucible or
electric process.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements as
Composition.
t0 chemical composition:
(118)
 Serial Designation: A 59-16. 119

ELrMBNTS CoNSIDIRED. CLASS A. CLASS B.

Carbon, per cent 0.45-0.55 0.55-0.65

Manganese, per cent 0. 60-0. 80 0.50-0.70

'
Acid 0.05 0.05
Phosphorus, max., per cent [
'
Basic. 0.045 0.045

Sulfur, max., per cent. 0.045 0.045

Silicon, per cent 1.80-2.10 1.60-1.80

4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle

AnaJ y 8es
manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements -

specified in Section 3. This analysis shall be made from a test

ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 3.
5. An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a check
Anal y 8eB
finished bar representing each melt. The chemical composition -

thus determined shall conform to the requirements specified in

Section 3.

III. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS.

6. The permissible variations in the width and thickness of Permissible
Variation8 -
the bars shall be agreed upon by the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
IV. FINISH.
7. The finished bars shall be free from injurious defects and Finish,

shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
8. The bars shall,when loaded for shipment, be properly Marking,
separated and marked with the name or brand of the manu-
facturer and the melt number for identification.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

9. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free inspection,
entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works
 120 Specifications for Spring Steel.

which concern the manufacture of the bars ordered. The manu-

facturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable
facilities to satisfy him that the bars are being furnished in
accordance with these specifications. All tests (except check
analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place of manu-
facture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall
be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operation of the works.
Rejection. 10. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
tests made in accordance with Section 5 shall be reported within
fiveworking days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Bars which show injurious defects subsequent to their

acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected, and the

manufacturer shall be notified.
Rehearing. 11. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which
represent rejected bars, shall be preserved for two weeks from
the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CHROME-VANADIUM-STEEL BARS FOR AUTOMO-
BILE AND RAILWAY SPRINGS.

Serial Designation: A 60-16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 60; the
finalnumber indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materi&ls in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

1. These specifications cover two classes of chrome-vana- Material

dium-steel bars to be used for the manufacture of automobile Covered -

and railway springs, determined by the chemical composition

specified in Section 3. The choice of the class of bar to be used
for the manufacture of any spring will depend on the design of
the spring and the stresses and service for which it is intended.

I. MANUFACTURE.
2. The steel may be made by the open-hearth, crucible or Process,
electric process.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements Chemical
Composition.
as to chemical composition:
(121)
 122 Specifications for Spring Steel.

Elements Considered. Class A. Class B.

Carbon, per cent 0.45-0.55 0.55-0.65

Manganese, per cent 0.50-0.80 0.60-0.90

(Acid 0.05 0.05

Phosphorus, max., per cent \

[Basic 0.04 0.04

Sulfur, max., percent 0.05 0.05

Chromium, per cent . 80-1 10. 0. 80-1 10

.

Vanadium, min., per cent I

0.15 0.15

Ladle 4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the

Analyses.
manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements
specified in Section 3. This analysis shall be made from a test
ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 3.
Check 5. An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a
Analyses.
finished bar representing each melt. The chemical composition
thus determined shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 3.

III. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS.

Permissible 6. The permissible variations in the width and thickness of
Variations. ^ ^ ars s ^ a jj ^ e agreed upon by the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
IV. FINISH.
Finish. 7. The finished bars shall be free from injurious defects and
shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
Marking. 8. The bars shall, when loaded for shipment, be properly
separated and marked with the name or brand of the manu-
facturer and the melt number for identification.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 9. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
 Serial Designation: A 60-16. 123

chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's

works which concern the manufacture of the bars ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the bars are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests
(except check analyses) and inspection shall be made at the
place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise speci-
fied,and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily
with the operation of the works.
10. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,
tests made in accordance with Section 5 shall be reported within
five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Bars which show injurious defects subsequent to their

acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected, and

the manufacturer shall be notified.
11. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which Rehearing,
represent rejected bars, shall be preserved for two weeks from
the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THB

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
HELICAL STEEL SPRINGS FOR RAILWAYS.

Serial Designation: A 61-16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 61; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1916.

Material 1- These specifications cover all helical steel springs for

Covered, suspension, draft and buffer purposes for locomotives, tenders
and cars.

Basis of (a) The springs shall be made of carbon-steel bars con-

2.
Purchase. forming to the requirements of the Standard Specifications for
Carbon-Steel Bars for Railway Springs (Serial Designation:
A 14) of the American Society for Testing Materials, unless
otherwise specified.
(b) If carbon-steel bars with special silicon requirements
or alloy-steel bars are specified, the manufacturer and the pur-
chaser shall agree upon the type and grade be of the bars to
used; which case the bars shall conform, for the respective
in
types, to the Standard Specifications for Carbon-Steel Bars for
Railway Springs with Special Silicon Requirements (Serial Desig-
nation: A 68), the Standard Specifications for Silico-Manganese-
Steel Bars for Automobile and Railway Springs (Serial Desig-
nation: A 59), or the Standard Specifications for Chrome-
Vanadium-Steel Bars for Automobile and Railway Springs
(124)
 Serial Designation: A 61 -16. 125

(Serial Designation: A 60), of the American Society for Testing

Materials.
(c) Drillings for chemical analysis shall be taken from pieces
sheared from the bars during the process of manufacture, and
not from a finished spring, unless otherwise agreed upon.

I. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. (a) An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a check Analyses,

sample representing each size of spring steel involved. The

chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the
requirements specified in Section 2 (a) or (b).
(b) Drillings for analysis shall be taken from the unworked

portion of the bars and shall represent the full cross-section

after rejecting any decarburized material.
In case of dispute, check and arbitration analyses of car-
(c)

bon steel shall be made in accordance with the Standard Methods

for Chemical Analysis of Plain Carbon Steel (Serial Designation:
A 33) of the American Society for Testing Materials, the carbon
being determined by the "direct-combustion" method; and
of alloy steel, in accordance with the Standard Methods for
Chemical Analysis of Alloy Steels (Serial Designation: A 55) of
the American Society for Testing Materials.

II. WORKMANSHIP.
4. The purchaser or his representativemay examine all inspection,

springs in each lot for workmanship and general dimensions.

5. (a) The springs shall be submitted for inspection complete Workmanship.
in the condition required by the drawings, and shall conform to
these drawings with the permissible variations specified in
this Section and Section 7.

(b) The springs shall be of uniform pitch with ends tapered

to give a reasonably square firm bearing. The points of bars
shall not protrude beyond the outside diameter of the springs.
(c) The outside dimensions of the springs, excepting the

height, shall not vary more than ^

in. from those specified.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

6. (a) From each lot of springs which has met the require- Number of Tests,

ments of Section 5, the purchaser or his representative may

 126 Specifications for Helical Railway Springs.

select for physical tests at least 10 per cent, to be tested in

accordance with the requirements of Section 7 and the
appendix.
(b) If any of the springs representing a lot fail to meet the

requirements as to physical properties specified in Section 7, but

at least half of the springs representing a lot do meet these require-
ments, each spring of the lot shall be tested and those which meet
the requirements shall be accepted. If more than half of the
springs representing a lot fail to meet the requirements specified
in Section 7, the lot represented willbe rejected.
Physical Tests. 7. The properties specified in Paragraphs (a), (b), (c) and

(d), modified if necessary to conform to the requirements of the

appendix, shall be determined in the order specified. The

spring shall not be rapped or otherwise disturbed during the
test.
(a) Solid Height. —The solid height is the perpendicular
distance between the plates of the testing machine when the
spring is compressed solid with a test load at least 1 j times that
necessary to bring all the coils in contact. The solid height
shall not vary more than | in. from that specified.
(b) Free Height. —
The free height is the height of the spring
when the load specified in Paragraph (a) has been released, and is
determined by placing a straight edge across the top of the spring
and measuring the perpendicular distance from the plate on
which the spring stands to the straight edge, at the approximate
center of the spring. The free height shall not vary more than
J in. from that specified.
(c) Loaded Height. —
The loaded height is the distance
between the plates of the testing machine when the specified
working load is applied. The loaded height shall not vary more
than | in. over nor more than ys i*1 under that specified.
-

(d) Permanent Set. —

The permanent set is the difference, if
any, between the free height and the height (measured at the
same point and in a similar manner) after the spring has been
compressed solid three times in rapid succession with the test
load specified in Paragraph (a). The permanent set shall not
exceed ^ in.
 Serial Designation: A 61-16. 127

IV. MARKING.
8. (a) The name or brand of the manufacturer, the year Marking,
and month of manufacture, and if specified, the purchaser's
class number, shall be legibly stamped on each spring at a place
not detrimental to the life or service of the spring.
(b) Any stamping by the inspector shall be so placed as not
to be detrimental to the life or service of the spring.

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

9. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have inspection,

free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works
which concern the manufacture of the springs ordered. The
manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reason-
able facilities to satisfy him that the springs are being furnished
in accordance with these specifications.All tests (except check
analyses) and inspectionbe made at the place of manu-
shall
facture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be
so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation
of the works.
10. Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on tests Rejection,

made in accordance with Section 3 shall be reported within five

working days from the receipt of samples.
11. Samples tested in accordance with Section 3, which Rehearing,

represent rejected springs, shall be preserved for two weeks from

the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
12. Any springs which fail tomeet the requirements as to Reworking,
dimensions or physical tests may be again submitted after being
reworked.
 APPENDIX.

Test Fiber Stress.

13. (a) The properties and methods of testing specified in
Section 7 have been established for carbon-steel springs on the
assumption that the maximum fiber stress under test shall not
exceed 90,000 lb. per sq. in. 1

(b) For alloy-steel springs practice has not been suffi-

ciently well established to enable definite fiber stresses to be

given. Unless otherwise agreed upon by the manufacturer and
the purchaser, alloy-steel springs shall be tested under the con-
ditions as to fiber stress specified for carbon-steel springs.

Relation Between Fiber Stress and Load.

14. To find the maximum load under which the conditions
of Section 13 (a) are fulfilled, the following formula shall
be used:
3A4l6Sd>
p= ()
8M
where P = the load in pounds; S = the stress
of the most strained
fiber inpounds per square inch; d = the diameter of the bar in
inches; and M
= the mean diameter of the helix in inches; this
is found by subtracting the diameter or thickness of the bar

from the outside diameter of the spring.

Test of Springs not in Accordance with Preceding

•Rules.

15. If it is desired to purchase under these specifications

springs in which the maximum fiber stress exceeds that specified
in Section 13 (a), the tests shall be made as specified in Section 7

1 This stress is given solely as a limiting stress not to be exceeded in testing by the methodi

covered by the specifications. It is not intended as a guide in the design of springs, as the
proper working fiber stress will depend on the class and design of the spring and on the service
for which it U Intended.

(128)
 • •

Serial Designation: A 61-16. 129

I'll- of
'111' Diam-
eter
Spring, in. NMNN CO coco CO CC00 r-
-
oo rt
x CM
1

gggg ss ss S8 gg gg Oo
HS OWNO OCCO o o oo o— T COCMCM CM CM i-i
00I-- to iro
co -o
CO

OOOO
OOOO OOO O oo
c o gg oo
o o go
COCJ O COCO 00 teg g *-teo '(I
'ir
C* CM c* cm
~- e»
CM »*
00 c- V CO CM CM

OOOO
.2
oooo OO
oo oo o o o oo
o ooo
O-H o o o
Oo
. .

H2 ;oO oo r~
Cl iO T CO r~ oc
i5
00 CO
«hOO
.'
:

CM
r^ oo 00 CO c-l

. oo oooo
o c — o oo OO °
eo|«o co core co II CliO ooco
LO«0
»o r- :

OCsocr-
CM CM
^ oc ^f CO CI -H oo o» •

.OOO OOOO oo oO CO
o oc
=o
* OOO
;

•
ci ^*o
o*-'; oo

oooo
O wo
OOO
r* co ir: Tt* «•
— cor-
-ci
cr.
o en o oc
O
:x
c = r =
oooo QOOO
O »p o o OO oo o .

Hhn lOCOM-* tO GO CJ ^3 o — CM»0 CS-*

irtlO 1.-CO
c» ;
00 t^ to »o C-l-^ o o> 00 00
. .o oooo
Q o
OOOO
icl-:co !S to
CO oo
c *o CO uo c o
* - n-w
oc = -
coco Cl ~— o oot ocoo

. .s° iClCC ^) o 3 iO
O C: C
o 1
- co
00
1T3
oo
oo e
oo
.
;

Hot)
Cft« WO 00 CO X> CO oa LO 00 CO 00 co ;

CJ CM — o O OQOO « r-o to .

o=o- oooo o
.ooo iflCJMiO o
CM
o o
»C CO
cm co o
; COC4XO OO
^»to
•s co c-i—
• 000)5) «OONN r- to <OiO
oooo OOOO O3o OO -
.5
-
O O tOMXiO
OO 00 -«
OC *-0
•«» OC COCO -^ O T f lO oo
OO
Ci
t^.'«l}• »-t •>?*

— ooe» oooor~r~ t~-to o to oa

a
"o .... . . .0 oooo oooo
fJMOM OKON OOO o
r- o *n co
CMC- -TO
l/OCOCNI to
SR . . .o C3 00 00r~ I— to to to 1"*
~
.00 ^ z.^. - oooo OOOO o
CIO
OO—
.
' OS CO CM
- r-|cO ; ;oci •O "5 oo :
. -0)00 r~r- to to '
C 9 " -r ^. ^. ^. ^ CO •

.ooo oooo
— oooo
-r S io ua
OOO c ' -

Zl
> :
CCIOOO ooeo ;

^ ^* "^" CO

OOOO oooo
Mi-:it.
C -
oooo
— — -r Oi o
^ '
-
-.c
.
:
.
;
.

;
c to C. «• WC CO »-t
«N" to
i :

»fs WO Tj« «r -*• co co CO CO CO c»

»
OOO
O O O oooo
cr co co
OOO
».cmc>
"0 r- ci
.

35
. !
O »*"» ^- h~ * CM OOO ow. co ;
; : ;
-r -»-r co co coco cm NC1CI . : Iff

C 3 OOO
"2 O —
o QOOO S r~
.-.. /: OrtON »cnci^ » :
:
: :

CO CO CO c> NNNCl : :
:

.- =
'co .n
o
co
OOO— o OOO
Vj -r -
,

- ' /'- -. c. — -. '

oot^S
H2 i 1

cococm
I ; '• :

SQao
o — co r-
c c. >C O 3 •

-:;< t---rrt c :
! : :
:

ci ci ci -.

9 ° 9 ©UOO
r~co —
.

* IS
ocsc» ;

WO
— «J0
T.
Or «0, oo
«*o "Ok'Jd 1-

o "0 o »o
3333

Is d CI tl c< COM CO CO
SOS* >/5«o io«o r o io «c I - r- oooo c»c* oo x e*
130 Specifications for Helical Railway Springs

except that the maximum test load to be applied in determining the

properties specified in Sections 7 (a) and (d) shall not be sufficient
to compress the spring solid, but shall be the load which corre-
sponds to a fiber stress of 90,000 lb. per sq. in., as determined
by Eq. 1.
Table to Facilitate Calculations.
16. Table I appended arranged to facilitate the calcu-
is

lations necessary to determine whether a spring can be tested

in accordance with the specifications without exceeding the
stress given in Section 13 (a). The table shows the loads at
which springs of various sizes are stressed to 90,000 lb. per sq. in.
These are the test loads to be used for springs tested in accord-
ance with Section 15. In testing in accordance with Section
7 (a) the load given in Table I for the given size of spring shall
not be exceeded, unless with this load the spring is compressed
solid.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ELLIPTICAL STEEL SPRINGS FOR RAILWAYS.

Serial Designation: A 62-16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 62; the
finalnumber indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1916.

1. These specifications cover all elliptic steel springs for Material

Covered -

suspension, draft and buffer purposes for locomotives, tenders

and cars.
2. (a) The springs shall be made of carbon-steel bars con- Basis of
Purchase-
forming to the requirements of the Standard Specifications for
Carbon-Steel Bars for Railway Springs (Serial Designation:
A 14) of the American Society for Testing Materials, unless
otherwise specified.
(b) If carbon-steel bars with special silicon requirements
or bars are specified, the manufacturer and the
alloy-steel
purchaser shall agree upon the type and grade of the bars to be
used; in which case the bars shall conform, for the respective
types, to the Standard Specifications for Carbon-Steel Bars for
Railway Springs with Special Silicon Requirements (Serial
Designation: A 68), the Standard Specifications for Silico-

Manganese-Steel Bars for Automobile and Railway Springs

(Serial Designation: A 59), or the Standard Specifications for
Chrome-Vanadium-Steel Bars for Automobile and Railway
(131)
 132 Specifications for Elliptical Railway Springs.

Springs (Serial Designation: A 60), of the American Society for

Testing Materials.
(c) The bands of the springs shall be made of wrought
iron conforming to the requirements of the Standard Specifica-
tions for Refined W rough t-Iron Bars (Serial Designation: A 41)
of the American Society for Testing Materials; or if agreed
upon, they may be made of "dead-soft" open-hearth steel, the
carbon content of which shall not exceed 0.15 per cent. Bands
of special design, subject to agreement between the manufacturer
and the purchaser, may be made of steel castings conforming to
the requirements of the Standard Specifications for Steel Castings,
Class B, Soft Grade (Serial Designation: A 27), of the American
Society for Testing Materials.
id) Drillings for chemical analysis shall be taken from
pieces sheared from the bars during the process of manufacture,
and not from a finished spring, unless otherwise agreed upon.
(e) In determining the loaded height and loaded length of
the springs, the "compression" method of Section 7 shall be
used, unless the "release" method of Section 8 is specified.

I. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Check Analyses. 3. (a) An analysis may be made by the purchaser from
a sample representing each size of spring steel involved. The
chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the
requirements specified in Section 2 (a) or (6).
(b) Drillings for analysis shall be taken from the unworked
portion of the bars and shall represent the full cross-section
after rejecting any decarburized material.
(c) In case of dispute, check and arbitration analyses of car-
bon steel shall be made in accordance with the Standard Methods
for Chemical Analysis of Plain Carbon Steel (Serial Designation:
A 33) of the American Society for Testing Materials, the carbon
being determined by the "direct-combustion" method; and
of alloy steel, in accordance with the Standard Methods for
Chemical Analysis of Alloy Steels (Serial Designation: A 55) of
the American Society for Testing Materials.

II. WORKMANSHIP.
inspection. 4. The purchaser or his representative may examine all

springs in each lot for workmanship and general dimensions.

 —

Serial Designation: A 62-16. 133

5. (a) The springs shall be submitted for inspection com- Workmanship,

plete in the condition requiredby the drawings, and shall con-
form to these drawings with the permissible variations specified
in this Section and Sections 7 or 8. Dimensions which affect
the contour only and do not affect the interchange or service
of the springs need only be approximated.
(b) The springs shall have the leaves properly graduated
in length, properly bent, and fitted to reasonably true circular
arcs.

(c) The bands of the springs shall not vary from the specified
dimensions more than jV in. in width and -^ in. in thickness
of straps, nor more than | in. in width across the spring.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

6. (a) From each lot of springs which has met the require- Number of Tests
ments of Section 5, the purchaser or his representative may
select for physical tests at least 25 per cent, to be tested in
accordance with the "compression" method of Section 7

or if specified, in accordance with the "release" method of Sec-

tion 8 — and the appendix.
(b) If any of the springs representing a lot fail to meet the
requirements as to physical properties specified in Section
7 or Section 8 as required, but at least half of the springs repre-
senting a lot do meet these requirements, each spring of the lot
shall be tested and those which meet the requirements shall be
accepted. If more than half of the springs representing a lot
fail to meet the requirements specified in Section 7 or Section 8

as required, the lot represented will be rejected.

7. When the "compression" method be used, the Physical Tests:
is to
SSI ° n
properties specified in Paragraphs (a), (b) and modified if
(c),
MeThod
necessary to conform to the requirements of the appendix,
shall be determined, in the order specified. The spring shall
not be rapped or otherwise disturbed during the test. The ends
of half-elliptic springs shall be supported on roller or swing
bearings.
(a) Free Height. — The free height is the height of the spring
after a test load of 1^ times the specified working load has been
applied and fully released.
 134 Specifications for Elliptical Railway Springs.

(b) Loaded Height and Loaded Length. —

The loaded height
and loaded length are respectively the height and length when
the specified working load is applied. The load shall be applied
gradually and in such a way that the specified working load
shall not be exceeded. If it is exceeded, the load shall be
released to not more than one-half the specified working load
and then increased to the specified working load. The loaded
height shall not be less, but may be f in. more than that specified.
The loaded length shall not vary more than \ in. from that
specified.

(c) Permanent Set. —The permanent set is the difference, if

any, between the free height and the height after the test load
of 1 1 times the specified working load has again been applied and
fully released. The following two requirements shall be met:
(1) The permanent set shall not exceed yj in.;
(2) If there is any permanent set not exceeding -fa in.
the difference between the free height and the height after
the test load of 1^ times the specified working load has
been applied and fully released two additional times, shall
not be greater than the permanent set first measured.
Physical Tests: 8. When the "release" method is specified, the properties
Release Method.
S p ec i£ e(j j n Paragraphs (a), (b) and (c), modified if necessary

to conform to the requirements of the appendix, shall be deter-

mined in the order specified. The spring shall not be rapped
or otherwise disturbed during the test. The ends of half-elliptic
springs shall be supported on roller or swing bearings.
(a) Free Height. —The free height is the height of the spring
after a test load of l£ times the specified working load has been
applied and fully released.
(b) Loaded Height and Loaded Length. —
The loaded height
and loaded length are respectively the height and length when a
test load of 1^ times the specified working load has been applied
and is slowly released to the specified working load. If released
to less than the specified working load, the load shall again be
raised to 1? times the specified working load and then released
to the specified working load. The loaded height shall not be
more, but may be f in. less than that specified. The loaded
length shall not vary more than \ in. from that specified.
 Serial Designation: A 62-16. 135

(c) Permanent Set. —The permanent set is the difference, if

any, between the free height and the height after the test load
of If times the specified working load has again been applied and
fully released. The following two requirements shall be met:
(1) The permanent set shall not exceed -^ in.;
(2) any permanent set not exceeding -^ in.,
If there is
the difference between the free height and the height after
the test load of If times the specified working load has been
applied and fully released two additional times, shall not
be greater than the permanent set first measured.

IV. MARKING.
9. (a) The name or brand of the manufacturer, the year Marking,
and month of manufacture, and if specified, the purchaser's
class number, shall be legibly stamped on each spring at a place
not detrimental to the life or service of the spring.
(b) Any stamping by the inspector shall be so placed as not
to be detrimental to the life or service of the spring.

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

10. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have inspection,

free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works
which concern the manufacture of the springs ordered. The
manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reason-
able facilities to satisfy him that the springs are being furnished
in accordance with these specifications. All tests (except check
analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place of man-
facture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be
so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation
of the works.
11. Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on tests Rejection,
made in accordance with Section 3 shall be reported within five
working days from the receipt of samples.
12. Samples testedaccordance with Section 3, which
in Rehearing,
represent rejected springs, shall be preserved for two weeks from
the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
 136 Specifications for Elliptical Railway Springs.

results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a

rehearing within that time.
Reworking. 13. Any springs which fail to meet the requirements as
to dimensions or physical tests may be again submitted after
being reworked.
 APPENDIX.

Test Fiber Stress.

14. (a) The and methods of testing specified
properties
in Sections 7 and
have been established for carbon-steel
8,

springs on the assumption that the maximum fiber stress under

test shall not exceed 127,500 lb. per sq. in. 1

(b) For alloy-steel springs practice has not been sufficiently

well established to enable definite fiber stresses to be given.
Unless otherwise agreed upon by the manufacturer and the pur-
chaser, alloy-steel springs shall be tested under the conditions
as to fiber stress specified for carbon-steel springs.

Relation Between Fiber Stress and Load.

15. To find the maximum loads under which the conditions
of Section 14 (a) are fulfilled, the following formula shall
be used:
2Snbh*
p_ (1)
3L
where P = the load in pounds; 5 = the stress of the most strained
fiber in pounds per square inch; w = the number of plates in
half-elliptic springs, or half the number of plates in full-elliptic
springs; 6 = the
width of each plate in inches; h = ihe thickness
of each plate in inches; and L = the distance between supports,
in inches, when the spring is loaded.

Test of Springs not in Accordance with Preceding

Rules.
16. If it is desired to purchase under these specifications
springs in which the maximum fiber stress exceeds that specified
in Section 14 (<z), the tests shall be made as specified in Sections
7 or 8 except that the test load to be applied shall not be 1$
times the specified working load, but shall be the load which
1
This stress is given solely as a limiting stress not to be exceeded in testing by the methods
covered by the specifications. It is not intended as a guide in the design of springs, as the

proper working fiber stress will depend on the class and design of the spring and on the service
for which it Is Intended.

(137;
 —

138 Specifications for Elliptical Railway Springs.

corresponds to a fiber stress of 127,500 lb. per sq. in., as

determined by Eq. 1.

Tests of Springs for which no Working Load is Specified.

17. If springs are ordered to free height and length only,

and no working load and no loaded dimensions are specified,

Table I. Test Loads for Elliptical Springs, in Pounds per Inch

of Effective Width, which will Correspond to a Maximum
Fiber Stress of 127,500 lb. per sq. in.

Length Thickness of Plate, in.

Spring,
3 1 5 3 1 9
in.
16 4 16 tV 1 16

20 1^0 265
22 136 241 377
'
24 125 221 345 497
26 115 204 319 460 625
28 107 190 296 427 681 760

30 100 177 277 398 543 707 896

32 166 259 374 509 665 840
34 ... 156 244 351 479 625 791
36 148 230 332 452 590 748
38 140 218 314 429 560 708

40 133 208 298 407 531 678

42 126 198 284 388 606 640
44 189 272 370 483 612
46 180 260 354 462 535
48 249 339 443 561

50 239 325 425 538

62 313 409 618
54 302 394 499
56 380 481
58 366 465

60 354 450

the tests specified in Sections 7 or 8 shall be made, using instead

of the "specified working load" the load which corresponds to a

fiber stress of 75,000 lb. per sq.in.,as determined by Eq. 1.

Table to Facilitate Calculations.

18. Table I appended is arranged to facilitate the calcu-
lations necessary to determine whether a spring can be tested
in accordance with the specifications without exceeding the
stress given in Section 14 (a). The table shows, for various
lengths and for various thicknesses of plate, the loads per inch
of effective width of spring corresponding to a fiber stress of
 Serial Designation: A 62-16. 139

127,500 lb. per sq. in. These are the maximum allowable test
loads, and not be exceeded in any tests.
shall
The loads are given per inch of effective width of spring.
The effective width of spring is understood to mean the width
of the individual plate multiplied by the number of plates as
defined in Section 15. Consequently the total load in pounds
for any spring is found by multiplying the value from Table I
by the product of the width of plate into the number of plates.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ELLIPTICAL STEEL SPRINGS FOR AUTOMOBILES.

Serial Designation: A 69 - 18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 69; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1916; Adopted, 1918.

Material 1. These specifications cover all elliptic steel springs fox

Covered. automobiles.
Basis of 2. (a) The manufacturer and the purchaser shall agree
Purchase. on the type and grade of steel bars to be used.
(b) If carbon-steel bars, silico-manganese-steel bars or
chrome-vanadium-steel bars are specified, the bars shall conform,
respectively, to the Standard Specifications for Carbon-Steel
Bars for Vehicle and Automobile Springs (Serial Designation:
A 58), the Standard Specifications for Silico-Manganese-Steel
Bars for Automobile and Railway Springs (Serial Designation:
A 59), or the Standard Specifications for Chrome- Vanadium-
Steel Bars for Automobile and Railway Springs (Serial Designa-
tion: A 60), of the American Society for Testing Materials.
(c) Drillings for chemical analysis shall be taken from
pieces sheared from the bars during the process of manufac-
ture, and not from a finished spring, unless otherwise agreed
upon.

CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

I.

Check Analyses, 3. (a) An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a

sample representing each size of spring steel involved. The
(140)
 Serial Designation: A 69-18. 141

chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the

requirements of Section 2 (b).

(b) Drillings for analysis shall be taken from the unworked

portion of the bars and shall represent the full cross-section
any decarburized material.
after rejecting
In case of dispute, check and arbitration analyses of
(c)

carbon steel shall be made in accordance with the Standard

Methods Chemical Analysis of Plain Carbon Steel (Serial
for
Designation: A 33) of the American Society for Testing Mate-
rials, the carbon being determined by the "direct-combustion"

method; and of alloy steel, in accordance with the Standard

Methods for Chemical Analysis of Alloy Steels (Serial Designa-
tion: A 55) of the American Society for Testing Materials.

II. WORKMANSHIP.
4. or his representative may examine all
The purchaser inspection,

springs in each lot for workmanship and general dimensions.

5. (a) The springs shall be submitted for inspection com- Workmanship,
plete in the condition required by the drawings, and shall con-
form to these drawings with the permissible variations specified
in this Section and Section 8. Dimensions which affect the
contour only and do not affect the interchange or service of the
spring need only be approximated.
(b) The springs shall have the plates properly graduated

in length, properly bent, and fitted reasonably true to the curves

specified.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

6. All of the springs may be tested. Number of Tests
7. (a) Full-elliptic springs shall be tested in the upright Methods of
Te,lin e-
position. One-quarter-elliptic, half-elliptic, three-quarter-
elliptic, and cantilever springs shall be tested in the inverted
position, and bhall be so supported as to give free lateral move-
ment on compression while remaining in position selected for
test. Methods of supporting and measuring the various types of
springs are illustrated in Figs. 1 to 7. inclusive.
(b) The anvil or pressure block of the testing machine shall
be of the form shown in Fig. 8.
(c) Unless otherwise specified, all measurements of height
are to be made as follows: in half-elliptic springs (Figs. 1 and
 142 Specifications for Automobile Springs.

2), between the surfaces of the pressure block and a line joining
the centers of the eyes (or through the points of support where
there are no eyes); in full and three-quarter-elliptic springs
(Figs. 3 and
between the surfaces of the upper and lower
4),
pressure blocks; in one-quarter-elliptic springs (Figs. 5 and 6),
between the center of the eye (or point of support where there
is no eye) and the supporting pad of the spring, measured at

right angles to the surface of the latter; and in half-elliptic

cantilever springs (Fig. 7), between the center of the floating
eye and a horizontal plane passing through the lower surface
of the spring (in inverted position) at the center bolt.
(d) In conducting tests, all measurements of height shall
be taken to at least the nearest ^t in. All readings of load
shall be taken to at least the nearest 5 lb.

(e) Maximum Test Load. —The maximum test load required

in Section 8 shall be twice the specified normal load, unless
such a test load produces a deflection greater than the maximum
deflection possible under the car. In the latter case, the maxi-
mum test load used shall be the load producing the maximum
de flectio n possible under the car.
(/) Application of Load. —The application of the loads
under which the height is to be measured as specified in Section 8
shall be made gradually and in such a way that the required
load shall not be exceeded. If it is exceeded, the load shall
be released to not more than one-half the required load and
then increased to the required load under which the height is
to be measured. The spring shall not be rapped or otherwise
disturbed during the test.
Physical Tests. 8. The physical properties of the springs shall be deter-
mined as follows: 1

(a) Loaded Height. —

The loaded height is the height when
the specified normal load is applied after the maximum test
load as defined in Section 7 (e) has been applied and fully
released three times. The loaded height in the case of pleasure
cars, unless otherwise specified, shall not be less,but may be
\ in. and f in. more than that specified for front and rear springs,
respectively.

J See Section 14, "Appendix," for a convenient routine o/ tests.

 Serial Designation: A 69-18. 143

WWW/'7" '"" **" """">

Figs. 1 Ai\D 2. — Half-Elliptic Spring Compression Test Support.

Fig. 3. — Full-Elliptic Spring Compression Test Support.

.-Block Representing
Spring Seat C£3 ,

/- Beam

Pic. 4. — Three-Quarter-Elliptic Spring Compression Test Support.

144 Specifications for Automobile Springs.

(b) Permanent Set. —

The permanent set is the difference,
if any, between two successive measurements of the height
under a load equal to 75 per cent of the specified normal load.

/Block Representing
Spring Sear

Figs. 5 and 6. — One-Quarter-Elliptic Spring Compression Test Support.

Fixed Height t
on Car.

Height

Fig. 7. —Half-Elliptic Cantilever Spring Compression Test Support.

This load shall be applied for the first time after the maximum
test load has been applied and fully released three times, and
for the second time after the maximum test load has been
 Serial Designation: A 69-18. 145

applied again and fully released. The following two require-

ments shall be met:
(1) The permanent set shall not exceed tV m -J

(2) If there is any permanent set not exceeding tV in.,

the maximum test load shall be applied and fully released

two additional times and a load equal to 75 per cent of the
specifiednormal load applied a third time. The height under
this third application shall not be less than that measured
under the second application.

Fig. 8. — Pressure Block for Testing Springs.

(c) Flexibility. —The flexibility, when specified, shall be

expressed in pounds per inch of deflection. It shall be deter-
mined by measuring the height under 75 per cent of the specified
normal load and the height under 125 per cent of that load,
and dividing the difference in loads by the difference in heights.
The quotient is the flexibility in pounds per inch of deflection
and shall not vary from that specified more than 5 per cent.

IV. MARKING.
9. (a) The name or brand of the manufacturer, the year Marking,
and month of manufacture, and if specified, the purchaser's
class or part number, shall be legibly stamped on each spring at
a place not detrimental to the life or service of the spring, on
the exposed end of the compression side of a plate.
(b) Any stamping by the inspector shall be so placed as
not to be detrimental to the life or service of the spring.
 146 Specifications for Automobile Springs.

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. io. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free
entry at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works

which concern the manufacture of the springs ordered. The

manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reason-
able facilities to satisfy him that the springs are being furnished
in accordance with these specifications. All tests (except check
analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place ofmanu-
facture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall
be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operation of the works.
Rejection. n. Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on tests
made in accordance with Section 3 shall be reported within
five working days from the receipt of samples.
Rehearing. 12. Samples tested in accordance with Section 3, which
represent rejected springs, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
Reworking. 13. Any springs which fail to meet the requirements as to
dimensions or physical tests may be again submitted after
being remade by the manufacturer, such remaking to consist of
insertion of new plates or of annealing, reforming and retreating
of old plates. No springs shall contain cold reworked plates.
 :

APPENDIX.

Recommended Routine for Testing.

14. The by Section 8 for the deter-
physical tests required Routine for
e " tng -
mination of loaded height, permanent set, and flexibility, can
be carried out with the least possible number of operations by
using the following routine of loading and measuring:
(1)Apply the maximum test load as defined in Section 7 (e)
and release fully. Repeat this operation twice.
(2) Apply 75 per cent of the specified normal load, and
measure the height (denote by hi). This height is the first
measurement for permanent set and for flexibility.
(3) Apply the specified normal load and measure the
height (denote by h 2 ). This is the loaded height.
(4) Apply 125 per cent of the specified normal load and
measure the height (denote by h 3 ). This is the second measure-
ment for flexibility.
(5) Apply the maximum test load and release fully.

(6) Apply 75 per cent of the specified normal load and

measure the height (denote by h A ). This is the second measure-
ment for permanent set. If // 4 is less than hi the difference is
the permanent set. If the permanent set does not exceed ?V in.,
the following operations are required
(7) Apply the maximum test load and release fully.
Repeat this operation once.

(8) Apply 75 per cent of the specified normal load, and

measure the height (denote by h*). This is the third measure-
ment for permanent set.

Then.—
Loaded II eight = h%.
Permanent Set = hi — h t , and springs are rejected if this is

more than i\ in. or if h : than /;

, is less ;
.

pi •/,•/•/ _$X (specified normal load)

hi — hz
(H7)
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association tor Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
BILLET-STEEL CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT BARS.

Serial Designation: A 15-14.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 15; the
finalnumber indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1911; Revised, 1912, 1913, 1914.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for phosphorus in acid steels shall be raised 0.01 per cent
above the values given in these specifications. This shall be effective during
the period of the war and until otherwise ordered by the Society.

Material 1. (a) These specifications cover three classes of billet-steel

Covered.
conC rete reinforcement bars, namely: plain, deformed, and cold-
twisted.
(b) Plain and deformed bars are of three grades, namely:
structural-steel; intermediate and hard.
Basis of 2. (a) The structural-steel grade shall be used unless other-
Purchase.
^^ spec ifi ecj.

{b) If desired, cold-twisted bars may be purchased on the

basis of tests of the hot-rolled bars before twisting, in which
case such tests shall govern and shall conform to the require-
ments specified for plain bars of structural-steel grade.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 3. (a) The steel may be made by the Bessemer or open-
hearth process.
(148)
 :

Serial Designation: A 15-14. 149

(b) The bars shall be rolled from new billets. No rerolled

material will be accepted.
4. Cold-twisted bars shall be twisted cold with one complete Cold-twisted
Bars.
twist in a length not over 12 times the thickness of the bar.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

5. The steel shall conform to the following requirements chemical
Composition.
as to chemical composition

I Bessemer not over 0. 10 per cent

Phosphorus
Open-hearth " " 0.05
\

6. An made by the
analysis of each melt of steel shall be Ladle
AnaI y S6B
manufacturer to determine the percentages man- of carbon,
-

ganese, phosphorus and sulfur. This analysis shall be made

from a test ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The
chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to the
purchaser or his representative, and shall conform to the
requirements specified in Section 5.
7. Analyses may be made by the purchaser from finished check
Analyses,
bars representing each melt of open-hearth steel, and each
melt, or lot of ten tons, of Bessemer steel. The phosphorus
content thus determined shall not exceed that specified in

Section 5 by more than 25 per cent.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

8. (a) The bars shall conform to the following requirements Tension Tests,

as to tensile properties:

Tensile Properties.

Plain Bars. Deformed Bsrs.

Cold-
Properties twinted
Considered. Structural- Inter- j
Structural- Inter- Hard Bars.
Steel mediate Steel mediate Grade.
J
Grade !

Grade. Grade. Grade. Grade.

Tensile strength, lb. 65 000 70 000 55 000 70 000 Recorded

per sq. in to to 80 000 min. to to I 000 min only.
70 000
r
8. ) 000 70 000 MO00
Yield point, min.. lb. :

per iq. in S3 000 40 000 so ooo aa ooo 40000 60 000 65 000

Elongation in 8 in.
1400 fi 1 200 0OOQ I 250 00no 1 125 00O« 1000 000a
min., per cent 5
Tens. str. Tens. str. Tins. str. Tens. str. Tens. str. Tens, str

• Re* Section 9.
 150 Specifications for Billet-Steel Reinforcement Bars.

(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam of the testing machine.
Modifications In 9. For plain and deformed bars over J in. in thickness
(a)
Elongation.
or diameter, a deduction of 1 from the percentages of elongation

specified in Section 8 (a) shall be made for each increase of $ in.

in thickness or diameter above f in.
(b) For plain and deformed bars under xV m m thickness -

or diameter, a deduction of 1 from the percentages of elongation

specified in Section 8 (a) shall be made for each decrease of

rV in. in thickness or diameter below xV m -

Bend Tests. 10. The test specimen shall bend cold around a pin with-
out cracking on the outside of the bent portion, as follows:

Bend-Test Requirements.

Plain Bars. Deformed Bars.

Thickness Cold-
or twisted
Diameter Structural- Inter- Hard Structural- Inter- Hard Ban.
of Bar. Steel mediate Grade. Steel mediate Grade.
Grade. Grade. Grade. Grade.

180 deg. 180 deg. 180 deg. 180 deg. 180 deg. 180 deg. 180 deg.
d=-t d=2t d=3t d=t d-3t d=4t d=2t
180 deg. 90 deg. 90 deg. 180 deg. 90 deg. 90 deg. 180 deg.
d=t d=2t d-=3t d=2t d«3t d=4t d-3t

Explanatory Notb: d=the diameter of pin about which the specimen is bent;
t«»the thickness or diameter of the specimen.

Test Specimen!. 11. (a) Tension and bend test specimens for plain and
deformed bars shall be taken from the finished bars, and shall
be of the full thickness or diameter of bars as rolled; except
that the specimens for deformed bars may be machined for
a length of at least 9 in., if deemed necessary by the manufac-
turer to obtain uniform cross-section.
(b) Tension and bend test specimens for cold-twisted bars

shall be taken from the finished bars, without further treatment;

except as specified in Section 2 (b).
Number of Tests. 12. (a) One made from
tension and one bend test shall be
each melt of open-hearth and from each melt, or lot of
steel,
ten tons, of Bessemer steel; except that if material from one
melt differs f in. or more in thickness or diameter, one tension
and one bend test shall be made from both the thickest and the
thinnest material rolled.
 Serial Designation: A 15-14. 151

(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or

develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
specimen than that specified in Section 8 (a) and any
is less
part of the fracture is outside the middle third of the gage length,
as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before
testing, a retest shall be allowed.

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WEIGHT.

13. The weight of any lot of bars shall not vary more than Permissible
Variations.
5 per cent from the theoretical weight of that lot.

V. FINISH.
14. The finished bars shall be free from injurious defects Finish,

and shall have a workmanlike finish.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

15. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free inspection,

entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser is

being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works which

concern the manufacture of the bars ordered. The manufac-
turer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable
facilities to satisfy him that the bars are being furnished in
accordance with these specifications. All tests (except check
analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place of manu-
facture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall
be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the opera-
tion of the works.
16. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejoction.
tests made in accordance with Section 7 shall be reported within
five working days from the receipt of samples.
(6) Bars which show injurious defects subsequent to their
acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected, and
the manufacturer shall be notified.
17. Samples tested in accordance with Section 7, which Rehearing,
represent rejected bars, shall be preserved for two weeks from
the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 ^MERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
RAIL-STEEL CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT BARS.

Serial Designation: A 16 - 14.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 16; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1913; Revised, 1914.

Material 1. These specifications cover three classes of rail-steel con-

Covered.
crete reinforcement bars, namely: plain, deformed, and hot-
twisted.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 2. The bars be rolled from standard section Tee rails.
shall
Hot-twisted 3. Hot- twisted bars shall have one Complete twist in a length
Bars.
not over 12 times the thickness of the bar.

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 4. (a) The bars shall conform to the following minimum
requirements as to tensile properties:

Properties Considered. Plain Bars. Deformed and Hot-

twisted bars.

80 000 80 000

50 000 50 000

1 200 000 1 000 000

Tens. atr. Tens. atr.

1
See Seotion 5.

(152)
 Serial Designation: A 16-14. 153

(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam of the testing machine.
5. (a) For bars over f in. in thickness or diameter, a deduc- Modification
Elon e at,on
tion of 1 from the percentages of elongation specified in Section -

4 (a) shall be made for each increase of g in. in thickness or

diameter above f in.
(b) For bars under yV in. in thickness or diameter, a deduc-

tion of 1 from the percentages of elongation specified in Section

4 (a) shall be made for each decrease of xV in. in thickness or
diameter below xV in.
6. The test specimen shall bend cold around a pin without Bend Tests,

cracking on the outside of the bent portion, as follows:

Thickness or Diameter of Bar. Plain Bars. |

Deformed and Hot-
twisted Bars.

Under ^ in 180 deg. 180 deg

d=3 t d=4 t

90 deg. 90 deg.
d=3 t d=4 t

Explanatory Note: d =the diameter of pin about which the specimen is bent;
t =the thiol. ness or diameter of the specimen.

7. (a) Tension and bend test specimens for plain and de- Test Specimens,
formed bars shall be taken from the finished bars, and shall be
of the full thickness or diameter of bars as rolled; except that
the specimens for deformed bars may be machined for a length
of at least 9 in., if deemed necessary by the manufacturer to
obtain uniform cross-section.
Tension and bend test specimens for hot-twisted bars
(b)
shallbe taken from the finished bars, without further treatment.
8. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from Number of Tests,

each lot of ten tons or less of each size of bar rolled from rails
varying not more than 10 lb. per yd. in nominal weight.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or

develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen

substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
specimen than that specified in Section 4 (a) and any part
is less
of the fracture is outside the middle third of the gage length,
as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before
testing, a retest shall be allowed.
 154 Specifications for Rail-Steel Reinforcement Bars.

III. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WEIGHT.

Permissible 9. The weight of any lot of bars shall not vary more than
Variations.
5 per cent from the theoretical weight of that lot.

IV. FINISH.
Finish. io. The finished bars shall be free from injurious defects
and shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 1 1 . The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free
entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser

isbeing performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works which

concern the manufacture of the bars ordered. The manufac-
turer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable
facilities to satisfy him that the bars are being furnished in
accordance with these specifications. All tests and inspection
shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment,
unless otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
Rejection. \2. Ba r s which show injurious defects subsequent to their
acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected, and
the manufacturer shall be notified.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CARBON-STEEL AND ALLOY-STEEL BLOOMS,
BILLETS AND SLABS FOR FORGINGS.

Serial Designation: A 17- 18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 17; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1913; Revised, 1918.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in ali steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

1. The term "billet" is used in these specifications to Definition of

designate blooms, billets and slabs. Terms.

2. (a) These specifications cover billets of carbon and Material

alloy steel. Eight types of Covered
steel are covered, one type of carbon -

and seven types of alloy steels, classification by type being made

according to the chemical composition, other than carbon.
(b) Each type of steel is sub-divided into grades according

to the carbon content. There are eight grades of carbon steel

and seven grades of each type of alloy steel.
(c) The billets are further divided into two classes,
designated Classes I and II. Class I is the standard for all types
and grades; and Class II is a special class applicable to Grades
Nos. 4 to 8 inclusive, in Type A, and to Grades Nos. 14 to 17,
;

inclusive, in all other types. Class II differs from Class I in

 156 Specifications for Steel Billets.

the method of sampling for chemical analysis and in chemical

requirements.
Basis of 3. Billets shall be purchased as semi-finished rolled or forged
Purchase.
materiaL

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 4. The steel may be made by the open-hearth or any other
process approved by the purchaser.
Discard. 5. A sufficient discard shall be made from each ingot to
secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation.
Reduction from 6. Unless otherwise specified, the billets shall be made from
ingot.
ingots of at least four times the cross-sectional area of the billet.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

ChemkaJ 7.The steel shall conform to the following requirements as
Composition.
tQ Qh emi ca\ composition for type and grade:
(a) Type.— The types of steel shall be as indicated in Table I.
(b) Grade. —
The carbon ranges for the various grades shall
be as follows for carbon and alloy steel:

Carbon Steel — Type A. Alloy Steels —Types B to H, incl.

Grade. Carbon, Per Cent. Grade. Carbon, PurCwr.
1 0.05-0.15 11 0.10-020

2 0.15-0.25 12 0.15-0. 28

3 0.20-0 30 13 0.20-0.30

4 0.25-0.40 14 0.25-0.88

5 0.30-0.45 15 0.30-0.41

6 0.35-0.50 16 0.35-0.50

7 0.40-0.55 17 0.45-0.60

8 0.45-0.80

Note 1. When the steel is to be used for case-hardening purposes,

the manganese should be specified not to exceed 0.50 per cent. When the
minimum carbon specified is 0.35 per cent or over, the manganese range
may be specified 0.30 - 0.60 per cent.
Note 2. In selecting billets for making forgings of Classes K, L and
M, as defined in the Standard Specifications for Carbon-Steel and Alloy-
Steel Forgings (Serial Designation: A 18) of the American Society for Test-
ing Materials, it is suggested that the use of steel with a relatively high carbon
content will permit the use of a high draw-back temperature and thus put
the 6teel in its best physical condition for service, shock and similar conditions.
 ...

Serial Designation: A 17-18. 157

8. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle Analyses,

manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements
specified in Section 7. This analysis shall be made from a test
ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The chemical com-
position thus determined shall be reported to the pui chaser or
his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 7.

9. (a) Class I. — For billets of Class I, an analysis may be check Analyse!

made by the purchaser from one billet representing each melt.

Table I.- -Types of Steel.

TrPB.

EutMINTS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H
CoNBro-
IBBO.
Chrome-Nickel Steel. Chrome-
Carbon Nickel Chrome Vanadium
Steel. Steel. 1.00-1.50 1.50-2.00 2.75-3.25 3.00 min. SteeL 8teeL
percent Ni. percent Ni. per cent Ni. per cent Ni.

Man-
ganese,
percent.. 0.50-0.80 0.50-0.80 0.50-0.80 0.30-0.60 0.45-0.75 0.30-0.60 0.30-0.60 0.50-0.80

Phosphor-
us, max.,
percent.. 0.045 0.04 0.04 04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04

8ulfur,
max.,
percent.. 0.050 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045

Nickel, not under not under

percent.. 3.00 1.00-1.50 1.50-2.00 2.75-3.25 3.00

Chromium, not undor

percent.. 0.45-0.75 0.90-1.25 0.60-0.95 1.00 0.60-0.90 0.80-1.10

Vanadium,
min.,
per cent. . 0.16

The chemical composition thus determined shall confonn to the

requirements specified in Section 7. Drillings for analysis shall
be taken with a f-in. drill, parallel to the axis of the ingot as
cast, at any point midway between the center and surface of
the billet.

(b) Class II. — For billets of Class II, the purchaser or his
representative may select one top-cut billet from which to make
check analyses to represent each melt. Two sets of drillings
shall be taken from the top face of this billet at points on the
same diagonal of the billet. The drillings shall be taken with
 158 Specifications for Steel Billets.

a f -in. drill parallel to the axis of the ingot as cast. The distance
from the center of the billet to the drilling points shall be respec-
tively 15 and 80 per cent of the length of the half diagonal of the
billet.

(c) From the drillings taken at the 80-per-cent point a com-

plete analysis may be made. The chemical composition thus
determined shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 7.

From the drillings taken at the 15-per-cent point a

(d)
carbon determination may be made. The difference between
the carbon content of the drillings from the 15-per-cent point
and that of the drillings from the 80-per-cent point, expressed as
a percentage of the latter, shall not exceed the following values:

(1) For billets 15 in. or under in thickness, 15 per cent;

(2) For billets over 15 in. in thickness, 20 per cent.

(e) If in any melt the drillings taken in accordance with

Paragraph (b) do not conform to the requirements of Para-

graph (d) additional drillings may be taken in a similar manner
,

after making a further top discard from the material from each
ingot of at least 10 per cent of the original ingot weight. The
results of this analysis shall conform to the requirements of
Paragraph (d) ; otherwise, the melt represented shall be rejected.

WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

III.

Chipping. io. (a) Billets may be chipped to remove surface defects,

provided that the depth of chipping does not exceed ^V for m -

each inch of dimension concerned, up to a maximum depth of

f in., and provided that the width of the chipping is at least
four times its greatest depth; except that in the case of slabs
where the width is at least twice the thickness, the depth of
chipping on the wide surfaces may exceed this allowance by
50 per cent, up to a maximum depth of f in.
In special cases, particularly large alloy-steel billets
(b)

where necessary and is not injurious, greater depth of chip-

it is

ping may be permitted by special agreement between the manu-

facturer and the purchaser.
Finish. n. The billets shall be free from injurious defects and shall
have a workmanlike finish.
 Serial Designation: A 17-18. 159

IV. MARKING.
12. (a) The melt number shall be legibly stamped on each Marking,
billet 6 in. or over in thickness, and on billets of smaller section
when so specified.
(b) For billets of Class I, the top end of all top-cut billets
6 in. or over in thickness shall be legibly hot-stamped with the
letter "T"
and marked with paint.
For billets of Class II, the top ends of the top, second,
(c)

third, and following cut billets from each ingot shall be legibly
hot-stamped with the letters "A", "B", "C", etc., to show the
position of the billet in the ingot, and marked with paint.

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

13. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall inspection,
have free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the
purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the billets ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the billets are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. Tests and
inspection at the place of manufacture shall be made prior to
shipment.
(b) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the accept-

ance or rejection of billets in his own laboratory or elsewhere.

Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense of the pur-
chaser.
(c) All tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
14. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejections based on Rejection,

tests made in accordance with Section 13 (b) shall be reported

within five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Billets which show injurious defects while being finished

by the purchaser will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall

be notified.
15. Samples tested in accordance with Section 13 (b), Rehearing,
which represent rejected billets, shall be preserved for two
weeks from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction
with the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim
for a rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CARBON-STEEL AND ALLOY-STEEL FORGINGS.

Serial Designation: A 18-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 18; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1901; Revised, 1905, 1914, 1916, 1918.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

Material 1. (a) These specifications cover the various classes of

Covered.
car bon-steel and alloy-steel forgings now commonly used and
not covered by other existing specifications of the American
Society for Testing Materials.
(b) The purposes for which these classes are frequently
used are as follows:
Class A, for forgings which may be welded or case-hardened;
Class B, for mild-steel forgings for structural purposes,
for minor ship fittings, etc.;
Class C, for mild-steel forgings for structural purposes,
for ships, etc.;
Classes D, E, F, G, H and 7, for various machinery forg-
(160)
 Serial Designation: A 18-18. 161

ings, choice depending upon design and upon the stresses and
services to be imposed. •>

K, L and M, for various machinery forgings, choice

Classes
depending upon design and upon the stresses and services to be
imposed, and upon the character of machining operations to be
done.

I. MANUFACTURE.
2. The steel may
be made by the open-hearth or any other Process,

process approved by the purchaser.

3. A sufficient discard shall be made from each ingot to Discard,
secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation.
4. The manufacturer and the purchaser shall agree upon prolongations
for Tests
forgings on which a prolongation for test purposes shall be
'

provided.
5. If boring is specified, the diameter of the hole shall Boring.

be at least 20 per cent of the maximum outside diameter or

thickness of the forging, exclusive of collars and flanges.
6. Heat treatment, if required, shall consist of either Heat
Treatment.
annealing or quenching and tempering, as specified.
(a) shall be allowed to become
For annealing, the forgings
cold after forging. They
be uniformly reheated to the
shall then
proper temperature to refine the grain (a group thus reheated
being known as an "annealing charge"), and allowed to cool
uniformly.
(6) For quenching and tempering, the forgings shall be
allowed to become cold after forging. They shall then be
uniformly reheated to the proper temperature to refine the
grain (a group thus "quench-
reheated being known as a
ing charge"), and quenched under sub-
in some medium
stantially uniform conditions
for each quenching charge.
Finally, they shall be uniformly reheated to the proper tem-
perature for tempering or "drawing back" (a group thus
reheated being known as a "tempering charge"), and allowed
to cool uniformly.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

7. (a) The steel shall conform to the following requirements Chemical
,r ••
• i Composition
as to chemical composition:
 162 Specifications for Steel Forgings.

Classes.
Elements Considered.
A. B.C.D.E.F.G. H, I. K, L. M.

0.30-0.55 0.40-0.80 0.40-0.80

Phosphorus, per cent:

Acid not over 0.05 not over 0.05 not over 0.04 not over 0.05 not over 0.04
" " 0.05 " " 0.05 " " 0.04 " " 0.04 " " 0.04

Sulfur, per cent " " 0.05 " " 0.05 " " 0.05 " " 0.05 " " 0.05

not under 3.00

(b) The composition

of alloy steel, other than phosphorus
and be used in forgings of Classes K, L and M, shall
sulfur, to
be agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser.
Ladle 8. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the
Analyses.
manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon, manganese
and the elements specified in Section 7. This analysis shall be
made from a test ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The
chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to the
purchaser or his representative, and shall conform to the require-
ments specified in Section 7.
Check 9. An analysis may
be made by the purchaser from a
Analyses.
forging representing each melt. The chemical composition thus
determined shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 7. Drillings for analysis may be taken from the forging
or from a full-size prolongation of the same, at any point midway
between the center and surface of solid forgings, and at any
point midway between the inner and outer surfaces of the wall
of bored forgings; or turnings may be taken from a test specimen.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 10. (a) The forgings shall conform to the requirements
as to tensile properties specified in Tables I, II and III.

(b) The classification by size of the forging shall be deter-

mined by the specified diameter or thickness which governs
the size of the prolongation from which the test specimen is

taken.
(c) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the
beam of the testing machine.
 Serial Designation: A 18-18. 163

(d) The elastic limit called for by these specifications shall

be determined by an extensometer reading to 0.0002 in. The
extensometer shall be attached to the specimen at the gage
marks and not to the shoulders of the specimen nor to any part
of the testing machine. When the specimen is in place and the
extensometer attached, the testing machine shall be operated
so as to increase the load on the specimen at a uniform rate.
The observer shall watch the elongation of the specimen as shown
by the extensometer and shall note, for this determination, the
load at which the rate of elongation shows a sudden increase.
The extensometer shall then be removed from the specimen,
and the test continued to determine the tensile strength.

Radius
not less
—
1

thanf.^ 2? >j
i

\J

T 1 f \

1
>

k- 2 Gage Length -H

Note - The Gagelengrh, Parallel Portions and Fillers shall be as Shown,

but the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of
the Testing Machine.

Fig. I.

(e) made only after final treatment.

Tests of forgings shall be
11. (a) Tensionspecimens shall be taken from a full- Tension Test
test
size prolongation of any forging. For forgings with large ends s P ecimens -

or collars the prolongation may be of the same cross-section

as that of the forging back of the large end or collar. Speci-
mens may be taken from the forging itself with a hollow drill,
ifapproved by the purchaser.
(b) The axis of the specimen shall be located at any point

midway between the center and surface of solid forgings, and at

any point midway between the inner and outer surfaces of the
wall of bored forgings, and shall be parallel to the axis of the
forging in the direction in which the metal is most drawn out.
 — . , ...

164 Specifications for Steel Forgings.

(c) The specimens shall conform to the dimensions shown

in Fig. 1. The ends shall be of a form to fit the holders of the
testing machine in such a way that the load shall be axial.

Table I. Tensile Properties (Classes A to F, inclusive).

For Forcings whose Maximum Outside Diameter or Over-all Thickness is not over 20 m.

Size. Tensile Reduction of

Strength, Yield Area, min.,
Outside min. Point, per cent.
Class. Diameter (except min.,
Class A), lb. per
Over-all lb. per sq in.
Thickness. sq. in.

A 47 000
All sizes. to 0.5 tens str.
Untreated
60 000

f Not over 12 in. 60 000 0.5 tens. str.

B
Untreated Over 12 to 20
in., inclusive. . 60 000 0.5 tens. str.

Not over 12 in. 60 000 0.5 tens. str.

C
Annealed Over 12 to 20
I

in., inclusive. 60 000 0.5 tens. str.

jNot over 8 in. . . 75 000 0.5 tens. str.

D Over 8 to 12 in.,

Untreated inclusive 75 000 0.5 tens str.

Over 12 to 20
in., inclusive. 75 000 0.5 tens. str.

Not over 8 in .
75 000 0.5 tens. str.

E Over 8 to 12 in.,
Annealed inclusive '5 000 0.5 tens. str.

Over 12 to 20
in., inclusive. 75 000 0.5 tens. str.

Not over 8 in 80 000 0.5 tens. str.

F Over 8 to 12 in.,
inclusive 80 000 0.5 tens. str.
Annealed
Over 12 to 20
in., inclusive. 80 000 0.5 tens. str.

Number of 12. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, tests shall

Tests.
be made as follows:
(a) For untreated forgings, one tension test shall be made
from each melt.
 —

Serial Designation: A 18-18. 165

Table II. Tensile Properties (Classes G, H, and I).

Elongation in 2 Reduction of
Tensile Elastic in., min., per Area, min.,
Strength, Limit, cent. per cent.
Cl A98. Size. min., min.,
lb. per lb. per
sq. in. sq. in. Inverse Not Inverse '
Not
Ratio. under Ratio. under

Fob Forcings whose Maximum Outside Diameter or Thickness is not over 10 in.
when Solid, and not over 20 in. when Bored.
Up to 4 in. in out-
side diameter or
thickness, 2-in. 2 100 000 4 000 000
max. wall. 90 000 55 000 20.5 39
Tens. str. Tens. str.
Over 4 to 7 in. in
outside diam-
eter or thick-
G ness, 3J-in. max. 2000^00 3 800 000
Quenched wall 85 000 50 000 20.5 39
Tens. str. Tens. str.
AND Over 7 to 10 in. in
Tempered. outside diam-
eter or thick-
ness, 5-in. max. 1 900 000
wall 85 000 50 000 19.5 37
Tens. str.
Outside diameter
or thickness not
over 20 in., 5 to
8-in. wall 82 500 48000 ! 1 800 000 19 3 400 000 86
I
Tens. str. Tens. str.

For Forqinqb whose Maximum Outside Diameter or Over-all Thickness is not

over 20 in.
Outside diameter
or over-all
thickness not
2 000 000
over 12 in 80 000 50 000 22
H Tens. str.
Nickel Outside diameter
Steel, or over-all
Annealed. thickness over
12 to 20 in., in-
clusive 80 000 50 000 l 900 00 ° 21 3 40 ° 00 ° 88
Tens. str. Tens. str.

Fob Forcings whose Maximum Outside Diameter or Thickness is not over 10 in.
when Solid, and not over 20 in. when Bored.
Up to 4 in. in out-
side diameter or
thickness, 2-in. 2 200 000 4 500 000
max. wall 100 000 70 000 2Q
Tens. str. Tens. str.
Over 4 to 7 in. in
outside diam-
et'-r or thick-
I ness, 3J-in.
Nickel 2 100 000 4 3 00 000
max. wall 100 000 65 000 20 41
'Steel, Tens. str.
Quenched Over 7 to 10 in. in
and outside diam-
Teupeked. eter or thick-
. 5-in . max. 2 000 000 4 I00 0O0
wall 90 000 00 000 2 I 41
Tens. str. Tens. str.
Outside diani' b r
or thlokneM not
ovr 20 in., 5 U) :
3 900 000
8-in. wall 85 000 55 000 20 41
Term str. Tens. str.
 — .

166 Specifications for Steel Forglngs.

Table III. Tensile Properties (Classes K, L and M).

Fok Forcings whobb Maximum Outside Diameter or Thickness is not over 10 in. when Solid, and
not over 20 in. when bored.

Tensile Elastic Elongation Reduction

Class. Size. Strength.^ Limit, min., in 2 in., min., of Area, min.,
lb. per sq. in. lb. per sq. in. per cent. per ocnt.

! Up to 2 in. in outside diameter

|
or thickness, 1-in. max. wall 95 000 - 115 000 70 000 20 50

Over 2 to 4 in. in outside diame-

ter or thickness, 2-in. max. wall 90 000-110 000 65 000 20 50
K
Allot 1 Over 4 to diame-
7 in. in outside
Steel, ter or thickness, 3J-in. max.
Quunched 90 000-110 000 65 000 20 50
AND
Tempered. Over 7 to 10 in. in outside diam-
i cter or thickness, 5-in. max.
90 000-110 000 65 000 20 50

Outside diameter or thickness

not over 20 in., 5 to 8-in. wall 85 000 - 105 000 60 000 20 50

Up to 2 in. in outside diameter

or thickness, 1-in. max. wall. 105 000 - 125 000 80 000 20 50

Over 2 to 4 in. in outside diame-

terorthickness,2-in. max. wall 100 000 - 120 000 75 000 20 50
L
Allot Over 4 to 7 in. in outside diame-
Steel, !
ter or thickness, 3$ -in. max.
Quenched i
wall 100 000-120 000 75 000 20 50
and
Tempered j
Over 7 to 10 in. in outside diam-
|
cter or thickness, 6-in. max.
100 000 - 120 000 75 000 18 45

Outside diameter or thickness

not over 20 in, 5 to 8-in. wall 95 000-115 000 70 000 18 45

Minimum.
Up to 2 in. in outside diameter
or thickness, 1-in. max. wall. 125 000 105 000 16 50

Over 2 to 4 in. in outside diame-

ter or thickness, 2-in. max. wall 115 000 9^000 16 45
M
Over 4 to 7 in. in outside diame-
Alloy
1 ter or thickness, 3§-in. max.
Steel, 46
110 000 85 000 16
Quenched
AND
Over 7 to 10 in. in outside diam-
Tempered.
!
eter or thickness, 5-in. max.
100 000 75 000 18 45

1
Outside diameter or thickness
not over 20 in., 5 to 8-in. wall 100 000 70 000 18 45
 Serial Designation: A 18-13. 167

(b) For annealed forgings, one tension test shall be made

from each annealing charge. If more than one melt is repre-

sented in an annealing charge, one tension test shall be made
from each melt.
For quenched and tempered forgings, one tension
(c) test
shall be made from each tempering charge. If more than one
quenching charge is represented in a tempering charge, one
tension test shall be made from each quenching charge. If

more than one melt is represented in a quenching charge, one

tension test shall be made from each melt.
(d) If more than one class of forgings by size is represented
in any lot, from a forging of each
one tension test class by size
shall be made as specified in Sections 10 and 11.
(e) If any test specimen shows defective machining or
develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.

(/ ) If the percentage of elongation of any test speci-

men than that specified in Section 10 (a) and any part
is less

of the fracture is more than f in. from the center of the

gage length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the
specimen before testing, a retest shall be allowed.
13. any test lot of
If the results of the physical tests of Retests.

forgingsdo not conform to the requirements specified, the

manufacturer may re-treat such lot one or more times and
retests shall be made as specified in Section 12.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

14. The forgings shall conform to the sizes and shapes workmanship,
specified by the purchaser. When centered, 60-deg. centers
with clearance drilled for points shall be used.
15. The forgings shall be free from injurious defects and Finish,

shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
16. Identification marks shall be legibly stamped on each Marking,
forging and on each test specimen. The purchaser shall indi-
cate the location of such identification marks.
 168 Specifications for Steel Forgings.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 17. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
is

works which concern the manufacture of the forgings ordered.

The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the forgings are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. Tests and
inspection at the place of manufacture shall be made prior to
shipment.
(b) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the

acceptance or rejection of the forgings in his own laboratory or

elsewhere. Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense
of the purchaser.
(c) Tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
Rejection. 18. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
tests made in.accordance with Section 17 (b) shall be reported
within five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Forgings which show injurious defects while being
finished by the purchaser will be rejected, and the manufacturer
shall be notified.
Rehearing. 19. Samples tested in accordance with Section 17 (b), which
represent rejected forgings, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction
with the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim
for a rehearing within that time.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
QUENCHED-AND-TEMPERED CARBON-STEEL AXLES,
SHAFTS, AND OTHER FORGINGS FOR
LOCOMOTIVES AND CARS.
Serial Designation: A 19-18.
These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 19; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1911; Revised, 1912, 1914, 1916, 1918.

In view of the abnormal difficult/ in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and f'cr phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
Thi3 shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

1. When used for forgings for locomotives, these speci- Material

fications cover quenched-and-tempered carbon-steel driving Covered -

axles,engine and trailing-truck axles, main and side rods, straps,

crank pins and piston rods.

I. MANUFACTURE.
2. The steel may be made by the open-hearth or any other Process,
process approved by the purchaser.
3. A sufficient discard shall be made from each ingot to Discard,
secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation.
4. For test purposes, a prolongation shall be left on each Prolongations
forging, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. for Tests -

5. (a) Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, all Boring,

forgings over 7 in. in diameter shall be bored, and all axles,
(169)
 170 Specifications for Quenched-and-Tempered Forgings.

shafts and similar forgings shall be rough-turned all over. The

boring shall be done before quenching.
(b) If boring is specified, the diameter of the hole shall
be at least 20 per cent of the maximum outside diameter or
and flanges.
thickness of the forging, exclusive of collars
Heat For quenching and tempering, the forgings shall be
6.
Treatment.
allowed to become cold after forging. They shall then be uni-
formly reheated to the proper temperature to refine the grain
(a group thus reheated being known as a "quenching charge"),
and quenched in some medium under substantially uniform
conditions for each quenching charge. Finally, they shall be
uniformly reheated to the proper temperature for tempering
or "drawing back" (a group thus reheated being known as a
"tempering charge"), and allowed to cool uniformly.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 7. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
Composition.
as to chemical composition:

First Class by Size 0. 25 - 0.60 per cent

Second " " " 0.35-0.60
Carbon <

Third '
0.35-0.65
^Fourth " " " 0.35-0.70
Manganese 0.40-0.70
Phosphorus not over . 05
Sulfur " " 0.05

Ladle Analyses. 8.An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the
manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements
specified in Section 7. This analysis shall be made from a test
ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 7.
Check Analyses. 9. (a) An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a
forging representing each melt. The chemical composition thus
determined shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 7. Drillings for analysis may
be taken from the forging
or from a full-size prolongation of the same, at any point mid-
way between the center and surface of solid forgings, and at
any point midway between the inner and outer surfaces of the
 —

Serial Designation: A 19-18. 171

wall of bored forgings; or turnings may be taken from a test

specimen.
(b) In addition to the complete analysis specified in Para-

graph (a), a phosphorus determination may be made by the

purchaser from each broken tension test specimen. The phos-
phorus content thus determined shall conform to the require-
ment specified in Section 7.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

10. (a) The forgings shall conform to the minimum require- Tension Tests.
ments as to tensile properties specified in Table I.

Table I. Tensile Properties.

Fob Forcings whose Maximum Outside Diameter or Thickness is not over 10 iif . wh»n
Solid, and not over 20 in. when Bored.

__ ,. Elongation in 2 in., Reduction of Area,

Tensile Elastic per cent per cent.
Size. Strength, Limit, 1
lb. per lb. per 1
j nverse
sq. in. 80- ln - Ratio.

Up to 4 in. in outside diameter or

thickness, 2-in. max. wall DO 000

Over 4 to 7 in. in outside diam-

eter or thickness, 3j-in. max.
wall 85 000

Over 7 to 10 in. in outside diam-

eter or thickness, 5-in. max.
wall 85 000

Outside diameter or thickness not

over 20 in., 5 to 8-in. wall... . 82 500

(b) The classification by size of the forging shall be deter-

mined by the specified diameter or thickness which governs
the size of the prolongation from which the test specimen is

taken.
(c) The elastic limit called for by these specifications shall
be determined by an extensometer reading to 0.0002 in. The
extensometer shall be attached to the specimen at the gage
marks and not to the shoulders of the specimen nor to any part
of the testing machine. When the specimen is in place and the
extensometer attached, the testing machine shall be operated
so as to increase the load mi the specimen at a uniform rate.
The observer shall watch the elongation of the specimen as shown
 172 Specifications for Quenched-and-Tempered Forgings.

by the extensometer and shall note, for this determination, the

load at which the rate of elongation shows a sudden increase.
The extensometer be removed from the specimen,
shall then
and the test continued to
determine the tensile strength.
(d) Tests of forgings shall be made only after final treat-
ment.
B«nd Tests. 11. If specified by the purchaser, bend tests shall be made
as follows:
For the first and second classes by size, the test speci-
(a)
men bend cold through 180 deg. around a 1-in. flat mandrel
shall
having a rounded edge of |-in. radius, without cracking on the
outside of the bent portion.
(b) For the third and fourth classes by size, the test specimen
shall bend cold through 180 deg. around a 1^-in. flat mandrel
having a rounded edge of f-in. radius, without cracking on the
outside of the bent portion.
Proof Tests. 12. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, all forg-
ings shall be subjected to an impact proof test. The details
of this test shall be agreed upon by the manufacturer and the
purchaser. 1
Test Specimens. 13. (a) Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken
from a full-size prolongation of any forging. For forgings with
large ends or collars the prolongation may be of the same cross-
section as that of the forging back of the large end or collar.
Specimens may be taken from the forging itself with a hollow
drill, if approved by the purchaser.

(b) The axis of the specimen shall be located at any point

midway between the center and surface of solid forgings, and
at any point midway between the inner and outer surfaces of
the wall of bored forgings, and shall be parallel to the axis of
the forging in the direction in which the metal is most drawn
out.
Tension test specimens shall conform to the dimensions
(c)

shown The ends shall be of a form to fit the holders

in Fig.
1 .

of the testing machine in such a way that the load shall be axial.
(d) Bend test specimens shall be \ in. square in section with
corners rounded to a radius not over ^
in., and need not exceed

6 in. in length.

1
For Information relative to proof tests of finished forgings, see Appendix pp. 176-177.
 Serial Designation: A 19-18. 173

14. (a) One tension and, if specified by the purchaser, Number of Tests,
one bend test shall be made from each tempering charge. If
more than one quenching charge is represented in a tempering
charge, one tension and, if specified, one bend test shall be
made from each quenching charge. If more than one melt
is represented in a quenching charge, one tension and, if specified,

one bend test shall be made from each melt.

(b) If more than one class of forgings by size is represented

in any lot, one tension and, if specified, one bend test from a
forging of each class by size shall be made as specified in Sections
10, 11 and 13.

Radius
not less „ 1

i
?'"-
than 0.. k-~
i

\j

f
i I \ ? i

i
j
>

k- 2 Gage Length -H

Note '- The Gage length, Parallel Portions and Fillets shall be as Shown,
but the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of
the Testing Machine.

Fig. I.

(c) If any test specimen shows defective machining or

develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen sub-
stituted.
(d) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
specimen than that specified in Section 10 (a) and any
is less
part of the fracture is more than f in. from the center of the
gage length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the
specimen before testing, a retest shall be allowed.
15. (a) If the results of the physical tests of any test lot do Ret«sts.

not conform to the requirements specified, the manufacturer may

retemper or requench and temper such lot, but not more than
three additional times unless authorized by the purchaser, and
retests shall be made as specified in Section 14.
 174 Specifications for Quenched- and-Tempered Forgings.

(b) If the fracture of any tension test specimen shows

over 15 per cent crystallin, a second test shall be made. If

the fracture of the second specimen shows over 15 per cent

crystallin, the forgings represented by such specimen shall be
retempered or requenched and tempered. The fracture shall
be considered crystallin if the crystals which it contains are so
large that the cleavage planes or sides of these crystals are
easily visible to the eye.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Workmanship. 16. The forgings shall conform to the sizes and shapes
specified by the purchaser. Axles, shafts and similaT forgings,
unless otherwise specified, shall be rough-turned all over with
an allowance of f in. on the surface for finishing. In centering,
60-deg. centers with clearance drilled. for points shall be used.
Finish. 17. The forgings shall be free from injurious defects and
shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
Marking. is. Identification marks
be legibly stamped on each
shall
forging and on each The purchaser shall indicate
test specimen.
the location of such identification marks.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION

inspection. 19. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall
have free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the
purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the forgings ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the forgings are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. Tests and
inspection at the place of manufacture shall be made prior to
shipment.
(b) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the accept-

ance or rejection of the forgings in his own laboratory or else-

where. Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense of
the purchaser.
(c) Tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
 Serial Designation: A 19-18. 175

20. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based Rejection,

on tests made in accordance with Section 19 (b) shall be reported
within five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Forgings which show injurious defects while being
finished by the purchaser will be rejected, and the manufacturer
shall be notified.
Samples tested in accordance with Section 19 (b),
21. Rehearing,
which represent rejected forgings, shall be preserved for two
weeks from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction
with the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim
for a rehearing within that time.
 APPENDIX.

As a guide in deciding on a proof test for quenched-and-

tempered forgings, the following particulars regarding three
established methods of testing are given. These methods of 1

proof testing are giving satisfactory results in practice.

Proof Tests for Quenched-and-Tempered Forgings.

Pennsylvania Railroad Co.; New York Central Lines,
Standard Steel Works Co. Rigid Supports 5 ft.
Supports 3 ft. Center to Center, Center to Center.
Diameter, in.
Carried on M. C. B. Drop-Test Machin 3. Carnegie Steel Co.,

Height of Drop, ft. and in. of Forgings.

16!0-lb.Tup. 2240-lb. Tu p. Energy of Blow, ft.-lb.

Oft. 11 in. 700

*i
" "
5 1 3 000

" "
5h 1 8 1 ft. 2 ir 1200
"
2 " " '

6 2 1 7 1700

4 2 " 9
"
2 " ' 2 500

7 3 " 5 " 2 " 6

'
8 500

" "
'* 4 " 3 3 1 '
4 700

5 " 3 "
'

8 1
" 8 COOO
"
6 " 4 "
'
2 6 7 500
*i
... g
5 "
.i
e 3
'
9000
"
8 " 6 "
'
7 3 10 000
»i
7 "
'

10 10 " " 4 11000

"
8 "
'

»°! 11 " 7 fl 12 000

"
9 " 10
'
ii 13 " 5 13 000

" "
ȣ 15 " 3 11 1
'
14 000

"
17 " 12 "
'
12 4 8 15 000

The Pennsylvania Railroad Co. and the Standard Steel

Works Co. require that all axles, shafts and similar forgings
shall undergo an impact proof test on an M. C. B. drop-test
For more detailed information concerning these methods of proof testing, see Report
1

of Committee A-l on Standard Specifications for Steel, Appendix IV, "Report on Proof Tests
of Finished Forgings." Proceedings, Am. Soc. Test. Mats., Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 120 (1914).
Also, Report of Committee A-l for 1917; ibid, Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 115-117 (1917).

(176)
 Serial Designation: A 19-18. 177

machine, with supports 3 ft. apart center to center, two blows

being struck with a tup weighing 1640 or 2240 lb. The forging
is to have one of the points of support as near as possible to
one end for the first blow and as near as possible to the other
end for the second blow, the forging being turned 90 deg. on
its longitudinal axis after the first blow. The requirements
as to height of drop given in the accompanying table are derived
from the following formulas:

For the 1640-lb. tup; H = 0.01Z) 3

For the 2240-lb. tup: H = 0.0073Z) 3

in which H is the height of drop in feet and D is the diameter

of the forging at the center in inches.
The New York Central Lines and the Carnegie Steel Co.
require that forgings shall be submitted an impact proof
to
testby having them carried on rigid supports and struck one
blow at the center by a tup delivering the number of foot-
pounds shown in the accompanying table. The New York
Central Lines place the supports 5 ft. apart center to center,
while the Carnegie Steel Co. places the supports as near as
possible to the ends of the forgings.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THB

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
QUENCHED- AND-TEMPERED ALLOY-STEEL AXLES,
SHAFTS, AND OTHER FORGINGS FOR
LOCOMOTIVES AND CARS.

Serial Designation: A 63-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 63; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1916; Revised, 1918.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

Material 1. (a) These specifications cover the various classes of

Covered.
a n y_ s t e el forgings now commonly used in locomotive and car
construction.
(b) The purposes for which these classes are frequently

used are as follows:

Class K, for forgings for main and side rods, straps, piston
rods, and all other forgings which are to be machined with
milling cutters or complicated forming tools;
Class L, for forgings for driving and trailing-truck axles,
crank pins, and other parts not requiring the use of milling
cutters or complicated forming tools.
(178)
 Serial Designation: A 63-18. 179

I. MANUFACTURE.
2. The steel may be made by the open-hearth or any other Process,
process approved by the purchaser.
3. A sufficient discard shall be made from each ingot to Discard,
secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation.
4. For test purposes, a prolongation shall be left on each Prolongations
or ests *
forging, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser.
5. (a) Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, all Boring,

forgings over 7 in. in diameter shall be bored, and all axles,

shafts and similar forgings shall be rough-turned all over. The
boring shall be done before quenching.
(b) If boring is diameter of the hole shall be
specified, the
at least 20 per cent of the maximum outside diameter or thick-
ness of the forging, exclusive of collars and flanges.
6. For quenching and tempering, the forgings shall be Heat Treatment,
allowed to become cold after forging. They shall then be
uniformly reheated to the proper temperature to refine the
grain group thus reheated being known as a "quenching
(a
charge"), and quenched in some medium under substantially
uniform conditions for each quenching charge. Finally, they
shall be uniformly reheated to the proper temperature for
tempering or "drawing back" (a group thus reheated being
known as a "tempering charge"), and allowed to cool uniformly.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

7. (a) The steel shall conform to the following require chemical
Composition.
ments as to chemical composition:
Acid. Basic.

Phosphorus not over 0.05 not over 0.04 per cent

Sulfur " " 0.05 " " 0.05

(b) The composition of alloy steel, other than phosphorus

and sulfur, shall be agreed upon by the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
8. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle Analyses,
manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon, manganese
and the elements specified in Section 7. Tin's analysis shall be
made from a test ingot taken during the pouring of the melt.
The chemical composition thus determined shall be reported
 180 Specifications for Quenched-and-Tempered Forgings.

to the purchaser or his representative, and shall conform to the

requirements specified in Section 7.
check Analyses. 9. (a) An may be made by the purchaser from a
analysis
forging each melt.
representing The chemical composition
thus determined shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 7. Drillings for analysis may be taken from the forging
or from a full-size prolongation of the same, at any point mid-
way between the center and surface of solid forgings, and at
any point midway between the inner and outer surfaces of the
wall of bored forgings; or turnings may be taken from a test
specimen.
(b) In addition to the complete analysis specified in Para-
graph a phosphorus determination may be made by the
(a),

purchaser from each broken tension test specimen. The phos-

phorus content thus determined shall conform to the requirement
specified in Section 7.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 10. (a) The forgings shall conform to the requirements as
to tensile properties specified in Table I.

The classification by size of the forging shall be deter-

(b)

mined by the specified diameter or thickness which governs the

size of the prolongation from which the test specimen is taken.
(c) The elastic limit called for by these specifications shall
be determined by an extensometer reading to 0.0002 in. The
extensometer shall be attached to the specimen at the gage
marks and not to the shoulders of the specimen nor to any part
of the testing machine. When the specimen is in place and the
extensometer attached, the testing machine shall be operated so
as to increase the load on the specimen at a uniform rate. The
observer shall watch the elongation of the specimen as shown by
the extensometer and shall note, for this determination, the load
at which the rate of elongation shows a sudden increase. The
extensometer shall then be removed from the specimen, and the
test continued to determine the tensile strength.
(d) Tests of forgings shall be made only after final treatment.
Bend Tests. 11. If specified by the purchaser, bend tests shall be made
as follows:
 —

Serial Designation: A 63-18. 181

((7) For the first, second and third classes by size, the test

specimen shall bend cold through 180 deg. around a 1-in. flat
mandrel having a rounded edge of |-in. radius, without cracking
on the outside of the bent portion.
(b) For the fourth and fifth classes by size, the test speci-

men shall bend cold through 180 deg. around a l|-in. flat man-
Table I. Tensile Properties.
Fob Forcings whose Maximum Outside Diameter or Thickness is not over 10 in. when 6oud, and
NOT OVER 20 IN. WHEN BoRED.

Tensile Elastic Elongation

' Reduction
[

Clasp. Size. Strength, Limit, min., ,in 2 in.. min.Jof Area, min.
t

lb. per. sq. in. lb. per sq. in. per cent. per cent.
I

Up to 2 in. in outside diameter

orthickness, 1-in. max. wall. . 95 000-115 000 70 000 60
I

Over 2 to 4 outside diame-

in. in
ter or thickness, 2-in. max.
wall 90 000 - 110 000
K
Allot diame-
Over 4 to 7 in. in outside
Steel,
ter or thickness, 3J-in. max
Quenched
wall 90 000 - 110 000
AND
Tempered
Over 7 diam-
to 10 in. in outside
eter or thickness, 5-in. max.
wall 90000-110000 65 000

Outside diameter or thickness

not over 20 in., 5 to 8-in. wail. 85 000-105 000 60 000

Up to 2 in. in outside diameter

or thickness, 1-in. max. wall... 105 000 - 125 000 80 000

Over 2 to 4 outside diame-

in. in

I
ter or thickness, 2-in. max
wall 100 000 - 120 000 75 000
L
Allot
Over 4 to 7 outeide diame-
in. in
8teel,
ter or thickness, 3J-in. max.
q cinched 000-120 000,
wall 100 75 000
AND
Tempered.
Over 7 to 10 outside diam-
in. in
eter or thickness, 5-in. max.
wall 100 000 -120 000 75000
J

I Outside diameter or thickness'

not over 20 in.. 6 to 8-in. wall 95 000-115 000: 70 000

drel having a rounded edge of f-in. radius, without cracking

on the outside of the bent portion.
12. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, all forg- Proof Tests,
ings shall be subjected to an impact proof test. The details
of this test shall be agreed upon by the manufacturer and the
purchaser. 1

'For informa'i'.n relative to proof tests of finishr'I fnrfrinRr, ",ee Appendix, pp. 185-186.
 182 Specifications for Quenched-and-Tempered Forgings.

Test Specimens. 13. (a) Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken
from a full-size prolongation of any forging. For forgings with
large ends or collars the prolongation may be of the same cross-
section as that of the forging back of the large end or collar.
Specimens may be taken from the forging itself with a hollow
drill, if approved by the purchaser.

(b) The axis of -the specimen shall be located at any point

midway between the center and surface of solid forgings, and

at any point midway between the inner and outer surfaces of
the wall of bored forgings, and shall be parallel to the axis of
the forging in the direction in which the metal is most drawn out.

Radius
not less

2 Gage Length- H

Note - The GageLength, Parallel Portions and Fillets shall be as Shown,

but the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of

the Testing Machine.

Fig. I.

(c) Tension test specimens shall conform to the dimensions

shown in Fig.
1. The ends shall be of a form to fit the holders
of the testing machine in such a way that the load shall be axial.
(d) Bend test specimens shall be $ in. square in section
with corners rounded to a radius not over tV m an d need not ->

exceed 6 in. in length.

Number of Tests. 14. (a) One tension and, if specified by the purchaser, one
bend test shall be made from each tempering charge. If more
than one quenching charge is represented in a tempering charge,
one tension and, if specified, one bend test shall be made from
each quenching charge. If more than one melt is represented
in a quenching charge, one tension and, if specified, one bend
test shall be made from each melt.
 Serial Designation: A 63 - 18. 183

(b) If more than one class of forgings by size is represented

in any one tension and, if specified, one bend test from a
lot,

forging of each class by size shall be made as specified in Sec-

tions 10, 11 and 13.

(c) If any test specimen shows defective machining or

develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen sub-
stituted.
(d) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test speci-
men is less than that specified in Section 10 (a) and any part
of the fracture is more than £ in. from the center of the gage

length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the speci-

men before testing, a retest shall be allowed.
15. (a) If the results of the physical tests of any test lot Retests.
do not conform to the requirements specified, the manufacturer
may retemper or requench and temper such lot, but not more
than three additional times unless authorized by the purchaser,
and retests shah be made as specified in Section 14.
(b) If the fracture of any tension test specimen shows over

15 per cent crystallin, a second test shall be made. If the

fracture of the second specimen shows over 15 per cent crystal-
lin, the forgings represented by such specimen shall be retem-

pered or requenched and tempered. The fracture shall be

considered crystallin if the crystals which it contains are so
large that the cleavage planes or sides of these crystals -are easily
visible to the eye.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

16. The forgings shall conform to the sizes and shapes workmanship,
specified by the purchaser. Axles, shafts and similar forgings,
unless otherwise specified, shall be rough-turned all over with
an allowance of | in. on the surface for finishing. In centering,
60-deg. centers with clearance drilled for points shall be used.
17. The forgings shall be free from injurious defects and Finish,

shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
18. Identification marks
be legibly stamped on each Marking,
shall
forging and on each testThe purchaser shall indi-
specimen.
cate the location of such identification marks.
 184 Specifications for Quenched-and-Tempered Forgings.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 19. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall
have free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the
purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the forgings ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the forgings are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. Tests and
inspection at the place of manufacture shall be made prior to
shipment.
(b) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the
acceptance or rejection of the forgings in his own laboratory
or elsewhere. Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense
of the purchaser.
(c) Tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
Rejection. 20. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
tests made in accordance with Section 19 (b) shall be reported
within five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Forgings which show injurious defects while being fin-

ished by the purchaser will be rejected, and the manufacturer

shall be notified.
Rehearing. Samples tested in accordance with Section 19 (b), which
21.
represent rejected forgings, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction
with the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim
for a rehearing within that time.
 APPENDIX.

As a guide in deciding on a proof test for quenched-and-

tempered forgings, the following particulars regarding three
established methods of testing are given. These methods of 1

proof testing are giving satisfactory results in practice.

Proof Tests for Quenched-and-Tempered Forgings.

Pennsylvania Railroad Co.; New York Central Lines,

i
Standard Steel Works Co. Rigid Supports 5 ft.
Supports 3 ft. Center to Center, Center to Center.

Diameter, in. ;
Carried on M. C B. Drop-Test Machine. Carnegie Steel Co.,
Rigid Supports at Ends
Height of Drop, ft. and in. of Forgings.

1640-lb. Tup. •
2240-lb. Tup. Energy of Blow, ft.-lb.

Oft. 11 in. 700

*h
8 1 " 3 " 000

8 1 " 8 " 1 ft. 2 in. 1200

i
" "
6 2 " 2 " 1 7 1700

2 " " 2 " " 2 500

*h
"
7 3 " 5 " 2 " 6 3 500

4 " 3 " 3 '*

1
" 4 700
?h
"
8 6 " 1 " 3 " 8 6 000

" "
8 " 2 4 " 6 7 500
*
" "
9 7 3 " 5 " 3 9 000

"
8 " 7 " " 3 10 000
•J
10 10 " " 7 " 4 " 11000

11 •'
7 " 8 " 6 " 12 000
"h
11 13 " 8 " 8 " 10 " 13 000

»* 15 " 3 " 11 " 1 " 14 000

"
12 17 " 4 " 12 " 8 15 000

The Pennsylvania Railroad Co. and the Standard Steel

Works Co. require that all axles, shafts and similar forgings
shall undergo an impact proof test on an M. C. B. drop-test

For more detailed Information concerning these method.! of proof testing, see Report
1

of Committee A-l on Standard Specifications for Steel, Appendix IV, "Report on Proof
Tests of Finished Forgings." Procetdingi, Am. Soc. Test. Matt., Vol. XIV. Part I. p. 120
(1914). Alio, Rcp-.rt of Committee A-i for 1917; (bid, Vol. XVII, Part [,pp, 115-117 (1917).

(185)
 :

1 86 Specifications for Quenched-and-Tempered Forgings.

machine, with supports 3 ft. apart center to center, two blows

being struck with a tup weighing 1640 or 2240 lb. The forging
isto have one of the points of support as near as possible to
one end for the first blow and as near as possible to the other
end for the second blow, the forging being turned 90 deg. on
its longitudinal axis after the first blow. The requirements
as to height of drop given in the accompanying table are derived
from the following formulas

For the 1640-lb. tup: H = OMD 3

For the 2240-lb. tup: H = 0.007 3D 3

in which H is the height of drop in feet and D is the diameter

of the forging at the center in inches.
The New York Central Lines and the Carnegie Steel Co.
require that forgings shall be submitted to an impact proof
test by having them carried on rigid supports and struck one
blow at the center by a tup delivering the number of foot-
pounds shown in the accompanying table. The New York
Central Lines place the supports 5 ft. apart center to center,
while the Carnegie Steel Co. places the supports as near as
possible to the ends of the forgings.
 .

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CARBON-STEEL FORGINGS FOR LOCOMOTIVES.

Serial Designation: A 20-16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 20; the
finalnumber indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1912; Revised, 1913, 1914, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

These specifications cover untreated and annealed carbon-

1
Material
steel driving axles, engine and trailing-truck axles, main and Covered -

side rods, straps, crank pins and piston rods.

2. The manufacturer may, at his option, furnish annealed Basis of
forgings when untreated Purchase
forgings are specified by the purchaser, -

provided they conform to the requirements specified for un-

treated forgings.

I. MANUFACTURE.
3. The steel may be made by the open-hearth or any other Process,
process approved by the purchaser.
4. A sufficient discard shall be made from each ingot to Discard,
secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation.
5. The manufacturer and the purchaser shall agree upon Prolongations
forgings on which a prolongation for Tests
for test purposes shall be -

provided.
 188 Specifications for Locomotive Forgings.

Heat Treatment. 6. For annealing, the forgings be allowed to become

shall
cold after forging. They be uniformly reheated to
shall then
the proper temperature to refine the grain (a group thus reheated
being known as an "annealing charge"), and allowed to cool
uniformly.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 7. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
Composition.
as to chemical composition:

Manganese 0.40-0.70 per cent

Phosphorus not over . 05 "
Sulfur " " 0.05

Ladle 8. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the

Analyses.
manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon and the
elements specified in Section 7. This analysis shall be made
from a test ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The
chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to the
purchaser or his representative, and shall conform to the require-
ments specified in Section 7.
Check 9. An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a forg-
Analyses.
ing representing each melt. The chemical composition thus
determined shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 7. Drillings for analysis may be taken from the forging
or from a full-size prolongation of the same, at any point midway
between the center and surface; or turnings may be taken from
a test specimen.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AxND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 10. (a) The forgings shall conform to the minimum
requirements as to tensile properties specified in Table I.

The classification by size of the forging shall be deter-

(b)

mined by the specified diameter or thickness which governs the

size of the prolongation from which the test specimen is taken.
(c) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the
beam of the testing machine.
(d) Tests of forgings shall be made only after final treat-
ment.
 —

Serial Designation: A 20-16. 189

11. (a) Tension test specimens shall be taken from a full- Tension Test
pecimei
size prolongation of any forging. For forgings with large ends
or collars the prolongation may
be of the same cross-section as
that of the forging back of the large end or collar. Specimens
may be taken from the forging itself with a hollow drill, if
approved by the purchaser.
(6) The axis of the specimen shall be located at any point
midway between the center and surface of the forging, and shall
be parallel to the axis of the forging in the direction in which
the metal is most drawn out.

Table I. Tensile Properties.

For Forgings Whose Maximum Outside Diameter or Over-all Thickness is not over
12-in. when Untreated and not over 20 in. when Annealed.

Untreated.

Si*e. Elongation in 2 Reduction of

Tensile Yield in., per cent. Area, per cent.
Outside Diameter Strength, Point,
or lb. per lb. per Inverse Not Inverse Not
Over-all Thickness. sq. in. sq. in. Ratio. under Ratio. under

2 200 000
Not over 8 in 75 000 0.5 tens. str. 4=^
Tens str.
IS
Tens. str.
24
I

1 500 00 ° 2 000 000

Over 8 to 12 in., inclusive 75 000 0.5 tens, str J 17 2-:
Tens. str. Tens. str.

Annealed.
1 ROfl ooo 2 800 000
Notover8in 80 000 0.5 tens. str. ' 20 33
Tens. str. Tens etr.
1 725 000 2 640 000
Over 8 to 12 in, inclusive 80 000 0.5 tens. str. _ 19 30
Tens. str. Tens. str.

2 400 000
Over 12 to 20 in., inclusive 80 000 0.5tens.str. = IS 25
Tens. str. Tens str.

(c) The specimens shall conform to the dimensions shown

in Fig. 1. The ends shall be of a form to fit the holders of the
testing machine in such a way that the load shall be axial.
12. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, tests shall Number of Tests,

be made as follows:
(a) For untreated forgings, one tension test shall be made
from each melt.
(b) For annealed forgings, one tension test shall be made

from each annealing charge. If more than one melt is represented

in an annealing charge, one tension test shall be made from each
melt.
 .

190 Specifications for Locomotive Forgings.

(c) If more than one class of forgings by size is represented

in any lot, one tension test from a forging of each class by size
shall be made as specified in Sections 1 and 1 1

(d) If any test specimen shows defective machining or

develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
(e) If the percentage of elongation of any test speci-
men is than that specified in Section 10 (a) and any part
less
of the fracture is more than f in. from the center of the
gage length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the

Radius
not less

p —2 Gage Length " —H

Note - The Gagelength, Parallel Portions and Fillers shall be as Shown,

buf the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of
the Testing Machine.

Fig. 1.

specimen before testing, a retest shall be allowed.

Retests. 13. (a) If the results of the physical tests of any test lot
do not conform to the requirements specified, the manufacturer
may re-anneal such lot, but not more than three additional
times unless authorized by the purchaser, and retests shall be
made as specified in Section 12.
(b) When
annealed forgings are specified, if the fracture
of any specimen shows over 15 per cent crystallin,
test
a second test shall be made. If the fracture of the second
specimen shows over 15 per cent crystallin, the forgings repre-
sented by such specimen shall be re-annealed. The fracture
shall be considered crystallin if the crystals which it contains
are so large that the cleavage planes or sides of these crystals
are easily visible to the eye.
 Serial Designation: A 20-16. 191

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

14. The forgings shall conform to the sizes and shapes Workmanship,
specified by the purchaser. When centered, 60-deg. centers
with clearance drilled for points shall be used.
15. The forgings shall be free from injurious defects and shall Finish,
have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
16. Identification marks
be legibly stamped on each Marking,
shall
forging and on each The purchaser shall indicate
test specimen.
the location of such identification marks.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

17. {a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall inspection.
have free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the
purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the forgings ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the forgings are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. Tests and
inspection at the place of manufacture shall be made prior to
shipment.
(b) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the accep-
tance or rejection of the forgings in his own laboratory or else-
where. Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense of
the purchaser.
(c) Tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
18. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,
tests made in accordance with Section 17 (b) shall be reported
within five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Forgings which show injurious defects while being
finished by the purchaser be rejected, and the manufacturer
will
shall be notified.
19. Samples tested in accordance with Section 17 (b), which Rehearing,
represent rejected forgings, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CARBON-STEEL CAR AND TENDER AXLES.
Serial Designation: A 21-18.
These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 21; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1901; Revised, 1905, 1913, 1914, 1918.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for phosphorus in acid steels shall be raised 0.01 per cent
above the values given in these specifications. This shall be effective during
the period of the war and until otherwise ordered by the Society.

Material 1. These cover axles up to and including

specifications
Covered. Axles over 6\ in. in
those 6| in. in diameter at the center.
diameter at the center shall not be subject to the drop test, but
may be purchased under the Standard Specifications for Carbon-
Steel and Alloy-Steel Forgings (Serial Designation: A 18) of
the American Society for Testing Materials.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 2. The steel shall be made by the open-hearth process.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

chemical 3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements

Composition.
as to c h em ical composition:
Carbon . 35 - . 55 per cent
Manganese not over 70 . "
Phosphorus " " 05 .

Sulfur " " 0.06 "

(192)
 Serial Designation: A 21 - 18. 193

4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle

Ana, y Bes
manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements -

specified in Section 3. This analysis shall be made from a test

ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The chemical compo-
sition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser or his
representative, and shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 3.

5. An analysis may
be made by the purchaser from an Check
axle representing each melt. The chemical composition thus nal y ges -

determined shall conform to the requirements specified in

Section 3. Drillings for analysis may be taken from the axle
or from a full-size prolongation of the same, at any point mid-
way between the center and surface.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

6. (a) The test axle shall be so placed on supports 3 ft. Drop Tests,
apart that the tup will strike it midway between the ends.
It shallstand without fracture five blows from a tup of 2240 lb.
fallingfrom a height //, such that 77 in feet equals the square of
the diameter of the axle at the center in inches, H=d 2 The .

axle shall be turned through 180 deg. after the first and third
blows.
(b) The permanent set produced by the first blow shall
not exceed that given by the following formulas, in which
L= length of axles in inches and d= diameter of axle at
center in inches:

For axles over 65 in. in length:

(r^-!)^" (1 >

For axles 65 in. or under in length:

(JL-i) + iln (2 )
\l.9d 2/ .

(c) The Master Car Builders' Association and the American

Railway Master Mechanic iation have adopted four
standard sizes of axles, the requirements for which, based on
the above formula (1), are given in the following table:
 1

194 Specifications for Car and Tender Axles.

Diameter Length Height Number Maximum

Size of Journal, in. of Axle of Permanent
at Center, in. Drop, ft. Blows. Set, in.
in.

4lby 8
4 4 22 i 6
4
5 by 9
4 86 20 5
4
5| by 10
4 88 34£ fi
4
by 11
°xV oof *4 6
4
(d) The maximum permanent set is the difference between
the distance from a straight edge to the middle point of the
axle, measured before the first blow, and the distance measured
in the same manner after the blow. The straight edge shall
rest only on the collars or the ends of the axle.
(e) The temperature of the test axle shall be between 40

and 120° F.
Drop-Test 7. The anvil of the drop-test machine shall be supported
Machine.
on 12 springs, shall be free to move in a vertical direction, and
shall weigh 17,500 lb. The radii of the striking face of the tup
and of the supports shall be 5 in.
Number of Tests- 8. One drop test shall be made from each melt. Not less
than 30 axles shall be offered from any one melt, unless other-
wise agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Workmanship. 9. The axles shall conform to the sizes and shapes specified
by the purchaser. When centered, 60-deg. centers with clear-
ance drilled for points shall be used.
Finish. 10. The axles shall be free from injurious defects and shall
have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
Marking. 11. Identification marks shall be legibly stamped on each
axle. The purchaser shall indicate the location of such identifi-
cation marks.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 12. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
 Serial Designation: A 21 - 18. 195

is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works which

concern the manufacture of the axles ordered. The manu-
facturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable
facilities to satisfy him that the axles are being furnished in

accordance with these specifications. Tests and inspection at

the place of manufacture shall be made prior to shipment.
The purchaser may make the chemical tests to govern
(b)

the acceptance or rejection of the axles in his own laboratory or

elsewhere. Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense of
the purchaser.
(c) All tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
13. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,

tests made in accordance with Section 1 2 (6) shall be reported

within five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Axles which show injurious defects while being finished
4
by the purchaser will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall
be notified.
14. Samples tested in accordance with Section 12 (b), which Rehearing,
represent rejected axles, shall be preserved for two weeks from
the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR

COLD-ROLLED STEEL AXLES.

Serial Designation: A 22 - 16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 22; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1913; Revised, 1914, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 1. (a) The steel may be made by the open-hearth or any
other process approved by the purchaser.
(b) The axles shall be cold-rolled to finished size from hot-
rolled bars.
Discard. 2. A sufficient discard shall be made from each ingot to
secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
Composition.
as to chemical composition:

Carbon not over 0.40 per cent

Manganese 0.40 - 0.80 "
Phosphorus not over 0.05
Sulfur " " 0.05

(196)
 Serial Designation: A 22 - 16. 197

4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle

n yse8 '

manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements

specified in Section 3. This analysis shall be made from a test
ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 3.
5. An analysis may
be made by the purchaser from an axle Check
yses
representing each melt. The chemical composition thus deter- '

mined shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 3.

Drillings for analysis may be taken from the axle or from a
full-size prolongation of the same, at any point midway between
the center and surface; or turnings may be taken from a test
specimen.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

6. (a) The axles shall conform to the following minimum Tension TestB.
requirements as to tensile properties:
Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 70 000
Elastic limit, " " 60 000
Elongation in 2 in., per cent 18
Reduction of area, " 35

(b) The elastic limit called for by these specifications shall

be determined by an extensometer reading to 0.0002 in. The
extensometer shall be attached to the specimen at the gage
marks and not to the shoulders of the specimen nor to any part
of the testing machine. When the specimen is in place and the
extensometer attached, the testing machine shall be operated
so as to increase the load on the specimen at a uniform rate.
The observer shall watch the elongation of the specimen as
shown by the extensometer and shall note, for this determination,
the load at which the rate of elongation shows a sudden increase.
The extensometer shall then be removed from the specimen,
and the test continued to determine the tensile strength.
7. The test specimen shall bend cold through 180 deg. Bend Testa,
around a 1-in. pin or mandrel, without cracking on the outside
of the bent portion.
8. (a) Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken Teat Specimens,
from the full-size prolongation of the axle. The axis of the
 198 Specifications for Cold-Rolled Axles.

specimen shall be located at any point midway between the

center and surface and shall be parallel to the axis of the axle.
(b) Tension test specimens shall conform to the dimensions

shown in Fig. 1. The ends shall be of a form to fit the holders

of the testing machine in such a way that the load shall be axial.
(c) Bend test specimens shall be § in. square in section

with corners rounded to a radius not over tV -> and need not m
exceed 6 in. in length.
Number of Tests. 9. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from

each lot of 50 axles or less from each melt.

(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or

Radius
not less

Note •- The Gagelength, Parallel Portions and Fillers shall be as Shown,

but the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of

the Testing Machine.

Fig. 1.

develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen

substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test speci-
men than that specified in Section 6(a) and any part of
is less

the fracture is more than f in. from the center of the gage length,
as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before
testing, a retest shall be allowed.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Workmanghip. 10. The axles shall conform to the sizes and shapes speci-
fied by the purchaser, and shall not vary more than 0.002 in.
from the diameter specified. When centered, 60-deg. centers
with clearance drilled for points shall be used.
 Serial Designation: A 22-16. 199

11. The axles, either finished or plain, shall be straight Finish,

and free from injurious defects, and shall have a workmanlike

finish.

V. MARKING.
12. Identification marks shall be legibly stamped on each Marking,
axle, and on each test specimen. The purchaser shall indicate
the location of such identification marks.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

13. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall inspection,
have free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the
purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the axles ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the axles are being fur-
nished in accordance with these specifications. Tests and
inspection at the place of manufacture shall be made prior to
shipment.
(b) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the accep-
tance or rejection of the axles in his own laboratory or else-
where. Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense of
the purchaser.
(c) All tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
14. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,

tests made inaccordance with Section 13 (b) shall be reported

within five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Axles which show injurious defects while being fin-
ished by the purchaser will be rejected, and the manufacturer
shall be notified.
15. Samples tested in accordance with Section 13 (b), which Rehearing,
represent rejected axles, shall be preserved for two weeks from
the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 .

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
WROUGHT SOLID CARBON-STEEL WHEELS
FOR STEAM RAILWAY SERVICE.

Serial Designation: A 57- 16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 57; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1912; Revised, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 1 The steel shall be made by the open-hearth process.
Discard. 2. A sufficient discard shall be made from each ingot to
secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
composition.
as tQ chemical composition:
Acid. Basic
Carbon 0.60-0.80 0.65 - 0.85 per cent
Manganese 0.55-0.80 0.55-0.80
Phosphorus not over . 05 not over . 05 "
Sulfur " " 0.05 " " 0.05
Silicon 0.15-0.35 0.10-0.30
(200)
 Serial Designation: A 57 - 16. 201

4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle

manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements A * ? 8 * 1 55 -

specified in Section 3. This analysis shall be made from a test

ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined, together with such identifying
records as may be desired, shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 3.
5. An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a check

wheel representing each melt. The chemical composition thus Anal y sos -

determined shall conform to the requirements specified in

Section 3. A sample may be taken from any one point in the
plate; or two samples may be taken, in which case they shall be
on radii at right angles to each other. Samples shall not be
taken in such a way as to impair the usefulness of the wheel.
Drillings for analysis shall be taken by boring entirely through
the sample parallel to the axis of the wheel; they shall be clean
and free from scale, oil and other foreign substances. All
drillings from any one wheel shall be thoroughly mixed together.

III. MATING.
6. The wheels shall be mated as to tape sizes and shipped in Mating,
pairs.

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS.*

7. The wheels shall conform to the dimensions specified Permissibi*
within the following permissible variations: Variations.

Flange.
(a) — The height of flange shall not be
Height of Flange.
less, but may be £ in. more than that specified.
Thickness of Flange. — The thickness of flange shall not
(b)
vary more than tV from that in. specified.
Radius of Throat. — The radius of throat shall not vary
(c)

more than tV in. from that specified.

1
To facilitate the use of the specifications, the various dimensions are illustrated in
Fig. 1. and the permissible variations in those dimensions are also given in tabular form in
Table I.
 — . . .

202 Specifications foe Wheels for Steam Service.

Table I. Permissible Variations in Dimensions of Wrought-Steel

Wheels for Steam Railway Service.

Permissible Variations in
Dimensions.
Dimensions.

Over Under

Flange.
(o) Height | in.
(6) Thickness iD in-
tV -
tV
Radius of Throat. in
(«)
TV -

Rim.
Thickness, from Inner Edge to Intersection of Throat and Tread
(<J)
tV°-
(«) Width

(/) Maximum Departure of any Circle on Back Face from Plane ....

(g) Maximum Departure of Tread from Rotundity

IS™'
(A) Maximum Height of Block Marks on Tread

(0 Tape Sizes

0") Limit-of-Wear Groove:

1. Maximum Departure from Specified Position

2. Minimum Distance from Inner Edge of Rim *«-

Plate.
(k) Thickness, Variation foi each J in. of thickness

Hub.
Limited by
(0 1. Diameter wall thickness.

2. Minimum Thickness of Wall, for Bore 7 in. or under

Z. Minimum Thickness of Wall, for Bore over 7 in

4. Maximum Variation in Thickness cf Wall in any One Wheel

(m) Length

(it) Depression below Front Face of Rim

(o) Projection beyond Back Face of Rim

Bon.
(If not specified. Rough Bore shall be J in. less than Finished Bore.)
Diameter of Rough Bore
(p) i'-
(j) Maximum Depth of Black Spots in Rough Bore within 2 in. of End of
Bore iE
tV
(r) Maximum Eccentricity of Rough Bore in Relation, to Tread

Not*. —The letter used for each dimension in this table and in Fig. 1 is the same u that of the paragraph
of Bastion 7 covering that dimension.
 Serial Designation: A 57-16. 203

( Note. - The Letter used for each

Dimension and in Table I
in this Figure
is the Same as that of the Paragraph

of the Section on Permissible Variations

Covering that Dimension.)

Fig. I. — Diagram showing Points at which the Dimensions covered

by the Specifications are Measured. For the Permissible

Variations in these Dimensions see Table I or Section 7.
204 Specifications for Wheels for Steam Service.

Rbi.
(d) Thickness of Rim. —The rim may vary in thickness, but
the variation less than that specified shall not exceed ys in. The
thickness of rim shall be measured from the inner edge of the
rim to a base line drawn from the intersection of the throat
radius and the tread, parallel to the axis of the wheel.
(e) —
Width of Rim. The width of rim shall not vary more
than | in. from that specified.
(/) Plane. —The wheels shall be gaged with a ring gage
placed concentric with and perpendicular to the axis of the
wheel. For all points on the back face of the rim equidistant
from the center, the variation from the plane of the gage when
so placed shall not exceed ys m -

(g) Rotundity. —The tread shall be gaged with a ring gage,

and the opening between the tread and this gage at any point
shall not exceed ys m -

(h) Block Marks on Tread. —Block marks shall not exceed

^j in. in height..
(i) Tape Sizes. —The wheels shall not vary more than
9 tapes over nor more than 5 tapes under the size specified.

(j) Limit-oj -Wear Groove. —When a limit-of-wear groove is

specified, its location shallnot vary more than \ in. from that
specified, and its distance from the inner edge of the rim shall
not at any point be less than f in.

Plate.

(k) Thickness —plate may vary in thickness,

of Plate. -The
but the variation less than that specified shall not exceed yj in.
for each \ in. in the thickness of the plate.

Hub.
(/) —
Diameter of Hub. The diameter of hub may vary,
but the thickness of wall of the finished bored hub shall not be
less than \\ in. at any point for bores 7 in. or under in diame-
ter, nor less than If in. for bores over 7 in. in diameter, unless
otherwise specified. The thickness of wall of the hub shall not
vary more than § in. at any two points on the same wheel.
—
(m) Length of Hub. The length of hub shall not vary more
than \ in. from that specified
 Serial Designation: A 57-16. 205

(n) Depression of Hub —

For car and tender wheels and
wheels of similar design, the depression of the hub below the
front face of the rim shall not be less, but may be \ in. more than
that specified.
(o) Projection of Hub. —For locomotive- truck wheels and
wheels of similar design, the projection of the hub beyond the
back face of the rim shall not be less, but may be \ in. more
than that specified.

Bore.
—
Diameter of Rough Bore. The diameter of rough bore
(p)
shall not vary more than tV in. over nor more than £ in. under
that specified. When finished-bore diameter only is specified,
the rough-bore diameter shall be made j in. less with the
permissible variations specified above.
(q) —
Black Spots in Bore. Black spots in rough bore
within 2 in. of either face of the hub shall not exceed tV in. in
depth.
(r) Eccentricity of Bore. —The eccentricity between the
tread at its center line and the rough bore shall not exceed ^ in.

V. FINISH.
(a) The wheels shall be free from injurious defects and
8. Finish,

shallhave a workmanlike finish.

(b) Wheels shall not be offered for inspection if covered

with paint, rust, or any other substance to such an extent as

to hide defects.

VI. MARKING.
9. (a)The name or brand of the manufacturer, date, and Marking,
serial number shall be legibly stamped on each wheel in such
a way that the wheel may be readily identified.
(b) The tape size shall be legibly marked on each wheel.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

10. (a) The gages and tapes used shall be based on Master inspection.
Car Builders' standards, as illustrated in Fig. 2.
(b) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free
entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
206 SPEriFICATIOXS FOR WHEELS FOR STEAM SERVICE.

« -XL-

k :*&— g L /0j: ->)

!*[ Tl J Brais

K~
fWMWm*
" H -
Brass

^Rivets, i

fz Rivets, o.s.

Tempered
Spring Steel

(c) Tape for Wheel Circumference Measure.

Fig. 2. —Master Car Builder's Standards.
 Serial Designation: A 57-16. 207

is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works which

concern the manufacture of the wheels ordered. The manu-
facturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable
facilities to satisfy him that the wheels are being furnished in
accordance with these specifications. Tests and inspection at
the place of manufacture shall be made prior to shipment.
(c) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the accept-

ance or rejection of wheels in his own laboratory or elsewhere.

Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense of the purchaser.
(d) All tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
11. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,

tests made in accordance with Section 10 (c) shall be reported

within five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Wheels which show injurious defects while being finished

by the purchaser will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be

notified.
12. Samples tested in accordance with Section 10 (c), Rehearing,
which represent rejected wheels, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
WROUGHT SOLID CARBON-STEEL WHEELS FOR
ELECTRIC RAILWAY SERVICE.

Serial Designation: A 25 - 16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 25; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1913; Revised, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

Material 1. These specifications cover two classes of wheels, as

Covered.
follows:
Class A: Wheels furnished rough-bored with hub faced on
both sides, and other surfaces as rolled or forged.
Class B: Wheels furnished rough-bored with hubs faced on
both sides, and front face of rim, tread, flange, and back face of
rim machined.
Basis of 2. The class of wheel to be furnished shall be agreed upon
Purchase.
by the manufacturer and the purchaser. Wheels ordered to
Class A may be machined if necessary, but the permissible
variations from the dimensions specified shall remain those given
in Section 9 for Class A.
(208)
 Serial Designation: A 25-16. 209

I. MANUFACTURE.
3. The steel shall be made by the open-hearth process. Process.

4. A sufficient discard shall be made from each ingot to Discard,

secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

5. The steel shall conform to the following requirements as chemical

to chemical composition: Composition.

ACID. BASIC.
Carbon 0.60-0.80 0.65 - 0.85 per cent
Manganese 0.55-0.80 0.55-0.80 "
Phosphorus not over . 05 not over . 05 "
Sulfur " " 0.05 " " 0.05
Silicon 0.15-0.35 0.10-0.30

6. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle Analyses,

manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements
specified in Section 5. This analysis shall be made from a test
ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined, together with such identifying
records as may be desired, shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 5.
7. An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a check Analyses,
wheel representing each melt. The chemical composition thus
determined shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 5. A sample may be taken from any one point in the
plate; or two samples may be taken, in which case they shall
be on radii at right angles to each other. Samples shall not be
taken in such, a way as to impair the usefulness of the wheel.
Drillings for analysis shall be taken by boring entirely through
the sample parallel to the axis of the wheel; they shall be clean
and free from scale, oil and other foreign substances. All drillings
from any one wheel shall be thoroughly mixed together.

III. MATING.
8. The wheels shall be mated as to tape sizes and shipped Mating,
in pairs.
 ,

210 Specifications for Wheels for Electric Service.

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS. 1

Permissible 9. The wheels shall conform to the dimensions specified

aria ons.
^hin the following permissible variations:

Flange.
(a) Height of Flange. —The height of flange shall not vary
from that specified more than tV in. f° r Class A or yj in. for
Class B wheels.
(b) Thickness of Flange. —The thickness of flange shall not
vary from that specified more than tV in. for Class A or jj in.

for Class B wheels.

(c) Radius of Throat. —
The radius of throat shall not vary
from that specified more than tV in. for Class A or in. for ^
Class B wheels.
Rim.
(d) Thickness of Rim. —
The thickness of rim shall not vary
more than \ in. over nor more than § in. under that specified.
The thickness of rim shall be measured from the inner edge of the
rim to a base line drawn from the intersection of the throat radius
and the tread, parallel to the axis of the wheel.
(e) Width of Rim. —
The width of rim shall not vary from
that specified more than | in. for Class A or tV in. for Class B
wheels.
(J) Plane. —The wheels
be gaged with a ring gage placed
shall
concentric with and perpendicular to the axis of the wheel. For
all points on the back of the rim equidistant from the center,

the variation from the plane of the gage when so placed shall
not exceed tV in. for Class A or -^ in. for Class B wheels.
(g) Rotundity. —
The tread shall be gaged with a ring gage,
and the opening between the tread and this gage at any point
shall not exceed y§ in. for Class A wheels or ^j in. for Class B
wheels.
(h) Block Marks on Tread. —Block marks shall not exceed
£% in. in height.

—
Tape Sizes. Wheels with treads under 3 in. in width
(i)

shallnot vary more than 6 tapes over nor more than 4 tapes under
the size specified. Wheels with treads 3 in. or over in width shall
1
To facilitate the use of the specifications, the various dimensions are Illustrated In Fig. I

and the permissible variations in those dimensions are also given In tabular form In Table I.
 Serial Designation: A 25-16. 211

not vary more than 9 tapes over nor more than 5 tapes under
the size specified.
(j) —
Limit-of-W ear Groove.- When a limit-of-wear groove is
specified, its location shall not vary more than tV from that m -

specified.

Plate.
{k) Thickness of Plate. —The plate may vary- in thickness,
but the variation less than that specified shall not exceed -fa in.
for each $ in. in the thickness of the plate.

Hub.
—
Diameter of Hub. The diameter of hub shall not be
(/)

less,but may be £ in. more than that specified. The thickness of

wall of the finished bored hub shall not be less than 1 in. at any
point for bores 6 in. or under in diameter, nor less than lj in.
The
for bores over 6 in. in diameter, unless otherwise specified.
hub shall not vary more than f in. at
thickness of wall of the
any two points on the same wheel.
—
(m) Length of Hub. The length of hub shall not vary more
than | in. from that specified.
(o) Projection of Hub. —
The projection of the hub beyond
the back face of the rim shall not vary more than tV m - from
that specified.

Bore.
—
Diameter of Rough Bore. The diameter of rough bore
(p)
shallnot vary more than xV m
ov er nor more than | in. under
-

that specified. When finished-bore diameter only is specified,

the rough-bore diameter shall be made \ in. less with the
permissible variations specified above.
(g) Black Spots in Bore. — Black spots in rough bore within
2 in. of either face of the hubshall not exceed jV in depth.
in.
(r) Eccentricity of Bore. — The eccentricity between the
tread at its center line and the rough bore shall not exceed & in.

V. FINISH.

10. (a) The wheels shall be free from injurious defects and pini,h.
shall have a workmanlike finish.
 — . .

212 Specifications for Wheels for Electric Service.

Table I. Permissible Variations in Dimensions of Wrought Steel

Wheels for Electric Railway Service.
Permissible Variations in Dimensions.

Class A. Class B.
Dimensions.

Over Under Over Under

Flange.
(a) Height
h 1

A in -

(6) Thickness 111 -

3T
(e) Radius of Throat.
TV in
! rV n -

T7 l

A"
Rim.
(<f) Thickness, from Inner Edge to Intersection of Throat and Tread Jin.
<*) Width
tV*- tV e

(/) Maximum Departure of any Circle on Back Face from Plane.

tV in -
A 1

(ff) Maximum Departure of Tread from Rotundity

tV d -
A 1

(h) Maximum Height of Block Marks on Tread 6*4 m -

A'
(0 Tape Sizes:

1. For Treads under 3 in. in Width

2. For Treads 3 in. or over in Width

(j) Limit-of-Wear Groove: Maximum Departure from Specified

Position
rV iE
A iB

Plate.
(*) Thiokness, Variation for each J in. of Thickness.
A in -
A 1

Hub.
(I) 1. Diameter
f-
2. Minimum Thickness of Wall, for Bore 6 in. or under 1 in. I in.

3. Minimum Thickness of Wall, for Bore over 6 in llin.

4. Maximum Variation in Thickness of Wall in any One Wheel fin.

(m) Length iin.

(o) Projection beyond Back Face of Rim

TV- tV- A* A
Bore.
(If not specified, Rough Bore shall be 1 in. less than Finished Bore.)
Diameter of Rough Bore
(p)
TV A*
(g) Maximum Depth of Black Spots in Rough Bore within 2 in. of
End of Bore
tV A ir

(r) Maximum Eccentricity of Rough Bore in Relation to Tread

A in

Note. — The letter used for each dimension in this table and in Fig. 1 is the same as that of the paragraph
of Section 9 covering that dimension.
 Serial Designation: A 25-16. 213

(Note.- The Letter used for each

Dimension and in Table I
in this Figure
is the Same as that of the Paragraph

of the Section on Permissible Variations

Coverinq that Dimension.)

Base Line \for Thickness of Rim

Fig. I. — Diagram
showing Points at which the Dimensions covered by
the Specifications are Measured. For the Permissible Variations in
these Dimensions see Table I or Section 9.
 214 Specifications foe Wheels for Electbic Service.

(b) Wheels shall not be offered for inspection if covered

with paint, rust or any other substance to such an extent as to

hide defects.
VI. MARKING.
Marking. (#) The name or brand of the manufacturer, date, and
n.
serialnumber, shall be legibly stamped on each wheel in such a
way that the wheel may be readily identified.
(b) The tape size shall be legibly marked on each wheel.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 12. (a) The manufacturer shall provide suitable gages and
tapes, which shall conform to the contour and dimensions
specified.
(b) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the wheels ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all

reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the wheels are being

furnished in accordance with these specifications. Tests and
inspection at the place of manufacture shall be made prior to
shipment.
(c) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the accept-

ance or rejection of wheels in his own laboratory or elsewhere.

Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense of the
purchaser.
(d) All tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
Rejection. 13. (a) Unless otherwise specified any rejection based on
tests made in accordance with Section 12 (c) shall be reported
within ten working days from receipt of samples.
(b) Wheels which show injurious defects while being finished

by purchaser will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be

notified.
Rehearing. 14. Samples tested in accordance with Section 12 (c),
which represent rejected wheels, shall be preserved for one month
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
STEEL TIRES.

Serial Designation : A 26 - 16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 26; the
finalnumber indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1901; Revised, 1909, 1913, 1914, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

1. (a) These specifications cover three classes of tires. Material

Covered -
(b) The purposes for which these classes are frequently used
are as follows:
Class A, for driving tires for passenger locomotives;
Class B, for driving tires for freight locomotives and tires for

locomotive-truck, tender-truck, trailer and car wheels, and

miscellaneous service;
Class C, for driving tires for switching locomotives.

I. MANUFACTURE.
2. The steel shall be made by the open-hearth process. p r oc«M.
3. A sufficient discard shall be made from each ingot to Discard,
secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation.
213
 :

216 Specifications for Steel Tires.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 4. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
Composition.
as to chemical composition:

f Class A . 50 - . 70 per cent

Carbon j
Class B 0. 60 - 0. 80
(Class C 0.70-0.85
Manganese not over . 75
Phosphorus " " 0.05
Sulfur " " 0.05
Silicon 0.15-0.35

Ladle Analyses. 5. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the

manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements

specified in Section 4. This analysis shall be made from a
test ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined shall be. reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 4.
Check Analyses. 6. An analysis to represent each melt may be made by the
purchaser from turnings taken from a tire or from a tension test
specimen, if the tension test is specified. The chemical compo-
sition thus determined shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 4.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 7. from representative bars in accordance
If tension tests
with Section 8 are specified by the purchaser, the tensile proper-
ties shown shall conform to the following minimum requirements

Class A. Class B. Class C

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 105 000 1 15 000 125 000
Elongation in 2 in., per cent 12 10 8
Reduction of area, " 16 14 12

Tension 8. (a) The tension test specimen representing each melt

Test Specimens,
gj^ ^ e ta k en f rom a test ingot taken during the pouring of the
melt, and shall have received approximately the same amount of
work as the tires which it represents.
(b) The specimens shall conform to the dimensions shown

in Fig. 1. The ends shall be of a form to fit the holders

of the testing machine in such a way that the load shall be axial.
 Serial Designation: A 26-16. 217

9. (a) If specified by the purchaser, one tension test shall Number of Tests

be made from each melt.

(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or
develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
If the percentage of "elongation of any test specimen
(c)

is less than that specified in Section 7 and any part of the

fracture is more than f in. from the center of the gage length,
as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before
testing, a retest shall be allowed.
10. If the results of the tension test for any melt do not Retests.

conform to the requirements of Section 7, a retest may be made

Radius
not less

(< —2 Gage Length —H

Note '— The Gagelength, Parallel Portions and Fillets shall be as Shown,
but the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of
the Testing Machine.

Fig. 1.

on a specimen cut from a tire of the same melt furnished at the

expense of the manufacturer. This retest shall give results
conforming to the requirements of Section 7.

IV. MATING.
! 1. The tires shall be grouped as to outside diameters and Mating,
shipped in sets.

V. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS.

12. Tires may be furnished with all surfaces as rolled, and Permissible
shall conform to the <limensions specified within the following Variations -

permissible variations:
 218 Specifications for Steel Tires.

(a) —
Height of Flange. The height of flange shall not vary
more than ^ in. from that specified.

(b) Thickness of Flange. —

The thickness of flange shall not
vary more than tV m
from that specified.
-

(c) Radius of Throat. —

The radius of throat shall not vary
more than f in. over nor more than y£ in. under that specified.
(d) Width of Tire. —
The width of tire shall not vary more
than I in. over nor more than ye m
under that specified. -

(e) Inside Diameter. —

The rough inside diameter shall not
be more, but may be \ in. less than that specified. When
finished inside diameter only is specified, the rough diameter
shall be from j^ to ye m
l ess than this diameter.
-

(/) Outside Diameter. —

Unless otherwise specified, the out-
side diameter when 54 in. or under shall not be less, but may
be \ in. more than that specified; and when over 54 in. shall not
vary more than \ in. under nor more than f in. over that
specified.

(g) Set Diameters. —The tires shall be furnished in sets and

the variation in outside diameters in each set shall not exceed
ys in. for tires -33 in. or under in outside diameter, nor exceed
g? in. for tires over 33 in. in outside diameter.
(h) Rotundity. —Tires shall not be out of round more than
iV in- for tires 33 in. or under in outside diameter, nor more than
fa in. for tires over 33 in. in outside diameter.

VI. FINISH.
Finish. 13. The tires shall be free from injurious defects and shall
have a workmanlike finish.

VII. MARKING.
Marking. 14. The name or brand and serial number of the manu-
facturer shall be legiblystamped on the tire close to the inside
edge, where they will not be removed at the last turning. Set
numbers shall be legibly stenciled on each tire.

VIII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 15. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
 Serial Designation: A 26-16. 219

works which concern the manufacture of the tires ordered. The

manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reason-
able facilities to satisfy him that the tires are being furnished in
accordance with these specifications. All tests (except check
analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place of manufac-
ture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be
so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation
of the works.
16. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,
tests made in accordance with Section 6 shall be reported within
fiveworking days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Tires which show injurious defects while being finished

by the purchaser will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall

be notified.
Samples tested in accordance with Section 6, which
17. Rehearing,
represent rejected tires, shall be preserved for two weeks from

the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the

results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
STEEL CASTINGS.

Serial Designation: A 27-16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 27; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1901; Revised, 1905, 1912, 1913, 1914, 1916.

In view of the abnormal difficult:* in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

Material 1. These specifications cover two classes of castings, namely:

Covered.
Class- A, ordinary castings for which no physical require-
ments are specified;
Class B, castings for which physical requirements are speci-
fied. These are of three grades: hard, medium, and soft.
Patterns. 2. (a) Patterns shall be made so that sufficient finish is

allowed to provide for all variations in shrinkage.

(b) Patterns shall be painted three colors to represent
metal, cores, and finished surfaces. It is recommended that
core prints shall be painted black and finished surfaces red.
Basis of 3. The purchaser shall indicate his intention to substitute
Purchase.
^e test to destruction specified in Section 11 for the tension
and bend tests, and shall designate the patterns from which
castings for this test shall be made.
(220)
 Serial Designation: A 27-16. 221

I. MANUFACTURE
4. The steel may be made by the open-hearth, crucible, Process,
or any other process approved by the purchaser.
5. (a) Class A castings need not be annealed unless so Heat Treatment,
specified.
(b) Class B castings shall be properly annealed, the treat-
ment depending upon the design and chemical composition of
the castings.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

6. The castings shall conform to the following requirements Chemical
Composition.
as to chemical composition:
Class A. Class B.
Carbon not over 0.30 per cent ....
Phosphorus.... " " 0.06 " not over 0.05 per cent
Sulfur " " 0.05

7. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle

Ana] y ses
manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon, man- -

ganese, phosphorus and sulfur. This analysis shall be made

from drillings taken at least \ in. beneath the surface of a test
ingot obtained during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 6.
8. Analyses of Class A castings may be made by the Check
(a)

purchaser. The phosphorus content thus determined shall not Anal y ses -

exceed that specified in Section 6 by more than 20 per cent.

Drillings for analysis shall be taken not less than \ in. beneath
the surface.
(b) Analyses of Class B castings may be made by the
purchaser from a broken tension or bend test specimen. The
phosphorus and sulfur content thus determined shall not exceed
that specified in Section 6 by more than 20 per cent. Drillings
for analysis shall be taken not less than £ in. beneath the surface.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

(For Class B Castings Only.)

9. (a) The castings shall conform to the following minimum Tension Tests,
requirements as to tensile properties:
 .

222 Specifications for Steel Castings.

Hard. Mbdium. Soft.

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in. . 80 000 70 000 60 000
Yield Point, lb. per sq. in 0.45 tens. str. 0.45 tens. str. 0.45 tens, str
Elongation in 2 in., per cent. .15 18 22
Reduction of area. " ... 20 25 30

(&) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam of the testing machine.
Bend Tests. 10. (a) The test specimen for soft castings shall bend cold
through 120 deg., and for medium castings through 90 deg.,
around a 1-in. pin, without cracking on the outside of the bent
portion.
(b) Hard castings shall not be subject to bend test
requirements.

Radius
not less
than

\tr~- 2 "Gage Length — ^

Nate '- The GageLength, Parallel Portions and Fillets shall be as Shown,

but the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of

the Testing Machine.

Fig. l.

Alternative Tests In the case of small or unimportant castings, a test to

11.
to Destruction.
destruction on three castings from a lot may, upon agreement
between the manufacturer and the purchaser, be substituted for
the tension and bend tests. This test shall show the material
to be ductile, free from injurious defects, and suitable for the
purpose intended. Unless otherwise agreed upon between the
manufacturer and the purchaser, a lot shall consist of all castings
from one melt, in the same annealing charge.
Test Specimens. 12. (a) Sufficient test bars, from which thetest specimens
required in Section 13 (a) may be selected, shall be attached
to castings weighing 500 lb. or over, when the design of the
 Serial Designation: A 27-16. 223

castings will permit. If the castings weigh less than 500 lb.,

or are of such a design that test bars cannot be attached, two

test bars shall be cast to represent each melt; or the quality
of the castings shall be determined by tests to destruction as
specified in Section 11. All test bars shall be annealed with the
castings they represent.
(6) The manufacturer and purchaser shall agree whether
test bars can be attached to castings, on the location of the bars
on the castings, on the castings to which bars are to be attached,
and on the method of casting unattached bars.
(c) Tension test specimens shall conform to the dimensions

shown in Fig. 1. The ends shall be of a form to fit the holders

of the testing machine in such a way that the load shall be axial.
Bend test specimens shall be machined to 1 by £ in. in section
with corners rounded to a radius not over ?V in.
13. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from Number of Tests,
each annealing charge. If more than one melt is represented in
an annealing charge, one tension and one bend test shall be made
from each melt.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or

develops flaws, it may be discarded; in which case the manu-

facturer and the purchaser or his representative shall agree
upon the selection of another specimen in its stead.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
specimen is than that specified in Section 9 (a) and any
less
part of the fracture is more than I in. from the center of the gage
length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen
before testing, a re test shall be allowed.
14. If the results of the physical tests of any test lot do Retests.

not conform to the requirements specified, the manufacturer

may re-anneal such lot not more than twice and retests shall be
made as specified in Sections 9 and 10.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

15. The castings shall substantially conform to the sizes Workmanship,
and shapes of the patterns, and shall be made in a workman-
like manner.
16. (a) The castings shall be free from injurious defects. Finish.

(b) Minor defects which do not impair the strength of the

 224 Specifications for Steel Castings.

castings may, with the approval of the purchaser or his repre-

sentative, be welded by an approved process. The defects
shall first be cleaned out to solid metal; and after welding, the
castings shall be annealed, if specified by the purchaser or his
representative.
(c) Castings shall not be offered for inspection if covered

with paint, rust, or any other substance to such an extent as to

hide defects.

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 17. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free
entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser is

being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works which

concern the manufacture of the castings ordered. The manu-
facturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable
facilities to satisfy him that the castings are being furnished in
accordance with these specifications. All tests (except check
analyses) and inspection be made at the place of manufac-
shall
ture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so
conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation
of the works.
Rejection. 18. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
tests made be reported within
in accordance with Section 8 shall
five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Castings which show injurious defects subsequent to

their acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected,

and the manufacturer shall be notified.
Rehearing. 19. Samples tested in accordance with Section 8, which
represent rejected castings, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for
a rehearing within that time.

VI. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASTINGS FOR SHIPS.

Castings for 20. In addition to the preceding requirements, castings
Ships.
for ships, when so specified, shall conform to the following
requirements:
Heat Treatment. 21. All castings shall be annealed.
 Serial Design'atp-x: A 27- 16. 225

22. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from Number of Tests,
each of the following castings: stern frames, stern posts, twin
screw spectacle frames, propellor shaft brackets, rudders, steer-
ing quadrants, tillers, stems, anchors, and other castings when
specified.
(b) When a casting is made from more than one melt,
four tension and four bend tests shall be made from each casting
23. (a) A percussion test shall be made on each of the Percussion
following castings : stern frames, stern posts, twin screw spectacle Tests -

frames, propellor shaft brackets, rudders, steering quadrants,

tillers, stems, anchors, and other castings when specified.
(b) For this test, the casting shall be suspended by chains

and hammered all over with a hammer of a weight approved

by the purchaser or his representative. If cracks, flaws, defects,
or weakness appear after such treatment, the casting will be
rejected.

VII. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASTINGS FOR

RAILWAY ROLLING STOCK.
24. Castings for railway rolling stock, when so specified, Castings for

shall conform to the requirements for Class B castings, Sections R ail ^ay Rolling

1 to 19, inclusive, except that check analyses made in accordance

with Section 8 (b) shall conform to the requirements as to phos-

phorus and sulfur specified in Section 6.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH TEE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
LAP-WELDED AND SEAMLESS STEEL BOILER TUBES
FOR LOCOMOTIVES.

Serial Designation: A 28 -18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 28; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1912; Revised, 1913, 1916, 1918.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

Material 1. These specifications cover lap-welded and seamless

Covered. steel boiler tubes, boiler flues, superheater pipes, safe ends
and arch tubes for locomotives.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 2. The steel shall be made by the open-hearth process.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements

Composition. as t chemical composition:

Carbon 0. 08 - 0. 18 per cent

Manganese 0.30-0.60
"
Phosphorus not over 04.

Sulfur " " 0.045 "

(226)
 Serial Designation: A 28-18. 227

4. (a) Analyses of two tubes in each lot of 250 or less may Check

be made by the purchaser. The chemical composition thus kn t9 *- ^

determined shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 3. Drillings for analyses shall be taken from several
points around each tube.
(b) If the analysis of only one tube does not conform to
the requirements specified, analyses of two additional tubes
from the same lot shall be made, each of which shall conform
to the requirements specified.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

5. (a) For all tubes 6 in. or under in diameter and having a Flange Teeta.

thickness less than 9 per cent of the outside diameter, a test

Position .Position
after Using afterUsing
Flaring Tool- Flatter.

A- Outs. Diam. of Flue lessfi

B- Outs. Diam. of Flue less^l Liners--'*-- A -*l

C- Outs, Diam. of Flue plus

J! A m Outs. Diam. of Flue plus
£
Flaring Tool. Die Block.
Fig. 1.

specimen shall have a flange turned over at right angles to the

body of the tube without showing cracks or flaws. This flange,
as measured from the outside diameter of the tube, shall not be
less than 15 per cent of the outside diameter, but the flange
shall in no case exceed \ in. in width.
(b) In making the flange
test, it is recommended that the
flaring tooland die block shown in Fig. 1 be used.
6. (a) For all tubes, except small tubes and superheater Flattening Testa,

pipes, on which the flange test is not required, a test speci-

men 3 in. in length shall stand flattening between parallel plates
until the distance between the plates is not over three times
the wall thickness, without showing cracks or flaws. For lap-
welded tubes, care shall be taken that the weld is not located
at the point of maximum bend.
 228 Specifications for Locomotive Steel Boiler Tubes.

For small tubes and superheater pipes on which the

(b)

flange testis not required, a test specimen 3 in. in length shall

stand flattening between parallel plates until the distance

between the plates is not over four times the wall thickness,
without showing cracks or flaws.
Crush Tests. 7. (a) For all tubes except superheater pipes, a test speci-

men 2\ in. in length shall stand crushing longitudinally until

the outside folds are in contact, without showing cracks or flaws.
(b) For superheater pipes, a test specimen 7\ in. in length
shall stand crushing longitudinally down to \\ in., without
showing cracks or flaws.
Hydrostatic 8. Tubes under 5 in. in diameter shall stand an internal
Tests.
hydrostatic pressure of 1000 lb. per sq. in., and tubes 5 in. or
over in diameter shall stand an internal hydrostatic pressure of
800 lb. provided that the fiber stress does not exceed
per sq. in.;

16,000 lb. which case the test pressure shall be

per sq. in., in

determined by the following formula:

p_32,000 /

D
in which P = the pressure in pounds per square inch, < = the
thickness of wall in inches, and D = the inside diameter of tube
in inches. Lap-welded tubes shall be struck near both ends,
while under the test pressure, with a 2-lb. steel hand hammer or
the equivalent.
Test Specimens. 9. Test specimens shall consist of sections cut from
(a)

tubes selected by the inspector representing the purchaser from

the lot offered for shipment. They shall be smooth on the
ends and free from burrs.
(b) All specimens shall be tested cold.
Number of Tests. 10. One of each of the physical tests specified shall be
made from each of two tubes in each lot of 250 or less. Each
tube shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test.
Retests. 11. If the results of the physical tests of only one tube
from any lot do not conform to the requirements specified in
Sections 5, 6 or 7, retests of two additional tubes from the same
lot shall be made, each of which shall conform to the require-
ments specified.
 Serial Designation: A 28- 18. 229

1
IM 00
re
o IM
OS d s <M CM

- -r
r-llcN IO CM Hn
*"*
1
Jo
>o
00 o> d CM

CM 00

•
'_ oo HS -
s
00 o o> CM

o CO CO a>
CO
•o o O Mjoo

00 00 a>

CO
o CO
CO
>o 1
CO K5 CM 9 -*
oo

OS a *
$ * CO
CO r- 00 - !

5-s 1 -
SO 00 CO 1

* o CO
CO t~ 1

El r-
-*
iqIic
a 1- '
ih|h
.-a oo Tl r
(o'S
•* * l<0 wo CO

r»
o
o 10
a H« ->

es
CO GO
CO
CO
CO Itl
•a
"* »»• ua
d

-- - 1
.
o cc
COltD
in CO CO CO i*» * c
a r. CM
>* t"- CO
(0
CM CI CJ CO CO '
' n\-f
d
,^
CM o-.
o
C I
c O CI

CO. CI CM
ihIcD o
r<h
'~ CI
--
o
go ^** r»
— T4 CI CM IN

N p /
to a 9 '. U0 d
"" ** cm CM CM

ti

& « M - C_ c*> 00 *• & CO M ** o a>

CQ «
1

I
•o a a /
— -.
S I -- 00
«•
H a 8
o o e a a c o o e e c o
 230 Specifications for Locomotive Steel Boiler Tubes.

IV. STANDARD WEIGHTS.

Standard 12. The standard weights for tubes of various outside
Weights.
diameters and thicknesses, are as indicated in Table I.
Permissible 13. The weight of the tubes shall not vary more than 5
Variations.
per cent from that specified in Table I.

V. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Workmanship. 14. (a) The finished tubes shall be circular within 0.02 in.,
and the mean outside diameter shall not vary more than 0.015
in. from the size ordered.

(b) The thickness at any point shall not vary more than

one gage above or one gage below that specified. In the case of
boiler tubes which are expanded and swaged, the thickness of
the expanded end may be H gages lighter, and of the swaged
end 2 gages heavier than the thickness specified.
(c) The length shall not be less, but may be 0. 125 in. more

than that ordered.

Finish. 15. The finished tubes shall be free from injurious defects
and distortion, and shall have a workmanlike finish.

VI. MARKING.
Marking. 16. The name or brand of the manufacturer, the material
from which it is made, and the pressure in pounds at which it
was tested, shall be legibly stenciled on each tube.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 17. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the tubes ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all

reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the tubes are being fur-
nished in accordance with these specifications. All tests (except
check analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place of
manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and
shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operation of the works.
 Serial Designation: A 28-18. 231

18. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,

tests made in accordance with Section 4 shall be reported

within five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Tubes when inserted in the boiler shall stand expanding
and beading without showing cracks or flaws, or opening at the
weld. Superheater pipes when properly manipulated shall
stand all forging, welding, and bending operations necessary for
application without developing defects. Tubes or superheater
pipes which fail in any of the above operations will be rejected,
and the manufacturer shall be notified.
19. Samples tested in accordance with Section 4, which Rehearing,

represent rejected tubes, shall be preserved for two weeks from

the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
LAP-WELDED AND SEAMLESS STEEL AND
WROUGHT-IRON BOILER TUBES FOR
STATIONARY SERVICE.

Serial Designation: A 52-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 52; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915; Revised, 1918.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

Material These specifications cover lap-welded and seamless

1.
Covered.
stee j anc wro ught-iron boiler tubes, boiler flues, superheater
j

pipes, safe ends and arch tubes for stationary service.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 2. (a) Lap-welded tubes shall be made of open-hearth
steel or knobbled, hammered charcoal iron.
{b) Seamless tubes shall be made of open-hearth steel.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 3. (a) The steel shall conform to the following require-
Composition. m ents as to chemical composition:

Carbon . 08 - . 1 8 per cent

Manganese 0.30-0.60
Phosphorus not over 0.04 "
Sulfur " " 0.045

(232)
 Serial Designation: A 52- 18. 233

(b) Chemical analysis will not be required for charcoal-iron

tubes.
4. (a) Analyses of two tubes in each
lot of 250 steel tubes Check
naly8ei
or less may
be made by the purchaser. The chemical composi-
-

tion thus determined shall conform to the requirements specified

in Section 3. Drillings for analyses shall be taken from several
points around each tube.
(b) If the analysis of only one tube does not conform to

the requirements specified, analyses of two additional tubes

from the same lot shall be made, each of which shall conform
to the requirements specified.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

5. (a) For tubes not more than 6 in. in diameter having a Flange Tests.

Position Posit/on
Ctfterilsing afterUsing*
Flaring Tool.._ Flatter,

r-4
A- Outs. Diam. of Flue less^\
B' Outs. Diam. of Flue less £'! Liners- '*
A "
C- Outs. Diam. of Flue plus £'.
A Outs. Diam. of Flue plus^ .

Flaring Tool. Die Block.

Fig. l.

thickness less than 10 per cent of the outside diameter, pro-

vided the thickness does not exceed No. 6 B.w.g., a test specimen
not less than 4 in. in length shall have a flange turned over at
right angles to the body of the tube without showing cracks or
flaws. This flange, as measured from the outside diameter of
the tube, shall not be less than 10 per cent of the outside
diameter, provided that in no case shall the flange be less than
\ in. or greater than \ in. in width. For all other tubes, the
flange test is not required.
(b) In making the flange test, it is recommended that the
and die block shown in Fig.
flaring tool be used. 1

6. A test specimen 3 in. in length shall stand flattening Flattening

between parallel plates until the distance between the plates is T * 8t '-
234 Specifications for|[Stationary Boiler Tubes.

CO O
to
*» 9 3 m
cm CO
co CO CO

« §g :

OO
CO CO
CD CO
o
a
s co co
o»
in eft
CM CO
o e» CO X3 e
o cm o> OO ea
i-< cm to
cm cq cs CM
CO
a> 16.955 19.072 20.629
cm
y
>
a o
CO
a CO 13.807 15.033 16.904 18.280
t>-
03 co

00
OO
\
< c~ 12.044 13.110 14.736 15.930

o to
H
< (0 10.282 11.188 12.568 13.580
:
3 .

H •>*

CO
>.
H|N 8.459 9.401
10.227

O i
o U3
55
« .
- a m|oo 8.262 9.181 9.987
•o

*» s Hi'* 8.064 8.960 9.746

BJ.2
»Q
61
«
® *s U3 7.669 8.520 9.266 10.400 11.231

. 3
5°'
O H|C* 6.248 6.879 7.639 8.304 9.316

^" 5.532 6.088 6.758 7.343 8.232

ml-* 4.652 5.175 5.693 6.317 6.863

CO

H|f>
to
4.331 4.817 5.298 5.877 6.382 Oft
co
• 00
to CO to
r— e»
Hi-*
CO
4.011 4.459 4.903 5.436 5.901 6.606 7.119
i
s .
CM CO
• 00 • 00
o
cm
C-l
00
OO
CO
co 3.365 3.691 4.101 4.508 4.995 5.421 6.064 6.531 • o to CM
• OO

eo|* 3.074 3.370 3.743 4.112 4.555 4.940 5.522 5.944

: 3
CO
: 8
00
'
to
• OO
H|N e*
2.783 3.050 3.386 3.717 4.114 4.460 4.980 5.357

• CO • to

Hh* 2.186 2.492 2.729 3.028 3.322

•a
C*« 1.932 2.201 2.409 2.670 2.927 3.233 • OO

«!•* 1.679 1.910 2.089 2.312 2.532

H|f» H|N H|N

s*
cocM-HOCftoor-toio^^i n cj «
g « 3
B
O 9 - e5 *p
B9
oo
**
«n
to
c3
o
c3
53
c>
o
e» ct 5 c 3 cs
a e c1 ! i i i

1 J c
e> e3 C> c5 O O C> c3
) c
C>
1 G

Cs c < 3
3
<»
ii
1
>
C» 1
 «

Serial Designation: A 52-18. 235

a 5 CO
to
o w!» CO 8
CO
—
<nI CM
co
CM to
CO
CO C»
CO
go H|tN CO
3 -»•
*' CM N
CO

o CO

Th co o
"" CM
o>

o o
00 M|c0 o>
~ "<

-
r-l|-*

'• "*
io E
O
2
.9
H|tN 4 r~ o> CO

Ej o £
o
s=
» a
.
c'§
co|oo
U5
- HQ
:i 0>
-r
r-
into s
« "Is
J
* S3 «5 -2 in|rt

H •J

>o U o
Id M
K TT,
_
•--
r- a
W J r-|co x o>
* «!
o o -*
2 B
S
* CO
- J nlta
00 h-

co:-* i o o ©
co
C-1
CO
(M
CO o f e
K-
—— •**
e ©
CO
o
o
I/O
CO CO CO
l-(|lD
00
o o
CO

CO
H
CI
-I
3 OT|co <* U0
©
H «

«i
CM
* — ^" •"
a
**
C7> CO

pa
Mf
J
be
-
I ? 8 3 3 "5
§ ,
,
C>
CO J3
o o e o o O

.
* J
e
c
<3
1 1

<5
1 r
<5
(

C5
1

9
r
 236 Specifications for Stationary Boiler Tubes.

not over fivetimes the wall thickness, without showing cracks

or flaws. For lap-welded tubes, the test shall be made with the
weld at the point of bend. maximum
Hydrostatic 7. Tubes under diameter shall stand an internal
5 in. in
Tests.
hydrostatic pressure of 1000 lb. per sq. in., and tubes 5 in.
or over in diameter shall stand an internal hydrostatic pressure
of 800 lb. per sq. in.; provided that the fiber stress does not
exceed 16,000 lb. per sq. in., in which case the test pressure
shall be determined by the following formula:

32,000 t
/;
D
in which P = the pressure in pounds per square inch, / = the
thickness of wall in inches, and D= the inside diameter of tube
in inches. Lap-welded tubes shall be struck near both ends,
while under the test pressure, with a 2-lb. steel hand hammer or
the equivalent.
Etch Tests for 8. A cross-section of charcoal-iron tube may be turned or
Charcoal-Iron
Tubes.'
ground to a true surface, polished free from dirt or cracks, and
etched until the soft parts are sufficiently dissolved for the
iron tube to show a decided ridged surface, with the weld very
distinct, while a steel tube would show a homogeneous surface.
Test Specimens. 9. specimens shall be taken from tubes before
(a) All test
being cut to finished lengths and shall be smooth on the ends
and free from burrs.
(b) All specimens shall be tested cold.
Number of Tests. 10. All tube^ shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test.
One be made from
of each of the physical tests specified shall
each of two tubes in each lot of 250 or less.
Reteats. 11. If the results of the physical tests of only one tube
from any lot do not conform to the requirements specified in
Sections 5 or 6, retests of two additional tubes from the same

lot shall be made, each of which shall conform to the require-

ments specified.

IV. STANDARD WEIGHTS.

Standard The standard weights for tubes of various outside
12.
Weights.
diameters and thicknesses, are as indicated in Table I.
1
A solution of two parts water, one part concentrated hydrochloric acid, and one part
concentrated sulfuric ftC id is reooramended for the etch test.
 Serial Designation: A 52-18. 237

V. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

(a) Finished tubes 3| in. or under in outside diameter Workmanship,
13.

shall be circular within 0.02 in. and the mean outside diameter
shall not vary more than 0.015 in. from the size ordered. For
tubes over 3| in. in outside diameter, these variations shall not
exceed 0.5 per cent of the outside diameter.
(b) All tubes shall be gaged with a Birmingham wire gage
and shall not be less than the thickness specified, except that
tubes will be accepted on which the gage will go on tightly at
the thinnest point.
(c) The length shall not be less, but may be 0.125 in. more
than that ordered.
14. The finished tubes shall be free from injurious defects Finish,

and distortion, and shall have a workmanlike finish.

VI. MARKING.
15. The name or brand of the manufacturer, the material Marking,
from which made, whether steel or charcoal iron, and the
it is

pressure in pounds at which it was tested, shall be legibly sten-

ciled on each tube.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

16. Inspection and all tests except check analyses shall be inspection,
made at the place of manufacture. The manufacturer shall
furnish the purchaser of each lot of tubes a statement of the
kind of material of which the tubes are made, and that the
tubes have been tested and have met all the requirements of the
specifications.
17. Tubes when inserted in the boiler shall stand expanding Rejection,
and beading without showing cracks or flaws, or opening at
the weld. Superheater pipes when properly manipulated shall
stand welding and bending operations necessary for
all forging,

application without developing defects. Tubes or superheater

pipes which fail in any of the above operations will he rejected,
and the manufacturer shall be notified.
 APPENDIX.

The following information, reprinted, by permission, from

the latest revisions of paragraphs 21 and 22 of the Boiler Code
of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, is appended
to these specifications as information of possible value to users
of the specifications:

Maximum Allowable Working Pressures for Water

Tubes in Water-Tube and Fire-Tube Boilers.

Tubes for Water-Tube Boilers. —The maximum allowable

working pressures for tubes used in water-tube boilers shall
be, for the various diameters and gages measured by Birmingham
wire gage, as given in the accompanying table.

—
Tubes for Fire-Tube Boilers. The minimum thicknesses of
tubes used in fire-tube boilers, measured by Birmingham wire
gage, for maximum allowable working pressures not exceeding
175 lb. per sq. in. shall be as follows:

Diameter 1 in. or over, but less than 7\ in No. 13 B.w.g.

Diameter 2| in. or over, but less than 3| in No. 12 B.w.g.
Diameter 3j in. or over, but less than 4 in No. 1 1 B.w.g.
Diameter 4 in. or over, but less than 5 in No. 10 B.w.g.
Diameter 5 in No. 9 B.w.g.

For each increase of one gage in thickness the maximum

allowable working pressure will be increased by 200 lb. divided
by the diameter of the tube in inches.

(238)
 Serial Designation: A 52-18. 239

« « ~*
3 g
aa r- to

CO CO

•* ^« CO CO cs

D
r- CO CO CO CM CM

(d
H
<
00 ~* »«
^ CO CO
as
O
I--
2 3
— X I- CO CO CM
co
CM
O
CM
r*-

-^ ** CM oO
•* CO CO CM

r>-
*<
oo
CO
~*
CO
*o
CM
o
CM
r-
*H

a 2 a s

t^ 3 <•<

00 CM -^ 00
f -r <* I-

^ 00 O "*

_»4 -«r« «*•

Jg|Q
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
WELDED STEEL PIPE.

-
Serial Designation: A 53-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 53; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915; Revised, 1918.

Material 1. These cover "standard" and "extra

specifications
Covered. g" welded
s t ron but not "double extra strong" pipe.
steel pipe,
Basis of 2. (a) All pipe to be used on locomotives and cars shall
Purchase.
^ e f co iling or bending quality.
(b) Unless otherwise specified on the purchase order, inspec-

tion and all tests except the hydrostatic pressure test shall be
made by the purchaser at destination, and at his expense.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 3. (a) The steel shall be of a soft weldable quality made by
the Bessemer or other approved process.
(b) All pipe 3 in. or under in nominal diameter may be
butt-welded, unle-s otherwise specified. All pipe over 3 in.

in nominal diameter shall be lap-welded.

(240)
 —

Serial Designation: A 53-18. 241

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

4. (a) The material shall conform to the following mini- Tension Tests,

mum requirements as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 50 000

" "
Yield point, 30 000
Elongation in 8 in., per cent 18

(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam of the testing machine.

Table I. Hydrostatic Pressures for Welded Pipe.

(Prkssubsb expressed in Founds per Square Inch.)

"Standard" Pipe. "Extra 8trong" Pipe.

Inside Diameter, in.

Butt-Weld. Lap-Weld. Butt-Weld. Lap-We!d.

700 700

700 700

700 700

700 700
A 700 700
4-

1... 700 700

»f 700 1000 1500 2500

»i 700 1000 1500 2500

2... 700 1000 1500 2500

«* 800 1000 1600 2000

8... 800 1000 1500 2000

1000 2000

«... ... 1000 2000

«*. ... 1000 1800

6... 1000 1800

8... "" 1000 1800

5. All pipe shall be tested at the mill to the hydrostatic Hydrostatic

Teste.
pressures specified in Table I.

6. (a) For lap-welded pipe over 2 in. in diameter, a section Flattening

Test8-
of pipe 6 in. long shall be flattened until the distance between
the plates is one- third the outside diameter of the pipe with the
weld located 45 deg. from the line of direction of the applied
force, without developing cracks.
(b) For butt-welded pipe over 2 in. in diameter, a section of
 242 Specifications for Welded Steel Pipe.

pipe 6 in. long shall be flattened until the distance between the
plates is one-half the outside diameter o the pipe with the weld
located 45 deg. from the line of direction of the applied force,
without developing cracks.
Bend Tests. 7. For pipe 2 in. or under in diameter, a sufficient length

of pipe shall bend cold trr.ough 90 deg. around a cylindrical

mandrel the diameter o which is 15 times the nominal diameter
1"

of the p pe, without developing cracks at any portion and

:

without opening the weld.

Test Specimens. 8. Test specimens shall consist of sections cut from a
(a)
pipe. They
shall be smooth on the ends and free from burrs.
(b) Tension test specimens shall be longitudinal.

(c) All specimens shall be tested cold.

Number of Tests. 9. One of each of the tests specified in Sections 4, 6 and 7,

may be made on a length in each lot of 500 or less, of each size.

Each length shah be subjected to the hydrostatic test.
Retests. 10. If the results of the physical tests of any lot do not
conform to the requirements specified in Sections 4, 6 and 7,
retests of two additional pipes shall be made, each of which
shall conform to the requirements specified.

III. STANDARD WEIGHTS.

Standard 11. (a) The standard weights for pipe of various inside
Weights. diameters are given in Table II.
(b) Nipp :

es shall be cut from pipe of the same weight and

quality as described in these specifications.
Permissible 12. The weight of the pipe shall not vary more than 5
Variations.
per cent from that specified in Table II.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Workmanship. 13. For pipe 1^ in. or under in inside diameter, the
(a)

outside diameter at any point shall not vary more than ^j in.
over nor more than £$ in. under the standard size. For pipe
2 in. or over in inside diameter, the outside diameter shall not
vary more than 1 per cent over or under the standard size.
(b) All "standard" pipe shall be provided with the pre-
vailing standard thread, which will make a tight joint when
tested to the specified internal hydrostatic pressure at the mill.
The threads shall not vary more than one and one-half turns
 —

Serial Designation: A 53-18. 243

either way, when tested with a Pratt

standard gage. & Whitney
be removed.
All burrs at the ends of the pipe shall
(c) Unless otherwise ordered, pipe shall be furnished in

random lengths of 16 to 22 ft., but not more than 5 per cent

of the total number of lengths furnished may be "jointers,"
which are two pieces coupled together. When ordered with
Table II. Standard Weights of Welded Pipe.
(All Dimensions abb Nominal.)

'Standard" "Extra Strong"

Dimensions. Pipe. Pipe.

Weight of Pipe „e .
ht of D
,
, . .

Number Outside per Linear Foot, ^ }g. P'PJ

Inside Diameter, in. of Threads Diameter, Threaded and P"f' 1 ne « r Foot,
.

per Inch. with Couplings, Plain Ends,

lb.
Ib -

t 27 0.405 0.25 0.81

'

I 18 0.540 0.4S 0.64

f 18 0.674 0.57 0.74

$ 14 0.840 0.85 1.09

\ I

14 1.050 1.13 1 47

1 11* 1.315 1.68 2.17

»1 4 1.660 2.28 8.00

i* u* 1.900 2.78 8.63

3 11* 2.875 3.08 5.02

2* I 8 2.875 6.82 7.66

8 8 8.600 7.62 10.25

I* 8 4.000 0.20 12.61

4 8 4.600 10.89 14.98

4$ 8 6.000 12.64 17.61

5 8 6.568 14.81 20.78

8 6.625 19.19 28.57

plain ends, 5 per cent may be furnished in lengths of 12 ft. or

over.
{<]) Each "standard" pipe shall be provided with a
coupling, having clean-cut threads of such a pitch diameter as
to make a tight joint. Couplings may be of wrought iron or
steel.

(e) Unless otherwise specified, "extra strong" pipe shall be

furnished in random lengths, with plain ends.
 244 Specifications for Welded Steel Pd?e.

Finish. 14. The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight and free
from injurious defects

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 15. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the pipe ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the pipe are being fur-
nished in accordance with these specifications.
(b) When tests and inspection are made at the place of
manufacture, they shall be so conducted as not to interfere
unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
Rejection. 16. Pipe which develop injurious defects in shop working
or application will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be
notified.
Rehearing. 17. Samples tested in accordance with Section 2 (b), which
represent rejected pipe, shall be preserved for two weeks from
the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
AUTOMOBILE CARBON AND ALLOY STEELS.

Serial Designation: A 29-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 29; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1912; Revised, 1913, 1914, 1915, 1916, 1918.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

1. Automobile steels shall be purchased on the basis of Basis of

Purchase -

the requirements as to chemical composition specified in Sec-

tions 5, 6 and 7. Requirements as to physical properties have
been omitted for all steels except castings, because the majority
of automobile steels, except castings, are either worked or given
special heat treatments by the purchaser. It is recommended
that tension and bend tests shall be specified for the material
as shipped, whenever it is practicable to do so. When physical
requirements are specified, requirements as to carbon shall be
omitted.
2. The Standard Specifications for Steel Castings, Class B steel Castings.

(Serial Designation: A 27), of the American Society for Testing

Material?, shall govern the pur< base of automobile steel castings
 246 Specifications for Automobile Steels.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 3. The steels may be made by the Bessemer, open-hearth,
crucible, electric, or any other process approved by the pur-
chaser.
Discard. 4. A sufficient discard shall be made from each ingot to
secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 5. The steels shall conform to the requirements as to chem-
ical composition specified in Tables I to VI, appended to
these specifications, and which are entitled as follows:
Table. Titlb.
I Automobile Carbon Steels.
II Automobile Nickel Steels.
Ill Automobile Nickel-Chromium Steels.
IV Automobile Chromium Steels.
V Automobile Chromium- Vanadium Steels.
VI Automobile Silico-Manganese Steels.

Ladle 6. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the

manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements

specified in Tables I to VI. This analysis shall be made from
drillings taken at least \ in. beneath the surface of a test ingot
obtained during the pouring of the melt, and in as sound metal
as possible. The chemical composition thus determined shall be
reported to the purchaser or his representative, and shall con-
form to the requirements specified in Tables I to VI.
Check 7. (a) Analyses may be made by the purchaser. The
chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the
requirements specified in Tables I to VI.
(b) Drillings for analyses of bars, billets, or other regular
shapes shall be taken parallel to the axis, at any point midway
between the center and surface.
(c) Drillings for analyses may be taken from broken ten-
sion or bend test specimens, if physical requirements are
specified.
analyses of irregularly shaped
(d) Drillings or cuttings for
pieces for which
no physical requirements are specified, shall
be taken from both the thickest and the thinnest sections-
Surface drillings shall be discarded.
 "

Sejual Designation: A 29- 18. 247

(e) Wire, tubing, sheets, and rods less than l£ in. in thick-
ness, shall be sampled through or across the entire section.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS

8. If physical requirements are specified, the following Physical
Pr °P* rtle8 -

Sections 9 to 13 shall form a part of the modified specifications.

9. The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the Yield Point,
beam of the testing machine.
10. The elastic limit called for by these specifications Elastic Limit,

shallbe determined by an extensometer reading to 0.0002 in.

The extensometer shall be attached to the specimen at the gage
marks and not to the shoulders of the specimen nor to any part

k !

— H .*#
I {Parallel Section} \
. .

p— About 3 V^ ?\notles5than9)\
j

c . It .
*L
I

About 2

'

I k- 'e'—A
k- Ab ou t /8'

Fig. 1.

of the testing machine. When the specimen is in place and the

extensometer attached, the testing machine shall be operated so
as to increase the load on the specimen at a uniform rate. The
observer shall watch the elongation of the specimen as shown by
the extensometer and shall note, for this determination, the
load at which the rate of elongation shows a sudden increase.
The extensometer shall then be removed from the specimen,
and the test continued to determine the tensile strength.
11.test shall be made cold.
The bend Band Taita.
Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken Test Specimai
12. (a)

from the rolled or forged material; except that in the case of

irregularly shaped forgings, they may be taken from a full-size
 .

248 Specifications for Automobile Steels.

prolongation. Specimens
not be annealed or otherwise
shall
treated, except as specified in Paragraph (b).
(b) Tension and bend test specimens for material which is

to be annealed or otherwise treated before use shall be cut, for

rolled material, from properly annealed or similarly treated short
lengths of the full section of the piece, and for forged material
from the treated forgings.
(c) Tension and bend test specimens for plates and shapes

shall be of the full thickness of material as rolled; and may be

machined to the form and dimensions shown in Fig. 1, or with
both edges parallel.
(d) Tension and bend test specimens for rolled bars and

Radius
not /ess 1

thanj^ k--
i
24
\ i 1

, .

T 1 f 1

-
' j
>
1

k- 2 Gage Length -H
-

No/s - The Gagelengfh, Parallel Portions and Fillets shall be as Shown,

hut the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Holders of
the Testing Machine.

Fig. 2.

forgings of uniform cross-section \\ in. or under in thickness

or diameter, may be of the full-size section of material as rolled
or forged, or may be machined to a thickness or diameter of at
least \ in. for a length of at least 9 in. Tension test specimens
shall be of 8-in. gage length.
(e) The axis of tension and bend test specimens for rolled
bars and forgings of uniform cross-section over 1^ in. in thickness
or diameter, and for forgings of irregular sections, when practi-
any point midway between the center
cable, shall be located at
and surface when solid, and at any point midway between the
inner and outer surfaces of the wall when bored, and shall be
parallel to the axis of the piece in the direction in which the
 Serial Designation: A 29-18. 249

metal is most drawn out. Tension test specimens shall conform

to the dimensions shown in Fig. 2. The ends shall be of a
form to fit the holders of the testing machine in such a way that

the load shall be axial. Bend test specimens shall be \ in. square
in section with corners rounded to a radius not over xV -» and m
need not exceed 6 in. in length.
13. (a) Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, one if umber of Tests,

tension and one bend test shall be made from each melt; except
that if material rolled from one melt differs § in. or more in
thickness, one tension and one bend test shall be made from
both the thickest and the thinnest material.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or

develops flaws, it may be discarded; in which case the manu-

facturer and the purchaser or his representative shall agree upon
the selection of another specimen in its stead.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test

specimen is less than that specified and any part of the fracture
is more than f in. from the center of the gage length of a 2-in.

specimen or is outside the middle third of the gage length of an

8-in. specimen, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the
specimen before testing, a retest shall be allowed.

IV. FINISH.
14. The material shall be free from injurious defects and shall Finish,
have a workmanlike finish.

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

15. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have inspection,

free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the material ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. Tests and
inspection at the place of manufacture shall be made prior to
shipment.
(b) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the
acceptance or rejection of the material own laboratory or
in his
elsewhere. Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense
of the purchaser.
 —

250 Specifications for Automobile Steels.

(c) All tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not

to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
Rejection. Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
i6. (a)
tests made in accordance with Section 15 (b) shall be reported
within ten working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Material which shows injurious defects while being

finished by the purchaser will be rejected, and the manufacturer

9hall be notified.
Rehearing. 17. Samples tested in accordance with Section 15(6), which
represent rejected material, shall be preserved for one month
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.

Table I. Automobile Carbon Steels.

Carbon. Manganese. Phos. StJLF.

Desired. Permissible Desired. !

Permissible Not Not
Range. Range. Over Over

0.10 0.05-0.15 0.45 0.30-0.60 0.045 0.05

0.20 0.15-0.25 0.45 0.30-0.60
0.25 0.20-0.30 0.65 0.50-0.80
0.35 0.30-0.40 0.65 0.50-0.80
0.46 0.40-0.50 0.65 0.50-0 80
0.95 0.90-1.05 0.35 i 0.25-0.50 0.04

Scrbw Stock.
•

Grade. Carbon. Manganestc. Phos. Sulp.

0.08-0.16 0.60-0.80 0.09-0.13 0.075-0.15

0.15-0.25 0.60-0.90 not over . 06 0.075-0.13

The requirements for screw stock material cover a free-cutting steel suitable for high-
speed screw machine work, leaving a smooth finish after machining.

Steel Castings, Class B.

A* required for the chemical and physical properties. See Standard Specifications tat
Steel Castings (Serial Designation: A 27).

All values are expressed in per cent.

 — — j

Serial Designation: A 29-18. 251

Table II. Automobile Nickel Steels.

Carbon. Manganese. Phos. Suu. Nickel.

Desired. Permissible Desired. Permissible '

Not Not Desired. Permissible
Range. Range. '
Over Over Range.

0.15 0.10-0.20 0.65 0.50-0.80 0.04 0.045 3.50 3.25- J6

0.20 0.15-0.25 3.
0.30 0.25-0.35
35 0.30-0.40
0.40 0.35-0.46

All values are expressed in per cent.

Table III. Automobile Nickel-Chromium Steels.

With 1.25 per cent Nickel.

Carbon. Manganese. 1 Phos. Sdlf. Nickel. Chromium.

Desired.
Permissible _. . . Permissible Not Not Permissible Permissible
Range. Desired. Range> ver Desired. Desired.
!

Over Range. Range.

0.20 0.15-0.25 0.65 0.50-O 80 0.04 ! 0.045 1.25 1.O0-1.50 0.60 0.45-0.76
0.25 0.20-0.30
0.30 0.25-0.35
0.35 0.30-0.40
:: :: :: :: ::
0.40 0.35-0.45 ^

With 1.75 per cent Nickel.

0.20 0.15-0.25 0.45 30-0.60 0.04 0.04 1.75 1.60-2.00, 1.10 0.90-1.25
" < " " " ,. 1 " " "
0.30 !
0.25-0.35
" " " " " " '• "
0.40 |
35-0.45
" " " " "
0.50 j
0.45-0.55 " "

With 3.00 per cent Nickel.

0.15 0.10-0.20 0.60 0.45-0.75 0.04 i

0.04 3.00 2.76-3.25 0.80 0.60-0.85
0.35 0.30-0.40
0.60 0.45-0.56

With 3.50 per cent Nickel.

0.20 25 0.45 0.30-0. 60 0.04 01 3.60 3.25-3.75 1.50 !

125-1.76
30 0.25-0 36 ''

0.40 0.35-0.45 " "

All values are expressed in per oent.

 —— —

252 Specifications for Automobile Steels.

Table IV. Automobile Chromium Steels.

Cabbon. Manganese. Phos. Sulf. Chromium.

De- Permissible Desired. Permissible Not Not Desired. Permissible

sired. Range. Range. Over j Over Range.

0.20 0.15-0.25 . a a 0.04 0.045 0.76 0.65-0.85

0.40 0.36-0.45 a a

..
0.65 0.60-0.70 ,
.o a

0.95 0.90-1.05 0.35 0.20-0.45 0.03 0.03 1.00 0.90-1.10

1.10-1.30 "
1.20

0.95 0.90-1.05 1.20 1.10-1.30

1.20 1.10-1.30

o In these three grades the specified percentages of manganese and silicon may be either of

the following: manganese, 0.35 desired (permissible range, 0.25-0.50) and silicon, not over0.20;
or manganese, 0.70 desired (permissible range, 0.60-0.80) and silicon, 0.15-0.50.

All values are ezpressed in per cent.

Table V. Automobile Chromium-Vanadium Steels.

Cabbon. Manganese. Phos. Sulk. Chromium. Vanadium.

Desired. Permissible Desired. Permissible Not Not Desired. Permissible n..:™j Not Under.
Range. Range Over Over Range.

0.20 0.16-0.25 0.65 0.50-0.80 0.04 0.04 0.95 80-1.10 0.18 0.16
" ii !• " " " •
0.25 0.20-0.30 •

0.25-0.35
" " " " " •• • ii -
0.30
" " •• . • "
0.35 0.30-0. 40
" " •• . .1 "
0.40 0.35-0.45 i

" " " " " ™ • "

0.45 0.40-0. 50 •

" " " " • •• «

0.50 0.45-0.65
0.95 0.00-1.05 0.85 0.20-0.45 0.03 0.03

All values are ezpressed in per cent.

Table VI. Automobile Silico-Manganese Steels.

Cabbon. Manganese. Phos. Sulf. Silicon.

De- Permissible Desired. Permissible Not Not Desired. Permissible

sired. Range. Range. Over Over Range.

0.50 0.45-0.55 0.70 0.60-0.80 0.045a 0.045 1.95 ! 1.80-2.10

0.60 0.55-0.65 0.60 0.50-0.70 0.045" 0.045 1.65 1.50-1.80

« Steels made by the acid process may contain 0.05 maximum phosphorus.
AU values are expressed in per cent.
 .

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
BOILER AND FIREBOX STEEL FOR
LOCOMOTIVES.

Serial Designation : A 30-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 30; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1901; Revised, 1909, 1912, 1913, 1914, 1916, 1918.

1 These specifications cover two grades of steel for boilers Material

Covered.
for locomotives, namely: flange and firebox.

I. MANUFACTURE.
2. The steel shall be made by the open-hearth process. Process.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements as Chemical
ompositon.
to chemical composition:
Plangb. Firebox.
Carbon 0. 12 - 0.25 per cent
Manganese 0.30 - 0.60 0.30 - 0.60
r>, , / Acid not over 0.05 not over 0.04 "
Phosphorus < _ .

" " " " 0.035 "

\ Basic 0.04
Sulfur " " 0.05 " " 0.04 "

4. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle

Ana yses
manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements
 . :

254 Specifications for Boiler and Firebox Steel.

specified in Section 3. This analysis shall be made from a test

ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The chemical
composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser
or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 3.
Check 5. An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a
Analyses.
broken tension test specimen representing each plate as rolled.
The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to
the requirements specified in Section 3.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 6. (a) The material shall conform to the following require-
ments as to tensile properties:

Flangb. FlRKBOX.
Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 55 000 - 65 000 52 000-62 000
Yield point, min., " " 0.5 tens. str. 0.5 tens. str.
1 500 000 1 500 000
Elongation in 8 in., min., per cent.
(See Section 7) Tens. str. Tens. str.

(&) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam of the testing machine.
Modifications in 7. (a) For material over f in. in thickness, a deduction of
Elongation.
0.5 from the percentages of elongation specified in Section 6 (a)
shall be made for each increase of § in. in thickness above f in.
(b) For material \ in. or under in thickness, the elongation

shall be measured on a gage length of 24 times the thickness of the

specimen.
Bend Tests. 8. The test specimen shall bend cold through 180 deg.

without cracking on the outside of the bent portion, as follows:

For material 1 in. or under in thickness, around a pin the
diameter of which is equal to the thickness of the specimen;
and for material over 1 in. in thickness, around a pin the
diameter of which is equal to twice the thickness of the
specimen.
Homogeneity 9. For firebox steel, a sample taken from a broken tension
Tests.
test specimen shall not show any single seam or cavity more than
Jin. long, in either of the three fractures obtained in the test
for homogeneity, which shall be made as follows
 — '

Serial Designation: A 30-18. 255

The specimen shall be either nicked with a chisel or grooved

on a machine, transversely, about rV in. deep, in three places
about 2 in. apart. The first groove shall be made 2 in. from the
square end; each succeeding groove shall be made on the opposite
side from the preceding one. The specimen shall then be firmly
held in a vise, with the first groove about \ in. above the jaws,

and the projecting end broken off by light blows of a hammer,

the bending being away from the groove. The specimen shall be
broken at the other two grooves in the same manner. The object
of this test is to open and render visible to the eye any seams
due to failure to weld up or to interposed foreign matter, or any

( Parallel Section ) |

[< --About 3' -:J fit \notles5than9y\

. H . About 2

ik 'd'—i
'

k - -About Id" >\

Fig. 1.

cavitiesdue to gas bubbles in the ingot. One side of each fracture

shall be examined and the lengths of the seams and cavities
determined, a pocket lens being used if necessary.
10. (a) Tension test specimens shall be taken longitudinally Test Specimens,

from the bottom of the finished rolled material, and bend test
specimens shall be taken transversely from the middle of the
top of the finished rolled material. The longitudinal test speci-
mens shall be taken in the direction of the longitudinal axis of
the ingot, and the transverse test specimens at right angles
to that axis.
(b) Tension and bend test specimens shall be of the full

thickness of material as rolled, and shall be machined to the form

and dimensions shown in Fig. 1 except that bend ; test speci-
mens may be machined with both edges parallel.
 —

256 Specifications for Boiler and Firebox Steel.

Number of Teste. n. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from
each plate as rolled.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or
develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
specimen than that specified in Section 6 (a) and any part
is less

of the fracture outside the middle third of the gage length,

is

as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before

testing, a retest shall be allowed.

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WEIGHT AND THICKNESS.

Permissible The thickness of each plate shall not vary more than
12.
Variations.
under that ordered.
0.01 in.
The overweight of each lot in each shipment shall not exceed 1

the amount given in Table I. One cubic inch of rolled steel is

assumed to weigh 0.2833 lb.

Table I. Permissible Overweights of Plates Ordered to Thickness.

Permissible Excess in Average Weights per

Square Foot of Plates for Widths Given,
Ordered Expressed in Percentages of Nominal Weights. Ordered
Thickness, Thickness,
IN. in.
48 to 60 to 72 to 84 to 96 to 108 to 120 to 132 in.
Under
60 in., 72 in., 84 in., 96 in., 108 in., 120in., 132in., or
48 in.
excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. over.

Under 1/8 9 10 12 14 Under 1/8

1/8 to /16excl. 8 10 12 1/8 to3/16exol.

3/16 " 1/4

•

8/16 " 1/4 " 7 8 9 10 12 ..

1/4 " 6/16 " 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 19 1/4 " 6/16

"
5/16 " 3/8
'
8/16 " 8/8 6 6 7 8 9 10 12 |
14 17

" 7/16 " 12 " 7/16 '

3/8 4.5 6 6 7 8 10 i
15 3/8

7/16 " 1/2 " 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 10 13 7/16 "1/2 '

'
1/2 " 6/8 " 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 11 1/2 " 6/8

6/8 " 3/4 " 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9 5/8 " 3/4

'
3/4 " 1 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 3/4 " 1

1 or over 2.5 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 1 or over

•The term "lot" applied to Table I means all of the plates of each group width and
group thickness.
 Serial Designation: A 30-18. 257

V. FINISH.
13. The finished material shall be free from injurious defects Finish.

and shall have a workmanlike finish.

VI. MARKING.
(a) The name or brand of the manufacturer, melt or
14. Marking,
slab number, grade, and lowest tensile strength for its grade
specified in Section 6 (a), shall be legibly stamped on each plate.
The melt or slab number shall be legibly stamped on each test
specimen.
(b) When specified on the order, plates shall be match-
marked as defined in Paragraph (c) so that the test specimens
representing them may be identified. When more than one
plate is sheared from a single slab or ingot, each shall be match-
marked so that they may all be identified with the test specimen
representing them.
(c) Each match mark shall consist of two over-lapping
circles each not less than l\ in. in diameter, placed upon the
shear lines, and made by separate impressions of a single-circle
steel die.
(d) Match-marked coupons shall match with the sheets
represented and only those which match properly shall be
accepted.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

15. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free inspection,

entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser is

being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works which

concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The manu-
facturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable
facilities to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in
accordance with these specifications. All tests (except check
analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place of manu-
facture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall
be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operation of the works.
16. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,

tests made inaccordance with Section 5 shall be reported within

five working days from the receipt of samples.
 258 Specifications for Boiler and Firebox Steel.

(b) Material which shows injurious defects subsequent to

its acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected,
and the manufacturer shall be notified.
Rehearing. 17. Samples tested in accordance with Section 5, which
represent rejected material, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction
with the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim
for a rehearing within that time.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
BOILER RIVET STEEL.

Serial Designation: A 31 - 14.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 31; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1901; Revised, 1909, 1912, 1913. 1914.

A. Requirements for Rolled Bars.

I. MANUFACTURE.
1. The steel shall be made by the open-hearth process. Process.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

2. The steel shall conform to the following requirements Chemical
Composition.
as to chemical composition:

Manganese 0.30 - 0.50 per cent

Phosphorus not over 0.04 "
Sulfur " " 0.045

3. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the Ladle

Anay8es '
manufacturer to determine; the percentages of carbon, man-
ganesc, phosphorus and sulfur. This analysis shall be made
from a test ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The
chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to the
purchaser or hi- representative, and shall conform to the
requirement- specified in Section 2.
 . : »

260 Specifications for Boiler Rivet Steel.

Check 4. Analyses may be made by the purchaser from finished

Analyses.
bars representing each melt. The chemical composition thus
determined shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 2.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 5 (a) The bars shall conform to the following requirements
as to tensile properties

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 45 000 - 55 000

Yield point, min., " " 0.5 tens. str.

Elongation in 8 in., mm., per cent

1
——
500 000
-

Tens. str.

but need not exceed 30 per cent.

(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam of the testing machine.
Bend Tests. 6. (a) Cold-bend Tests. —
The test specimen shall bend cold
through 180 deg. flat on itself without cracking on the outside
of the bent portion.
(b) Quench-bend Tests. —
The test specimen, when heated to
a light cherry red as seen in the dark (not less than 1200° F.),
and quenched at once in water the temperature of which is
between 80 and 90° F., shall bend through 180 deg. flat on itself
without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
Test Specimens. 7. Tension and bend test specimens shall be of the full-

size section of bars as rolled.

Number of Tests. 8. (a) Two
tension, two cold-bend, and two quench-bend
tests shall be made from each melt, each of which shall conform
to the requirements specified.
(b) If any test specimen develops flaws, it may be discarded

and another specimen substituted.

(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test

specimen is less than that specified in Section 5 (a) and any

part of the fracture is outside the middle third of the gage length,
as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before
testing, a retest shall be allowed.

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER.

Permissible 9. The diameter of each bar shall not vary more than 0.01
Variations.
in. from that specified.
 Serial Designation: A 31-14. 261

V. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

10. The finished bars shall be circular within 0.01 in. Workmanship.
11. The finished bars shall be free from injurious defects Finish,

and shall have a workmanlike finish.

VI. MARKING.
12. Rivet bars when loaded for shipment, be properly
shall, Marking,
separated and marked with the name or brand of the manu-
facturer and the melt number for identification. The melt
number shall be legibly marked on each test specimen.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION

13. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free inspection,

entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser

is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works which
concern the manufacture of the bars ordered. The manu-
facturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable
facilitiesto satisfy him that the bars are being furnished in
accordance with these specifications. All tests (except check
analyses) and inspection shall be made at the place of manu-
facture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall
be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operation of the works.
14. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,

tests made in accordance with Section 4 shall be reported within

five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Bars which show injurious defects subsequent to their

acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected, and the

manufacturer shall be notified.
15. Samples tested in accordance with Section 4, which Rehearing,
represent rejected bars, shall be preserved for two weeks from
the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests,the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 262 Specifications for Boiler Rivet Steel.

B. Requirements for Rivets.

VIII. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 16. The rivets, when tested, shall conform to the require-
ments as to tensile properties specified in Section 5, except that
the elongation shall be measured on a gage length not less than
four times the diameter of the rivet.
Bend Testa. 17. The rivet shank shall bend cold through 180 deg. flat
on itself, as shown in Fig. 1, without cracking on the outside
of the bent portion.
Flattening Testa. 18. The rivet head shall flatten, while hot, to a diameter
2\ times the diameter of the shank, as shown in Fig. 2, without
cracking at the edges.

Fig. l. Fig. 2.

Number of Tests. 19. (a) When specified, one tension test shall be made from
each size in each lot of rivets offered for inspection.
(b) Three bend and three flattening tests shall be made
from each size in each lot of rivets offered for inspection, each
of which shall conform to the requirements specified.

IX. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Workmanship. 20. The be true to form, concentric, and shall

rivets shall
be made workmanlike manner.
in a
Finish. 21. The finished rivets shall be free from injurious defects.

X. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 22. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free
entry, at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser is
 Serial Designation: A 31- 14. 263

being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works which

concern the manufacture of the rivets ordered. The manu-
facturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable
facilities to satisfy him that the rivets are being furnished in
accordance with these specifications. All tests and inspection
shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment,
unless otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
which show injurious defects subsequent to
23. Rivets Rejection,

their acceptance at the manufacturer's works will be rejected,

and the manufacturer shall be notified.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
COLD-DRAWN BESSEMER STEEL AUTOMATIC
SCREW STOCK.
Serial Designation: A 32-14.
These specifications are issued under the 'fixed designation A 32; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1914.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

Material These specifications cover a free-cutting steel of any

1.
Covered.
specified section suitable for high-speed screw machine work,
leaving a smooth finish after machining.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 2.The steel shall be made by the Bessemer process, and
shall be cold-rolled or cold-drawn or turned to size.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

chemical 3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements as
composition.
to c h em i cai composition:

Carbon 0.08 - 0.16 per cent

Manganese 0.60 - 0.80 "
Phosphorus - "
0.09 0.13
Sulfur 0.075 - 0. 15 "

(264)
 Serial Designation: A 32-14. 265

4. Samples for analysis shall be taken by machining off the Test Samples,
entire cross-section of the bar, or by drilling parallel to the axis
of the bar at any point midway between the center and surface
with a drill not under \ nor over \ in. in diameter. Samples
shall be clean, free from oil, uniformly fine and well mixed.

III. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS.

5. The variation from the specified diameter, or distance Permissible
Vanatlons -

between parallel faces, and the allowable eccentricity shall not

exceed the following limits:

Permissible Variations.

Diameter. Over-Bize. Under-size. Eccentricity.

L'p to and including 0.3 in 1% of diameter 0.5% of diameter

Over 0.3 in. to and including 1 in. 0.003 in. 0.0015 in.

Over 1 in. to and including 2j in. 0.004 " 0.0020 "

Over 2i in 0.005" 0.0025 "

IV. FINISH.
6. The material shall be free from injurious defects and shall Finish,
have a bright smooth surface.

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

7. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing inspection,
the purchaser, free of cost, all reasonable facilities to satisfy
him that the material is being furnished in accordance with these
specifications.
8. Material which fails to conform to the above specifications Rejection,
will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be notified.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
COLD-DRAWN OPEN-HEARTH STEEL AUTOMATIC
SCREW STOCK.
Serial Designation: A 54-15.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 54; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

Material These specifications cover a free-cutting steel of any

1.
Covered.
specified section suitable for high-speed screwmachine work,
leaving a smooth finish after machining.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 2. The steel shall be made by the open-hearth process, and
shall be cold-rolled or cold-drawn or turned to size.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 3. The steel shall conform to the following requirements as
composition.
to chemical composition:

Carbon 0.15 - 25 per cent

.

Manganese 0.60 -0.90 "

Phosphorus not over 06 . "
Sulfur 0.075-0.15
(266)
 ..

Serial Designation: A 54- 15. 267

4. Samples for analysis shall be taken by machining off the Test Samples,
entire cross-section of the bar, or by drilling parallel to the axis
of the bar at any point midway between the center and surface
with a drill not under \ nor over \ in. in diameter. Samples
shall be clean, free from oil, uniformly fine and well mixed.

III. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS.

5. The variation from the specified diameter, or distance Permissible
ariat on8 *

between parallel faces, and the allowable eccentricity, shall not

exceed the following limits:

Permissible Variations.

Diameter. Over-size. Under-size. Eccentricity.

Up to and including 0.3 in 1% of diameter 0.5% of diameter

Over 0.3 in. to and including 1 in 0.003 in. 0.0015 in.

" "
Over 1 in. to and including 2$ in . 0.004 0.0020
" "
Over2J in 0.005 0.0025

IV. FINISH.
6. The material shall be free from injurious defects and shall Finish,

have a bright smooth surface.

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

7. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing inspection,
the purchaser, free of cost, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him
that the material is being furnished in accordance with these
specifications.
8. Material which fails to conform to the above specifica- Rejection,

tions will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be notified.

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD TESTS
FOR
MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF IRON AND STEEL.

Serial Designation: A 34-18.

These tests are issued under the fixed designation A 34; the final number
indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of revision,
the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1911; Revised, 1912, 1914, 1918.

Core Loss.
The power consumption in electrical sheet steel when sub-
jected to an alternating magnetization is known as the core loss.
The standard core loss is the total power in watts consumed in
each kilogram of material at a temperature of 25° C, when sub-
jected to a harmonically varying induction having a maximum of
10,000 gausses and a frequency of 60 cycles per second, when
measured as specified below. It is represented by the symbol
W 10 /60.

The aging coefficient is the percentage change in the standard

core loss after continued heating at 100° C. for 600 hours.
The standard core loss shall be measured under the following
conditions:
The magnetic circuit shall consist of 10 kg. (22 lb.) of the test
material, cut with a sharp shear into strips 50 cm. (19££ in ) long
and 3 cm. (lxV in.) wide, half parallel and half at right angles to
(268)
 Serial Designation: A 34-18. 269

the direction of rolling, made up

into four equal bundles, two con-
taining material parallel and two containing material at right
angles to the direction of rolling, and finally built into the four
sides of a square with butt joints and opposite sides consisting of
material cut in the same manner. No insulation other than the
natural scale of the material (except in the case of scale-free
material) shall be used between laminations, but the corner
joints shall be separated by tough paper 0.01 cm. (0.004 in.)

thick.
The magnetizing winding shall consist of four solenoids sur-
rounding the four sides of the magnetic circuit and joined in series.
A secondary coil shall be used for energizing the voltmeter and the
potential coil of the wattmeter.
These solenoids shall be wound on a form of any non-
magnetic non-conducting material of the following dimensions:
Inside cross-section 4 by 4 cm.
Thickness of wall not over 0.3 cm.
Winding length 42 cm.

The primary winding on each solenoid shall consist of 150 turns

of copper wire uniformly wound over the 42-cm. length. The
total resistance of the magnetizing winding shall be between 0.3
and 0.5 ohm. The secondary winding of 150 turns of copper
wire on each solenoid shall be similarly wound beneath the
primary winding. Its resistance shall not exceed 1 ohm.
A voltmeter and the voltage coil of a wattmeter shall be con-
nected in parallel to the terminals of the secondary winding of the
apparatus. The current coil of the wattmeter shall be connected
in series with the primary winding.
A sine wave electromotive force shall be applied to the
primary winding and adjusted until the voltage of the secondary
circuit is given by the equation:
4fNnBM
4 ID 10*

in which
/=form factor of primary E.M.F. = 1.11 for sine wave
N = number of secondary turns =600
n = number of cycles per second = 60
B =• maximum induction — 10.000
270 Tests for Magnetic Properties of Iron and Steel.

M = total mass in grams =10,000

/= length of strips in centimeters =50
D = specific gravity = 7.5 for high-resistance steel
= 7.7 for low-resistance steel
E = 106.6 volts for high-resistance steel for sine voltage.
= 103.8 volts for low-resistance steel for sine voltage.

A specific gravity of 7.5 is assumed for all steels having a

resistance of over 2 ohms per meter-gram, and 7.7 for all steels
having a resistance of less than 2 ohms per meter-gram. These
steels are designated as high and low-resistance steels, respec-
tively.

===== -
lull 1 [Ill
111 I
-
Fig. 1.

mi
hi :

Ill III II
Fig. 2.

The wattmeter gives the power consumed in the iron and the
secondary circuit. The loss in the secondary circuit is given in
terms of the total resistance and voltage. Subtracting this
correction term from the total power gives the net power con-
sumed in the steel as hysteresis and eddy-current loss. Divid-
ing this value by ten gives the core loss in watts per kilogram.
—
Sampling. The core-loss material shall be cut from two
or more sheets taken at random from the shipment. The strips
should be distributed symmetrically over the sheet, as nearly
as may be practicable. For example, see Figs. 1 and 2.
It is recommended that a test sample shall represent not
more than 5000 kg. (11,000 lb.).
 Serial Designation: A 34-18. 271

The Procedure. — 1. Cut the test material into strips 3 by 50

cm. as indicated under "Sampling."
2. Place on the balance a pile of strips weighing 2.5 kg. Add
a second pile of the same kind, bringing the weight up to 5 kg. In
each case the weight taken to the nearest strip.
is Add in succes-
sion two piles of 2.5 kg. each, of the other kind of strips, bringing
the weight up to 7.5 kg. and 10 kg. respectively.
3. Secure each bundle by string or tape (not wire) and insert
in the apparatus as indicated.
4. Apply the alternating voltage to the primary coil and tap
the joints together until the current has a minimum value, as
shown by an ammeter in series. Then clamp the corners firmly
by some suitable device.
5. Shunt the ammeter and adjust the primary current until

the voltmeter indicates the proper value. This adjustment may

be made by an auto-transformer, by varying the field of the
alternator, or by both, but not by the insertion of resistance or
inductance in the primary circuit. Simultaneously the frequency
must be adjusted to 60 cycles.
6. Read the wattmeter.

7. Subtract from the wattmeter reading the

Calculations.
instrument which will be constant for any set of instru-
losses,
ments and voltage, and divided by 10. The result is the standard
core loss.

Normal Induction.
The normal magnetic induction is the induction produced by
a magnetizing force in a given piece of magnetic material which
has been previously demagnetized and then subjected to many
reversals of the given magnetizing force.
Both the induction B and the magnetizing force H shall be
expressed in terms of the c. g. s. electromagnetic unit (gauss).
Sheet Metal. — The standard normal induction data for sheet
material shall consist of the magnetizing forces corresponding to
inductions of 2000, 4000, 6000, 8000, 10,000, 12,000, 14,000,
16,000, 18,000, 20,000 gausses, or such as may be obtained with
out exceeding a magnetizing force of 200 gausses.
The following details an- 1<> he observed:
272 Tests for Magnetic Properties of Iron and Steel.

The permeability sample for sheet material shall consist

of an even number of strips cut parallel to the direction of rolling
and an even number cut perpendicular to this direction, selected
from material sampled as for core loss.
The sample shall weigh not less than 1 nor more than 2 kg.
The magnetic circuit shall be a rectangle having the test
material for one pair of opposite sides, and the same or different
material for the other pair, which may be shorter. The joints at
each corner are alternately butt and lap, or may be clamped on
the edges.
The magnetomotive force is applied in two sections. The
main magnetizing coils shall consist of two equal and uniformly
wound solenoids surrounding the test material. The compen-
sating coils shall consist of four short coils, each having the
same number of turns wound closely over the ends of the mag-
netizing coils.
A test coil surrounds the middle portion of each bundle of test
material. Four other test coils each of half the number of turns
are placed over the four positions of the test material, approxi-
mately midway between the yokes and the center. The two
center test coils are joined in series and the four end test coils
are joined in series. The corresponding ballistic deflections,
due to these two sets of test coils, are measures of the magnetic
fluxes through the underlying portions of the magnetic circuit.
By connecting the two test coils so that the induced electro-
motive force opposes that of the four coils, and adjusting the
current through the compensating magnetizing coils so that there
is no resulting ballistic deflection, an approximate uniformity

of flux is secured through the greater portion of the test material,

and the induction may be measured ballistically in the regular
manner. The magnetizing force when the flux is adjusted to
uniformity is that calculated from the uniform winding of the
main magnetizing solenoids.
The cross-section of the magnetic circuit is determined as in
the standard core-loss test.
Rods. —The standard test for rods for use in electromagnets
shall consist of the magnetizing forces corresponding to inductions
of 2000, 4000, 6000, 8000, 10,000, 12,000, 14,000, 16,000, 18,000,
20,000 gausses, or such as may be obtained without exceeding
a magnetizing force of 200 gausses.
 Serial Designation: A 34-18. 273

Residual Induction and Coercive Force.

The magnetic induction which exists in a piece of mag-

netic material when the magnetizing force has been reduced
to zero is called the residual induction. The magnetizing
force required to reduce this induction to zero is called the
coercive force. The values of the residual induction and
the coercive force depend upon the previous magnetic his-
tory. the magnetic material has been normalized by-
If
proper demagnetization and repeated reversals of the mag-
netizing force, the corresponding quantities are called the
normal residual induction (B r ) and the normal coercive
force (H ).
c

The standard data permanent

for material intended for
magnets normal induction (B), the normal
shall consist of the
residual induction (B r ), and the normal coercive force (//,.)
corresponding to a magnetizing force of 200 gausses.
The standard magnetic data shall be determined by the
Burrows compensated double-yoke method on test specimens
prepared as indicated below.
The permeameter opening shall have a rectangular cross-
section of 2 by 5 cm. (0.79 by 1.97 in.)
—
Sampling. Each mill heat or lot shall be marked sep-
arately. The test sample shall consist of one test specimen
from each of six different bars.

Size of Test Specimen. —

The test specimen shall be 25
cm. (9.84 more long and shall be of such
in.) or cross-section
that it will pass through a rectangular tube whose cross-section
is 2 by 5 cm. (0.79 by 1.97 in.).

Heat Treatment. — For steels of the following approximate

chemical composition:

Carbon . 50 - . 70 per cent

Manganese . 50 - 1 . 00 "
"
Phosphorus . 05
Sulfur 0.03
"
Silicon 0.10

heat the specimen to 825° C. (1517° F.) and quench in water

at 20° C.
274 Tests for Magnetic Properties of Iron and Steel.

For tungsten steel, heat the specimen to 845° C. (1550° F.)

and quench in water at 20° C.
For other alloy steels, the heat treatment is to be determined
by practical tests on the test specimen.
The furnace shall be of such size that the specimen is heated
to the required temperature in not over 30 minutes.
The furnace temperatures given above shall not vary by
more than 10° C.
On quenching, the test specimen shall be removed quickly
from the furnace. Thespecimen shall not be allowed to
test
cool over 10° C, and before immersion.
after leaving the furnace
Immerse end-on or edgewise. The quantity of water
shall be such that after quenching its temperature is not
over 50° C.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHODS
FOR
CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF PLAIN CARBON STEEL.

Serial Designation : A 33 - 14.

These methods are issued under the fixed designation A 33; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1914.

DETERMINATION OF CARBON
BY THE
DIRECT-COMBUSTION METHOD.

The method of direct combustion of the metal in oxygen

is recommended, the carbon dioxide obtained being absorbed in
barium-hydroxide solution, the precipitated barium carbonate
filtered off, washed, dissolved in a measured excess of hydro-
chloric acid and the excess titrated against standard alkali.
The use of potassium-hydroxide solution or soda lime for
the absorption of carbon dioxide, with suitable purifying train
following the furnace, is recognized as being capable of very
satisfactory refinement and as possessing merit where the time
element is of prime significance.
Owing to diversity of apparatus by which correct
the
results may
be obtained in the determination of carbon, the
recommendations are intended more to indicate what is accept-
able than to prescribe definitely what shall be used.
(275)
276 Methods for Analysis of Carbon Steel.

Apparatus.

Purifying Train. —The method employed eliminates the

necessity of a purifying train following the furnace, inasmuch
as no precautions are necessary to prevent access of water
vapor, or sulfur trioxide — the impurities usually guarded against
—from the absorbing apparatus.
All that is needed is a
calcium-chloride tower with stick sodium hydroxide placed
filled

before the furnace, or between the furnace and catalyzer, if,

as recommended, the latter is used for the purpose of oxidizing
organic matter in the oxygen.
Material for Lining Boats. —Alundum, "RR Alundum,
alkali-free, specially prepared for carbon determination,' ' as
supplied by dealers is suitable, and is recommended. The
90-mesh or finer grades are used. Chromite, properly sized and
freed from materials causing a blank, may also be employed.
No substance containing alkali or alkaline earth metals, or car-
bon as carbonates or in other form, should be used as a lining
material. Quartz sand, owing to its liability to fuse or to slag
with the oxides of iron, causing bubbles of gas to be enclosed,
is objectionable. Aluminum oxide, made by calcining alum or
otherwise, often contains sulfate not easily destroyed, or may
contain objectionable substances of an alkaline nature.
Catalyzers. —Suitable catalyzers are copper oxide, platinized
quartz or asbestos, or platinum gauze. One of these should be
used in the forward part of the combustion apparatus, as well
as in the purifying train preceding the combustion tube (see
above). Platinized materials sometimes give off volatile sub-
stances on heating, and whatever material is used should not be
subject to this defect.
Combustion Apparatus. —Any
apparatus heated by gas or
electricity which sample to a temperature of 950
will bring the
to 1100° C. may be used. Combustion tubes may be por-
celain, glazed on one or both sides, quartz or platinum. Quartz
is liable to devitrification when used continuously at tem-
peratures above 1000° C, and may then become porous. Com-
bustion crucibles of platinum may be heated by blast or by
Meker burners.
 Serial Designation: A 33-14. 277

Boats or Other Containers of Samples being Burned. These —

may be of porcelain, quartz, alundum, clay, platinum, or nickel,
and should always receive a lining of granular alundum.
Purifying Train before Combustion Apparatus. This con- —
sists of a tower filled with stick sodium hydroxide, preceded by a
catalyzer.
The Train after the Combustion Apparatus. This consists —
merely of the Meyer tube for absorption of the carbon dioxide,
protected by a soda-lime tube at the far end. Meyer tubes with
7 to 10 bulbs of 10 to 15-cc. capacity each, and large bulbs at
the ends, having volumes equal to the combined capacity of the
small bulbs, have been used and found satisfactory.
Filtering Apparatus. —In filtration for accurate work, care
should be taken to protect the solution from access of extra-
neous carbon dioxide. This is accomplished in the apparatus
shown in Fig. 1. For work requiring less accuracy, the barium
carbonate may be filtered off on a filter made by fitting a carbon
funnel with a perforated porcelain disk and filtering by suction.
The precipitate is then washed with distilled water from which
the carbon dioxide has been removed by boiling.

Reagents.
Oxygen. —Oxygen not less than 97-per-cent purity is
of
recommended. Endeavor should be made to obtain oxygen
which gives no blank, since the correction for or efimination of
this is troublesome and uncertain. For the most accurate work,
particularly with low-carbon products, such as ingot iron, etc.,
the blank should be completely eliminated by the use of a
catalyzer before the furnace, with a carbon-dioxide absorbent
interposed between furnace and catalyzer.
Tenth-normal Hydrochloric Acid. —
This may be standardized
by any of the acceptedmethods, or as follows: Twenty cubic
centimeters of the approximately N/10 acid is measured out
with a pipette, and the silver chloride precipitated by an excess
of silver-nitrate solution in a volume of 50 to 60 cc. After
digesting at 70 to 80° C, until the supernatant liquid is clear,
the chloride is filtered off on a tared Gooch filter and washed
with water containing 2 cc. of nitric acid per 100 cc. of water
until freed from silver nitrate. After drying to constant weight
at 130° C, the increase of weight over the original tare is noted
278 Methods for Analysis of Carbon Steel.

and from this weight, corresponding to the silver chloride, the

strength of the hydrochloric acid is calculated, after which it is

adjusted to the strength prescribed. The standardization should

be based upon several concordant determinations using varying
amounts of acid.

1 cc. N/10 HC1 = 0.0006 g. carbon.

Methyl Orange. —Dissolve 0.02 g. in 100 cc. of hot distilled

water and filter.
Tenth-normal Sodium-Hydroxide Solution. —This is stand-
ardized against the hydrochloric acid. Methyl orange is used
as the indicator. The sodium-hydroxide solution should be
stored in a large bottle from which it may be driven out by air
pressure, protecting against carbon dioxide by soda-lime tubes.
—
Barium-Hydroxide Solution. A saturated solution is filtered
and stored in a large reservoir from which it is delivered by air
pressure, protecting from carbon dioxide by a soda-lime tube.
Three or four small bulbs of the Meyer tube are filled, and
CCVfree water .is added until the remaining small bulbs are
filled.

Factors Influencing Rapid Combustion.

Size of Particles of Sample. —
The finer the chips the better,
except with samples which burn too vigorously (see under " Rate
of Admitting Oxygen"). Particles too coarse to pass a 20-mesh
sieve are not recommended, nor long curly drillings which will
not pack closely. A |-in. flat drill may be used for taking the
sample and the pressure and speed of the drill-press regulated
to secure the desired result; or, better still, the sample may be
obtained with a small milling machine suitable for sampling, or
by a shaping machine. Oil, dust, and other foreign matter
should be carefully excluded.
Manner of Distributing Sample in Boat. This is of con- —
siderable importance. With all samples, close packing in a
small space is conducive to rapid combustion. In the case of
samples which burn too vigorously, a satisfactory regulation
may sometimes be attained by spreading the sample loosely
over the lining in the boat.
—
Rate of Admitting Oxygen. The rate at which oxygen is
 Serial Designation: A 33 - 14. 279

admitted is also a factor in the velocity of combustion. Assum-

ing the combustion apparatus to be heated to the temperature
range recommended above (950 to 1100° C), it is possible, if
the material is closely packed and if oxygen is admitted at too
rapid a rate, that the combustion may be so violent as to cause
excessive spattering of fused oxides, and such fluidity of the
molten slag that the boat or other container may be injured or
destroyed; therefore a moderate rate of burning is to be sought.
This is desirable also from the standpoint of the complete
absorption of the carbon dioxide by the barium-hydroxide solu-
tion. The factors, temperature of combustion apparatus,
manner of distribution of sample, and rate of admission of
oxygen, can be governed so as to burn successfully steels of a
very wide range of compositions, in either fine or coarse particles.

Method.
After having properly set up and tested the apparatus,
place 2 g. of steel (see note No. l) in .the form recommended
above, in a moderately packed condition on the bed material and
introduce the boat into the combustion apparatus, already heated
to the proper temperature. After about a minute (to allow
the sample and container to reach the temperature of the fur-
nace), admit oxygen somewhat more rapidly than it is consumed,
as shown by the rate of bubbling in the Meyer tube (see note
No. 2). The sample burns completely in 1 or 2 minutes, and all
that is now necessary is to sweep all the carbon dioxide into
the absorption apparatus. This can be accomplished in 6 to 8
minutes by passing about 1 or 2 liters of oxygen. Detach the
Meyer tube (see note No. 2) and filter and wash the barium
carbonate, using the special filtering apparatus shown. After
solution in a measured excess of hydrochloric acid (the Meyer
tube being washed out with a portion of the acid, to remove
adhering barium carbonate), titrate the excess of acid against
alkali and from the data thus obtained calculate the percentage
of carbon.

NOTE9.
1. When working with steels high in carbon (above per cent) it is
I

advisable not to use more than 1 g. in order that filtration may be sufficiently
rapid.
280 Methods for Analysis of Carbon Steel.

f-1 2. As a precaution against error resulting from too rapid passage of

the gases, it is well to attach a second barium-hydroxide tube to retain any
carbon dioxide that may pass the first.

3. For the most accurate work the Meyer tubes should be washed with
dilute acid before beginning work each day. After a determination is finished
the tube should be completely filled two or three times with tap water, then

rinsed with distilled water, in order to remove the carbon dioxide liberated
when dissolving the carbonate from the previous determination.
4. The flask containing the carbonate should be thoroughly agitated
after adding the acid, since the carbonate sometimes dissolves rather slowly
if this is not done ; this is particularly the case if it has packed much during
nitration.

/////iwAWW///////////^^^^

Fig. 1
.
—Apparatus for Filtration in Determination of Carbon by the
Direct-Combustion Method.

Apparatus and Procedure for Filtration.

The apparatus is shown to approximately one-tenth size
in Fig. 1, which The is self-explanatory. stop-cock is a three-
way cock connected to the suction pipe. The rubber tubing
connected to the Meyer tube should be of best-grade black
rubber, and the lengths used should be so chosen as to permit
of easy manipulation of the tube. The Meyer tube is con-
nected or disconnected by the rubber stoppers which are left

always attached to the rubber tubes. The carbon tube C is

fitted with a perforated porcelain plate sliding easily.

 Serial Designation: A 33- 14. 281

The prepared for nitration by making on the por-

funnel is

about tV to | in. in thickness, using

celain disk a felt of asbestos
amphibole (not serpentine) asbestos which has been carefully-
digested with strong hydrochloric acid for several hours and
washed with water until it gives no acid reaction. On top of
the asbestos pad is placed a layer of similarly treated quartz,
mixed with asbestos, of the height shown. A mixture of quartz
grains of various sizes (approximately 50 per cent passing a
20-mesh sieve and 50 per cent passing a 10-mesh and remaining
on a 20-mesh sieve) is suitable. The mixture of quartz and
asbestos may be obtained by filling the funnel from a beakei
(directing against it a stream from a wash-bottle) while main-
taining a gentle suction. In this way the asbestos is properly
mixed with the quartz. A little experience and attention to
these details will enable one to prepare the quartz-bed in a
manner that will greatly expedite nitration. The stopper is
now inserted in the funnel, the Meyer tube connected as shown
and the liquid and precipitate sucked into the funnel. Only a
gentle suction should be used. When necessary P 3 is opened to
admit air back of the column of liquid in the Meyer tube.
When the contents of the Meyer tube have been transferred,
the large bulb nearest B is half filled with water by opening

Pi] the stop-cock 5 is operated during this and subsequent

operations so as to maintain a gentle suction all the time. M is

now manipulated so as to bring the wash water in contact with

all parts of the interior, after which the water
is sucked through

C; P 2 open during this and subsequent washings. After

is left

eight washings as directed, allowing the wash water to drain off

thoroughly each time before adding more, may be detached, M
the stopper removed from the funnel and the washings com-
pleted by filling C to the top with C0 2 -free water, sucking off
completely and repeating the operation once. With care the
washing may be done with 150 cc. of water. Air is now
admitted through the side opening of S, C removed and the
is

porcelain disk carrying the asbestos, quartz and barium car-

bonate is thrust, by means of a long glass rod, into a flask,
removing any adhering particles from the sides of C, by a
stream of water from a wash bottle. An excess of the standard
acid is now added from a burette or pipette, using a portion to
282 Methods for Analysis or Carbon Steel.

wash out M, and after the contents of the flask have been thor-
oughly agitated by shaking, the excess of acid is titrated against
the standard alkali, using 3 drops of the methyl-orange indicator.

Notes.
The operation of filtering can be carried out very rapidly after a little

practice.
Glass wool should on no account be used as a substitute for the quartz,
on account of the probability of errors arising from its attack by the alkali
or acid.
It is well to wash out the rubber tubes connected to the Meyer tube
with a little water each day before beginning work.

DETERMINATION OF CARBON
BY THE
COLORIMETRIC METHOD.
(Routine.)

Solution Required.
Nitric Acid. —Mix 1000 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
1200 cc. of distilled water.

Method.
In a small Erlenmeyer flask or test tube, dissolve 0.2 to
0.5 g. of steel, depending on the carbon content of the sample, in
5 to 20 cc. of the nitric acid.
Boil gently until the solution is
complete and the liquid is clear. Cool and compare with a solu-
tion of a standard steel treated under like conditions.

Note.
In order to obtain reliable results by this method the standard steel
should be of the same kind, of approximately the same chemical composition,
and in the same physical condition as the sample steel. The carbon content
of the standard steel is determined by the direct combustion method.
 Serial Designation: A 33-14. 283

DETERMINATION OF MANGANESE
BY THE
BISMUTHATE METHOD.

Solutions Required.
Nitric Acid. —Mix 500 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
1500 cc. of distilled water.
Nitric Acid for Washing. —Mix 30 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr.

1.42,and 970 cc. of distilled water.

—
Sodium Ar senile. -To 15 g. of arsenious oxide (AS2O3)
Stock
in a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask, add 45 g. of sodium carbonate
and 150 cc. of distilled water. Heat the flask and contents on a
water bath until the arsenious oxide is dissolved, cool the solu-
tion and make up to 1000 cc. with distilled water.
—
Standard Sodium Arsenite. Dilute 300 cc. of stock-sodium-
arsenite solution to 1000 cc. with distilled water and titrate
against potassium-permanganate solution (about N/10), which
has been standardized by using Bureau of Standards sodium
oxalate. 1 Titrate 10-cc. portions of the permanganate solution,
to each of which have been added 50-cc. portions of the nitric
acid. A from brownish or purplish tints
clear green color free
will be found a satisfactory and reproducible end-point. Adjust
the solution so that 1 cc. is equivalent to 0.10 per cent of man-
ganese, on the basis of a 1-g. sample.
The factor Na C 2 2 4
—> Mn = 0.16397 (using the 1913
atomic weights).

Method.
In a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask dissolve 1 g. of steel in 50 cc.
of the nitric acid, and boil to expel the oxides of nitrogen.
Cool, and add about \ g. of sodium bismuthate and heat for a
few minutes, or until the pink color has disappeared, with or
without precipitation of manganese dioxide. Add small por-
tions of ferrous sulfate (or any suitable reducing agent) in
sufficient quantity to clear the solution, and boil to expel the
oxides of nitrogen. Cool to 15° C, add an excess of sodium
bismuthate and agitate for a few minutes. Add 50 cc. of 3-per-
' Circular No. 1,0, Bureau of Standard-,. Oct. 1. 1912.
284 Methods for Analysis of Carbon Steel.

cent nitric acid and filter through an alundum filter or asbestos

pad, washing with 3-per-cent nitric acid. Titrate immediately
with standard-sodium-arsenite solution to the disappearance of
the pink color, each cubic centimeter required representing 0.10
per cent manganese.

Notes.
In the method, the preliminary treatment with sodium bismuthate
has been found by a number of investigators to be apparently unnecessary;
however, the available data to confirm this position are not considered
sufficient to warrant its omission.
In making the asbestos filter pad it is advisable to have a thin bed, and
as much surface as possible. This insures rapid filtration, and the filter may
be used until it becomes clogged with bismuthate.
The filtrate must be perfectly clear, since the least particle of bismuthate
carried through the filter will vitiate the results.

DETERMINATION OF MANGANESE
BY THE
PERSULFATE METHOD.
(Routine.)

Solutions Required.
Nitric Acid. —Mix 1000 of cc. nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
1200 cc. of distilled water.
Silver Nitrate. —Dissolve 1.33 g. of silver nitrate in 1000 cc.
of distilled water.
Stock Sodium Ar —To 15
senile. g. of arsenious oxide (AS2O8)
in a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask, add 45 g. of sodium carbonate and
150 cc. of distilled water. Heat the flask and contents on a
water bath until the arsenious oxide is dissolved, cool the solution
and make up to 1000 cc. with distilled water.
—
Standard Sodium Arsenite. Dilute a sufficient quantity of
stock-sodium-arsenite solution with distilled water, and stand-
ardize against a steel of known manganese content, as deter-
mined by the bismuthate method. This solution should be of
such strength that each cubic centimeter will be equivalent to
0.10 per cent of manganese on the basis of the weight of sample
taken.
 Serial Designation: A 33-14. 285

Method.
In a small Erlenmeyer flask or large test tube, dissolve 0.1
to 0.3 g. of steel, depending on the manganese content of the
sample, in 15 cc. of the nitric acid. Boil gently until the solution
is complete and the liquid is clear. Add 15 cc. silver-nitrate
solution and 1 g. of ammonium and continue heat-
persulfate,
ing the solution for \ minute after the oxidation begins and
bubbles rise freely. Cool in running water and complete the
determination by either of the following procedures:

(a) Colorimetric. — Compare the color of the solution with

that of a standard steel treated under like conditions.
(b) Titration. —Titrate with standard-sodium-arsenite solu-
tion to the disappearance of the pink color, each cubic centimeter
required representing 0.10 per cent of manganese.

Notes.
In order to obtain reliable results by the colorimetric procedure, the
standard should be of the same kind and of approximately the same chemical
composition as the sample steel. The manganese content of the standard steel
is determined by the bismuthate method.

The ammonium persulfate should be kept in moistened condition by

small additions of distilled water at required intervals.

DETERMINATION OF PHOSPHORUS
BY THE

MOLYBDATE-MAGNESIA METHOD.

Solutions Required.
Nitric Acid. — Mix 1000 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
1200 cc. of distilled water.
Nitric Acid for Washing. — Mix 20 cc. nitric acid, sp. gr.
1.42, and 1000 cc. of distilled water.
Potassium Permanganate. —Dissolve 25 g. of potassium per-
manganate in 1000 cc. of distilled water.
286 Methods for Analysis of Carbon Steel.

Ammonium Bisulfite. —Dissolve 30 g. of ammonium bisul-

fite in 1000 cc. of distilled water.
Ammonium Hydroxide, approximately 10-per-cent. —Mix
1000 cc. of ammonium hydroxide, sp. gr. 0.90, and 2000 cc. of
distilled water.
Ammonium Molybdate.
Solution No. 1. —Place
in a beaker 100 g. of 85-per-cent
molybdic acid, mix thoroughly with 240 cc. of distilled water,
it

add 140 cc. of ammonium hydroxide, sp. gr. 0.90, filter, and
add 60 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42.
Solution No. 2. —Mix 400 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42,
and 960 cc. of distilled water.
When the solutions are cold, add solution No. 1 to solution
No. 2, stirring constantly; then add 0.1 g. of ammonium phos-
phate dissolved in 10 cc. of distilled water, and let stand at
least 24 hours before using.
—
Magnesia Mixture. Dissolve 50 g. of magnesium chloride
and 125 g. of ammonium chloride in 750 cc. of distilled water,
and then add 150 cc. of ammonium hydroxide, sp. gr. 0.90.

Method.
In a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask dissolve 5 g. of steel in 75 cc.
of the nitric acid. Heat to boiling; while boiling add about
12 cc. of the potassium-permanganate solution, and continue
boiling until manganese dioxide precipitates. Dissolve this
precipitate by additions of the ammonium-bisulfite solution,
boil until clear and free from brown fumes, cool to 35° C, add
100 cc. of the ammonium-molybdate solution at room tem-
perature, let stand 1 minute, shake or agitate for 3 minutes,
on a 9-cm. paper and wash the precipitate at least 3 times
filter

with the 2-per-cent nitric-acid solution to free it from iron.

Treat the precipitate on the filter with the 10-per-cent
ammonium-hydroxide solution, letting the solution run into a
100-cc. beaker containing 10 cc. of hydrochloric acid, sp. gr. 1.20,
and 0.5 g. of citric acid; add 30 cc. of ammonium hydroxide, sp.
gr. 0.90, cool, and then add 10 cc. of the magnesia mixture very
slowly, while stirring the solution vigorously. Set aside in a
and wash with the 10-per-cent
cool place for 2 hours, filter
ammonium-hydroxide solution. Ignite and weigh. Dissolve
 Serial Designation: A 33 - 14. 287

the precipitate magnesium pyrophosphate with 5 cc. of

of
nitric acid, sp. gr. and 20 cc. of distilled water, filter and
1.20,
wash with hot water. Ignite and weigh. The difference in
weights represents pure magnesium pyrophosphate containing
27.84 per cent of phosphorus.

Note.
The ammonium-molybdate solution should be kept in a cool place and
should always be filtered before using.

DETERMINATION OF PHOSPHORUS
BY THE
ALKALIMETRIC METHOD.
(Routine.)

Solutions Required.
Nitric Acid. —Mix 1000 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
1200 cc. of distilled water.
Nitric —Mix 20 of
Acid for Washing. cc. nitric acid, sp. gr.
1.42, and 1000 water.
cc. of distilled
Potassium Permanganate. — Dissolve 25 g. of potassium per-
manganate 1000in of cc.water. distilled
Ammonium —Dissolve 30 of
Bisulfite. g. ammonium bisul-
fite in 1000 cc. of distilled water.
Ammonium Molybdate.
Solution No. 1. —Place in a beaker 100 g. of 85-per-cent
molybdic acid, mix it thoroughly with 240 cc. of distilled water,
add 140 cc. of ammonium hydroxide, sp. gr. 0.90, filter and
add 60 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42.
Solution No. 2. —
Mix 400 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42,
and 960 cc. of distilled water.
When the solutions are cold, add solution No. 1 to solution
No. 2, stirring constantly; then add 0.1 g. of ammonium phos
phate dissolved in 10 cc. of distilled water and let stand at
least 24 hours before using.
288 Methods for Analysis of Carbon Steel.

Potassium Nitrate, 1-per-cent. —Dissolve 10 g. of potassium

nitrate in 1000 cc. of distilled water.
Phenolphthalein Indicator. —Dissolve 0.2 g. in 50 cc. of
95-per-cent ethyl alcohol and 50 cc. of distilled water.
Standard Sodium Hydroxide. —Dissolve 6.5 g. of purified
sodium hydroxide in 1000 cc. of distilled water, add a slight
excess of 1-per-cent solution of barium hydroxide,
stand for let
24 hours, decant the liquid, and standardize it against a steel of
known phosphorus content, as determined by the molybdate-
magnesia method, so that 1 cc. will be equivalent to 0.01 per
cent of phosphorus on the basis of a 2-g. sample (see notes).
Protect the solution from carbon dioxide with a soda-lime tube.
—
Standard Nitric Acid. Mix 10 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr.
1.42, and 1000 cc. of distilled water. Titrate the solution
against standardized sodium hydroxide, using phenolphthalein
as indicator, and make it equivalent to the sodium hydroxide by
adding distilled water.

Method.
In a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask dissolve 2 g. of steel in 50 cc.
of the nitric acid. Heat the solution to boiling and while boil-
ing add about 6 cc. of the potassium-permanganate solution and
continue boiling until manganese dioxide precipitates. Dissolve
this precipitate by additions of the ammonium-bisulfite solu-
tion, boil until clear and free from brown fumes, cool to 80° C,
add 50 cc. of the ammonium-molybdate solution at room tem-
perature, let stand 1 minute, shake or agitate for 3 minutes, and

filteron a 9-cm. paper. Wash the precipitate three times with the
2-per-cent nitric-acid solution to free it from iron, and continue
the washing with the 1-per-cent potassium-nitrate solution until
the precipitate and flask are free from acid.
Transfer the paper and precipitate to a solution flask, add
20 cc. of distilled water, 5 drops of phenolphthalein solution as
indicator, and an excess of standard-sodium-hydroxide solution.
Insert a rubber stopper and shake vigorously until solution of
the precipitate is complete. Wash off the stopper with distilled
water and determine the excess of sodium-hydroxide solution by
titrating with standard-nitric-acid solution. Each cubic cen-
timeter of standard-sodium-hydroxide solution represents 0.01
per cent of phosphorus.
 Serial Designation: A 33-14. 289

Notes.
The ammonium-molybdate solution should be kept in a cool place and
should always be filtered before using.
All distilled water used in titration should be freed from carbon dioxide
by boiling or otherwise.
Bureau of Standards Standard Steel No. 19(a) is recommended as a
suitable steel for standardization of the sodium-hydroxide solution.

DETERMINATION OF SULFUR
BY THE
OXIDATION METHOD.

Solution Required.
Barium Chlor'
J
e. —Dissolve 100 g. of barium chloride in
1000 cc. of distilled water.

Method.
In a 400-cc. beaker dissolve 5 g. of the steel in a mixture of
40 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and 5 cc. of hydrochloric acid,
sp. gr. 1.20, add 0.5 g. of sodium carbonate and evaporate the
solution to dryness. Add 40 cc. of hydrochloric acid, sp. gr.
1.20, evaporate to dryness and bake at a moderate heat. After
solution of the residue in 30 cc. of hydrochloric acid, sp. gr. 1.20,
and evaporation to sirupy consistency, add 2 to 4 cc. of hydro-
chloric acid, sp. gr. 1.20, and then 30 to 40 cc. of hot water.
Filter and wash with cold water, the final volume not exceeding
100 cc. To the cold filtrate add 10 cc. of the barium-chloride
solution. Let stand at least 24 hours, filter on a 9-cm. paper,
wash the precipitate first with a hot solution containing 10 cc.
of hydrochloric acid, sp. gr. 1.20, and 1 g. barium chloride to
the liter, until free from iron; and then with hot water till free
from chloride. Ignite and weigh as barium sulfate.
Keep the washings separate from the main filtrate and
evaporate them to recover any dissolved barium sulfate.

Note.
A blank determination on all reagents used should be made and the
results corrected accordingly.
290 Methods for Analysis of Carbon Steel.

DETERMINATION OF SULFUR
BY THE
EVOLUTION-TITRATION METHOD.
(Routine.)

Apparatus.
Use a 480-cc. flask with a delivery tube and a 300-cc.
tumbler of tall form (Fig. 2).

Capacity
Iboz.
<*4&0cc.

Fig. 2. —Apparatus for Determination of

Sulfur by the Evolution Method.

Solutions Required.
—Mix 500 of hydrochloric
Dilute Hydrochloric Acid. cc. acid,
sp gr. 1.20, and 500 water.
cc. of distilled
Ammoniacal Cadmium Chloride. —Dissolve 10 cadmium g. of

chloride in 400 cc. of distilled water and add 600 cc. of ammo-
nium hydroxide, sp. gr. 0.90.
 Serial Designation: A 33 - 14. 291

—
Potassium Iodate. Dissolve 1.116 g. of potassium iodate
and 12 g. of potassium iodide in 1000 cc. of distilled water.
Standardize with a steel of known sulfur content. Each cubic
centimeter should be equivalent to 0.01 per cent of sulfur,
when a 5-g. sample is used (see notes).
Starch. —
To 1000 cc. of boiling distilled water, add a cold
suspension of 6 g. of starch in 100 cc. of distilled water; cool,
add a solution of 6 g. of zinc chloride in 50 cc. of distilled water,
and mix thoroughly.

Method.
Place 5 g. of steel in the flask and connect the latter as
shown in Fig. 2. Place 10 cc. of the ammoniacal-cadmium-
chloride solution and 150 cc. of distilled water in the tumbler.
Add 80 cc. of the dilute hydrochloric acid to the flask through
the thistle tube, heat the flask with its contents gently until
the solution of the steel is complete, then boil the solution for
\ minute. Remove the tumbler which contains all the sulfur
as cadmium sulfide, and to it add 5 cc. of starch solution and
40 cc. of the dilute hydrochloric acid, titrating immediately
with potassium-iodate solution to a permanent blue color.

Notes.
Extremely slow or rapid evolution of hydrogen sulfide is to be avoided.
Bureau of Standards Standard Steel No. 8(a) is recommended for standard-
izing the potassium-iodate solution.

DETERMINATION OF SILICON
BY THB
NITRO-SULFURIC METHOD.

Solutions Required.
Nitro-Suljuric Acid. — Mix 1000 cc. of sulfuric acid, sp. gr.
1.84, 1500 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and 5500 cc. of distilled
water.
Dilute Hydrochloric Acid. — Mix 100 cc. of hydrochloric acid,
sp. gr. 1.20, and 900 cc. of distilled water.
292 Methods for Analysis of Carbon Steel.

Method.
Add cautiously 80 cc. of the nitro-sulfuric acid to 4.702 g. of
steel, in a platinum or porcelain dish of 300-cc. capacity, cover
with a watch glass, heat until the steel is dissolved and evaporate
slowly until copious fumes of sulfuric acid are evolved. Cool,
add 125 cc. of distilled water, heat with frequent stirring until all

salts are dissolved, add 5 cc. of hydrochloric acid, sp. gr. 1.20,
heat for 2 minutes, andfilter on a 9-cm. paper. Wash the pre-
cipitate several times with hot water, then with hot hydrochloric
acid and hot water alternately to complete the removal of iron
salts, and finally with hot water until free from acid. Transfer
the filter to a platinum crucible, burn off the paper carefully with
the crucible covered, finally igniting over a blast lamp or in a
muffle furnace at 1000° C. for at least 20 minutes; cool in a
desiccator and weigh. Add sufficient sulfuric acid, sp. gr. 1.84,
to moisten the silicaand then a small amount of hydrofluoric
acid. Evaporate to dryness, ignite and weigh. The difference
in weights in milligrams divided by 100 equals the percentage
of silicon.
Note.
A blank determination on all reagents used should be made and the
results corrected accordingly.

DETERMINATION OF SILICON
BY THE
SULFURIC-ACID METHOD.
(Optional.)

Solution Required.
Dilute Hydrochloric Acid. —Mix 100 cc. of hydrochloric acid,
sp. gr. 1.20, and 900 cc. of distilled water.

Method.
To 2.351 g. of steel, in a beaker of low form of 500-cc.
capacity, add 60 cc. of distilled water, and then cautiously
 Serial Designation: A 33-14. 293

15 cc. of sulfuric acid, sp. gr. 1.84. Cover with a watch glass,
heat until the steel is and evaporate until copious
dissolved
fumes of sulfuric acid are evolved. Cool, add 100 cc. of dis-
tilled water and heat with frequent stirring until the salts are in
solution. Filter on a 9-cm. paper, wash the precipitate several
times with cold water, then with cold dilute hydrochloric acid
until free from iron, and finally with cold water until free from
acid. Ignite and weigh. Add sufficient sulfuric acid, sp. gr.
1.84, to moisten the silica and then a small amount of hydro-
fluoric acid. Evaporate to dryness, ignite and weigh. The
difference hi weights in milligrams divided by 50 equals the
percentage of silicon.

Note.
A blank determination on all reagents used should be made and the results
corrected accordingly.

DETERMINATION OF COPPER

Solutions Required.
—Mix 200 of
Sulfuric Acid. cc. sulfuric acid sp. gr. X 1.84,
and 800 water.
cc. of distilled
Potassium Ferrocyanide. — Dissolve 10 g. of potassium ferro-
cyanide 100
in of
cc. water.
distilled
Standard Copper —Dissolve
Nitrate. 2 g. of purest electrol-
ytic copper in 20 cc. of nitric acid (l: l), and dilute to 1000 cc.
with distilled water. Each cubic centimeter is equivalent to
0.02 per cent of copper on the basis of a 10-g. sample.

Method.
In a 300-cc. beaker dissolve 10 g. of the steel in 75 cc. of

and then add 150 cc. of distilled water. Heat

the sulfuric acid,
the solution and saturate with hydrogen sulfide, filter and
wash the precipitate free from iron with 1-per-cent sulfuric acid
containing hydrogen sulfide. Incinerate the paper with its
contents in a porcelain crucible and fuse with 0.5 g. of acid
294 Methods for Analysis of Carbon Steel.

sodium sulfate. Extract with hot water, filter, and complete

the determination colorimetrically as under 1 (a) or 1 (b), or
electrolytically as under 2, as follows:
1. Evaporate the filtrate to about 25 cc, make faintly
ammoniacal, filter into a 100-cc. Nessler tube and wash with
hot water.
(a) If the solution is a strong blue, to another 100-cc.
Nessler tube add 50 cc. of distilled water, 5 cc. of ammonium
hydroxide, sp. gr. 0.90, and from a burette the standard-copper-
nitrate solution until the blue colors match.
(b) If the solution is a faint blue, to the nitrate in a Nessler

tube add the dilute sulfuric acid to faint acidity and then a few
drops of the potassium-ferrocyanide solution. To another
100-cc. Nessler tube add 50-cc. of distilled water, a few drops of
the potassium-ferrocyanide solution, and from a burette the
standard-copper-nitrate solution until the reddish brown colors
match.
2. Make the filtrate slightly acid with sulfuric acid, dilute
with distilled water to a suitable volume, and determine the
copper electrolytically.

DETERMINATION OF NICKEL
BY THE
GRAVIMETRIC DIMETHYLGLYOXIME METHOD.

Solutions Required.
Hydrochloric Acid.—Mix 500 of hydrochloric cc. acid, sp.
gr. 1.20, and 500 water.
cc. of distilled
Dimethylglyoxime. —Dissolve of dimethylglyoxime
1 g. in
100 cc. of 95-per-cent ethyl alcohol.

Method.
In a 1 50-cc. beaker dissolve 1 g. of the steel in 20 cc. of the
hydrochloric acid, and add about 2 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42,
to oxidize the iron. Filter the solution and add to the filtrate
 Serial Designation: A 33 - 14. 295

6 g. of tartaric acid, and water till the volume is 300 cc. Make
the solution faintly ammoniacal, then faintly acid with the hydro-
chloric acid and heat nearly to boiling; add 20 cc. of the
dimethylglyoxime solution and then ammonium hydroxide, sp.
gr. 0.90, drop by drop till faintly alkaline, stirring vigorously.
After standing one hour, filter on a weighed Gooch crucible,
wash with hot water, dry at 110 to 120° C. and weigh. The
precipitate contains 20.31 per cent of nickel.

Notes.
In making dimethylglyoxime solution, methyl alcohol may be substituted
for ethyl alcohol.
The weight of sample taken should be varied according to the nickel
content.

DETERMINATION OF NICKEL
BY THE
VOLUMETRIC DIMETHYLGLYOXIME METHOD
(Routine.)

Solutions Required.
Hydrochloric Acid.—Mix 500 hydrochloric
cc. of acid, sp.
gr. 1.20, and 500 water.
cc. of distilled
Dimethylglyoxime. — Dissolve dimethylglyoxime
1 g. of in
100 cc. of95-per-cent ethyl alcohol.
— Dissolve
Silver Nitrate. nitrate
0.5 g. of silver1000 in cc.
of distilled water.
Potassium Iodide. — Dissolve 20 potassium iodide
g. of in
100 cc. water.
of distilled
Standard Potassium Cyanide. — Dissolve 2.29 potassium g. of
cyanide in 1000 cc. of distilled water. Standardize this solution
by the procedure described below, against a steel of known
nickel content as determined by the gravimetric dimethyl-
glyoxime method, so that each cubic centimeter is equivalent to
0.05 per cent of nickel on the basis of a 1-g. sample (see notes).
296 Methods for Analysis of Carbon Steel.

Method.
In a 150-cc. beaker dissolve 1 g. of the steel in 20 cc. of the
hydrochloric acid, and add about 2 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42,

to oxidize the iron. Filter the solution and add to the filtrate
6 g. of tartaric acid, and water until the volume is 300 cc.
Make the solution faintly ammoniacal, then faintly acid with
the hydrochloric acid, and cool thoroughly. Add 20 cc. of the
dimethylglyoxime solution and then ammonium hydroxide, sp.
gr. 0.90, drop by drop, till faintly alkaline, stirring vigorously.

After standing for a few minutes, filter on a Gooch crucible and

wash with hot water. Dissolve the precipitate on the filter with
10 to 20 cc. of nitric acid (hot), sp. gr. 1.42, added drop by drop,
and then wash 5 times with hot water, using suction. To the
solution in a 500-cc. beaker add 3 g. of ammonium persulfate
and boil for 5 minutes. Cool, make distinctly ammoniacal, add
10 cc. each of the silver-nitrate and potassium-iodide solutions,
and titrate with the standard-potassium-cyanide solution to a
faint turbidity.

Notes.
In making dimethylglyoxime solution, methyl alcohol may be substituted
for ethyl alcohol.
Bureau of Standards Standard Steel No. 33 is recommended for stand-
ardizing the potassium-cyanide solution.
The weight of sample taken should be varied according to the nickel
content.

DETERMINATION OF CHROMIUM.

Solutions Required.
Hydrochloric Acid. —Mix 500 cc. of hydrochloric acid, sp.
gr. 1.20,and 500 cc. of distilled water.
—
Sodium Carbonate. A saturated solution; approximately
60 g. of sodium carbonate and 100 cc. of distilled water.
 .

Serial Designation: A 33 - 14. 297

—
Barium Carbonate. Ten grains of finely divided barium
carbonate suspended in 100 cc. of distilled water.
Standard Sodium Chromate. Dissolve 2.6322 g. of sodium —
chromate in 1000 cc. of distilled water. Each cubic centimeter
is equivalent to 0.02 per cent of chromium, when a 5-g. sample
is used.
Standard Potassium Permanganate. Dissolve 2 g. of potas- —
sium permanganate in 1000 cc. of distilled water. Stand-
ardize by using Bureau of Standards sodium oxalate, and 1

dilute the solution with distilled water so that 1 cc. is equivalent

to 0.02 per cent chromium, when a 5-g. sample is taken.
—
The factor Na 2 C 2 4 > Cr = 0.2584 (using the 1913 atomic
weights)
Ferrous Sulfate. — Dissolve 25 g. of ferrous ammonium sulfate
in 900 cc. of distilled water and 100 cc. of sulfuric acid (1:1).

Method.
In a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask, covered, dissolve 5 g. of steel
in 50
cc. of the hydrochloric acid. When completely dissolved,
add gradually the saturated solution of sodium carbonate until
practically all the free acid is neutralized; finish the neutraliza-
tion with the barium-carbonate suspension, using an excess of
about 1 g. of the carbonate. Boil the solution in the flask for
10 or 15 minutes, with the cover on. Filter the precipitate
rapidly on paper and wash twice with hot water. Transfer the
filter to a platinum crucible and after burning off the paper, fuse
the residue for 10 minutes with a mixture of 5 g. of sodium car-
bonate and 0.25 g. of potassium nitrate. Dissolve the fusion in
water, transfer to a beaker, add 2 cc. of 3-per-cent hydrogen
peroxide, boil a few minutes and filter. Complete the deter-
mination of chromium in the filtrate by either of the following
procedures:
the solution is a strong yellow, add 10 cc. of sulfuric acid
1. If

(l : and then the ferrous-sulfate solution in measured excess.

1),

Cool thoroughly and titrate with the standard-potassium-

permanganate solution. The number of cubic centimeters of
the potassium-permanganate solution obtained, subtracted from
the number corresponding to the volume of the ferrous-sulfate
'Circular No. ','). Bureau of Standards. Oct. 1. 1912.
298 Methods for Analysis of Carbon Steel.

solution used, will give the volume of the potassium-perman-

ganate solution equivalent to the chromium in the sample.
2. If the solution is a light yellow, cool the solution and
transfer to a 100-cc. Nessler tube. To another Nessler tube
add distilled water, and from a burette add the standard-
sodium-chromate solution until the yellow colors match.

Note.

If procedure No. 1 is used, all hydrogen peroxide must be destroyed by

boiling before acidifying, otherwise chromic acid will be reduced at this stage.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHODS
FOR
CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF ALLOY STEELS.

Serial Designation: A 55-15.

These methods are issued under the fixed designation A 55; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case
of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915.

NICKEL STEEL.
DETERMINATION OF CARBON.
See the Determination of Carbon in Plain Carbon Steel
by the Direct-Combustion Method. 1

DETERMINATION OF MANGANESE.
See the Determination of Manganese in Plain Carbon Steel
by the Bismuthate Method. 1

See the Determination of Manganese in Plain Carbon Steel

by the Persulfate Method (Routine). 1

1
Standar d M tot Chemical Analysis of Piain Ca Serial Designation:
A 33), r>.
27.s.

(299)
300 Methods for Analysis of Alloy Steels.

DETERMINATION OF PHOSPHORUS.
See the Determination of Phosphorus in Plain Carbon Steel
by the Molybdate-Magnesia Method. 1

See the Determination of Phosphorus in Plain Carbon Steel

by the Alkalimetric Method (Routine). 1

DETERMINATION OF SULFUR.
See the Determination of Sulfur in Plain Carbon Steel by
the Oxidation Method. 1

See the Determination of Sulfur in Plain Carbon Steel by

the Evolution-Titration Method (Routine). 1

Notes.

The Evolution-Titration Method should not be used with steels con-

taining appreciable amounts of tungsten, or of copper or other metals
precipitated by hydrogen sulfide from acid solutions.
The annealing of the steel drillings has been found by a number of
investigators to increase the degree of refinement of the method.

DETERMINATION OF SILICON.

See the Determination of Silicon in Plain Carbon Steel by

the Nitro-Sulfuric Method. 1

See the Determination of Silicon in Plain Carbon Steel by

the Sulfuric-Acid Method (Optional). 1

DETERMINATION OF NICKEL.
See the Determination of Nickel in Plain Carbon Steel by
the Gravimetric Dimethylgloxime Method. 1

See the Determination of Nickel in Plain Carbon Steel by

the Volumetric Dimethylgloxime Method (Routine). 1

1 Standard Methods for Chemical Analysis of Plain Carbon Steel (Serial Designa-
tion: A 33), p. 275.
 Serial Designation: A 55-15. 301

DETERMINATION OF NICKEL
BY THE

ETHER EXTRACTION CYANIDE TITRATION METHOD.

-

(Optional Routine.)

Solutions Required.
Hydrochloric Acid. —Mix 600 cc. of hydrochloric acid, sp.
gr. 1.20, and 400 cc. of distilled water.
—Mix 1000 of
Nitric Acid. cc. and nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42,
1200 water.
cc. of distilled

Potassimn Iodide. — Dissolve 20 of potassium iodide g. in

1000 water.
cc. of distilled

—Dissolve
Silver Nitrate. nitrate 1000
0.5 g. of silver in cc.
water.
of distilled
Standard Potassium Cyanide. —Dissolve 4.589 of potas- g.
sium cyanide in 1000 cc. of distilled water. Standardize the
solution by the procedure described below, against a steel of
known nickel content as determined by the gravimetric dime thy 1-
gloxime method, so that 1 cc. is equivalent to 0.10 per cent nickel
on the basis of a 1-g. sample (see note).

Method.
In a 150-cc. beaker dissolve 1 g. of the steel in 20 cc. of
the hydrochloric acid, add about 2 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr.
1.42, to oxidize the iron, and boil to expel the oxides of nitrogen.
Cool, and transfer the solution into an 8-oz. separatory funnel,
rinsing the beaker with small portions of the hydrochloric acid.
Add 50 cc. of ether, shake for 5 minutes, let settle for 1 minute,
and then draw off lower clear solution into another 8-oz. sepa-
ratory funnel. Add 10 cc. of hydrochloric acid, sp. gr. 1.20, to
the solution in the first separatory funnel, cool, shake thor-
oughly, allow to settle for 1 minute, and then draw off the lower
clear solution into the second separatory funnel. To the com-
bined solutions in the second separatory funnel add 50 cc. of
ether, shake for 5 minutes, let settle for 1 minute, and then draw
off the clear layer into a 150-cc. beaker. Heat the aqueous
302 Methods for Analysis of Alloy Steels.

solution gently to add 0.2 g. of potassium

expel the ether,
chlorate, boil until chlorate decomposed, dilute to 100 cc.
is

with hot water, make faintly ammoniacal, and boil for 5 min-
utes. Filter and wash with hot water. To the filtrate add
10 cc. of hydrochloric acid, sp. gr. 1.20, heat just short of boiling
and precipitate the copper with hydrogen sulfide. Filter and
wash with hot water. Boil the filtrate to expel hydrogen
sulfide, reducing the volume by evaporation to approximately
100 cc, cool, and make solution distinctly ammoniacal, add
10 cc. each of the silver-nitrate and potassium-iodide solutions,
and titrate with the standard-potassium-cyanide solution to a
clear solution.

Note.
Bureau of Standards Standard Steel No. 33, is recommended for stand-
ardizing the potassium-cyanide solution.

CHROME-NICKEL STEEL.

DETERMINATION OF CARBON.
See the Determination of Carbon by the Direct-Combustion
Method. 1

DETERMINATION OF MANGANESE
BY THE

ZINC OXIDE - BISMUTHATE METHOD.

Solutions Required.
Sulfuric Acid.—Mix 200 cc. of sulfuric acid, sp. gr. 1.84,
and 800 water.
cc. of distilled

Nitric Acid. — Mix 500 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
1500 cc. of distilled water.
1 Standard Methods for Chemical Analysis of Plain Carbon Steel (Serial Designation:
A 33). p. 275.
 Serial Designation: A 55-15. 303

Nitric Acid for Washing. —Mix 30 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr.

1.42, and 970 cc. of distilled water.

—
Sodium Carbonate. A saturated solution; approximately
60 g. of sodium carbonate and 100 cc. of distilled water.
—
Zinc Oxide. Twenty grams of zinc oxide (dry process)
suspended in 100 cc. of distilled water (see notes)
Stock Sodium At senile.• —To 15 g. of arsenious oxide (As 2 8)

in a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask, add 45 g. of sodium carbonate

and 150 cc. of distilled water. Heat the flask and contents on
a water bath until the arsenious oxide is dissolved, cool the
solution and make up to 1000 cc. with distilled water.
—
Standard Sodium Arsenite. Dilute 300 cc. of the stock-
sodium-arsenite solution to 1000 cc. with distilled water and
titrate against potassium-permanganate solution (about N/10)
which has been standardized by using Bureau of Standards
sodium oxalate. 1 Titrate 10-cc. portions of the permanganate
solution, to each of which have been added 50-cc. portions of
the nitric acid. A clear green color free from brownish or
purplish tints will be found a satisfactory and reproducible end-
point. Adjust the solution so that 1 cc. is equivalent to 0.10 per
cent of manganese on the basis of a 1-g. sample.
The factor Na C 2 2 4
— >Mn = 0.1 6397 (using the 1913 atomic
weights).

Method.
In a platinum or porcelain dish of 300-cc. capacity, to
2.5 g. of the steel add 40 cc. of the sulfuric acid, cover with a
watch glass, and heat until the steel is dissolved. Add about
4 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, to oxidize the iron and evaporate
slowly until copious fumes of sulfuric acid are evolved. Cool,
add 100 hot water, heat with frequent stirring until all
cc. of
salts are dissolved, then transfer the solution into a volumetric
500-cc. flask. Add the sodium-carbonate solution until near
neutrality,and the precipitate formed dissolves with difficulty,
then add small portions of the zinc-oxide suspension, shaking
vigorously after each addition, until after settling of the coag-
ulated precipitate, the supernatant liquid is practically clear.
Cool, and make up to the mark with water. Mix thoroughly by
pouring the entire contents of the flask into a large, dry beaker,
1
Circular No. 40. Bureau of Standard*, Oct. I. 1912
304 Methods for Analysis of Alloy Steels.

and back again to the flask, repeating several times. Allow

the precipitate to settle, filter off 200 cc. of the solution into a
300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask, add 75 cc. of the nitric-acid (sp. gr.
1.42), and boil to expel the oxides of nitrogen. Cool, add 0.5 g.
of sodium bismuthate and heat for a few minutes, or until the
pink color has disappeared, with or without the precipitation of
manganese dioxide. Add small portions of ferrous sulfate (or
other suitable reducing agent) in sufficient quantity to clear
the solution, and boil to expel the oxides of nitrogen. Cool to
15° C, add an excess of sodium bismuthate and agitate for a
few minutes. Let settle and filter through an alundum filter
or asbestos pad, washing with the 3-per-cent nitric acid. Titrate
immediately with the standard-sodium-arsenite solution to the
disappearance of the pink color.

Notes.
In the method, the preliminary treatment with sodium bismuthate has
been found by a number of investigators to be apparently unnecessary;
however the available data to confirm this position are not considered suf-
ficient to warrant its omission.
In making the. asbestos filter pad it is advisable to have a thin bed and
as much surface as possible. This insures rapid filtration and the filter may
be used until it becomes clogged with bismuthate.
The filtrate must be perfectly clear since the least particle of bismuthate
carried through the filter will vitiate the results.
The zinc-oxide reagent should be free from manganese, or a correction
applied if it is present.

DETERMINATION OF MANGANESE
BY THE
MODIFIED BISMUTHATE METHOD.
(Routine.)

Solutions Required.
Nitric Acid. —Mix 500 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
1500 cc. of distilled water.
Nitric Acid for Washing. —Mix 77 cc. of the nitric acid
(sp. gr. 1.42.)
Stock Sodium Ar senile. —To 15 g. of arsenious oxide (Asj0 3 )
in a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask, add 45 g. of sodium carbonate
and 150 cc. of distilled water. Heat the flask and contents on
 Serial Designation: A 55-15. 305

a water bath until the arsenious oxide is dissolved, cool the

solution and make up to 1000 cc. with distilled water.
Standard Sodium Arsenite. —Dilute
300 cc. of the stock-
sodium-arsenite solution to 1000 with distilled water and cc.

titrate against potassium-permanganate solution (about N/10)

which has been standardized by using Bureau of Standards
sodium oxalate. 1 Titrate 10-cc. portions of the permanganate
solution, to each of which have been added 50-cc. portions of the
nitric acid. A from brownish or purplish
clear green color free
tints will be found a satisfactory and reproducible end-point.
Adjust the solution so that 1 cc. is equivalent to 0.10 per cent
of manganese on the basis of a 1-g. sample.
The factor Na 2 C 2 4 — >Mn
= 0.1 6397 (using the 1913 atomic
weights).

Method.
In a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask dissolve 1 g. of the steel in
50 cc. of the nitric acid, and boil to expel the oxides of nitrogen.
Cool to 60-70° C, add about 0.5 g. of sodium bismuthate,
and heat few minutes, or until the pink color has disap-
for a
peared, with or without the precipitation of manganese dioxide.
Add sufficient sulfurous acid or sodium sulfite to clear the solu-
tion and to reduce all of the chromic acid. Cool to approxi-
mately 0° C. in ice water, add an excess of sodium bismuthate
and agitate. After 30 seconds standing, filter rapidly through
an alundum filter or asbestos pad, washing with 3-per-cent nitric
acid previously cooled in ice water to approximately 0° C.
Titrate immediately with the standard-sodium-arsenite solution
to the disappearance of the pink color.

Notes.
In the method, the preliminary treatment with sodium bismuthate has
been found by a number of investigators to be apparently unnecessary;
however, the available data to confirm this position are not sufficient to
warrant its omission.
In making the asbestos filter pad it is advisable to have a thin bed,
and as much surface as possible. This insures rapid filtration, and the
filter may be used until it becomes clogged with bismuthate.

The filtrate must be ice cold and perfectly clear, since any appreciable
rise oftemperature above 0° C, or the least particle of bismuthate carried
through the filter will vitiate the results.

^Circular No. fO, Bureau of Standard*. Oct. 1. 191?.

306 Methods for Analysis of Alloy Steels.

See the Determination of Manganese in Plain Carbon

Steel by the Persulfate Method. 1

Note.

In making the titration special care should be given to standardizing the

end-point reading, and the reading should be corrected by a blank, which
varies with the amount of chromium present.

DETERMINATION OF PHOSPHORUS.
See the Determination of Phosphorus in Plain Carbon Steel
by the Molybdate-Magnesia Method. 1

See the Determination of Phosphorus in Plain Carbon Steel

by the Alkalimetric Method. 1

DETERMINATION OF SULFUR.
See the Determination of Sulfur in Plain Carbon Steel by
the Oxidation Method. 1

See the Determination of Sulfur in Plain Carbon Steel by

the Evolution-Titration Method (Routine). 1

Notes.

The Evolution-Titration Method should not be used with steels con-

taining appreciable amounts of tungsten, or of copper or other metals
precipitated by hydrogen sulfide from acid solutions.
The annealing of the steel drillings has been found by a number of
investigators to increase the degree of refinement of the method.

DETERMINATION OF SILICON.

See the Determination of Silicon in Plain Carbon Steel by

the Nitro-Sulfuric Method. 1

See the Determination of Silicon in Plain Carbon Steel by

the Sulfuric- Acid Method (Optional). 1

'Standard Methods for Chemical Analysis of Plain Carbon Steel (Serial Designation:
A 33), p. 275.
 Serial Designation: A 55 - 15. 307

DETERMINATION OF CHROMIUM
BY THE

FUSION METHOD.

Solutions Required.
Sulfuric Acid.—Mix 1000 of sulfuric cc. acid, sp. gr. 1.84,
and 3000 water.
cc. of distilled
Sodium Carbonate. —A saturated solution; approximately
60 g. of sodium carbonate and 100 of water.
cc. distilled
Magnesium Carbonate. —Ten grams of divided mag- finely
nesium carbonate suspended 100 of in water.
cc. distilled
Barium Carbonate. —Ten grams of divided barium
finely
carbonate suspended 100 in
of water.
cc. distilled
Nitric Acid. — Mix 1000 of cc. and
nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42,
1200 of
cc. water.
distilled
Potassium-Ferricyanide Indicator. — Dissolve of potas- 0.1 g.
sium ferricyanide 50 in of water
cc. distilled
notes). (see
Standard Potassium Bichromate. — Dissolve of potassium 5 g.
bichromate in 1000 cc. of distilled water, standardize against
pure ferrous ammonium sulfate, and adjust to tenth-normal.
Ferrous Sulfate. —Dissolve 25 g. of ferrous ammonium
sulfate in 900 cc. of distilled water and 100 cc. of sulfuric
acid (1:1).

Method.
In a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask, covered, dissolve 1 g. of the
steel in 50 cc. of the sulfuric acid (see notes). When com-
pletely dissolved, add 50 to 75 cc. of hot water, then gradually
the sodium-carbonate solution until near neutrality, then add
an excess of the magnesium-carbonate suspension (see notes),
and boil vigorously for 15 minutes, with the cover on, adding
fresh portions of the carbonate suspension during this time, so
that there is present in the solution at the end of the operation
an excess of 2 to 3 g. of the carbonate. Let settle and pour the
supernatant liquid on a rapid filter, washing by decantation
twice with cold water, pouring the washings through the filter.
Transfer the filter to a platinum crucible and after burning off
308 Methods for Analysis of Alloy Steels.

the paper, fuse the residue for 10 minutes with a mixture of 5 g.

of sodium carbonate and 0.25 g. of potassium nitrate. Dissolve
the fusion in water, transfer to a beaker, add 2 cc. of 3-per-cent
hydrogen peroxide, boil a few minutes and filter. Add 20 cc. of
the sulfuric acid, stir vigorously, cool and titrate against the
standardized ferrous-sulfate solution, using the potassium-
ferricyanide solution as outside indicator, or add at once a
measured amount (in excess) of the ferrous-sulfate solution, and
titrate back against the potassium-bichromate solution, using
the same indicator.

Notes.

The solution of the steel may be in hydrochloric acid, sp. gr. 1.20 or any
other desired strength, adjusting the amount of acid used to avoid a large
excess being present.
Barium-carbonate suspension may be substituted for the magnesium
carbonate suspension when hydrochloric acid is. used as solvent.
All hydrogen peroxide must be destroyed by boiling before acidifying,
otherwise chromic acid will be reduced at this stage.
The insoluble residue remaining after extraction of the fusion should be
examined for chromium.
The potassium-ferricyanide indicator should be prepared fresh on the
day it is used.
The ferrous-sulfate solution should be standardized on the day it is

used.
In titrating with the ferrous-sulfate solution it is convenient to divide
the solution, roughly titrate one portion, add the other and finish carefully.

DETERMINATION OF CHROMIUM
BY THE

CHLORATE METHOD.
(Routine.)

Solutions Required.

Nitric Acid. —Mix 1000 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
1200 cc. of distilled water.
Potassium-Ferricyanide Indicator. —Dissolve 0.1 g. of potas-
sium ferricyanide in 50 cc. of distilled water (see notes).
 Serial Designation: A 55-15. 309

Standard Potassium Bichromate. —Dissolve 5 g. of potassium

bichromate in 1000 cc. of distilled water, and standardize

against pure ferrous ammonium sulfate, and adjust to tenth-
normal.
Standard Potassium Permanganate. —Dissolve 2 g. of potas-
sium permanganate in 1000 cc. of distilled water. Standardize
by using Bureau of Standards sodium oxalate. 1
Adjust the
solution so that 1 cc. is equivalent to 0.10 per cent chromium on
the basis of a 1-g. sample. The factor Na 2 C 2 4
— >Cr = 0.2584
(using the 1913 atomic weights).
Ferrous Sulfate. —Dissolve 25 g. of ferrous ammonium sul-
fate in 900 cc. of distilled water and 100 cc. of sulfuric acid
(1:1).

Method.
In a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask dissolve 1 g. of the steel in
30 cc. of the nitric acid, and evaporate rapidly to approximately
one-half volume. Add 50 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
add 1 sodium chlorate (see notes). Evaporate by boiling
g. of

to approximately one-half volume and complete the determina-

tion by either of the following procedures:
1. Dilute the solution with 100 cc. of distilled water and
filter off the manganese dioxide, using suction, washing with
hot water. Cool the filtrate, dilute with cold water to 600-cc.
volume, and titrate against the standard-ferrous-sulfate solu-
tion, using the potassium-ferricyanide solution as outside
indicator, or add at once a measured amount (in excess) of the
ferrous-sulfate solution and titrate back against the standard-
potassium-bichromate solution, using the same indicator.
2. Add 10 cc. of hydrochloric acid (1:1) and boil until the
solution is clear and all manganese dioxide dissolved. Cool,
dilute the solution with water to 300-cc. volume, add the ferrous-
sulfate solution in measured amount (in excess), and titrate back
with the standard-potassium-permanganate solution to a per-
manent pink color.

1
Circular No. .',0. Bureau of StandarrK Oct. 1. 101?.
 .

310 Methods for Analysis of Alloy Steels.

Notes.
The potassium-ferricyanide indicator should be prepared fresh on the
day it is used.
The
ferrous-sulfate solution should be compared on the day it is used,
with the standard-potassium-permanganate or standard-potassium-bichromate
solutions.
Potassium chlorate may be used as oxidizing agent in the place of sodium
chlorate.
In titrating with the ferrous-sulfate solution it is convenient to divide
the solution, roughly titrate one portion, add the other and finish carefully

DETERMINATION OF CHROMIUM
BY THE

PERMANGANATE OXIDATION METHOD,

(Optional Routine.)

Solutions Required.

—Mix 1000 of sulfuric acid,

Sulfuric Acid. cc. sp. gi. 1.84,
and 3000 water.
cc. of distilled

Nitric Acid. — Mix 1000 of acid, cc. nitric sp. gr. 1.42, and
1200 ofcc. water.
distilled
Potassium Permanganate. —Dissolve 25 of g. potassium
permanganate in 1000 of water. cc. distilled
Standard Potassium Permanganate. — Dissolve 2 g. of potas-
sium permanganate in 1000 cc. of distilled water. Standardize
by using Bureau of Standards sodium oxalate. 1
Adjust the
solution so that 1 cc. is equivalent to 0.10 per cent chromium
on the basis of a 1-g. sample.
The factor Na 8 C 04— >Cr = 0.2584
2 (using the 1913 atomic
weights)
Ferrous Sulfate. —Dissolve 25 g. of ferrous ammonium
sulfate in 900 cc. of distilled water and 100 cc. of sulfuric,
acid (1 :1).

1
Circular No. 40, Bureau of Standards. Oct. I, 1912.
 Serial Designation: A 55-15. 311

Method.
In a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask, dissolve 1.25 g. (procedure
No. l) or 1 g. (procedure No. 2) of the steel in 50 cc. of the

sulfuric acid. When completely dissolved, add 5 cc. of the

nitric acid, and boil until clear and free from oxides of nitrogen.
Dilute with hot water to approximately 150-cc. volume, heat,
and while boiling add the potassium-permanganate solution
slowly until a permanent brown precipitate appears (see notes).
Complete the determination by either of the following pro-
cedures:
1. Add 25 cc. of ammonium hydroxide, sp. gr. 0.90, shake
well, place on the cooler part of the hot plate to avoid bumping.
Shake occasionally and digest for about 15 minutes, or until the
permanganate is all decomposed, then add cautiously 20 cc. of
the sulfuric acid and bring gently to a boil. Cool the solution
and pour into a volumetric 250-cc. flask. Make up to mark
with cold water and mix thoroughly. Allow precipitate to
settle, filter off 200 cc. of the clear solution (equal to 1 g.), add
the ferrous-sulfate solution in measured amount (in excess) and
titrate back with the standard-potassium-permanganate solu-
tion to a permanent pink color. The number of cubic centi-
meters of the standard-potassium-permanganate solution ob-
tained, subtracted from the number corresponding to the
volume of the ferrous-sulfate solution used, will give the
volume of the standard-potassium-permanganate solution equiv-
alent to the chromium in the sample.
2. Add 10 cc. of hydrochloric acid (1:1), and boil until
the solution is clear and all manganese dioxide dissolved. Cool,
add the ferrous-
dilute the solution with water to 300-cc. volume,
sulfate solution inmeasured amount (in excess), and titrate
back with the standard-potassium-permanganate solution to
a permanent pink color.

Notes.
In oxidizing with the potassium-permanganate solution care should be
taken to avoid a large excess, since the manganese-dioxide precipitate tends
to hold the chromic acid.
In the solution of the manganese dioxide under procedure No. 2, the
fumes are expelled.
boiling should be continued until all chlorine
The ferrous-sulfate solution should be compared on the day it is used
with the standard-potassium -permanganate solution.
312 Methods for Analysis of Alloy Steels.

DETERMINATION OF NICKEL.
See the Determination of Nickel in Plain Carbon Steel by
the Gravimetric Dimethylgloxime Method. 1

See the Determination of Nickel in Plain Carbon Steel by

the Volumetric Dimethylgloxime Method (Routine). 1

VANADIUM STEEL.
DETERMINATION OF CARBON.
See the Determination of Carbon in Plain Carbon Steel by
the Direct-Combustion Method. 1

DETERMINATION OF MANGANESE.
See the Determination of Manganese in Chrome-Nickel
Steel by the Zinc Oxide-Bismuthate Method. 2
For the Routine Determination of Manganese, see the
Determination of Manganese in Plain Carbon Steel by the
Bismuthate Method. 1

DETERMINATION OF PHOSPHORUS
BY THE

MODIFIED MOLYBDATE MAGNESIA METHOD.

-

Solutions Required.
Nitric Acid. —Mix 1000 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
1200 cc. of distilled water.
Nitric Acid for Washing. Mix 20 — cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr.

1.42, and 1000 cc. of distilled water.

'Standard Methods for Chemical Analysis of Plain Carbon Steel (Serial Designa-
tion: A 33). p. 275.
• Page 302.
 Serial Designation: A 55-15. 313

Potassium Permanganate. —Dissolve 25 g. of potassium

permanganate in 1000 cc. of distilled water.
Sodium Bisulfite.—Dissolve 30 sodium g. of bisulfite in
1000 cc. of distilled water.
Ammonium Molybdate. — Solution No. —Place in a beaker 1.

100 g. of 85-per-cent molybdic acid, mix it thoroughly with

240 cc. of distilled water, add 140 cc. of ammonium hydroxide,
sp. gr. 0.90, filter, and add 60 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42.

Solution No. 2. —Mix 400 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42,
and 960 cc. of distilled water.
When the solutions are cold, add solution No. 1 to solution
No. 2, stirring constantly; then add 0.1 g. of ammonium phos-
phate dissolved in 10 cc. of distilled water, and let stand at least
24 hours before using.
—
Magnesia Mixture. Dissolve 50 g. of magnesium chloride
and 125 g. of ammonium chloride in 750 cc. of distilled water,
and then add 150 cc. of ammonium hydroxide, sp. gr. 0.90.
Ammonium Hydroxide, Approximately 10-per-cent. — Mix
1000 cc. of ammonium hydroxide, sp. gr. 0.90, and 2000 cc. of

distilled water.
Ferrous Sulfate. —A saturated solution; approximately 40 g.
of ferrous sulfate and 100 cc. of distilled water.

Method.
In a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask dissolve 5 g. of steel in 75 cc.
of the nitric acid. Heat, and while boiling add about 12 cc. of
the potassium-permanganate solution, and continue boiling until
manganese dioxide precipitates. Dissolve the precipitate by
additions of the sodium-bisulfite solution, boil until clear and
free from oxides of nitrogen. Cool to 15-20° C, add 5 cc. of the
ferrous-sulfate solution, and 2 or 3 drops of concentrated
sulfurous acid, and then 100 cc. of the ammonium-molybdate
solution. Let stand 1 minute, shake or agitate thoroughly for
5 minutes, filter on a 9-cm. paper and wash at least 3 times with
the 2-percent nitric-acid solution to free from iron.
Treat the precipitate on the filter with the 10-per-cent
ammonium-hydroxide solution, letting the solution run into a
100-cc. beaker containing 10 cc. of hydrochloric acid, sp. pr.
314 Methods for Analysis of Alloy Steels.

1.20, and 0.5 g. of citric acid; add 30 cc. of ammonium hydrox-

ide, sp. gr. 0.90, cool, and then add 10 cc. of the magnesia
mixture very slowly, while stirring the solution vigorously. Set
aside in a cool place for 2 hours, filter and wash with the 10-
per cent ammonium-hydroxide solution. Ignite and weigh.
Dissolve the precipitate of magnesium pyrophosphate with 5 cc.
of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.20, and 20 cc. of water, filter and wash
with hot water. Ignite and weigh. The difference in weights
represents pure magnesium pyrophosphate containing 27.84
per cent of phosphorus.

Note.

The ammonium-molybdate solution should be kept in a cool place and

should always be filtered before using.

DETERMINATION OF PHOSPHORUS
BY THE

MODIFIED ALKALIMETRIC METHOD.

(Routine.)

Solutions Required.

Nitric Acid. —Mix 1000 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
1200 cc. of distilled water.
Nitric —
Acid for Washing. Mix 20 of cc. nitric acid, sp. gr.
1.42, and 1000 cc. of distilled water.
Potassium Permanganate. —Dissolve 25 potassium per- g. of
manganate in 1000 of water.
cc. distilled
Sodium —Dissolve 30 of sodium
Bisulfite. g. bisulfite in
1000 of
cc. water.
distilled
Ammonium Molybdate. — Solution No. — Place in a beaker 1.

100 g. of 85-per-cent molybdic acid, mix it thoroughly with

240 cc. of distilled water, add 140 cc. of ammonium hydroxide,
sp. gr. 0.90, filter, and add 60 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42.

Solution No. 2. —Mix 400 cc. of nitric acid. sp. gr. 14.2,
and 960 cc. of distilled water.
 Serial Designation: A 55-15. 315

When
the solutions are cold, add solution No. 1 to solu-
tionNo. 2, stirring constantly; then add 0.1 g. of ammonium
phosphate dissolved in 10 cc. of distilled water, and let stand
at least 24 hours before using.
—A saturated solution; approximately 40
Ferrous Sulfate. g.
of ferrous sulfate and 100 of cc. water.
distilled
Potassium —Dissolve 10 of potassium
Nitrate, 1-per-cent. g.
nitrate in 1000 of
cc. water.
distilled
Phenolphthalein Indicator. —Dissolve of phenol-
0.2 g.
phthalein in 50 cc. of 95-per-cent ethyl alcohol and 50 cc. of
distilled water.
Standard Sodium Hydroxide. — Dissolve 6.5 g. of purified
sodium hydroxide in 1000 cc. of distilled water, add a slight
excess of 1-per-cent solution of barium hydroxide, let stand for
24 hours, decant the liquid, and standardize it against a steel
of known phosphorus content, as determined by the molybdate-
magnesia method, so that 1 cc. will be equivalent to 0.01 per
cent of phosphorus on the basis of a 2-g. sample (see notes).
Protect the solution from carbon dioxide with a soda-lime tube.
—
Standard Nitric Acid. Mix 10 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr.
1.42, and 1000 cc. of distilled water. Titrate the solution
against the standardized sodium hydroxide, using phenol-
phthalein as indicator, and make it equivalent to the sodium
hydroxide by adding distilled water.

Method.
In a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask dissolve 2 g. of steel in 50 cc.
of the nitric acid. Heat, and while boiling add 6 cc. of the
potassium-permanganate solution and continue boiling until
manganese dioxide precipitates. Dissolve this precipitate by
additions of the sodium-bisulfite solution, boil until clear and
free from oxides of nitrogen, cool to 15-20° C, add 5 cc. of the
ferrous-sulfate solution and 2 or 3 drops of concentrated sul-
furous acid, and then 50 cc. of the ammonium-molybdate solu-
tion. Let stand for 1 minute, shake or agitate for 5 minutes,
filter on a 9-cm. paper, wash the precipitate three times with

the 2-per-cent nitric-acid solution to free it from iron, and con-

tinue the washing with the 1-per-cent potassium-nitrate solution
until the precipitate and flask are free from acid.
316 Methods for Analysis of Alloy Steels.

Transfer the paper and precipitate to the solution flask,

add 20 cc. of distilled water (see notes), 5 drops of phenol -
phthalein solution as indicator, and an excess of the standard-
sodium-hydroxide solution. Insert a rubber stopper and shake
vigorously until solution of the precipitate is complete. Wash
off the stopper with distilled water and determine the excess of
standard-sodium-hydroxide solution by titrating with standard-
nitric-acid solution. Each cubic centimeter of standard-sodium-
hydroxide solution represents 0.01 per cent of phosphorus.

Notes.
The ammonium-molybdate solution should be kept in a cool place and
should always be filtered before using.
All distilled water used in titration should be freed from carbon dioxide
by boiling or otherwise.
Bureau of Standards Standard Steel No. 24 is recommended as a suitable
steel for standardizing the sodium-hydroxide solution.

DETERMINATION OF SULFUR.
See the Determination of Sulfur in Plain Carbon Steel by
the Oxidation Method. 1

See the Determination of Sulfur in Plain Carbon Steel by

the Ev )lution-Titration Method (Routine). 1

Notes.
The Evolution-Titration Method should not be used with steels con-
taining appreciable amounts of tungsten, or of copper or other metals
precipitated by hydrogen sulfide from acid solutions.
The annealing of the steel drillings has been found by a number of
investigators to increase the degree of refinement of the method.

DETERMINATION OF SILICON.
See the Determination of Silicon in Plain Carbon Steel by
the Nitro-Sulfuric Method. 1

See the Determination of Silicon in Plain Carbon Steel by

the Sulfuric- Acid Method (Optional). 1

'Standard Methods (or Chemical Analysis of Plain Carbon Steel (Serial Designation:
A S3\. o. 275.
 Serial Designation: A 55-15. 317

DETERMINATION OF VANADIUM
BY THE

PHOSPHOMOLYBDATE PRECIPITATION METHOD.

-

Solutions Required.
Nitric Acid. —Mix 1000 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
1200 cc. of distilled water.
Nitric —Mix 20 of
Acid for Washing. acid, cc. nitric sp. gr.
1.42, and 1000 of cc. water.
distilled
Potassium Permanganate. —Dissolve 25 potassium g. of
permanganate 1000 in of water.
cc. distilled
Sodium —Dissolve 30
Bisulfite. sodium in
g. of bisulfite
1000 water.
cc. of distilled
Ammonium Phosphate. — Dissolve 50 ammonium phos- g. of
phate 1000
in water.
cc. of distilled

Ammonium Molybdate. — Solution No. —Place in a beaker 1.

100 g. of 85-per-cent molybdic acid, mix thoroughly with 240

it

cc. of distilled water, add 140 cc. of ammonium hydroxide,

sp. gr. 0.90, filter, and add 60 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42.
Solution No. 2. — Mix 400 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42,
and 960 cc. of distilled water.
When
the solutions are cold, add solution No. 1 to solu-
tionNo. 2, stirring constantly; then add 0.1 g. of ammonium
phosphate dissolved in 10 cc. of distilled water, and let stand
at least 24 hours before using.
Acid Ammonium Sulfate. —Mix 50 cc. of sulfuric acid,
sp. gr. 1.84, and 950 cc. of distilled water, and when cold add
15 cc. of ammonium hydroxide, sp. gr. 0.90. Use at a tem-
perature of 80° C.
Standard Potassium Permanganate. Dissolve 0.35 g. of —
potassium permanganate in 1000 cc. of distilled water, and
standardize by using Bureau of Standards sodium oxalate. 1

Adjust the solution so that 1 cc. is equivalent to 0.02 per cent

vanadium on the basis of a 2.5-g. sample.
The factor Na,CjO,— >V = 0.7612 (using the 1913 atomic
weights).

'Circular No. 40. Bureau of Standards, Oct. I. 1912.

318 Methods for Analysis of Alloy Steels.

Method.
In a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask dissolve 2.5 g. of steel in
50 of the nitric acid.
cc. Heat, and while boiling add 6 cc.
of the potassium-permanganate solution and continue boiling
until manganese dioxide precipitates. Dissolve the precipitate
by and boil until
additions of the sodium-bisulfite solution
clear and free from oxides of nitrogen. Add 5 cc. of the am-
monium-phosphate solution and 10 g. of ammonium nitrate,
heat to boiling, remove from the plate and add immediately
50 cc. of the ammonium-molybdate solution. Let stand 1
minute, shake or agitate for 3 minutes, filter the supernatant
liquid by suction through an asbestos filter, and wash three
times with the hot acid ammonium-sulfate solution. The flask
containing the bulk of the precipitate is then set under the
funnel fitted into a bell- jar filter and the asbestos pad is treated
with successive small portions of hot sulfuric acid, sp. gr. 1.84.
The solution is then heated until the precipitate is completely
dissolved, a few drops of the nitric acid added, and the heating
continued until copious fumes of sulfuric acid are evolved.
Cool the solution, add hydrogen peroxide in small quantities,
with vigorous shaking after each addition, until the solution
takes on a deep brown color. Replace flask on the hot plate,
fume for minutes, cover the flask, cool, add 100 cc. of
4 or 5
distilled water, heat to 80° C. and titrate with the standard-
potassium-permanganate solution to a permanent pink color.

Note.

If, after the addition of hydrogen peroxide and subsequent heating, the
solution does not take on a clear green or blue color, it should be heated

untilfumes of sulfuric acid are evolved to rid of any traces of nitric acid
which interferes with the reduction, then cooled and 1he treatment with
hydrogen peroxide repeated.
 .

Serial Designation: A 55-15. 319

DETERMINATION OF VANADIUM
BY THE
ETHER EXTRACTION - HYDROCHLORIC ACID
REDUCTION METHOD.
(Routine.)

Solutions Required.
Hydrochloric Acid. —Mix 600 cc. of hydrochloric acid, sp.
gr. 1.20, and 400 cc. of distilled water.
Nitric Acid. —Mix 1000 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
1200 cc. of distilled water.
Sulfuric Acid. — Mix 500 cc. of sulfuric acid, sp. gr. 1.84,

and 500 cc. of distilled water.

Potassium Permanganate. —Dissolve 25 of potassium
g.

permanganate in 1000 cc. of distilled water.

Standard Potassium Permanganate. —Dissolve 0.35 of g.

potassium permanganate in 1000 cc. of distilled water, and

standardize by using Bureau of Standards sodium oxalate. 1

Adjust the solution so that 1 cc. is equivalent to 0.02 per cent

vanadium on the basis of a 2.5 g. sample.
—
The factor NajC a 4 >V = 0.7612 (using the 1913 atomic
weights)

Method.
In a 150-cc. beaker dissolve 2.5 g. of the steel in 50 cc. of
the hydrochloric acid, add small portions of the nitric acid to
oxidize the iron, and heat to expel the oxides of nitrogen. Cool,
and transfer the solution into an 8-oz. separatory funnel, rins-
ing the beaker with small portions of the hydrochloric acid.
Add 50 cc. of ether, shake for 5 minutes, let settle for 1 minute,
and then draw off lower clear solution into another 8-oz. separa-
tory funnel. Add 10 cc. of hydrochloric acid, sp. gr. 1.20, to the
solution in the first separatory funnel, shake thoroughly, allow
to settle for 1 minute, and then draw off the lower clear solution
into the second separatory funnel. To the combined solutions
in the second separatory funnel add 50 cc. of ether, shake for

1
Circular No. 40, Bureau of Standards, Oct. 1, 1912.
320 Methods for Analysis or Alloy Steels.

5 minutes, let settle for 1 minute, and then draw off the clear
layer into a 150-cc. beaker. Heat the aqueous solution gently to
expel the ether, add 25 cc. of the sulfuric acid, and heat until
copious fumes are evolved. Cool, dilute with 25 cc. of water,
add a slight excess of the potassium-permanganate solution,
and boil. Add 15 cc. of hydrochloric acid, sp. gr. 1.20, and
heat to fuming for 10 minutes. Cool, add 100 cc. of water,
heat to 80° C, and titrate with the standard-potassium-perman-
ganate solution to a permanent pink color.

Note.
In heating the solution to expel oxides of nitrogen care should be taken
not to boil.

CHROME VANADIUM- STEEL.

DETERMINATION OF CARBON
See the Determination of Carbon in Plain Carbon Steel
by the Direct-Combustion Method. 1

DETERMINATION OF MANGANESE.
See the Determination of Manganese in Chrome-Nickel
Steel by the Zinc Oxide-Bismuthate Method. 2

See the Determination of Manganese in Chrome-Nickel

Steel by the Modified Bismuthate Method. 3

DETERMINATION OF PHOSPHORUS.
See the Determination of Phosphorus in Vanadium Steel by
the Modified Molybdate-Magnesia Method. 4

See the Determination of Phosphorus in Vanadium Steel

by the Modified Alkalimetric Method (Routine). 5

1 Standard Methods for Chemical Analysis of Plain Carbon Steel (Serial Designation :

A 33). p. 275.
» Page 302.
» Page 304.
Page 312.
'Page 314.
 i

Serial Designation: A 55-15. 321

DETERMINATION OF SULFUR.
See the Determination of Sulfur in Plain Carbon Steel by
the Oxidation Method. 1

See the Determination of Sulfur in Plain Carbon Steel by

the Evolution-Titration Method (Routine). 1

Notes.
The Evolution-Titration Method should not be used with steels con-
taining appreciable amounts of tungsten, or of copper or other metals
precipitated by hydrogen sulfide from acid solutions.
The annealing of the steel drillings has been found by a number of
investigators to increase the degree of refinement of the method.

DETERMINATION OF SILICON.
See the Determination of Silicon in Plain Carbon Steel by
the Nitro-Sulfuric Method. 1

See the Determination of Silicon in Plain Carbon Steel by

the Sulfuric- Acid Method (Optional). 1

DETERMINATION OF CHROMIUM
BY THE
FUSION METHOD.

Solutions Required.
Sulfuric Acid. —Mix 1000 cc. of sulfuric acid, sp. gr. 1.84,
and 3000 cc. of distilled water.
—
Sodium Carbonate. A saturated solution; approximately
60 g. of sodium carbonate and 100 cc. of distilled water.
—
Magnesium Carbonate. Ten grams of finely divided mag-
nesium carbonate suspended in 100 cc. of distilled water.
—
Barium Carbonate. Ten grams of finely divided barium
carbonate suspended in 100 cc. of distilled water.
Nitric Acid. —Mix 1000 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
1200 cc. of distilled water.

'Standard Methods for Chemical Analysis of Plain Carbon Steel (Serial Designation
A 33), p. 275.
322 Methods for Analysis of Alloy Steels.

—
Potassium -Ferricyanide Indicator. Dissolve 0.1 g. of potas-
sium ferricyanide in 50 cc. of distilled water (see notes).
—
Standard Potassium Bichromate. Dissolve 5 g. of potas-
sium bichromate in 1000 cc. of distilled water, standardize
against pure ferrous ammonium sulfate, and adjust to tenth-
normal.
Ferrous Sulfate. —Dissolve 25 g. of ferrous ammonium sul-
fate in 900 cc. of distilled water and 100 cc. of sulfuric acid
(1:1). The strength of this solution should be expressed in
terms of chromium and vanadium.

Method.
In a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask, covered, dissolve 1 g. of the
steel in 50 cc. of the sulfuric acid (see notes). When completely
dissolved, add 50 to 75 cc. of hot water, then gradually the
sodium-carbonate solution until near neutrality, and then add
an excess of the magnesium-carbonate suspension (see notes),
and boil vigorously for 15 minutes, with the cover on, adding
fresh portions of the carbonate suspension during this time,
so that there is present in the solution at the end of the opera-
tion an excess of 2 to 3 g. of the carbonate. Let settle and pour
the supernatant liquid on a rapid filter, washing by decantation
twice with cold water, pouring the washings through the filter.
Transfer the filter to a platinum crucible and after burning off
the paper, fuse the residue for 10 minutes with a mixture of
5 g. of sodium carbonate and 0.25 g. of potassium nitrate.
Dissolve the fusion in water, transfer to a beaker, add 2 cc.
of 3-per-cent hydrogen peroxide, boil a few minutes and filter.
Add 20 cc. of the sulfuric acid, stir vigorously, cool and titrate
against the standardized ferrous-sulfate solution, using the
potassium ferricyanide as outside indicator, or add at once a
measured amount (in excess) of the ferrous-sulfate solution and
titrate back against the standard-potassium-bichromate solu-
tion, using the same indicator.
From the number of cubic centimeters of the standard-fer-
rous-sulfate solution required deduct the number of cubic centi-
meters of the standard-ferrous-sulfate solution equivalent to the
vanadium in the steel, as determined by the Phosphomolybdate-
 Serial Designation: A 55-15. 323

Precipitation Method for Vanadium Steel, and the result will

1

be the number of cubic centimeters of the standard-ferrous-

sulfate solution equivalent to the chromium in the steel.

Notes.

The solution of the steel may be in hydrochloric acid, sp. gr. 1.20 or
any other desired strength, adjusting the amount of acid used to avoid a
large excess being present.
Barium-carbonate suspension may be substituted for the magnesium-
carbonate suspension when hydrochloric acid is used as solvent.
All hydrogen peroxide must be destroyed by boiling before acidifying,
otherwise chromic acid will be reduced at this stage.
The insoluble residue remaining after extraction of the fusion should be
examined for chromium.
The potassium-ferricyanide indicator should be prepared fresh on the
day it is used.
The ferrous-sulfate solution should be standardized on the day it is

used.
•
In titrating with the ferrous-sulfate solution it is convenient to divide
the solution, roughly titrate one portion, add the other and finish carefully.

DETERMINATION OF CHROMIUM
BY THE

CHLORATE METHOD.
(Routine.)

Solutions Required.
Nitric Acid. —Mix 1000 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
1200 cc. of distilled water.
—
Potassium Ferricyanide Indicator. Dissolve 0.1 g. of potas-
sium ferricyanide in 50 cc. of distilled water (see notes).
—
Standard Potassium Bichromate. Dissolve 5 g. of potas-
sium bichromate in 1000 cc. of distilled water, standardize
against pure ferrous ammonium sulfate, and adjust to tenth-
normal.
—
Standard Potassium Permanganate. Dissolve 0.5 g. of potas-
sium permanganate in 1000 cc. of distilled water. Standardize

«P»ge 317.
324 Methods for Analysis of Alloy Steels.

by using Bureau of Standards sodium oxalate. 1 Adjust the

solution so that 1 cc. is equivalent to 0.05 per cent vanadium
on the basis of a 1-g. sample.
The factor Na C 2 2 4
— >V = 0.7612 (using the 1913 atomic
weights).
Ferrous Sulfate. —Dissolve 25 g. of ferrous ammonium sul-
water and 100 cc. of sulfuric acid
fate in 900 cc. of distilled
(1:1). The strength of this solution should be expressed in
terms of chromium and vanadium.

Method.
In a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask dissolve 1 g. of the steel in
30 the nitric acid, and evaporate rapidly to approximately
cc. of

one-half volume. Add 50 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and
1 g. of sodium chlorate Evaporate by boiling
(see notes).
to one-half volume, dilute with 100 cc. of water and filter off
the manganese dioxide, using suction, washing with hot water.
Cool the solution to room temperature and complete the deter-
mination by either of the following procedures:
1. Titrate against the ferrous-sulfate solution, using the
potassium-ferricyanide solution as outside indicator (see notes).
From the number of cubic centimeters of the ferrous-sulfate
solution required deduct the number of cubic centimeters of
the ferrous-sulfate solution equivalent to the vanadium in the
steel, as determined by the Phosphomolybdate-Precipitation
Method for Vanadium Steel, 2 and the result will be the num-
ber of cubic centimeters of the ferrous-sulfate solution equivalent
to the chromium in the steel.
2. Titrate against the ferrous-sulfate solution, using the
potassium-ferricyanide solution as outside indicator (see notes).
Cool to 15° C. and titrate against the standard-potassium-
permanganate solution to a pink color permanent for 10 seconds.
Deduct the number of cubic centimeters of the standard-potas-
sium-permanganate solution consumed, which gives a direct
measure of the vanadium content of the steel, from the first
titration; the remainder will represent the chromium content
of the steel.

1Circular No. 40, Bureau of Standards, Oct. 1, 1912.

•Page 317.
 Serial Designation: A 55-15. 325

Notes.
The potassium-ferricyanide indicator should be prepared fresh on the
day it is used.
The ferrous-sulfate solution should be compared on the day it is used
with the standard-potassium-permanganate or potassium-bichromate solutions.
Potassium chlorate may be used as ozidizing agent in the place of
sodium chlorate.
In titrating with the ferrous-sulfate solution it is convenient to divide
the solution, roughly titrate one portion, add the other and finish carefully.

DETERMINATION OF VANADIUM.
See the Determination of Vanadium in Vanadium Steel
by the Phosphomolybdate-Precipitation Method. 1

DETERMINATION OF VANADIUM
BY THE

ETHER EXTRACTION -HYDROCHLORIC -ACID REDUCTION

METHOD.
(Routine.)

Solutions Required.
Hydrochloric Acid. —Mix 500 cc. of hydrochloric acid, sp.
gr. 1.20, and 500 cc. of distilled water.
Standard Potassium Permanganate. Dissolve 2 g. of potas- —
sium permanganate in 1000 cc. of distilled water, and stand-
ardize by using Bureau of Standards sodium oxalate. 2 Adjust
the solution so that 1 cc. is equivalent to 0.10 per cent van-
adium on the basis of when a 5-g. sample.
The factor Na C 2
2 4
— >V = 0.7612 (using the 1913 atomic
weights).

Method.
In a 150-cc. beaker, dissolve 5 g. of the steel in 60 cc. of
the hydrochloric acid, add small portions of nitric acid, sp. gr.
1.42, to oxidize the iron, avoiding an excess, and heat to expel

> Page 3 1 7.

• Circular No. 1,0, Bureau of Standards. Oct. I, 1912.

326 Methods for Analysis of Alloy Steels.

the oxides of nitrogen. Cool, and transfer the solution into an

8-oz. separatory funnel, rinsing the beaker with small portions of
the hydrochloric acid. Add 50 cc. of ether, shake for 5 minutes,
let settle for 1 minute, and then draw off lower clear solution
into another separatory funnel. Add 10 cc. of hydrochloric
acid, sp. gr. 1.20, to the solution in the first separatory funnel,
shake thoroughly, allow to settle for 1 minute, and then draw
off the lower clear solution into the second separatory funnel.
To the combined solution in the second separatory funnel add
50 cc. of ether, shake for 5 minutes, let settle for 1 minute, and
then draw off the clear layer into a 150-cc. beaker. Heat the
aqueous solution gently to expel the ether, evaporate to approxi-
mately one-fourth original volume, add 0.5 g. of potassium
chlorate and boil down to a volume of 10 cc. Add 25 cc. of
hydrochloric acid, sp. gr. 1.20, and again evaporate to 10 cc.
Add 20 cc. of sulfuric acid, sp. gr. 1.84, and evaporate until
copious fumes of sulfuric acid are evolved. Cool, dilute with
water to 100-cc. volume, and titrate against the standard potas-
sium permanganate to a pink color permanent for 10 seconds.
Deduct the chromium blank and the remainder is equivalent
to the vanadium content of the steel.

Note.
If much chromium relative to the vanadium is present the result will
be high due to the oxidation of a portion of the chromium by the perman-
ganate, and should be corrected by a blank which varies with the amount
of the chromium present. This blank is conveniently made by putting a
suitable amount of a chrome or chrome-nickel steel, free from vanadium,
through the above process. By using varying amounts of this steel, so as
to vary the chromium correspondingly, a curve may be constructed showing
the relation between amount of chromium present and the amount of blank,
and this curve can then be used in all subsequent work.
 Serial Designation: A 55 - 15. 327

SLLICO - MANGANESE STEEL.

DETERMINATION OF CARBON.
See the Determination of Carbon in Plain Carbon Steel
by the Direct-Combustion Method. 1

DETERMINATION OF MANGANESE.
See the Determination of Manganese in Plain Carbon Steel
by the Bismuthate Method. 1

See the Determination of Manganese in Plain Carbon Steel

by the Persulfate Method (Routine). 1

DETERMINATION OF PHOSPHORUS.
See the Determination of Phosphorus in Plain Carbon
Steel by the Molybdate-Magnesia Method. 1

See the Determination of Phosphorus in Plain Carbon Steel

by the Alkalimetric Method (Routine). 1

DETERMINATION OF SULFUR.
See the Determination of Sulfur in Plain Carbon Steel
by the Oxidation Method. 1

See the Determination of Sulfur in Plain Carbon Steel by

the Evolution-Titration Method (Routine). 1

Notes.
The Evolution-Titration Method should not be used with steels con-
taining appreciable amounts of tungsten, or of copper or other metals
precipitated by hydrogen sulfide from acid solutions.
The annealing of the steel drillings has been found by a number of
investigators to increase the degree of refinement of the method.

DETERMINATION OF SILICON.
See the Determination of Silicon in Plain Carbon Steel by
the Nitro-Sulfuric Method. 1

See the Determination of Silicon in Plain Carbon Steel by

the Sulfuric-Acid Method (Optional). 1

1
Standard Method* for Chemical Analysis of Plain Carbon Steel (Serial Designation:
A 3i). p. 275.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

RECOMMENDED PRACTICE
FOR
ANNEALING OF MISCELLANEOUS ROLLED AND
FORGED CARBON-STEEL OBJECTS.
Serial Designation: A 35-11.

This recommended practice is issued under the fixed designation A 35;

the final number indicates the year of original adoption, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1911.

1. Purpose and General Procedure. —The usual purpose in

annealing miscellaneous forged or rolled carbon-steel objects is

to remove existing coarseness of grain.This removal is brought

about by heating the object to an annealing temperature, which
varies with the carbon content of the metal. But the rate at which
the object cools from this annealing temperature influences its
properties very profoundly. Hence this rate of cooling should be
suited to the duties which the object has to perform in service, and
hence to the properties which we seek to give it.
Therefore these specifications first consider the annealing
temperature to which the piece must be heated in order to remove
existing coarse grain, and then the rate of cooling from that
temperature.
Under certain special conditions an annealing is required in
order to remove, not coarseness of grain, but the effects of rolling
or otherwise working the metal at a temperature so low as to
set up serious internal stress. Appropriate treatment for these
conditions is given in Section 14.

(328)
 Serial Designation: A 35-11. 329

As these specifications are intended to apply to a great variety

of miscellaneous objects, they are purposely made suggestive
rather than mandatory in many respects, because no single set
of rules can be applied rigorously to such widely varying classes
of objects and purposes.

Annealing for Removing Existing Coarse Grain.

2. Method of Heating. —In the case of large objects, the
heating of the interior of which lags behind that of the outside,
though the early part of the heating may if desired be rapid,
the final approach to the annealing temperature aimed at should
be slow, so that the interior may be brought fully up to it with-
out carrying the exterior far beyond it, because in general any
needlessly high temperature is injurious, and tends to re-coarsen
the grain. The temperature should be held long enough at the
annealing point to insure that the whole of the interior reaches
that point, and that the refining of the gram may become com-
plete. An exposure of one hour should be long enough for
pieces 12 in. thick. Thicker pieces need a longer heating.
3. Control of Temperature. —
Pyrometers. For all important
work in careful hands the use of some trustworthy pyrometer is
strongly recommended. But most pyrometers should be checked
frequently against some standard. For those who are unwilling
to take this trouble it is on a trained eye than on an
safer to rely
unchecked pyrometer. The operator should have clearly before
him the fact that no pyrometer indicates the temperature of the
interior of the object heated, and that the temperature which
most pyrometers indicate is one between the temperature of the
outside of the object heated and the temperature of the flame
which is supplying the heat. Wherever practicable the part of
the pyrometer which is supposed to reach the temperature of the
object heated should be in immediate contact with that object,
and should be protected from the flame or other source of heat
by a suitable insulation, as for instance by covering it with sand.
In important cases the gas or other source of heat should be
shut off for at least ten minutes before taking the observation.
4. Control Without the Use of a Pyrometer. —
In working
without a pyrometer and relying on the eye, the light surround-
ing the furnace should be dull, and should be kept as nearly
constant as practicable, in order that the eye may not be misled
330 Recommended Practice for Annealing.

by the changing contrasts between the surrounding light and

that of the object heated. In particular, direct sunlight should
be excluded, and any arc or other strong lights should be so
placed that neither they themselves nor any concentrated part
of their light is in the field of the operator's sight when he is

estimating by eye the temperature of the objects to be annealed.

Allowance should be made for the brighter surroundings by day
than at night, and on sunny than on dark days.
5. Magnetic Indications. —
The annealing temperature for
steels containing between 0.50 and 0.90 per cent of carbon is
that at which the metal suddenly ceases to be magnetic. This
fact may sometimes be used for the purpose of fixing or verify-
ing the annealing temperature.
6. Annealing Temperature. —In general, the higher the car-
bon content the lower should be the annealing temperature.
Hence different temperatures are given for different ranges of
carbon content. Further, in order to bring the interior of large
objects up to an effective annealing temperature, their outside may
often be raised advantageously somewhat above that temperature.
Hence for each- range of carbon content a range of temperature is
given. The upper limit of this range applied (l) to larger objects,
and (2) to the lower part of the range of carbon content given.
The following ranges of temperature should be used for the
several ranges of carbon content indicated. They refer to the usual
moderate manganese content. For steels with a manganese content
greater than 0.75 per cent slightly lower temperatures suffice.
Range of Carbon Content. Range of Annealing Temperature.
Less than 0. 12 per cent 875 to 925° C. (1607-1697° F.)
0.12 to 0.29 " 840" 870 " (1544-1598 ")
0.30" 0.49 " 815" 840 " (1499-1544 ")
0.50" 1.00 " 790" 815 " (1454-1499 ")

7. Care in Heating. — Care should be taken that all parts of

the object reach the same temperature. To that end it may be
necessary to mask from the heat, by means of bricks, the
thinner part of objects of varying thickness. When the heating
is nearly finished, these bricks may
be removed. In particular
the flame should never be allowed to touch any part of the
object under treatment.
8. Cooling. —
After the object has been held at the annealing
temperature long enough to make its temperature nearly uniform
 Serial Designation: A 35-11. 331

throughout, and to complete the refining of the grain, it should

be cooled in a way suited to its carbon content and to giving it
the specific properties needed. The general principles are : first,

the higher the carbon the slower should be the cooling; and
second, the slower the cooling the softer and more ductile the
metal will be, and the lower will be its tensile strength, elastic
limit, and )deld point. The greatest softness and ductility are
obtained at a certain sacrifice of strength and elasticity, and the
greatest strength and elasticity at a certain sacrifice of soft-
ness and ductility.
For most purposes neither of these extremes is desired, and
it is not only sufficient as regards quality but economical to

remove the object from the furnace as soon as it has been thor-
oughly annealed, and to allow it to cool in air, always com-
pletely protected not only from rain and snow but from sharp
drafts of air. Objects containing more than 0.50 per cent of
carbon should cool more slowly till the color dies out, say at
500° C. (932° F.), as for instance by leaving them in the furnace.
They may then be removed and cooled in air. Further, thin
objects containing between 0.25 and 0.50 per cent of carbon
should be treated like those of 0.50 per cent of carbon, unless
they can be so massed together that their collective bulk will
retard their cooling, so that they will collectively cool even in
air with moderate slowness, like single large objects.

Special Annealing Methods.

9. The foregoing methods economical because they
are
release the furnaces early for further use. In case special qual-
ities are desired the following methods may be used:
10. To Give the Greatest Softness and Ductility of which the
metal is capable, even at a certain sacrifice of strength and
elastic limit, for instance for ease of machining or to resist a
small number of severe distortions, the metal should be cooled
slowly, either within the furnace, or in the case of large objects,
under a cover of lime, clay, or other slow conductor of heat.
The slower the cooling and the lower the temperature to which
slow cooling is and weaker will be the steel.
carried, the softer
But for most cases which even unusual softness and ductility
for
are required, it suffices to remove the object from the furnace
when it has become dead black, and to cool it thenceforth in air.
332 Recommended Practice for Annealing.

11. To Give Great Tensile Strength and High Elastic Limit

even at a certain sacrifice of ductility, the cooling should be
more rapid, the rapidity to be governed by the thickness and
carbon content of the object. Thin objects and those with high
carbon content cannot stand so rapid a cooling as thick and low-
carbon ones, lest their ductility be too far sacrificed. For in-
stance, thick objects with less than 0.50 per cent of carbon may
be cooled completely in air, of course protected from rain or
snow. Objects with 0.50 per cent of carbon or more, and thin
objects with from 0.30 to 0.50 per cent of carbon, may be cooled
in air if their cooling is somewhat retarded, as for instance by
massing them together, as happens in the case of rails.
12. To Give an Unusually High Combination of Ductility

with Tensile Strength and Elastic Limit. Water or Oil Quenching

—
and Annealing. This process needs great care and intelligence,
and should in general be used only by those familiar with high-
grade steels. After holding at the annealing temperature suited
to the particular steel, as indicated in Section 6, the object is
quenched in oil, which should be kept in circulation. It may be
quenched in water if its carbon content is so low and its shape
so simple that it is not in danger of cracking or receiving per-
manently harmful stress. In any event the danger of such
cracking and stress is lessened by removing the object from the
oil or water before it has cooled completely, say when its tem-

perature has fallen to 160° C. (320° F.). It should if possible

not cool below 100° C. (212° F.) and certainly not below 20° C.
(68° F.). The annealing should begin within a very few hours
after the quenching and if possible without ever allowing the
piece to cool below 100° C. (212° F.) and certainly not below
20° C. (68° F.).
The steel thus hardened should next be annealed by heat-
ing to a temperature suited for giving the properties needed.
In general the higher this annealing goes, the more ductile will
the steel become, and the lower will be its strength and elastic limit.
For very high elastic limit and tensile strength, anneal at
500 to 650° C. (932 to 1202° F.). In this case the ductility will
be low. Some steels, such as watch-springs and shafting, are an-
nealed at 350° C. Little commercial annealing is done below 500° C.
For intermediate tensile strength, elastic limit, and ductil-
ity,best suited to the majority of cases, anneal at 600 to 65° CO.
(1112 to 1202° F.).
 Serial Designation: A 35-11. 333

For the greatest ductility, with good strength and elastic

limit, anneal at from 725 to 750° C. (1337 to 1382° F.).
The object should be held at this second annealing tempera-
ture long enough not only to allow its interior to reach it, but also
to relieve the stress given in ihe water or oil quenching. For
pieces of moderate thickness a 4-hour exposure should suffice.
13. To Give a Moderate Increase of Strength and Elastic
Limit above that Given by a Simple Slow Cooling, without the Full
Sacrifice of Ductility which a Simple A ir Cooling would Cause. —
After holding at the annealing temperature suited to the carbon
content, as indicated in Section 6, hasten the cooling till the
object is at a dull red, say 650° C. (1202° F.), and henceforth
cool slowly. The hastening of the cooling may be brought about
in the case of thin objects in relatively shallow furnaces by open-
ing the furnace door till the temperature falls to dull redness;
or by running the objects out into the air on a movable car-
bottom, and returning them to the furnace when they have
cooled to dull redness; or even, in the case of objects with not
over 0.30 per cent carbon and not too thin, by a temporary
immersion in oil or even water, followed by a return to the
furnace. In cases in which such operations are to be performed
frequently, special unfired chambers may be used for the final slow
cooling, thus leaving the annealing furnaces proper available for
their regular work. The results obtained in this way are not as
good as those obtained with the method described in Section 11.
14. Special Annealing to Remove the Effects of Rolling or
Otherwise Working the Object in the Cold or at any Unduly Low
—
Temperature. The object should be heated to about 775° C.
(1427° F.) and cooled with a slowness which should increase
with the thickness, that is, the least dimension of the piece. In
the case of thin plates a mere heating to 725° C. (1337° F.),
followed immediately by slow cooling, should suffice. In the
case of thick forgings, in which much time may be needed to
allow severe stress to relieve itself, the sojourn at 775° C.
(1427° F.) may be prolonged for several hours, though always
at the cost of superficial decarburizing.
Such annealing for steel containing less than 0.15 per cent
carbon should be at 900° C. (1652° F.). Great brittlcness may
be caused by annealing very low carbon steel in the neighbor-
hood of 700° C. (1292° F.), after cold working.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

RECOMMENDED PRACTICE
FOR
ANNEALING OF CARBON-STEEL CASTINGS.

Serial Designation : A 36 - 14.

This recommended practice is issued under the fixed designation A 36;

the final number indicates the year of original adoption, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1914.

1. The castings should preferably be sufficiently cleaned

of adhering sand before annealing to ensure thorough and uni-
form heating.
2. The castings should be heated slowly and uniformly to
temperatures varying with the carbon content of the steel,
approximately as follows:

Carbon, Temperatur*.
percent. deg. cent.

Up to 0.16 • 925
0.16 to 0.34 875
0.35 to 0.54 850
0.55 to 0.79 830

Nothing in these recommendations shall operate against

the temperatures aimed at being 50 and, in special cases, 100° C.
higher than those given in the table, when necessary to attain
the desired result.
3. The castings should be kept at the maximum temperature
a sufficient length of time to ensure the refining of the grain.
(334)
 Serial Designation: A 36 - 14. 335

In general, the heavier the sections of the casting, the longer

must be the time of exposure to the maximum temperature.
4. (a) The castings should be cooled slowly and uniformly
in the furnace, when it is desired that the steel shall possess the
maximum softness.
(b) The castings may be cooled at an accelerated rate, when
it is desired that the steel possess rather higher tensile strength
and elastic limit than can be procured by very slow cooling.
This cooling must be so conducted as to leave the steel reasonably
free from cooling stresses.
The manner of carrying outthis accelerated cooling should be
such as will attain the desired result. For instance, the castings
may be withdrawn from the furnace and buried in a bed of mate-
rial that is a poor conductor of heat; or the annealing furnace

may be so thrown open that it will cool more rapidly than if left
closed. Should the castings be of such uneven section that they
cool at unequal rates at various points when the furnace is

opened, especially if the carbon of the steel is high, the furnace

should be closed after the castings have become black, and their
further cooling so retarded that the stresses set up by the
unequal rates of cooling are relieved.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

RECOMMENDED PRACTICE
FOR
HEAT TREATMENT OF CASE-HARDENED
CARBON-STEEL OBJECTS.

Serial Designation: A 37-14.

This recommended practice is issued under the fixed designation A 37;
the final number indicates the year of original adoption, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1914.

It is recommended that the following treatments be applied

to case-hardened carbon-steel objects according to requirements:
1. When hardness of case only is desired and lack of tough-
ness or even brittleness unimportant, the carburized objects may
be quenched from the carburizing temperature, as for instance,
by emptying the contents of the boxes in cold water or in oil.
Both the core and the case are then coarsely crystallin.
In order to reduce the hardening stresses and to decrease
2.

the danger of distortion and cracking in the quenching bath,

the objects may be removed from the box and allowed to cool
before quenching to a temperature slightly exceeding the critical
range of the case, namely, 800 to 825° C. Both the core and
case remain coarsely crystallin.
3. To refine the case and increase its toughness, the car-
burized objects should be allowed to cool slowly in the carburiz-
ing box within the furnace or outside to 650° C. or below, and
should then be reheated to a temperature slightly exceeding the
(336)
 Serial Designation: A 37-14. 337

lower critical point of the case (in the majority of instances a

temperature varying in accordance with the carbon content
and thickness of the case between 775 and 825° C. will be
suitable), and quenched in water, or, for greater toughness but
less hardness, in oil. The objects should be removed from the
quenching bath before their temperature has fallen below 100° C.
This treatment is more especially to be recommended when the
carburizing temperature has not exceeded 900° C. It refines
the case but not the core.
4. To refine both the core and the case and to increase

their toughness, the objects should be allowed to cool slowly

from the carburizing temperature to 650° C. or below and
should then be (a) reheated to a temperature exceeding the
critical point of the core, which will generally be from 900 to
950° C, followed by quenching in water or in oil; and (b) before
they have cooled below 100° C., 1 they should be reheated to a
temperature slightly exceeding the lower critical point of the
case (in the majority of instances a temperature varying in
accordance with the carbon content and thickness of the case
between 775 and 825° C. will be suitable), and again quenched
in water or oil.
5. In order to reduce the hardening stresses created by

quenching, the objects, as a final treatment, may be tempered

by reheating them to a temperature not exceeding 200° C.
1 The removed from the quenching bath before they have cooled below
objects should be
100° Corder to lessen the danger of cracking, and they should be placed In the reheating
In
furnace while still at a temperature of at least 100° C. likewise to lessen the danger of crack-
ing, it being inadvisable (a) to allow steel to cool completely in the quenching bath and (b)
to place hardened steel in a hot furnace. Obviously, if the furnace is cold the hardened steel
may likewise be cold when placed in it for reheating.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
LAP-WELDED CHARCOAL-IRON BOILER TUBES
FOR LOCOMOTIVES.
Serial Designation: A 38-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 38; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

-Adopted, 1912; Revised, 1916, 1918.

Material i . These specifications cover lap- welded charcoal-iron boiler

tubes, boiler flues, safe ends, and arch tubes for locomotives.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 2. The tubes shall be made from knobbled, hammered
charcoal iron.

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Bend Tests. 3. ( a) Quench-bend Tests. — Strips £ in. in width by 6 in.
in length, planed lengthwise from tubes, when heated to a cherry

C
OuTslde of Tube--,

1
—
Inside cf Tube- J
f
3

Fig. l.

red and quenched at once in water the temperature of which

is 80° F., shall bend in opposite directions at each end, as

shown in Fig. 1, without showing cracks or flaws.

(338)
 Serial Designation: A 38-18. 339

(b) Nick-bend Tests. — Strips \ in. in width by 6 in. in

length, planed lengthwise from tubes, when nicked and broken
by light blows, shall show a wholly fibrous fracture.
4. A test specimen 12 in. in length shall be heated for Expansion Tests,
a length of 5 in. to a bright cherry red (1200-1400° F.),
placed in a vertical position, and a smooth tapered steel pin at
blue heat (600-800° F.) forced into the end of the tube by
pressure or by light blows of a 10-lb. hammer. Under this test
the tube shall expand to If times its original diameter without
splitting or cracking. The pin shall be of tool steel and shall
have a taper of 1^ in. per foot of length.
5. A test specimen 2\ in. in length shall stand crushing Crush Teste,

longitudinally to a height of If in. without splitting in either

direction and without cracking or opening at the weld.
6. Tubes under 5 in. in diameter shall stand an internal Hydrostatic
es
hydrostatic pressure of 1000 lb. per sq. in., and tubes 5 in. or
over in diameter shall stand an internal hydrostatic pressure of
800 lb. per sq. in.; provided that the fiber stress does not exceed
16,000 lb. per sq. in., in which case the test pressure shall be
determined by the following formula:

32,000
rD =
*

D
in which P = the pressure in pounds per square inch, / = the
thickness of wall in inches, and D = the inside diameter of tube
in inches. Lap-welded tubes shall be struck near both ends,
while under the test pressure, with a 2-lb. steel hand hammer
or the equivalent.
7. In case of doubt as to the quality of material, the follow- Etch Tests.'

ing test shall be made to detect the presence of steel. A cross-

section of tube shall be turned or ground to a perfectly true
surface, polished free from dirt or cracks, and etched until the
show a
soft parts are sufficiently dissolved for the iron tube to
decided ridged surface, with the weld very distinct, while a
steel tube would show a homogeneous surface.
8. (a) Test specimens shall consist of sections cut from Test Specimens,

tubes selected by the inspector representing the purchaser from

' A solution of two parts water, one part concentrated hydrochloric acid, and one part
ooncentrated sulfuric acid is recommendod for tho etrh test.
 340 Specifications for Lap- Welded Iron Boiler Tubes.

the lot offered for shipment. They shall be smooth on the ends
and free from burrs.
(b) All specimens shall be tested cold.
Number of Teste. 9. One of each of the physical tests specified shall be made
from each of two tubes in each lot of 250 or less. Each tube
shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test.
Reteats. 10. If the results of the tests do not conform to the require-
ments specified in Sections 3, 4, or 5, retests of two additional
tubes from the same lot shall be made, each of which shall con-
form to the requirements specified.

III. STANDARD WEIGHTS.

Standard 11. The standard weights for tubes of various outside
Weights.
diameters and thicknesses, are as indicated in Table I.

Table I.— Standard Weights.

Weight, lb. per ft. of Length.

Thickness.
Outside Diameter, in.

In. B.w.g. If 2 21 3 62 4 *1 5 51 si 5§ 6
»i

0.095 13 1.65 1.90 2.14 2.39

0.109 12 1.87 2.16 2.44 2.73 3.30

0.120 11 2.05 2.36 2.68 2.99 3.62 4.25

0.134 10 2.27 2.62 2.97 3.32 4.02 4.72 5.42

0.148 9 2.48 2.87 3.25 3.64 4.42 5.19 5.97 6.74 7.51 7 91 8 10 8.29 9 06

0.165 8 4.03 4.90 5.76 6.62 7.48 8.35 8 78 9 00 9.21 10 07

0.180 7 4.37 5.31 6.25 7.20 8.14 9.08 9 55 9 79 10.02 10 96

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Workmanship. (a) Finished tubes 3^ in. or under in outside diameter
12.
shall be circular within 0.02 in. and the mean outside diameter
shall not vary more than 0.015 in. from the size ordered. For
tubes over 3| in. in outside diameter these variations shall
not exceed 0.5 per cent of the outside diameter.
(b) The thickness at any point shall not vary more than

one gage above or one gage below that specified. In the case of
boiler tubes which are expanded and swaged, the thickness of
 Serial Designation: A 38-18. 341

the expanded end may be \\ gages lighter and of the swaged

end 2 gages heavier than the thickness specified.
(c) The length shall not be less, but may be 0.125 in. more

than that ordered.

13. The finished tubes shall be free from injurious defects Finish,

and distortion, and shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
14. The name or brand of the manufacturer, the words Marking,
"knobbled charcoal," and the pressure in pounds at which it
was tested, shall be legibly stenciled on each tube.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

15. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have inspection,

free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the tubes ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the tubes are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests and
inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to
shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so con-
ducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of
the works.
16. Tubes when inserted in the boiler shall stand expanding Rejection,

and beading without splitting or breaking. Tubes which fail

'in tliis manner will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be
notified.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
WELDED WROUGHT-IRON PIPE.

Serial Designation: A 72-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 72; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1917; Adopted, 1918.

Material 1. These specifications cover "standard" and "extra

Covered. strong" welded wrought-iron pipe, but not "double extra
strong" pipe.
Basis of 2. (a) All pipe to be used on locomotives and cars shall be
Purchase. of coiling or bending quality.
(b) Unless otherwise specified on the purchase order,,
inspection and all tests except the hydrostatic pressure test
shall be made by the purchaser at destination, and at his expense.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 3. (a) The made from muck bars, made from
iron shall be
puddled pig from any admixture of iron scrap or steel.
iron, free
(b) All pipe 3 in. or under in nominal diameter may be butt-

welded, unless otherwise specified. All pipe over 3 in. in nominal

diameter shall be lap-welded.
Definition of 4. Iron Scrap. —
This term applies only to foreign or bought
Terms. scrap and does not include local mill products, free from foreign
or bought scrap.
(342)
 —

Serial Designation: A 12- 18. 343

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

5. (a) The material shall conform to the following minimum Tension Tests,
requirements as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 40 000

Yield point, lb. per sq. in 24 000
Elongation in 8 in., per cent 12

Table I. Hydrostatic Pressures for Welded Pipe.

(Pressures expressed in Pounds per Square Inch.)

"Standard" Pipe. "Extra Strong" Pipe.

Inside Diameter, in.

Butt-Weld. Lap-Weld. !
Butt-Weld, j
Lap-Weld.

i 700 700

700 700

700 700
I

700 700
\
3 700 700
i
I.. 700 700

4 700 1000 1500 2500

4 700 1000 1500 2500

2.. 700 1000 500 2500

4 800 1000 500 2000

3 .
800 1000 500 2000

3} 1000 2000

4.. 1000 2000

4 1000 1800

5.. 1000 1800

6 . 1000 1800

(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam of the testing machine. The speed of the cross-head of the
machine shall not exceed f in. per minute.
6. All pipe shall be tested at the mill to the hydrostatic Hydrostatic
Test9 *

pressures specified in Table I.

7. A section of pipe 6 in. in length shall be flattened until Fracture Tests,

broken by repeated light blows of a hammer or by pressure;

the fracture developed shall have a fibrous appearance.
 344 Specifications for Wrought-Iron Pipe.

Bend Tests. 8. For pipe 2 in. or under in diameter, a sufficient length of

coiling or bending pipe shall bend cold through 90 deg. around a
cylindrical mandrel the diameter of which is 15 times the nom-
inal diameter of the pipe, without developing cracks at any
portion and without opening at the weld.
Test Specimens. 9. (a) Test specimens shall consist of sections cut from a

pipe. They shall be smooth on the ends and free from burrs.
(b) Tension test specimens shall be longitudinal.

(c) All specimens shall be tested cold.

Number of Tests. 10. One of each of the tests specified in Sections 5, 7 and 8,
may be made on a length in each lot of 500 or less, of each size.
Each length shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test.
Retests. 11. If the results of the physical tests of any lot do not
conform to the requirements specified in Sections 5, 7 and 8,
two additional pipes shall be made, each of which shall
retests of
conform to the requirements specified.

III. STANDARD WEIGHTS.

Standard 12. (a) The standard weights for pipe of various inside
Weights.
diameters are given in Table II.
(b) Nipples shall be cut from pipe" of the same weight and
quality as described in these specifications.
Permissible 13. The weight of the pipe shall not vary, more than 5 per
Variations.
cent from that specified in Table II.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Workmanship. 14. For pipe 1^ in. or under in inside diameter, the
(a)

outside diameter at any point shall not vary more than ^j in.
over nor more than -^ in. under the standard size. For pipe
2 in. or over in inside diameter, the outside diameter shall not
vary more than 1 per cent over or under the standard size.
(b) All "standard" pipe shall be provided with the prevail-

ing standard thread, which will make a tight joint when tested
to the specified internal hydrostatic pressure at the mill. The
threads shall not vary more than one and one-half turns either
way, when tested with a Pratt & Whitney standard gage. All
burrs at the ends of the pipe shall be removed.
Unless otherwise ordered, pipe shall be furnished in
(c)

random lengths of 16 to 22 ft., but not more than 5 per cent

 —

Serial Designation: A 72-18. 345

of the total number of lengths furnished may be "jointers,"

which are two pieces coupled together. When ordered with
plain ends, 5 per cent may be furnished in lengths of 12 ft.

or over.

Table II. Standard Weights of Welded Pipe.

(All Dimensions are Nominal.)

Dimensions. "Standard" "Extra Strong"

Pipe. Pipe.

Weight of Pipe Weight of Pipe

Number Outside per Linear Foot, per Linear Foot,
Inside Diameter, in. of Threads Diameter, Threaded and Plain Ends,
per Inch. with Couplings, lb.
lb.

27 0.405 0.25 0.31

18 0.540 0.43 0.54

J
3 18 0.675 0.57 0.74
8
14 0.840 0.85 1.09
i
14 1.050 1.13 1.47
2
1.. 1.315 1.68 2.17
«i
4 »S 1.660 2.28 3.00

1.900 2.73 3.63

"I
2.. 2.375 3.68 5.02

2.875 5.82 7.68

8.. 3.500 7.62 10.25

3^ 4.000 9.20 12.51

4 . 4.500 10.89 14.98

5.000 12.64 17.61

5.. 5.563 14.81 20.78

«.. 6.625 19.19 28.57

Each "standard" pipe shall be provided with a coup-

(d)
ling, having clean-cut threads of such a pitch diameter as to
make a tight joint. Couplings shall be of wrought iron.
(e) Unless otherwise specified "extra strong" pipe shall be

furnished in random lengths, with plain ends.

15. The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight and free Finish,

from injurious defects.

 346 Specifications tor Wrought-Iron Pipe.

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 16. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the pipe ordered. The
manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reason-
able facilities to satisfy him that the pipe are being furnished in
accordance with these specifications.
(b) When tests and inspection are made at the place of
manufacture, they shall be so conducted as not to interfere
unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
Rejection. 17. Pipe which develop injurious defects in shop working
or application will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be
notified.
Rehearing. 18. Samples tested in accordance with Section 2 (b),
which represent rejected pipe, shall be preserved for two weeks
from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
STAYBOLT IRON.

Serial Designation: A 39-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 39; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1910; Revised, 1912, 1914, 1918.

I. MANUFACTURE.
The iron shall be rolled from a bloom, slabpile or box-
1. Process,

pile,made wholly from reworked puddled pig iron or reworked

knobbled charcoal iron. The puddle mixture and the component
parts of the bloom, slabpile or boxpile shall be free from any
admixture of iron scrap or steel.
2. (a) Bloom. —A bloom is a solid mass of iron that has Definition of

been hammered into a convenient size for rolling.

(b) Slabpile.—A slabpile is built up wholly of flat bars of
iron of the length of the
full pile.

Boxpile. —A boxpile
(c) is a pile, the sides, top and bottom
of which are formed by four flat bars and the interior of which
consists of a number of small bars the full length of the pile.
(d) Iron Scrap. —This term applies only to foreign or bought
scrap and does not include local mill products free from foreign
or bought scrap.

3.
II.

11
CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.
At the option of the purchaser
(347)
and when so specified,
*
Chemical
'
Composition.
 348 Specifications for Staybolt Iron.

the iron shall conform to the following requirement as to chemical

composition:
Manganese not over 0.10 per cent

Check Analyses. 4. (a) An may be made by the purchaser from a

analysis
broken tension specimen representing each lot as specified
test
in Section 9 (a). The chemical composition thus determined
shall conform to the requirement specified in Section 3.
(b) Drillings for analysis shall be so taken as to represent

the entire cross-section of the specimen.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 5. (a) The iron shall conform to the following requirements
as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 48 000 - 52 000

Yield point, min., lb. per sq. in 0.6 tens. str.
Elongation in 8 in., min., per cent 30
Reduction of area, min., per cent 48

(b) The by the drop of the

yield point shall be determined
beam machine. The speed of the cross-head of
of the testing
the machine shall not exceed f in. per minute.
Bend Tests. 6. (a) The test specimen shall bend cold through 180 deg.
flat on itself in both directions, without fracture on the outside
of the bent portion.
(b) Bend tests may be made by pressure or by blows.
Etch Tests.' 7. The cross-section of the test specimen shall be ground or
polished, and etched for a sufficient period to develop the struc-
ture. This test shall show the material to have been rolled from
a bloom, slabpile or boxpile, and to be free from steel.
Test Specimens. 8. All test specimens shall be of the full section of material
as rolled.
Number of Tests. 9. (a) Bars of one size shall be sorted into lots of 100 each.
Two bars shall be selected at random from each lot or fraction
thereof, and tested as 6; but only
specified in Sections 5 and
one of these bars shall be tested as specified in Sections 4
and 7.

(b) If any test specimen from either of the bars originally

l A solution of two parts water, one part concentrated
hydrochloric acid, and one part
concentrated sulfuric acid is recommended for the etch test.
 Serial Designation: A 39-18. 349

selected to represent a lot of material contains surface defects

not visible before testing but visible after testing, or if a tension
test specimen breaks outside the middle third of the gage length,
the individual bar shall be rejected and one retest from a different
bar will be allowed.

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN GAGE.

10. The bars shall be truly round within 0.01 in., and shall Permissible
VariatlonB
not vary more than 0.005 in. above nor more than 0.01 in.
-

below the specified size.

V. FINISH.
11. The bars shall be smoothly rolled and free from slivers, Finish,

depressions, seams, crop ends, and evidences of being burnt.

VI. MARKING.
12. The bars shall be stamped or otherwise marked as Marking,
designated by the purchaser.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

13. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have inspection,

free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the material ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. Tests and
inspection at the place of manufacture shall be made prior to
shipment.
(b) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the accep-
tance or rejection of material in his own laboratory or elsewhere.
Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense of the
purchaser.
(c) All tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
14. (a) If either of the test bars selected to represent a lot Rejection,

does not conform to the requirements specified in Sections 3,5,

6, 7 and 8, the lot will be rejected.
 350 Specifications for Staybolt Iron.

(b) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on tests

made in accordance with Section 13 (b) shall be reported within
fiveworking days from the receipt of samples.
(c) Bars which will not take a clean, sharp thread with

dies in. fair condition, or which develop defects in forging or

machining, will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be
notified.
Rehearing. 15. Samples tested in accordance with Section 13 (b),

which represent rejected material, shall be preserved for two

weeks from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfac-
tion with the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make
claim for a rehearing within that time.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ENGINE-BOLT IRON.

Serial Designation: A 40-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 40; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1912; Revised, 1913, 1918.

I. MANUFACTURE
1. The iron shall be made wholly from puddled iron and Process,

shall be free from any admixture of iron scrap or steel.

2. Iron Scrap. —
This term applies only to foreign or bought
Terms
Definition of

scrap and does not include local mill products free from foreign
-

or bought scrap.

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. (a) The iron shall conform to the following requirements Tension Tests,

as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 50 000 - 54 000

(See Section 4)
Yield point, min., lb. per sq. in 0.6 tens. str.
Elongation in 8 in., min., per cent 25
Reduction of area, " 40

(b) The by the drop of the

yield point shall be determined
beam machine. The speed of the cross-head of the
of the testing
machine shall not exceed I in. per minute.
(351)
 352 Specifications for Engine-Bolt Iron.

Modifications 4. For material over 1 \ sq. in. in sectional area, a deduction

in Tensile
Strength.
of 2000 lb. per sq. in. from the tensile strength specified In
Section 3 shall be made.
Bend Tests. 5. (a) Cold-bend Tests. —
The test specimen shall bend cold
through 180 deg. around a pin the diameter of which is equal
to the diameter of the specimen, without fracture on the outside
of the bent portion.
(b) Hot-bend Tests. —
The test specimen, when heated to a
bright cherry red, shall bend through 180 deg. flat on itself
without fracture on the outside of the bent portion.
(c) Nick-bend Tests. —
The test specimen, when nicked 25
per cent around with a tool having a 60-deg. cutting edge, to
a depth of not less than 8 nor more than 16 per cent of the diame-
ter of the specimen, and broken, shall show a wholly fibrous frac-
ture.
(d) Bend tests may be made by pressure or by blows.
Etch Tests." 6. The cross-section of the test specimen shall be ground
or polished, and etched for a sufficient period to develop the
structure. This test shall show the material to be free from
steel.
Test Specimens. 7. (a) Tension
specimens shall be of the full section of
test
material as rolled, if Otherwise, the specimens shall be
possible.
taken from the material as rolled; for bars 7\ in. or under in
diameter, the axis of the specimen shall coincide with the axis
of the bar; for bars over 2\ in. in diameter, the axis of the
specimen shall be located at any point midway between the
center and surface and shall be parallel to the axis of the bar.
The specimens shall be turned to a diameter of 1 in. for a length
of at least 9 in., with enlarged ends.
(b) Bend and etch test specimens shall be of the full section
of material as rolled; except that for bars over 1§ in. in diameter,
the cold-bend test specimen may be machined to not less than
1 sq. in. in sectional area.
Number of Tests. 8. (a) Bars of one size shall be sorted into lots of 100 each.
Two bars shall be selected at random from each lot or fraction
thereof, and tested as specified in Sections 3 and 5; but only
one of these bars shall be tested as specified in Section 6.

1 A solution of two
parts water, one part concentrated hydrochloric acid, and one part
concentrated sulfuric acid is recommended for the etch test.
 —

Serial Designation: A 40-18. 353

(b) If any test specimen from either of the bars originally

selected to represent a lot of material contains surface defects
not visible before testing but visible after testing, or if a tension
test specimen breaks outside the middle third of the gage length,
the individual bar shall be rejected and one retest from a
different bar will be allowed.

III. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN GAGE.

9. The bars shall conform to the standard limit gages adopted Permissible
Variations
by the Master Car Builders' Association, as given in Table I.
1
-

Table I. Standard Limit Gages.

Nominal Diameter of Bars, Large Size, Small Size, Total

+ End, -End, Variation,
in. in. in.

0.2550 0.2450 0.010

0.3180 0.3070 0.011

tV
0.3S10 0.3690 o.oia

0.4440 0.4310 0.013

tV
0.5070 0.4630 0.014

0.5700 0.6550 0.015

A-
0.6330 0.6170 0.016

0.7585 0.7415 0.017

0.8840 0.8660 0.018

1.0095 0.9905 0.019

1.1350 1.1150 0.020

1.2605 1.2395 0.021

1.3860 1.3640 0.022

1.5115 1.4885 0.028

1.6370 1 6130 024

1.7625 1.7375 0.025

1 8880 1.8620 0.028

Round ban 2 in. in diameter and over aball be rolled to nominal diameter.

IV. FINISH.
10. The bars shall be smoothly rolled and free from slivers, Finish,

depressions, seams, crop ends, and evidences of being burnt.

•Adopted by the Master Car Builders' Association In 1883 and revised In 1911. 6m
Procudints. Master Car Builders* Assoc.. Vol. 49, Part 2. pp. 956-957 (1915).
 354 Specifications for Engine-Bolt Iron.

V. MARKING.
Marking. 11. The bars shall be stamped or otherwise marked as
designated by the purchaser.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION,

inspection. 12. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the material ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. Tests and
inspection at the place of manufacture shall be made prior to
shipment.
(b) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the ac-
ceptance or rejection of material in his own laboratory or else-
where. Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense of
the purchaser.
(c) All tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
Rejection. 13. a ) if either of the test bars selected to represent a lot
(

does not conform to the requirements specified in Sections 3, 4, 5,

and 6, the lot will be rejected.

(b) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on tests
made in accordance with Section 12 (b) shall be reported within
fiveworking days from the receipt of samples.
(c) Bars which develop defects in forging or machining will

be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be notified.

Reheating. 14. Samples tested in accordance with Section 12 (b),
which represent rejected material, shall be preserved for two
weeks from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfac-
tion with the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make
claim for a rehearing within that time.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
REFINED WROUGHT-IRON BARS.

Serial Designation: A 41-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 41; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1912; Revised, 1913, 1918.

I. MANUFACTURE.
1. Refined wrought-iron bars shall be made wholly from Process,
puddled iron, and may consist either of new muck-bar iron or a
mixture of muck-bar iron and scrap, but shall be free from any
admixture of steel.

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

2. (a) The iron shall conform to the following minimum Tension Tests,
requirements as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb per sq. in 48 000

(See Sections 3 and 4)
Yield point, lb. per sq. in 25 000
Elongation in 8 in., per cent 2 2

(See Section 5)

(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam machine. The speed of the cross-head of the
of the testing
machine shall not exceed f in. per minute.
3. For material over 4 sq. in. in sectional area, a reduction Modifications in
Tensile strength.
of 500 lb.per sq. in. from the tensile strength specified in Sec-
 356 Specifications for Refined Wrought-Iron Bars.

tion 2 will be permitted for each additional 2 sq. in., and a pro-
portionate amount of reduction for fractional parts thereof;
provided that the tensile strength shall not be less than 45,000
lb. per sq. in.

Permissible 4. Twenty per cent of the test specimens representing one

Variations in
Tensile Strength.
may show tensile strengths 1000 lb. per sq. in. under or
size
5000 lb. per sq. in. over that specified in Sections 2 and 3; but
no specimen shall show a tensile strength less than 45,000 lb.

per sq. in.

Permissible 5.Twenty per cent of the test specimens representing one
Variations in
Elongation. size may show the following percentages of elongation in 8 in.:
Round Bars.
or over, tested as rolled
§ in. 20 per cent
Under i in., " " " 16 "
Reduced by machining 18 "

Flat Bars.

I in. or over, tested as rolled 18 per cent

Under | in., ' 16 "
Reduced by machining 16 "

Bend Tests. 6. (a) Cold-bend Tests. — Cold-bend tests will be made only
on bars having a nominal area of 4 sq. in. or under, in which
case the test specimen shall bend cold through 180 deg. without
fracture on the, outside of the bent portion, around a pin the
diameter of which is equal to twice the diameter or thickness
of the specimen.
(b) Hot-bend Tests. —The
test specimen, when heated to

a temperature between 1700° and 1800° F., shall bend through

180 deg. without fracture on the outside of the bent portion, as
follows: For round bars under 2 sq. in. in section, flat on it-
self; for round bars 2 sq. in. or over in section and for all flat

bars, around a pin the diameter of which is equal to the diameter

or thickness of the specimen.
(c) Nick-bend Tests. —The when nicked 25
test specimen,
per cent around for round bars, and along one side for flat
bars, with a tool having a 60-deg. cutting edge, to a depth of
not less than 8 nor more than 16 per cent of the diameter or
thickness of the specimen, show not more
and broken, shall
than 10 per cent of the fractured surface to be crystallin.

(d) Bend tests may be made by pressure or by blows.

 Serial Designation: A 41-18. 357

7. The cross-section of the test specimen shall be ground Etch Tests.'

or polished, and etched for a sufficient period to develop the

structure. This test shall show the material to be free from
steel.
8. (a) Tension and bend test specimens shall be of the full Test Specimens.

section of material as rolled, if possible. Otherwise, the speci-

Table I. Standard Limit Gages.

Nominal Diameter of Bars, Large Size, Small Siie, Total

+End, -End, Variation,
in. in. b.

0.2550 0.2450 0.010

f-
0.31S0 0.3070 0.011
tV
t- 0.3810 0.3G90 0.012

0.4440 0.4310 0.013

tV
0.6070 0.4930
I- 0.014

0.5700 0.5550 0.015

0.6330 0.6170 0.018

0.7585 0.7415 0.017

0.8840 0.8660 0.018

1.0095 0.9905 0.019

If 1.1360 1.1150 0.020

f 1.2605 1.2395 0.021

If- 1.3860 1.3640 0.022

If 1.6115 1.4885 0.023

If- 1.6370 1.0130 0.024

If 1.7625 1.7375 0.025

if 1.8880 1.8620 0.026

Round bare 2 in. in diameter and over shall be rolled to nominal diameter.

mens be machined from the material as rolled; the axis

shall
of the specimen shall be located at any point midway between
the center and surface of round bars, or midway between the
center and edge of flat bars, and shall be parallel to the axis
of the bar.
(b) Etch test specimens shall be of the full section of material
as rolled.
9. (a) All bars of one size shall be piled separately. One Number of Testa.
1
A two parts water, one part concentrated hydrochloric
»olution of acid, and one part
concentrated iulfurio acid la recommended for the etch teat.
 358 Specifications tor Reiived Wrought-Iron Bars.

bar from each 100 or fraction thereof will be selected at random

and tested as specified.
(b) If any test specimen from the bar originally selected to

represent a lot of material contains surface defects not visible

before testing but visible after testing, or if a tension test
specimen breaks outside the middle third of the gage length,
the individual bar shall be rejected and one retest from a differ-
ent bar -will be allowed.

III. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN GAGE

Permissible 10. (a) Round bars shall conform to the standard limit gages
Variations.
adopted by the Master Car Builders' Association, as given in
Table L 1

(b) The width or thickness of flat bars shall not vary more

than 2 per cent from that specified.

IV. FINISH.
Finish. ii. The bars shall be smoothly rolled and free from slivers,
depressions, seams, crop ends, and evidences of being burnt.

-
V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.
inspection. 12. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at ail times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to ail parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the material ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. Tests and
inspection at the place of manufacture shall be made prior to
shipment.
(b) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the accept-

ance or rejection of material in his own laboratory or elsewhere.

Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense of the pur-
chaser.
(c) All tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.

1 Adopted
by '•'-- lister Car Builders' Association in 1883 and revised in 1911. See
PromdiHit. Ma=*.er Car Builier:" Assoc., Vol. 49. Part 2. pp. 956-957 (1915).
 Serial Designation: A 41 - 18. 359

13. (a) All bars of one size will be rejected if the test speci- Rejection,

mens representing that size do not conform to the requirements

specified.
(b) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on tests
made in accordance with Section 12 (b) shall be reported within
fiveworking days from the receipt of samples.
14. Samples tested in accordance with Section 12 (b), Rehearing,

which represent rejected material, shall be preserved for two

weeks from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfac-
tion with the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make
claim for a rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
WROUGHT-IRON PLATES.
Serial Designation: A 42-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 42; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1913; Revised, 1918.

Material 1. These, specifications cover two classes of wrought-iron

Covered. plates,as determined by the kind of material used in their
manufacture, namely:
Class A, as denned in Section 2 (b);
Class B, as denned in Section 2 (c).

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 2. (a) All plates shall be rolled from piles entirely free from
any admixture of steel.
(b) Piles for Class A plates shall be made from puddle bars
made wholly from pig iron and such scrap as emanates from
rolling the plates.
(c) Piles for Class B plates shall be made from puddle bars
made wholly from pig iron or from a mixture of pig iron and cast-
iron scrap, together with wrought-iron scrap.

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 3. (a) The plates shall conform to the following mini-
mum requirements as to tensile properties:
(360)
 Serial Designation: A 42-18. 361

Class A Cxass B.

Properties Considered
6 in. to 24 in.. Over 24 in. 6 in. to 21 in., Over 24 in.
incl., Ito90 in.,inol., incl., to90in.,incl.,
in width. in width. in width. in width.

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in ... 49 000 48 000 48 000 47 000
26 000 26 000 26 000 26 000
16 12 14 10

(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the

beam of the testing machine. The speed of the cross-head
of the machine shall not exceed f in. per minute.
4. For plates under xV in. in thickness, a deduction of 1 Modifications in
from the percentages of elongation specified in Section 3 shall be EloQ gation.
made for each decrease of xV thickness below xV m m - m «

5. (a) Cold-bend Tests. —

The test specimen shall bend cold Bend Tents,
through 90 deg. without fracture on the outside of the bent por-
tion, as follows: For Class A plates, around a pin the diameter
of which is equal to 1§ times the thickness of the specimen;
and for Class B plates, around a pin the diameter of which is
equal to 3 times the thickness of the specimen.
(b) Nick-bend Tests. —
The test specimen, when nicked on
one side and broken, shall show for Class A plates a wholly
fibrous fracture, and for Class B plates, not more than 10 per
cent of the fractured surface to be crystallin.
6. Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken from Test specimens,
the finished plates and shall be of the full thickness of plates
as rolled. The the specimen shall be
longitudinal axis of
parallel to the direction inwhich the plates are rolled.
7. (a) One tension, one cold-bend and one nick-bend test Number of Tests,

shall be made for each variation in thickness of £ in. and not less
than one test for every ten plates as rolled.
(b) If any test specimen fails to conform to the require-

ments specified by reason of an apparent local defect, a retest

shall be made. If the retest also fails, the plates represented
by such test will be rejected.

III. FINISH.
8. The plates shall be straight, smooth and free from cinder Finish,

spots and holes, injurious flaws, buckles, blisters, seams and

laminations.
 362 Specifications for Wrought-Iron Plates.

IV. MARKING.
Marking. 9. The plates shall be stamped or otherwise marked as
designated by the purchaser.

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

Inspection. 10. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the plates ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the plates are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. Tests and
inspection at the place of manufacture shall be made prior to
shipment.
(b) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the accep-
tance or rejection of plates at his own laboratory or else

where Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense of the

purchaser
(c) All tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
Rejection. 11.Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on tests
made in accordance with Section 10 (b) shall be reported within
five working days from the receipt of samples.

Rehearing. 12. Samples tested in accordance with Section 10 (b),

which represent rejected be preserved for two

plates, shall
weeks from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfac-
tion with the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make
claim for a rehearing within that time.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
IRON AND STEEL CHAIN.

Serial Designation: A 56- 18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 56; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915; Revised, 1918.

In view of the abnormal difficulty in obtaining materials in time of war,

the rejection limits for sulfur in all steels and for phosphorus in acid steels
shall be raised 0.01 per cent above the values given in these specifications.
This shall be effective during the period of the war and until otherwise ordered
by the Society.

1. (a) These specifications cover two classes of iron and Material

one class of steel chain, namely: Covered.

Class A, wrought-iron chain, is of the quality generally

sold under the trade designation of "Crane Chain";
Class B, wrought-iron or steel chain, is of the quality gen-
erally sold under the trade designation of "Ordinary Coil
Chain."
(b) The purposes for which these classes are generally used
are as follows:
Class A, for slings, railway cranes, hoists and other places
where a failure would imperil human life;

Class B, for ordinary service.

I. MATERIAL AND MANUFACTURE.

2. (a) Class A, Iron Chain, shall be manufactured
from Procesi.
wrought iron which has been made wholly from puddled iron,
free from any admixture of steel or scrap containing steel.

(363)
 .. :

364 Specifications for Iron and Steel Chain.

(b) Class B, Iron Chain, shall be manufactured from a

grade of wrought iron conforming to the requirements of the

Standard Specifications for Refined Wrought-Iron Bars (Serial
Designation: A 41) of the American Society for Testing
Materials.
(c) Class B, Steel Chain, shall be manufactured from steel
made by the open-hearth process, which shall be ductile and of
satisfactory welding quality.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 3. The wrought iron and steel used in the manufacture of

Composition.
chain of the respective classes referred to in this paragraph
shall conform to the following requirements as to chemical
composition
Class A. Class B.
Iron. Iron. Steal.

Manganese . .not over 0. 10 per cent

Phosphorus .... not over 03 per cent
.

Sulfur .... " " 0.05 "

Check 4. (a) Analyses may be made by the purchaser from fin-

Analyses.
ished chain. The chemical composition thus determined shall
conform to the requirements specified in Section 3.

(b) Drillings be taken with a drill the

for analysis shall
diameter of which is approximately one-half the diameter of
the bar from which drillings are being taken, and the cuttings
shall be taken through the bar from surface to surface.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Proof Tests. 5. (a) by subjecting it to
All chain shall be proof-tested
the loads shown and when so tested it shall stand
in Table I,

these loads without showing any defects.

(b) When requested, the manufacturer shall furnish a
certificate of proof-test to the purchaser or his representative.
Tension Tests. 6.Samples from finished chain shall conform to the mini-
mum requirements as to tensile properties specified in Table II,
the elongation being determined in a gage length of from 12
to 18 in., to the nearest link.
 Serial Designation: A 56-18. 365

7. Tension test specimens shall consist of a length not Test Specimens,

less than 2 ft. cut from the finished chain.

8. One tension test shall be made to represent each 200 ft. Number of Tests,

of chain or fraction thereof ordered.

Table I.—Proof Tests.

Proof-Tat Loads, lb.

Diameter of Bar, In. Class A. Class B.

Iron. Iron. Steel

1 1 850 1 600 1660

A 2 000 2 400 2 660

| 4 100 8 400 1760

A 6 600 4 700 6100

i 7 800 6100 6 700

x 200 7 800 8 300

ft 11600 600 10500

u 13 400 11600 12 500

1 16600 13 800 16 100

u 19 400 15 800 17 600

22 500 18 800 20 600

1
H 25 800 21200 23 600

20 400 24 500 26 000

iA 83 200 27 600 80 400

il 87 200 81000 84100

i\ 46 000 88 800 42100

ift 66000

ii 66 200

ift 80 100

i* 82 500

i* 05 000

% 108 000

9. If the tension test conform to the requirements

fails to Retests.

pecified in Section 6, two additional tension tests may be made,

each of which shall conform to the requirements of Section 6.
 —

366 Specifications for Iron and Steel Chain.

IV. STANDARD WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS.

Nominal 10. (a) The nominal weights and maximum lengths of 100
Weights and
Maximum j^ f c jj a j n var i us sizes are given
>
f
° in Table III.
_

Lengths. (b) The weight of the chain shall not vary more than 3

Table II. Tensile Properties.

Class A. Class B.

Diameter of Bar, in. Iron. Iron. 8teeL

Breaking Elongation, Breaking Elongation, Breaking Elongation,

Load. lb. per cent. Load, lb. per cent. Load, lb. per cent.

3 300
I- 8 700 8 000

A- 5 800 4 800 5 300

8 200 6800 7 600

T6- 11200 9 400 10 200

14 600 12 200 13 400

-fi-
18 400 15 600- 17 000
5
23 000 19 200 21000
11
16- 26 800 23 200 25 000

33 000 27 600 80 200

Xe j
38800 31600 35 200

i I 45 000 37 600 41200

16.
16- 51600 42 400 47 000

68 800 49 000 53 800

itV 66 400 55 200 60 800

ii. 74 400 62 000 68 200

li- 92 000 76 600 84 200

lt... 112 000

li- 132 400

lt.. 138 200

if., 165 000

if. 100 000

216 000

per cent over nor more than 5 per cent under the nominal
weight specified in Table III. Excess weight over the permis-
sible variation of 3 per cent will not be paid for.
 Serial Designation: A 56-18. 367

(c) The length shall be measured after the chain has been
proof-tested, shall be measured to the inside of the end links.
and
(d) In determining the length of the chain, a load not
exceeding 10 per cent of the proof load specified in Table I
shall be applied to take up the slack.

Table III. Maximum Lengths and Nominal Weights.

Maximum Lengths Nominal Weights

of 100 Links, in. per 100 ft., lb
Diameter of Bar, in.

Class A. Class B.- Class A. Class B.

102
I- 83 78

A 100 114.7 125 110

! 113 125 175 166

125 137.5 220 205

i •• 140 150 280 265

2
9
T$ 150 106 360 825
5
8- 170 178 450 425
li 1S5 195 640 520
16
3
4- 200 213 625 610
13. 213 225 745 725
16
7
£• 225 238 850 810

If 238 250 960 928

i... 250 263 1075 1028

265 295 1240 1228

280 325 1410 1350

315 353.5 1750 1650

if. 355 2100

*. 390 2450

if. 425 2875

if. 475 3200

»f.. 525 3640

2... 575 4200

V. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

11. (a) The chain shall be free from injurious defects and Workmanship
and in,,h
shall have a workmanlike finish. The diameter at the welds
'

shall not be preceptibly less than the diameter of the bar and,
 368 Specifications for Iron and Steel Chain.

unless otherwise specified, shall not exceed the diameter of the

bar by more than 25 per cent.
(b) Prior to testing and inspection the chain shall be free
from paint or any other coating which would tend to conceal
defects.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION,

inspection. 12. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall
have free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the
purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the chain ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable him that the chain
facilities to satisfy is being fur-
nished in accordance with these specifications. Tests and
inspection at the place of manufacture shall be made prior to
shipment.
(b) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the ac-
ceptance or rejection of the chain at his own laboratory or else-
where. Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense of
the purchaser.
(c) Tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
Rejection. 13. Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on tests
made in accordance with Section 12 (b) shall be reported within
fiveworking days from receipt of samples.
Rehearing. 14. Samples tested in accordance with Section 12 (b),

which represent rejected chain, shall be preserved for two weeks

from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
WROUGHT-IRON ROLLED OR FORGED BLOOMS
AND FORGINGS FOR LOCOMOTIVES
AND CARS.

Serial Designation: A 73-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 73; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1917; Adopted, 1918.

1. These specifications cover two classes of wrought-iron Material

Covered
blooms and forgings for locomotives and cars, as determined by -

the kind of material used in their manufacture, namely:

Class A , as defined in Section 2 (a)

Class B, as defined in Section 2 (b).

I. MANUFACTURE.
2. (a) Class A. —Blooms and forgings of class A shall be Material,

made wholly from puddled pig iron. The puddle mixture and
the component parts of the piles from which the blooms and
forgings are made, shall be free from any admixture of iron scrap
or steel. The term "iron scrap" applies only to foreign or
bought scrap, and does not include the manufacturer's own scrap
from the same product and of equal quality.
(369)
 370 Specifications for Wrought-Iron Forgings.

(b) Class B —
Blooms and forgings of class B shall be made
from selected No. 1 wrought-iron scrap, or a mixture of such
scrap and the puddled iron described in Paragraph (a).
Process. 3. Cross piling will not be permitted in either class of

forging. In the final pile for the bloom or forging, all bars and
slabs shall be of the full length of the pile.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 4. The iron shall conform to the following requirement as
Composition.
to chemical composition:
Class A Class B
Manganese, max., per cent 0. 07 0.15

Check Analyses. 5. (a) An analysis may be made by the purchaser from

each specimen used for the tension test. The chemical com-
position thus determined shall conform to the requirement
specified in Section 4.
(b) Drillings or chips for analysis shall be so taken as to
represent the full cross-section of the specimen.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tensile Teats. 6. (a) The iron shall conform to the following minimum
requirements as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 45 000

Yield point, lb. per sq. in 0.5 tens. str.
Elongation in 4 in., per cent 22
Reduction of area, per cent 30

(b) The fracture shall be free from crystallization.

(c) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the
beam of the testing machine. The speed of the cross-head of
the machine shall not exceed f in. per minute.
Etch Tests. 7. The entire cross-section of the prolongation of the bloom
or forging shall be ground or polished, and shall show no seams
or flaws of injurious character. It shall then be etched and, in
class A blooms or forgings, shall show freedom from steel.
Tension Test 8. (a) Tension test specimens shall be taken from a full-
Specimens. size prolongation of the bloom or forging. The axis of the speci-
1
A solution of two parts water, one part concentrated hydrochloric acid, and one part
concentrated sulfuric acid is recommended for the etch test.
 Serial Designation: A 73-18. 371

men shall be located at any point midway between the center

and surface of the bloom or forging, and shall be parallel to the
axis of the bloom or forging.
(b) The specimens shall conform to the dimensions shown

in Fig. 1. The ends shall e of a form to fit the holders of the

testing machine in such a way that the load shall be axial.
9. The number of tests and retests, if necessary, shall^be Number of Tests,

agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser.

Padws I

not less , .,
than£.. \

,1
ft

N
K 4~Gage Length H
Note : — The Gage Length, Parallel Portions and Fillets shall be
as Shown, but the Ends may be of any Form which will
Fit the Holders of the Testing Machine.

Fig. 1.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

10. The blooms and forgings shall conform to the sizes workmanship,
and shapes specified by the purchaser. When centered, 60-deg.
centers with clearance drilled for points shall be used.
1 1 The blooms and forgings shall be free from injurious Finish,
defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.

V. MARKING.
12. Identification marks shall be legibly stamped on each Marking,
bloom or forging and on each test specimen. The purchaser
shall indicate the location of such identification marks.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

13. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have inspection,
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
 372 Specifications tor Wrought-Iron Forgings.

works which concern the manufacture of the blooms or forgings

ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of
cost, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the blooms or
forgings are being furnished in accordance with these specifica-
tions. Tests and inspection at the place of manufacture shall
be made prior to shipment.
(b) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the accep-

tance or rejection of the blooms or forgings in his own labora-

tory or elsewhere. Such tests, however, shall be made at the
expense of the purchaser.
(c) Tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to

interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.

Rejection. 14. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
tests made in accordance with Section 13 (b) shall be reported
within five working days from the receipt of samples.
(b) Blooms and forgings which show injurious defects while
being finished by the purchaser will be rejected, and the manu-
facturer shall be notified.
Rehearing. 15. Samples tested in accordance with Section 13 (b), which
represent rejected blooms or forgings, shall be preserved for two
weeks from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfac-
tion with the results of the tests the manufacturer may make
claim for a rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
FOUNDRY PIG IRON. 1

Serial Designation: A 43-09.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 43; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1904; Revised, 1909.

Percentages and Variations.

In order that there may be uniformity in grading, the follow-
ing percentages and variations shall be used. 2
Silicon. Sulfur. Total Carbon,
Per cent. Code. Per cent. Code. Per cent. Code.
1.00 La 0.04 Sa 3.00 Ca
1.50 Le 0.05 Se 3.20 Ce
2.00 Li 0.06 Si 3.40 Ci
2.50 Lo 0.07 So 3.60 Co
3.00 Lu 0.08 Su 3.80 Cu
3.50 Ly 0.09 Sy
0.10 Sh
(0.25 allowed either way.) (Maximum.) (Minimum.)

1
It is recommended that foundry pig iron be bought by analysis, and that whan so
bought these Standard Specifications be used.
1 These specifications do not advise that all five elements be specified in all contracts

for pig iron, but do recommend that when these elements are specified, the given percentages
shall be used.

(373)
374 Specifications for Foundry Pig Iron.

Manganese. Phosphorus.
Per cent. Code. Per cent. Code.
0.20 Ma 0.20 Pa
0.40 Me 0.40 Pe
0.60 Mi 0.60 Pi
0.80 Mo 0.80 Po
1.00 Mu 1.00 Pu
1.25 My 1.25 Py
1.50 Mh 1.50 Ph
(0.20 allowed either way.) (0.15 allowed either way.)

f the use of above coding: The word Li-se-ca-mt

Sil. Sul. Carb. Mang. Phos.

2.00 0. 05 3.00 0.80 0.60

with variations as allowed.

Percentages of any element specified half way between the

above shall be designated by the addition of the letter to the X
next lower symbol.
Example. — PeX indicates Phosphorus 0.50 with " allowed " variations
(0.15) up and down.

In the case of phosphorus and manganese, the percentages

may be used as maximum or minimum figures, but unless so
specified they will be considered to include the variations above
given.

Sampling and Analysis.

Each car load, or its equivalent, shall be considered as a
unit in sampling.
One sample
shall be taken to every four tons in the car,
and be so chosen from different parts of the car as to
shall
represent as nearly as possible the average quality of the iron.
Drillings shall be taken so as to fairly represent the compo-
sition of the pig as cast.
An equal weight of the drillings from each pig shall be thor-
oughly mixed to make up the sample for analysis.
In case of dispute, the sampling and analysis shall be made
by an independent chemist, mutually agreed upon, if practicable,
at the time the contract is made.
It is recommended that the standard methods of the
American Foundrymen's Association be used for analysis.
 Serial Designation: A 43-09. 375

Gravimetric methods shall be used for the analysis of sulfur,

unless otherwise specified in the contract.
The cost of re-sampling and re-analysis shall be borne by
the party in error.

Base or Quoting Price.

For market quotations, an iron of 2.00 per cent in silicon
(with variations of 0.25 either way) and 0.05 per cent in sulfur
(maximum) shall be taken as the base.

THE AMERICAN FOUNDRYMEN'S ASSOCIATION SUGGESTS THE

FOLLOWING CLAUSES FOR THE PURPOSE OF ADJUSTING
DISPUTES BETWEEN BUYER AND SELLER.
Base Table. — The following table may be filled out, and
may become a part of the contract. "B," or Base, represents
the price agreed upon for a pig iron running 2.00 per cent in
silicon (with allowed variation of 0.25 either way) and under
0.05 per cent in sulfur; "C" is a constant differential to be
determined at the time the contract is made.
This table is for settling any differences which may arise
in filling a contract, as explained under penalties and allow-
ances, and may be used to regulate the price of a grade of pig
iron which the purchaser desires, and the seller agrees, to sub-
stitute for the one originally specified.
Silicon percentages allow 0.25 variation either way. Sulfur
percentages are maximum.
Sulfur,
per cent. Silicon, per cent.
3.25 3.00 2.75 2.50 2.25 2.00 1.75 1 50 1 25 1.00
04 B+ 6C B+5C B+4C B4-3C B+2C B+1C B B-1C B-2C B-3C
05 B+5C B+4C B+3C B+2C B+1C B B-1C B-2C B-3C B-4C
06... B+4C B+3C B+2C B+1C B B-1C B-2C B-3C B-4C B-5C
07... B+3C B-I-2C B+1C B B-1C B-2C B-3C B-4C B-5C B-6C
0.08.... B+2C B+1C B B-1C B-2C B-3C B-4C B-5C B-6C B-7C
0.09... . B+1C B B-1C B-2C B-3C B-4C B-5C B-6C B-7C B-8C
0.10.... B B-1C B-2C B-3C B-4C B-5C B-6C B-7C B-8C B-OC

Penalties. — In case the iron, when delivered, does not con-

form to the specifications, the buyer shall have the option of
either refusing the iron, or accepting it on the basis shown in the
376 Specifications for Foundry Pig Iron.

above table, which must be filled out at the time the contract
ismade.
—
Allowances. In case the furnace cannot, for any good
reason, deliver the iron as specified at the time delivery is due,
the purchaser may at his option accept any other analysis which
the furnace can deliver, the price to be determined by the base
table above, which must be filled out at the time the contract
is made.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CAST-IRON PIPE AND SPECIAL CASTINGS.

Serial Designation: A 44- 04.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 44; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1904.

Description of Pipes.
Section 1 The pipes shall be made with hub and spigot
.

joints, and shall accurately conform to the dimensions given in

Tables I and II. They shall be straight and shall be true circles
in section, with their inner and outer surfaces concentric, and
shall be of the specified dimensions in outside diameter. They
shall be at least 12 ft. in length, exclusive of socket. For pipes
of each size from 4 in. to 24 in., inclusive, there shall be two
standards of outside diameter, and for pipes from 30 in. to 60 in.,
inclusive, there shall be four standards of outside diameter, as
shown by Table II.
All pipes having the same outside diameter shall have the
same inside diameter at both ends. The inside diameter of the
lighter pipes of each standard outside diameter shall be gradually
increased for a distance of about 6 in. from each end of the
pipe so as to obtain the required standard thickness and weight
for each size and class of pipe.
Pipes whose standard thickness and weight are intermediate
077)
 z . : '

I 57z:~:azz:s5

"

::

jS
•

_ zz
' ' "
. : ' : :.

1 '

MB 1 I :
Z ';^r_ .

L
i

i l | -
-

1 15 . X :
•:.•

- 5-1 -. i: : x :
;
.
;

'
-:
i ,-: * x . : *: :

1
:-: •

t X 1.5 : 4-: •_w

"
:: :i: i X 1.5 : x :
:

v "
:-: -
! .
-
1 .
"
:
•

"
:: t- t :i 1 : : :•: :

:: -i -
. . 1 , i:
L5 : x : x
-. i— u .
-
t X I_5 : -x : a:

.
'

.- i
- ~ X i_» : x
-:
-
- s x i X 1 : : : !.i

,
- -
i
-
-
4 :i: 1.5 : x X
.-: ! -
- - -
.
" : i : x
:i :- i
i x . . X :
"•:

"'
.
. .
•
i X 1 : x x
'

:-: . . . .
- -
i.n : :.:

:
•.-: - .. .- 1 1.X5 . i: : :i:

. :-: .. - .
- -
.
"'
; x :
:-.

.- - -: . I
. . 1 . :i: : . : ..:

.- .
.' '.
B -
t :i: ; x ; x . .:

30 .
- -
- - -
;
•'
; x 1.15
: :i ; x : :i
•'
: -
-
; •
. : ::

: .
"- - -
: :•: J X : x
'

I -
1 . i: : :• : ..;

:- 1 i . ,: : x <- :

36 :
'
-
. i: ] :: : x
'

-.' - -.: ••:

: . I : :i: : :

B . -.: . i ; x : •;: : t:

-.
' '

: :i: l X : ;.:

'

':
B : 1 ; i; : *: :

: -
: x ; :c ; x : I.:

- .
:.
'' : x ; x : , : x
 —

Serial Designation: A 44-04. 379

Table I. (Continued.)

Diam. of Sockets. Depth or Sockets.

Nominal Actual
Diam.. Classes. Outside A B C
Diam., Special Special
in. Pipe, Pipe,
in. Castings, Castings,
in. in.
in. in.

48 B 50.80 51.80 51.80 5.00 5.00 2.00 3.30 1.65

48 C 51.40 52.40 52.40 5.00 5.00 2 00 3.80 1.95
48 D 51.98 52.98 52.98 5.00 5.00 2.00 4 20 2.20
51 A 56.66 57.66 5.50 5.50 2.25 3.20 1.60
54 B 57.10 58.10 58.10 5.50 5.50 2.25 3.60 1.80
54 C 57.80 58.80 58.80 5.50 5.50 2.25 4.00 2.15
54 D 58.40 59.40 59.40 5.50 5.50 2.25 4.40 2.45
60 A 62.80 63.80 63.80 5.50 5.50 2.25 3.40 1.70
60 B 63.40 64.40 64.40 5.50 5 50 2.25 3.70 1.90
60 C 64.20 65.20 65.20 5.50 5.50 2.25 4.20 2.25
60 D 64.82 65.82 65.82 5.50 5.50 2.25 4.70 2.60

between the Table II shall be made of the same out-

classes in
side diameter as the next heavier class. Pipes whose standard
thickness and weight are less than shown by Table II shall be
made of the same outside diameter as the Class A pipes, and
pipes whose thickness and weight are more than shown by Table
II shall be made of the same outside diameter as the Class D
pipes.
For pipes 4 in. to 12 in., inclusive, one class of special
castings shall be furnished, made from Class D pattern. Those
having spigot ends shall have outside diameters of spigot ends
midway between the two standards of outside diameter as shown
by Table II, and shall be tapered back for a distance of 6 in.
For pipes from 14 in. to 24 in., inclusive, two classes of special
castings shall be furnished, Class B special castings with Classes
A and B pipes, and Class D special castings with Classes C and
D pipes, the former to be stamped "AB" and the latter to be
stamped "CD." P'or pipes 30 in. to 60 in., inclusive, four
classes of special castings shall be furnished, one for each class
of pipe, and shall be stamped with the letter of the class to which
they belong.

Allowable Variation in Diameter of Pipes and Sockets.

Section 2. Especial care shall be taken to have the sockets
of the required size. The sockets and spigots will be tested by
circular gages, and no pipe will be re< rived which is defective in
380 Specifications for Cast-Iron Pipe.

Ijs-i
•3^ <u J o o
-* CO o CI <c* CO oO
8 s CO
CO
CO * 98 3 8

J3
g o o o a o o o o e Q o o s § o
s CO
CO
•*
CI
o O
CI
iO
iO a o
o CO
CO
s Q o o CO
c» CO g -j-

S3 s
^1
eo CI CO us r~ CO CM CO a
>-)
a Q.

og 5
.EP
o CO CO r~ O CO CO r~ eo r~ o o o o t^ CO
WW o o o
£ O a
US CO io co 00 ,_; CO CO iO cCj »* CO
o CO CO o •o CM C) CO •^ CO
E
o CO CO •o r» CO
•"* '-, *-' eo CO -ct> CO co o co
CO us
»o A
Jf y-i *-* r-i 9
Uo
o
rf
-1

•"* CO
t~
CO
•a
iO
us
o
so
co
CO
US
t»
CI
CO
O0
OO
CO
CO
CO
o CO
»<
t»
CO
OO
CO
CO
r~
CO
CO
CO
CC
co
CO
it* o o o O o o o e C) eo

.a o a
ooCO
>o
CM
o
iO
o o
o o •

CI
o o
o o
o o
iO
a
o o
'O
o
CO
o
o o
o o
o
bo CM xf CO 00 -«< r- us CO O0 IO co CO
h a C) eo CO * CO 00 o " CO
" CO
£ O. 3 '"

d B su
'5 eo CO H CO r- t^. CO o CO eo o 00 r~ CO l~ t-
°ai E& o CO
CM
CO
CO
CJ
o o
C"
^
o»
CO CO o
I-
CO
o p> o
o US
«*
CO CO
o p^^
1 M C) CI "* a t^ o "J"
CO
"C"

^9* « - 3
no
eo
£ "*
B J * >o CO
CO CM CO ** o t^ CI
OS o o
J* CO •* o g
gM iO co CO
o o o O O o o o o
OO O0 CI CO >o r^ OS
CM

-a o o t~
o CO iO CO o o oo o o oo o
o o o
o o
a
CO
CM
o
<# co
CO CO
o>
CO
CI
o
iO
o
oo 00 o 1" o o
ceo
o <M CO
M c< CI ~* >o f- o> CO
a. 1 s
"- «
rt g

.si
fflHto r- CO iO CO *H us o o o CO CO CO r~ o CO eo
m B B £ CO f- CI CI o o iO CO CO o "K
CO M< CO OO o
""'
CI
rt
O
*"' rt
CO
eo
CO
CO
iO
•<5H
en
iO
'O
t^
CO
CO
o
Pc
^
O M
00
-* OT USoo
TH
"CH us
t«
•o
(M
CO
CO o
t-
us
t~
o
co
a
CO
CO
o
CO' '-'
00
CI
CJ
-*
CO
us CO
O o o O o o o o o o

J O o
-*t-
us 'O
CO
o
r~
o
r~
o
o o
US
p
C3
o
us
o
o 8 o
IO
o
o s o
fc£i CM CO uo CO CO o US CO ~r r~ o co g
h ct CO * CO CO CO
rt
Q. .-3

d g
.£P
^li 1 o
O CO CO ** o CO CO eo o a r- r- IO t^ o r-
.8 O o o CI r~ OS CO o CI CO o CO
se :
E=4 CO CO <0 >o t- CO o CI o 3 eo
o>
CO >o
CO
O o
CO a
"-"co
«*
eo
5 CO 3 S IO o
CO 3 CO to eo CO o
CD
CM CO
a
CO

IP © o O o o o o o o o o o ^ «-4 *""* "*

o o o s o
mina mete
CO CO CI <# CO as co CI 00
in.
•"C*
3 CO CO CO

S5* -Q
 Serial Designation: A 44-04. 381

joint room from any cause. The diameters of the sockets and
the outside diameters of the bead ends of the pipes shall not vary
from the standard dimensions by more than 0.06 in. for pipes
16 in. or less in diameter; 0.08 in. for 18-in., 20-in. and 24-in.
pipes; 0.10 in. for 30-in., 36-in. and 42-in. pipes; 0.12 in. for
48-in. pipes; and 0.15 in. for 54-in. and 60-in. pipes.

Allowable Variation in Thickness.

Section 3. For pipes whose standard thickness is less than

1 in., the thickness of metal in the body of the pipe shall not be

more than 0.08 in. less than the standard thickness; and for
pipes whose standard thickness is 1 in. or more, the variation
shall not exceed 0.10 in., except that for spaces not exceeding
8 in. in length in any direction, variations from the standard
thickness of 0.02 in. in excess of the allowance above given shall
be permitted.
For special castings of standard patterns a variation of 50
per cent greater than allowed for straight pipe shall be permitted.

Defective Spigots May be Cut.

Section 4. Defective spigot ends on pipes 12 in. or more
in diameter may be cut off in a lathe, and a half-round wrought-
iron band shrunk into a groove cut in the end of the pipe. Not
more than 12 per cent of the total number of accepted pipes of
each size shall be cut and banded, and no pipe shall be banded
which is less than 1 1 ft. in length, exclusive of the socket.
In case the length of a pipe differs from 12 ft., the standard
weight of the pipe given in Table II shall be modified in accord-
ance therewith.

Special Castings.
Section 5. All special castings shall be made in accordance
with the cuts and the dimensions given in the table forming a part
of these specifications.
The diameters of the sockets and the external diameters
of the bead ends of the special castings shall not vary from the
standard dimensions by more than 0.12 in. for castings 16 in.
or less in diameter; 0.15 in. for 18-in., 20-in. and 24-in. pipes;
0.20 in. for 30-in., 36-in. and 42-in. pipes; and 0.24 in. for 48-in.,
382 Specifications for Cast-Iron Pipe.

54-in. and 60-in. pipes. These variations apply only to special

castings made from standard patterns.
The flanges on all manhole castings and manhole covers
shall be faced true and smooth, and drilled to receive bolts of the
sizes given in the tables. The manufacturer shall furnish and
deliver all on the manhole covers, the bolts to be
bolts for bolting
of the sizes shown on plans and made of the best quality of mild
steel, with hexagonal heads and nuts and sound, well-fitting
threads.

Marking.
Section 6. Every pipe and special casting shall have dis-
tinctly castupon it the initials of the maker's name. When cast
especially to order, each pipe and special casting larger than
4 in. may also have cast upon it figures showing the year in which
it was cast and a number signifying the order in point of time in

which it was cast, the figures denoting the year being above and
the number below, thus:
1901 1901 1901

1 2 3

etc., also any initials, not exceeding four, which may be required
by the purchaser. The letters and figures shall be cast on the
outside and shall be not less than 2 in. in length and £ in. in
relief for pipes 8 in. in diameter and larger. For smaller sizes of
pipes the letters may be 1 in. in length. The weight and the
class letter shall be conspicuously painted in white on the inside
of each pipe and special casting after the coating has become
hard.

Allowable Percentage of Variation in Weight.

Section7. No pipe shall be accepted the weight of which

shall be than the standard weight by more than 5 per cent
less
for pipes 16 in. or less in diameter, and 4 per cent for pipes
more than 16 in. in diameter; and no excess above the standard
weight of more than the given percentages for the several sizes
shall be paid for. The total weight to be paid for shall not exceed
for each size and class of pipe received the sum of the standard
weights of the same number of pieces of the given size and class
by more than 2 per cent.
 Serial Designation: A 44-04. 383

No be accepted the weight of which

special casting shall
shall be than the standard weight by more than 10 per cent
less
for pipes 12 in. or less in diameter, and 8 per cent for larger
sizes, except that curves, Y-pieces and breeches pipe may be 12
per cent below the standard weight, and no excess above the
standard weight of more than the above percentages for the
several sizes will be paid for. These variations apply only to
castings made from the standard patterns.

Quality of Iron.
Section All pipes and special castings shall be made
8.

of cast iron ofgood quality, and of such character as shall make

the metal of the castings strong, tough and of even grain, and
soft enough to satisfactorily admit of drilling and cutting. The
metal shall be made without any admixture of cinder iron or
other inferior metal, and shall be remelted in a cupola or air
furnace.

Tests of Materials.
Section 9. Specimen bars of the metal used, each being
26 in. long by 2 in.wide and 1 in. thick, shall be made without
charge as often as the engineer may direct, and, in default of
definite instructions, the contractor shall make and test at least
one bar from each heat or run of metal. The bars, when placed
flat-wise upon supports 24 in. apart and loaded in the center,
shall, for pipes 12 in. or less in diameter, support a load of 1900
lb. and show a deflection of not less than 0.30 in. before break-

ing; and for pipes of sizes larger than 12 in., they shall support
a load of 2000 lb. and show a deflection of not less than 0.32 in.
The contractor shall have the right to make and break three
bars from each heat or run of metal, and the test shall be based
upon the average results of the three bars. Should the dimen-
sions of the bars differ from those above given, a proper allow-
ance therefor shall be made in the results of the tests.

Casting of Pipes.
Section 10. The straight pipes shall be cast in dry sand
molds in a vertical position. Pipes 16 in. or less in diameter
384 Specifications for Cast-Iron Pipe.

shallbe cast with the hub end up or down, as specified in the

proposal. Pipes 18 in. or more in diameter shall be cast with
the hub end down.
The pipes shall not be stripped or taken from the pit while
showing color of heat, but shall be left in the flasks for a sufficient
length of time to prevent unequal contraction by subsequent
exposure.

Quality of Castings.
Section 11. The pipes and special castings shall be
smooth, free from scales, lumps, blisters, sand holes and defects
of every nature which unfit them for the use for which they are
intended. No plugging or filling will be allowed.

Cleaning and Inspection.

Section 12. All pipes and special castings shall be thor-
oughly cleaned and subjected to a careful hammer inspection.
No casting shall be coated unless entirely clean and free from
rust, and approved in these respects by the engineer immediately
before being dipped.

Coating.
Section 13. Every pipe and special casting shall be coated
inside and out with coal-tar pitch varnish. The varnish shall be
made from coal tar. To this material sufficient oil shall be
added to make a smooth coating, tough and tenacious when
cold, and not brittle nor with any tendency to scale off.
Each casting shall be heated to a temperature of 300° F.
immediately before it is dipped, and shall possess not less than
this temperature at the time it is put in the vat. The ovens in
which the pipes are heated shall be so arranged that all portions
of the pipe shall be heated to an even temperature. Each cast-
ing shall remain in the bath at least five minutes.
The varnish shall be heated to a temperature of 300° F.
(or less if the engineer shall so order), and shall be maintained
at this temperature during the time the casting is immersed.
Fresh pitch and oil shall be added when necessary to keep
the mixture at the proper consistency, and the vat shall be
emptied of its contents and refilled with fresh pitch when
 ,

Serial Designation: A 44-04. 385

deemed necessary by the engineer. After being coated, the

pipes shall be carefully drained of the surplus varnish. Any
pipe or special casting that is to be re-coated shall first be thor-
oughly scraped and cleaned.

Hydrostatic Test.
Section 14. When the coating has become hard, the
straight pipes shall be subjected to a proof by hydrostatic pres-
sure and, if required by the
engineer, they shall also be sub-
jected to a hammer under this pressure.
test
The pressure to which the different sizes and classes of
pipes shall be subjected are as follows:

20-In. Diameter Less than 20-In.

'

and Larger, Diameter,

lb. per 6q. in. lb. per sq. in.

Class A pipe 300

Class B pipe 300

Class C pipe. 300

Class D pipe 300

Weighing.
Section 15. The pipes and special castings shall be
weighed for payment under the supervision of the engineer
after the application of the coal-tar pitch varnish. If desired

by the engineer the pipes and special castings shall be weighed

after their delivery, and the weights so ascertained shall be used
in the final settlement, provided such weighing is done by a
legalized weighmaster. Bids shall be submitted and a final
settlement made up on the basis of a ton of 2000 lb.

Contractor to Furnish Men and Materials.

Section 16. The contractor shall provide all tools, test-
ing machines, materials and men necessary for the required
testing, inspectionand weighing at the foundry of the pipes
and have no inspector
special castings; and, should the purchaser
at the works, the contractor shall, if required by the engineer,
furnish a sworn statement that all of the tests have been made
386 Specifications for Cast-Iron Pipe.

as specified, this statement to contain the results of the tests

upon the test bars.

Power of Engineer to Inspect.

Section 17. The engineer shall be at liberty at all times

to inspect the material at the foundry, and the molding, cast-
ing and coating of the pipes and special castings. The forms,
sizes, uniformity and conditions of all pipes and other castings
herein referred to shall be subject to his inspection and approval,
and he may reject, without proving, any pipes or other castings
which are not in confonnity with the specifications or drawings.

Inspector to Report.
Section 18. The inspector at the foundry shall report
daily to the foundry office all pipes and special castings rejected,
with the causes for rejection.

Castings to be Delivered Sound and Perfect.

Section 19. and other castings must be
All the pipes
delivered in all respects sound and conformable to these specifi-
cations. The inspection shall not relieve the contractor of any
of his obligations in this respect, and any defective pipe or other
castings which may have passed the engineer at the works or
elsewhere shall be at all times liable to rejection when discovered
until the final completion and adjustment of the contract, pro-
vided, however, that the contractor shall not be held liable for
pipes or special castings found to be cracked after they have
been accepted at the agreed point of delivery. Care shall be
taken in handling the pipes not to injure the coating, and no
pipes or other material of any kind shall be placed in the pipes
during transportation or at any time after they receive the
coating.

Definition of the Word "Engineer."

Section 20. Wherever the word "engineer" is used herein,
it shallbe understood to refer to the engineer or inspector acting
for the purchaser and to his properly authorized agents, limited
by the particular duties intrusted to them.
 .

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS.

Serial Designation: A 74-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 74; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1917; Adopted, 1918.

I. MANUFACTURE.
The cast iron from which the pipe and fittings are made
1 cast iron,
shall be of such composition, and the conditions of manufacture
so maintained, that the castings will be of uniform physical char-
acter, close-grain, and not hard, brittle nor difficult to cut with
file or chisel.
(a) When pipe or fittings are to be coated, coal-tar pitch
2. coating for
Cast Iron
shall be used, which shall contain sufficient oil to make a smooth -

coating. The pitch shall be tough and tenacious when cold, and
not brittle nor having any tendency to scale.
(b) The varnish shall be heated to about 300° F. and shall

remain at this temperature during the time the casting is

immersed.
(c) Each casting shall be heated to a uniform temperature of

about 300° F. immediately before it is dipped, and shall possess

this temperature at the time it is put in the bath.
(d) Each casting shall remain in the bath at least two
minutes.
(e) Fresh pitch and oil shall be added when necessary to
(387)
 388 Specifications for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe.

keep the mixture of the proper consistency, and the vat shall be
emptied of its contents and refilled with fresh pitch whenever the
accumulation of sand or carbonaceous matter renders this desir-
able, as can be seen by the solids adhering to the under side or
lower ends of the castings.

Pattern
10" Pipe

I
o i
Cope

Ik

'

Ik- 5

-I Pf 10"Pipe
Bored with
<-- /
4 .=' VentHoles.

.••••I
«o

I!

$y^}0?:l(h?M&.
mm
Mold for Arbitration Test Bar.

(/) After being coated, the pipe and fittings shall be care-
fully drained of the surplus varnish.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 3. Drillings taken from the fractured end of the arbitration
Composition.
test bar shall not contain over 0.10 per cent of sulfur.
 Serial Designation: A 74-18. 389

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

4. The transverse test specimens (arbitration test bars) Transverse
specified in Section 7, when placed horizontally upon supports
12 in. apart and tested under a centrally applied load, shall
conform to the following minimum requirements:
Average load at center, lb 2500
Average deflection at center, in 0.10

5. All pipe shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of not Hydrostatic

es 8 *
lessthan 50 lb. per sq. in. before coating. Any casting showing
defects under this hydrostatic test shall be promptly broken and
returned to the cupola.
6. The form and dimensions of the mold for the arbitration Moid for Test
pecimens *
test bar shall be in accordance with Fig. 1. The bottom of the
bar shall be tV m
smaller in diameter than the top, to allow for
-

draft and for the strain of pouring. The pattern shall not be
rapped before withdrawing. The flask shall be rammed up with
green molding sand, a little damper than usual, well mixed
and put through a No. 8 sieve, with a mixture of 1 to 12
bituminous facing. The mold shall be rammed evenly and
fairly hard, thoroughly dried, and not cast until it is cold.
The test bar shall not be removed from the mold until cold
enough to be handled. It shall not be rumbled or otherwise
treated, being simply brushed off before testing.
7. From each melt of metal not less than three test speci- Number of
mens (arbitration test bars) shall be poured, the first of which s P ecimens -

shallbe poured within five minutes after the first ladle is tapped
and the remainder at intervals not exceeding one hour throughout
the melt.

IV. STANDARD SIZES AND WEIGHTS.

8. The inside diameter of the barrel of any pipe or
(a) sizes,

fittings or branch thereof shall not vary more than | in. under
the nominal size of pipe.
(b) The outside diameter of the barrel of pipe and fittings

shall be | in. greater than its nominal inside diameter. A varia-

tion in the outside diameter of J in. over or under these figures
will be permitted.
(c) All pipe and fittings shall be of uniform thickness of wall
 —

390 Specifications for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe.

and present truecircles at the hub and spigot ends. A variation

under the following dimensions will be permitted, but
of tV in.
only when the actual weight is not less than the variation of the
marked or estimated weight as given in Tables I and II:
Thickness of barrel 1 in.

"body of hub
"bead of hub
" " bead' of spigot end.

Weights. 9. (a) Weights and measurements of pipe and fittings shall

be taken as those of plain uncoated pipe. All weights shall be
given in pounds.
(b) Individual lengths of pipe and fittings may weigh 5 per

Table I. Weights of Soil Pipe.

Single Hub. Double Hub.

Size, in.
Per 5-ft. Length, Per ft. including Per 5-ft. Length,
lb. Hub, lb. lb.

2 27^ 27§
3
«l *h
4 -
65 13 65

5 85 17 85

6 100 20 100

cent less than designated in Tables I and II, but only when the
average weight of a given size and weight of pipe and fittings
selected at random, is not less than that shown in Tables I and II.
(c) The regular length of pipe shall be such as to lay 5 ft.

including hub.
(d) The average weights of soil pipe and fittings shall not
be less than those given in Tables I and II.

V. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Character of 10. (a) All pipe and fittings shall be practically straight and
Castings.
cylindrical and fittings true to pattern. The specified sizes shall
be for the inside diameter and shall conform, within the allow-
able variation, to the dimensions given in the tables.
(b) All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for
defects and sounded with a hammer before shipment. No fillings
 —
' 1

Serial Designation: A 74-18. 391

with metal, cement or other material, or so-called "burning on"

of iron will be permitted. The castings shall be sound and free
from cracks, sand-holes, blow-holes and cold-shots.

Table II. Weights of Soil Pipe Fittings.

OWLT THB STAPLE FITTINGS ARB SHOWN. FROM THB DATA HEREWITH THB WEIGHTS OF OtHBR
FrmNQs mat be Calculated.
All values are in pounds.

Size of Fittings, in.

Fittings.
4 5
by by
3 2

2 Bends, regular 10 15 19 23l

4
\ Bends, short sweep 12i 17 22i 27i

j Bends, long sweep 15^ 22

1 Bends 13f m
i Bends 13

£ Bends 184

A- Bends 'I

Return Bends 20 \

Tees m 15± 21 IV' 25 30

Tapped Tees (tapped up to

2 in.)

Sanitary Tees 161 22i 28 ."1'. 23 26 2fl 31}

Tapped Sanitary Tees (tap-
ped up to 2 in.)

YBranch "I
1
27

\ Y Branch 19 19^ 22l|25i

Tapped Inverted Y Branch

(tapped up to 2 in.) 13
4

diverted Y Branch 25
2
is£ 22 25l 29l

Combination Y and A Bend. 27 18] 22-'

1

2
24 29

Upright Y Branch 28 36IJ46 15| 18| 23 2li i 24i

31±
2 24
i 29'
/*2
(

«1 4 l
I

VI. MARKING.
11. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the name of Marking,
the manufacturer, or appropriate initial. Each casting shall have
cast upon it the minimum or estimated weight of same as shown
in Tables I and II.
 392 Specifications for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 12. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing
the purchaser, free of cost, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him
that the castings are being furnished in accordance with these
specifications. All tests and inspection shall be so conducted
as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works,
and shall be made prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified.
Rejection. 13. All pipe and fittings which fail to conform to the provi-
sions of these specifications shall be subject to rejection.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CAST-IRON LOCOMOTIVE CYLINDERS.

Serial Designation: A 45-14.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 45; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1904; Revised, 1911, 1914.

I MANUFACTURE.
1. Locomotive cylinders shall be made from good quality, Process
close-grain gray iron cast in a dry mold.

II CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS

2. Drillings taken from the fractured end of the transverse Chemical
test bars shall conform to the following requirements as to Com P° 81t,on
chemical composition:

Phosphorus not over 90 per cent

Sulfur " " 0.12

3. A check analysis of drillings taken from the transverse check

test bar may be made by the purchaser. The phosporous and Analyses,
sulfur content thus determined shall conform to the requirements
specified in Section 2.

III PHYSICA PROPERTIES AND TESTS

4. The transverse test specimens (arl titration test bars) Transverse
Te§t8
specified in Section 6 (a), when placed horizontally upon supports -

(393)
 394 Specifications for Locomotive Cylinders.

12 in. apart and tested under a centrally applied load, shall con-
form to the following minimum requirements:
Average load at center, lb 3 200
Average deflection at center, in 0.09

chili Teats. 5. Before pouring, a sample of the iron shall be taken and

Pattern

10'
K 'Pipe
~% Cope

i-fi

H/0 Pipe
<- /i }> Bored with
VentHoles.

-
'''"I

"'"II

U>

11
ii-]':-\-XJ^^y-y:\
hi
IT
Fig. 1. —Mold for Arbitration Test Bar.

chilled in a cast-iron mold, as specified in Section 6 (b). The

sample shall be allowed to cool in the mold until it is dark red
or almost black, when it shall be knocked out and quenched
in water. This chill test specimen, on being broken, shall show
a close-grain gray iron, with a well-defined border of white iron
 Serial Designation: A 45 - 14. 395

at the bottom of the fracture. The depth of the white iron shall
not be less than tV in- as measured at the center line.
6. (a) Arbitration Test Bar. —
The form and dimensions of Molds for Teat
s P eclmens
the mold for the arbitration test bar shall be in accordance with -

Fig. 1. The bottom of the bar shall be tV in. smaller in diameter

than the top, to allow for draft and for the strain of pouring.
The pattern shall not be rapped before withdrawing. The flask
shall be rammed up with green molding sand, a little damper
than usual, well mixed and put through a No. 8 sieve, with a

*-/f"->l k-,I%\

-x
i4
2 «. »£
i?
<
I

Fig. 2. —Mold for Chill Test Specimen.

mixture of 1 to 12 bituminous facing. The mold shall be

rammed evenly and fairly hard, thoroughly dried, and not cast
until it is cold. The test bar shall not be removed from the
mold until cold enough to be handled. It shall not be rumbled
or otherwise treated, being simply brushed off before testing.
(b) Chill Test Specimen. — The form and dimensions of the
mold for the chill test specimen shall be in accordance with
Fig. 2.
7. (a) Two arbitration test bars, cast as specified in Sec- Number of Tests.
 396 Specifications for Locomotive Cylinders.

tion 6 (a), shall be poured from each ladle of metal used for one
or more cylinders, and tested as specified in Section 4.
One chill test specimen, cast as specified in Section 6 (b),
(b)

shall be poured from each ladle of metal used for one or more
cylinders and broken as specified in Section 5. The chill test
specimens ma}- be cast in adjacent molds, but in such cases a
space must be provided between the molds. (See Fig. 2.)

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Character of 8. The cylinders shall be smooth, well-cleaned, free from
Castings.
shrinkage cracks and from other defects sufficiently extensive
to impair the value of the castings, and shall finish to the size
specified by the purchaser.

V. MARKING.
Marking. 9. Marks designating the maker, the date of casting, the
serial and pattern numbers and other marks specified by the
purchaser, shall be cast on each cylinder in raised letters.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

Inspection. 10. (a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall be
given a reasonable opportunity to enable him to witness the
pouring of the cylinders and test specimens, as well as to be
present when physical tests are made.
(b) In case the inspector
is net present to witness the

pouring of the cylinders and test specimens, the manufacturer

will make all tests required by these specifications. He will,
upon demand, furnish the purchaser with a copy of the results
of his tests, and will hold the transverse and chill test speci-
mens subject to examination by the inspector. The tests made
by the minu'acturer shall be considered final.
1

(c) Ail p ysical tests and inspection shall be made at the

place of manufacture.
Rejection. 11. Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on tests
made in accordance with Section 3 shall be reported within
five working days from the receipt of samples.
 .

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CAST-IRON CAR WHEELS.

Serial Designation: A 46 - 05.

These specif cations are issued under the fixed designation A 46; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1905.

The wheels furnished under this specification must be made Chemical

r °P ert,es *
from the best materials, and in accordance with the best foundry
methods. The following pattern analysis is given for informa-
tion, as representing the chemical properties of a good cast-iron
wheel. Successful wheels, varying in some of the constituents
quite considerably from the figures given, may be made:

Total carbon 3.50 per cent

Graphitic carbon 2.90
Combined carbon 0.60
Silicon 0. 70
Manganese 0.40
Phosphorus 0.50
Sulfur 0.08

1 Wheels will be inspected and tested at the place of manu-

facture.
2. All wheels must conform
in general design and in measure-
ments which will be furnished, and any departure
to drawings,
from the standard drawing must be by special permission in
writing, and manufacturers wishing to deviate from the stand-
(397)
 398 Specifications for Car Wheels.

ard dimensions must submit duplicate drawings showing the

proposed changes, which must be approved.
Crop Tests. 3. The following table gives data as to weight and tests

of various kinds of wheels for different kinds of cars and sendee:

Wheel. 33-in. diameter Freight and Passenger cars. 36-in. diameter.

60 000 lb.
70 000 lb. 100 000 lb. Locomotive
Kind of service. capacity
capacity. capacity. Cars. Tenders.
and less.

Number.

Desired. 600 650 700 700 lb. 750 lb.

Weight
'
Variation Two per cent either way.

9 12 12 12 12

10 10 12 12 14

Marking. 4. Each wheel must have plainly cast on the outside plate
the name of the maker and place of manufacture. Each wheel
must also have cast on the inside double plate the date of casting
and a serial foundry number. The manufacturer must also
provide for the guarantee mark, if so required by the contract.
No wheel bearing a duplicate number, or a number which has
once been passed upon, will be considered. Numbers of wheels
once rejected will remain unfilled. No wheel bearing an indis-
tinct number or date, or any evidence of an altered or defaced
number will be considered.
Measures. 5. must have been meas-
All wheels offered for inspection
ured with a standard tape measure and must have the shrinkage
number stenciled in plain figures on the inside of the wheel.
The standard tape measure must correspond in form and con-
struction to the "Wheel Circumference Measure" established
by the Master Car Builders' Association in 1900. The nomen-
clature of that measure need not, however, be followed, it being
sufficient the graduating marks indicating tape sizes are f in.
if

apart. Any convenient method of showing the shrinkage or

stencilnumber may be employed. Experience shows that
standard tape measures elongate a little with use, and it is
essential to have them frequently compared and rectified. When
 Serial Designation: A 46-05. 399

ready for inspection, the wheels must be arranged in rows accord-

ing to shrinkage numbers, all wheels of the same date being

grouped together. Wheels bearing dates more than thirty days

prior to the date of inspection will not be accepted for test,
except by permission. For any single inspection and test only
wheels having three consecutive shrinkage or stencil numbers
will be considered. The manufacturer will, of course, decide
what three shrinkage or stencil numbers he will submit in any
given lot of 103 wheels offered, and the same three shrinkage or
stencil numbers need not be offered each time.
The body of the wheels must be smooth and free from
6. Finish,

slag and blowholes, and the hubs must be solid. Wheels will not
be rejected because of drawing around the center core. The
tread and throat of the wheels must be smooth, free from deep
and irregular wrinkles, slag, sand wash, chill cracks or swollen
rims, and be free from any evidence of hollow rims, and the
throat and tread must be practically free from sweat.
7. Wheels tested must show soft, clean, gray iron, free Material
and CnilL
from defects, such as holes containing slag or dirt more than
j in. in diameter, or clusters of such holes, honeycombing of
iron in the hub, white iron in the plates or hub, or clear
white iron around the anchors of chaplets at a greater dis-
tance than | in. in any direction. The depth of the clear white
iron must not exceed £ in. at the throat and 1 in. at the middle of
the tread, nor must it be less than f in. at the throat or any part
of the tread. The blending of the white iron with the gray iron
behind must be without any distinct line of demarcation, and
the iron must not have a mottled appearance in any part of the
wheel at a greater distance than If in. from the tread or throat.
The depth of chill will be determined by inspection of the three
test wheels described below, all test wheels being broken for this
purpose, if necessary. one only of the three test wheels fails
If
in limits of chill, all the lot under test of the same shrinkage or
stencil number will be rejected and the test will be regarded as
finished so far as this lot of 103 wheels is concerned. The manu-
facturer may, however, offer the wheels of the other two shrinkage
or stencil numbers, provided they are acceptable in other respects
as constituents of another 103 wheels for a subsequent test. If
two of the three test wheels fail in limits of chill, the wheels in the
 400 Specifications for Car Wheels.

lot of 103 of the same shrinkage or stencil number as these two

wheels will be rejected, and, as before, the test will be regarded as
finished so far as this lot of 103 wheels is concerned. The manu-
facturer may, however, offer the wheels of the third shrinkage or
stencil number, provided they are acceptable in other respects, as
constituents of another 103 wheels for a subsequent test. If all
three test wheels fail in limits of chill, of course the whole hundred
will be rejected,
inspection and 8. The manufacturer must notify when he is ready to ship
shipping.
nQ £ j egs £kan jqq w h ee i s mus t await the arrival of the inspector;
.

must have a car, or cars, ready to be loaded with the wheels,

and must furnish facilities and labor to enable the inspector to
inspect, test, load and ship the wheels promptly. Wheels offered
for inspection must not be covered with any substance which will
hide defects.
9. A hundred or more wheels being ready for test, the inspec-
tor will make a listwheel numbers, at the same time
of the
examining each wheel for defects. Any wheels which fail to
conform to specifications by reason of defects must be laid aside,
and such wheels will not be accepted for shipment. As individual
wheels are rejected, others of the proper shrinkage, or stencil
number, may be offered to keep the number good.
Retaping. 10. The inspector will retape not less than 10 per cent of

the wheels offered for test, and if he finds any showing wrong
tape-marking, he will tape the whole lot and require them to be
restenciled, at the same time having the old stencil marks oblit-
erated. He will weigh and make check measurements of at least
10 per cent of the wheels offered for test, and if any of these
wheels fail to conform to the specification, he will weigh and
measure the whole lot, refusing to accept for shipment any wheels
which fail in these respects.
Drop Tests. 1 1 Experience indicates that wheels with higher shrinkage or
.

lower stencil numbers are more apt to fail on thermal test; more
apt to fail on drop test, and more apt to exceed the maximum
allowable chill than those with higher stencil or lower shrinkage
numbers; while, on the other hand, wheels with higher stencil or
lower shrinkage numbers are more apt to be deficient in chill.
For each 103 wheels apparently acceptable, the inspector will
select three wheels for test —
one from each of the three shrinkage
 Serial Designation: A 46-05. 401

or stencil numbers offered. One of these wheels chosen for this

purpose by the inspector must be tested by drop test as follows:
The wheel must be placed flange downward in an anvil block
weighing not less than 1700 lb., set on rubble masonry 2 ft. deep
and having three supports not more than 5 in. wide for the flange
of the wheel to rest on. It must be struck centrally upon the
hub by a weight of 200 lb., falling from a height as shown in the
table in Section 3. The end of the falling weight must be flat,
so as to strike fairly on the hub, and when by wear the bottom of
the weight assumes a round or conical form, it must be replaced.
The machine for making this test is shown on drawings which
will be furnished. Should the wheel stand without breaking in
two or more pieces, the number of blows, shown in the above
table, the 100 wheels represented by be considered satis-
it will

factory as to this test. Should it fail, the whole hundred will be

rejected.
12. The other two test wheels must be tested as follows: Thermal Test.

The wheels must be laid flange down and a channel-

in the sand,
way 1§ in. in width at the center of the tread and 4 in. deep must
be molded with green sand around the wheel. The clean tread
of the wheel must form one side of this channelway, and the
clean flange must form as much of the bottom as its width will
cover. The channelway must then be filled to the top from one
ladle with molten cast iron, which must be poured directly into
the channelway without previous cooling or stirring, and this
ironmust be so hot, when poured, that the ring which is formed
when the metal is cold shall be solid or free from wrinkles or
layers. Iron at this temperature will usually cut a hole at the
point of impact with the flange. In order to avoid spitting during
the pouring, the tread and inside of the flange during the thermal
test should be covered with a coat of shellac; wheels which are
wet or which have been exposed to snow or frost may be warmed
sufficiently to dry them or remove the frost before testing, but
under no circumstances must the thermal test be applied to a
wheel that in any part feels warm to the hand. The time when
pouring ceases must be noted, and two minutes later an examina-
tion of the wheel under test must be made. If the wheel is found
broken in pieces, or if any crack in the plates extends through or
into the tread, the test wheel will be regarded as having failed.
 402 Specifications for Car Wheels.

both wheels stand, the whole hundred will be accepted as to

If
this test. If both fail, the whole hundred will be rejected. If
one only of the thermal test wheels fails, all of the lot under test
of the same shrinkage or stencil number will be rejected, and the
test will be regarded as finished, so far as this lot of wheels is
concerned. The manufacturer may, however, offer the wheels
of the other two shrinkage or stencil numbers, provided they are
acceptable in other respects, as constituents of another 103
wheels for a subsequent test,
storing and 13. All wheels which pass inspection and test will be regarded
shipping.
as accepted anc ma y De either shipped or stored for future ship-
j

ment, as arranged. It is desired that shipments should be, as

far as possible, in lots of 100 wheels. In all cases the inspector
must witness the shipment, and he must give, in his report the
numbers of all wheels inspected and the disposition made of
them.
Rejections. 14. Individual wheels will be considered to have failed and
will not be accepted or further considered, which,
First. —Do not conform to standard Resign and measurement.
Scco7id. —
Are under or over weight.
Third. — H-ave the physical defects described in Section 6.

Rejections. 15. Each 103 wheels submitted for test will be considered
to have failed and will not be accepted or considered further, if,
First. —
The test wheels do not conform to Section 7, espe-
cially as to limits of white iron in the throat and tread and
around chaplets.
Second.— One of the wheels does not stand the drop
test test
as described in Section 11.
Third. — Both of the two wheels do not stand the thermal
test
test as described in Section 12.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
MALLEABLE-IRON CASTINGS.

Serial Designation: A 47 - 15.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 47; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1904; Revised, 1915.

I. MANUFACTURE.
1. The castings shall be made from iron melted in either Process,
an air furnace, open-hearth furnace or electric furnace.

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

2. The tension test specimens specified in Section 5 shall Tension Tests,
conform to the following minimum requirements as to tensile
properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 38 000

Elongation in 2 in., per cent 5

3. The transverse test specimens specified in Section 5, Transverse

Test8-
when placed with the cope side up on supports 12 in. apart and
tested under a centrally applied load, shall conform to the
following requirements:
(403)
 Specifications for Malleable-Iron Castings.
:
404

Minimum Load Minimum Deflection

Thickness of Specimen, Applied at Center at Center,
in. lb. in.

1 goo 1.25
2
5 1400 1.00
8
3 2 000 0.75
4

Special Tests. 4. In addition to the tension and transverse tests, the

inspector representing the purchaser may satisfy himself of the
suitability of the iron used for the castings by breaking a rea-
sonable number of castings before annealing to examine for
excessive mottling or graphite spots. In the case of castings
of special design or importance, he may also require test lugs
of a size proportional to the thickness of the casting, but not

rOjT*.
A / ^ |0°

i I I

3"„
i

l<-
-- *-/" —>k— 4— ->k~- /~-sk 3"~
I*

Fig. 1.

exceeding f by f in. in section. At least one of these lugs shall

be left on the casting for final inspection.
Test Specimens. 5. (a) Tension test specimens shall be of the form and
dimensions shown in Fig. 1. Transverse test specimens shall
be 14 in. in length, 1 in. in width and either £, f or f in. in
thickness. The thickness of the specimen selected shall be in
proportion to the thickness of the casting which it represents.
(b) Two tension and two transverse test specimens shall
be cast in each mold with risers of sufficient height at each
end to secure sound bars. All specimens shall be cast without
chills, and with ends perfectly free in the mold.

(c) Four molds shall be poured to represent each melt.

When the entire melt is used for castings which are subject to
these specifications, two molds shall be poured within five
minutes after tapping into the first ladle, and two molds from
the last iron of the melt. When only part of the melt is required
for such castings, two molds shall be poured from the first ladle
 Serial Designation: A 47-15. 405

of iron used and two molds after the required iron has been
tapped.
(d) The molds shall be suitably stamped to identify the
specimens.
The specimens from one mold from the first and one
test
mold from the last of the melt shall be annealed in the hottest
part of the annealing oven, and the remaining specimens shall
be annealed in the coldest part.
6. One tension and one transverse test specimen from each Number of Tests,

of the four molds representing a melt shall be selected for test.

The remaining specimens shall be reserved, and shall be tested
in case of failure to conform to the requirements specified.
7. If more than one tension or transverse test specimen Requirement!,

from each of the two molds annealed in the two points in the
oven specified in Section 5 (d) fails to meet the requirements as
to tensile or transverse properties specified in Sections 2 and 3,
the castings from that melt will be rejected.

III. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

8. The castings shall conform substantially to the sizes workmanship,

and shapes of the patterns, and shall be made in a workman-

like manner. A variation of £$ in. per ft. will be permitted.
9. The castings shall be free from blemishes, scale and Finish,

shrinkage cracks.

IV. INSPECTION.
10. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have inspection,
free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the castings ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the castings are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests
and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior
to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so con-
ducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of
the works.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
GRAY-IRON CASTINGS.

Serial Designation: A 48- 18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation A 48; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1905; Revised, 1918.

Material 1. These specifications cover three classes of gray-iron

Covered.
castings, as follows:
teg (a) Light Castings, those having any section less than \ in.

in thickness;
(b) Heavy Castings, those in which no section is less than
2 in. in thickness;
(c) Medium Castings, those not included in either of the
above two classes.
Basis of 2. The tension test will be made only when specified by
Purchase.
the purchaser and at his expense. 1 -

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 3. The castings shall be made by the cupola process, unless
furnace iron is specified.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemlcal 4. (a) Drillings taken from the fractured end of the trans-
Composition.
1 It is recommended by Committee A-3 on Cast Iron that the tension test shall not be
made, for the reason that cast iron is almost devoid of elasticity, and hence any deviation
from an absolutely straight pull In commercial testing machines yields defective results.

(406)
 : : :

Serial Designation: A 48-18. 407

verse test bars shall conform to the following requirements as

tO sulfur:

Light castings not over 0. 10 per cent.

Medium castings " " 0.10 "
Heavy castings " " 0. 12 "

(b) One made for each mold

sulfur determination shall be
of test bars cast, in accordance with the Standard Methods for
Sampling and Analysis of Pig and Cast Iron (Serial Designation
A 64) of the American Society for Testing Materials. In case
of dispute, the standards of the U. S. Bureau of Standards shall
be used for comparison.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

5. (a) The transverse test specimens (arbitration test Transverse
bars) specified in Section 7 (a), when placed horizontally upon
supports 12 in. apart and tested under a centrally applied load,
shall conform to the following minimum requirements, interpreted
in accordance with Section 9
Class of Casting.
Light. Medium. Heavy.
Load at center, lb 2 500 2 900 3 300
Deflection at center, in 0.10 0.10 0.10

(b) The rate of application of the load shall be such that

a central deflection of 0.10 in. is produced in from 20 to 40
seconds.
6. When tension tests are specified, the tension test speci- Tension Tests,

men shall conform to the following minimum requirements as to

tensile strength

Light castings .'

18 000 lb. per sq. in.
"
Medium castings 21 000 "
"
Heavy castings 24 000 "

7. (a) Arbitration Test Bar. —The

form and dimensions Test Specimens,

of the mold for the arbitration test bar shall be in accordance

with Fig. 1. The bottom of the bar shall be in. smaller in ^
diameter than the top, to allow for draft and for the strain of
pouring. The pattern shall not be rapped before withdrawing.
The flask shall be rammed up with green molding sand, a little
damper than usual, well mixed and put through a No. 8 sieve,
with a mixture of 1 to 12 bituminous facing. The mold shall
 408 Specifications for Gray-Iron Castings.

be rammed evenly and fairly hard, thoroughly dried, and not

cast until it iscold. The test bar shall not be removed from the
mold until cold enough to be handled. It shall not be rumbled
or otherwise treated, being simply brushed off before testing.
(b) Tension Test —
Specimen. When tension tests are
specified, the tension test specimen shall be turned from any

Patf em
10" Pipe
k-fil Cope

<
4 :

10"Pipe
Bored with
/i ->
Vent holes.

lo
^^^

_1_
Fig. 1. —Mold for Arbitration Test Bar.

of the broken pieces of the transverse test specimens, and shall

conform to the dimensions shown in Fig. 2.
Number of Tests. 8. (a) Two sets of two arbitration test bars each shall be

cast from each melt, one set from the first and the other set
from the last iron going into the castings. Where the melt
exceeds 20 tons, an additional set of two bars shall be cast
for each additional 20 tons or fraction thereof. In case
 -

Serial Designation: A 48-18. 409

of a change of mixture during the melt, one set of two bars

shall alsobe cast for every mixture other than the regular one.
Each set of two bars shall be cast in a single mold.
(b) All arbitration test bars cast shall be tested as specified

in Section 5 (a).
9. One arbitration test bar of each set cast shall conform Requirements,
to the requirements specified in Section 5 (a); otherwise the
castings represented by such bars shall be rejected.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

10. The castings shall be true to pattern, and free from Finish,

cracks, flaws and excessive shrinkage. In other respects they

— Standard Thread
~"Rad...

%
Hi*

_iL

k M* /~~>l«#t*
r-
- * A
Fig. 2. —Tension Test Specimen.
shallconform to whatever points may be specially agreed upon
between the manufacturer and the purchaser.

V. INSPECTION.
11. The inspector representing the purchaser shall have inspection,

free entry, at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the castings ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the castings are being
furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests
and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior
to shipment, unless otherwise specific I, and shall be so con-
ducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of
the works.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHODS
FOR
SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS OF PIG AND
CAST IRON.

Serial Designation: A 64-16.

These methods are issued under the fixed designation A 64; the final

number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of

revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1916.

SAMPLING.
Pig Iron. — One pig shall be selected at random from each
four tons of iron and ten such pigs (representing 40 tons of iron)
shall constitute a unit for sampling. The surface of each pig
shall be cleansed with a stiff wire brush or in any manner that
will remove all loose sand without introducing deleterious matter.
The skin, down to clean metal, shall then be removed with
an emery wheel at the center of the upper face of each pig and
the surface carefully brushed off.

drill, from top to

Drillings shall be taken with a £-in. twist
bottom of each pig, starting from the center of the cleared space
and stopping when the point of the drill appears below. One
hole only shall be bored in each pig.
Suitable precautions shall be taken to prevent the escape
of fine particles during the drilling. To this end a disk of clean
sheet metal shall be clamped upon the pig after the skin has been
removed. This disk shall have a hole in its center just large
(410)
 Serial Designation: A 64-16. 411

enough to receive the drill. Most of the drillings will then

accumulate on top of the disk and can be brushed off after the
drill is withdrawn. The pig shall then be turned bottom side
up over any suitable receptacle for collecting what may have
remained in the drill hole.
Castings. —
In accordance with the Standard Specifications
for Gray-Iron Castings (Serial Designation: A 48) of the
American Society for Testing Materials, three test bars, 1.2 in.
in diameter, shall be cast in sand from each heat at the beginning
and again at the end of the pouring.
One bar from each set having been broken, one end of each
next the fracture shall be thoroughly cleaned and the outer
skin removed for a sufficient distance from the fracture and
down to clean metal. Chips shall then be taken by means of a
lathe or milling machine across the whole face of the bar and
until not less than 100 g. weight has been collected. The same
amount shall be taken from each bar. The bar shall be so
clamped as to permit the attachment or use of any suitable
device for collecting every part of the sample and the machine
shall be run slowly enough to reduce to a minimum the danger
of loss of fine particles.
Subsequent Treatment of Sample from both Pig and Cast-
ings. —In the determination oftotal and graphitic carbon, and in
the case of check analyses on the other constituents, the following
precautions shall be taken: The entire unit shall be weighed and
then sifted on tight-fitting sieves (with cover) having 80 (and if
need be 120) meshes to the linear inch (approximately 900 and
2500 per square centimeter). The need be used only
finer sieve
not sufficiently
in case the particles passing the coarser sieve are
uniform in size and shape to meet the requirements of the
treatment that follows.
The two (or three) portions so obtained shall be separately
weighed. Each one shall then be thoroughly mixed without
any loss of material and divided by weight into two (or three)
exactly equal portions, each of which shall be placed in a clean,
glass-stoppered bottle or other receptacle of suitable material
and appropriately labeled. Of the three sets of the subdivided
samples, one shall be retained by the works, one sent to the
purchaser's chemist and the third reserved.
412 Methods for Analysis of Pig and Cast Iron.

Before weighing out for analysis, the contents of each

bottle shall be thoroughly mixed and each portion used for
analysis shall be made up of the two (or three) partial samples
in the same proportion which they bear to the gross sample.
Thus, if the gross sample, weighing, say, 500 g., has been sep-
arated into portions weighing 400, 80, and 20 g., the amounts of
each that must be weighed to yield a 2-g. portion for analysis
are 1.6 g., 0.32 g., and 0.08 g., respectively.

METHODS OF ANALYSIS.

DETERMINATION OF SILICON
BY THE
NITRO-SULFURIC (DROWN) METHOD.

Solutions Required.
Nitro-Suljuric Acid. —Mix 1000 cc. of sulfuric acid, sp. gr.

1.84, 1500 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42. and 5500 cc. of dis-

tilled water.
Dilute Hydrochloric Acid. — Mix 100 cc. of hydrochloric
acid, sp. gr. 1.20, and 900 cc. of distilled water.

Method.
Add cautiously 30 cc. of the nitro-sulfuric acid to 1 g. of
iron in a platinum or porcelain dish of 300-cc. capacity, cover
with a clock glass, heat until the metal is dissolved, and
evaporate slowly until copious fumes of sulfuric acid are evolved.
Cool, add 125 cc. of distilled water, heat with frequent stirring
until all salts are dissolved, add 5 cc. of hydrochloric acid, sp. gr.
1.20, heat for 2 minutes, and filter on a 9-cm. paper. Wash the
precipitate several times with hot water, then with hot hydro-
chloric acid and hot water alternately to complete the removal
of iron salts, and with hot water until free from acid.
finally
Transfer the filterplatinum crucible, burn off the paper
to a
carefully with the crucible covered, finally igniting over a blast
 Serial Designation: A 64-16. 413

lamp or in a muffle furnace at 1000° C. for at least 20 minutes;

cool in a desiccator and weigh. Add sufficient sulfuric acid,
sp. gr. 1.84, to moisten the and then a small amount of
silica

hydrofluoric acid. Evaporate to dryness, ignite and weigh.

The difference in weights represents silica from which the per-
centage of silicon may be calculated.
Run a blank determination on all reagents.

DETERMINATION OF SILICON
BY THE
HYDROCHLORIC-ACTD METHOD.

Solutions Required.
Hydrochloric Acid. — Mix equal volumes of hydrochloric
acid, sp. gr. 1.20, and distilled water.

Method.
Place 1 or 2 g. of the metal in a casserole or 400-cc. beaker
and add 30 to 40 cc. of the hydrochloric acid. When action has
ceased, evaporate to dryness and bake in an air bath or on a hot
plate until all acid is removed. Cool, add 15 cc. of concen-
trated hydrochloric acid and heat until all iron salts are in
solution. Dilute with four or five times the volume of water,
filter, wash, ignite and treat the precipitate as described under

the Nitro-Sulfuric Method.

DETERMINATION OF SULFUR.

Solutions Required.
Barium Chloride. — Dissolve 100 g. of barium chloride
(BaCl 2 -2H 2 0) in 1000 cc. of distilled water.

Method.
Dissolve 5 g. of iron in a 400-cc. beaker, using a mixture of
40 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and 5 cc. of hydrochloric acid,
sp. gr. 1.20. Add 0.5 g. of sodium carbonate, evaporate the
414 Methods for Analysis of Pig and Cast Iron.

solution to dryness and bake the residue on the hot plate until
fumes are no longer given off. Treat the residue in 30 cc. of
strong hydrochloric acid, dilute and filter. (See subsequent
paragraph in this section for treatment of this residue for
extraction of its possible sulfur content.) Cool the filtrate and
add ammonia until a permanent cloudiness appears, then add
5 cc. of strong hydrochloric acid so as to obtain a perfectly clear
liquid. Precipitate the sulfur in the cold filtrate (about 100 cc.)
with 10 cc. of the barium-chloride solution. After 24 to 48
hours collect the precipitate on a filter paper, wash first with
hot water (containing 10 cc. of concentrated hydrochloric acid
and 1 g. of barium chloride to the liter) until free from iron, and
then with hot water till freefrom chloride;
with cold or, first
water, then with 25 cc. of water containing 2
cc. of concentrated
hydrochloric acid to the liter, Keep the washings separate
from the main filtrate and evaporate them to recover any
dissolved barium sulfate.
Place the insoluble residue, containing silica, graphite, etc.,
in a platinum crucible, cover with sodium carbonate (free from
sulfur) and char the paper (use an alcohol lamp for this and
subsequent heating operations) without allowing the carbonate
to melt; the crucible should be covered during this operation.
Then thoroughly mix in 0.2 g. of sodium nitrate and fuse the
mass with the cover removed. Dissolve the contents of the
crucible in water, filter and evaporate the filtrate with hydro-
chloric acid in excess, using a porcelain container; repeat the
evaporation with water and hydrochloric acid to insure removal
of nitrates. Extract the residue with a few drops of hydro-
chloric acid and water, filter off the insoluble matter and add

barium chloride to the filtrate. Add the barium sulfate obtained

to the main portion.
Run a blank with all reagents.

DETERMINATION OF PHOSPHORUS.

Solutions Required.
Nitric Acid for Dissolving. —Mix 1000 cc. of nitric acid,
sp. gr. 1.42, and 1200 cc. of distilled water.
 Serial Designation: A 64- 16. 415

Nitric Acid for Washing. —Mix 20 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr.

1.42,and 1000 cc. of distilled water.

Ammonium-Molybdate Solution for Precipitating.
—
Solution No. 1. Place in a beaker 100 g. of 85-per-cent
molybdic acid, mix it thoroughly with 240 cc. of distilled water,
add 140 cc. of ammonium hydroxide, sp. gr., 0.90, filter and add
60 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42.
Solution No. 2. —Mix 400 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr., 1.42,
and 960 cc. of distilled water.
When the solutions are cold, add solution No. 1 to solution
No. 2, stirring constantly; then add 0.1 g. of ammonium
phos-
phate dissolved in 10 cc. of distilled water; agitate thoroughly,
let stand at least 24 hours and filter before using.
Ammonium-Molybdate Solution for Washing. Mix equal —
volumes of the above compounded molybdate solution and of
water.
Potassium-Nitrate Solution.—Dissolve 10 g. of potassium-
nitrate in 1000 cc. of distilled water.
Phenolphthalein Solution. —Dissolve 0.2 g. of phenolphtha-
lein in 50 cc. of 95-per-cent ethyl alcohol and 50 cc. of dis-
tilled water.
—
Standard Sodium-Hydroxide Solution. To 100 g. of pure
sodium hydroxide add an amount of distilled water just insuffi-
cient to completely dissolve it. Pour into a tall cylinder,
close the cylinder and allow the insoluble matter to settle.
Dilute in the proportion of 30 cc. to 2000 cc. of distilled water.
—
Standard Nitric Acid. Measure 2000 cc. of distilled water
into a glass-stoppered bottle, add 20 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr.
1.42, and mix thoroughly. Measure accurately 10 cc. of the
"standard sodium-hydroxide solution." Place this in a small
flask, add 40 cc. of distilled water and 3 drops of "phenolphtha-
lein solution." Drop "standard nitric acid" from a carefully
calibrated burette into the flask until the pink color just dis-
appears. If the solutions are not of the same strength, dilute
the stronger with water until they agree.
The solutions being of equal strength, standardize them as
follows: Titrate the ammonium phosphomolybdate from an
iron in which the phosphorus has been accurately determined,
and divide the percentage of phosphorus by the number of
416 Methods for Analysis of Pig and Cast Iron.

cubic centimeters of the "standard sodium-hydroxide solution"

required to neutralize it. The result is the value of the "stand-
ard sodium-hydroxide solution." The solution should preferably
be of such strength that 1 cc. = 0.0002 g. of phosphorus. Protect
the solution from carbon dioxide by a soda-lime tube.
—
Magnesia Mixture. Dissolve 110 g. of crystallized mag-
nesium chloride (MgCl 2 -6H 2 0) or 50 g. of the anhydrous salt in
distilled water, and filter. Dissolve 28 g. of ammonium chloride
in distilled water, add a little bromine water and a slight

excess of ammonia and filter. Add this solution to the solution

of magnesium chloride, add enough ammonia to make the
solution smell decidedly of ammonia, dilute to about 2 liters,
transfer to a bottle, shake vigorously from time to time, allow
it to stand for several days, and filter into a small bottle as
required for use. Ten cubic centimeters of this solution will
precipitate about 0.15 g. of P2 6 .

Ammonia Wash Water, Approximately 10 per cent. — Mix

1000 cc. of ammonia water, sp. gr. 0.90, and 2000 cc. of distilled

water in which has been dissolved 25 g. of ammonium nitrate.

Methods.
A. Molybdate Method for Non-titaniferous Irons.

Procedure for Obtaining Phosphomolybdate. In a 400 cc. —

beaker dissolve 1 g. of metal (2 g. for irons low in phosphorus),
using 25 (or 50) cc. of "nitric acid for dissolving." Evaporate
to dryness and heat on the hot plate or in the air bath at approxi-
mately 200° C. for about an hour. Allow the beaker to cool,
dissolve the residue in 15 cc. of concentrated hydrochloric acid
and evaporate to dryness to render the silica insoluble. Redis-
solve in 15 cc. of concentrated hydrochloric acid, dilute with
water, filter off insoluble and wash. (Burn off the filter paper
and graphite; expel silica with a few drops of hydrofluoric acid
and a drop or two of sulfuric acid, taking care not to drive off
all of the last-named acid. Take up the residue with con-
centrated hydrochloric acid, dilute, and filter if need be into the
main solution). Evaporate to a small volume until salts just
begin to separate. Add 10 cc. of concentrated nitric acid and
evaporate until salts again begin to separate; add 15 cc. more of
 Serial Designation: A 64-16. 417

concentrated nitric acid and evaporate to a small volume. The

solution being in an Erlenmeyer flask and the initial volume not
over 25 cc. and its temperature that of the room, add 25 to
100 cc. of the molybdate reagent, according to the phosphorus
content of the iron, shake for 4 or 5 minutes and let stand for
30 minutes to 3 or 4 hours at room temperature.
Then (a): Filter on a Gooch crucible, wash with the solu-
tion of " ammonium-molybdate solution for washing" and then
with water containing 1 per cent of nitric acid, dry at 120° C.
and weigh as ammonium phosphomolybdate containing 1.63
per cent of phosphorus.
Or, (b): Filter on a 9-cm. paper and wash, first with the
"nitric acid for washing," and then with "potassium-nitrate
solution," until the washings are no longer acid. Place filter

and precipitate in the precipitating vessel and run in from a

pipette 10 cc. of the "standard sodium-hydroxide solution."
If, after agitation, this is insufficient to dissolve the precipitate,
add 10 cc. more, and if necessary continue the additions until
the precipitate is dissolved. Dilute to 50 cc, add 3 drops of
"phenolphthalein solution," and add from a burette "standard
nitric acid" until the pink color disappears; subtract the num-
ber of cubic centimeters of "standard nitric acid" used from the
number of cubic centimeters of "standard sodium-hydroxide
solution" taken to dissolve the precipitate, and the remainder
will be the number of cubic centimeters of the "standard
sodium-hydroxide solution" required to neutralize the ammo-
nium phosphomolybdate. From this calculate the amount of
phosphorus.
Or, (c): Filter on a small and wash with the "ammo-
filter

nium-molybdate solution for washing" until a drop of the

nitrate gives no reaction for iron with potassium ferrocyanide.
Dissolve the precipitate in 2 or 3 cc. of strong ammonia and
filterthrough the paper that held the precipitate into a small
beaker of about 100-cc. capacity, washing with ammoniacal
water. With large precipitates more ammonia may be needed,
but always the amounts of ammonia and wash water used
should be as small as is consistent with perfect solution of the
precipitate and thorough washing. When the precipitate is
small the filtrate and washings should amount to about 25 cc.
418 Methods for Analysis of Pig and Cast Iron.

Neutralize the solution with strong hydrochloric acid; if the

yellow precipitate forms, add ammonia until it redissolves. 1
To the cold alkaline liquid add very slowly 10 cc. of "mag-
nesia mixture," stirring constantly, add a little more ammonia
and again stir vigorously. It is well to stand the beaker in cold
water and stir the solution several tunes after the precipitate
has begun to form. After 4 hours, filter on a small filter and
wash with the "ammonia wash water." Dry, ignite in a crucible
very carefully to burn off the carbonaceous matter, and finally
heat for 10 minutes over the blast lamp. (The heat should not
be so high as to cause partial fusion of the pyrophosphate.)
Fill the crucible half full of hot water, add from 5 to 20 drops
of hydrochloric acid, and heat for a few minutes to dissolve the
magnesium pyrophosphate. If a residue remains, filter, wash,
used for the pyrophosphate, weigh it, and
ignite in the crucible
deduct its weight from that of the unpurified salt. Calculate
the phosphorus on the basis of 27.84 per cent in Mg 2 P 2 07.

B. MOLYBDATE METHOD FOR IRONS CONTAINING TITANIUM.

Proceed as under method A until the solution resulting from
treatment of the insoluble residue has been combined with the
main solution. Then proceed according to Blair 2 up to a cer-
tain point, as follows:
Heat the solution nearly to boiling, remove from the name
and add gradually from a small beaker a mixture of 2 cc. of acid
ammonium sulfite 3 and 10 cc. of ammonia, stirring constantly.
The precipitate, which forms at first, redissolves, and when all
but a little of the reagent has been added, replace the beaker
over the flame. If, at any time while adding the sulfite solu-

tion, the precipitate formed will not redissolve, even after

vigorous stirring, add a few drops of hydrochloric acid, and
when the solution clears, continue the addition, very slowly, of

> If a flocculent white precipitate now

shows, filter it off, dry and ignite it in a platinum
crucible, fuse the residue with a very little sodium carbonate, extract the melt with hot water,
filter, acidify the filtrate with nitric acid, add some ammonium nitrate and molybdate reagent

and if phosphorus is indicated by the formation of a yellow precipitate, filter, wash and dis-
solve this in ammonia and add to the main solution.
'"The Chemical Analysis of Iron," 7th Ed., p. 81.
* Made by saturating strong ammonia water with sulfur -dioxide gas. Eighteen cubic
centimeters of such a solution will deoxidize a solution of 10 g. of iron.
 Serial Designation: A 64-16. 419

the acid ammonium sulfite. After replacing the beaker over the
flame, add to the solution (which should smell quite strongly
of sulfurous anhydride) ammonia, drop by drop, until the solu-
tion quite decolorized, and finally until a slight greenish
is

precipitate remains undissolved even after vigorous stirring.

Now add the remainder of the sulfite solution, which should
throw down a white precipitate, which usually redissolves,
leaving the solution quite clear and almost perfectly decol-
orized. Should any precipitate remain undissolved, however,
add hydrochloric acid, drop by drop, until the solution clears,
when should smell perceptibly of sulfurous anhydride. If the
it

reagents are used exactly in the proportions indicated, the

reactions will take place as described, and the operations will be
readily and quickly carried out.the solution of acid If
ammonium should be, of course the
sulfite is weaker than it

ferric chloride will not be reduced, and the solution, at the end
of the operation described above, will not be decolorized and
will not smell of sulfurous anhydride. In this case add more
acid ammonium sulfite (without the addition of ammonia)
until the solution smells strongly of sulfurous anhydride, then
add ammonia until the slight permanent precipitate appears,
and redissolve it in as few drops of hydrochloric acid as possible.
The solution being now very nearly neutral, the iron in the
ferrous condition, and an excess of sulfurous acid present, add
to the solution 5 cc. of hydrochloric acid to make it decidedly
acid and to insure the complete decomposition of any excess of
the acid ammonium sulfite that may be present. Boil the
solution while a stream of carbon dioxide passes through it,

until every trace of sulfurous anhydride is expelled 1

. Add a
few drops of bromine water or of a solution of ferric chloride,
and cool the solution by placing the beaker in cold water. To
the cold solution add ammonia from a small beaker very slowly,
and finally, drop by drop, with constant stirring. The green
precipitate of ferrous hydroxide which forms at first is dissolved
by stirring, leaving but subse-
the solution perfectly clear,
quently, although the green precipitate dissolves, a whitish one
remains, and the next drop of ammonia increases the whitish

1
If arsenic is present pass a current of hydrogen-sulfide gas through the solution for 15

minutes, filter, and expel excess of the precipitant by a current of carbon dioxide.
420 Methods for Analysis of Pig and Cast Iron.

precipitate or gives it a reddish tint, and finally the greenish

precipitate remains undissolved even after vigorous stirring,
and another drop of ammonia makes the whole precipitate
appear green. If before this occurs the precipitate does not
appear decidedly red in color, dissolve the green precipitate, by
a drop or two of hydrochloric acid, and add a little bromine
water or ferric-chloride solution (l or 2 cc), then add ammonia
as and repeat this until the reddish precipitate is
before,
obtained, and then the green coloration as described above.
Dissolve the green precipitate in a very few drops of acetic
acid (sp. gr. 1.04), when the precipitate remaining will be quite
red in color, then add about 1 cc. of acetic acid, and dilute the
solution with boiling water, so that the beaker may be about
four-fifths full. Heat to boiling, and when the solution has
boiled one minute, lower the flame, filter as rapidly as possible
through a 14-cm. filter, and wash once with hot water. The
filtrate should run through clear, but in a few minutes it will
appear cloudy by the precipitation of ferric hydroxide. The
points to be observed are the red color of the precipitate and the
clearness of the solution when it first runs through.
Dry the filter and precipitate without scorching the paper.
Remove with filter paper any precipitate adhering to the beaker
and dry the paper. Transfer the main portion of the precipi-
tate (all that can be removed) to a small porcelain mortar.
Burn carefully the filter and the wipings of the beaker and
transfer the ash to the mortar. Grind the contents of the
mortar with 3 g. of sodium carbonate and a little nitrate and
transfer the mixture to a platinum crucible, cleaning pestle and
mortar with a little sodium carbonate. Fuse the whole for half
an hour or more, cool, dissolve the fused mass in hot water,
filter, and wash with hot water.
1

Acidify the alkaline solution with nitric acid, evaporate in

a small casserole nearly to dryness, transfer to a small Erlen-
meyer flask, so that the final volume shall not exceed 25 cc,
add at room temperature 25 to 100 cc. of the molybdate reagent
and shake for 4 or 5 minutes. Let stand for 30 minutes to
3 or 4 hours. From this point the procedure is exactly as
described for non-titaniferous irons under method A.
1
The residue on the filter contains the whole of the titanium.
 Serial Designation: A 64-16. 421

DETERMINATION OP MANGANESE
BY THS
BISMUTHATE METHOD.

Solutions Required.
Nitric Acid for Solution. —Mix 500 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr.

1.42, and 1500 cc. of distilled water.

Nitric Acid for Washing. —
Mix 30 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr.
1.42, and 970 cc. of distilled water.
—
Stock Sodium Arsenite. To 15 g. of arsenious oxide (AS2O3)
in a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask, add 45 g. of sodium carbonate
and 150 cc. of distilled water. Heat the flask and contents in
a water bath until the oxide is dissolved, cool the solution and
make up to 1000 cc. with distilled water.
—
Standard Sodium Arsenite. Dilute 300 cc. of "stock sodium
arsenite" solution to 1000 cc. with distilled water and titrate
against potassium-permanganate solution (about N/10), which
has been standardized by using Bureau of Standards Sodium
Oxalate. 1
Adjust the solution so that 1 cc. is equivalent to 0.10 per
cent of manganese, when a 1-g. sample is taken.
—
The factor Na 2 C 2 4 >Mn = 0.16397 (using the 1913 atomic
weights).

Method.
In a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask dissolve 1 g. of iron in 50 cc.
of the "nitric acid for solution" and boil to expel the oxides
add about 0.5 g. of sodium bismuthate,
of nitrogen, cool, filter, 2
and heat few minutes or until the pink color has dis-
for a
appeared, with or without precipitation of manganese dioxide.
Add small portions of ferrous sulfate (or any suitable reducing
agent) in sufficient quantity to clear the solution and boil to
expel the oxides of nitrogen. Cool to about 15° C, add an
excess of sodium bismuthate and agitate for a few minutes.
Add 50 cc. of the "nitric acid for washing" and filter through an
> Circular No. .',0, Bureau of Standards. Oct. I. 1912.
* The Insoluble residue should be examined for manganese.
422 Methods for Analysis of Pig and Cast Iron.

alundum filter or asbestos pad, 1 washing with the same nitric

acid. Titrate immediately with "standard sodium arsenite"
solution to the disappearance of the pink color, each cubic
centimeter required representing 0.10 per cent manganese.

DETERMINATION OF MANGANESE
BY THE
FORD-WILLIAMS METHOD.

Solutions Requlred.
—Mix equal volumes of
Nitric Acid for Solution. nitric acid,
sp. gr. 1.42, and distilled water.
Standard Ferrous-Sulfate Solution. —Dissolve 10 g. of pure
crystallized Fe S0 4 -7H 2
2 in 900 cc. of distilled water and 100 cc.
of sulfuric acid, sp. gr. 1.84.
Standard Permanganate Solution, about N/10. — Dissolve
3.735 g. of potassium permanganate in 1000 cc. of distilled
water. After aging, standardize this solution by means of
sodium oxalate of ascertained purity (Sorensen's as furnished
by the Bureau of Standards for a fee of $2.00 for 120 g. or $3.00
for 200 g.).

Method.
Dissolve 3 g. of iron in 40 cc. of " nitric acid for solution,"
dilute, filter, 2 and evaporate almost to a syrupy consistency.
Add 40 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and 3 g. of potassium
chlorate. Boil the solution for 15 minutes. Remove from the
source of heat and add 15 cc. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42, and 3 g.
of potassium chlorate. Boil again until yellow fumes cease to
come off. Cool quickly and filter on an asbestos pad in a car-
bon funnel. Wash with cold nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42 (free from
oxides of nitrogen 3 until the iron is removed and then with water

1
In making the asbestos pad it is advisable to have a thin bed and as much surface as
possible. This insures rapid filtration, and the filter may be used until it becomes clogged
with bismuthate. The filtrate must be perfectly clear, since the least particle of bismuthate
carried through the filter will vitiate the results.
2 The insoluble residue should be examined for manganese.
* It is very important to use nitric acid free from oxides of nitrogen, since these dissolve
the precipitated manganese dioxide.
 Serial Designation: A 64-16. 423

until the nitric acid is removed. Transfer the filter to the

beaker in which precipitation was made, add a measured amount
of the "standard ferrous-sulfate solution," so that there shall
be an excess, and titrate the excess with the "standard perman-
ganate solution."
In another operation titrate the same amount of "standard
ferrous-sulfate solution" directly against the permanganate.
The difference between the two amounts of permanganate used
gives the measure of the manganese present in the iron. The
comparison of the ferrous sulfate and permanganate solutions
should be made each day they are used.

DETERMINATION OF CARBON
BY THE
DIRECT-COMBUSTION METHOD.

The method of direct combustion of the metal in oxygen is

recommended, the carbon dioxide obtained being absorbed in
barium-hydroxide solution, the precipitated barium carbonate
filtered off, washed, dissolved in a measured excess of hydro-
chloric acid and the excess titrated against standard alkali.
The use of potassium-hydroxide solution or soda lime for
the absorption of carbon dioxide, with suitable purifying train
between absorption tube and furnace, is recognized as being
capable of very satisfactory refinement and as possessing merit
where the time element is of prime significance.
Owing by which correct results
to the diversity of apparatus
may be obtained in the determination of carbon, the recom-
mendations are intended more to indicate what is acceptable
than to prescribe definitely what shall be used.

Apparatus.
Purifying Train. —The method employed eliminates the
necessity of a purifying train following the furnace, inasmuch
as no precautions are necessary to prevent access of water
vapor, or sulfur trioxide —
the impurities usually guarded against
— from the absorbing apparatus. All that is needed is a
424 Methods for Analysis of Pig and Cast Iron.

calcium-chloride tower filled with stick sodium hydroxide placed

before the furnace, or between the furnace and catalyzer, if, as
recommended, the used for the purpose of oxidizing
latter is
organic matter in the oxygen.
—
Material for Lining Boats. Alundum, "RR Alundum,
alkali-free, specially prepared for carbon determination," as
supplied by dealers is suitable, and is recommended. The
90-mesh or finer grades are used. Chromite, properly sized and
freed from materials causing a blank, may also be employed.
No substance containing alkali or alkaline earth metals, or car-
bon as carbonates or in other form, should be used as a lining
material. Quartz sand, owing to its liability to fuse or to slag
with the oxides of iron, causing bubbles of gas to be enclosed, is
objectionable. Aluminum oxide, made by calcining alum or
otherwise, often contains sulfate not easily destroyed, or may
contain objectionable substances of an alkaline nature.
Catalyzers. — Suitable catalyzers are copper oxide, plati-
nized quartz or asbestos, or platinum gauze. One of these
should be used in the forward part of the combustion apparatus,
as well as in the purifying train preceding the combustion tube
(see above).. Platinized materials sometimes give off volatile
substances on heating, and whatever material is used should

not be subject to this defect.

—
Combustion Apparatus. Any apparatus heated by gas or
electricity which will bring the sample to a temperature of 950
to 1100° C. may be used. Combustion tubes may be porcelain,
glazed on one or both sides, quartz or platinum. Quartz is

liable to devitrification when used continuously at temperatures

above 1000° C, and may then become porous. Combustion
crucibles of platinum may be heated by blast or by Meker
burners.
Boats or Other Containers of Samples being Burned. These —
may be of porcelain, -quartz, alundum, clay, platinum, or nickel,
and should always receive a lining of granular alundum.
Purifying Train before Combustion Apparatus. —
This con-
sists of a tower filled with stick sodium hydroxide, preceded by
a catalyzer.
The Train after the Combustion Apparatus. This consists —
merely of the Meyer tube for absorption of the carbon dioxide,
 Serial Designation: A 64-16. 425

protected by a soda-lime tube at the far end. Meyer tubes

with bulbs of 10 to 15-cc. capacity each, and large bulbs
7 to 10
at the ends, having volumes equal to the combined capacity of
the small bulbs, have been used and found satisfactory.
Filtering Apparatus. —
In nitration for accurate work, care
should be taken to protect the solution from access of extra-
neous carbon dioxide. This is accomplished in the apparatus
shown in Fig. 1. For work requiring less accuracy, the barium
carbonate may be filtered off on a filter made by fitting a carbon
funnel with a perforated procelain disk and filtering by suction.
The precipitate is then washed with distilled water from which
the carbon dioxide has been removed by boiling.

Reagents.

—
Oxygen. Oxygen of not less than 97-per-cent purity is
recommended. Endeavor should be made to obtain oxygen
which gives no blank, since the correction for or elimination of
this is troublesome and uncertain. For the most accurate work
the blank should be completely eliminated by the use of a
catalyzer before the furnace, with a carbon-dioxide absorbent
interposed between furnace and catalyzer.
Tenth-normal Hydrochloric Acid. —
This may be standardized
by any of the accepted methods, or as foDows: Twenty cubic
centimeters of the approximately N/10 acid is measured out
with a pipette, and the silver chloride precipitated by an excess
of silver-nitrate solution in a volume of 50 to 60 cc. After
digesting at 70 to 80° C, until the supernatant liquid is clear,
the chloride is filtered off on a tared Gooch filter and washed
with water containing 2 cc. of nitric acid per 100 cc. of water,
until freed from silver nitrate. After drying to constant weight
at 130° C, the increase of weight over the original tare is noted,
and from this weight, corresponding to the silver chloride, the
strength of the hydrochloric acid is calculated, after which it is
adjusted to the strength prescribed. The standardization should
be based upon several concordant determinations, using varying
amounts of acid.

1 cc. N/10 HC1 = 0.0006 g. carbon.

426 Methods for Analysis of Pig and Cast Iron.

—
Methyl Orange. Dissolve 0.02 g. in 100 cc. of hot distilled
water and filter.
—
Tenth-normal Sodium-Hydroxide Solution. This is stand-
ardized against the hydrochloric acid. Methyl orange is used as
the indicator. The sodium-hyroxide solution should be stored
in a large bottle from which it may be driven out by air pressure,
protecting against carbon dioxide by soda-lime tubes.
—
Barium-Hydroxide Solution. A saturated solution is filtered
and stored in a large reservoir from which it is delivered by air
pressure, protecting from carbon dioxide by a soda-lime tube.
Use enough of this solution to fill all the small bulbs of the
Meyer tube when the latter is properly set up for absorption.

Factors Influencing Rapid Combustion.

—
Manner of Distributing Sample in Boat. This is of consid-
erable importance. With all samples, close packing in a small
space is conducive to rapid combustion. In the case of samples
which burn too vigorously, a satisfactory regulation may some-
times be attained by spreading the sample loosely over the
lining in the boat.
—
Rate of Admitting Oxygen. The rate at which oxygen is
admitted is also a factor in the velocity of combustion; a mod-
erate rate of burning is to be sought. This is desirable from
the standpoint of the complete absorption of the carbon dioxide
by the barium-hydroxide solution. The above-mentioned
factors can be governed so as to burn successfully irons of a
very wide range of compositions, in either fine or coarse
particles.

Method.
After having properly set up and tested the apparatus,
place 1 g. of iron in a moderately packed condition on the bed
material and introduce the boat into the combustion apparatus,
already heated to the proper temperature. After about a
minute sample and container to reach the tem-
(to allow the
perature, of the furnace), admit oxygen somewhat more rapidly
than it is consumed, as shown by the rate of bubbling in the
 Serial Designation: A 64-16. 427

Meyer tube. 1 The sample burns completely in 1 or 2 minutes,

and all that is now necessary is to sweep all the carbon dioxide
into the absorption apparatus. This can be accomplished in
6 to 8 minutesby passing about 1 or 2 liters of oxygen. Detach
the Meyer tube and filter and wash the barium carbonate, using
the special filtering apparatus shown. After solution in a
measured excess of hydrochloric acid (the Meyer tube being
washed out with a portion of the acid, to remove adhering
barium carbonate), titrate the excess of acid against alkali and
from the data thus obtained calculate the percentage of carbon.

Apparatus and Procedure for Filtration.

The apparatus is shown to approximately one-tenth size in
Fig. 1, which is The stop-cock is a three-way
self-explanatory.
cock connected to the suction pipe. The rubber tubing con-
nected to the Meyer tube should be of best grade black rubber
and the lengths should be so chosen as to permit of easy manip-
ulation of the tube. 2 The Meyer tube is connected or discon-
nected by the rubber stoppers which are left always attached to
the rubber tubes. The carbon tube C is fitted with a per-
forated porcelain plate sliding easily.
The funnel is prepared for filtration by making on the
porcelain disk a felt of asbestos about xV to | in. in thickness,
using amphibole (not serpentine) asbestos which has been care-
fully digested with strong hydrochloric acid for several hours
and washed with water until it gives no acid reaction. On top
of the asbestos pad is placed a layer of similarly treated quartz
mixed with asbestos, of the height shown. A mixture of quartz
grains of various, sizes (approximately 50 per cent passing a

1 As a precaution against error resulting from too rapid passage of the gases, it la well
to attach a second barium-hydroxide tube to retain any carbon dioxide that may pass the
first.

For the most accurate work the Meyer tubes should be washed with dilute acid before
beginning work each day. After a determination is finished the tube should be completely
filled two or three times with tap water, then rinsed with distilled water, in order to remove

the carbon dioxide liberated when dissolving the carbonate from the previous determination.
The flask containing the carbonate should be thoroughly agitated after adding the acid,
since the carbonate sometimes dissolves rather slowly if this is not done; this Is particularly
the case if it has packed much during filtration.
» It Is well to wash out the rubber tubes connected to the Meyer tube with • little water

each day before beginning work.

428 Methods for Analysis of Pig and Cast Iron.

20-mesh sieve and 50 per cent passing a 10-mesh and remaining

on a 20-mesh sieve) is suitable. The mixture of quartz and
asbestos may be obtained by filling the funnel from a beaker
(directing against it a stream from a wash-bottle) while main-
taining a gentle suction. In this way the asbestos is properly
mixed with the quartz. A little experience and attention to
these details will enable one to prepare the quartz-bed in a
manner that will greatly expedite filtration. 1 The stopper is
now inserted in the funnel, the Meyer tube connected as shown
and the liquid and precipitate sucked into the funnel. Only

Fig. 1. —Apparatus for Filtering Barium Carbonate.

a gentle suction should be used. When necessary P 3 is opened

to admit air back of the column of liquid in the Meyer tube.
When the contents of the Meyer tube have been transferred,
the large bulb nearest B is half filled with water by opening P\\
the stop-cock S
operated during this and subsequent opera-
is

tions so as to maintain a gentle suction all the time. is now M

manipulated so as to bring the wash water in contact with all
parts of the interior, after which the water is sucked through
C; Pi is left open during this and subsequent washings. 2 After

1
Glass wool should on no account be used as a substitute for the quartz, on account of
the probability of errors arising from its attack by the alkali or acid.
1 The operation of filtering can be carried out very rapidly after a little practice.
 Serial Designation: A 64-16. 429

wash water to drain

eight washings as directed, allowing the
off thoroughly each time before adding more, may beM
detached, the stopper removed from the funnel and the wash-
ing completed by filling C to the top with C0 2 -free water,
sucking off completely and repeating the operation once. With
care the washing may be done with 150 cc. of water. Air is now
admitted through the side opening of S, C is removed and the
porcelain disk carrying the asbestos, quartz and barium car-
bonate is thrust, by means of a long glass rod, into a flask,
removing any adhering particles from the sides of C, by a stream
of water from a wash bottle. An excess of the standard acid is
now added from a burette or pipette, using a portion to wash
out M, and after the contents of the flask have been thoroughly
agitated by shaking, the excess of acid is titrated against the
standard alkali, using 3 drops of the methyl-orange indicator.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
LAKE COPPER WIRE BARS, CAKES, SLABS, BILLETS,
INGOTS, AND INGOT BARS.

Serial Designation: B 4-13.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation B 4; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1911; Revised, 1913.

Definition. *• Li order to be classed as Lake, copper must originate

on the northern peninsula of Michigan, U. S. A.

Markt. 2. All wire bars, cakes, slabs, and billets shall be stamped
with the maker's brand and furnace charge mark. Ingots
and ingot bars shall have a brand stamped or cast in, but need
have no furnace charge mark.
lots. 3. The refiner shall arrange carloads or lots so that as far
as possible each shall contain pieces from but one furnace charge,
in order to facilitate testing by the user.

Reiistivitj. 4. ( a) Low Resistance Lake. —Lake copper offered for elec-

trical purposes, whether fire or electrolytically refined, shall
be known as "Low Resistance Lake."
LowResistance Lake wire bars shall have a resistivity not
to exceed 0.15535 international ohms per meter- gram at 20° C.
(annealed). All ingots and ingot bars shall have a resistivity
not to exceed 0.15694 international ohms per meter-gram at
20° C. (annealed).
(430)
 Serial Designation: B 4-13. 431

Cakes, slabs, and billets shall come under the ingot classi-
fication, except when specified for electrical use at time of pur-
chase; in which case wire-bar classification shall apply.
(b) High Resistance Lake. —Lake copper having a resis-
tivity greater than 0.15694 international ohms per meter-gram
at 20° C. shall be known as "High Resistance Lake."
5. (a) Low Resistance Lake copper shall have a purity Metal
of at least 99.880 per cent as determined by electrolytic assay, Content -

silver being counted as copper.

High Resistance Lake copper shall have a purity of
(b)

at least 99.880 per cent, copper, silver, and arsenic being counted
together. The arsenic content of High Resistance Lake copper,
when required for special purposes, shall be the subject of
agreement at time of purchase.
6. Wire bars, cakes, slabs, and be substantially
billets shall Physical
free from shrink holes, cold sets, pits, sloppy edges, concave standard,

tops and similar defects in set or casting. This clause shall not
apply to ingots or ingot bars, in which case physical defects
are of no consequence.
7. Five per cent variation in weight or \ in. variation in weights of

any dimension from the refiner's published list or purchaser's Individual

specified size shall be considered good delivery; provided,

however, that wire bars may vary in length 1 per cent from the
fisted or specified length, and cakes 3 per cent from the listed
or specified size in any dimension greater than 8 in. The weight
of ingot and ingot-bar copper shall not exceed that specified by
more than 10 per cent, but otherwise its variation is not impor-
tant.
8. Claims shall be made in writing within thirty days of Claims,
receipt of copper at the customer's mill, and the results of
the customer's tests shall accompany such claims. The refiner
shall be given one week from date of receipt of complaint to
investigate his records, and shall then either agree to replace
the defective copper or send a representative to the mill. No
claims will be considered unless made as above stated, and if

the copper in question, unused, cannot be shown to the refiner's

representative.
Claims against quality will be considered as follows:
 432 Specifications for Lake Copper.

(a) Resistivity by furnace charges, ingot lots, or ingot-bar

lots.

(b) Metal contents by furnace charges, ingot lots, or ingot-

bar lots.

(c) Physical defects by individual pieces.

(d) Variation in weights or dimensions by individual
pieces.
investigation of 9. The refiner's representative shall inspect all pieces
Claims.
where physical defects or variation in weight or dimension are
claimed. If agreement is not reached, the question of fact
shall be submitted to a mutually agreeable umpire, whose
decision shall be final.
In a question of metal contents each party shall select
a sample of two pieces. These shall be drilled in the presence
of both parties, several holes approximately § in. in diameter
being drilled completely through each piece; scale from set
shall be rejected. No lubricant shall be used and drilling shall
not be forced sufficiently to cause, oxidation of chips. The
resulting samples shall be cut up, mixed, and separated into
three parts, each of which shall be placed in a sealed package,
one for each party and one for the umpire if necessary. Each
party shall make an analysis, and if the results do not establish
or dismiss the claim to the satisfaction of both parties the third
sample shall be submitted to a mutually agreeable umpire, who
shall determine the question of fact, and whose determination
shall be final.
In a question of resistivity each party shall select two
samples, and in the presence of both parties these shall be
rolled hot and drawn cold into wire of 0.080 in. diameter, approxi-
mately, which shall be annealed at approximately 500° C.
Three samples shall be cut from each coil and the same procedure
followed as described in the previous paragraph.
Settlement 10. The expenses of the shipper's representative and of
of claims.
the umpire shall be paid by the loser, or divided in proportion
to the concession made in case of compromise. In case of
rejection being established, damage shall be limited to
the
payment of freight both ways by the refiner for substitution
of an equivalent weight of copper meeting these specifications.
 Serial Designation: B 4-13. 433

Explanatory Note.
These specifications have been drawn to cover the peculiar
trade situation which has classified the large production of copper
from product in a class by itself.
this geographical district as a
It is an academic
realized that a better classification from
point of view could be made by method of production or by
chemical composition, but the trade does not yet seem ready for
such a step.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ELECTROLYTIC COPPER WIRE BARS, CAKES, SLABS,
BILLETS, INGOTS, AND INGOT BARS.

Serial Designation : B 5-13.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation B 5 ; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1911; Revised, 1913.

Marks. 1. All wire bars, cakes, slabs, and billets shall be stamped
with the maker's brand and furnace charge mark. Ingots and
ingot bars shall have a brand stamped or cast in, but need have
no furnace charge mark.
Lots. 2. The refiner shall arrange carloads or lots so that as far
as possible each shall contain pieces from but one furnace charge,
in order to facilitate testing by the user.
Quality. 3. (a) Metal Content. —The copper in all shapes shall have
a purity of at least 99.880 per cent, as determined by electrolytic
assay, silver being counted as copper.
(b) Resistivity. —All wire bars shall have a resistivity not
to exceed 0.15535 international ohms per meter-gram at 20° C.
(annealed); all ingot and ingot bars shall have a resistivity
not to exceed 0.15694 international ohms per meter-gram at
20° C. (annealed).
Cakes, slabs, and billets shall come under the ingot classifica-
tion, except when specified for electrical use at time of purchase,
in which case wire-bar classification shall apply.
(434)
 Serial Designation: B 5-13. 435

Wire bars, cakes, slabs, and billets shall be substantially

4. Physical
standard -
free from shrink holes, cold sets, pits, sloppy edges, concave
tops, and similar defects in set or casting. This clause shall not
apply to ingots or ingot bars, in which case physical defects
are of no consequence.
Five per cent variation in weight or j in. variation in Weights
5. of

any dimension from the refiner's published list or purchaser's Pieces.

specified size shall be considered good delivery; provided,
however, that wire bars may vary in length 1 per cent from the
listed or specified length, and cakes 3 per cent from the listed
or specified size in any dimension greater than 8 in. The
weight of ingot and ingot-bar copper shall not exceed that
specified by more than 10 per cent, but otherwise its variation
is not important.

6. Claims shall be made in writing within thirty days of Claims,

receipt of copper at the customer's mill, and the results of

the customer's tests shall accompany such claims. The refiner
shall be given one week from date of receipt of complaint to
investigate his records, and shall then either agree to replace
the defective copper or send a representative to the mill. No
claims shall be considered unless made as above stated, and if

the copper in question, unused, cannot be shown to the refiner's

representative.
Claims against quality will be considered as follows:

(a) Resistivity by furnace charges, ingot lots, or ingot-bar

lots.
(b) Metal contents by furnace charges, ingot lots, or ingot-
bar lots.

(c) Physical defects by individual pieces.

(d) Variation in weights or dimensions by individual pieces.

7. The refiner's representative shall inspect all pieces where investigation

°
aimi
physical defects or variation in weight or dimension are claimed.
If agreement is no t reached, the question of fact shall be sub-
mitted to a mutually agreeable umpire, whose decision shall be
final.

In a question of metal contents each party shall select a

sample of two pieces. These shall be drilled in the presence .

of both parties, several holes approximately £ in. in diameter

 436 Specifications for Electrolytic Copper.

being drilled completely through each piece scale from set shall
;

be rejected. No lubricant shall be used and drilling shall not

be forced sufficiently to cause oxidation of chips. The resulting
samples shall be cut up, mixed, and separated into three parts,
each of which shall be placed in a sealed package, one for each
party and one for the umpire if necessary. Each party shall
make an analysis, and if the results do not establish or dismiss
the claim to the satisfaction of both parties the third sample
shall be submitted to a mutually agreeable umpire, who shall
determine the question of fact, and whose determination shall
be final.
In a question of resistivity each party shall select two
samples, and in the presence of both parties these shall be rolled
hot and drawn cold into wire of 0.080 in. diameter, approximately,
which shall be annealed at approximately 500° C. Three samples
shall be cut from each coil and the same procedure followed as
described in the previous paragraph.
Settlement
£ plaJnta
8. The expenses
*

the umpire shall be paid

of the
by the
AAA
shipper's
loser, or
representative and of
divided in proportion
to the concession made compromise.
in case of In case of
rejection being established, the damage shall be limited to
payment of freight both ways by the refiner for substitution
of an equivalent weight of copper meeting these specifications.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THB

INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION FOR TESTING MATERIALS.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
SPELTER.

Serial Designation: B 6 - 18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation B 6; the

final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1911; Revised, 1914, 1918.

1. Under these specifications Virgin Spelter, that is, spelter Grades,

made from ore or similar raw material by a process of reduction
and distillation or by electrolysis and not produced from reworked
metal, is considered in five grades, as follows:

1 High Grade.
2 Intermediate.
3 Brass Special.
4 Selected.
5 Prime Western.

2. A brand shall be cast in each slab by which the maker Marks,

and grade can be identified.
3. The maker shall use care to have each carload of as Lota.

uniform quality as possible.

 438 Specifications for Spelter.

Composition. 4. 1. High Grade} —The spelter shall not contain over:

0.07 per cent lead.

0.03 " iron.
0.07 " cadmium.

It shall be free from aluminum.

The sum of the lead, iron, and cadmium shall not exceed
0.10 per cent.

2. Intermediate. —The spelter shall not contain over:

0.20 per cent lead.

0.03 " iron.
0.50 " cadmium.

It shall be free from aluminum.

The sum of the lead, iron, and cadmium shall not exceed
0.50 per cent.

S. Brass Special. —The spelter shall not contain over:

0.60 per cent lead.

0.03 " iron.
0.50 cadmium.
"
from aluminum.
It shall- be free
The sum of the lead, iron, and cadmium shall not exceed
1.0 per cent.

4- Selected. —The spelter shall not contain over:

0.80 per cent lead.
0.04 " iron.
0.75 " cadmium.

It shall be free from aluminum.

The sum of the lead, iron, and cadmium shall not exceed
1.25 per cent.

5. Prime Western. —The spelter shall not contain over:

1.60 per cent lead.

0.08 " iron.

1 For slush castings and certain zinc-aluminum alloys, a special grade of spelter may
be required, as noted in "Spelter, Its Grades and Uses," published as Appendix I to the
report of Committee B-2, Proceedings. Am. Soc. Test. Mats., Vol. XVI, Part I. p. 183 (1916).
 Serial Designation: B 6-18. 439

5. The slabs shall be reasonably free from surface corrosion Physical

or adhering foreign matter.

6. Take ten random from a carload and saw each
slabs at Sampling."

slab completely across from the middle of one long side to the
middle of the other and use the sawdust as the sample; or,
drill three 9-mm. holes along one diagonal of each slab, boring

completely through and taking care to make fine drillings;

the holes should be drilled as nearly as possible at the middle
and halfway between either end and the middle of such diagonals.
Go over the drillings or sawings with a powerful magnet to
take out any iron which may have come from the drill or saw,
and mix the sample thoroughly. The drill or saw shall be
thoroughly cleaned before use, and no lubricant shall be used
in either drilling or sawing.
7. Lead. —The Electrolytic and Lead-Acid methods de- Methods
n yS18,
of

scribed below are believed to be of equal merit, so far as accuracy

is concerned, but where laboratories are equipped for electrolysis
the electrolytic method is preferred as a time saver.
(a) Electrolytic Method. 2 —Place 8.643 g. of the sample in
a 400-cc. beaker and add sufficient water to cover the sample.
Then add gradually and cautiously 30 cc. of concentrated HNO,
(sp. 1.42); when the action is complete boil the solution
gr.

for a few minutes to expel nitrous fumes. Wash the watch

glass and sides of the beaker and transfer the solution to a 200-cc.
electrolytic beaker. Dilute to 125 cc. and electrolyze with a
current of five amperes. The time required for the electrolysis
is from \ to f hour, depending upon the amount of lead pres-
ent in the sample. Test the solutions for complete precipi-
tation of lead by washing the watch glasses and sides of the
beaker, so that the depth of the solution is increased about
12 mm. Then continue the current for 15 minutes and if
the newly exposed surface is still bright, the lead is completely
deposited. Wash the anode three or four times with distilled
1 Section 6 on Sampling
and Section 7 on Analysis are based on the Report of the Sub-
Committee on Methods of Analysis of Non-Ferrous Alloys of the Division of Industrial Chem-
ists and Chemical Engineers of the American Chemical Society, approved by the Supervisory

Committee on Standard Methods of Analysis of that Society; Journal of Industrial and Entl-
neerinf Chemistry, Vol. 7. 1915. p. 547.
1
The empirical factor weight (8.643) It used Instead of the theoretical one (8.66). as the
dried dioxide Is liable to contain some adherent and Included water, expelled with difficulty.
B. P. Smith's "Electro-Analysis." 4th edition, p. 102.
440 Specifications for Spelter.

water, once with alcohol and then dry in an oven, or on a hot

plate, at 210° C. for \ hour and weigh.
The weight of the PbOj in milligrams, divided by 100, will
give the percentage of lead. The Pb0 2 deposit can be readily
removed by covering the anode with dilute HNOi and inserting
a rod of copper.
The electrodes are cylinders of platinum gauze with 400
meshes per sq. cm. The anodes are 30 mm. in diameter, by
30 mm. h'gh, with a stem 105 mm. long of No. 16 B. & S.
gage wire (1.29 mm.), making the total height 137 mm.
The cathodes are 12 mm. in diameter by 30 mm. high, with a
stem 105 mm. long of No. 16 B. & S. gage wire, making the
total height 137 mm.
—
Lead-Acid Method. 1 Place in a 350-cc. beaker 25 g. of
(b)

the drillings or sawings if the spelter is of Grade No. 1, 15 g. if

of Grade No. 2, 10 g. if of Grade No. 3, or 5 g. if of Grades Nos.
4 or 5, and add according to the size of the sample taken, 300,
180, 120 or 60 cc. of lead acid. After all but about 1 g. of the spel-
ter is dissolved, filter on a close filter and wash out the beaker a
couple of times with lead acid from a wash bottle. Wash the
undissolved matter from the filter into the original beaker with
water and dissolve with a small amount of hot 1 1 8 Add : HN0 .

40 cc. of lead acid, and evaporate until strong fumes of H1SO4

escape. When cool, add 35 cc. of water (which is the quantity
of water evaporated from the lead acid) and heat to boiling.
Add the first filtrate (containing the greater part of the
zinc, and possibly a small amount of PbSO*), stir well, and
allow to stand for at least five hours, preferably over night.
Filter on a Gooch crucible, wash with lead acid, then with a
mixture of equal parts of alcohol and water, and finally with
alcohol alone. Set the Gooch crucible inside a porcelain crucible
in order to avoid reduction of lead by flame gases and mechanical
disintegration of the asbestos mat. Ignite for five minutes at
the full heat of a Tirrell burner. Cool and weigh as PbSO*.
1
"Lead Acid"is a solution of one volume of HjSO* in seven volumes of water, saturated

irith PbSOi. prepared as follows: 300 cc. of ILSO< (sp. gr. 1.84) are poured into 1800 cc.
It is
ftf water; 1 g. of lead acetate is dissolved in 300 cc. of water and is added to the hot solution

with stirring. The solution is allowed to settle for several days and is siphoned off through a
thick asbestos filter for use. When "lead acid " is used it is unnecessary to consider the solubil-
ity of the PbSO<, since the solution is always brought back to the same volume as the volume of
"lead acid" originally added; consequently, when the PbSO< is filtered no more lead remains
In the filtrate than was originally added in the "lead acid."
 Serial Designation: B 6-18. 441

Iron. —Place 25 g. of spelter in a tall 700-cc. beaker and

dissolve cautiously in 125 cc. of HN0 3 (sp. gr. 1.42). Boil,
dilute to about 300 cc, add 10 g. of NH C1, 4 and then ammonia
until the precipitated Zn(OH) 2 has redissolved. Boil, let

settle and filter "Black Ribbon" or

on an 11-cm. S. & S.
similar filter paper. Wash w'th dilute ammonia and with
hot water. Dissolve the precipitated Fe 2 (OH)e with hot 1 4 :

H2 S0 4 add cc. of 1 1 H2 S0 4 pass through a Jones reductor,

40 ,
: ,
1

wash first with 150 cc. of dilute H 2 S0 4 and then with 100 cc.
of water and titrate with KMn0 4 The KMn0 4 solution .

contains approximately 0.2 g. of the crystals per liter. One

cubic centimeter of KMn0 4 solution will equal about 0.000334 g.
of iron. Run a blank with the same amounts of acid and water
and correct accordingly.
Standardize the KMn0 4 against sodium oxalate. Weigh
duplicate samples of sodium oxalate, 0.0200 g. each, an amount
which may require between 49 and 50 cc. of the KMn0 4 solution.
To convert sodium oxalate to iron, use the factor 0.833.
—
Cadmium. Place 25 g. of drillings in a tall 500-cc. beaker;
add 250 cc. of water and 55 cc. of concentrated HC1 and
stir. When the action has almost ceased add more acid
with stirring, using about 2 cc. at a time, and allowing to
stand after each addition of acid, until finally all but about 2 g.
of the zinc have been dissolved. 2 About 60 cc. of acid in all are
usually required; it is best to allow the first 55 cc. of acid to
act over night. Filter, first transferring one of the undissolved
pieces of zinc to the filter, and wash a couple of times with
water. Discard the filtrate. Wash the undissolved matter on
the filter paper into the 500-cc. beaker, cover, and dissolve in
HNO3. Transfer to a casserole, add 20 cc. of 1 1 2 S0 4 : H
and evaporate until fumes appear, take up with about 100 cc.
of water, boil, cool, and let settle for several hours (best
over night). Filter off the PbSOj on paper, wash with water,
retain the filtrate and discard the PbS0 4 Dilute the filtrate .

to 400 cc, add about 10 g. of 4 C1, and pass 2 S for one NH H

hour. It is occasionally necessary to start the precipitation
1
[f. before passing the solution through the reductor. a large amount of PbSOi is present,
it Is well to filter it off from clogging the reductor.
so as to prevent it
1 Care should be taken that the solution
of the sample proceeds slowly, particularly towards
the last, and that the stated amount of spelter remain In the undissolved residue.
442 Specifications for Spelter.

of the CdS by the addition of a drop or two of ammonia to

the dilute so'ution. Allow to stand until the precipitate has
settled, and then filter off the impure CdS in a loose-bottom
Gooch crucible; remove the CdS by carefully punching out
the bottom into a tall 200-cc. beaker. Wipe off any CdS
remaining on the sides of the crucible, using a little asbestos
pulp, add 60 cc. of 1 5 2 S0 4 H
and boil for one-half hour.
:

In case of spelters carrying large amounts of cadmium it

may be necessary to add more acid. The dilute acid dissolves
cadmium and zinc sulfides, but not lead sulfide. Filter and
dilute to 300 cc, add about 5 g. of 4 C1 NH
and precipitate
with H
2 S again in order to get rid of traces of zinc. In case a
large amount of cadmium is present, a third precipitation
may be necessary. After the final precipitation, let settle,
filter and transfer to a weighed platinum dish, cover, and
dissolve in 1 : 3 HC1. Also dissolve the sulfide remaining
on the filter paper in hot 1 3 HC1, and add it to the solution
:

in the platinum dish. H

Add a little 2 S0 4 and evaporate the
solution until copious fumes escape. Dilute with water, add
a few cubic centimeters of concentrated HN0 3 to ^oxidize any
filter-paper shreds, and again evaporate the solution until
H
fumes of 2 S0 4 come off freely. Remove the excess of 2 S0 4 by H
heating the dish cautiously, and finally heat to between 500 and
600° C. or to dull redness, and weigh the cadmium as sulfate.
Alternate Method for Cadmium. —
Proceed as above until
the CdS has been dissolved in HC1. Oxidize with HNO3 and
filter from sulfur. Transfer the solution to a 200-cc. electrol-
ytic beaker, add a drop or two of phenolphthalein and then
pure NaOH or KOH solution until a permanent red color is
obtained. Add a strong solution of pure KCN with constant
stirring until the precipitate of Cd(OH) 2 is completely dis-
solved. Avoid using an excess of the KCN. Dilute the
solution to 150 cc. and electrolyze with a current of five amperes,
using gauze electrodes of the same size as in the lead determina-
tion. The time required is 1 to 2 hours. The solution should
always be tested for cadmium as follows: Raise the liquid in
the beaker and then note after twenty minutes the newly exposed
surface of the electrode. If it is still bright, the cadmium is

completely deposited. Next wash the electrodes with distilled

 Serial Designation: B 6-18. 443

water and then with alcohol. Dry at 100° C, cool and weigh.
The increase is metallic cadmium.
8. Claims to be considered shall be in writing within thirty Claims,

days of receipt of material at customer's plant and the results of

customer's test shall be given. The shipper shall be given one
week from date of receipt of such claim to investigate his records
and then shall either agree to satisfy the claim or send a repre-
sentative to the plant.
(a) Analysis by Car Lots. —No claims shall be considered
unless the minimum samples as specified for the grade in question
can be shown to such representative.
(b) Physical Defects of Individual Pieces. —No claims shall
be considered unless the spelter in question, unused, can be shown
to such representative.
9. Where the spelter satisfies the chemical and physical Plant

requirements of these specifications, it shall not be condemned Treatment

for defects of alloys in which it is used or for defects in the
coating of galvanized products.
10. The maker's representative shall inspect all pieces investigation
where physical defects are claimed. If agreement is not reached of Claima -

the question of fact shall be submitted to a mutually agreeable

umpire, whose decision shall be final.
On a question of metal contents a sample shall be drawn
by representatives both parties as described under "Sampling,"
of
Section 6. The properly mixed and quartered sample shall be
separated into three parts, each of which shall be placed in a
sealed package, one for each party and one for an umpire if
necessary. Each party shall make an analysis, and if the
results do not establish or dismiss the claim to the satisfaction
of both parties, the third sample shall be submitted to a mutually
agreeable umpire, who shall determine the question of quality,
and whose determination shall be final.
11. The expenses of the seller's representative and of the Settlement
of Cla,ms
umpire be paid by the loser or divided in proportion to
shall
-

concession made in case of compromise.

In case of rejection being established, damages shall be
limited to the payment of freight both ways by the seller for
substitution of an equivalent weight of spelter meeting these
specifications.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
MANGANESE-BRONZE INGOTS FOR SAND CASTINGS.

Serial Designation: B 7-14.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation B 7; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1911; Revised, 1914.

Material 1. These specifications cover the copper-zinc alloy known

Covered.
commercially as manganese-bronze.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Size of 2. The bronze shall be cast in the form of ingots having
ingots.
notched flat bottoms, approximately 3 by 2f in. wide by 12 in.
long, properly tapered to strip easily from an iron mold.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES.

Chemical 3. The bronze shall conform to the following requirements
Composition. as to chemical composition:

Copper 53 to 62 per cent

Zinc 36 to 54
Aluminum . 05 to 0.5 "
Lead not over 0. 15 "

(444)
 Serial Designation: B 7-14. 445

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

4. The bronze shall conform to the following minimum Tension Tests,

requirements as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 70 000

Elongation in 2 in., per cent 20

5. (a) The tension test specimen shall be cut from one Tension T««t
pe men "*
corner near the bottom of the test ingot.
(b) The specimen shall conform to the dimensions shown
in Fig. 1. The ends shall be of a form to fit the holders of the
testing machine in such a way that the load shall be axial.

Radius
not less
than q -.
L__.

f A \

-ley k

f
1

\<— 2 Gage Length -~*\

Note - The Gage length, Parallel Portions and Fillets shall be as Shown,

but the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit tha Holders of
the Testing Machine.

Fig. 1.

6. (a) One test ingot shall be selected by the inspector Number

of Te8ts '

to represent 10,000 lb. of ingots or fraction thereof.

(b) If any specimen shows defective machining or
test
develops flaws, it may
be discarded, in which case two additional
tests may be selected by the inspector from the same lot, and
tested to represent the lot.

IV. MARKING.
7. Each ingot shall be stamped with its proper heat or Marking.
charge number.
 446 Specifications for Manganese-Bronze Ingots.

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 8. (a) Inspection may be made at the manufacturer's

works where the castings are made, or at the point at which they
are received, at the option of the purchaser.
(b) If the purchaser elects to have inspection made at
the manufacturer's works, the inspector representing the pur-
chaser shall have free entry, at all times while work on the
contract of the purchaser is being performed, to
all parts of the

manufacturers' works which concern the manufacture of the

material ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector,
free of cost, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the
material is being furnished in accordance with these specifica-
tions. All tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not
to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
Rejection. 9. (a) If the test ingots selected to represent a lot fail

to conform to the requirements specified in Sections 3 or 4, all

ingots in such lot will be rejected, irrespective of the heat or
heats from which the test ingots are selected.
(b) Castings which show injurious defects revealed by

machining operations subsequent to acceptance may be rejected,

and, if rejected, shall be replaced by the manufacturer free of
cost to the. purchaser. The full weight of the original material
rejected shall be returned to the manufacturer.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
THE ALLOY: COPPER, 88 PER CENT; TIN, 10 PER CENT;
ZINC, 2 PER CENT.

Serial Designation: B 10 - 18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation B 10; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1915; Adopted, 1918.

1. (a) These specifications cover the alloy commercially Material

Covered -

known as government bronze, admiralty gun-metal, gun-metal,

or 88-10-2 mixture, when used in castings.
(b) It is recommended that not be used
this alloy shall
where castings are subjected to a temperature exceeding 260° C.
(500° F.).

I. MANUFACTURE.
2. The alloy may be made by any approved method. Process.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. The alloy shall conform to the following requirements Chemical
Composition.
as to chemical composition:

Copper 86-89 per cent.

Tin 8-11
Zinc 1- 3

4. An analysis of each melt shall be made by the manu- Chemical

AnalJ 81s
facturer. The chemical composition thus determined shall be -

(447)
 H

448 Specifications for Government Bronze.

reported to the purchaser or his representative and shall conform

to the requirements specified in Section 3.
Sampling. (a) The sample for chemical analysis may be taken
5.
eitherby sawing, drilling or milling the casting or tension test
specimen and shall represent the average cross-section of the
piece.
(b) The saw, drill, cutter or other tool used shall be thor-
oughly cleaned. No lubricant shall be used in the operation,

K- 5 r. —
K >1
1*'
1

->M«— -ill - -
Iq
'a IK3- ' 16 3.'
1 Jz 3Z 1,
*

*\
^

Fig. U
Radius
not less

—
r
H"- 2 "Gage Length

Note >- The Gagelength, Parallel Portions and Fillets shall be as Shown,
but the Ends may be of any Form which will Fit the Ho/ders of
the Testing Machine.

Fig. 2.

and the saw dust or metal chips shall be carefully treated with
a magnet to remove any particles of iron derived from the tools.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Testa. 6. The conform to the following
alloy shall minimum re-

quirements as to tensile properties:

Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 30 000
Elongation in 2 in., per cent 14
 Serial Designation: B 10-18. 449

7. (a) Two test bars of the form and dimensions shown Test Specimens

in Fig. 1 shall be an integral part of large castings, or cast sep-

arately in the case of small castings to represent a lot or melt
and shall be molded in a manner similar to the castings which
they represent. If the castings are heat-treated, the test bars
representing such castings shall be similarly heat-treated.
(b) The manufacturer and purchaser
shall agree whether
test bars can be attached to castings, on the location of the
bars on the castings, on the castings to which bars are to be
attached, and on the method of casting unattached bars. Un-
less otherwise agreed upon, the minimum lot shall be considered
as 500 lb.
Tension test specimens, turned from the test bar shown
(c)

in Fig. shall conform to the dimensions shown in Fig. 2.

1, The
ends shall be of a form to fit the holders of the testing machine
in such a way that the load shall be axial.

8. (a) Two tension tests shall be made from each lot or Number of Test
melt.
(b) If any
specimen shows defective machining or
test
develops flaws, it may
be discarded; in which case the manu-
facturer and the purchaser or his representative shall agree
upon the selection of another specimen in its stead.

IV. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

9. (a) Inspection may be made at the manufacturer's inspection,
works where castings are made, or at the point at which they are
received, at the option of the purchaser.
(b) If the purchaser elects to have inspection made at the

manufacturer's works, the inspector representing the purchaser

shall have free entry, at all times while work on the contract
of the purchaser is being performed, to allparts of the manu-
facturer's works which concern the manufacture of the material
ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of
cost, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is
being furnished in accordance with these specifications. All
tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to interfere
unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
 450 Specifications for Government Bronze.

Rejection. io. Castings which show injurious defects

revealed by
machining operations subsequent to acceptance may be rejected,
and, if rejected, shall be replaced by the manufacturer
free of
cost to the purchaser. The full weight of the original
material
rejected shall be returned to the manufacturer.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
HARD-DRAWN COPPER WIRE.
Serial Designation: B 1-15.
These specifications are issued under the fixed designation B 1 the final ;

number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of

revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1909; Revised, 1911, 1913, 1915.

1. The material shall be copper of such quality and purity Material,

that, when drawn hard, it shall have the properties and character-
istics herein required.
These specifications cover hard-drawn round wire, Shapes
2.

grooved trolley wire, and figure-eight trolley wire, as hereinafter

described.
3. (a) The wire, in all shapes, must be free from all imper- Finish,

fections not consistent with the best commercial practice.

(b) Necessary brazes in hard-drawn wire must be made in
accordance with best commercial practice, and tests upon a sec-
tion of wire containing a braze must show at least 95 per cent of
the tensile strength of the unbrazed wire. Elongation tests
are not to be made upon test sections including brazes.
4. (a) Package sizes for round wire shall be agreed upon in Packages,
the placing of individual orders; standard packages of grooved
trolley wire shall be shipments upon reels holding about 2500 lb.

each.
(b) The wire shall be protected against damage in ordinary
handling and shipping.
 .

452 Specifications for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire.

Specific Gravity. 5. For the purpose of calculating weights, cross-sections, etc.,

the specific gravity of copper shall be taken as 8.89 at 20° C.
Inspection. 6. All testing and inspection shall be made at the place of

manufacture. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector

representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities to enable him
to satisfy himself that the material conforms to the requirements
of these specifications.

Hard-Drawn Round Wire.

Dimensions and 7. (#) Size shall be expressed as the diameter of the wire in
6
Variations. decimal fractions of an inch, using not more than three places of
decimals; that is, in mils.
(b) Wire is expected to be accurate in diameter; permissible
variations from nominal diameter shall be:

For wire 0.100 in. in diameter and larger, one per cent over
or under;
For wire less than 0.100 in. in diameter, one mil over or
under.

(c) Each coil is to be gaged at three places, one near each

end, and one approximately at the middle; the coil may be re-
jected if, two points being within the accepted limits, the third
point gage more than 2 per cent in the case of wire 0.064
is off

in. in diameter and larger, or more than 3 per cent in the case

of wire less than 0.064 in. in diameter.

Physical Test. 8. Wire shall be so drawn that its tensile strength and elonga-

tion shall be at least equal to the value stated in Table I. Tensile

tests shall be made upon fair samples, and the elongation of wire
larger in diameter that 0.204 in. shall be determined as the perma-
nent increase in length, due to the breaking of the wire in tension,
measured between bench marks placed upon the wire origin-
ally 10 in. apart. The elongation of wire 0.204 in. in diameter
and smaller shall be determined by measurements made between
the jaws of the testing machine. The zero length shall be the
distance between the jaws when a load equal to ten per cent of
the required ultimate breaking strength shall have been applied,
and the final length shall be the distance between the jaws at the
time of rupture. The zero length shall be as near 60 in. as
 Serial Designation: B 1-15. 453

possible. The fracture shall be between the bench marks in

the case of wire larger than 0.204 diameter and between
in. in

the jaws in the case of smaller wire, and not closer than 1 in. to
either bench mark or jaw. If upon testing a sample from any
coil of wire, the results are found to be below the values stated in

Table I.

Tensile Elongation
Diameter, Area, circular
Strength, in 10 in..
in. mils.
lb. per 9q. in. per cent.

0.460 211 600 49 000 3.75

0.410 168 100 51 000 3.25
0.365 133 225 52 800 2.80
0.325 105 625 54 500 2.40
0.289 83 520 56 100 2.17
0.258 66 565 57 600 1.98
0.229 52 440 59 000 1.79

in 60 in.

0.204 41 615 60 100 1.24

0.182 33 125 61 200 1.18
0.165 27 225 62 000 1.14
0.162 26 245 62 100 1.14
0.144 20 735 63 000 1.09
0.134 17 956 63 400 1.07
0.128 16 385 63 700 1.06
0.114 12 995 64 300 1.02
0.104 10 815 64 800 1.00
0.102 10 404 64 900 1.00
0.092 8 464 65 400 0.97
0.091 8 281 65 400 0.97
0.081 6 561 65 700 0.95
0.080 6 400 65 700 0.94
0.072 5 184 65 900 0.92
0.065 4 225 66 200 0.91
0.064 4 096 66 200 0.90
0.057 3 249 66 400 0.89
0.051 2 601 66 600 0.87
0.045 2 025 66 800 0.86
0.040 1 600 67 000 0.85

the table, tests upon two additional samples shall be made, and
the average of the three tests shall determine acceptance or
rejection of the coil. For wire whose nominal diameter is
between listed sizes, the requirements shall be those of the next
larger size included in Table I.
 :

454 Specifications for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire.

Electric 9. upon fair samples

Electric resistivity shall be determined
Resistivity.
by resistance measurements at a temperature of 20° C. (68° F.).
The wire shall not exceed the following limits
For diameters 0.460 in. to 0.325 in., 900.77 lb. per mile-ohm
at 20° C;
For diameters 0.324 in. to 0.040 in., 910.15 lb. per mile-ohm
at 20° C.

Grooved Trolley Wire.

Sections. 10. Standard sections shall be those known as the "American
Standard Grooved Trolley Wire Sections," the shape and dimen-
sions of which are as shown in Fig. 1.

— c^Jhrrl

Z11600 CM. Wire. 168 100 C.M.Wire 133200 CM. Wire

Fig. 1.

Dimensions and 11. (a) Size shall be expressed as the area of cross-section
Permissible
Variations.
in circular mils, the standard sizes being as follows:

211,600 circular mils, weighing 3,386 lb. per mile.

" "
168,100 " 2,690 " " "
" "
133,200 " 2,132 " " "

(b) Grooved trolley wiremay vary 4 per cent over or under

in weight per unit length from standard, as determined from
the nominal cross-section.
Physical Tests. 12. The physical tests shall be made in the same manner as
those upon round wire. The tensile strength of grooved wire
shallbe at least 95 per cent of that required for round wire of the
same sectional area; the elongation shall be the same as that
required for round wire of the same sectional area.
 Serial Designation: B 1-15. 455

13. The requirements for electric resistivity shall be the Electric

Resistivity.
same as those for round wire of the same sectional area.

Figure-Eight Trolley Wire.

14. Standard sections of figure-eight trolley wire shall be as Sections,

shown in Fig. 2.
15. The requirements for weight, physical properties, and Requirements,
electric resistivity of figure-eight trolley wire shall be the same
as for the same sizes of grooved trolley wire.

U-01SO-A
V-0.2ZI-1

133,200 CM 211,600 CM.

Explanatory Notes on Standard Specifications

for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire.

5. The copper was formerly standardized

specific gravity of
in these specifications at 8.90. The value has been changed to
8.89, since that is the value adopted as standard by the American
Institute of Electrical Engineers and the International Electro-
Technical Commission.
7. (a) The use of arbitrary gage numbers to express dimen-
sions cannot be too strongly condemned. There are many such
gages in existence, and confusion is to be expected unless the
particular gage to be used specified.
is Many of the gages
have their dimensions stated inabsurd figures, such as 0.090742
in., when it is not especially easy to measure dimensions in the

fourth decimal place by workshop tools. Definite diameters in

measurable units are evidently preferable.
8. Many other physical tests than those provided in these
 :

456 Specifications for IIard-Drawn Copper Wire.

specifications are included in existing specifications. The reasons

for the omission of some of the more common are given as follows
Twist Tests. —The wire is sometimes required to permit
twisting through a stated number of revolutions before breaking.
The results are so easily influenced by temperature, speed of
rotation, method of gripping, and other variables not easily
defined or controlled, that the test is at least of doubtful value.
It is the opinion of the committee that 1
it is impractical to so
define the conditions of the test that a twist test can be made
definite and reliable; hence there is no warrant for its inclusion
in specifications.
—
Wrap Tests. Wire is sometimes required to permit tight
wrapping about a wire of its own diameter, unwrapping and again
re- wrapping. It is obvious that the making of a test of this kind
with wire that is already hard-drawn is exceedingly difficult.
Every one who has tried to break off a piece of tough wire by
bending it back and forth between the fingers, knows how hard it
is to confine the bend to one place, because of the hardening

action of the previous bends. Hard wire which has been wrapped
around a wire of small diameter is hardened still more and it is
almost impossible to straighten the wire, let alone re-coil it in the
opposite direction. In the opinion of the committee, it is inad-
visable to include a test which at best is so indefinite as a wrap
test. Furthermore, it is the opinion of the committee that
wire which will meet the physical tests included in these specifi-
cations will meet any properly made twist or wrap test that
would reasonably be required.
Since the adoption of the Standard Specifications for Hard-
Drawn Copper Wire, proposed in 1909, the committee has very
carefully considered the matter of twist and wrap tests, and it is
their final opinion that while there might be some possible reason
for requiring that wire shall stand wrapping around a wire of
equal diameter, there can be no good reason for including in
specifications the requirement that it shall stand unwrapping and
re-wrapping, because such a test is indefinite and cannot be made
otherwise. It is almost physically impossible to unwrap and
re-wrap hard-drawn wire about a wire of its own diameter.
With respect to twist tests, the committee has nothing to add to
1 Committee B-l on Standard Specifications for Copper Wire.
 Serial Designation: B 1-15. 457

the statement already on record, condemning this charactei

of test.
Elastic Limit. —
During the tension test on wire, there is
seldom to be observed any definite drop of the beam or increase in
the rate of elongation, corresponding to the yield point commonly
observed in testing steel. The only way in which the elastic limit
of hard wire may be determined is by the actual plotting of the
elastic curve from extensometer readings. Even such tests are
difficult of interpretation, because the wire when available for
tests is usually curved, due to its having been put up in a coil.
There are little sets observable before the true elastic limit has
been reached, owing to the fact that one side of the wire, having
been stretched in coiling, is really a little harder that the other
side, and the pull is, therefore, not even. Considering the
difficulty of making the test and the uncertainty of the results
obtained, it is the opinion of the committee that it would be inad-
visable to include an elastic limit test in these specifications.
It is evident that if the designing engineer requires a knowledge
of the location of the elastic limit, for purposes of calculation in
designing, such data can be obtained by special tests on represen-
tative sizes of wire, which will fix the relation of the elastic
limit to the ultimate strength for all wire which is properly
made.
Tests carefully made by members of the committee show
that the elastic limit of hard-drawn copper wire from sizes 0.460
to 0.325 in., inclusive, averages 55 per cent of the ultimate
tensile strength required in these specifications, with a minimum
value of 50 per cent; for sizes 0.324 to 0.040 in., inclusive, it

averages 60 per cent of the ultimate tensile strength required

in these specifications, with a minimum value of 55 per cent.
This statement of experience based on the definition of elastic
is

limit as "that point on the elastic curve beyond which the

ratio of stress to strain ceases to be constant."
9. Conductivity. — Electric conductivity was formerly ex-
pressed as a percentage on the basis of a determination made
by Matthiessen about 1865, of the electric resistivity of suppos-
edly pure copper. Since that time the methods of refining
copper have advanced, so that it is not uncommon to find copper
of over 100 per cent conductivity on the Matthiessen basis.
 .

458 Specifications for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire.

There has until recently not been international agreement on

the electric resistivity of copper to be considered the standard
for the expression of conductivity. While international agree-
ment upon the value 0.15328 ohms per meter-gram at 20° C. for
the resistivity of copper equal to 100 per cent conductivity was
reached by the International Electro-Technical Commission
in 1913, it has been deemed preferable to express the require-
ments in standard specifications in the terms of quantities
directly measurable, rather than by reference to some quantity
whose standard value is the subject of agreement only. The
use of the arbitrary term "conductivity" has no more warrant
than the employment of arbitrary gage numbers. Therefore, in
these specifications the requirements are stated as the maximum
rejection limits to the resistivity.
For the convenience of those who are accustomed to express
resistivity inany of the several more or less common units,
the following table of equivalents has been prepared, giving
the resistivity of copper at 20° C:
900.77 lb. per mile-ohm is equal to:

0. 15775 ohms per meter-gram,

1 . 7745 microhms per centimeter-cube,
. 69863 microhms per inch-cube,
10.674 ohms per mil-foot.

910. 15 lb. per mile-ohm is equal to:

0. 15940 ohms per meter-gram,

1 7930 michroms per centimeter-cube,
0.70590 microhms per inch-cube,
10 785
. ohms per mil-foot.

10. It is obvious that the simplest designation of irregular

shapes of similar outline is by sectional area, and the most com-
monly used unit among electrical engineers is the circular mil.
Therefore, while the sizes of grooved trolley wire regularly used
are generally known by B & S gage number, corresponding to
their sectional area, it has been deemed advisable by the com-
mittee to list these sizes, in specifications, by their sectional area
expressed in circular mils. The three sizes which are most
 Serial Designation: B 1 - 15. 459

extensively used commercially are the only ones listed; a fourth

size is but little used, and the use is growing less.
11. The only way in which gage variations are easily
determinable in irregular shapes is by recourse to weights of
standard lengths, and this has been the method adopted in the
specifications.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
MEDIUM HARD-DRAWN COPPER WIRE.

Serial Designation: B 2-15.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation B 2; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1912; Revised, 1913, 1915.

Material. 1. The copper shall be of such quality and purity that

when drawn medium-hard, it shall have the properties and char-
acteristics herein required.
Shapes. 2. These specifications cover medium hard-drawn round
wire, as hereinafter described.
Finish 3. (a) The wire must be free from all imperfections not
consistent with the best commercial practice.
Necessary brazes in medium hard-drawn wire must be
(b)

made accordance with the best commercial practice, and tests

in
upon a section of wire containing a braze must show at least 95
per cent of the tensile strength of the unbrazed wire. Elongation
tests are not to be made upon test sections including brazes.
Packages. 4. (a) Packing sizes for round wire shall be agreed upon

in the placing of individual orders.

(b) The wire shall be protected against damage in ordinary
handling and shipping.
Specific Giavity. 5. For the purpose of calculating weights, cross-sections,
etc., the specific gravity of copper shall be taken as 8.89 at 20° C.
(460)
 Serial Designation: B 2-15. 461

6. All testing and inspection shall be made at the place of inspection,

manufacture. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector

representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities to satisfy
him that the material conforms to the requirements of these
specifications.

Medium Hard-Drawn Round Wire.

7. (a) The size shall be expressed as the diameter of the Dimensions and
wire in decimal fractions of an inch, using not more than three Permissibl
Variations.
places of decimals; that is, in mils.
Wire is expected to be accurate in diameter; permissible
(b)

variations from nominal diameter shall be:

For wire 0.100 in. in diameter and larger, one per cent over
or under;
For wire less than 0.100 in. in diameter, one mil over or
under.

Each coil is to be gaged at three places, one near each

(c)

end, and one approximately at the middle; the coil may be

rejected, if, two points being within the accepted limits, the
third point is off gage more than 2 per cent in the case of wire
0.064 in. in diameter and larger, or more than 3 per cent in the
case of wire less than 0.064 in. in diameter.
8. Wire shall be so drawn that its tensile strength shall Physical Tests,

not be greater than the maximum values and not less than the
minimum values stated in Table I, and its elongation shall not
be than the minimum values stated in Table I. Tension tests
less
shall be made upon fair samples, and the elongation of wire
larger in diameter than 0.204 in. shall be determined as the per-
manent increase in length, due to the breaking of the wire in
tension, measured* between bench marks placed upon the wire
originally 10 in. apart. The elongation of wire 0.204 in. in diam-
eter and smaller shall be determined by measurements made
between the jaws of the testing machine. The zero length shall
be the distance between the jaws when a load equal to 10 per
cent of the required ultimate breaking strength shall have been
applied, and the final length shall be the distance between the
jaws at the time of rupture. The zero length shall be as near.
 :

462 Specifications for Medium Drawn Copper Wire.

60 in. as possible. The fracture shall be between the bench marks

in the case of wire larger diameter and between
than 0.204 in. in
the jaws in the case of smaller wire, and not closer than 1 in. to
either bench mark or jaw. If upon testing a sample from any
coil of wire, the results are found to be below the values stated in
the table, tests upon two additional samples shall be made, and
the average of the three tests shall determine acceptance or
rejection of the coil. For wire whose nominal diameter is between

Table I.

Tensile Strength, lb. per sq. in.

!!!o:igation in 10 in.
Diameter, in.
per cent.
Minimum. Maximum.

0.460 42 000 49 000 3.75

0.410 43 000 50 000 3.6
0.365 44 000 51 000 3.25
0.325 45 000 52 000 3.0
0.289 46 000 53 000 2.75
0.258 47 000 54 000 2.5
0.229 48 000 55 000 2.25

in 60 in.
0.204 48 330 55 330 1.25
0.182 48 600 55 660 1.20
0.162 49 000 56 000 1.15
0.144 49 330 56 330 1.11
0.128 49 660 56 660 1.08
0.114 50 000 57 000 1.06
0.102 50 330 57 330 1.04
0.091 50 660 57 660 1.02
0.081 51 000 58 000 1.00
0.072 51 330 58 330 0.98
0.064 51 660 58 660 0.96
0.057 52 000 59 000 0.94
0.051 52 330 59 330 0.92
0.045 52 660 59 660 0.90
0.040 53 000 60 000 0.88

Listed sizes, the requirements shall be those of the next larger

size included in the table.
Electric 9. Electric resistivity shall be determined upon fair samples
Resistivity.
by resistance measurements at a temperature of 20° C. (68° F.).
The wire shall not exceed the following limits

For diameters 0.460 in. to 0.325 in., 896.15 lb. per mile-ohm
at 20° C.
For diameters 0.324 in. to 0.040 in., 905.44 lb. per mile-ohm
at 20° C.
 Serial Designation: B 2-15. 463

Explanatory Notes.
Definition. —Medium Hard-Drawn Wire is essentially and
necessarily a special product, because when wire has once started
on its course through the drawing operations, it can only finish
as a hard-drawn wire to be used as such or to be annealed and
become soft or annealed wire. Medium hard-drawn wire is an-
nealed wire drawn to a slightly smaller diameter.
5. The copper was formerly standardized
specific gravity of
in these specifications at 8.90. The value has been changed to
8.89, since that is the value adopted as standard by the American
Institute of Electrical Engineers and the International Electro-
Technical Commission.
7. (a) The use numbers to express dimen-
of arbitrary gage
sions cannot be too strongly condemned. There are many such
gages in existence, and confusion is to be expected unless the
particular gage to be used is specified. Many of the gages have
their dimensions stated in absurd figures, such as 0.090742 in.,
when not especially easy to measure dimensions in the fourth
it is

decimal place by work-shop tools. Definite diameters in meas-

ureable units are evidently preferable.
8. Medium hard-drawnwire approaches hard-drawn wire
but from the very nature of the product,
in its characteristics,
exact uniformity in tensile strength cannot be obtained; hence,
the necessity for establishing a range of tensile strength within
which standard medium hard-drawn wire must be expected to
be found. In the opinion of the committee, any narrowing or re-1

duction in the range permitted in tensile strength can only result

in an unjustifiable increase in the cost of production of the wire.
Many other physical tests than those provided in these
specifications are included in existing specifications. The rea-
sons for the omission of some of the more common are given as
follows:
Twist Tests. —The wire is sometimes required to permit
twisting through a stated number of revolutions before breaking.
The results are so easily influenced by temperature, speed of
rotation, method of gripping, and other variables not easily
defined or controlled, that the test is at least of doubtful value.

'Committee B-l on Standard Specifications for Copper Wire.

464 Specifications for Medium Drawn Copper Wire.

It is the opinion of the committee that it is impractical to so

define the conditions of the test that a twist test can be made
definite and reliable; hence there is no warrant for its inclusion
in specifications.
Wrap Tests. Wire — is sometimes required to permit tight
wrapping about a wire of its own diameter, unwrapping and
again re-wrapping. It is obvious that the making of a test of
tins kind with wire that is already hard is exceedingly difficult.
Every one who has tried to break off a piece of tough wire by
bending it back and forth between the fingers, knows how hard
it is to confine the bend to one place, because of the hardening

action of the previous bends. Hard wire which has been wrapped
around a wire of small diameter is hardened still more and it is
almost impossible to straighten the wire, let alone re-coil it in the
opposite direction. In the opinion of the committee, it is
inadvisable to include a test which at best is so indefinite as a
wrap test. Furthermore, it is the opinion of the committee that
wire which will meet the physical tests included in these specifi-
cations will meet any properly made twist or wrap test that
would reasonably be required
The committee has carefully considered the matter of twist
and wrap tests in connection with both hard-drawn and medium
hard-drawn wire, and it is their final opinion that while there
might be some possible reason for requiring that wire shall stand
wrapping around a wire of equal diameter, there can be no good
reason for including in specifications the requirement that it
shall stand unwrapping and re-wrapping, because such a test is
indefinite and cannot be made otherwise. It is almost physically
impossible to unwrap and re-wrap hard-drawn wire about a wire
of its own diameter.
Elastic Limit. —
During the tension test on wire, there is
seldom to be observed any definite drop of the beam or increase
in the rate of elongation, corresponding to the yield point com-
monly observed in testing steel. The only way in which the
elastic limit of hard wire may be determined is by the actual
plotting of the elastic curve from extensometer readings. Even
such tests are difficult of interpretation, because the wire when
available for tests is usually curved, due to its having been put
up in a coil. There are little sets observable before the true
 Serial Designation: B 2-15. 465

elastic limithas been reached, owing to the fact that one side of
the wire, having been stretched in coiling,is really a little harder

than the other side, and the pull is, therefore, not even. Con-
sidering the difficulty of making the test and the uncertainty of
the results obtained, it is the opinion of the committee that it

would be inadvisable to include an elastic limit test in these speci-

fications. It is evident that if the designing engineer requires a
knowledge of the location of the elastic limit, for purposes of
calculation in designing, such data can be obtained by special
tests on representative sizes of wire, which will fix the relation of
the elastic limit to the ultimate strength for all wire which is

properly made.
Tests carefully made by members of the committee show
that the elastic limit of medium hard-drawn wire averages 50 per
cent of the ultimate tensile strength required in these speci-
fications. This statement of experience is based on the defi-
nition of elastic limit as "that point on the elastic curve beyond
which the ratio of stress to strain ceases to be constant."
9. Conductivity. —Electric conductivity was formerly ex-
pressed as a percentage on the basis of a determination made
by Matthiessen about 1865, of the electric resistivity of sup-
posedly pure copper. Since that time the methods of refining
copper have advanced, so that it is not uncommon to find copper
of over 100 per cent conductivity on the Matthiessen basis.
There has until recently not been international agreement on
the electric resistivity of copper to be considered the standard for
the expression of conductivity. While international agreement
upon the value 0.15328 ohms per meter-gram at 20° C. for the
resistivity of copper equal to 100 per cent conductivity was
reached by the International Electro-Technical Commission in
1913, it has been deemed preferable to express the requirements
in standard specifications in the terms of quantities directly
measurable, rather than by reference to some quantity whose
standard value is the subject of agreement only. The use of the
arbitrary term "conductivity" has no more warrant than the
employment of arbitrary ga^e numbers. Therefore, in these
specifications the requirements are stated as the maximum
rejection limits to the resistivity.
For the convenience of those who are accustomed to express
466 Specifications for Medium Drawn Copper Wire.

resistivity in any one of the several more or less common units,

the following table of equivalents has been prepared, giving
the resistivity of copper at 20° C:
896.15 lb. per mile-ohm is equal to:

0. 15694ohms per meter-gram,

1 7654 microhms per centimeter-cube,
.

0.69504 microhms per inch-cube,

10.619 ohms per mil-foot.

905.44 lb. per mile-ohm is equal to:

0. 15857 ohms per meter-gram,

1 . microhms per centimeter-cube,
7837
0.70224 microhms per inch-cube,
10 729
. ohms per mil-foot.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A
AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS.
FOR
SOFT OR ANNEALED COPPER WIRE.

Serial Designation: B 3-15.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation B 3 the final
;

number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of

revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1912; Revised, 1913, 1915.

1. The copper shall be of such quality and purity that, Material,

when drawn and annealed, it shall have the properties and char-
acteristics herein required.
2. These specifications cover untinned drawn and annealed shapes,
round wire.
3. (a) The wire must be free from all imperfections not Finish,

consistent with the best commercial practice.

(b) Necessary brazes in soft or annealed wire must be made

in accordance with the best commercial practice.

4. (a) Wire may be shipped in coils or on reels as agreed Packages,
upon by the purchaser and manufacturer. In Table I there are
stated the maximum and minimun weights of wire of the stated
sizes which may be shipped in any one package, whether coil,
reel or spool; in the case of wire larger than 0.010 in. in diameter,
the maximum and minimum package weights are net, and in the
case of wire 0.010 in. and less in diameter, the maximum pack-
age weights are gross, and the minimum package weights are
net. The table also states the limiting dimensions of the coils,
reels and spools on which wire may be shipped. The length .

(467)
 468 Specifications for Soft Copper Wire.

and diameter stated for reels and spools are to be measured over-
all and are maximum sizes; reels or spools smaller than these may
be used provided the minimum weights called for are carried by
the reel or spool. In the table, there are also stated the diam-
eters of the draw-block on which the final drawing of the wire
is to be made, when wire is shipped in coils; it being understood

that the wire is not to be re-wound after final drawing. This

provisionis made to insure that coils of wire of a given gage,
when supplied by different manufacturers, will be of the same
general dimensions.

Table I.

Package Weights, Diam. of Dimensions of Reels and Spools,

It Draw- in.
Diameters, in. Block,
in. Max. Max. Diameter of
Max. Min. Dia. Length. Hole for Rod.

0.460 to 0.360 520 290 24 32 21 1§ to 7\

"
0.359 0.258 430 290 24 32 21 W " 2\
0.257 " 0.129 290 140 22 4 12 U " 2\
0.128 " 0.102 230 95 22 24 12 f " W
0.101 "
"
0.083 230 75 22 •
24 12 f " W
0.082
"
0.081 200 75 16 24 12 1 " W
0.080 0.064 200 50 16 24 12 f " 1*
"
0.063 0.051 120 50 16 24 .10 I " 1*
"
0.050 0.041 100 50 16 24 10 I " I*
"
0.040
"
0.032' 50 20 8 24 8 f " U
0.031 0.020 25 15 8 10 6h I " 1
"
0.019 0.011 10 5 8 5| 4 1 " \
"
0.010 0.008 5 •^5 8 4 4 1 " \j
"
0.007 0.0056 1\ 1 6 2\ 4 1 " \
6
0.005 e 6 2| 4 1
0.004 I "
3.
8 6 2\ 4 Ii
0.003 i I 6 2\ 4 t " \

Wire 0.204 in. in diameter and larger may be shipped in

larger packages when agreed upon.
(b) The wire shall be protected against damage in ordinary
handling and shipping.
Specific Gravity. 5. For the purpose of calculating weights, cross-sections,

etc., the specific gravity of copper shall be taken as 8.89 at 20° C.

Dimensions and 6. (a) Size shall be expressed as the diameter of the wire in
Permissible
Variations.
decimal fractions of an inch.
(b) Wire shall be accurate in diameter; permissible varia-
tions from nominal diameter shall be:
For wire 0.010 in. in diameter and larger, one per cent over
or under;
 -

Serial Designation: B 3-15. 469

For wire less than 0.010 in. in diameter, 0.1 mil (0.0001
in.) over or under.
(c) Each coil shall be gaged at three places, one near each

end and one approximately at the middle; from spools, approx-

imately 12 ft. shall be reeled off, the wire shall be gaged in
six places between the second and twelfth foot from the end.
The coils or spools will be rejected if the average of the measure-
ments obtained is not within the limits specified in Paragraph (b).
7. Wire shall be so drawn and annealed that its tensile Physical Tests,
strength shall not be greater than the value stated in Table II
and its elongation not less than the value stated in Table II.
Tensile tests shall be made upon fair samples, and the elonga-
tion shall be determined as the permanent increase in length, due
to the breaking of the wire in tension, measured between bench
marks placed upon the wire originally 10 in. apart. The fracture
shall be between the bench marks and not closer than 1 in. to

Table II.

Diameter, in.
Tensile Strength, Elongation in 10 in.,
lb. per sq. in. per cent.

0.460 to 0.290 36 000 35

0.289 " 0.103 37 000 30
0.102 " 0.021 38 500 25
0.020 " 0.003 40 000 20

either bench mark. If upon testing a sample from any coil, reel
or spool of wire, the results are found to be below the stated value
in elongation or above the stated value in tensile strength,
tests upon two additional samples shall be made, and the average
of the three tests shall determine acceptance or rejection of the
coil. For wire whose nominal diameter is between listed sizes,
the requirements shall be those of the next larger size included
in Table II.
8. Electric resistivity shall be determined upon fair samples Electric

by resistance measurements at a temperature of 20° C. (68° F.), *«»*"*•

and it shall not exceed 891.58 lb. per mile-ohm.
9. All testing and inspection shall be made at the place of inspection,

manufacture. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector

representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities to satisfy
him that the material conforms to the requirements of these
specifications.
470 Specifications for Soft Copper Wire.

Explanatory Notes.
Soft or annealed copper wire is wire which has been drawn
by customary operations and annealed, and finished by cleaning
when necessary to remove scale or oxide. The wire is so soft and
ductile that it is easily marred and even stretched by careless
handling in the operations of winding or cabling, hence the
necessity for confining specifications and inspection to wire in
packages as it leaves the manufacturer, and before being put
through processes incident to its use by the purchaser.
4. (a) Attention is called to the necessity for the purchaser

and manufacturer agreeing on the package weights which will

be standard under any individual contract. The committee 1 has
indicated limitations to standard package weights which in their
opinion will provide packages of sufficient size to be desirable,
and without being so large that the wire is apt to be damaged in
handling.
5. The specific gravity of copper was formerly standardized
In these specifications at 8.90. The value has been changed to
8.89, since that is the value adopted as standard by the American
Institute of Electrical Engineers and the International Electro-
Technical Commission.
6. The use numbers to express dimen-
of arbitary gage
sions cannot be too strongly condemned. There are many such
gages in existence, and confusion is to be expected unless the par-
ticular gage to be used is specified. Many of the gages have their
dimensions stated in absurd figures, such as 0.090742 in., when
it is not especially easy to measure dimensions in the fourth

decimal place by workshop tools. Definite diameters in measure-

able units are evidently preferable.
8. Electric conductivity was formerly expressed as a per-
centage on the basis of a determination made by Matthiessen
about 1865, of the electric resistivity of supposedly pure copper.
Since that time the methods of refining copper have advanced,
so that it is not uncommon to find copper of over 100 per cent
conductivity on the Matthiessen basis. There has until recently
not been international agreement on the electric resistivity of
copper to be considered the standard for the expression of
conductivity. While international agreement upon the value
1
Committee B-l on Standard Specifications for Copper Wire.
 Serial Designation: B 3-15. 471

0.15328 ohms per meter-gram at 20° C. for the resistivity of

copper equal to 100 per cent conductivity was reached by the
International Electro-Technical Commission in 1913, it has
been deemed preferable to express the requirements in
standard specifications in the terms of quantities directly measur-
able, rather than by reference to some quantity whose standard
value is the subject of agreement only. The use of the arbitrary
term "conductivity" has no more warrant than the employ-
ment of arbitrary gage numbers. Therefore, in these specifi-
cations the requirements are stated as the maximum rejection
limits to the resistivity.
For the convenience of those who are accustomed to express
any one of the several more or less common units,
resistivity in
the following table of equivalents has been prepared, giving
the resistivity of copper at 20° C:
891.58 lb. per mile-ohm is equal to:

0. 15614 ohms per meter-gram,

1 7564 microhms per centimeter-cube,
.

0.69150 microhms per inch-cube,

1 565
. ohms per mil-foot.
 .

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
BARE CONCENTRIC-LAY COPPER CABLE:
HARD, MEDIUM-HARD, OR SOFT.

Serial Designation: B 8-16.

These specifications are issued tinder the fixed designation B 8 ; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1916.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Products 1 These specifications cover bare concentric-lay cables
(a)
Covered. made from round copper wires laid helically around a central
core in one or more layers. The central core shall be made of
wire having the same quality and temper as the concentric
layers, unless otherwise especially provided for in separate
specifications governing the individual case.
Classes. (b) The purposes for which the several classes of concentric-
lay cables are generally used are as follows:
Class A, for bare, weatherproof, slow-burning, and slow-
burning weatherproof cable for aerial use;
Class B, for various insulated cable, such as rubber, paper,
varnished cloth, etc.;
Class C, for cable where greater flexibility is required than
in Class B.
Requirements 2. The copper wires entering into the construction of
of Wires.
standard concentric-lay cable shall, before stranding, meet all

(472)
 Serial Designation: B 8-16. 473

the requirements of that one of the Standard Specifications

of the American Society for Testing Materials for Hard-Drawn,
Medium Hard-Drawn, or Soft or Annealed Copper Wire (Serial
Designations: B 1, B 2, or B 3), which applies.
3. Brazes may be made in the wire when finished and Brazos,

ready for cabling. Such brazes shall be made in accordance

with the best commercial practice. No brazes in cable made
from hard, or medium hard-drawn copper wire may be closer
together than 50 ft.

4. The pitch of standard cable shall not be less than 12 Pitch and Lay.
nor more than 16 diameters of the cable, and the lay may be
right or left-handed, unless one direction of lay is specified by
the purchaser.

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

5. Tests for the physical and electrical properties of the Testing,

wires composing the cables may be made before, but not after,
stranding. Experience indicates that the tensile strength of
concentric-lay copper cable of standard pitch is at least 90
per cent of the total strength required of the wires forming
the cable.
6. For the purpose of calculating weights, cross-sections, Weights and
rea '

etc., the specific gravity of copper shall be taken as 8.S9 at

20° C. The resistance and mass of a stranded conductor are
greater than in a solid conductor of the same cross-sectional
area, depending on the lay (that is, the pitch of the twist of the
wires). Two per cent shall be taken as the standard increment
of resistance and of mass. In cases where the lay is definitely
known, the increment shall be calculated and not assumed.
7. The area of cross-section of the completed cable shall Variation in
Area '
not be more than 2 per cent below the area specified, as deter-
mined by weight.
8. The area of cross-section, number and diameter of wires, Construction.

in standard cable Classes A, B, and C, shall be as specified in

Table I.
III. PACKING AND SHIPPING.
9. (a) Package si/.oi for cable shall be agreed upon in the Packing and
Shipping.
placing of individual orders.
 474 Specifications for Copper Cable.

(b) The cable shall be protected against damage in ordi-

nary handling and transportation.

Table I.

Class A. Class B. Class C.

Area of Approximate
A. W. G. or Diameter Diameter
Section, Diameter
circular mils. B. &S. Number of Wires, Number of Wires, Number of Wires,
Gage Sizes. of Wires. mils. of Wires. mils. of Wires.
mils.

2 000 000 91 148.2 127 125.5 169 108 8

1 900 000 91 144.5 127 122.3 169 • 106.0
1 300 000 91 140.6 127 119.1 169 '103.2
1 700 000 91 136.6 127 115.7 169 100.3
1 600 000 91 132.6 127 112.2 169 97.3

1 500 000 61 156.8 91 128.4' 127 1 10S.7

1 400 000 61 151.5 91 124.0' 127 ? 105.0
1 300 000 61 146.0 91 119.5 127 101 2
1 250 000 61 143.2 91 117.2' 127 * 99.2
1 200 000 61 140.3 91 .114.8 127 ^97.2
1 100 000 61 134.3 91 109.9 127 93.1
1 000 000 61 12S.0 61 12S.0 91 104.8
950 000 61 124.8 61 124.8 91 102.2
900 000 61 121.5 61 121.5 91 99.4
850 000 01 118 61 113.0 91 96.6

800 000 61 114.5 61 114.5 91 93.8

'
750 000 61 110.9 61 110.9 91 90 8
, 700 000 61 107.1 61 107.1 91 87.7
650 000 61 103.2 . 61 103.2 91 84.5
600 000 37 127.3 61 99.2 91 81.2

550 000 37 121.9 61 95.0 91 77.7

500 000 37 116.2 37 116.2 61 90.5
450 000 37 110 3 37 110.3 61 85.9
400 000 19 145.1 37 104.0 61 81.0
350 000 19 135.7 37 97.3 61 75.7

300 000 19 125.7 37 90 61 70.1

250 000 19 114.7 37 82.2 01 64.0
212 000 4/0 7-19 173.9-105.5 19 105.5 37-61 75.6-58.9
168 000 3/0 7-10 155.C-94.0 19 94.0 37-61 67.3-52.5
133 000 2/0 7 138.0 19 83.7 37 60.0

106 000 1/0 7 122.8 19 74 5 37 53.4

S3 750 1 7 109.3 19 66 4 37 47.6
66 400 2 7 97.4 7 97.4 19 59.1
52 (300 3 7 86.7 7 86.7 19 52.6
41700 4 7 77.2 7 77.2 19 46.9

33 100 5 7 68.8 7 68.8 19 41 7

26 300 6 7 61.2 7 61.2 19 37.2
20 800 7 7 54.5 7 54.5 19 33.1
16 500 8 7 4S.6 7 48.6 19 . 29.5

Not2. — Class A cable, sizes 4/0 and 3/0, is usually 7-strand when bare and 19-strand when weather-
proof, etc.

IV. INSPECTION,
inspection. 10. (a) All testing and inspection, both of individual wires
entering into the construction of the cable, and of the com-
pleted cable, shall be made at the place of manufacture. Tests
on individual wires shall be made on samples taken before
cabling, and not on wires removed from the completed cable.
 Serial Designation: B 8-16. 475

(b) The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent-

ing the purchaser all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the
material conforms to the requirements of these specifications.

V. DEFINITION OF TERMS.
11. Concentric-Lay Cable. —
A single conductor cable com- Concentric-Lay
a e"
posed of a central core surrounded by one or more layers of
helically laid wires.
12. Lay. —The lay of a cable is the length expressed in Lay.

inches for each complete turn of the wire around the axis,
measured along its axis.

13. Direction of Lay. —The direction of lay is the lateral Direction of

ay '
direction in which the strands of a cable run over the top of
the cable as they recede from an observer looking along the
axis of the cable.

Explanatory Notes.
1. Classes of Cable. —These specifications have been drawn
to cover cables made from hard-drawn, medium hard-drawn,
and soft copper wire, since the manufacturing of cables from
the various classes of wire is similar, and the physical properties
of the cable depend upon, and are usually expressed in, terms
of those of the class of wire employed.
2. Physical Properties. —The accurate testing of cable for
its physical properties is practically impossible in commercial
laboratories. In order to do this, it is necessary to use long
lengths and hold the samples in such a way that the wires shall
all be in equal tension. Otherwise the strength will be con-
siderably below the actual strength of the cable. A much
more accurate idea of the quality of the cable may be obtained
by testing the individual wires before cabling than by attempt-
ing tests of the physical properties of the finished cable.
Wires unlaid from cable will manifestly have different
physical and electrical properties from those of the wire when
prepared for cabling, on account of the deformation brought
about by laying and again straightening for test.
3. Stranding Table. —The stranding table covers present
practice. Class A covers the usual bare and weatherproof con-
476 Specifications for Copper Cable.

struction. Class B is the same as adopted by the Standards

Committee of the American Institute of Electrical Engineers,

and is given in the Bureau of Standards Circular No. 31, Table
XII.
In Class C the figures are those of the Bureau of Standards,
Circular No. 31, Table XII, with additions to cover well-estab-
lished practice. There is need for a table to cover extra-flexible
stranding from soft wire, but there are differences of opinion
in regard to what should become standard practice. The
Standards Committee of the A. I. E. E. have this matter under
consideration, and it has seemed best not to attempt to include
figures for extra-flexible stranding in this specification. The
stranding table will necessarily be the subject of revision which
will be undertaken in cooperation with the Standards Com-
mittee of the A. I. E. E.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
HIGH-STRENGTH BRONZE TROLLEY WIRE,
ROUND AND GROOVED:
40 AND 65-PER-CENT CONDUCTIVITY.

Serial Designation: B 9-16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation B 9; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1916.

I. MANUFACTURE.
1. These specifications cover round and grooved bronze shapes,
trolley wire.
2. The material used shall be bronze of such nature and Material,

composition as to secure, by proper treatment, the qualities

hereinafter specified for the finished wire. Bronze of two
qualities may be required —
one to have a conductivity of 40
per cent, and the other a conductivity of 65 per cent.
3. Necessary brazes in trolley wire shall be made in accord- Brazes,

ance with the best commercial practice, and tests upon a sec-
tion of wire containing a braze shall show at least 95 per cent
of the tensile strength of the unbrazed wire.
Elongation tests shall not be made on test sections includ-
ing brazes.
(477)
 478 Specifications for Bronze Trolley Wire.

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests, 4. (a) Round wire shall conform to the requirements as
to tensile properties specified in Table I.
(b) The grooved wire shall be at least
tensile strength of
95 per cent of that required for round wire of the same sec-
tional area; the elongation of grooved wire shall be the same
as that required for round wire of the same sectional area.
Tension Test 5. Tension tests shall be made upon fair samples, and the
Specimens.
elongation of the wire shall be determined as permanent increase
in length, due to the breaking of the wire in tension, measured
between bench marks placed upon the wire originally 10 in.
apart. The fracture shall be between the bench marks, and

Table I.

40-per-cent Conductivity Bronze.

Diameter, Area, Tensile Strength, Elongation in 10 in.,

circular mils. lb. per sq. in. per cent.

0.460 211600 69 200 3.00

0.410 168 100 69 700 3.00
0.365 133 225 71700 2.50
0.325 105 625 77 100 2.25

65-PER-CENT CONDUCTIVITY BRONZE.

0.490 211 600 59 300 3.00

410 188 100 59S00 3.00
0.365 133 225 61600 2.50
0.325 105 625 66 300 2.25

not closer than 1 in. to either mark. If, upon

testing a sample
from any coil or reel of wire, the results are found to be below
the value stated in the table, tests on two additional samples
shall be made, and the average of the three tests shall deter-
mine the acceptance or rejection of the coil or reel.
Conductivity. 6. (a) Round wire, known as "40-per-cent Conductivity,"
shall have a conductivity of not less than 40 per cent, figured
according to the International Annealed Copper Standard, which
is 0.15328 ohms per meter-gram at 20° C.

Round wire, known as "65-per-cent Conductivity," shall

have a conductivity of not less than 65 per cent, figured accord-
ing to the same standard.
 :

Serial Designation: B 9-16. 479

(b) The requirements for conductivity of grooved wire

shall be the same as those for round wire of the same sectional
area.

III. STANDARD SIZES AND DIMENSIONS.

7. (a) The size of round wire shall be expressed as the Dimensions and
Permissible
diameter of the wire in decimal fractions of an inch, using not Variations
of
more than three places of decimals, that is, in mils. Round Wire.
(b) Round wire is expected to be accurate in diameter.

Variations of one per cent over or under nominal diameter shall

be permissible.
8. (a) Standard sections of grooved trolley wire shall be Standard
Sections,
those known as the "American Standard Grooved Trolley Wire
Dimensions and
— 0.376'- Permissible
Variations of
Grooved Wire

2JI600 CM Wire. 168100 CM. Wire 133200 C.M.Wira

Fig, 1.

Sections," the shape and dimensions of which are shown in

Fig. 1.

(b) The size of grooved wire shall be expressed as the area

of cross-section in circular mils, the standard sizes being as
follows

211,600 circular mils, weighing 3,386 lb. per mile

" " " 2,690 '
168,100
" "
133,200 " 2,132

(c) Grooved trolley wire may vary 4 per cent over or

under in weight per unit length from standard as determined

from the nominal cross-section.

IV. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

9. The wire shall be free from all imperfections not con- Piniih.

sistent with the best commercial practice.

 480 Specifications for Bronze Trolley Wire.

V. PACKING AND SHIPPING.

Packing and 10. All wire shall be furnished on substantial reels, suit-
ippmg.
a kj e we jg n £ t ie w re nancUed, an(j sna ii fc e protected
f or t j ie
_
^.
] j

against damage in ordinary handling and transportation. The

length or weight of wire to be wound upon reels shall be agreed
upon in placing individual orders.

VI. INSPECTION,
inspection. n. (#) All testing and inspection shall be made at the
place of manufacture.
(b) The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent-
ing the purchaser all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the
material conforms to the requirements of the c e specifications.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
COPPER PLATES FOR LOCOMOTIVE FIREBOXES.

Serial Designation: B 11-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation B 1 1 ; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1916; Adopted, 1918.

1. These specifications cover two grades of copper for Material

locomotive fireboxes, namely, Arsenical and Non-Arsenical.

I. MANUFACTURE.
2. The copper shall be fire-refined or electrolytic, and hot Process,

rolled from suitable cakes.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. The copper shall conform to the following requirements chemical

Compos on.
as to chemical composition:
(a) Arsenical Copper. —Arsenical copper shall contain 0.25
to 0.50 per cent of arsenic, and shall not contain more than 0.120
per cent of impurities, exclusive of arsenic and silver.
(b) N
on- Arsenical Copper. —
Non- Arsenical copper shall have
a purity of at least 99.880 per cent, as determined by electrolytic
assay, silver being counted as copper. The total of impurities
other than silver shall not exceed 0.120 per cent.
4. An analysis may be made by the purchaser from a Chemical
Ana, y 8eB -

broken tension test specimen representing each plate as rolled.

(481)
 :

482 Specifications for Copper Plates.

The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the

requirements specified in Section 3.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 5. The material shall conform to the following minimum
requirements as to tensile properties
Arsenical. Non-Arsbnical.
Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 31 000 30 000
Elongation in 8 in., per cent 35 30

Bend Tests. 6. The specimen shall bend both hot (500 to 700° C.) and
cold 180 deg. without cracking on the outside of the bent portion

Fig. 1.

as follows: For material 1 in. or under in thickness, flat on itself;

and for material over 1 in. in thickness, around a pin the diameter
of which is equal to the thickness of the specimen.
Test 7. Tension and bend test specimens shall be taken from the
Specimens.
finished rolled material. They shall be of the full thickness of
material as rolled, and shall be machined to the form and
dimensions shown in Fig. 1; except that bend test specimens
may be machined with both edges parallel.
Number of Tests. 8. (a) One tension, one cold-bend and one hot-bend test

shall be made from each plate as rolled.

(b) If any test specimen develops flaws it may be discarded

and two other specimens substituted, each of which shall be

free from flaws. If flaws appear in either or both of the substi-
tuted specimens the lot shall be rejected.
 —

Serial Designation: B 11-18. 483

(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test

specimen is less than that specified in Section 5 and any part
of the fracture is outside the middle third of the gage length,
as indicated by marked on the specimen before
scribe scratches
testing, a retest shallbe allowed.
(d) If any test specimen shows defective machining it may
be discarded and another specimen substituted.

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WEIGHT AND THICKNESS.

9. The thickness of each plate shall not vary more than Dimensional
a a on, '
0.04 in. under that ordered. An excess over the nominal weight

Table I. Permissible Overweights of Plates Ordered to

Thickness.

Permissible Excess in Averse Weights per Square

Foot op Plates for Widths Given.
Ordjred Thickness, Weight, Expressed in Percentages of Nominal Weights.
IN. lb. per sq. ft.

75 to 100 in., 100 to 115 in.,

Under 75 in.
excl. excl.
115 in. or over.

JL 14.63 8 12 16

1 17.44 7 10 13 17
8
JL. 20.34 6 8 IC 13

23.25 5 7 9 12

2C.16 5 6.5 8.5 11

* 29.06 5 6 8 10

Over 4 5 5 6 5 9

corresponding to the dimensions on the order shall be allowed

for each plate if not more than that shown in Table I. One
cubic inch of rolled copper is assumed to weigh 0.323 lb.

V. FINISH.
10. The finished plates shall be free from injurious defects Finish,

and shall have a workmanlike finish.

VI. MARKING.
11. The name
or brand of the manufacturer, plate number, Marking,
and grade be stamped on each plate. The plate number
shall
shall be legibly stamped on each test specimen.
 484 Specifications for Copper Plates.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

Impaction. 12. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of
cost, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the plates are
being furnished in accordance with these specifications. All
tests (except check analyses) and inspection shall be made at
the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise
specified, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnec-
essarilywith the operation of the works.
Rejection. 13. ( a ) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on
chemical and physical tests made in accordance with these
specifications shall be reported within five working days from
the receipt of samples.
(b) Plates which, subsequent to their acceptance at the

manufacturer's works, are shown to have contained injurious

defects will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be notified.
Rehearing. 14.Samples tested in accordance with Section 4, which
represent rejected plates, shall be preserved for two weeks from
the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing" within that time.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
COPPER BARS FOR LOCOMOTIVE STAYBOLTS.

Serial Designation : B 12-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation B 12; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case
of revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1916; Adopted, 1918.

1. These specifications cover two grades of copper for Material

Covered.
locomotive staybolts, namely, Arsenical and Non-Arsenical.

I. MANUFACTURE.
2. The copper shall be fire-refined or electrolytic and shall Procesa.

be finished to dimensions by hot rolling from suitable bars.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. The copper shall conform to the following requirements Chemical
Composition.
as to chemical composition:
(a) Arsenical Copper. —Arsenical copper shall contain 0.25
to 0.50 per cent of arsenic, and shall contain not more than
0.120 per cent of impurities, exclusive of arsenic and silver.
(b) N on- Arsenical Copper. —Non-Arsenical copper shall have
a purity of at least 99.880 per cent, as determined by electrolytic
assay, silver being counted as copper. The total of impurities
other than silver shall not exceed 0.120 per cent.
4. An analysis may be made from one sample for each chemical
Anal y 8eB -

5000 lb. or fraction thereof of finished bars. The chemical

(485)
 486 Specifications for Staybolt Copper.

composition this determined shall conform to the requirements

specified in Section 3.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Tension Tests. 5. The material shall conform to the following minimum
requirements as to tensile properties:
Arsenical. Non-Arsenical.
Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in 31 000 30 000
Elongation in 8 in., per cent 35 30

Bend Tests. 6. The test specimen shall bend cold through 180 deg.
flat on without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
itself
Test Specimens. 7. Tension and bend test specimens shall be of the full-size
section of the bars as rolled.
Number of Tests, 8. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from
each 5000 lb. or fraction thereof.
(b) If any test specimen develops flaws it may be discarded

and two other specimens substituted, each of which shall be

free from flaws. If flaws appear in either or both of the substi-
tuted specimens the lot shall be rejected.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
specimen is less than that specified in Section 5 and any part of
the fracture is -outside the middle third of gage length, as indi-
cated by marked on the specimen before testing,
scribe scratches
•a be allowed.
retest shall
(d) If any test specimen shows defective machining it may
be discarded and another specimen substituted.

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER.

Dimensional 9. The bars shall be truly round within 0.01 in., and shall
Variations.
not vary more than 0.005 in. over nor more than 0.01 in. under
the specified size.

V. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Finish. 10. The finished bars shall be free from injurious defects
and shall have a workmanlike finish.

VI. MARKING.
Marking. 11. The finished bars shall, when loaded for shipment, be
properly separated and marked with the name or brand of the
 Serial Designation: B 12-18. 487

manufacturer and the lot number for identification. The lot

number shall be legibly marked on each test specimen.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

12. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of inspection,

cost, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the bars are
being furnished in accordance with these specifications. All
tests (except check analyses) and inspection shall be made at
the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise
specified, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnec-
essarily with the operation of the works.
13. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based Rejection,

on chemical or physical tests made in accordance with these

specifications shall be reported within five working days from the
receipt of samples.
(b) Bars which, subsequent to their acceptance at the
manufacturer's works, are shown to have contained injurious
defects will be rejected,and the manufacturer shall be notified.
14. Samples tested in accordance with Section 4, which Rehearing,
represent rejected bars, shall be preserved for two weeks from
the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
SEAMLESS COPPER BOILER TUBES.

Serial Designation: B 13-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation B 13; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1916; Adopted, 1918.

Material 1. These specifications cover two grades of copper tubes

Covered.
for locomotive' boilers, namely, Arsenical and Non-Arsenical.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. The copper shall be fire-refined or electrolytic and shall
2.

be made into tubes, either by the hot-rolling or cold-drawing

process. It shall be finished by cold drawing.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 3. The copper shall conform to the following requirements
Composition.
as to chemical composition:
(a) Arsenical Copper. —Arsenical copper shall contain from
0.15 to 0.35 per cent of arsenic, and shall not contain more
than 0.120 per cent of impurities, exclusive of arsenic and silver.
(b) N
on- Arsenical Copper. —
Non-Arsenical copper shall have
a purity of at least 99.880 per cent, as determined by electrolytic
assay, silver being counted as copper. The total of impurities
other than silver shall not exceed 0.120 per cent.
(488)
 Serial Designation: B 13-18. 489

4. Analyses of two tubes in each lot of 250 or less may Chemical

(a)
nayse8,
be made by the purchaser. The chemical composition thus
determined shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 3. Drillings for analyses shall be taken from several
points around each tube, or turnings may be taken from the
end of the tube.
(b) If the analysis of any one tube does not conform to the
requirements specified, analyses of two additional tubes from the
same lot shall be made, each of which shall conform to the
requirements specified.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

5. Tubes be furnished hard or annealed, as specified. Temper.
will
Test specimens taken from hard tubes shall be annealed before
testing.

Position .Position
after Using i after Using
Flaring Tool-.^ » Flatter.
> ^>
<<oo
nt
'4- 1 *
Is
A= Outs. Diam. of flue lessf".
i :«
B° Outs. Diam. of Flue less 3." Liners-'"*~A "*l

C- Outs. Diam. of Flue plus 4".

A Outs. Diam. of Flue plus—.
Flaring Tool. Die Block.
Fig. 1.

6. (a) A test specimen not more than 4 in. in length shall Flange Tests.

have a flange turned over at right angles to the body of the

tube, without showing cracks or flaws. This flange, as measured
from the outside of the tube, shall be f in. wide for tubes 7\ in.
or under in outside diameter, and \ in. wide for tubes over 2\ in.
in outside diameter.
(b) In making the flange test, it is recommended that the
flaring tool and die block shown in Fig. 1 be used.
7. A test specimen 2\ in. in length shall stand crushing Crush Teste,

longitudinally until the outside folds are in contact, without

showing cracks or flaws.
 490 Specifications for Copper Boiler Tubes.

Hydrostatic 8. All tubes shall stand an internal hydrostatic pressure of

750 lb. per sq. in. The hydrostatic pressure test shall be applied
to the finished tubes before annealing.
Test Specimens. 9. Test specimens shall consist of sections cut
(a) from
tubes selected by the inspector representing the purchaser from
the lot offered for shipment. They shall be smooth on the ends
and free from burrs.
(b) All specimens shall be tested cold.

Number of Tests. 10. One flange and one crush test shall be made from
each of two tubes in each lot of 250 or less. Each tube shall
be subjected to the hydrostatic test.
11. If the results of the physical tests of only one tube
from any do not conform to the requirements specified,
lot
retests of two additional tubes from the same lot shall be made,
each of which shall conform to the requirements specified.

IV. STANDARD WEIGHTS.

Standard 12. The standards weights for tubes of various outside
Weights.
diameters and thicknesses are as follows:

Weight, lb. per ft. or Length.

Thickness.
Outside Diameter, in.

In. B. w. li 2 91
g. 2 'I »i

0.095 13 1.624 1.913 2.202 2.491 2.779

0.109 12 1.844 2.176 2.507 2. 839 3.170

0.120 11 2.015 2.380 2.744 3.109 3.474

0.134 10 2.227 2.634 3.042 3.449 3.857

0.148 9 2.434 2.884 3.334 3.785 4.235

Permissible 13. The weight of the tubes shall not vary more than
Variations. 5 per cent from that specified in Section 12.

V. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Workmanship. 14. (a) The finished tubes shall be circular within 0.02 in.,
and the mean outside diameter shall not vary more than 0.015 in.
from the size ordered.
(b) The thickness at any point shall not vary more than

10 per cent from that specified.

 Serial Designation: B 13-18. 491

(c) The length shall not be less, but may be 0.125 in. more
than that ordered.
15. The finished tubes shall be free from injurious defects Finish,

and distortion and shall have a workmanlike finish.

VI. MARKING.
16. The name or brand of the manufacturer, and "tested Marking,
at 750 lb." shall be legibly stenciled on each tube.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

17. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of inspection,

cost, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the tubes are
being furnished in accordance with these specifications. All
tests (exceptcheck analyses) and inspection shall be made at
the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise
specified, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnec-
essarily with the operation of the works.
18. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,

chemical or physical tests made in accordance with these speci-

fications shall be reported within five working days from the
receipt of samples.
(b) Tubes when inserted in the boiler shall stand expanding
and bending without showing cracks or flaws. Tubes which
fail in this manner will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall

be notified.
19. Samples tested accordance with Section 4, which
in Rehearing,
represent rejected tubes, shall be preserved for two weeks from
the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
SEAMLESS BRASS BOILER TUBES.

Serial Designation: B 14 - 18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation B 14; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1916; Adopted, 1918.

Material 1. These specifications cover brass tubes for locomotive

Covered.
boilers.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 2. The tubes shall be cold drawn to size and semi-annealed.
They shall be fully annealed at both ends, if so ordered.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 3. The
material shall conform to the following requirements
Composition.
as to chemical composition:

70-30 Alloy.
Copper not under 69 00 per cent
.

Lead not over 0.50 "

Iron " " "
0.10
Materials other than copper and zinc " " "
. 0.50
Zinc remainder

Chemical 4.Analyses of two tubes in each lot of 250 or less may

(a)
Analyses.
be made by
the purchaser. The chemical composition thus
determined shall conform to the requirements specified in
(492)
 Serial Designation: B 14-18. 493

Section 3. Drillings or turnings for analyses may be taken

from the end of the tube.
(b) If the analysis of any one tube does not conform to
the requirements specified, analyses of two additional tubes from
the same lot shall be made, each of which shall conform to the
requirements specified.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

5. Test specimens taken from semi-annealed tubes shall be Temper,
fully annealed before testing.
6. (a) A test specimen not more than 4 in. in length shall Flange Test,

have a flange turned over at right angles to the body of the tube
without showing cracks or flaws. The outside diameter of this
Position .-Position
after Using : afterUsing"
Flaring Too/-._ ) Flatter.

V± 1 i

A= Outs. Diam. of Flue fessf.

B~ Outs. Diam. of Flue /ess 3."
C° Outs. Diam. of Flue plus 4".
A a Outs. Diam. of Flue plus—.
Flaring Tool. Die Block.
Fig. 1.

flange shallmeasure not less than \\ times the original outside

diameter of the tube.
(b) In making the flange test, it is recommended that the

flaring tool and shown in Fig. 1 be used.

die block
7. The tubesbe capable of standing the following test,
shall Flattening and
when cold, without showing cracks or flaws: A piece of the Doubling-Over

tube shall be flattened down, until the interior surfaces of the

tube meet, and then be doubled over on itself, that is, bent
through an angle of 180 deg., the bend being at right angles to
the direction of the length of the tube.
8. All tubes shall stand an internal hydrostatic pressure Hydros
of 750 lb. per sq. in. Tests -

(a) Test specimens shall consist of sections cut from Test

9.
ns
tubes selected by the inspector representing the purchaser from s P ec,m *
-
 494 Specifications for Brass Boiler Tubes.

the lot offered for shipment. They shall be smooth on the ends
and free from burrs.
(b) All specimens shall be tested cold.
Number of Teste. One flange and one flattening test shall be made from
10.
each of two tubes in each lot of 250 or less. Each tube shall
be subjected to the hydrostatic test.
11. If the results of the physical tests of only one tube
from any lot do not conform to the requirements specified,
retests oftwo additional tubes from the same lot shall be made,
each of which shall conform to the requirements specified.

IV. STANDARD WEIGHTS.

Standard 12. The standard weights for tubes of various outside
Weights.
diameters and thicknesses are as follows:

Weight, lb. per ft. op Lenqth.

Thick nesb.
Outside Diameter, n.

ol
In B. w. g.
4 «i 2 '4 »*

0.095 13 1.551 1.827 2.102 2 378 2.654

0.109 12 1.761 2.078 2.395 2.711 3.028

0.120 11 1.924 2.272 2.621 2.969 3.318

0.174 10 2.127 2.516 2.905 3 294 3.683

0.148 7 2.325 2.765 3.184 3.614 4.044

Permissible 13. The weight of the tabes shall not vary more than 5 per
Variations.
cent from that specified in Section 12.

V. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Workmanship. 14. (a) The finished tubes shall be circular within 0.02 in.,
and the mean outside diameter shall not vary more than 0.015 in.
from the size ordered.
(b) The thickness at any point shall not vary more than

10 per cent from that specified.

(c) The length shall not be less, but may be 125 in. more
than that ordered.
Finish. 15. The finished tubes shall be free from injurious defects
and distortion, and shall have a workmanlike finish.
 Serial Designation: B 14-18. 495

VI. MARKING.
16. The name or brand of the manufacturer, and "tested Marking,
at 750 lb." shall be legibly stenciled on each tube.

VII. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

17. The manufacturer shall afTord the inspector, free of inspection,

cost, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the tubes are
being furnished in accordance with these specifications. All
tests (exceptcheck analyses) and inspection shall be made at
the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise
specified,and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnec-
essarilywith the operation of the works.
18. (a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,

chemical and physical tests made in accordance with these

specifications shall be reported within five working days from the
receipt of samples.
(b) Tubes when inserted in the boiler shall stand expanding

and bending without showing cracks or flaws. Tubes which

fail in this manner will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall

be notified.
19. Samples tested in accordance with Section 4, which Rehearing,
represent rejected tubes, shall be preserved for two weeks from
the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a
rehearing within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association tor Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
BRASS FORGING ROD.

Serial Designation: B 15-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation B 15; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1917;- Adopted, 1918.

Material 1. These specifications cover brass rods of any specified

Covered.
cross-section capable of being readily forged hot, and easily
machined.
I. MANUFACTURE.
Process. 2. The rods may be manufactured either by hot rolling
or extrusion, and may be finished by cold drawing if necessary
to meet the requirement for size.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Chemical 3. The brass shall conform to the following requirements
omposi on.
ag £ criem i ca i composition:

Copper 58.5-61.5 per cent.

Lead 1.5- 2.5 "
Iron not over 0.15 "
Materials other than copper, lead and zinc .. . " " 0.35 "
Zinc remainder.

Chemical 4. Analyses may be made on each lot of 5000 lb. or less,

nayses.
Drillings or millings shall be made from at least four separate
(496)
 Serial Designation: B 15-18. 497

rods, equal quantities being taken from each rod and thor-
oughly mixed. Samples so prepared shall be divided into three
equal parts, each of which shall be placed in a sealed package,
one for each party and one for an umpire, if necessary.
5. (a) Analyses of separate rods may be made by the pur- Check Analyse:

chaser. The copper and lead contents thus determined shall

lie within the following limits:

Copper 57.9 - 62. 1 per cent.

Lead 1.2- 3.0

In case of dissatisfaction, the rod or rods shall be sampled

(b)

in the presence of representatives of both parties. The thor-

oughly mixed sample shall be divided into three equal parts,
each of which shall be placed in a sealed package, one for each
party and one for an umpire, if necessary.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

6. Specimens cut from rods or bars and having a length Flattening Test

equal to the diameter of the specimen, shall stand flattening

in an axial direction while hot, until reduced to 20 per cent
of their original length, without cracking.
7. (a) One flattening test shall be made from each lot of Number of

2000 lb. or fraction thereof.

In case of failure of any test specimen representing
(b)

a lot, two additional specimens shall be chosen, each of which

shall conform to the requirement specified in Section 6.

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS.

8. (a) The diameter of round sections, or the distance Dimensional

between parallel faces in the case of other sections, shall not

vary from that specified more than the following:

Diameter, or Distance between Parallel Faces. Permissible

Variation, in.

IQ
-H o

-H o OP

-H o o

Over 2i in
4c IT
 ;

498 Specifications for Brass Forging Rod.

In the case of special shapes, the permissible variations

(b)

shall be agreed upon according to the requirements.

Lengths. 9. Stock lengths for all rods from j to 1 in., inclusive,

in diameter or thickness shall be supplied by the manufacturer

as follows:
(a) When ordered in no lengths less than 8 ft.;
12-ft. lengths,
when ordered no lengths less than 6 ft.; when
in 10-ft. lengths,
ordered in 8-ft. lengths, no lengths less than 6 ft.; when ordered
in 6-ft. lengths, no lengths less than 4 ft.
(b) When ordered in the lengths given above, the weight

of lengths less than the length ordered shall not exceed 40 per
cent of any one shipment.
(c) For rods over 1 in. up to and including 2 in. in diameter

or thickness, the lengths shall be random lengths from 4 to 10 ft.

for rods over 2 in. in diameter or thickness, special lengths are
required, but no length shall be less than 4 ft.

V. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

Finish. 10. The rods shall be free from injurious surface defects
and shall have a workmanlike finish. They shall be substan-
tially straight.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. 11. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector repre-
senting the purchaser, free of cost, all reasonable facilities to
satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
with these specifications.
Rejection. 12. Material which fails to conform to these specifications
will be rejected and the manufacturer shall be notified.

Explanatory Note.
Section 1. —The material intended to be covered by these
specifications exhibits a very considerable variation in proper-
tieswith slight changes in composition. Its strength, stiffness
and ability to stand forging operations are in inverse proportion
to the copper content; so also is the amount of lead which the
alloy can contain without producing hot shortness. Toughness
on the other hand is directly proportional to the copper content.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
FREE-CUTTING BRASS ROD FOR USE IN SCREW
MACHINES.

Serial Designation: B 16-18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation B 16; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1917; Adopted, 1918.

1. These specifications cover free-cutting brass rods of Material

Covered
any machine
specified cross-section, suitable for high-speed screw
-

work.
I. MANUFACTURE.
2. The rods shall be finished by cold drawing and straighten- Process,
ing, unless otherwise specified.

II. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

3. The brass shall conform to the following requirements Chemical
Composition.
as to chemical composition:

Copper 60.0-63.0 per cent.

Lead 2.25-3.25
Iron not over 0.15 "
Materials other than copper, lead and zinc. .. .
" " 0.25 "
Zinc '.

remainder.

4. Analyses may be made on each lot of 5000 lb. or less. Chemical

Ana, y se3
Drillings or millings shall be made from at least four separate -

(499)
 500 Specifications for Free-Cutting Brass Rod.

rods, equal quantities being takenfrom each rod and thoroughly-

mixed. Samples so prepared shall be divided into three equal
parts, each of which shall be placed in a sealed package, one
for each party and one for an umpire, if necessary.
Check 5. (a) Analyses of separate rods may be made by the
Analyses.
purchaser. The copper and lead contents thus determined
shall lie within the following limits:

Copper 59. 4- 63. 6 per cent.

Lead 1.8- 3.9

(b) In case of dissatisfaction, the rod or rods shall be

sampled in the presence of representatives of both parties.

The thoroughly mixed sample shall be divided into three equal
parts, each of which shall be placed in a sealed package, one
for each party and one for an umpire, if necessary.

III. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Bend Tests. Rods or bars shall bend cold. through an angle of 120
6.

deg. around a pin the diameter of which is equal to the diameter

or thickness of the rod or bar, without fracture.
Number of Tests. 7. (a) One. bend test shall be made from each lot of 5000
lb. or fraction thereof.
(b) In case of failure of any test specimen representing a

lot, two additional specimens shall be chosen, each of which

shall conform to the requirement specified in Section 6.

IV. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS.

Dimensional 8. The diameter of round sections, or the distance between
Variations.
parallel faces in the case of other sections, shall not vary from
that specified more than the following:

Permissible
Diameter, or Distance between Parallel Faces.
Variation, in.

±0.0015

±0.002

±0.0025

Over 2i in ±0.003
a
 Serial Designation: B 16-18. 501

9. rods from \ to 1 in., inclusive, in Lengths,

Stock lengths for all

diameter or thickness shall be supplied by the manufacturer

as follows:
(a) When ordered in no lengths less than 8 ft.;
12-ft. lengths,

when no
ordered in 10-ft. lengths, lengths less than 6 ft.; when

ordered in 8-f t. lengths, no lengths less than 6 ft. when ordered ;

in 6-ft. lengths, no lengths less than 4 ft.

(b) When ordered in the lengths given above, the weight of

lengths less than the length ordered shall not exceed 40 per cent
of any one shipment.
(c) For rods over 1 in. up to and including 2 in. in diameter
or thickness, the lengths shall be random lengths from 4 to 10 ft.;

for rods over 2 in. in diameter or thickness, special lengths are

required, but no length shall be less than 4 ft.

V. WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH.

10. The rods shall be free from injurious defects, sub- Finish,

stantially straight and free from kinks and bends, and shall
have a bright, smooth surface.

VI. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

11. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing inspection,
the purchaser, free of cost, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him
that the material is being furnished in accordance with these
specifications.
12. Material which fails to conform to these specifi- Rejection,

cations will be rejected and the manufacturer shall be notified.

Explanatory Notes.
Section 1. —The material intended to be covered by these
specifications is suitable for ordinary manufacturing purposes.
In order to machine freely it must contain lead, and possess a
considerable degree of temper which is obtained by cold working.
The former requirement reduces strength and ductility while
the latter adds firmness and stiffness.
Section 8. —There are four major constituents encountered
in all brass alloys, the control and determination of which
502 Specifications for Free-Cutting Brass Rod.

present very perplexing problems. They are copper, zinc-

lead and iron. The high volatility of zinc, the variations in
temperature which occur in the alloying operation, and the
variation in the proportion in which it is added to the crucible
charge in unalloyed form, causes its proportion in the casting
to occasionally fluctuate over wide limits. Except when cer-
tain expensive grades of zinc are employed, substantially free
from lead, the latter element will also show very considerable
variation. Iron is subject to accidental introduction.
On account of the fact that the ordinary crucible charge
is only about 200 lb., it is not commercially practicable to deter-

mine the four main elements in each cast. On the other hand,
the determination by chemical analysis of the constituents
of an individual sample from a lot of a given size tells little about
the mean values of the proportions, or the extreme variations
which exist in the lot. It is proposed, though not as a very
satisfactory solution of this problem, to require that a sample
composed of four equal portions from four individual pieces
be taken to represent the mean composition of a lot, and that
individual samples be permitted to vary between wider limits.
It is appreciated that this is not a satisfactory solution of the
problem, but no better one has been offered.
There are many uses for which alloys outside of the specified
limits are perfectly suitable. The limits given, however, repre-
sent standard practice. On the other hand, there are special
requirements which cannot be most advantageously satisfied
by alloys meeting these specifications.
Section 6. —
It is desirable that a limit be imposed on the
hardness due to cold drawing. It is felt that the bend test
proposed accomplishes the purpose as satisfactorily as any
other test.

Section 9. —It is not commercially practicable to furnish

material of this character to specific lengths without great
expense, especially in the larger sizes, on account of the small
size of billet employed. It is, therefore, necessary to permit
considerable latitude in this respect.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTS

FOR
PORTLAND CEMENT.
Serial Designation: C 9-17.
These specifications and tests are issued under the fixed designation C 9;
the final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1904; Revised, 1908, 1909, 1916 (Effective Jan. 1, 1917).

SPECIFICATIONS.
1. Portland cement is the product obtained by finely pul- Definition,

verizing clinker produced by an

calcining to incipient fusion
intimate and properly proportioned mixture of argillaceous and
calcareous materials, with no additions subsequent to calcina-
tion excepting water and calcined or uncalcined gypsum.

I. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES.
2. The following limits shall not be exceeded: Chemical
Limits.
Loss on ignition, per cent 4 00
.

Insoluble residue, per cent 0. 85

Sulfuric anhvdride (S0 3 ), per cent 2.00
Magnesia (MgO), per cent 5.00
•

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES.

3. The specific gravity of cement shall be not less than Specific Gravit:

3.10 (3.07 for white Portland cement). Should the test of

(503)
 .

504 Specifications and Tests for Portland Cement.

cement as received fall below this requirement a second test

may be made upon an ignited sample. The specific gravity test
will not be made unless specifically ordered.
Fineness. 4. The residue on a standard No. 200 sieve shall not exceed
22 per cent by weight.
Soundness. 5. A pat of neat cement shall remain firm and hard, and
show no signs of distortion, cracking, checking, or disintegra-
tion in the steam test for soundness.
Time of Setting. The cement shall not develop initial set in less than 45
6.

minutes when the Vicat needle is used or 60 minutes when the

Gillmore needle is used. Final set shall be attained within
10 hours.
Tensile Strength. 7. The average
tensile strength in pounds per square inch
of not lessthan three standard mortar briquettes (see Section 51)
composed of one part cement and three parts standard sand, by
weight, shall be equal to or higher than the following:

Age at Test, Storage of Briquettes. Tensile Strength

days. lb. per sq. in.

1 day in moist air, 6 days in water. 200

1 day in moist air, 27 days in water. 300

8. The average tensile strength of standard mortar at 28

days shall be higher than the strength at 7 days.

III. PACKAGES, MARKING AND STORAGE.

Packages and 9. The cement shall be delivered in suitable bags or barrels
Marking.
with the brand and name of the manufacturer plainly marked
thereon, unless shipped in bulk. A bag shall contain 94 lb. net.
A barrel shall contain 376 lb. net.
Storage. 10. The cement shall be stored in such a manner as to per-
mit easy access for proper inspection and identification of each
shipment, and in a suitable weather-tight building which will
protect the cement from dampness.

IV. INSPECTION.
inspection. 11. Every facility shall be provided the purchaser for care-
ful sampling and inspection at either the mill or at the site of
 Serial Designation: C 9-17. 505

the work, as may be specified by the purchaser. At least 10

days from the time of sampling shall be allowed for the com-
pletion of the 7-day test, and at least 31 days shall be allowed
for the completion of the 28-day test. The cement shall be
tested in accordance with the methods hereinafter prescribed.
The 28-day test shall be waived only when specifically so ordered.

V. REJECTION.
12. The cement may be rejected if it fails to meet any of Rejection,
the requirements of these specifications.
13. Cement shall not be rejected on account of failure to
meet the fineness requirement if upon retest after drying at
100° C. for one hour it meets this requirement.
14. Cement failing to meet the test for soundness in steam
may be accepted if it passes a retest using a new sample at any
time within 28 days thereafter.
15. Packages varying more than 5 per cent from the speci-
fiedweight may be rejected and if the average weight of pack-
;

ages in any shipment, as shown by weighing 50 packages taken

at random, is less than that specified, the entire shipment may
be rejected.

TESTS.
VI. SAMPLING.
16. Tests may be made on individual or composite samples Number of

as may be ordered. Each test sample should weigh at least Sam P les -

8 lb.
17. (a) Individual Sample. —
If sampled in cars one test
sample shall be taken from each 50 bbl. or fraction thereof.
If sampled in bins one sample shall be taken from each 100 bbl.
(b) Composite Sample. —
If sampled in cars one sample
shall be taken from one sack in each 40 sacks (or 1 bbl. in each
10 bbl.) and combined to form one test sample. If sampled in
bins or warehouses one test sample shall represent not more
than 200 bbl.
18. Cement may be sampled at the mill by any of the Method of
following methods that may be practicable, as ordered: Sampling.
 506 Specifications and Tests for Portland Cement.

(a) From the —

Conveyor Delivering to the Bin. At least 8 lb.
of cement shall be taken from approximately each 100 bbl.
passing over the conveyor.
(b) From Bins by Means of Proper Sampling Tubes.
Filled —
Tubes inserted vertically may be used for sampling cement to
a maximum depth of 10 ft. Tubes inserted horizontally may be
used where the construction of the bin permits. Samples shall
be taken from points well distributed over the face of the bin.
(c) From Filled Bins at Points of Discharge. Sufficient —
cement shall be drawn from the discharge openings to obtain
samples representative of the cement contained in the bin, as
determined by the appearance at the discharge openings of
indicators placed on the surface of the cement directly above
these openings before drawing of the cement is started.
Treatment of 19. Samples preferably shall be shipped and stored in air-
Sampie.
tight containers. Samples shall be passed through a sieve
having 20 meshes per linear inch in order to thoroughly mix
the sample, break up lumps and remove foreign materials.

VII. CHEMICAL ANALYSIS.

Loss on Ignition.
Method. 20. One gram of cement shall be heated in a weighed cov-
ered platinum crucible, of 20 to 25-cc. capacity, as follows,
using either method (a) or (b) as ordered:
(a) The crucible shall be placed in a hole in an asbestos
board, clamped horizontally so that about three-fifths of the
crucible projects below, and blasted at a full red heat for 15
minutes with an inclined flame; the loss in weight shall be
checked by a second blasting for 5 minutes. Care shall be
taken to wipe off particles of asbestos that may adhere to the
crucible when withdrawn from the hole in the board. Greater
neatness and shortening of the time of heating are secured by
making a hole to fit the crucible in a circular disk of sheet plat-
inum and placing this disk over a somewhat larger hole in an
asbestos board.
(b) The any tempera-
crucible shall be placed in a muffle at
ture between 900 and 1000° C. for 15 minutes and the loss in
weight shall be checked by a second heating for 5 minutes.
 Serial Designation: C 9-17. 507

21. A permissible variation of 0.25 will be allowed, and all Permissible

Varictloa
results in excess of the specified limit but within this permissible
-

variation shall be reported as 4 per cent.

Insoluble Residue.
22. To a 1-g. sample of cement shall be added 10 cc. of Method.
water and 5 cc. of concentrated hydrochloric acid; the liquid
shall be warmed until effervescence ceases. The solution shall
be diluted to 50 cc. and digested on a steam bath or hot plate
until it is evident that decomposition of the cement is complete.
The residue shall be filtered, washed with cold water, and the
filter paper and contents digested in about 30 cc. of a 5-per-

cent solution of sodium carbonate, the liquid being held at a

temperature just short of boiling for 15 minutes. The remain-
ing residue shall be filtered, washed with cold water, then with
a few drops of hot hydrochloric acid, 1:9, and finally with hot
water, and then ignited at a red heat and weighed as the insoluble
residue.
23. A permissible variation of 0.15 will be allowed, and all Permissible
Vanatlon
results in excess of the specified limit but within this permissible
-

variation shall be reported as 0.85 per cent.

Sulfuric Anhydride.
24. One gram of the cement shall be dissolved in 5 cc. of Method.
concentrated hydrochloric acid diluted with 5 cc. of water,
with gentle warming; when solution is complete 40 cc. of water
shall be added, the solution filtered, and the residue washed
thoroughly with water. The solution shall be diluted to 250 cc,
heated to boiling and 10 cc. of a hot 10-percent solution of
barium chloride shall be added slowly, drop by drop, from a
pipette and the boiling continued until the precipitate is well
formed. The solution shall be digested on the steam bath until
the precipitate has settled. The precipitate shall be filtered,
washed, and the paper and contents placed in a weighed plat-
inum crucible and the paper slowly charred and consumed
without flaming. The barium sulfate shall then be ignited and
weighed. The weight obtained multiplied by 34.3 gives the
percentage of sulfuric anhydride. The acid filtrate obtained in
 508 Specifications and Tests for Portland Cement.

the determination of the insoluble residue may be used for the

estimation of sulfuric anhydride instead of using a separate
sample.
Permissible 25. A permissible variation of 0.10 will be allowed, and all
Variation.
results in excess of the specified limit but within this permissible
variation shall be reported as 2.00 per cent.

Magnesia.
Method. 26. To 0.5 g. of the cement in an evaporating dish shall
be added 10 cc. of water to prevent lumping and then 10 cc. of
concentrated hydrochloric acid. The liquid shall be gently
heated and agitated until attack is complete. The solution
shall then be evaporated to complete dryness on a steam or
water bath. To hasten dehydration the residue may be heated
to 150 or even 200° C. for one-half to one hour. The residue
shall be treated with 10 cc. of concentrated hydrochloric acid
diluted with an equal amount
of water. The dish shall be
covered and the solution digested for ten minutes on a steam
bath or water bath. The diluted solution shall be filtered and
the separated silica washed thoroughly with water. 1 Five cubic
centimeters of concentrated hydrochloric acid and sufficient
bromine water- to precipitate any manganese which may be
present, shall be added to the filtrate (about 250 cc). This
shall be made alkaline with ammonium hydroxide, boiled until
there is but a faint odor of ammonia, and the precipitated iron
and aluminum hydroxides, after settling, shall be washed with
hot water, once by decantation and slightly on the filter. Set-
ting aside the filtrate, the precipitate shall be transferred by a
jet of hot water to the precipitating vessel and dissolved in
10 cc. of hot hydrochloric acid. The paper shall be extracted
with acid, the solution and washings being added to the main
solution. The aluminum and iron shall then be reprecipitated
at boiling heat by ammonium hydroxide and bromine water in
a volume of about 100 cc, and the second precipitate shall be
collected and washed on the filter used in the first instance if
this is still intact. To the combined filtrates from the hydrox-
ides of iron and aluminum, reduced in volume if need be, 1 cc.
of ammonium hydroxide shall be added, the solution brought

1 Since this procedure does not involve the determination of silica, a second evapora-
tion is unnecessary.
 Serial Designation: C 9-17. 509

to boiling, 25 cc. of a saturated solution of boiling ammonium

oxalate added, and the boiling continued until the precipitated
calcium oxalate has assumed a well-defined granular form.
The precipitate after one hour shall be filtered and washed, then
with the filter shall be placed wet in a platinum crucible, and
the paper burned off over a small flame of a Bunsen burner;
after ignition it be redissolved in hydrochloric acid and the
shall
solution diluted to 100 cc. Ammonia shall be added in slight
excess, and the liquid boiled. The lime shall then be reprecipi-
tated by ammonium oxalate, allowed to stand until settled,
filtered and washed. The combined filtrates from the calcium
precipitates shall be acidified with hydrochloric acid, concen-
trated on the steam bath to about 150 cc, and made slightly
alkaline with ammonium hydroxide, boiled and filtered (to
remove a little aluminum and iron and perhaps calcium). When
cool, 10 cc. of saturated solution of sodium-ammonium-hydrogen
phosphate shall be added with constant stirring. When the
ammonium-magnesium orthophosphate has formed,
crystallin
ammonia shall be added in moderate excess. The solution shall
be set aside for several hours in a cool place, filtered and washed
with water containing 2.5 per cent of 3 NH
The precipitate
.

shall be dissolved in a small quantity of hot hydrochloric acid,

the solution diluted to about 100 cc, 1 cc. of a saturated solu-
tion of sodium-ammonium-hydrogen phosphate added, and
ammonia drop by drop, with constant stirring, until the pre-
cipitate is againformed as described and the ammonia is in
moderate excess. The precipitate shall then be allowed to stand
about two hours, filtered and washed as before. The paper
and contents shall be placed in a weighed platinum crucible,
the paper slowly charred, and the resulting carbon carefully
burned off. The precipitate shall then be ignited to constant
weight over a Meker burner, or a blast not strong enough to
soften or melt the pyrophosphate. The weight of magnesium
pyrophosphate obtained multiplied by 72.5 gives the percentage
of magnesia. The precipitate so obtained always contains
some calcium and usually small quantities of iron, aluminum,
and manganese as phosphates.
27. A permissible variation of 0.4 will be allowed, and all Permissible
results in excess of the specified limit but within this permissible Variation,
variation shall be reported as 5.00 per cent.
 "

510 Specifications and Tests for Portland Cement.

VIII. DETERMINATION OF SPECIFIC GRAVITY.

Apparatus. 28. The determination of specific gravity shall be made
with a standardized Le Chatelier apparatus which conforms to
the requirements illustrated in Fig. 1. This apparatus is stand-
ardized by the United States Bureau of Standards. Kerosene
free from water, or benzine not lighter than 62° Baume, shall
be used in making this determination.
Method. 29. The flask shall be filled with either of these liquids to
a point on the stem between zero and one cubic centimeter,
and 64 g. of cement, of the same temperature as the liquid,
shall be slowly introduced, taking care that the cement does
not adhere to the inside of the flask above the liquid and to
free the cement from air by rolling the flask in an inclined
position. After all the cement is introduced, the level of the
liquid will rise to some division of the graduated neck; the
difference between readings is the volume displaced by 64 g.
of the cement.
The specific gravity shall then be obtained from the formula
Weight of cement (g.)
Specific gravity
Displaced volume (cc.)

30. The flask, during the operation, shall be kept immersed

in water, in order to avoid variations in the temperature of
the liquid in the flask, which shall not exceed 0°.5 C. The
results of repeated tests should agree within 0.01.
31. The determination of specific gravity shall be made on
the cement as received; if it falls below 3.10, a second deter-
mination shall be made after igniting the sample as described
in Section 20.

IX. DETERMINATION OF FINENESS.

Apparatus 32. Wire cloth for standard sieves for cement shall be
woven (not twilled) from brass, bronze, or other suitable wire,
and mounted without distortion on frames not less than 1? in.
below the top of the frame. The sieve frames shall be circular,
approximately 8 in. in diameter, and may be provided with a
pan and cover. •

33. A standard No. 200 sieve is one having nominally an

0.0029-in. opening and 200 wires per inch standardized by the
 Serial Designation: C 9-17. 511

¥
Ground Glass ,s
[ |

Stopper

c!c

I 6cc fc
> Capacity
' at?0 C. vo

Have two O.I cc

Graduations extend
above I and
below O Mark-

"7T

Capac.
of Bulk
appro/.
ESOcc

j_Y_^.«

j<- 9 cm

PlC. 1. —Le Chatelier Apparatus.

 :

512 Specifications and Tests for Portland Cement.

U. S. Bureau of Standards, and conforming to the following

requirements
The No. 200 sieve should have 200 wires per inch, and the
number of wires in any whole inch shall not be outside the
limits of 192 to 208. No opening between adjacent parallel
wires shall be more than 0.0O50 in. in width. The diameter of
the wire should be 0.0021 in. and the average diameter shall not
be outside the limits 0.0019 to 0.0023 in. The value of the
sieve as determined by sieving tests made in conformity with
the standard specification for these tests on a standardized
cement which gives a residue of 25 to 20 per cent on the
No. 200 sieve, or on other similarly graded material, shall not
show a variation of more than 1.5 per cent above or below the
standards maintained at the Bureau of Standards.
Method. 34. The test shall be made with 50 g. of cement. The
sieve shall be thoroughly clean and dry. The cement shall be
placed on the No. 200 sieve, with pan and cover attached, if
desired, and shall be held in one hand in a slightly inclined posi-
tion so that the sample will be well distributed over the sieve,
at the same time gently striking the side about 150 times per
minute against the palm of the other hand on the up stroke.
The sieve shall be turned every 25 strokes about one-sixth of a
revolution in the same direction. The operation shall continue
until not more than 0.05 g. passes through in one minute of
continuous sieving. The fineness shall be determined from the
weight of the residue on the sieve expressed as a percentage of
the weight of the original sample.
35. Mechanical sieving devices may be used, but the cement
shall not be rejected if it meets the fineness requirement when
tested by the hand method described in Section 34.
Permissible 36. A permissible variation of 1 will be allowed, and all
Variation.
resu ^ s m excess of the specified limit but within this permissible
variation shall be reported as 22 per cent.

X. MIXING CEMENT PASTES AND MORTARS.

Method. The quantity of dry material to be mixed at one time
37.
shall not exceed 1000 g. nor be less than 500 g. The propor-
tions of cement or cement and sand shall be stated by weight in
grams of the dry materials; the quantity of water shall be
 Serial Designation: C 9-17. 513

expressed in cubic centimeters (l cc. of water =1 g.). The dry

materials shall be weighed, placed upon a non-absorbent surface,
thoroughly mixed dry if sand is used, and a crater formed in
the center, into which the proper percentage of clean water shall
be poured; the material on the outer edge shall be turned into
the crater by the aid of a trowel. After an interval of \ minute
for the absorption of the water the operation shall be completed
by continuous, vigorous mixing, squeezing and kneading with
the hands for at least one minute. During the operation of
1

mixing, the hands should be protected by rubber gloves.

38. The temperature of the room and the mixing water
shall be maintained as nearly as practicable at 21° C. (70° F.).

XL NORMAL CONSISTENCY.
39. The Vicat apparatus consists of a frame A (Fig. 2) Apparatus,
bearing a movable rod B, weighing 300 g., being one end C
1 cm. in diameter for a distance of 6 cm., the other having a
removable needle D, 1 mm. in diameter, 6 cm. long. The rod
is reversible, and can be held in any desired position by a screw

E, and has midway between the ends a mark F which moves

under a scale (graduated to millimeters) attached to the frame A .

The paste is held in a conical, hard-rubber ring G, 7 cm. in diam-

eter at the base, 4 cm. high, resting on a glass plate about H
10 cm. square.
40. In making the determination, 500 g. of cement, with a Method,
measured quantity of water, shall be kneaded into a paste, as
described in Section 37, and quickly formed into a ball with
the hands, completing the operation by tossing it six times from
one hand to the other, maintained about 6 in. apart; the ball
resting in the palm of one hand shall be pressed into the larger
end of the rubber ring held in the other hand, completely filling
the ring with paste; the excess at the larger end shall then be
removed by a single movement of the palm of the hand; the
ring shall then be placed on its larger end on a glass plate and

•In order to secure uniformity In the results of tests for the time of setting and tensile
strength the manner of mixing above described should be carefully followed. At least one
minute is necessary to obtain the desired plasticity which is not appreciably affected by
continuing the mixing for several minutes. The exact time necessary is dependent upon
the personal equation of the operator The error in mixing should be on the side of
over mixing.
514 Specifications and Tests for Portland Cement.

the excess paste at the smaller end sliced off at the top of the
ring by a single oblique stroke of a trowel held at a slight angle
with the top of the ring. During these operations care shall be
taken not to compress the paste. The paste confined in the
ring, resting on the plate, shall be placed under the rod, the
larger end of which shall be brought in contact with the surface

Fig. 2. —Vicat Apparatus.

of the paste; the scale shall be then read, and the rod quickly
released. The paste shall be of normal consistency when the
rod settles to a point 10 mm. below the original surface in
$ minute after being released. The apparatus shall be free
from all vibrations during the test. Trial pastes shall be made
with varying percentages of water until the normal consistency
 —

Serial Designation: C 9-17. 515

is obtained. The amount of water required shall be expressed

in percentage by weight of the dry cement.
41. The consistency of standard mortar shall depend on the
amount of water required to produce a paste of normal con-
sistency from the same sample of cement. Having determined
the normal consistency of the sample, the consistency of stand-
ard mortar made from the same sample shall be as indicated in
Table I, the values being in percentage of the combined dry-
weights of the cement and standard sand.

Table I. Percentage of Water for Standard Mortars.

Percentage of Water Percentage of Water Percentage of Water Percentage of Water

for Neat Cement for One Cement, for Neat Cement for One Cement,
Paste of Normal Three Standard Ottawa Paste of Normal Three Standard Ottawa
Consistency. Sand. Consistency. Sand.

15 0.0 23 10.8

16 0.2 24 10.8

17 0.3 25 10.7

18 0.5 26 10.8

19 0.7 27 11.0

20 0.8 28 11.2

21 10.0 20 11.3

22 10.2 30 11.5

XII. DETERMINATION OF SOUNDNESS. 1

42. A steam apparatus, which can be maintained at a tern- Apparatus,

perature between 98 and 100° C, or one similar to that shown

recommended. The capacity of this apparatus may
in Fig. 3, is
be increased by using a rack for holding the pats in a vertical
or inclined position.
43. A pat from cement paste of normal consistency about Method.
3 in. in diameter, \ in. thick at the center, and tapering to a
thin edge, shall be made on clean glass plates about 4 in. square,

' Unsoundness is usually manifested by change In volume which causes distortion,

cracking, checking or disintegration.
Pats Improperly made or exposed to drying may develop what are known as shrinkage
cracks within the first 24 hours and are not an indication of unsoundness. These con-
ditions are illustrated in Fig. 4.

The remain on the glass or the cracking of the glass to which the
failure of the pats to
puts are attached does not necessarily Indicate unsoundness.
516 Specifications and Tests for Portland Cement.

-ho
aqni Jaqqny 3/qiX9U~*x \
>jOOQ i/OUIJ ++-f
Serial Desigxatiox: C 9-17. 517

'W
 518 Specifications and Tests for Portland Cement.

and stored in moist air for 24 hours. In molding the pat, the
cement paste shall first be flattened on the glass and the pat
then formed by drawing the trowel from the outer edge toward
the center.
44. The pat shall then be placed in an atmosphere of steam
at a temperature between 98 and 100° C. upon a suitable sup-
port 1 above boiling water for 5 hours.
in.

Should the pat leave the plate, distortion may be

45.
detected best with a straight edge applied to the surface which
was in contact with the plate.

XIII. DETERMINATION OF TIME OF SETTING.

The following are alternate methods, either of which
46.
may be used as ordered:
vicat 47. The time of setting shall be determined with the Vicat
Apparatus,
apparatus described in Section 39. (See Fig. 2.)
vicat 48. A paste of normal consistency shall be molded in the
hard-rubber ring G as described in Section 40, and placed under
the rod B, the smaller end of which shall then be carefully
brought in contact with the surface of the paste, and the rod
quickly released. The initial set shall be said to have occurred
when the needle ceases to pass a point 5 mm. above the glass
plate in \ minute after being released; and the final set, when
the needle does not sink visibly into the paste. The test pieces
shall be kept in moist air during the test. This may be accom-
plishedby placing them on a rack over water contained in a
pan and covered by a damp cloth, kept from contact with
them by means of a wire screen; or they may be stored in a
moist closet. Care shall be taken to keep the needle clean, as
the collection of cement on the sides of the needle retards the
penetration, while cement on the point may increase the pene-
tration. The time not only by the per-
of setting is affected
centage and temperature of the water used and the amount of
kneading the paste receives, but by the temperature and humid-
ity of the air, and its determination is therefore only approximate.
GMmore 49. The time of setting shall be determined by the Gill-
more needles. The Gillmore needles should preferably be
mounted as shown in Fig. 5 (b).
 Serial Designation: C 9-17. 519

50. The time of setting shall be determined as follows: Gilimore

A pat of neat cement paste about 3 in. in diameter and | in. in
thickness with a flat top (Fig. 5 (a)), mixed to a normal con-
sistency, shall be kept in moist air at a temperature maintained
as nearly as practicable at 21° C. (70° F.). The cement shall be
considered to have acquired its initial set when the pat will bear,

(a) Pat with Top Surface Flattened for Determining

Time of Setting by Gilimore Method.

(b) Gilimore Needles.

Fig. 5.

without appreciable indentation, the Gilimore needle tj in. in

diameter, loaded to weigh £ lb. The final set has been acquired
when the pat will bear without appreciable indentation, the
Gilimore needle A
in. in diameter, loaded to weigh 1 lb. In
making the test, the needles shall be held in a vertical position,
and applied lightly to the surface of the pat.
 520 Specifications and Tests for Portland Cement.

XIV. TENSION TESTS.

Form of Test 51. The form shown in Fig. 6 shall be used.
of test piece
Piece.
The molds be made of non-corroding metal and have suf-
shall
ficient material in the sides to prevent spreading during mold-

X
Fig. 6. —Details for Briquette.

ing. Gang molds when used shall be of the type shown in

Fig. 7. Molds shall be wiped with an oily cloth before using,
standard Sand. 52. The sand to be used shall be natural sand from Ottawa,
111., screened to pass a No. 20 sieve and retained on a No. 30
sieve. This sand may be obtained from the Ottawa Silica Co.,
at a cost of two cents per pound, f. o. b. cars, Ottawa, 111.
 :

Serial Designation: C 9-17. 521

53.This sand, having passed the No. 20 sieve, shall be con-

sidered standard when not more than 5 g. pass the No. 30 sieve
after one minute continuous sieving of a 500-g. sample.
54. The sieves shall conform to the following specifications
The No. 20 sieve shall have between 19.5 and 20.5 wires
per whole inch of the warp wires and between 19 and 21 wires
per whole inch of the shoot wires. The diameter of the wire
should be 0.0165 in. and the average diameter shall not be
outside the limits of 0.0160 and 0.0170 in.
The No. 30 sieve shall have between 29.5 and 30.5 wires
per whole inch of the warp wires and between 28.5 and 31.5
wires per whole inch of the shoot wires. The diameter of the
wire should be 0.0110 in. and the average diameter shall not
be outside the limits 0.0105 to 0.0115 in.

Fig. 7.— Gang Mold.

55. Immediately after mixing, the standard mortar shall Molding,

be placed in the molds, pressed in firmly with the thumbs and
smoothed off with a trowel without ramming. Additional mor-
tar shall be heaped above the mold and smoothed off with a
trowel; the trowel shall be drawn over the mold in such a man-
ner as to exert a moderate pressure on the material. The mold
shall then be turned over and the operation of heaping, thumb-
ing and smoothing off repeated.
be made with any standard machine. The
56. Tests shall Testing,

briquettes shall be tested as soon as they are removed from the

water. The bearing surfaces of the clips and briquettes shall
be free from grains of sand or dirt. The briquettes shall be
carefully centered and the load applied continuously at the rate
of 600 lb. per minute.
57. Testing machines should be frequently calibrated in
order to determine their accuracy.
 522 Specifications and Tests for Portland Cement. .

Faulty 58. Briquettes that are manifestly faulty, or which give

r que es.
s t ren g t h s differing more than 15 per cent from the average value
of all test pieces made from the same sample and broken at
the same period, shall not be considered in determining the
tensile strength.

XV. STORAGE OF TEST PIECES.

Apparatus. 59. The moist closet may consist of a soapstone, slate or
concrete box, or a wooden box lined with metal. If a wooden
box is used, the interior should be covered with felt or broad
wicking kept wet. The bottom of the moist closet should be
covered with water. The interior of the closet should be pro-
vided with non-absorbent shelves on which to place the test
pieces, the shelves being so arranged that they may be with-
drawn readily.
Methods. 60. Unless otherwise specified all test pieces, immedi-
ately after molding, shall be placed in the moist closet for from
20 to 24 hours.
61. The briquettes shall be kept in molds on glass plates
in the moist closet for at least 20 hours. After 24 hours in
moist air the briquettes shall be immersed in clean water in
storage tanks of non-corroding material.
62. The air and water shall be maintained as nearly as
practicable at a temperature of 21° C. (70° F.).
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
NATURAL CEMENT.

Serial Designation: C 10-09.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation C 10; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1904; Revised, 1908, 1909.

Natural cement is the finely pulverized product result-

1. Definition,

ing from the calcination of an argillaceous limestone at a

temperature only sufficient to drive off the carbonic acid gas.

I. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES.
2. The residue on a standard No. 100 sieve shall not exceed Fineness.
10 per cent, and on a standard No. 200 sieve shall not exceed
30 per cent, by weight.
3. Pats of neat cement about 3 in. in diameter, \ in. thick Soundness,

at center, tapering to a thin edge, shall be kept in moist air for

a period of 24 hours.
(a) A pat shall then be kept in air at normal temperature.
(b) Another pat shall be kept in water maintained as near
70° F. as practicable.
These pats shall be observed at intervals for at least 28
days, and, to satisfactorily pass the tests, shall remain firm
(523)
 :

524 Specifications for Natural Cement.

and hard and show no signs of distortion, checking, cracking,

or disintegrating.
Time of Setting. 4. The cement shall not develop initial set in less than 10
minutes, using the Vicat needle. Final set shall be attained
in not less than 30 minutes nor more than 3 hours, using the
Vicat needle.
Tensile Strength. 5. The minimum requirements for tensile strength for bri-
quettes 1 sq. in. in cross-section shall be as follows, and the
cement shall show no retrogression in strength within the periods
specified
Age. Neat Cement. Strength.
24 hours in moist air 75 lb.
"
days
7 (1 day in moist air, 6 days in water) 150
" "27 " " "
28 days (1 " ) 250

One Part Cement, Three Parts Standard Ottawa Sand.

days (1 day in moist air, 6 days in water)
7 50 lb.
"27 " " "
28 days (1 " " ) 125

II. PACKAGES, MARKING AND STORAGE.

Packages and 6. The cement shall be delivered in suitable bags or barrels
Marking.
with the brand and name of the manufacturer plainly marked
thereon. A bag shall contain 94 lb. net. A barrel shall contain
282 lb. net.
Storage. 7. The cement shall be stored in such a manner as to per-

mit easy access for proper inspection and identification of each

shipment, and in a suitable weather-tight building which will
protect the cement from dampness.

III. INSPECTION.
inspection. 8. Every facility shall be provided the purchaser for
(a)
careful sampling and inspection at either the mill or at the
site of the work, as may be specified by the purchaser. At least
10 days from the time of sampling shall be allowed for the com-
pletion of the 7-day test, and at least 31 days shall be allowed
for the completion of the 28-day test.

(b) The cement shall be tested in accordance with the

methods contained in the Standard Specifications and Tests for
Portland Cement (Serial Designation: C 9) of the American
Society for Testing Materials. 1
> See pp. 503-522.
 :

Serial Designation: C 10-09. 525

IV. REJECTION.
9. The cement may be rejected if it fails to meet any of Rejection,
the requirements of these specifications.
10. Cement failing to meet the 7-day requirements may be
held awaiting the results of the 28-day tests before rejection.

Editorial Note.
In connection with its reports on the Standard Specifications and Tests
for Portland Cement (Serial Designation: C 9-17), Committee C-l on Cement
has declared its purpose to give consideration to the revision of the present

Standard Specifications for Natural Cement, and recommended that in the

meantime the new methods of tests for Portland cement be applied to the
testing of natural cement. In this connection attention is directed to the
following feature
Fineness. —The Standard Specifications for Natural Cement specify a
standard No. 100 sieve (see Section 2), which is not included in the Standard
Specifications and Tests for Portland cement. The requirements for the
standard No. 100 sieve will therefore remain as published in the 1915 Year-
Book, page 358, as follows:

Diameter of Wire, in . 0042 - . 0048

arP 95 " 101
Meshes per Linear Inch /^
[Woof 93-103
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
DRAIN TILE.

Serial Designation : C4- 16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation C 4; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1914; Revised, 1916.

Classes. 1. (a) These specifications cover three classes of drain tile,

namely, Farm Drain Tile, Standard Drain Tile, and Extra-

Quality Drain Tile.
(b) The purposes for which these classes are intended to be

suitable are as follows:

Farm Drain Tile, for ordinary private drainage work on
farms, for moderate sizes and depths;
Standard Drain Tile, for ordinary district land drainage at
moderate depths;
Extra-Quality Drain Tile, for district land drainage, for
considerable depths and where an extra quality is desired.
Basis of 2. The purchaser shall specify the class or classes of tile
Purchase.
to be supplied, whether Farm Drain Tile, Standard Drain Tile,
or Extra-Quality Drain Tile. Standard Drain Tile shall be sup-
plied where no other advance selection is stated.
Basis of 3. (a) The acceptability of drain tile shall be determined
Acceptance,
(l) by the results of the chemical and physical tests hereinafter
(526)
 Serial Designation: C 4-16. 527

and (2) by visual inspection, to determine whether the

specified,
comply with the specifications as to dimensions, shape, and
tiles

freedom from visible external and internal defects.

(b) The acceptance of drain tile as satisfactorily meeting

one of these two general requirements shall not be construed as

in any way waiving the other.

I. MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE.

4. (a) These specifications shall apply to drain tile made of Materials,

shale, fire clays or surface clays and to drain tile made of concrete.
(b) By shale is meant a stratified clay, usually red-burning,
more or indurated by heat or pressure, with well-marked
less
cleavage, laid down prior to the present geological epoch.
(c) By fire clay is meant a stratified clay, usually buff-

burning, usually less indurated than shales, with poorly marked

cleavage, laid down prior to the present geological epoch.
(d) By surface clay is meant an unstratified, unconsolidated
plastic glacial or alluvial clay, laid down by the glacial ice sheet,
or on the flood plains of rivers, during the present geological
epoch.
(«) By concrete is meant a suitable mixture of Portland
cement, mineral aggregates and water, hardened by hydraulic
chemical reaction.
(J) If the purchaser desires to exclude any of these materials
he shall so specify in advance, All materials used shall be first-
class of theirkind and suitable for the purpose.
5. The method
of manufacture shall be such as to insure Manufacture,

excellence of product and uniformity in quality.

II. CHEMICAL TESTS AND REQUIREMENTS.

6. The purchaser may prescribe in advance special chemi- Chemical
cal requirements in cases where drainage waters have marked Requirement!
acid or alkaline character, or are of abnormally high tempera-
ture, and may use chemical analysis of the tile to ascertain
whether these special requirements are met. Without a special
agreement in advance, no drain tile shall be rejected by reason
of its composition as determined by ultimate chemical analysis.
The presence in drain tile of visible grains or masses of
caustic lime, iron pyrites, or any other minerals which are
 .

528 Specifications for Drain Tile.

known to cause slaking or disintegration of the tile, shall be

construed as a valid ground for rejection, unless satisfactory
proof be submitted that the tiles are permanent and durable,
and that the objectionable minerals are not present in quantity
or condition towork damage.

III. PHYSICAL TESTS.

Physical Tests. 7. The physical tests of drain tile shall include (.4) Strength
Tests and (B) Absorption Tests; and may include (C) Freezing
and Thawing Tests, when specified by the purchaser in advance,
or when called for by the manufacturer or other seller as pro-
vided in Sections 34, 35, 47 and 52.
Selection of 8. The specimens of tile shall all be selected at the fac-
Specimens of
tory or at the shipping destination, or at the trench, at the
Tile.
option of the purchaser. The selection shall be made by a
competent inspector employed by the purchaser. The inspec-
tor shall divide the tile into sub-classes if lack of uniformity in
any important particular warrants such division, and shall
select enough representative specimens of tile from each sub-
class for a complete set of standard physical tests.
Number and Cost 9. A standard physical test shall comprise tests of five
SPedmen8 ° f
Tile
individu Specimens of tile may be selected by the
inspector in such number as he judges necessary to determine
fairly the quality of all the tile. The manufacturer or other
seller shall furnish without separate charge up
specimens of tile

to 0.5 per cent of the whole number of tile, and the purchaser
shall pay for all in excess of that percentage at the same rate
as for other tile.

(A) Strength Tests of Drain Tile.

Specimens of
Tile. 10. The specimens of tile shall be unbroken, full-size tile.
Moisture
1 1 The walls of the tile shall, at the time of testing, be as
Condition of thoroughly wet as will result from completely covering with
Specimens of
hay, cloth, or similar absorbent material, and keeping the cover-
Tile.
ing wet for not less than 12 hours.
Temperature 12. No specimen of tile shall be exposed to water or air
Condition of
Specimens
temperatures lower than 40° F. from the beginning of wetting
of
Tile. until tested. Frozen tile shall be completely thawed before
the wetting begins.
 Serial Designation: C 4-16. 529

13. Each specimen of tile shall be weighed on reliable scales Weighing,

just prior to testing, and the weights shall be reported.
14. Any machine or hand method which will apply the Application
of Load
load continuously, or in increments not exceeding 5 per cent of
'

the estimated total breaking load, may be used in making the

test. The not be allowed to stand under load longer
tile shall

than is required for observing and recording the loads. All

solid parts of the bearing frames and bearing blocks shall be so
rigid that the distribution of the load will not be affected appre-
ciably by the deformation of any part. All bearings and the
specimens of tile shall be so accurately centered as to secure a
symmetrical distribution of the loading on each side of the cen-
ter of the tile in every direction.
15. The purchaser shall choose (l) sand bearings, (2) choice of
Betrin s"-
hydraulic bearings, or (3) three-point bearings, for use in mak-
ing strength tests of drain tile. (See Sections 18, 19, and 20).
16. The test results shall be calculated and reported, in Calculation a

pounds per linear foot of tile, in terms of the "Ordinary Sup-

xertltaralta
porting Strength." 1

The ordinary supporting strength shall be calculated by

multiplying the test breaking loads by the following factors:
For sand bearings, 1.00; for hydraulic bearings, 1.25; for
three-point bearings, 1.50.
The results of the strength tests shall be reported separately
for each of the five individual specimens of tile constituting a
standard test, together with the average.
17. The modulus of rupture may or may not be calculated Modulus of
Ru P ture
and reported, at the option of the purchaser. When reported
-

2
it shall be calculated by the equations

W
M = 0.20r— (1)
12

f^ M (2)

1
The "ordinary supporting strength." when calculated as specified in Section 16, is
approximately equal to the actual supporting strength of a tile when laid in a ditch by the
"ordinary" method. See note under Table II.
'The coefficient of 0.20 in equation (I) approximates the value found by theoretical
analysis and also that determined by extended tests.
 530 Specifications for Drain Tile.

where M — maximum bending moment in wall in pound-inches

per inch of length, r = radius of middle line of tile wall in inches,
W = ordinary supporting strength, calculated as prescribed in
Section 16, in pounds per linear foot of tile, /= modulus of
rupture in pounds per square inch, and t = thickness of tile wall
in inches.
Five-eighths of the weight of the tile per linear foot for
sand bearings, or three-fourths for hydraulic or three-point
bearings, shall be added to W
in computing the maximum
bending moment M, when such addition exceeds 5 per cent of
W. The value of t used shall be the average thickness of the
wall at the top of the tile or that at the bottom, selecting the
lesser of the two.
Sand Bearings. is. (See Fig. 1.) —When sand bearings are used, the ends of
each specimen of tile shall be accurately marked in quarters of
the circumference prior to the test. Specimens shall be care-
fully bedded, above and below, in sand, for one-fourth the cir-
cumference of the tile measured on the middle line of the wall.
The depth of bedding above and below the tile at the thinnest
points shall be one-half the radius of the middle line of the wall.
The sand used shall be clean, and shall be such as will pass
a No. 4 screen.
The top bearing frame shall not be allowed to come in con-
tact with the tile nor with the top bearing plate. The upper
surface of the sand in the top bearing shall be struck level with
a straight edge, and shall be covered with a rigid top bearing
plate, with lower surface a true plane, made of heavy timbers
or other rigid material, capable of distributing the test load
uniformly without appreciable bending. The test load shall
be applied at the exact center of this top bearing plate, in such
a manner as to permit free motion of the plate in all directions.
For this purpose a spherical bearing is preferred, but two rollers
at right angles may be used. The test may be made without
the use of a testing machine, by piling weights directly on a
platform resting on the top bearing plate, provided, however,
that the weight shall be piled symmetrically about a vertical
line through the center of the tile, and that the platform shall
not be allowed to touch the top bearing frame.
The frames of the top and bottom bearings shall be made
Serial Designation: C 4-16. 531
 532 Specifications for Drain Tile.

of timbers so heavy as to avoid appreciable bending by the side

pressure of the sand. The interior surfaces of the frames shall
be dressed. No frame shall come in contact with the tile
during the test. A strip of cloth may, if desired, be attached
to the inside of the upper frame on each side, along the lower
edge, to prevent the escape of sand between the frame and the
tile.

Hydraulic
Bearings.
19. (See Fig. 2.) —
When hydraulic bearings are used, the
ends of each specimen of tile shall be accurately marked in
halves of the circumference prior to the test.
An hydraulic bearing shall be composed of a wooden platen,
to which is attached, as hereinafter described, a section of rub-
ber hose. The hose
shall He against the tile, and the pressure
shall be applied to the hose through the platen.
The platen shall be built of strong wood, and shall be not
less than 6 by 6 in. in section, and its least length shall be the
length of the tile plus 8 in. One-inch quarter rounds, with their
convex surfaces facing and 2 in. apart in the clear, shall be
firmly attached to the bearing side. The straight portion of
this face shall extend at least the length of the tile, and the
platen beyond this length may be cut to the arc of a circle.
Between the quarter rounds shall be laid a piece of 2£-in.
hose which shall be closed in a water-tight manner at each
end by clamps. The hose shall contain a volume of water not
less than one-half nor more than two-thirds its capacity, when
completely distended. This hose may be attached to the platen
at either end in any satisfactory manner which will not induce
wrinkling when under test pressure.
The test load shall be applied at the middle of the top
bearing, in such a way as to leave the bearing free to move in
the vertical plane of the axis of the tile.

It is recommended that stops be screwed to the platen,

symmetrical with the point of application of the load, and at a
distance apart not greater than the length of the tile plus $ in.
This will help center the load coming upon the tile.
Three-point
Bearings.
20. (See Fig. 3.) —When three-point bearings are used,
the ends of each specimen of tile shall be accurately marked in
halves of the circumference prior to the test.
The lower bearings shall consist of two wooden strips with
 .

Serial Designation: C 4-16. 533

vertical sides, each strip having its interior top corner rounded
to a radius of approximately % in. They
be straight, and
shall
shall be securely fastened to a rigid block with their interior
vertical sides 1 in. apart.

The upper bearing shall be a wooden block, straight and

true from end to end.
The test load shall be applied through the upper bearing
block in such a way as to leave the bearing free to move in a
vertical plane passing midway between the lower bearings.
In testing a tile which is "out of straight," the lines of the
bearings chosen shall be from those which appear to give most
favorable conditions for fair bearings.

(B) Absorption Tests of Dram Tile.

21 Notthan three separate test specimens from each

less Test Specim

of five separate tiles shall be taken as a "standard sample" for the

absorption test. Of the three specimens from each tile, one
shall be taken from one end, another from the opposite end, and
the third shall be taken from the middle portion of the tile.
Each specimen shall be of from 12 to 20 sq. in. in area,
measured upon the exterior or convex side, and shall be as nearly
square as the nature of the material will readily permit. The
specimens shall be obtained by breaking the tile, and shall be
apparently sound, solid pieces of the wall of the tile, and shall
not show cracks or fissures or shattered edges due to the
shock of breaking or cutting. The specimens may be obtained
from the broken pieces of the tiles used in the strength test,
if the restrictions as to the size and location of the specimens

can be duly observed. The specimens shall be so marked as to

permit the identity of each one to be ascertained at any stage
of the test.
22.Preparatory to the absorption test, all specimens shall Drying Test
P ecimens
-

be weighed and then dried in a drier or oven, at a temper-

first

ature of not less than 110° C. (230° F.) for not less than three
hours. After removal from the drier, the specimens shall be
allowed to cool to a temperature of 20 to 25° C. (68 to 77° F.)
and reweighed. If the specimens were apparently dry when

taken, and the second weight closely checks the first, the speci-
mens shall be considered dry. If the specimens were known to
 534 Specifications tor Drain Tile.

be wet when taken, they shall be placed in the drier for a fur-
ther drying treatment of two hours, and reweighed. If the
third weight checks the second, the specimens shall be consid-
ered dry. In case of any doubt, the specimens must be redried
for two-hour periods until check weights are obtained.
Weighing and 23. The balance used shall be sensitive to 0.5 g. when
Reweighing.
loaded with 1 kg., and weighings shall be read at least to the
nearest gram. Where other than metric weights are used, the
same order of accuracy must be obtained.
In reweighing after immersion, the specimens shall be
removed from the water, not allowed to drain for more than one
minute, the superficial water removed by towel or blotting
paper, and the specimens at once put upon the balance.
Immersion of 24. Specimens after weighing shall be placed in a suitable
Test Specimens.
woven-wire receptacle, packed tightly enough to prevent jos-
tling, covered with distilled water or rainwater, raised to the
boiling point and boiled for five hours, and then cooled in water
to a final temperature of 10 to 15° C. (50 to 59° F.).
Calculation and The test results shall be calculated as percentages of the
25.
Reporting of
initialdry weight, carried to the nearest first decimal place.
Results.
The results shall be reported separately for each individual
specimen, together with the mean of the fifteen or more speci-
mens comprising the standard sample, the maximum and the
minimum single observations entering into the mean, and the
variation between the maximum and the minimum of the three
specimens of each tile represented in the the standard sample.

(C) Freezing and Thawing Tests of Drain Tile.

Test Specimens. 26. The test specimens employed in making the absorption
test shall preferably be used for the freezing and thawing test.
In the event that the same specimens are not available, an-
other set selected as specified in Section 21 shall be taken.
Drying Test 27. In the event that new specimens for the freezing and
Specimens.
thawing test must be prepared, they shall be dried as specified
in Section 22.
Weighing and 28. The same scales and weights as are specified in Section
Reweighing.
23 for the absorption test or others of equivalent sensitiveness
and accuracy shall be employed for the weighings required in
 Serial Designation: C 4-16. 535

the freezing and thawing test. The same procedure in weigh-

ings and reweighing as specified in Section 23 shall be used.
In the event that new specimens for the freezing and immersion of
29.
Te8t s P ecimeD
thawing test must be prepared, they shall be immersed and
boiled and cooled in water as specified in Section 24.
30. When the specimens (either from the absorption test or Freezing and
from a specially prepared series) have been weighed after satu- Thawm «-
ration with water, they shall be returned to the water, and
kept immersed till the freezing test is begun. For freezing,
they shall be placed with their concave faces upward in water-
tight metal trays, suitably mounted in a rigid metal crate, 1 and
immersed in ice water until the specimens have attained sub-
stantially the temperature of the water, after which the water
shall be drawn down to a depth of % in. in each tray. The crate
shall then be lifted as a whole, without disturbing the specimens,
and placed in the freezing apparatus.
Freezing shall be performed in a quiet atmosphere, free
from perceptible natural or artificial currents. If artificial
freezing apparatus is employed, 2 the apparatus shall have suf-
ficient heat-absorbent capacity to enable the temperature of
the freezing chamber to be brought to —10° C. ( + 14° F.) or
below, within thirty minutes after the introduction of the speci-
mens. The temperature in the freezing apparatus shall not fall
lower than —20° C. (—4° F.). The freezing shall be continued
until the water in the trays is frozen solid. Exposure to freez-
ing conditions in excess of this requirement shall be considered
as without significance.
At the conclusion of freezing under the specified condi-
tions, the crate of specimens shall be withdrawn and at once
immersed in water at a temperature of 85 to 100° C. (185 to
212° F.) in a special receptacle of proper size. Heating shall be
continued so that the water will regain the required temperature
as soon as practicable after the specimens are immersed. A
temperature of 85 to 100° C. (185 to 212° F.) shall then be
maintained for not less than 15 minutes. At the conclusion of
1 Fig. 4 shows a crate and trays suitable for use in the box for artificial freezing illustrated
In Plate I.

• Artificial freezing will generally be necessary. It may be conducted in a commercial

zero (F.) refrigerating room, or In an artificial freezing box similar to the one shown in Plate I, .

In which »«co (P.) temperatures can readily be produced by the use of salt and Ice.
 i

536 Specifications for Drain Tile.

Trays
partly
Removed
t"

Front Elevation. Side Elevation.

,J

5j>"''
2 Corner Strips, Ij'xg-xl

Top View,
Trays Removed.

Notes Section A-A,

Rack Constructed of -g x-g X g- Trays Removed.
Galvanized Angles, except as Noted.
All Connections Riveted or Sol-
dered.
Trays, Hxllx fg outside, Made of
No. 17 Galvanized Steel.

Pic 4. —Suggested Plans for Freezing Crate and Trays.

 .

Serial Designation: C 4-16. 537

the thawing treatment, the crate of specimens shall be cooled

down rapidly in water to 10 to 15° C. (50 to 59° F.) and then
inspected.The condition of each sample after each thawing
be noted in the records.
shall
3 1 Failure under the freezing and thawing treatment Method of
shall be considered to be reached when: Determining
/ \ rm i f • i j«
• n« Failure in
• •

(a) The specimens show superficial disintegration or spalling Freezing and

with loss of weight of more than 5 per cent of the initial dry Thawin e Test*,
weight; or,

(b) The specimens are badly cracked in other than lamina-

tion planes; or,

(c) The specimens show evident serious loss of structural

strength.

IV. PHYSICAL TEST REQUIREMENTS.

32. The physical test requirements for the different classes Physical Test
of drain tile shallbe as given in Table I. Requirements.

33. Drain tile made of mixtures of surface clays with other Absorption
clays shall conform to the absorption requirements for surface- Requirements
clay tile in Table I, when the proportion of surface clay is 75 ma de of Mixed
per cent or more, and to the requirements for shale and fire-clay Cla y s -

tile for all other proportions.

34. In the event that a standard sample (Section 21) of Appeal from
tion
tile fails to meet the requirements of the absorption test, the
xest°t
manufacturer or other seller may demand recourse to the freezing Freezing and
and thawing test, to be made at his expense. In such recourse, Thawmg Test -

the number of tiles tested shall be four times the number rep-
resented by the standard sample (Section 21). If the material
passes the freezing and thawing test satisfactorily, it shall not
be rejected on account of its failure to meet the absorption
requirements specified in Table I, but the average percentage
of absorption of the specimens used in the freezing and thawing
test shall be adopted as the maximum allowable mean absorption
for the contract in question. Limits of

35. In the strength tests, individual tiles of a standard individual Test

test
i .,
,
whose mean strength
? ., ...
. 1
.
is satisfactory
below the requirement for the average without causing rejection,
may fall
...
25 per cent Specimens in
Physical Tests;
culling and
In the absorption test, the absorption of individual tiles of a Retesting
8
standard sample (Section 21), which gives a satisfactory mean Exceeded.'
 —

538 Specifications for Dfain Tile.

absorption percentage, may exceed the average by 25 per cent

without causing rejection. In the freezing and thawing test,
at least 95 per cent of all the tiles tested shall meet the
requirement.
In the event of the failure of a standard sample (Sections
9, 21 and 26) to meet the above requirements, the manufacturer

Table I. Physical-Test Requirements for Different Classes of

Drain Tile.

Farm Drain Tile. Standard Drain Tile. Extra-Quality Drain Tile.

Maximum Average Maximum Average Maximum Average

Absorption by Absorption by Absorption by
Standard Boiling Standard Boiling Standard Boiling
Internal Teet, per cent. Teat, per cent. Teet, per cent.
Diameter
of Tile,
h
fa aJ
.3
°fe
it
P

2600 4200

—
Notb. When the freezing and thawing test ia specified or demanded, as provided in Seotion 7. the num -
bar of freezings and thawings to be endured shall be as follows: For farm drain tile, 8; for standard drain
tile, 12: for extra-quality drain tile, 16.

or other seller may

thoroughly cull the material and submit a
portion of retest at his own expense, and for such retest the
number of tiles per sample shall be 10 for the strength and
absorption tests and 20 for the freezing and thawing test. In
the event of the failure of the material after culling to pass the
requirements, it shall be rejected without further test.
Serial Designation: C 4-16. 539

o oooo.^
^7 —
OQ OOO COOOO
O O OOO
OOO
^ r

t--oo o»oo to .q. « r- CO 00 CO t- ~ «• T*

C900-"<»
s
s a lO^OfO O CO OOOQ*
OO
OrtCINOO
soniooo
ooooo»0'-i
1
1

ooooo
i-"^ iO
I'NOOOO CO'ON^O ooooco
OOOOO oooooo
Oi Ol
= « «•*
-o_a
Clt-

.§s
ooooo
O OXO O « O X o oooooo
ooooo oooooo O)

Q
ooooo ooooo OOOOOO
i i-i O
3 ^'S
OOOOO
— OOOOO
h-cococooo
OOOOOO
«**
o.o,
cj

I I5 HOWOO
,— —. ,..
lOOSCO'-OOO
/:,

-SI as
 540 Specifications for Drain Tile.

strength Test 36. The manufacturer or other seller shall not be held re-
Requirements sponsible
for cracking of drain tile in ditches unless by special
Manufacturer agreement in advance, and in any event his obligation shall be
h6ld
^ e ^ to ^ e discharged by the delivery of drain tile having the min-
R ibie
for Cracking imum ordinary supporting strengths specified in Table II; and,
in Ditches
if it is not otherwise specified in advance by the purchaser, tile

shall be supplied of the strengths specified for clay ditch filling,

for "ordinary" pipe laying and for widths of ditch at the level
of the top of the tile equal to 0.5 ft. greater than the outside
diameters of the tile. The purchaser shall furnish to the manu-
facturer or other seller complete information, in advance of
receiving bids, as to the number of linear feet of drain tile of
each diameter required for each different depth of ditch, meas-
ured to the nearest foot from the surface of the ground to the
top of the tile.

V. VISUAL INSPECTION.
Visual 37. All drain tile shall be given a thorough visual inspec-
Inspection
and its
tion at the trench by a competent inspector employed by the
Purposes. purchaser. The purposes of the visual inspection shall be: (l) to
cull and reject imperfect individual tiles; and (2) to determine
whether the tiles, independently of meeting the chemical and the
physical test requirements, comply with the specifications of
general properties, especially as stated hereinafter.
Shape. 38. All drain tile shall be of approximately circular cross-
section, except when otherwise specified in advance. They shall
be approximately straight, except in the case of special connec-
tions. The ends shall be so regular and smooth as readily to
admit of making close joints by turning and pressing together
adjoining tile.

Nominal 39. The sizes of drain tile shall be designated by their

Sizes.
interior diameters.
Minimum 40. Drain tile smaller than 12 in. in diameter shall have a
Lengths.
minimum length of 12 in. Tile of from 12 to 30 in. in diameter,
inclusive, shall have lengths not less than the diameters. Tile
larger than 30 in. in diameter shall have a minimum length of
30 in.

Structure. 41. Drain tile shall be substantially uniform in structure

throughout, and the inspector shall investigate this property by
examining fractured surfaces.
 —

Serial Designation: C 4-16. 541

Drain tile shall give a clear ring when stood on end and
42. Ring,

while dry tapped with a light hammer.

43. The inspector may use the color of drain tile as a gen- Color,

eral guide in sorting and inspecting, but he shall first so famil-

with the raw materials and the processes used in
iarize himself
the manufacture of the particular tile in question as to be com-
petent to interpret the true meaning of variations in their color. Inslde
44. Drain be reasonably smooth on the inside.
tile shall Smoothness.
45. Drain
tile shall be free from cracks and checks extend- Cracks, Check*

ing into the body of the tile in such a manner as to decrease BrokenPieces.
the strength appreciably. Tile shall not be chipped or broken

Tablb III. Distinctive General Physical Properties of

Different Classes of Drain Tile.

Physical Properties Speoifled. Farm Standard Extra-Quality

Drain Tile. Drain Tile. Drain Tile.

Allowable variation of average diameter below specified

diameter, per cent

Allowable variation between maximum and minimum

diameters of same tile, or average diameters of adjoining
tile, percentage of thickness of wall 75

Allowable variation from straight ncss, percentage of length. 3

Allowable thickness of exterior blisters, lumps and flakes

which do not weaken tile and are few in number, per-
centage of thickness of wall 20

Allowable diameters of above blisters, lumps and flakes,

percentage of internal diameter 20 IS 10

General Inspection Careful. Rigid. Very rigid.

in such a manner as to decrease their strength materially or to

admit earth into the drain.
46. All drain tile shall be sufficiently "vitrified" or "hard- Use of the Ten
burned" to afford the degree of supporting strength, percentage
g^f.^urned
of absorption, and resistance to freezing and thawing specified
in the physical test requirements prescribed in Table I.
47. The manufacturer or other seller may appeal from Appeal from
U s ° f Visu
decisions of the inspector on questions of strength or structure
[ng e C tl n
when such decisions are based on visual inspection alone, in
which case the point at issue shall be determined by standard
physical tests, the cost of which shall be paid by the appellant,
if the inspector was right, or by the purchaser if his inspector

was in error.
 542 Specifications for Drain Tile.

Additional 48. Drain tile of the different classes shall, in addition to

Distinctive
Physical
all requirements heretofore specified, have the distinctive physi-
Characteristics. cal characteristic prescribed in Table III.

VI. TESTING, INSPECTION AND REJECTION

Making and 49. All tests shall be made by experts employed by the
Reporting Tests.
purchaser. Full reports ofall tests shall be furnished the manu-
facturer or other seller on his request. Tests shall be made and
reported promptly.
Expense of 50. The purchaser shall pay the expense of making all tests
Making Tests.
except as otherwise specified in Sections 9, 34, 35, 47 and 52.
Number of Tests. 51. The number of standard tests to be made shall be
determined by the purchaser.
General Tests 52. In all contracts for ten or more carloads of tile, pre-
and Inspection
at Factory.
liminary general tests and inspection shall be made at the
factory by the purchaser upon demand of the manufacturer or
other seller. The expense of such tests and inspection shall be
paid by the manufacturer or other seller,
Inspector. 53. The inspector shall be employed by the purchaser.
Inspection. 54. The manufacturer or other seller of the drain tile shall
afford the inspector all reasonable facilities for his work, both
as to the selection of specimens for tests, and as to visual
inspection. Inspection shall be completed promptly.
Rejection. 55. The inspector shall plainly mark all drain tile which

he rejects, and such rejected tile shall be removed promptly

by the manufacturer or other seller. Upon request of the
purchaser, the manufacturer or other seller shall give full account
of the removal of rejected tile.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
QUICKLIME.

Serial Designation: C 5-15.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation C 5 ; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915.

1. Quicklime is a material the major part of which is calcium Definition,

oxide or calcium and magnesium oxides, which will slake on the

addition of water.
2. Quicklime is divided into two grades: Grades.
— Shall be well-burned, picked free from ashes,
(a) Selected.
core, clinker or other foreign material.
(b)Run-of-Kiln. — Shall be well-burned, without selection.
3.Quicklime shipped in two forms:
is Forms.
(a)Lump. — Shall be kiln size.

(b)Pulverized. — Shall be reduced in to pass a size £-in.

screen.
4.Quicklime is divided into four classes: Classes.

High-Calcium; (b) Calcium; (c) Magnesian; (d) High-

(a)
Magnesian.
5. The particular grade, form and class of quicklime Basis of
Purchase.
desired shall be specified in advance by the purchaser.
(543)
 . .

544 Specifications for Quicklime.

I. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

(.4) Sampling.
Lime in Bulk. 6. When quicklime shipped in bulk, the sample shall
is

be so taken that it will represent an average of all parts of the

shipment from top to bottom, and shall not contain a dispro-
portionate share of the top and bottom layers, which are most
subject to changes. The samples shall comprise at least 10
shovelsful taken from different parts of the shipment. The
total sample taken shall weigh at least 100 lb. and shall be
crushed to pass a 1-in. ring, and quartered to provide a 15-lb.
sample for the laboratory.
Lime in Barrels. 7. When quicklime is shipped in barrels, at least 3 per
cent of the number of barrels shall be sampled. They shall
be taken from various parts of the shipment, dumped, mixed
and sampled as specified in Section 6.
Laboratory 8. All samples to be sent to the laboratory shall be imme-
Samples.
diately transferred to an air-tight container in which the unused
portion shall be stored until the quicklime shall finally be accepted
or rejected by the purchaser.

(B) Chemical Tests.

Chemical 9. (a) The classes and chemical properties of quicklime shall
Properties.
be determined by standard methods of chemical analysis.
(b) Samples shall be taken as specified in Sections 6, 7 and 8.
(c) Quicklime shall conform to the following requirements as

to chemical composition:

Chemical Composition.

High-Calcium. Calcium Magnesian. High-Magnesian.

Properties Considered.
Run-of- Run-of- Run-of- Run-of-
Selected. Selected. Selected. Selected. Kiln.
Kiln. Kilu. Kiln.

90 90 85-90 85-90
(min.) (min.)
Magnesium Oxide, per cent. 10-25 10-25 25 25
(min.) (min.)
Calcium Oxide plus Magne-
sium Oxide, min., per cent 90 85 90 85 90 85 90 85

Carbon Dioxide, max., per

3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5

Silica plus Alumina plus

Oxide of Iron, max., per
5 7.5 5 7.5 5 7.5 6 7.6
 Serial Designation: C 5-15. 545

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

10. An average 5-lb. be put into a box and
sample shall Percentage of

slaked by an experienced operator with sufficient water to

produce the maximum quantity of lime putty, care being taken
to avoid "burning" or "drowning" the lime. It shall be allowed
to stand for 24 hours and then washed through a 20-mesh sieve
by a stream of water having a moderate pressure. No material
shall be rubbed through the screens. Not over 3 per cent of the
weight of the selected quicklime nor over 5 per cent of the
weight of the run-of-kiln quicklime shall be retained on the
sieve. The sample of lump lime taken for this test shall be
broken to all pass a 1-in. screen and be retained on a J-in. screen.
Pulverized lime shall be tested as received.

III. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

11. (a) All quicklime shall be subject to inspection. inspection.

(b) The quicklime may be inspected either at the place

of manufacture or the point of delivery, as arranged at the time of
purchase.
(c) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the quicklime ordered.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all reasonable
facilities for inspection and sampling, which shall be so con-
ducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of
the works.
(d) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the
acceptance or rejection of the quicklime in his own laboratory
or elsewhere. Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense
of the purchaser.
12. Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on Rejection,

failure to pass tests prescribed in these specifications shall be

reported within five days from the taking of samples.
Samples which represent rejected quicklime shall be
13. Rehearing,

preserved in air-tight containers for five days from the date

of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the results
of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a rehearing
within that time.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
HYDRATED LIME.

Serial Designation: C 6-15.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation C 6 ; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915.

Definition. 1. Hydrated lime is a dry flocculent powder resulting from

the hydration of quicklime.
Classes. 2. Hydrated lime is commercially divided into four
classes:
(a) High-Calcium; (b) Calcium; (c) Magnesian; (d) High-
Magnesian.
Basis of 3. The particular class of hydrated lime desired shall be
Purchase.
specified in advance by the purchaser.

I. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Sampling. 4. The sample shall be a fair average of the shipment.

Three per cent of the packages shall be sampled. The sample

shall be taken from the surface to the center of the package.
A 2-lb. sample to be sent to the laboratory' shall immediately be
transferred to an air-tight container, in which the unused portion
shall be stored until the hydrated lime has been finally accepted
or rejected by the purchaser.
(546)
 :

Serial Designation: C 6-15. 547

5 The classes and chemical properties of hydra ted lime Chemical

. (a)
r erties
by standard methods of chemical analysis. °P
-

shallbe determined
(b) The non-volatile portion of hydrated lime shall
conform to the following requirements as to chemical
composition:

Chemical Composition.

Properties Considered. High-Calcium. Calcium. Magnesian. High-Magnesian.

90 (min.) 85-90

Magnesium Oxide, per cent 10-25 25 (min.)

Silica plus Alumina plus Oxide

5 5 5 5

Carbon Dioxide, max., percent. 5 5 5 5

Sufficient to Sufficient to Sufficient to Sufficient to

hydrate the hydrate the hydrate the hydrate the
Calcium-oxide Calcium-oxide Calcium-oxide Calcium-oxide
Content. Content. Content. Content.

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

6. A 100-g. sample shall leave by weight a residue of not Fineness,
over 5 per cent on a standard 100-mesh sieve and not over 0.5
per cent on a standard 30-mesh sieve.
7. Hydrated lime shall be tested to determine its constancy Constancy of
Volume.
ofvolume in the following manner
Equal parts of hydrated lime under test and volume-con-
stant Portland cement shall be thoroughly mixed together and
gaged with water to a paste. Only sufficient water shall be
used to make
the mixture workable. From this paste a pat
about 3 diameter and ^ in. thick at the center, tapering to
in. in

a thin edge shall be made on a clean glass plate about 4 in. square.
This pat shall be allowed to harden 24 hours in moist air and
shall be without popping, checking, cracking, warping or disin-
tegration after 5 hours' exposure to steam above boiling water
in a loosely closed vessel.

III. PACKING AND MARKING.

8. Hydrated lime shall be packed either in cloth or in paper Packing,
bags and the weight shall be plainly marked on each package.
 548 Specifications for Hydrated Lime.

Marking. 9. The name of the manufacturer shall be legibly marked

or tagged on each package.

IV. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

inspection. io. hydrated lime shall be subject to inspection.
(a) All
(b) lime may be inspected either at the place
The hydrated
of manufacture or the point of delivery, as arranged at the time
of purchase.
(c) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
free entry at all times while work on the contract of the pur-
chaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's
works which concern the manufacture of the hydrated lime
ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all rea-
sonable facilities for inspection and sampling, which shall be so
conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation
of the works.
(d) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the
acceptance or rejection of the hydrated lime in his own laboratory
or elsewhere. Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense
of the purchaser.
Rejection. n. Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on failure
to pass tests prescribed in these specifications shall be reported
within five working days from the taking of samples.
Rehearing. 12. Samples which represent rejected hydrated lime shall
be preserved in air-tight containers for five days from the date
of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction with the results of
the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a rehearing
within that time.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
PAVING BRICK.

Serial Designation: C 7-15.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation C 7 ; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915.

The quality and acceptability of paving brick, in the

absence of other special tests mutually agreed upon in advance
by the seller on the one side and the buyer on the other side
shall be determined by the following procedure:
The Rattler Test, for the purpose of determining whether
I.

the material as a whole possesses to a sufficient degree strength,

toughness and hardness.
II. Visual Inspection, for the purpose of determining
whether the physical properties of the material as to dimen-
sions, accuracy and uniformity of shape and color, are in general
satisfactory, and for the purpose of culling out from the ship-
ment individually imperfect or unsatisfactory brick.
The acceptance of paving brick as satisfactorily meeting
one of these tests shall not be construed as in any way waiving
the other.
(549)
550 Specifications for Paving Brick.

I. The Rattler Test.

THE SELECTION OF SAMPLES FOR TEST.

1. Place of Sampling. —
In general, where a shipment of
bricks involving a quantity of less than 100,000 is under con-
sideration, the sampling may be done either at the brick factory
prior to shipment, or on cars at their destination or on the street,
when delivered ready for use. When the quantity under con-
sideration exceeds 100,000 the sampling shall be done at the
factory prior to shipment. Bricks accepted as the result of
test prior to shipment, shall not be liable to subsequent rejec-
tion as a whole, but are subject to such culling as is provided
for under Part II, Visual Inspection.
2. Method of Selecting Samples. —
In general, the buyer shall
select his own samples from the material which the seller pro-
poses to furnish. The seller shall have the right to be present
during the selection of a sample. The sampler shall endeavor,
to the best of his judgment, to select brick representing the
average of the lot. No samples shall include bricks which would
be rejected by visual inspection as provided in Part II, except
that where controversy arises, whole tests may be selected
to determine the admissibility of certain types or portions of
the lot having a characteristic appearance in common. In
cases where prolonged controversy occurs between buyer and
seller and samples selected by each party fail to show reason-
able concurrence, then both parties shall unite in the selection
of a disinterested person to select the samples, and both parties
shall be bound by the results of samples thus selected.
3. Number of Samples per Lot. —
In general, one sample
of ten bricks shall be tested for every 10,000 bricks contained
in the lot under consideration; but where the total quantity
exceeds 100,000, the number of samples tested may be fewer
than one per 10,000, provided that they shall be distributed as
uniformly as practicable over the entire lot.
4. Shipment of Samples. —
Samples which must be trans-
ported long distances by freight or express shall be carefully
put up in packages holding not more than twelve bricks each.
When more than six bricks are shipped in one package, it shall
be so arranged as to carry two parallel rows of bricks side by
 Serial Designation: C 7-15. 551

side, and these rows shall be separated by a partition. In

event of some of the bricks being cracked or broken in transit,
the sample shall be disqualified if there are not remaining ten
sound undamaged bricks.
5. Storage and Care of Samples. —
Samples shall be care-
fully handled to avoid breakage or injury. They shall be
kept in the dry so far as practicable. If wet when received,

or known to have been immersed or subjected to recent pro-

longed wetting, they shall be dried for at least six hours in a
temperature of 100° F. before testing.

THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE RATTLER.

6. General Design. —The machine be of good mechan-
shall
ical construction, self-contained, and conform to the follow-
shall
ing details of material and dimensions, and shall consist of
barrel, frame, and driving mechanism as herein described.
Accompanying these specifications is a complete drawing of a
rattler which will meet the requirements, and to which reference
should be made (Plate II).
7. The Barrel. —The machine shall be made
barrel of the
up of the heads, headliners, staves and stave-liners.
The heads may be cast in one piece with the trunnions,
which shall be 2\ in. in diameter, and shall have a bearing
6 in. in length, or they may be cast with heavy hubs, which
shall be bored out for l-fa-m. shafts, and shall be keyseated for
two keys, each \ by f in. and spaced 90 deg. apart. The shaft
shall be a snug fit and when keyed shall be entirely free from
lost motion. The distance from the end of the shaft or trunnion
to the inside face of the head shall be 15f in. in the head for the
driving end of the rattler, and llf in. for the other head, and
the distance from the face of the hubs to the inside face of the
heads shall be 5\ in.
The heads shall be not less than f in. thick, nor more than
\ in. thick. In outline, each head shall be a regular 14-sided
polygon inscribed in a circle 28f in. in diameter. Each head
shall be provided with flanges not less than f in. thick and extend-
ing outward 7\ in. from the inside face of the head to afford
a means of fastening the staves. The surface of the flanges of
the head shall be smooth and give a true and uniform bearing
552 Specifications for Paving Brick.

for the staves. To secure the desired true and uniform bearing
the surfaces of the flanges of the head shall be either ground
or machined. The flanges shall be slotted on the outer edge,
so as to provide for two f-in. bolts at each end of each stave,
said slots to be ff in. wide and 2f in., center to center. Each
slot shall be provided with a recess for the bolt head, which shall
act to prevent the turning of the same. Between each two
slots there shall be a brace f in. thick, extending down the out-
ward side of the head not less than 2 in.
There shall be for each head a cast-iron headliner 1 in.
in thickness and conforming to the outline of the head, but
inscribed in a circle 28| in. in diameter. This headliner shall
be fastened to the head by seven f-in. cap-screws, through the
head from the outside. Whenever these headliners become
worn down \ in. below their initial surface level at any point
of their surface, they shall be replaced with new ones. The
metal of these headliners shall be hard machinery iron and
should contain not less than one per cent of combined carbon.
The staves shall be made of 6-in. medium-steel structural
channels, 27| in. long and weighing 15.5 lb. per lineal foot.
The staves shall have two holes f§ in. in diameter, drilled in
each end, the center line of the holes being 1 in. from the end
and If in. either way from the longitudinal center line. The
spaces between the staves shall be as uniform as practicable,
but shall not exceed x% m -

The interior or flat side of each stave shall be protected

by a liner | in. thick by 5| in. wide by 19| in. long. The liner
shall consist of medium-steel plate, and shall be riveted to the
channel by three |-in. rivets, one of which shall be on the center
line both ways and the other two on the longitudinal center line
and spaced 7 in. from the center each way. The rivet holes
shall be countersunk on the face of the liner and the rivets
shall be driven hot and chipped off flush with the surface of the
liners. These liners shall be inspected from time to time, and
if found loose shall be at once re-riveted.

Any test at the expiration of which a stave-liner is found

detached from the stave or seriously out of position shall be
rejected. When a new rattler, in which a complete set of new
staves is furnished, is first put into operation, it shall be charged
 Plate II.
1918 A.S.T.M. Standards.

Standard Specifications for Paving Brick.

End Elevation. Side Elevation.

r 6 ;1

Side Frame.

STANDARD RATTLERFOR

TESTING PAVING BRICK PROPOSED BY

THE NATIONAL PAVING BRICK MANUFACTURERS' ASSOCIATION
L »U
 Serial Designation: C 7-15. 553

with 400 lb. of shot of the same sizes, and in the same proportions
as provided in Section 9, and shall then be run for 18,000 revo-
lutions at the usual prescribed rate of speed. The shot shall
then be removed and a standard shot charge inserted, after which
the rattler may be charged with brick for a test.
No stave shall be used for more than 70 consecutive tests
without renewing its lining. Two of the 14 staves shall be
removed and relined at a time in such a way that of each pair,
one falls upon one side of the barrel and the other upon the

opposite side, and also so that the staves changed shall be

consecutive but not contiguous; for example, 1 and 8, 3 and 10,
5 and 12, 7 and 14, 2 and 9, 4 and 11,6 and 13, etc., to the end
that the interior of the barrel at all times shall present the same
relative condition of repair. The changes in the staves should
be made when the shot charges are being corrected,
at the time
and the record must show the number of charges run since the
last pair of new lined staves was placed in position.
The staves when bolted to the heads shall form a barrel
20 in. long, inside measurement, between head liners. The
liners of the staves shall be so placed as to drop between the head-
liners. The staves shall be bolted tightly to the heads by four
f-in. bolts, and each bolt be provided with a lock nut,
shall
and shall be inspected at not less frequent intervals than every
fifth test and all nuts kept tight. A record shall be made after
each inspection showing in what condition the bolts were found
8. The Frame and Driving Mechanism. —
The barrel shall
be mounted on a cast-iron frame of sufficient strength and
rigidity to support it without undue vibration. It shall rest
on a rigid foundation with or without the interposition of wooden
plates, and shall be fastened thereto by bolts at not less than
four points.
be driven by gearing whose ratio of driver to driven
It shall
is not than one to four.
less The counter shaft upon which
the driving pinion is mounted shall not be less than Iff in.
in diameter, with bearing not less than 6 in. in length. If a
belt drive is used the pulley shall not be less than 18 in. in
diameter and 6\ in. in face. A belt at least 6 in. in width
properly adjusted, to avoid unnecessary slipping, should be
used.
554 Specifications for Paving Brick.

9. The Abrasive Charge. —The abrasive charge shall con-

sist of cast-iron spheres of two sizes.When new, the larger
spheres shall be 3.75 in. in diameter and shall weigh approxi-
mately 7.5 lb. (3.40 kg.) each. Ten spheres of this size shall
be used.
These shall be weighed separately after each ten tests,
and if the weight of any large sphere falls to 7 lb. (3.175 kg.)

it shall be discarded and a new one substituted; provided,

however, that all of the large spheres shall not be discarded
and substituted by new ones at any single time, and that so
far as possible the large spheres shall compose a graduated
series in various stages of wear.
When new, the smaller spheres shall be 1.875 in. in diam-
eter and shall weigh approximately 0.95 lb. (0.43 kg.) each.
In general, the number of small spheres in a charge shall not
fall below 245 nor exceed 260. The collective weight of the
large and small spheres shall be as nearly 300 lb. as possible.

No small sphere shall be retained in. use after it has been worn
down so that it will pass a circular hole 1.75 in. in diameter,
drilled in an iron plate \ in. in thickness, or weigh less than
0.75 lb. (0.34 kg.). Further, the small spheres shall be tested,
by passing them over the above plate or by weighing, after
every ten tests, and any which pass through or fall below the
specified weight, shall be replaced by new spheres; provided,
further, that all of the small spheres shall not be rejected and
replaced by new ones at any one time, and that so far as possible
the small spheres shall compose a graduated series in various
stages of wear. At any time that any sphere is found to be
broken or defective it shall at once be replaced.
The iron composing these spheres shall have a chemical
composition within the following limits:

Combined carbon not under 2 50 per cent

.

Graphitic carbon over 0.25

tt
Silicon 1.00
n
Manganese 0.50 '

ii '
Phosphorus 0.25
it
Sulfur 0.08 '

For each new batch of spheres used, the chemical analysis

shall be furnished by the maker or be obtained by the user,
 Serial Designation: C 7-15. 555

before introducing into the charge, and unless the analysis

meets the above specifications, the batch of spheres shall be
rejected.

THE OPERATION OF THE TEST.

—
The Brick Charge. The number of bricks per test
10.
shallbe ten for all bricks of so-called "block-size," whose dimen-
sions fall between 8 and 9 in. in length, 3 and 3f in. in
breadth, and 3f and 4j in. in thickness. 1 No brick should
be selected as part of a regular test that would be rejected by
any other requirements of the specifications under which the
purchase is made.
11. Speed and Duration of Revolution. —
The rattler shall
be rotated at a uniform rate of not less than 29.5 nor more than
30.5 revolutions per minute, and 1800 revolutions shall con-
stitute the test. A counting machine shall be attached to the
rattler for counting the revolutions. A margin not to exceed
ten revolutions will be allowed for stopping. Only one start
and stop per test is generally acceptable. If, from accidental
causes, the rattler is stopped and started more than once during
a test, and the loss exceeds the maximum permissible under
the specifications, the test shall be disqualified and another made.
12. The Scales. —
The scales must have a capacity of not
less than 300 lb., and must be sensitive to 0.5 oz., and must
be tested by a standard test weight at intervals of not less than
every ten tests.
13. The Results. —
The loss shall be calculated in percentage
of the initial weight of the brick composing the charge. In
weighing the rattled brick, any piece weighing less than 1 lb.
shall be rejected.
—
The Records. A complete and continuous record shall
14.
be kept of the operation of all rattlers working under these
specifications. This record shall contain the following data
concerning each test made:

1. The name of the person, firm or corporation furnishing each sample

tested.
2. The name of the maker of the brick represented in each sample
tested.

1 Where brick of larger or smaller sizes than the dimensions given above for blocks are to

be tested, the same number of bricks per charge should be used, but allowance for the difference
in size should be made in setting the limits for average and maximum rattler loss.
556 Specifications for Paving Brick.

3. The name of the street, or contract, which the sample represented.

4. The brands or marks upon the bricks by which they were identified.
5. The number of bricks furnished.
6. The date on which they were received for test.
7. The date on which they were tested.
8. The drying treatment given before testing, if any.
9. The length, breadthand thickness of the bricks.
10. The collective weight of the ten large spherical shot used in making
the test at the time of their last standardiza: ion.
11. The number and collective weight of the small spherical shot used
in making the test, at the time of their last standardization.
12. The total weight of the shot charge, after its last standardization.
the operator that he examined the condition of the
13. Certificate of
machine as to staves, liners, and any other parts affecting the barrel, and
found them right at the beginning of the test.
14. Certificate of number of charges tested since the
the operator of the
last standardization of shotcharge and last renewals of stave liners.
15. The time of the beginning and ending of each test, and the number
of revolutions made by the barrel during the test, as shown by the indicator.
16. Certificate of the operator as to number of stops and starts made in
each test.

17. The initial collective weight of the ten bricks composing the charge
and their collective weight after rattling.
18. The loss calculated in percentage of the initial weight; and the
calculation itself,

19. The number of broken bricks and remarks upon the portions which
were included in the final weighing.
20. General remarks upon the test and any irregularities occurring in its
execution.
21. The date upon which the test was made.
22. The location of the rattler and name of the owner, upon which the
test was made.
23. The certificate of the operator that the test was made under the
specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials and that the
record is a true record.
24. The signature of the operator or person responsible for the test.
25. The serial number of the test.

In the event of more than one copy of the record of any

test being required,they may be furnished on separate sheets,
and marked duplicates, but the original record shall always
be preserved intact and complete.
For the convenience of the public, the accompanying blank
form, which provides space for the necessary data, is furnished
and its use recommended.
 Serial Designation: C 7-15. 557

Serial No
REPORT OF STANDARD RATTLER TEST OF PAVING BRICK.

Identification Data.
Name sample
of the firm furnishing „
Name manufacturing sample
of the firm
Street or job which sample represents
Brands or marks on the brick _
Quantity furnished _ Drying treatment-
Date received Date tested
Length..„ Breadth Thickness..

Standardization Data.

Weight of Charge. Condition of Condition Number and Repairs. (Note any re-

(After Standardization.) Loeknuta of Scales. Position of Fresh pairs affecting the con-
on Staves. Stave Liners. dition of the barrel.)

10 Large spheres

Small ipheree

Total

Number of charges tested since last inspection.

Running Data.
Time Readings.
Revolution Running Notes,
Counter Stops, etc.
Hours. Minutes. Seconds. Readings.

Weights and Calculations.

Percentage Loss.
(Note. —The Calculation Must
Appear.)

Initial Weight of Ten Brioka

Final Weight of Same

Loss of Weight

Number of broken bricks and remarks on same

I certify that the foregoing test was made under the specifications of the
American Society for Testing Materials, and is a true record.
(Signature of Tester)
Date
Location of Laboratory..
558 Specifications for Paving Brick.

acceptance and rejection of material.

15. Basis of Acceptance or Rejection. —
Paving bricks shall
not be judged for acceptance or rejection by the results of
individual tests, but by the average of no less than five tests.
Where a lot of bricks fail to meet the required average, it shall
be optional with the buyer whether the bricks shall be definitely
rejected or whether they may be regraded and a portion selected
for further test as provided in Section 16.
16. Range of Fluctuation.- — Some fluctuation in the results
of the rattler test,both on account of variations in the bricks
and in the machine used in testing, are unavoidable, and a
reasonable allowance for such fluctuations should be made,
wherever the standard may be fixed.
In any lot of paving brick, if the loss on a test computed
upon its initial weight exceeds the standard loss by more than
two per cent, then the portion of the lot represented by that
test shall at once be resampled and three more tests executed
upon it, and if any of these three tests shall again exceed by
more than two per cent the required standard, then that por-
tion of the lot shall be rejected.
If in any lot of brick, two or more tests exceed the per-
missible maximum, then the buyer may at his option reject
the entire lot, even though the average of all the tests executed
may be within the required limits.
17. Fixing of Standards. —
The percentage of loss which
may be taken as the standard, will not be fixed in these speci-
fications, and shall remain within the province of the contracting
parties. For the information of the public, the following scale
of average losses is given, representing what may be expected
of tests executed under the foregoing specifications:

General Maximum
Average Loss, Permissible Loss,
per cent. per cent.
For bricks suitable for heavy traffic 22 24
For bricks suitable for medium traffic 24 26
For bricks suitable for light traffic 26 28

Which of these grades should be specified in any given

district and for any given purpose is a matter wholly within
the province of the buyer, and should be governed by the kind
 Serial Designation: C 7-15. 559

and amount of traffic to be carried, and the quality of paving

bricks available.
18. Culling and Retesting. —Where, under Sections 15 and
16, a lot or portion of a lot of bricks is rejected, either by reason
of failure to show a low enough average test or because of tests
above the permissible maximum, the buyer may at his option
permit the regrade the rejected brick, separating out
seller to
that portion which he considers at fault and retaining that
which he considers good. When the regrading is complete,
the good portion shall be then resampled and retested, under
the original conditions, and if it fails again either in average or
in permissible maximum, then the buyer may definitely and
finally reject the entire lot or portion under test.
19. Payment of Cost of Testing. —Unless otherwise specified,
the cost of testing the material as delivered or prepared for
delivery, up to the prescribed number of tests for valid accept-
ance or rejection of the lot, shall be paid by the buyer. (See
also Section 23.) The cost of testing extra samples made
necessary by the failure of the whole lot or any portion of it,
shall be paid by the seller, whether the material is finally accepted
or rejected.

II. Visual Inspection.

It shall be the right of the buyer to inspect the bricks,
subsequent to their delivery at the place of use, and prior to
or during laying, to cull out and reject upon the following
grounds:
20. All bricks which are broken in two or chipped in such
a manner that neither wearing surface remains substantially
intact, or that the lower or bearing surface is reduced in area by
more than one-fifth. Where bricks are rejected upon this
ground, it shall be the duty of the purchaser to use them so far
as practicable in obtaining the necessary half-bricks for breaking
courses and making closures, instead of breaking otherwise
whole and sound bricks for this purpose.
21. All bricks which are cracked in such a degree as to pro-
duce defects such as are defined in Section 20, either from shocks
received in shipment and handling, or from defective conditions
of manufacture, especially in drying, burning or cooling, unless
560 Specifications for Paving Brick.

such cracks are plainly superficial and not such as to percep-

tibly weaken the resistance of the brick to its conditions of use.
22. All bricks which are so off-size, or so misshapen, bent,
twisted or kiln-marked, that they will not form a proper sur-
face as defined by the paving specifications, or align with other
bricks without making joints other than those permitted in
the paving specifications.
23. All bricks which are obviously too soft and too poorly
vitrified to endure street wear. When any disagreement arises
between buyer and seller under this item, it shall be the right
of the buyer to make two or more rattler tests of the brick which
he wishes to exclude, as provided in Section 2, and if in either
or both tests, the bricks fall beyond the maximum rattler losses
permitted under the specifications, then all bricks having the
same objectionable appearance may be excluded, and the seller
shall pay for the cost of the test. But if under such procedure,
the bricks which have been tested as objectionable, shall pass
the rattler test, both tests falling within the permitted maximum,
then the buyer cannot exclude the class of material represented
by this test and he shall pay for the cost of the test.
24. All bricks which differ so markedly in color from the
type or average of the shipment, as to make the resultant
pavement checkered or disagreeably mottled in appearance.
This Section shall not be held to apply to the normal variations in
color which may occur in the product of one plant among bricks
which will meet the rattler test as referred to in Sections 15,
16, and 17, but shall apply only to differences of color which
imply differences in the material of which the bricks are made,
or extreme differences in manufacture.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THB

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
FIRE TESTS OF MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION.
Serial Designation: C 19 - 18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation C 19; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1917; Adopted, 1913.

I. CONTROL OF FIRE TESTS.

The conduct of fire tests of materials and construction Time-
1.

shallbe controlled by the standard time-temperature control Temperature

curve shown in Fig. 1. The points on the curve which deter-
mine its character are,

1000° F. at 5 minutes
" u
1300 10
" (<
1550 30
"
1700 1 hour
" u
1850 2
" ((
2000 4
"
2300

2. (a) The temperature fixed by the curve shall be deemed Determinad on

to be the average true temperature of the furnace gases as of Tem P erflturf

obtained from the readings of several thermo-couples (not less
than three) symmetrically disposed and distributed in such a
 562 Specifications for Fire Tests.

manner as to show the temperatures of the gases near all parts

of the sample.
(b) The temperatures shall be read at intervals not exceed-
ing 5 minutes during the first hour, and thereafter the intervals
may be increased to not more than 15 minutes.

2400

2000

iS 1600

o
£ 120
•*-
a
b
IC00°F. at 5 minute:
800 1300° „ „I0 „
1550°,, „30 n
1700° „ n 1 hour
1850°,, » 2 »
400 2000°.. ..4- „
8
2J00 ,, .. 8 n

12 3 4
Time, hours.
5 6 7

Fig. 1. — Standard Time-Temperature Control Curve for Fire Tests of

Material and Construction.

II. CLASSIFICATION AS DETERMINED BY TEST.

Classification. 3. materials and construction shall be
(a) Fire-resistive
classified accordance with the degree of protection they
in
afford when measured by a fire test conducted in conformity
with the standard time- temperature control curve as,

4-hour Protection
" "
2
l
<( n

} «
1 U it

(b) Other classes may be interpolated or added as needed.

 Serial Designation: C 19-18. 563

III. TEST STRUCTURES.

4. (a) The test structure may be located at any place Test structures
where all the necessary facilities for properly conducting the
test are provided.
(b) Entire freedom is left to each investigator in the design
of his test structure and the nature and use of fuel, provided
the test requirements are met.

IV. TEST SAMPLES.

5. The material or construction constituting the test Test Samples,
sample shall be truly representative of the regular practice.

V. CONDUCT OF FIRE TESTS.

The fire test on the sample with its applied load, if any
6. Fire Test,

shall be continued until failure occurs, or until it has withstood

the test conditions for a period equal to l\ times that for which
classification is desired.
7. A second test with duplicate sample shall be made to Fire stream
Te8t-
determine the effect of a hose stream on a sample under fire test,
the water being applied at the end of a period equal to three-
fourths of that for which classification is desired, but not later
than one hour after the beginning of the test; except that for
classification periods of one-half hour or less the fire stream test
may be omitted.
8. The size of nozzle, water pressure and time of water Application of

application shall be as indicated in Table I. The hose stream Water -

shall be first directed at the middle of the sample and then at all
parts of the exposed faces, changes in direction being made slowly.
9. For any material or construction intended to carry Loading,

load other than its own weight, the full rated safe working load
shall be applied during the entire fire test, also during the fire
stream test. After completion of the fire stream test, the
sample shall be subjected to excess loading as prescribed under
specifications for the different structural parts.

VI. FLOOR AND ROOF TESTS.

10. For floor and roof tests the sample shall be of such a size of Sample
size that the minimum span of the supporting beams of the
 .

564 Specifications for Fire Tests.

floor arch shall be 12 ft., and the supporting beams and girders
shall have a clearance of at least 8 in. from the walls of the test
structure.
Time of Testing. 1 1 The floor or roof may be tested as soon after construc-
tion as desired, but within 40 days. Artificial drying will be
allowed if desired.
Plastering. 12. If the constructionis to be plastered in practice, the

sample shallbe plastered in the same manner.

Loading. 13. The floor or roof shall be loaded in a manner to develop
in each member of the construction stresses equal to the maximum
safe working stress allowed in the material of the member.

Table I.

Size of Water
Time of
Type of Hose Pressure
PartB of Structure. Application,
Protection. Nozzle, at Nozzle,
min.
in. lb.

4 hour 50 10

2 ". 50 5

1 " 60 2 6

1 •!
30 1
2
1 »
15 1
4

4 " 60 6

"
2 30 8

1 " 30 2 6

1 ..

2 30 1

1 <•

4 1 15 1
8

Requirements. 14. The test shall not be regarded as successful unless the
following conditions are met:
(a) The floor or roof shall have sustained safely the full
rated safe working load during the fire test without passage of

flame, for a period equal to 1| times that for which classification

is desired.
(b) The floor or roof shall have sustained safely the full
rated safe working load during the fire stream test as prescribed

in Sections 7 and 8, without passage of flame, and after its

completion shall sustain a total load equal to the dead load plus
2\ times the live load for which the construction is designed.
 :

Serial Designation: C 19-18. 565

VII. NON-BEARING PARTITION TESTS.

15.For partition tests the area of the sample shall be not Size of Sample,

less than 100 sq. ft. and no dimension less than 9 ft.
16. Temperatures on the outer surface of the partition shall Determination
° em P cratureB -

be read by not less than five thermometers, symmetrically dis-

posed and placed against the surface of the partition with their
bulbs properly protected against radiation of heat.
17. The distance of the nozzle from the partition during the Position of
ozz 9 '
application of water shall be not more than 20 ft. when the hose
stream is applied approximately normal to the surface of the
partition, which distancebe reduced by 1 ft. for each devia-
shall
tion of 10 deg. of angle from the normal when the hose stream
is applied at an angle to the surface of the partition.

18. The test shall not be regarded as successful unless the Requirements,

following conditions are met

(a) The partition shall have withstood safely the fire test
for a period equal to lj times that for which classification is

desired.
(b) The partition shall have withstood the fire stream test as
prescribed in Sections 7 and 8.
(c) No flame shall have passed through the partition during
the prescribed fire period.
Transmission of heat through the partition during the
(d)
prescribed fire period shall not have been such as to raise the
temperature on its outer surface in excess of 300° F.
(e) The partition shall not have warped or bulged or dis-

integrated under the action of fire or water to such an extent as

to be unsafe.

Editorial Note.
Specifications for fire tests of columns will be formulated when the joint
investigation on that subject, now in progress, under direction of the Under-
writers' Laboratories, the U. S. Bureau of Standards, and the Associated
Factory Mutual Fire Insurance Companies has been completed. It is also
planned to prepare fire test specifications for other structural members when
sufficient data have been acquired to warrant such procedure.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD DEFINITIONS
CF
TERMS RELATING TO SEWER PIPE.

Serial Designation : C 8-15.

These definitions are issued under the fixed designation C 8; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915.

I. Forces Acting upon Sewer Pipe.

External Forces. —Forces resulting from pressures or impact act-
ing from the outside upon the pipe.
Internal Forces. —Forces resulting from interior fluid pressure.
Abrasion. —Wearing away of surface material by friction.

II. Raw Materials.

Physical Properties. —Those sensible properties of raw mate-

rials, which in their combinations affect the manufacture
and use of the product.
—
Chemical Properties. Those properties resulting from combina-
tions of elements in the raw materials, which in their com-
position affect the manufacture and use of the product.
(566)
 Serial Designation: C 8-15. 567

in. Pipe.

(a) —
Sewer Pipe. Separate pipe suitable for the conveyance
of domestic and industrial sewage and storm water and
capable of being properly joined to form a conduit.
—
Clay Pipe. Made from red burning plastic clay devoid of
fissile structure. Maturing temperature about 1 170° C.
Vitrification not ordinarily produced, and salt glazing
not always effective.
Fire-Clay Pipe. —Made from
buff, gray or reddish burning
fire showing conchoidal structure.
clay Maturing
temperature about 1250° C. Complete stony vitrifi-
cation may be produced, but an absorption lower than
3 per cent is not general, nor desirable for maximum
strength.
Shale Pipe. —Made from red burning hard clay with a
distinct fissile structure. Vitrification at from 1050 to
1250° C, and salt glazing successful only at highest
temperature.
Cement-Concrete Pipe. —Pipe formed by consolidating in a
mold a mixture of Portland cement, water, sand, stone
or other hard material, and permitting it to harden by
natural process prior to handling and use.
—A pipe other than a straight pipe.
Special.
Branch.—A pipe attached to and diverging from the barrel
of another pipe, such as Y-branches, T-branches, etc.
(b) Demands upon Sewer Pipes. —Requirements of qualities
which are desirable and attainable under conditions of actual
practice.

IV. Parts of Sewer Pipe.

Barrel or Shell. —
Main body of a pipe, exclusive of differently
formed ends.
—
Ends. Those parts of a pipe which terminate it and are so
formed as to permit of making a proper joint.
—
Beveled End. End surfaces of pipes inclined at an angle
with the pipe axis so formed that the end of one pipe
can enter the end of the adjoining pipe with a close fit.
—
Hub or Bell. That end of a pipe which is sufficiently
enlarged for a short distance to receive and enclose the
spigot end of the adjoining pipe, to form a joint.
568 Definitions or Terms Relating to Sewer Pipe.

Spigot. —That end of a pipe which enters and is formed to

fit the hub or bell of the adjoining pipe; it is sometimes
scored or has a head.
Butt. —Plain end of a pipe sometimes scored on the outside,
to close up against a similar end of an adjoining pipe
two ends being
for the purpose of forming a joint, the
surrounded and covered by a collar.
Collar. —
A flat band to surround and cover a butt joint.
Base, form of. —
Shape of that part of a pipe which rests upon
a foundation.

V. Joints.

Beveled.—Formed by joining pipes with beveled ends and

applying the jointing material.
Hub and Spigot. —Formed by inserting the spigot end of one
pipe into the hub of another and applying the jointing
material.
Butt and Collar. —Formed by abutting the butt ends of two
adjacent pipes and, after applying the jointing material,
surrounding the joint with a collar.
Jointing Materials. —The materials which are inserted between
the ends of adjoining pipes for the purpose of forming a
continuous closed conduit.
Elasticity of Joints. —Ability of jointed pipes to resist strains
caused by bending and returning to original position.

VI. Finished Product.

(a) Material.

Durability.—Resistance to disintegration or deterioration.

—Ability to readily and effectively render
Serviceability. satis-
factory service.
Thickness. —Distance between outside and inside surfaces.
Strength. —Ability to physical forces imposed during han-
resist
dling and after pipe has been put in use.
Toughness. —Relative degree of resistance to impact without
fracture as opposed to brittleness.
Hardness. —Intensity of molecular cohesion as measured by
resistance to penetration by a standard tool.
 Serial Designation: C 8-15. 569

Smoothness. —Evenness of surface without projections or irreg-

ularities.
—The consolidation of material under high heat.
Vitrification.
Shrinkage. —Diminution of dimensions and mass of the material.
Porosity. — Ratio of the volume of interstices of the material to
the volume of mass.
its

Percolation. —Passage of water through the of the

interstices
material.

(b) Covering.

Coating.—A covering of other materials applied in liquid form.

Glazing.—Hard glassy surface covering.
Salt Glazing. — Glazing produced by application of during
salt
vitrification.
Lining. —A covering of other material applied in solid form to
inside surfaces.
Waterproofing. —Materials resistant to penetration by water.

(c) Defects.

Warp. —Twisted out of normal shape.

Fracture.— Rupture of the material by a break through its
entire thickness.
Crack. —Fissure or open seam not necessarily extending through
body of material.
Fire Crack. —A crack resulting from lack of uniformity in shrink-
age after the application of excessive heat.
Hair Crack. — Irregularly running, narrow crevice or
fine, fis-

sure at the surface of a pipe not penetrating deeply, and

caused by a shrinkage of material during manufacture.
—
Blister. Convex hollow prominence formed by separation and
raising of a film in the process of burning.
Leakage. — Passage of water contrary to intention.
Lamination. —Division of material into thin layers or sheets.

VII. Identification.

—
Marking and Imprints. Impressions made upon pipe at the
place and time of manufacture for the purpose of identi-
fication.
 C :

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
PURITY OF RAW LINSEED OIL FROM NORTH
AMERICAN SEED.
Serial Designation: D 1-15.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation^ 1 ; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1913; Revised, 1915.

I. PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Properties. 1 . Raw linseed oil from North American seed shall conform
to the following requirements
Maximum. Minimum.

Specific Gravity at —^—

15° 5
0.936 0.932

Specific Gravity at ^-C 0.931 0.927

Acid Number 6.00

Saponification Number 195 189
Unsaponifiable matter, per cent 1 50. ....
Refractive Index at 25° C 1.4805 1.4790
Iodine Number (Hanus) .... 180

II. METHODS OF TESTING.

Methods of 2. The recommended methods of testing are as follows:
Testing.
General. —
All tests shall be made on oil which has been
61tered at a temperature of between 60 and 80° F. through
(570)
 Serial Designation: D 1 - 15. 571

paper in the laboratory immediately before weighing out. The

sample should be thoroughly agitated before the removal of a
portion for filtration or analysis.
Specific Gravity. —
Use a pyknometer, accurately standardized
and having a capacity of at least 25 cc, or any other equally
accurate method, making a test at 15°.5 C, water being 1 at
15°.5 C, or a test at 25° C, water being 1 at 25° C.
—
Acid Number. Expressed in milligrams of KOH per gram of
oil. Follow the method described in Bulletin No. 107, revised
1908, Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Chemistry, page 142.
—
Saponification Number. Expressed as with Acid Number.
Blanks should also be run to cover effect of alkali in glass.
Follow method given in Bulletin No. 107, revised 1908, Depart-
ment of Agriculture, Bureau of Chemistry, pages 137-138.
Unsaponifiable Matter. —
Follow Boemer's method taken
from his Ubbelohde Handbuch Der Ole u. Fette, pages 261-262.
"To 100 g. of oil in a 1000 to 1500-cc. Erlenmeyer flask add 60 cc.
of an aqueous solution of potassium hydroxide (200 g. KOH
dissolved in water and made up to 300 cc.) and 140 cc. of 95-per
cent alcohol. Connect with a reflux condenser and heat on the
water bath, shaking at first until the liquid becomes clear. Then
heat for one hour with occasional shaking. Transfer while yet
warm to a 2000-cc. separatory funnel to which some water has
been added, wash out the Erlenmeyer with water using in all
600 cc. Cool, add 800 cc. of ether and shake vigorously one
minute. In a few minutes the ether solution separates perfectly
clear. Draw off the soap and filter the ether (to remove last
traces of soap) into a large Erlenmeyer and distill off the ether,
adding if necessary one or two pieces of pumice stone. Shake
the soap solution three times with 400 cc. of ether, which add to
the first ether extract. To the residue left after distilling the
ether add 3 cc. of the above KOH solution, and 7 cc. of the
95-per cent alcohol, and heat under reflux condenser for 10
minutes on the water bath. Transfer to a small separatory fun-
nel, using 20 to 30 cc. of water, and after cooling shake out with
two portions of 100 cc. of ether; wash the ether three times with
10 cc. of water. After drawing off the last of the water, filter
the ethereal solution so as to remove the last drops of water,
distill off the ether, dry residue in water oven and weigh."
572 Specifications for Purity of Raw Linseed Oil.

Or, any accurate method involving the extraction of the

dried soap may be used.
Refractive Index. —
Use a properly standardized Abbe
Refractometer at 25° C, or any other equally accurate in-
strument.
—
Iodine Number (Hanus). Follow the Hanus method as
described in Bulletin No. 107, revised 1908, Department of
Agriculture, Bureau of Chemistry, page 136.
AMERICAS -OCIETY FOR TESTING MAI:-:.,:.-
'
. :->. v

,.-. Association for Test: ls.

:Ta:.'la?.l ;
; .v ificatio:

PURITY OJ '
DLED LINSEED OIL Fl
EH
Serial DeslzzLatio-n: D 11-13.
-
-.-
:

>_NL TZ
p7 -.;*." »j

a' .it

I I
:: :

- • :-.'.: :

teat »• C I 17*

aeat... 0.3
0.1
-
 574 Specifications for Purity of Boiled Linseed Oil.

II. METHODS OF TESTNIG.

Methods of 2. The recommended methods of testing are as follows:
Testing.
General. —
The sample should be thoroughly agitated before
the removal of a portion for analysis.
—
Use a pyknometer, accurately standard-
Specific Gravity.
izedand having a capacity of at least 25 cc, or any other equally
accurate method, making a test at 15°.5 C, water being 1 at
15°.5 C.
—
Acid Number. Expressed in milligrams of KOH per gram
of oil. Follow the method described in Bulletin No. 107, re-
vised 1908, Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Chemistry,
page 142.
Saponification Number. —
Expressed as with Acid Number.
Blanks should also be run to cover effect of alkali in glass.
Follow method given in Bulletin No. 107, revised 1908, Depart-
ment of Agriculture, Bureau of Chemistry, pages 137-138.
—
Unsaponifiable Matter. Follow Boemer's method taken
from his Ubbelohde Handbuch Der Ole u. Fette, pages 261-262.
"To 100 g. of oil in a 1000 to 1500-cc. Erlenmeyer flask add 60 cc.
of an aqueous solution of potassium hydroxide (200 g. KOH
dissolved in water and made up to 300 cc.) and 140 cc. of 95-per-
cent alcohol. Connect with a reflux condenser and heat on the
water bath, shaking at first until the liquid becomes clear. Then
heat for one hour with occasional shaking. Transfer while yet
warm to a 2000-cc. separatory funnel to which some water has
been added, wash out the Erlenmeyer with water using in all
600 cc. Cool, add 800 cc. of ether and shake vigorously one
minute. In a few minutes the ether solution separates per-
fectly clear. Draw off the soap and filter the ether (to remove
last traces of soap) into a large Erlenmeyer and distill off the
ether, adding if necessary one or two pieces of pumice stone.
Shake the soap solution three times with 400 cc. of ether, which
add to the first ether extract. To the residue left after dis-
tilling the ether add 3 cc. of the above KOH solution, and 7 cc.

of the 95-per-cent alcohol, and heat under reflux condenser for

10 minutes on the water bath. Transfer to a small separatory
funnel, using 20 to 30 cc. of water, and after cooling shake out
with two portions of 100 cc. of ether; wash the ether three
times with 10 cc. of water. After drawing off the last of the
 "

Serial Designation: D 11-15. 575

water, filter the ethereal solution so as to remove the last drops

of water, distill off the ether, dry residue in water oven and
weigh.
Or, any accurate method involving the extraction of the
dried soap may be used.
Refractive Index. —
Use a properly standardized Abbe
Refractometer at 25° C, or any other equally accurate in-
strument.
—
Iodine Number (Hanus). Follow the Hanus method as
described in Bulletin No. 107, revised 1908, Department of
Agriculture, Bureau of Chemistry, page 136.
Ash. —The determination of the percentage of ash and the
constituents thereof may be made by any method which gives
accurate results.
 :

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
PURITY OF RAW TUNG OIL.

Serial Designation: D 12-16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation D 12; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915; Revised, 1916.

I. PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

Properties. Raw tung oil shall conform to the following requirements
Maximum. Minimum.

Specific Gravity at —15°.5

- C 0.943 0.939

Acid Number 6
Saponification Number 195 190
Unsaponifiable Matter, per cent 0.75
Refractive Index at 25° C 1.520 1.515
Iodine Number (Hubl, 18 hours) 165
Heating Test (Browne's Method), minutes. .. . 12
Iodine Jelly Test, minutes 4

II. METHODS OF TESTING.

Methods of 2. The recommended methods of testing are as follows:
Testing.
—
Use a pyknometer accurately standard-
Specific Gravity.
ized and having a capacity of at least 25 cc, or any other equally
(376)
 Serial Designation: D 12-16. 577

accurate method, making the test at 15°.5 C, water being 1

at 15°.5 C.
—
Acid Number. Weigh 10 g. of oil in a 200-cc. Erlenmeyer
flask,add 50 cc. of neutral alcohol, connect with a reflux air
condenser (or place small funnel in neck of flask), and heat on a
steam bath for \ hour. Remove from the bath, cool, add
phenolphthalein, and titrate the free acid with N/5 sodium
hydroxide. Calculate as the acid number (milligrams of potas-
sium hydroxide to 1 g. oil).
Saponification Number. —
Weigh from 2 to 3 g. of oil in a
200-cc.Erlenmeyer flask, add 30 cc. of a N/2 alcoholic solution
of potassium hydroxide, connect with a reflux condenser, heat
on a steam bath for 1 hour, then titrate with N/2 sulfuric acid,
using phenolphthalein as indicator. Always run two blanks
with the alcoholic potash. From the difference between the
number of cubic centimeters of acid required by the blanks
and the determinations, calculate the saponification number
(milligrams of potassium hydroxide to 1 g. of oil).
Unsaponifiable Matter. —To 25 g. of oil add 15 cc. of an aque-
ous solution of KOH
(200 g. of KOH
dissolved in water and made
up to 300 cc.) and 35 cc. of 95-per-cent alcohol. Connect with a
reflux condenser and heat on the water bath for 1 hour with
occasional shaking. Transfer to a separator}' funnel containing
a little water and wash out flask with water, using in all 125 cc.
Cool, add 200 cc. of ether and shake vigorously for 1 minute.
In a few minutes the ether solution will separate perfectly clear.
Draw off the soap solution into another separatory funnel.
Shake the soap solution with three 100-cc. portions of ether.
Unite all the ether portions and wash with three 30-cc. portions
of water. Filter the ether solution (small portions at a time)
into a tared flask, distill off the ether and dry flask and con-
tents to constant weight -at 95 to 100° C. in a steam oven. Re-
port the percentage of unsaponifiable matter.
Refractive Index. —
Use a properly standardized Abb6 re-
fractometer at 25° C, or any other equally accurate instrument.
Iodine Number (Iliibl). —Place a small quantity of oil

into a small weighing bottle or beaker. Weigh Trans-

carefully.
fer by dropping from 0.2 to 0.3 g. to a 500-cc. bottle having a
well-ground stopper, or a specially flanged neck, iodine-test
578 Specifications for Purity of Raw Tung Oil.

Erlenmeyer flask. Reweigh the weighing bottle or beaker to

determine the amount of oil used in the test. Then dissolve
the oil in 10 cc. of chloroform and add an amount of Hiibl solu-
tion containing twice the amount of iodine that will be absorbed
by the oil. Stopper the flask, shake well, and place in a dark
closet for 18 hours. Add 20 cc. of a 10-per-cent solution of
potassium iodide and 100 cc. of distilled water. Titrate with
N/10 sodium thiosulfate, using starch as an indicator. Blank
tests must be made. From the difference between the amounts
of sodium thiosulfate required by the blanks and the determi-
nation, calculate the iodine number (centigrams of iodine to
1 g. of oil).
Onaccount of the fact that Htibl solution after prepara-
tion apt to deteriorate in strength, it is considered advisable
is

to have prepared the two component parts of Hiibl solution,

namely, a solution of mercuric chloride in alcohol and a solu-
tion of iodine in alcohol, of the proper strength, as outlined in
text-books. The proper amounts of these solutions may be
mixed on the day of use.
—
Heating Test (Browne's Method). Test tubes for contain-
ing the oil should be 16 cm. by 15 mm., with a mark near the
bottom to indicate 5 cc, and closed by a cork so perforated
.that a glass rod 3 mm. in diameter could move freely.
Fill a copper beaker (height, 12 cm.; internal diameter,

6 cm.) with cotton-seed oil to a height of 7.5 cm. Place a ther-

mometer so as to be 1.5 cm. from the bottom of the bath.

Use a nitrogen-filled, immersed-stem chemical thermometer, engraved

stem; total length 4 to 4^ in.; graduated from 210 to 310° C. in 2° intervals;
the length between 210 and 310° C. not less than 2\ in. If preferred,

use emergent-stem thermometer 30 cm. long, with graduations from 100 to

400° C, making correction for emergent stem according to the method out-
lined in Stem Correction Sheet No. 44 of the U. S. Bureau of Standards.

When the bath temperature is 293° C. (560° F.) and very

slowly rising at this point, place the tube containing 5 cc. of the
oil to be tested so that its bottom is level with the lowest part
of the bulb of the -^thermometer. Note the time, remove the
source of heat for about 45 seconds and then reapply. Before
2 minutes have elapsed the temperature of the bath will have
fallen to 282° C. (540° F.), at which point it should be kept as
 Serial Designation: D 12-16. 579

steady as possible. When the tung oil has been in the bath
about 9 minutes, raise the glass rod at intervals of ^ minute,
and when the rod is firmly set note the time. As setting or
jellying takes place within a few seconds of fluidity, a good end
determination is afforded. Remove the specimen at once,
heat the bath again to 293° C, and repeat the experiment with
another portion of the sample.
No stirrer is used in the bath. A screen around the bath
enables the temperature to be more easily reached. When the
cotton-seed oil has become tarry
and viscid, it should be renewed;
otherwise heating may be irreg-
ular.
Iodine Jelly Test. In a —
wide-necked 200-cc. Erlenmeyer
flask, place 2.5 g. (weight correct
to 1 mg.) of the oil. Add 10 cc.
of chloroform from a pipette
and stopper the flask immedi-
ately. Carefully insert a small
glass vial into the flask so that
the vial stands upright. Into
the vial from a pipette run 10 cc.
of a solution of iodine in chloro-
form, containing 0.035 to 0.036 g.
of iodine per cubic centimeter.
Place the flask in a bath con-
taining water at 25 to 26° C.
and allow it to stand there for a

few minutes. Keep the flask Fig. i.

stoppered, except when it is nec-

essary to remove it to insert the vial andadd the iodine solu-
to
tion. Tilt and rotate the is upset and the
flask so that the vial
contents of the flask are thoroughly mixed, at the same time
starting a stop watch. Keep the flask in the bath at 25 to 26° C.
and at the end of every quarter minute, tilt the flask towards
a horizontal position. Note the time required for the formation
of a jelly that does not flow, but sticks to the bottom of the
flask or slides as a mass. Record time in minutes and quarters
580 Specifications for Purity of Raw Tung Oil.

thereof. should require 2\ to 3 \ minutes for

Pure tung oil

the formation of the If the temperature of the labora-

jelly.

tory is more than 2 or 3° C. above or below 25° C, place the

flask containing the iodine solution in the bath and allow it to
remain there for several minutes before pipetting out the 10 cc.
for the test. The arrangement of the apparatus is shown in

Fig. 1. The chloroform used to dissolve the oil and to prepare

the iodine solution shall conform to the requirements of the
United States Pharmacopoeia and shall have a specific gravity
at 25°/25° C. of not more than 1.481 and not less than 1.480.

The proper density can be obtained by washing with water if

the specific gravity is too low or by adding 95-per-cent ethyl

alcohol if too high.
Aconvenient procedure for preparing the iodine solution
is as follows: Treat an excess of iodine with warm chloroform
and after shaking for a few minutes, cool the contents to about
20° C. and filter through glass wool. Pipette 10 cc. of the
solution into a flask containing 10 cc. of 10-per-cent potassium-
iodide solution and titrate with 0.1 normal sodium-thiosul-
fate solution. Calculate the iodine content and dilute with
chloroform so as to obtain an iodine content of 0.035 to 0.036 g.
per cc. After dilution, titrate again against the thiosulfate
to be sure that the solution is of required strength.
All the details of the above method shall be followed exactly.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
TURPENTINE.

Serial Designation: D 13-15.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation D 13; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915.

These specifications apply both to the turpentine that is

1. General,
distilledfrom pine oleoresins, and commonly known as "gum
turpentine" or "spirits turpentine," and to the turpentine
commonly known as "wood turpentine" that is obtained from
resinous wood, whether by extraction with volatile solvents,
orby steam, or by destructive distillation.
2. The purchaser, when ordering under these specifications,
may specify whether gum spirits or wood turpentine is desired.
The turpentine shall be clear and free from suspended
matter and water.
3. The color shall be "Standard" or 1
better. Color.

4. The specific gravity shall be not less than 0.862 nor more Specific Gravity,

than 0.872 at 15°.5 C.

1
The
terra "Standard" refers to the color recognized as standard by the "Naval Storea
Trade." Turpentine is of "Standard" color when a depth of 50 mm. in a perfectly flat pol-
ished bottom tub*, approximately matches a No. 1 yellow Lovibond glass.

(581)
 582 Specifications for Turpentine.

Refractive index. 5. The refractive index at 15°. 5 C. shall be not less than
1.468 nor more than 1.478.
initial Boiling 6. The initial boiling point shall be not less than 150 nor
Point. o
more than 16Q q
Distillation. 7. Ninety per cent of the turpentine shall distill below
170° C.
Polymerization. 8. The polymerization residue shall not exceed 2 per cent
and its refractive index at 15°. 5 C. shall not be less than 1.500.

Methods of Analysis.
9. Color. — Fill a 200-mm., perfectly flat bottom colori-
metric tube graduated in millimeters to a depth of from 40 to
50 mm. with the turpentine to be examined. Place the tube
in a colorimeter and place on or under it a No. 2 yellow Lovi-
bond glass. Over or under a second graduated tube in the
colorimeter, place a No. 1 yellow Lovibond glass and run in
the same turpentine until the color matches as nearly as possible
the color in the first tube. Read the difference in depth of the
turpentine in the two tubes. If this difference is 50 mm. or
more, the turpentine is "Standard" or better.
10. Specific Gravity. —
Determine specific gravity at any
convenient temperature with a plummet, the displacement of
which has been accurately determined for that temperature,
or by an equally accurate method, using the factor 0.00082
for each degree centigrade that the temperature of determina-
tion differs from 15°. 5 C.

11. Refractive Index. —Determine refractive index at any

convenient temperature with an accurate instrument, and
calculate the results to 15°. 5 C, using the factor 0.00045 for
each degree that the temperature of determination differs
from 15°.5 C.
12. Distillation. —Use an ordinary Engler flask and con-
denser, 1 and heat the flask by placing it in a glycerin or oil

bath of the general type described in Bulletin No. 135, Bureau

of Chemistry. Fit the flask with a thermometer reading from
145 to 200° C. in such a way that the mercury bulb shall be
opposite the side tube of the flask and the 175° mark below

'Stillman, "Engineering Chemistry," p- 503.

 Serial Designation: D 13-15. 583

the cork. Place 100 cc. of the turpentine to be examined in

the flask, connect with the condenser, insert stopper bearing
thermometer, and heat until distillation of the turpentine
begins. Conduct the distillation so that the distillate passes
over at the rate of 2 drops per second. Note the initial dis-
tilling temperature and the percentage distilling below 170° C.

13. Polymerization. —Place 20 cc. of exactly 38/N (100.92

per cent) sulfuric acid in a graduated, narrow-neck Babcock
flask, stoppered, and place in ice water and cool. Add slowly
5 cc. of the turpentine to Gradually mix the con-
be tested.
tents, cooling from time to time, and not allowing the temper-
ature to rise above about 60° C. When the mixture no longer
warms up on shaking, agitate thoroughly and place the bottle
in a water bath and heat from 60 to 65° C. for about 10 minutes,
keeping the contents of the flask thoroughly mixed by vigorous
shaking five or six times during the period. Do not stopper
the flask after the turpentine has been added, as it may ex-
plode. Cool to room temperature, fill the flask with concen-
trated sulfuric acid until the unpolymerized oil rises into the
graduated neck. Centrifuge at about 1200 r. p. m. from 4 to
5 minutes, or allow to stand for 12 hours. Read unpolymerized
residue, notice its consistency and color, and determine its
refractive index.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
FOUNDRY COKE.
Serial Designation: D 17-16.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation D 17; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1916.

I. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

(A) Sampling.

Unit of 1. Each carload, or its equivalent, shall be considered as a

Sampling.
unit.
Method of 2. (a) The sample shall be taken from the exposed sur-
Sampling.
face of the car, by knocking off with a hammer a piece approxi-
mately the size of a walnut, at regular intervals of 18 in. along
three lines running from one end of the car to the other. One
of these lines shall pass through the center of the car and the
other two lines shall be 2 ft. from the respective sides of the car.
(b) The intervals of sampling along the three lines may be

measured by using a hammer with a handle 18 in. long, breaking

off a piece- of coke the size of a walnut at each point where the
head of the hammer rests, regardless of the appearance of the
particular piece that happens to occur under the head of the
hammer.
Quantity of 3. The total quantity of sample collected in the above
Gross Sample. manner shall not be less than 2 pecks.
(584)
 :

Serial Designation: D 17 - 16. 585

4. When the total moisture contentis not to be deter- Reduction of

mined, the entire sample shall be crushed to pass
gross withotf^Rega'rd
through a screen having 4 meshes to the linear inch, under such to Moisture,

conditions as shall prevent loss or the accidental admixture of

foreign matter. The crushing shall be done mechanically with
a jaw crusher, or by hand on a chilled iron or hard steel plate
by impact of a chilled iron or hard steel tamping bar, hammer
or sledge, avoiding all rubbing action, otherwise the ash content
of the sample will be materially increased by the addition of iron
from the crushing apparatus, even though hardened steel or
chilled iron is used.
After all the gross sample has been passed through the
4-mesh screen, it shall be mixed on a strong, closely woven cloth
about 5 ft. square by raising successively the four sides of the
cloth, thus rolling the sample about until thoroughly mixed.
The four corners of the cloth shall then be gathered up, and the
sample shall be formed in a conical pile and reduced in quantity
by quartering as follows
The cone shall be flattened, its apex being pressed down so
that each quarter contains the material originally in it. The
flattened mass then be divided into four equal quarters.
shall
The diagonally opposite quarters shall then be removed and
discarded and the space that they occupied brushed clean. The
two remaining quarters shall be successively mixed, coned and
quartered on the cloth as before, until two opposite quarters shall
weigh not less than 5 lb., which shall then be placed in a suitable
container for transportation to the laboratory. In case duplicate
laboratory samples are desired, the rejected portions of the
original 4-mesh sample shall be combined, mixed and quartered
down to a similar 5-lb. sample.
5. The sample prepared by the above method may, at the Optional Use
1
option of the purchaser, be used for an approximate moisture
gim^for
determination. In such cases the gross sample shall be immedi- Moisture
ately crushed and reduced to the 5-lb. laboratory sample as Determmation -

rapidly as possible, to minimize the loss of moisture. The con-

tainer for shipment to the laboratory shall be moisture-tight.
Since the sample obtained by this method will usually show less
than the true moisture content of the gross sample, the purchaser
shall have the privilege of a special moisture sample as hereinafter
 586 Specifications for Foundry Coke.

provided, if the standard sample shows more than 3 per cent

moisture.
Special 6. The special moisture sample shall consist of not less than
Sample"
2 P ec^ s 0I> walnut size. It shall be taken in the manner de-
scribed in Section 2, and shall be placed, immediately after col-
lection, in a moisture-tight container for transportation to the
laboratory. The car shall be weighed at the time the special
moisture sample is collected.
Resampling. In case of disagreement between buyer and seller, an
7.

independent chemist, mutually agreed upon, shall be employed to

sample and analyze the coke, the cost to be borne by the party
at fault.
The resample be taken and prepared as prescribed
shall
in the foregoing sections, except that the minimum quantity
of gross sample shall be not less than 1 bushel in volume, taken
at intervals of 18 in. on six equidistant lines parallel to the side
of the car.

(B) Chemical Analysis.

Method of 8. The sample received at the laboratory shall be prepared

Analysis.
f or and the percentage of moisture, volatile matter,
analysis, '

fixed carbon, ash, and sulfur shall be determined as specified

'

in the Standard Methods for Laboratory Sampling and Analysis

of Coke (Serial Designation: D 37) of the American Society for
Testing Materials.
Chemical 9. The dry coke shall not exceed the following limits in
Composition, chemical composition:

Volatile matter not over 2.0 per cent

Fixed carbon not under 86.0 "
Ash not over 12.0 "
Sulfur " " 1.0

II. REJECTION.
Deduction 10. In case the original standard sample was taken in
(a)
forExcess accordance with Section 5 and showed more than 3 per cent
moisture, the purchaser shall have the option of taking a special
moisture sample according to Section 6, and of deducting the
moisture found in excess of 3 per cent, from the weight of coke
 Serial Designation: D 17-16. 587

found on reweighing the car at the time the special moisture

sample was taken.
(b) In case the original standard sample was taken with

special regard to moisture in accordance with Section 6, the

purchaser shall have the option of deducting the moisture in
excess of 3 per cent from the weight of coke, provided that the
car was weighed at the time of sampling.
11. Coke which fails to conform to the limits of chemical Rejection,

composition given in Section 9 will be rejected, and the seller

shall be notified within 5 working days from the date of sampling.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
YELLOW-PINE BRIDGE AND TRESTLE TIMBERS.

To be Applied to Solid Members and not to

Composite Members.

Serial Designation: D 10-15.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation D 10; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1910; Revised, 1915.

I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
1. Except as noted, all timber shall be cut from sound trees

and sawed standard size; close-grained and solid; free from

defects such as injurious ring shakes and crooked grain; unsound
knots; knots in groups; decay; large pitch pockets, or other
defects that will materially impair its strength.
Dense Southern 2. (a) Dense southern yellow pine shall show on either end
Yellow Pine.
an average of at least six annual rings per inch and at least
one-third summer wood, or else the greater number of the
rings shall show at least one-third summer wood, all as meas-
ured over the third, fourth, and fifth inches on a radial line
from the pith. Wide-ringed material excluded by this rule will
be acceptable, provided that the amount of summer wood as
above measured shall be at least one-half.
(588)
 Serial Designation: D 10-15. 589

(b) The in color between summer wood and

contrast
spring wood be sharp and the summer wood shall be dark
shall
in color, except in pieces having considerably above the mini-
mum requirement for summer wood.
(c) In cases where timbers do not contain the pith, and it

is impossible to locate it with any degree of accuracy, the same

inspection shall be made over 3 in. on an approximate radial

line beginning at the edge nearest the pith in timbers over
3 in. in thickness and on the second inch (on the piece) nearest
to the pith in timbers 3 in. or less in thickness.
(d) In dimension material containing the pith but not a
5-in. radial line, which is less than 2 by 8 in. in section or less
than 8 in. in width, that does not show over 16 sq. in. on the
cross-section, the inspection shall apply to the second inch from
the pith. In larger material that does not show a 5-in. radial
line the inspection shall apply to the three inches farthest from
the pith.
(e) The radial line chosen shall be representative. In
case of disagreement between purchaser and seller the average
summer wood and number of rings shall be the average of the
two radial lines chosen.
3. Sound southern yellow pine shall include pieces of Sound Southern

southern pine without any ring or summer-wood requirement.

4. Rough timbers when sawed to standard size, shall mean standard Size of

that they shall not be over \ in. scant from actual size specified.
For instance, a 12 by 12-in. timber shall measure not less than
11$ by llf in.
5. Standard dressing means that not more than \ in. shall standard

be allowed for dressing each surface. For instance, a 12 by saw^Timber.

12-in. timber shall, after dressing four sides, not measure less
than \\\ by \\\ in.

II. STRINGERS.
6. {a) —
Dense Southern Yellow Pine. Dense southern yel- stringers,

low pine shall show not less than 80 per cent of heart on each
of the four sides, measured across the sides anywhere in the
length of the piece; loose knots, or knots greater than 1$ in.
in diameter, will not be permitted at points within 4 in. of the
edges of the piece.
 590 Specifications for Yellow-Pine Bridge Timbers.

(b) Sound Southern Yellow Pine. —Sound southern yellow

pine shall be square-edged, except it may have 1 in. wane on
one corner. Knots
not exceed in their largest diameter
shall
one-fourth the width of the face of the stick in which they occur.
Ring shakes extending not over one-eighth of the length of the
piece are admissible.

III. CAPS AND SILLS.

Caps and Sills. Dense Southern Yellow Pine. Dense southern yellow
7. (a) —
pine shallshow 85 per cent of heart on each of the four sides,
measured across the sides anywhere in the length of the piece,
and shall be free from knots over 2\ in. in diameter. Knots
shall not be in groups.
(b) Sound Southern Yellow Pine. —Sound southern yellow
pine shall be square-edged, except it may have 1 in. wane on
one corner, or £ in. wane on two corners. Knots shall not
exceed in their largest diameter one-fourth the width of the
face of the stick inwhich they occur. Ring shakes shall not
extend over one-eighth of the length of the piece.

IV. POSTS.
Posts 8. Dense Southern Yellow Pine. Dense southern yellow
(a) —
pine shall show not less than 75 per cent of heart, measured
across the face anywhere on the length of the piece, and shall
be free from knots over 2\ in. in diameter. Knots shall not be
in groups.
(b) Sound Southern Yellow Pine. —Sound southern yellow
pine shall be square-edged, except it may have 1 in. wane on
one corner, or ^ in. wane on two not
corners. Knots shall
exceed in their diameter one-fourth the width of the
largest
face of the stick in which they occur. Ring shakes shall not
extend over one-eighth of the length of the piece.

V. LONGITUDINAL STRUTS OR GIRTS.

Longitudinal.
struts or Guts
(a) Dense Southern Yellow Pine.
9. —
Dense southern yellow
^^ gj^j
e snow one f ace a n_
near t; the other face and two sides
shall show not less than 85 per cent of heart, measured across
the face or side anywhere in the piece, and shall be free from
knots I5 in. or over in diameter.
 Serial Designation: D 10-15. 591

(b) Sound Southern Yellow Pine. —Sound southern yellow

pine shall be square-edged and sound, and shall be free from
knots 1 5 in. or over in diameter.

VI. LONGITUDINAL X-BRACES, SASH BRACES

AND SWAY BRACES.
10. (a) Dense Southern Yellow Pine. —Dense southern yellow Longitudinal
^-Braces, Sash
pine
r shall show not less than 80 per
r cent of heart on two faces
Braces and Sway
and four square edges, and shall be free from knots over 1? in. Braces,
in diameter.
(b) Sound Southern Yellow Pine. —Sound southern yellow
pine shall be square-edged and sound, and shall be free from
knots 2\ in. or over in diameter.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A,

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
21-in. COTTON RUBBER-LINED FIRE HOSE FOR
PRIVATE DEPARTMENT USE.

Serial Designation: D 14-15.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation D 14; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915.

I. COTTON FABRIC.
Quality of 1. (a) The cotton fabric shall be even and firm in texture
Cotton Fabric.
throughout and free from all injurious or unsightly defects,
except such trifling ones as are incident to the best manufacturing
practice. The filling threads (or weft) shall be thoroughly
covered by the warp in woven fabric, while in knit fabric both
warp and filling shall be covered by the knitted loop.
(b) Woven fabric shall have not less than 7 picks of filling

and 26 warp strands per square inch of weaving. It shall be

guaranteed not to mildew, if properly cared for. Sizing or
other treatment liable to cause mildew shall be avoided.

II. RUBBER LINING.

Quality of 2. (a) The rubber lining shall be of uniform quality, free
Rubber Lining.
f rom and as free from corrugations as may be possible
defects,
with the best methods of manufacture.
(592)
 Serial Designation: D 14-15. 593

(b) The
lining shall contain, exclusive of cement and back-
ing, not than 40 per cent by weight, as found by analysis, of
less

pure fine Para rubber or its equivalent, and shall not contain
any kind of rubber substitutes, old vulcanized, or reclaimed
rubber.
(c) The lining shall be cemented to the cotton fabric with

cement which conforms to the requirements of Section 3 (g).

(d) The lining shall be lap- jointed, and the lap shall be as
small and as neat as is consistent with the best results.
(e) The lining (without cement and backing) shall be made

up of not less than 3 calendered sheets, and shall be not less

than 0.049 in. in thickness, and, including cement and other
backing, shall not exceed 0.076 in. in thickness.
3. (a) The tensile strength of the lining shall be not less Tests of
Rubber Llning '
than 1600 lb. per sq. in.

(b) The length at time of breaking, shall be not less than

6 times the initial length.
(c) Mark on the test specimen two lines, 2 in. apart, at
right angles to the direction of pull. Stretch the specimen until
the distance between marks is 10 in. and hold in that position
for 10 minutes. Release the specimen and allow it to rest for
10 minutes. The distance between the two lines at this time
shall not exceed 2.4 in.
(d) The compound used shall not contain more than 7.5
per cent of sulfur, exclusive of that which may be contained in
the mineral matter, as barytes, and the free sulfur shall not
exceed 3 per cent; both figures shall be based upon the amount
of gum as found by chemical analysis.
(e) The organic-acetone extract shall not exceed 5 per cent
of the gum as found by chemical analysis.
(/) The by alcoholic potash
saponifiable matter extracted
after the acetone extraction has been made shall not exceed 2
per cent of the gum as found by chemical analysis.
(g) The adhesion, or "friction," between the cement backing
and the cotton fabric, shall be such that when a 9-lb. weight is
suspended from the free end of a 1-in. strip of the lining cut"
circumferentially from the hose, the lining shall not separate
from the backing or fabric at a rate greater than 1 in. per
minute.
 594 Specifications for Cotton Rubber-Lined Fire Hose.

III. HOSE.
Diameter of 4. The internal diameter of the hose shall be not less than
Hose. in.
2f
Weight and (a) The weight of the finished hose without couplings
5.
Flexibility of
shall be not less than 35 lb. per 50-ft. length, or with couplings,
Hose.
not less than 40 lb. per 50-ft. length.
(b) The hose shall be flexible and easily coiled.
Strength of Hose, 6. (a) The hose shall conform to the following minimum

requirements as to bursting pressure. Tests on 50-ft. lengths

need not be made unless specified by the purchaser.

When Lying Straight.

Length of sample, ft 3 50
Bursting pressure, min., lb. per sq. in 500 400

When Bent in a Curve the Radius of Which is 2 J ft.

Length of sample, ft 3 50
Bursting pressure, min., lb. per sq. in 500 400

With Ends Tied Together and Couplings Touching, and With a Sharp
Kink in the Middle.
Bursting pressure, min., lb. per sq. in 300

(b) Every length of hose shall be tested by the manufacturer

after coupling but before delivery, with a pressure of 300 lb.
The hose shall be carefully dried again before shipment.
Elongation of 7. The elongation of the hose when the pressure is increased
Hose. and when
from 10 lb. to 100 lb. shall not exceed 5 per cent
increased from 10 lb. to 300 lb., 13 per cent of the original
length, as measured at a pressure of 10 lb.

Distortion of 8. (a) The hose shall not twist more than 25 deg. per foot
Hose. The twist shall be in such a direction
at a pressure of 300 lb.

as to tighten rather than loosen the couplings.

(b) When under a pressure of 300 lb., a 50-ft. length of hose
shall not warp more than 20 in. from a straight line drawn from
center to center of couplings.
Marking of Beginning at a point not more than 4 ft. from the coup-
9.
Hose.
lings, each 50-ft. length of hose shall be stenciled at two places
in black letters 1 in. high with the legend "A.S.T.M. Specifica-
tions." the name of the manufacturer, and the month and year
of manufacture.
 Serial Designation: D 14-15. 595

10. (a) The couplings shall be made, finished and fitted in Coupling*,

a workmanlike manner throughout. The diameter through

couplings shall be 2 1 in.

(b) The couplings shall be of the expansion ring pattern,

of ample strength, and of the best form to resist the strain of
expanding the binding ring in the coupling, and shall have a
tail part sufficiently long to extend £ in. beyond the end of the

expansion ring. The ring shall be at least \\ in. in length and

the washer at least ys ^n thick. -

(c) The couplings shall be made of an alloy of copper, tin

and zinc (and lead if desired) of the following proportions:

Copper not under 82 per cent

Tin " " 5
Zinc " over 7 "
Lead " " 3

(d) The weight of couplings, including both male and female

and expansion rings, shall be not less than 5 lb.
(e) Both male and female couplings shall be stamped
with the name of the manufacturer and the month and year of
manufacture in letters and figures not less than £ in. high.
(J) The couplings shall be provided with rubber gasket
of the same quality as the rubber lining and accurately fitted.
(g) The couplings shall have, inside each expansion ring,
a rubber washer at least -^ in. in thickness and with inside
diameter not less than that of the coupling. Hose coupling
threads shall be interchangeable with those now in use in the
city or but wherever practicable and not otherwise
town,
specified, an effort should be made to introduce the "National
Standard" thread adopted in 1906 by the National Fire Protec-
tion Association.
The essential features of the "National Standard" are a
60-deg. V-thread, outside diameter on the male threads of 3^ in.

and 1\ threads per inch.

Note.
In private yards located in cities or towns where couplings having 7,

7\ or 8 threads per inch, and outside diameters on the male ends of not less
than 3^ in. or more than 3-fa in. are in use, it is possible to render both male
and female couplings adaptable for interchange with the Standard by the
596 Specifications for Cotton Rubber-Lined Fire Hose.

use of an adjustable tap for the female end or an adjustable die for the male
end of the coupling. This tap or die should have the same number of threads
per inch as the coupling or nipple to be treated.
In cases where the thread in use does not come within the above limits
both with respect to number of threads per inch and outside diameter of
threads on male, the hydrant nipples can be equipped with adapters provided
with spanner lugs and having a Standard male thread on the out-board end.
 .

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
2|, 3 AND DOUBLE-JACKETED COTTON
31-IN.
RUBBER-LINED FIRE HOSE FOR PUBLIC
FIRE DEPARTMENT USE.

Serial Designation: D 26 - 18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation D 26; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1916; Adopted, 1918.

I. COTTON FABRIC.
1 (a) The cotton fabric shall be even and firm in texture Quality of
Cotton Fabne *
throughout and free from all injurious or unsightly defects, except
such trifling ones as are incident to the best manufacturing
practice. The filling threads (or weft) shall be thoroughly
covered by the warp in woven fabric, while in knit fabric both
warp and filling shall be covered by the knitted loop.
(b) The cotton cover shall consist of two plies, separate or
interwoven.
II. RUBBER LINING.
2. (a) The rubber lining shall be of uniform quality, free Quality of

from defects, and as free from corrugations as may be possible Rubber Lining,
with the best methods of manufacture.
(b) The lining shall contain, exclusive of cement and backing,

not less than 40 per cent by weight, as found by analysis, of pure

fine Para rubber or its equivalent, and shall not contain any kind
of rubber substitutes, old vulcanized, or reclaimed rubber.
(597)
 598 Specifications for Rubber-Lined Ftre xiose.

(c) The lining shall be cemented to the cotton fabric with

cement which conforms to the requirements of Section 3 (g).

(d) The lining shall be lap-jointed, and the lap shall be as
small and as neat as is consistent with the best results.
(e) The lining (without cement and backing) shall be made

up of not less than three calendered sheets, and shall be not

less than 0.058 in. in thickness, and, including cement and other
backing, shall not exceed 0.090 in. in thickness.
Tests of 3. (a) The tensile strength of the lining shall be not less
Rubber Lining.
than 16QQ ^ per gq [r
(b) The length at time of breaking shall be not less than
six times the initial length.
(c) Mark on the test specimen two lines, 2 in. apart and at
right angles to the direction of pull. Stretch the specimen until
the distance between marks is 10 in. and hold in that position for
10 minutes. Release the specimen and allow it to rest for 10
minutes. The distance between the two lines at this time shall
not exceed 2.4 in.

(d) The compound used shall not contain more than 7.5 per
cent of sulfur, exclusive of that which may be contained in the
mineral matter, as barytes, and the free sulfur shall not exceed
3 per cent; both figures shall be based upon the amount of
gum as found by chemical analysis.

(e) The organic-acetone extract shall not exceed 5 per cent

of the gum as found by chemical analysis.

(/) The saponifiable matter extracted by alcoholic potash

after the acetone extraction has been made shall not exceed 2 per
cent of the gum as found by chemical analysis.
(g) The adhesion, or "friction," between the cement
backing and the cotton fabric, shall be such that when a 9-lb.
weight is suspended from the free end of a 1-in. strip of the
lining cut circumferentially from the hose, the lining shall not
separate from the backing or fabric at a rate greater than 1 in.
per minute.

III. HOSE.
Diameter 4. The internal diameter of the hose shall be not less than
that called for in the schedule, namely 2\, 3 or 2>\ in.
 :

Serial Designation: D 26-18. 599

5. (a) The weight of the finished hose per 50-ft. length Weight and

without couplings shall conform to the following maximum

^Hose.**
requirements
Internal Diameter Maximum Weight per 50-ft.
of Hosb. in. Length, lb.

2§ 70
3 90
*
3£ 110

(b) The hose shall be flexible and easily coiled.

6. The hose shall conform to the following minimum
(a) strength
of Hose "
requirements as to bursting pressure. Tests on 50-ft. lengths
need not be made unless specified by the purchaser.
When Lying Straight.
Length of sample, ft 3 50
Bursting pressure, min., lb. per sq. in 600 500

When Bent in a Curve the Radius of Which is 2 J ft.

Length of sample, ft 3 50
Bursting pressure, min., lb. per sq. in 600 500

With Ends Tied Together and Couplings Touching, and with a

Sharp Kink in the Middle.
Bursting pressure, min., lb. per sq. in 350

(b) Every length of hose shall be tested by the manu-

facturer after coupling but before delivery, with a pressure of
400 lb. The hose shall be carefully dried before shipment.
7. The elongation of the hose when the pressure is in- Elongation
creased from 10 lb. to 100 lb. shall not exceed 3 per cent, and of Hose -

when increased from 10 lb. to 400 lb., 8 per cent of the

original length as measured at a pressure of 10 lb.
8. The hose shall not twist more than 12 deg. per foot Distortion
at a pressure of 400 lb. The twist shall be in such direction as to of Ho8e '

tighten rather than loosen the couplings.

9. Beginning at a point not more than 4 ft. from the Marking

couplings, each 50-ft. length of hose shall be stenciled at two ofHose -

places in black letters 1 in. high with the legend "A.S.T.M.

Specifications," the name of the manufacturer, the month and
year of manufacture, and the words "tested af 400 11>.'"
10. (a) Couplings shall be made, finished and fitted in a Couplings,
workmanlike manner throughout. The diameter through
 : :

600 Specifications for Rubber-Lined Fire Hose.

couplings shall be according to the size of the hose, namely,

2\, 3, or 3^ in.
(b) The couplings shall be of the expansion-ring pattern,
of ample strength, and of the best form to resist the strain of
expanding the binding ring in the coupling. They shall have a
tail part sufficiently long to extend £ in. beyond the end of the

expansion ring. They shall be fitted with expansion rings of

the following lengths and gaskets of the following thicknesses:

Internal Diameter Length of Expan- Thickness of

of Hose, in. sion Rings, in. Gaskets, in.

22 I3 XS
3 If i
3* 2} J

(c) The couplings shall be made of an alloy of copper, tin

and zinc (and lead if desired) of the following proportions

Copper not under 82 per cent.

Tin " " 5
Zinc " over 7 "
Lead " " 3 "

(d) The weight of couplings, includingboth male and

female and expansion rings, shall conform to the following
minimum requirements
Internal Diameter Minimum Weight per Set
of Hosk, in. of Couplings, lb.

2\ 51
3 8
Z\ 12*

(e)Both male and female couplings shall be stamped with

the name of the manufacturer and the month and year of manu-
facture in letters and figures net less than f in. high.
(/) The couplings shall be provided with rubber gaskets of
the same quality as the rubber lining, and accurately fitted.
(g) The couplings shall have, inside each expansion ring, a
rubber washer at least ye mm
thickness and with inside diameter
-

not less than that of the coupling. Hose coupling threads shall
be interchangeable with those now in use in the city or town,
but wherever practicable an effort should be made to introduce
 Serial Designation: D 26-18. 601

the "National Standard" thread adopted in 1906 by the National

Fire Protection Association.
The essential features of the " National Standard" are a
60-deg. V-thread, and the following more important features
for the different sizes:

Number of Threads Outside Diameter of

Size of Couplings, in. per Inch. Male Thrbade in.

7\ 73 3tV
3 6 3|
3J 6 4*

Notes.

In many cases where the number of threads and the outside diameters
of the male ends do not differ greatly from the Standard, it is possible to
render both male and female couplings adaptable for interchange with the
Standard by the use of an adjustable tap for the female end or an adjust-
able die for the male end of the coupling. This tap or die should have the
same number of threads per inch as the coupling or nipple to be treated.
In cases where the above change in the existing equipment cannot be
made, the hydrant nipples can be equipped with adapters provided with
spanner lugs and having a Standard male thread on the out-board end.
Two and one-half inches is specified above as the diameter for the smaller
hose since this size is standard throughout the country for Public Fire Depart-
ment use. It is recommended however that an effort be made to introduce
the use of 2f-in. hose, which has practically replaced the 2 5 -in. hose for
private department use for many years. The 2|-in. hose has about 20 per
cent less friction loss than the 7\ -in. hose and can be used without difficulty
on the present equipment of couplings and playpipes. When 2|-in. hose is
used the specifications for 25-in. hose should apply with the exception of
weight, in which case the maximum weight should be 75 lb. per 50-ft. length.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
AIR-LINE HOSE FOR PNEUMATIC TOOLS.

Serial Designation: D 46 - 18.

These specifications are issued under the fixed designation D 46; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case
of revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1917; Adopted, 1918.

Material 1. These specifications cover wrapped air-line hose suitable

Covered.
for air tools working at not more than 125 lb. pressure and for
vacuum cleaning outfits.

I. MANUFACTURE.
Construction. 2. The hose shall consist of:

(a) An inner rubber tube;

(b) Cotton reinforcement;
(c) An outer rubber cover;
(d) An extra covering of cotton or wire, when specified.

Rubber Tube. 3. shall be smooth, uniform in quality and

The rubber tube
thickness, andfrom injurious defects.
free
Cotton 4. The reinforcement shall consist of canvas plies made
Reinforcement.
from cotton duck evenly and firmly woven from good cotton,
as free from unsightly defects, dirt, knots, lumps and irregu-
larities of twist as is consistent with the best manufacturing

practice. It shall be well frictioned on both sides with a rubber

(602)
 Serial Designations: D 46-18. 603

compound suitable for the required service. The plies shall be

laid on the bias and be sufficiently strong to enable the hose to
successfully withstand the hydrostatic pressure test, and yet
at the same time be soft and pliable.
5. The rubber cover shall be uniform in quality and thick- Rubber Cover,

ness, and free from injurious defects.

6. When specified, the hose shall be given an extra covering Extra Covering,

of one of the following, as specified:

(a) An armor of half-round wire ^ by ^ in., spaced

i in. apart;
(b) Canvas;
(c) Cotton Braid.

The canvas or cotton braid shall be equal in quality to the

cotton canvas specified in Section 4, and when free from rubber
shall weigh not less than 8 oz. per sq. yd.

II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS.

7. Where applicable, references are made below to the standard
Standard Methods for Testing of Cotton Rubber-Lined Hose Methods -

(Serial Designation: D 15) of the American Society for Testing

Materials.
8. The temperature of testing room and samples shall be as Temperature of

defined in Section 19 of Standard Methods D 15. and samples?

9. Prior to the hydrostatic test specified in Section 12 (b), Samples for
Tests
a sample 16 in. long shall be cut at any place from each length -

of hose.
10. The quality of the rubber friction binding the plies Friction Test,

together shall be determined by suspending a

weight 15-lb.
from the separated end of the duck of a 1-in. test
ring cut from
the 16-in. sample described in Section 9, the force being applied
radially. The rate of separation of the plies shall not be greater
than 1 in. per minute. The test shall extend for 10 minutes
when the size of the hose permits.
11. ('7) The tests of tube and cover shall be conducted in Tests of Tube

accordance with Sections 18, 20 (a), (6), (c), 22, 23, 24 and 25 of and Cover -

Standard Methods D 15.

 :

604 Specifications for Aer-Line Hose.

(b) Test specimens shall be cut longitudinally from the hose-

(c) When the original 2-in. gage length of the test speci-
men is stretched to 9 in., the stress in the tube shall be at
least 900 lb. per sq. in. and that in the cover at least 800 lb.
per sq. in.

(d) The set, or permanent elongation, shall not exceed 25

per cent.
(e) The tensile strength shall be not less than 1500 lb. per
sq. in. for the tube and 1300 lb. per sq. in. for the cover.
(/) The elongation at the breaking load shall be such that
the original 2-in. gage length of the test specimen shall have been
stretched to at least 10 J in. for both tube and cover.
Hydrostatic 12. (a) The method of conducting the hydrostatic pressure
Pressure Tests. tests ^n De [ n accordance with Section 26 of Standard
Methods D 15.
(b) Each length of hose shall be subjected to a proof pres-
sure test of 250 lb. per sq. in. for 5 minutes to expose imper-
fections.
(c) From each lot of ten lengths or less of hose inspected,

one length shall be further subjected to a pressure test of 500

lb. per sq. in. for 5 minutes, which it shall withstand with-

out bursting. On large, orders the number of tests may be

reduced to not less than three at the option of the inspector
representing the purchaser.

III. STANDARD SIZES AND DIMENSIONS.

Length. 13. Unless otherwise specified, the hose shall be furnished
in 50-ft. lengths. The ends of each length shall be uncapped
and without fittings.

sizes. 14. The minimum tube and cover thickness shall be as

follows
Minimum Tube Minimum Cover
Internal Diameter Thickness, Thickness,
of Hose, in. in. in.

3 _I_ _3_
8 16 64
1 -!_ _3_
2 16 64
5 _JL _3_
8 16 64
3 _3_ _1
4 32 16
3 1
1 32 16
,1 3 _1
 Serial Designation: D 46 - 18. 605

IV. MARKING.
15. Each 50-ft. length of hose shall have inlaid in rubber Marking,
in three places, namely, midway between the ends and within
10 ft. of each end, a brand showing the name of the manufac-
turer, the month and year of manufacture, the trade name of
the hose, and the legend "Air 125 lb. A.S.T.M. Specifications."

V. INSPECTION AND REJECTION.

16. The manufacturer shall notify the purchaser suf-
(a) inspection,

ficiently inadvance of the completion of the hose to permit of

arrangement for inspection.
(b) The manufacturer shall afford the inspector repre-

senting the purchaser, without charge, all reasonable facilities

to satisfy him that the hose is being furnished in accordance
with these specifications. All tests and inspection shall be
made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless
otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere
unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
(c) The purchaser may make the tests to govern the accept-

ance or rejection of the hose in his own laboratory or elsewhere.

Such tests, however, shall be made at the expense of the
purchaser.
17. Samples of rejected hose shall be preserved for two Rehearing,
weeks from the date of the test report. In case of dissatis-
faction with the results of the test, the manufacturer may make
claim for a rehearing witlun that time.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD TESTS
FOR
PAINT THINNERS OTHER THAN TURPENTINE.

Serial Designation: D 28-17.

These tests are issued under the fixed designation D 28; the final

number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of

revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1915; Adopted, 1917.

Specific Gravity.

The specific gravity may be determined by a hydrometer,

Westphal balance, or pyknometer, provided these instruments
are verified. The observations shall be taken with the sample
at 15°. 56 C. (60° F.) and compared with water at the same
temperature.

Distillation.

Apparatus. —The general arrangement of the apparatus is

shown in Fig. 1.

Flask. —The flask used shall be the Standard Engler flask

as described in the various standard works upon petroleum,
such as Redwood, Holde, etc.
"Engler employs a globular flask 6.5 cm. in diameter, with
a cylindrical neck 1.6 cm. in internal diameter and 15 cm. in
length, from the side of which a vapor tube 10 cm. in length
extends at an angle of 75 deg. downwards to the condenser.
(606)
 Serial Designation: D 28-17. 607

The junction of the vapor tube with the neck of the flask should
be 9 cm. above the surface of the oil when the flask contains its
charge of 100 cc. of oil. The observance of the prescribed dimen-
sions is considered essential to the attainment of uniformity of
results." 1

Fig. 1. — Distillation Apparatus.

The be supported in a ring of asbestos having

flask shall
an opening lj diameter in its center.
in. in

The flask, burner, etc., shall be surrounded by a shield.

—
Condenser. The condenser shall consist of a tube of thin
brass of \ in. internal diameter, 22 in. in length, set at an angle
of 75 deg. with the flask and surrounded by a water jacket of

' Redwood. 3d edition. Vol. 2. p. 205 (1913).

 :

608 Tests for Paint Thinners other than Turpentine.

the trough type. The lower end of the condenser shall be cut
off at an acute angle and shall be curved down for a length of
3 in., so as to project at least \ in. into the 100-cc. cylinder used
as a receiver.
A cover (pasteboard) should be placed over the top of the
cylinder and surrounding the condenser tube.
Thermometer. —
The thermometer used shall conform to
the following specifications:
The thermometer shall be graduated from to 400° C.
in intervals of 1° C.There shall be a small reservoir above the
400° mark. The thermometer shall be finished at the top with
a small glass ring. The stem shall be made of enamel-backed
thermometer tubing, but not of Jena 16 nI glass. The bulb
shall be made of Jena 16
m
Corning normal, or Jena or Corning
,

borosilicate glass.
Every fifth graduation shall be longer than the intermediate
ones, and the marks shall be numbered at every interval of 10°.
The graduation marks shall be clear cut and fine, and the number-
ing clear cut and distinct. The thermometer shall be filled
above the mercury with an inert gas, which will not act chem-
ically on or contaminate the mercury. The pressure of the gas
shall be sufficient to prevent separation of the mercury column
at all temperatures of the scale, but the upper reservoir shall be
large enough so that the pressure will not become excessive at the
highest temperature.
The thermometer shall be thoroughly annealed before the
final filling. be pointed for use at full immersion.
It shall
Each thermometer shall be provided with a suitable case.
A serial number for identification and the word "Distillation"
shall be engraved on the stem.
and workmanship shall be of the best grade.
All material
The maximum error from to 200° C. shall not exceed
0°.5 C; from 200 to 300° C, shall not exceed 1° C; and from
300 to 400° C, shall not exceed 2° C.
The thermometer shall conform to the following dimensions

Total length, max., mm 385

Diameter of stem, mm 5.5-7.0
Diameter of bulb, mm 5.5-7.0
Diameter of capillary, min., mm 0.1
 Serial Designation: D 28-17. 609

Length of bulb, mm 11-15

Distance, 0° to bottom of bulb, mm 23-33
Distance, to 400° mark, mm 280-300

The thermometer shall be inserted through a tight fitting

cork in the neck of the flask, so that the top of the thermometer
bulb will be on a level with the bottom of the side outlet in the
neck of the flask and in the center of the neck.
—
Method of Distillation. The flask, connected with the
condenser, shall be filled with 100 cc. of the thinner at 60° F.,
which shall be measured in the 100-cc. receiving cylinder. The
same cylinder may be used without drying as the receiving
vessel for the distillate. The flask shall be heated directly by a
suitable burner.
The distillation shall proceed at the rate of not less than 4
nor more than 5 cc. per minute into the receiving cylinder.
The temperature at which the first drop leaves the lower end
of the condenser shall be considered the initial boiling point.
Readings of the quantity in the receiver shall be taken
when the next 10° point is reached, and for every even 10°
thereafter. For example, if initial boiling point occurs at 144° C,
then the first reading of the quantity in the receiver shall be
made at 150° C, and thereafter at 160°, 170°, etc.
The be continued until the point is reached
distillation shall
where the last drop is when a puff of white vapor
vaporized,
usually appears in the bottom of the flask. The temperature
at this point shall be considered the end or dry point of dis-
tillation.

The total yield of distillate shall not be less than 97 per cent.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD TESTS
FOR
SHELLAC.

Serial Designation: D 29-17.

These tests are issued under the fixed designation D 29; the final number
indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of revision,
the year of last revision.

Ppoposed as Tentative, 1914; Adopted, 1917.

Determination of Rosin in Shellac.

Solutions Required. —
The solutions required are one of iodine
monochloride containing 13 g. of iodine per liter, in glacial
acetic acid that has a melting point of 14.7 to 15° C. and is free
from reducing impurities; and another of sodium thiosulfate,
made by dissolving 24.83 g. of the pure salt in a liter of water.
In addition to these solutions there is required a quantity of
acetic acid of the same strength as that used for making the
solution of iodine monochloride. Pure chloroform and starch
are also necessary.
The preparation of the iodine-monochloride solution presents
no great difficulty, but it shall be done with care and accuracy
in order to obtain satisfactory results. There shall be in the
solution no sensible excess either of iodine or more particularly
of chlorine, over that required to form the monochloride. This
condition is most satisfactorily attained by dissolving in the
whole of the acetic acid to be used the requisite quantity of
iodine, using a gentle heat to assist the solution, if it is found
(610)
 Serial Designation: D 29-17. 611

necessary. Set aside a small portion of this solution, while pure,

and pass dry chlorine into the remainder until the halogen
content of the whole solution is doubled. it will be
Ordinarily
found that by passing the chlorine into the main part of the
solution until the characteristic color of free iodine has just
been discharged, there will be a slight excess of chlorine, which
is corrected by the addition of the requisite amount of the
unchlorinated portion until all free chlorine has been destroyed.
A slight excess of iodine 'does little or no harm, but excess of
chlorine must be avoided.
—
Method. Introduce 0.2 g. of ground shellac into a 250-cc.
dry bottle of clear glass with a ground-glass stopper, add 20 cc.
of glacial acetic acid (melting point 14.7 to 15° C.) and warm
the mixture gently until solution is complete (except for the
wax). A pure shellac is rather difficultly soluble; solution is

quicker according to the proportion of rosin present. Add

10 cc. of chloroform and cool the solution to 21 to 24° C.
The temperature should be held well within these limits dur-
ing the test. Add 20 cc. of Wijs solution from a pipette, hav-
ing a rather small delivery aperture. Close the bottle, place
in a dark place, and note the time. It is convenient to keep
the bottles during the test partly immersed in water which
should be kept as nearly as possible between 22 and 23° C.
Pure shellac will scarcely alter the color of the Wijs solu-
tion. If in small amount, rosin will produce a slowly appearing
red-brown In large amount, rosin causes an immediate
color.
coloration, increasing in intensity as time passes.
After 1 hour,
add 10 cc. of 10-per-cent potassium-iodide water solution.
Titrate the solution immediately with the sodium-thiosulfate
solution; 25 or 30 cc. may be run in immediately, unless the
shellac is very impure, and the remainder gradually, with
vigorous shaking. Just before the end, add a little starch
solution. The end point is sharp, as the reaction products of
shellac remain dissolved in the chloroform; any color returning
after \ minute or so is disregarded.
A blank determination should be run with 20 cc. of Wijs
solution, 20 cc. of acetic acid, 10 cc. of chloroform, and 10 cc.
of 10-per-cent potassium-iodide solution. The blank is nec-
essary on account of the well-known effect of temperature
612 Tests for Shellac.

changes on the volume, and possible loss of strength of the

Wijs solution.
In the case of grossly adulterated samples, or in the testing
of pure rosin, it is necessary to use, instead of 0.2 g. of material,
a smaller amount, say 0.15 g. or even 0.1 g., in order that the
excess of iodine monochloride may not be too greatly reduced,
since the excess of halogen is one of the factors in determining the
amount of absorption. In case less than 25 cc. of the thio-
sulfate solution are required, another test should be made,
using a smaller amount of the shellac to be tested.
In weighing shellac, some difficulty is at times experienced
on account of its electrical properties. In very dry weather
it may be found that the necessary handling to prepare it for

weighing has electrified it, and that it may be necessary to leave

it on the balance pan at rest for a few minutes before taking the

final weight.

No pure shellacs show a higher iodine absorption than 18. As shellac

is relatively a high-priced materialand as the variation between its highest
and lowest figure is not great, it is recommended that 18 should be taken as
the standard figure for shellac, determined by the method above described.
As it is an accepted principle that a standard method should be so devised
that its inaccuracies shall work in the direction of favoring the seller rather
than of condemning too severely the article sold, it is recommended that
the value for the iodine number of rosin be taken as 228. The results of
using in this method the value 18 as the iodine number of shellac and 228 as
the number of rosin, may be that a slightly lower percentage of rosin, under
some circumstances, will be found than that which is actually present.

The percentage of rosin is determined as follows:

Iodine number of shellac = 18
" rosin -228
mixture — X
(X-18)
Percentage of rosin =» 100
(228-18)

Insoluble Test for Shellac. 1

The
separation of the soluble from the insoluble portion of
the lac is made by extracting approximately 5 g. of the lac in a
paper cartridge, which is held in a tube provided with a siphon
Sometimes referred to as "refraction" of the lac.
 Serial Designation: D 29-17. 613

as in the Knoefler extraction apparatus, heated by the

and is

vapors of the alcohol which pass around the tube and are then
condensed by a return condenser to fall as liquid upon the
shellac to be extracted. The siphon tube should be slightly
larger than the* cartridge, which should be supported so that
it does not rest directly on the bottom.
The most convenient apparatus for carrying out the process
is illustrated in Fig. 1. It consists of a wide-neck flask in

Depression

Fig. 1. —Apparatus for the Insoluble Test for Shellac.

which suspended a metal return condenser. From the lower
is

part of this condenser is hung a siphon tube of the Knoefler

type. A Schleicher and Schuell extraction cartridge, No. 603,

26 mm. in diameter by 60 mm. high, is used in a siphon tube of
such a size that the top of the cartridge is just above the upper
curve of the siphon, the paper thimble being cut down if nec-
essary. It is supported on three indentations in the glass so
614 Tests for Shellac.

that there is a little space underneath and around the cartridge

to allow of a free flow of liquid. To insure the complete extrac-
tion of all matters soluble in alcohol in the cartridge itself, it

should be thoroughly extracted with 99.5-per-cent methyl alcohol

before use. Then place the cartridge in a glass-stoppered
weighing bottle and dry to constant weight in an air bath at
100° C. Place a sample of approximately 5 g. of the pulver-
ized lac in the cartridge, and transfer to the extraction ap-
paratus. Fill the cartridge with cold alcohol of the character
described to a point just below the upper curve in the siphon.
The cold alcohol is allowed to act upon the lac for 1 hour
before the extraction commences.
Keep the alcohol boiling briskly during the extraction.
The rate of extraction may be
by the use of an electric
controlled
stove of the Simplex type, 4^ in. in diameter, and using the full
current of 2.2 amperes at 110 volts. The volume of methyl
alcohol in the flask should be 125 cc, in addition to the alcohol
required to fill the siphon. Protect the flask from drafts.
Under these conditions the tube will siphon over about 33 times
in 1 hour. The condenser should be able to return all the
alcohol volatilized during the vigorous boiling of the contents
of the flask, the object being to effect the maximum extrac-
tion during the specified time.
The color is removed by the end of the first hour in prac-
tically every case and in order to eliminate any variations due
to difference of opinion as to the exact time when the color has
disappeared, the total extraction period shall be limited to ex-
actly 2 hours, time being taken from the moment when the first

siphon tube of alcohol has passed over. After extraction,

place the cartridge in the weighing bottle, dry to constant
weight at 100° C. and weigh.
The weight of the residue insoluble in alcohol thus obtained,
divided by the weight of the sample, and this quotient multiplied
by 100, is the percentage of alcohol-insoluble matter in the lac.

Note.
It be noted that there are three depressions in the lower part of
v.ill

the glass extraction thimble to hold the cartridge above the bottom. This
is very necessary for the reason that during the early part of the extraction,

a very free flow must be maintained to prevent the blocking of the siphon
 Serial Designation: D 29-17. 615

with the wax, which, though readily soluble in hot alcohol, is with difficulty
soluble in cold alcohol. The object in filling the cartridge with cold alcohol,
before starting the extraction proper, is to allow the resin and some of the
wax to dissolve at a low temperature. If the higher temperature of the
boiling alcohol were immediately applied it would fuse the resin into a lump
and render the extraction difficult. The first few drops of distilled alcohol
which fall into the cartridge will cause the extract to siphon over, thus
eliminating the bulk of the resin at the start.

Determination of Moisture in Bleached Shellac.

Both orange and bleached shellac give off volatile matter
at temperatures approaching 100° C. Bleached shellac alters
chemically at these temperatures, losing its' solubility in alcohol.
For these reasons the usual methods of determining moisture
by heating in the air bath at 100 to 110° C. are not applicable
in the analysis of shellac.
Sampling. —Bleached shellac is sold in three forms, as hanks
or bars containing approximately 25 per cent of water, as ground
bleached in pulverized form with about the same water con-
tent, and as bone-dry or kiln-dried shellac. The latter is
prepared by drying the ground-bleached shellac in the air or
in vacuum driers at moderate temperatures. It may contain,
depending upon the completeness of the drying and weather
conditions, up to 10 per cent or more of water.
In sampling bone-dry or kiln-dried bleached shellac, a fairly
large portion (about 1 lb.) should be taken from different parts
of the barrel and finely ground by running quickly through a
coffee mill. No attempt shall be made to sieve it. It shall be
rapidly mixed and transferred to a Mason jar provided with a
screw cap and rubber ring seal. The jar should not be more
than two- thirds full, leaving room for a thorough mixing by
shaking the contents. It shall be kept in a cool place and tested
as promptly as possible. If too warm the shellac may become
partly caked, in which case the lumps shall be broken up by
shaking the bottle.
In sampling bars or hanks it is recommended that a whole
hank be taken. It should be crushed and ground as rapidly as
possible. Ground-bleached shellac may be treated as above,
bearing in mind that the large amount of moisture present
makes rapid handling imperative.
616 Tests for Shellac.

Method No. 1. —Weigh from 5 to 10 g. of the sample in

flat-bottom dishes about 4 in. in diameter or in watch glasses
ground to fit and provided with a clamp. Spread out the
contents of the dish in a thin layer to expose as large a sur-
face as possible. Place the shellac in a desiccator freshly filled
with concentrated sulfuric acid. Exhaust the desiccator by a
vacuum pump as completely as possible. With a good vacuum
(3 mm. pressure or better) constant weight will be obtained in
between 24 and 48 hours.
Absolutely dry shellac is quite hygroscopic and the final
weight should be taken as rapidly as possible.
—
Method No. %, The same results may be obtained by dry-
ing the shellac in a well-ventilated air bath from 3 to 6 hours
at 100 to 110° F. (38 to 43° C). One or two electric light
bulbs provide a convenient source of heat. The tempera-
ture should not be allowed to rise above 43° C, otherwise sin-
tering may occur and retard drying. With poorly ventilated
ovens the drying may take much longer. Completeness of
drying should be ascertained by continuing the treatment to
constant weight.
It is recommended that analysts check the accuracy of
results obtained in the oven by comparison with a test made in

a vacuum desiccator before relying exclusively on the oven.

Note.
Whenthe determination of alcohol insoluble matter in bleached shellac
is if in the form of bars or ground bleached,
required, the sample shall be dried
as the water present dilutes the alcohol to a point where solution may not be
complete. Prolonged heating at the temperatures of 38 to 43° C. stated
above may render the shellac partly insoluble, and it is recommended that
in preparing shellac for this determination a separate portion be dried by
exposure to the air in a thin layer, without the application of heat.
 .

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD TESTS
FOR
LUBRICANTS.

Serial Designation : D 47 - 18.

These tests are issued under the fixed designation D 47 ; the final number
indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of revision,
the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1917; Adopted, 1918.

Specific Gravity.

1 Specific Gravity may be determined by hydrometer, Specific Gravity.

Westphal balance, or pyknometer, providing these instruments

are verified. The observation shall be taken with the sample
at 15°. 56 C. compared with water of the same temperature.
Correction for the bouyant effect of the atmosphere shall be
made when necessary.

Cloud and Pour Tests for Petroleum Oils except

Steam Cylinder and Black Oils.
2. The cloud test indicates the point at which paraffin wax cioud Test,
or other solid substances crystallize out or separate from solution
in the oil.
Put the oil to be tested in a glass jar or bottle, approxi-
mately l\ in. in inside diameter and 4 to 5 in. high, to a height
of about l\ in. or sufficient to reach \ in. above the mercury
bulb of the thermometer. The thermometer used is the so-called
cold-test thermometer, which is specially made for this purpose
(617)
 618 Tests for Lubricants.

and has a bulb i to f in. long. Insert the thermometer through

a tight-fitting cork so that it is held centrally in the jar, with the
lower end of the bulb \ in. from the bottom of the jar. Then
place the cold-test jar in a metal or glass jacket 4 to 5 in. high,
having inside diameter \ in. larger than the outside diameter of
the test jar. A disk of felt, cork or wax, \ in. in thickness, is
placed in the bottom of the jacket. Care should be taken that
the test jar is placed in the center of the jacket, so that it does
not touch the sides at any point. Then put the whole apparatus
into the refrigerating mixture and at every drop in temperature
of 2° F. when near the expected cloud test, remove the jar from
the jacket and inspect, being careful not to disturb the oil by
moving the thermometer or otherwise. When the lower half of
the sample becomes opaque through chilling, read the ther-
mometer. This reading shall be taken as the "cloud test" of
the oil.

Pour Test. 3. The pour test indicates the temperature at which a sample
of oil in cylindrical form of specified diameter and length will just
flow under specified conditions.
In making this test the same bottle and quantity of oil are
used as for the cloud test, and the pour test may, if desired, be
made after the cloud test has been determined; in the great
majority of cases the cloud test being the higher. In making
the pour test, place the jar containing the oil in a close-fitting
metal jacket provided at the bottom with a disk of felt or cork
\ in. thick. Place this in the freezing mixture. At each drop
in temperature of 5° F. remove the bottle from the jacket and
tilt it the oil begins to flow; just sufficiently tilted but
until
no more. In the extreme case, the bottle should be tilted to the
horizontal. When the oil has become solid around the ther-
mometer and will not flow, the previous 5° point shall be taken
as the "pour test" of the oil.
Preferably, the cold should be applied so that the pour
test will be completed in approximately one-half hour. The
materials used in the freezing mixture may be ice, calcium
chloride or sodium chloride, or solid carbon dioxide with acetone,
depending upon the temperature desired in making the tests.
For oils congealing or solidifying above 4-35° F. pounded ice
is used. From +35 to 4-15° F., a mixture of pounded ice and
 Serial Designation: D 47 - 18. 619

a small addition of salt, 1 20 by volume, may be taken. For

:

temperatures from +15 to —5° F., also use an ice-and-salt

mixture, adding about one-third salt. The salt should be very
dry and granulated fine enough to pass through a 20-mesh sieve.
From zero to —25° F., a mixture of ice and calcium chloride is
used. For temperatures lower than —5° F., however, it will
be found very convenient to use solid carbon dioxide and acetone,
by which any desired temperature down to —70° F. can be
obtained, or even lower. This freezing mixture is made as follows:
Take a sufficient amount of dry acetone and put it into a
covered metal beaker, copper or nickel; put the beaker into an
ice-salt mixture and when the temperature of the acetone
reaches +10° F., or below, add by degrees solid carbon dioxide,
until the desired temperature is reached. To get the solid
carbon dioxide, take an ordinary liquefied carbon-dioxide
cylinder and invert it, open the valve carefully and let the gas

run out into a chamois-skin bag. By the rapid evaporation the

dioxide becomes solid.

Cold Test for Steam Cylinder and Black Oils.

4. The object of the cold test is to determine the lowest Cold Test.
temperature at which oil will flow from one end of a container
to the other, in case it should become frozen and the resulting
solid oil stirred has assumed a sufficiently pasty con-
till it

sistency to flow. The test is conducted by freezing an ounce of

the oil solid in an ordinary 4-oz. oil sample bottle, using a
freezing mixture if necessary. A thermometer should then be
introduced into the frozen mass, and after ithas become cold,
the bottle containing the congealed oil is removed from the
cooling medium. The frozen oil is thoroughly stirred with a
thermometer until the mass will run from one end of the bottle
to the other, and at this moment the temperature as indicated
is recorded. The reading is the cold test of the oil.

If the figures indicating the cold test are inside the bottle
and covered by the softened oil, the reading can be obtained
by grasping the bottle by the neck with one hand, having in the
same hand a piece of waste, which encloses the thermometer.
The thermometer is then withdrawn through the waste with the
 620 Tests for Lubricants.

other hand for a sufficient distance to enable the operator to

see the end of the mercury column and read the temperature.

Free Acid.
Fre« Acid. 5. Accurately weigh 10 g. of the oil into a flask, add 50 cc. of
95-per-cent alcohol which has been neutralized with weak
caustic soda, and heat to the boiling point. Agitate the flask
thoroughly in order to dissolve the free fatty acids as completely
as possible. Titrate while hot with aqueous tenth-normal
alkali, free from carbonate, using phenolphthalein, alkali blue or
tumeric as an indicator, agitating thoroughly after each addition
of alkali.
Express results either as percentage of oleic acid or as acid
number (milligrams of potassium hydroxide required to saturate
the free acids in 1 g. of fat or oil).

1 cc. of tenth-normal alkali = 0.0282 gram of oleic acid. Alkali, 1 cc.

of which is equivalent to 0.00996 g. of KOH, and 1 cc. of which is equivalent
to 0.5 per cent of oleic acid, may be used.

Carbon Residue. 1

(conradson method)
Apparatus. 6. The apparatus (see Fig. 1) consists of:
(a) Porcelain crucible, wide form, glazed throughout,
25 to 26-cc. capacity, 46 mm. in diameter.
(b) Skidmore iron crucible, 45-cc. (l£ oz.) capacity, 65 mm.
in diameter, 37 to 39 mm. high with cover, without delivery
tubes and one opening closed.
(c) Wrought-iron crucible with cover, about 180 cc. capacity,
80 mm. diameter, 58 to 60 mm. high. At the bottom of this
crucible a layer of sand is placed about 10 mm. deep or enough
to bring the Skidmore crucible with cover on nearly to the top
of the wrought-iron crucible.
(d) Triangle, pipe stem covered, projection on side so as to
allow flame to reach the crucible on all sides.

This method is a modification by P. H. Conrad son of his original method and apparatus
'

(or Carbon Test and Ash Residue in Petroleum Lubricating Oils. See Proceedings, Eighth
International Congress of Applied Chemistry, New York, September, 1912, Vol. 1, p. 131.
Also reprint in the Journal of Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, Vol. 4, No. 1 1 November,
,

1912.
 Serial Designation: D 47-18. 621

(e) Sheet iron or asbestos hood provided

with a chimney
about 2 to 7\ in. high, 2| to 2\ in. in diameter to distribute the
heat uniformly during the process.

^7777?

Fig. 1.— Apparatus for Determining Carbon Residue.

(/)Asbestos or hollow sheet iron block, 6 to 7 in. square,

\\ to \\ in. high, provided with
opening in center 3\ in. in
diameter at the bottom, and 3j in. in diameter at the top.
 622 Tests for Lubricants.

Method. 7. The test shall be conducted as follows:

Ten grams of the oil to be tested are weighed in the porce-

lain crucible, which is placed in the Skidmore crucible and
these two crucibles set in the larger iron crucible, being careful
to have the Skidmore crucible set in the center of the iron
crucible, covers being applied to the Skidmore and iron crucibles.
Place on triangle and suitable stand with asbestos block and
cover with sheet iron or asbestos hood in order to distribute the
heat uniformly during the process.
Heat from a Bunsen burner or other burner is applied
with a high flame surrounding the large crucible, as shown in
Fig. 1, until vapors from the oil start to ignite over the crucible,
when the heat is slowed down so that the vapor (flame) will come
off at a uniform rate. The flame from the ignited vapors should
not extend over 2 in. above the sheet iron hood. After the
vapor ceases to come off the heat is increased as at the start and
kept so for five minutes, making the lower part of large crucible
red hot, after which the apparatus is allowed to cool somewhat
before uncovering the crucible. The porcelain crucible is
removed, cooled in a desiccator and weighed.
The entire process should require about one-half hour
to complete when heat is properly regulated. The time will
depend somewhat upon the kind of oil tested, as a very thin,
rather low-flash-point oil will not take as long as a heavy, thick,
high-flash-point oil.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD TEST
FOR
ABRASION OF ROAD MATERIAL.

Serial Designation: D 2-08.

This test is issued under the fixed designation D 2; the final number
indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of revision,
the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1908.

This well-known test is similar in almost all respects to the

Deval abrasion test of the French School of Roads and Bridges.
It has been used since 1878, and is entirely satisfactory for the
purpose for which it was designed.

Abrasion Test.
The machine one or more hollow iron cylin-
shall consist of
ders; and furnished with a tightly fitting iron
closed at one end
cover at the other; the cylinders to be 20 cm. in diameter and
34 cm. in depth, inside. These cylinders are to be mounted on
a shaft at an angle of 30 deg. with the axis of rotation of the
shaft.
At least 30 lb. of coarsely broken stone shall be available
for a test. The rock to be tested shall be broken in pieces as
nearly uniform in size as possible, and as nearly 50 pieces as
possible shall constitute a test sample. The total weight of
(623)
624 Tests for Abrasion of Road Material.

rock in a test shall be within 10 g. of 5 kg. All test pieces shall

be washed and thoroughly dried before weighing. Ten thousand
revolutions, at the rate of between 30 and 33 per minute, shall
constitute a test. Only the percentage of material worn off
which will pass through a 0.16-cm. (xVin.) mesh sieve shall be
considered in determining the amount of wear. This may be
expressed either as the percentage of the 5 kg. used in the test,
or the French coefficient, which is in more general use, may be

given; that is, coefficient of wear = 20 X —= — , where w is the

w w
weight in grams of the detritus under 0.16 cm. (£$ in.) in size
per kilogram of rock used.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD TEST
FOR
TOUGHNESS OF ROCK.
Serial Designation: D 3 - 18.

This test is issued under the fixed designation D 3; the final number
indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of revision,
the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1908; Revised, 1918.

Toughness, as applied to rock, is the resistance offered

1. Deflnition.

to fracture under impact, expressed as the final height of blow

required of a standard hammer to cause fracture of a cylindrical
test specimen of given dimensions.
2. Quarry samples of rock from which test specimens are to Sampling,

be prepared shall measure at least 6 in. on a side and at least

4 in. and when possible shall have the plane of

in thickness,
structural weakness of the rock plainly marked thereon.
Samples should be taken from freshly quarried material, and
only from pieces which show no evidences of incipient fracture
due to blasting or other causes. The samples should preferably
be split from large pieces by the use of plugs and feathers and
not by sledging. Commercial stone-block samples from which
test specimens are to be prepared shall measure at least 3 in.
on each edge.
3. Specimens for test shall be cylinders prepared as described size and Form
in Section 4, 25 mm. in height and from 24 to 25 mm. in diameter. ° f Test
• ?, „, Specimens.
Three test specimens shall constitute a test set. The ends of
(625)
 626 Test for Toughness of Rock.

the specimen shall be plane surfaces at right angles to the axis

of the cylinder.
Preparation of 4. One set of specimens shall be drilled perpendicular and
Test Specimens.
another parallel to the plane of structural weakness of the
rock, such plane is apparent.
if If a plane of structural weak-
ness not apparent, one set of specimens shall be drilled at
is

random. Specimens shall be drilled in a manner which will

not subject the material to undue stresses and which will insure
the specified dimensions. 1 The ends of the cylinders may be
sawed by means of a band or diamond saw, 2 or in any other
way which will not induce incipient fracture, but shall not be
chipped or broken off with a hammer. After sawing, the ends
of the specimens shall be ground plane with water and carbo-
rundum or emery on a cast-iron lap until the cylinders are 25 mm.
in length.
Impact Machine. 5. Any form impact machine which will comply with
of
the following essentials may be used in making the test:
(a) A cast-iron anvil weighing not less than 50 kg., firmly
fixed upon a solid foundation;
(b) A hammer weighing 2 kg., arranged so as to fall freely

between suitable guides;

(c) A plunger made
hardened steel and weighing 1 kg.,
of
arranged to a vertical direction in a sleeve, the
slide freely in
lower end of the plunger being spherical in shape with a radius
of 1 cm.;
Means for raising the hammer and for dropping it
(d)
upon the plunger from any specified height from 1 to not less
than 75 cm., and means for determining the height of fall to
approximately 1 mm.;
(c) Means specimen securely
for holding the cylindrical test
on the anvil without rigid lateral support, and under the plunger
in such a way that the center of its upper surface shall, through-
out the test, be tangent to the spherical end of the plunger at
its lowest point.
Method of 6. The test shall consist of a 1-cm. fall of the hammer for
Testing.
the first blow, a 2-cm. fall for the second blow, and an increase
1 The form of diamond drill described in Bulletin No. 347, U. S. Department of Agri-
culture, pp. 6-7, is recommended, and should prove satisfactory if the instructions are strictly
followed.
1 A satisfactory form of diamond saw is described in Bulletin No. 347, U. S. Department
of Agriculture, pp. 7-9.
 Serial Designation: D 3 - 18. 627

of 1-cm. fall for each succeeding blow until failure of the test
specimen occurs.
7. The height of the blow in centimeters at failure shall be Recording and
the toughness of the test specimen. The
individual and the Results?
81

average toughness of three test specimens shall be reported

when no plane of structural weakness is apparent. In cases
where a plane of structural weakness is apparent, the individual
and average toughness of the three specimens in each set shall
be reported and identified. Any peculiar condition of a test
specimen which might affect the result, such as the presence of
seams, fissures, etc., shall be noted and recorded with the test
result.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD TEST
FOR
DETERMINATION OF APPARENT SPECIFIC GRAVITY
OF COARSE AGGREGATES.

Serial Designation: D 30 - 18.

This test is issued under the fixed designation D 30; the final number
indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of revision,
the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1916; Adopted, 1918.

The apparent specific gravity shall be determined in the

following manner:
1. The sample, weighing 1000 g. and composed of pieces

approximately cubical or spherical in shape and retained on

a screen having 1.27-cm. (i-in.) circular openings, shall be dried
to constant weight at a temperature between 100 and 110°
C. (212 and 230° F.), cooled, and weighed to the nearest 0.5 g.
Record this weight as weight A. In the case of homogeneous
material, the smallest particles in the sample may be retained
on a screen having lj-in. circular openings.
2. Immerse the sample in water for 24 hours, surface-dry
and weigh.
individual pieces with aid of a towel or blotting paper,
Record weight as weight B.
this
3. Place the sample in a wire basket of approximately £-in.
mesh, and about 12.7 cm. (5 in.) square and 10.3 cm. (4 in.)
deep, suspend in water 1 from center of scale pan, and weigh.
1
The basket may be conveniently suspended by means of a fine wire hung from a hook
shaped in the form of a question mark with the top end resting on the center of the scale
pan.

(628)
 Serial Designation: D 30-18. 629

Record the difference between this weight and the weight of the
empty basket suspended in water as weight C. (Weight of
saturated sample immersed in water.)
4. The apparent specific gravity shall be calculated by

dividing the weight of the dry sample (A) by the difference

between the weights of the saturated sample in air (B) and in
water (C), as follows:
A
Apparent Specific Gravity =
B-C

5. Attention is between apparent

called to the distinction
specific gravity and true specific gravity. Apparent specific
gravity includes the voids in the specimen and is therefore always
less than or equal to, but never greater than the true specific
gravity of the material.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD TEST
FOR
SOLUBLE BITUMEN. 1

Serial Designation: D 4-11.

This test is issued under the fixed designation D 4; the final number
indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of revision,
the year of last revision.
Adopted, 1911.

Drying the Sample and Preparing it for Analysis. It was —

decided, owing to the great variety of conditions met with in
bituminous compounds, that it is impossible to specify any one
method of drying that would be satisfactory in every case. It
is therefore supposed that the material for analysis has been

previously dried either in the laboratory or in the process of

refining or manufacture, and that water, if present, exists only
as moisture in the hydroscopic form.
The material to be analyzed, if hard and brittle, is ground
and spread in a thin layer in a suitable dish (iron or nickel will
answer every purpose) and kept at a temperature of 125° C. for
one hour. In the case of paving mixtures and road materials,
where it is not desirable to crush the rock or sand grains, a lump
may be placed in the drying oven until it is thoroughly heated
> Committee D-4 on Road Materials, by whom this Standard Test was prepared, wish
it understood that they do not recommend it as the best for general use. as it Is longer and
in many cases gives no better results than other more expeditious tests, but only as a test
to be resorted to in case of dispute, as it seems to have the widest range of applicability of
any of the tests considered. Moreover, they wish it to be understood that with some
classes of materials the test will show a lower percentage of soluble bitumen than many of
the shorter tests.

(630)
 . 1

Serial Designation : D 4- 1 1 63

through, when it can be crushed down into a thin layer and dried
as above. If the material under examination contains any hydro-
carbons at all volatile at this temperature, it will of course be
necessary to resort to other means of drying. Tar or oils may
be dehydrated by distillation and the water-free distillate
returned to the residue and thoroughly incorporated with it.

—
Analysis of Sample. After drying, from 2 to 15 g. (as
may be necessary to insure the presence of 1 to 2 g. of pure
bitumen) is weighed into a 150-cc. tared Erlenmeyer flask, and
treated with 100 cc. of carbon disulfide. The flask is then
loosely corked and shaken from time to time until all large par-
ticles of the material have been broken up. It is then set aside
for 48 hours to settle. The solution is decanted into a similar
flask that has been previously weighed. As much of the solvent
is poured off as possible without disturbing the residue. The
contents of the first flask are again treated with fresh carbon
disulfide, shaken as before, and then put away with the second
flask for 48 hours to settle.
The liquid in the second flask is then carefully decanted
upon a weighed Gooch crucible, 3.2 cm. in diameter at the
bottom, fitted with an asbestos filter, and the contents of the
first flask are similarly treated. The asbestos filter is made
of ignited long-fiber amphibole, packed in the bottom of a
Gooch crucible to the depth of not over f in. In filtering no
vacuum is to be used and the temperature is to be kept between
20 and 25° C. After passing the liquid contents of both flasks
through the filter, the residue on the filter is thoroughly washed
and the residues remaining in them are shaken with more fresh
carbon disulfide and allowed to settle for 24 hours, or until it
is seen that a good subsidation has taken place. The solvent
in both flasks is then again decanted through the filter and the
residues remaining in them are washed until the washings are
practically colorless. All washings are to be passed through
the Gooch crucible.
The crucible and both flasks are then dried at 125° C. and
weighed. The filtrate containing the bitumen is evaporated,
the bituminous residue burned, and the weight of the ash thus
obtained added to that of the residue in the two flasks and the
crucible. The sum of these weights deducted from the weight
of substance taken gives the weight of soluble bitumen.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD TEST
FOR
PENETRATION OF BITUMINOUS MATERIALS.
Serial Designation: D 5-16.
This test is issued under the fixed designation D 5; the final number
indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of revision,
the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1911; Revised, 1916.

I. DEFINITION.
Definition of 1. Penetration is denned as the consistency of a bituminous
Penetration.
ma t e rial, expressed as the distance that a standard needle
vertically penetrates a sample of the material under known con-
ditions of loading, time and temperature. Where the conditions
of test are not specifically mentioned, the load, time and tem-
perature are understood to be 100 g., 5 seconds, 25° C. (77° F.),
respectively, and the units of penetration to indicate hundredths
of a centimeter.

II. APPARATUS.
Container. 2. The container for holding the material to be tested shall

be a flat-bottom, cylindrical dish, 55 mm. (2xV in.) in diameter

and 35 mm. (if in.) deep.
1

1 This
requirement ts fulfilled by the American Can Company's Gill style ointment box,
deep pattern, 3 oz. capacity.

(632)
 Serial Designation: D 5 - 16. 633

3. The needle for this test shall be of cylindrical steel rod Needle
1

50.8 mm. (2 in.) long and having a diameter of 1.016 mm.

(0.04 in.) and turned on one end to a sharp point having a
taper of 6.35 mm. (j in.).
4. The water bath be maintained at a temperature not Water Bath,
shall
vaiying more than 0°.l C. from 25° C. (77° F.). The volume of
water shall be not less than 10 liters and the sample shall be
immersed to a depth of not less than 10 cm. (4 in.) and shall
be supported on a perforated shelf not less than 5 cm. (2 in.)
from the bottom of the bath.
5. Any apparatus which will allow the needle to penetrate Apparatus for
Penotration -
without appreciable friction, and which is accurately calibrated
to yield results in accordance with the definition of penetration,
will be acceptable.
6. The transfer dish for container shall be a small dish or Transfer Dish
for Contalner>
tray of such capacity as will insure complete immersion of the
container during the test. It shall be provided with some
means which will insure a firm bearing and prevent rocking of
the container.

III. PREPARATION OF SAMPLE.

7. The sample shall be completely melted at the lowest Preparation
of p *'
possible temperature and stirred thoroughly until homoge-
it is

neous and free from air bubbles. It shall then be poured into the
sample container to a depth of not less than 15 mm. (f in.).
The sample shall be protected from dust and allowed to cool
in an atmosphere not lower than 18° C. (65° F.) for one hour.
It shall then be placed in the water bath along with the transfer
dish and allowed to remain one hour.

IV. TESTING.
8. In making the test the sample shall be placed in the
(a) Testing,

transfer dish filled with water from the water bath of sufficient
depth to completely cover the container. The transfer dish
containing the sample shall then be placed upon the stand of
the penetration machine. The needle, loaded with specified
weight, shall be adjusted to make contact with the surface of
the sample. This may be accomplished by making contact of
' Journal of Agricultural Rtttarch. Vol. V, No. 24. pp. 1125-1126.
634 Test for Penetration or Bituminous Materials.

the actual needle point with its image reflected by the surface

of the sample from a properly placed source of light. Either the

reading of the dial shall then be noted or the needle brought to
zero. The needle is then released for the specified period of
time, after which the penetration machine is adjusted to measure
the distance penetrated.
Atleast three tests shall be made at points on the surface
of the sample not less than 1 cm. (| in.) from the side of the con-
tainer and not less than 1 cm. (f in.) apart. After each test
the sample and transfer dish shall be returned to the water
bath and the needle shall be carefully wiped toward its point
with a clean, dry cloth to remove all adhering bitumen. The
reported penetration shall be the average of at least three tests
whose values shall not differ more than four points between
maximum and minimum.
(b) When desirable to vary the temperature, time and
weight, and, in order to provide for a uniform method of report-
ing results when variations are made, the samples shall be melted
and cooled in air as above directed. They shall then be
immersed in water or brine, as the case may require, for one
hour at the temperature desired. The following combinations
are suggested:

At 0° C. (32° F.) 200-g. weight, 60 seconds.

At 46°. 1 C. (115° F.) 50-g. weight, 5 seconds.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD TEST
FOR
LOSS ON HEATING OF OIL AND ASPHALTIC
COMPOUNDS.

Serial Designation: D 6-16.

This test is issued under the fixed designation D 6; the final num-
ber indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of revi-
sion, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1911; Revised, 1916.

The amount lost by oils and asphaltic compounds when

they are heated in an oven at a temperature of 163° C. (325° F.),
=*= 1°C, shall be determined by heating 50 g. of the water-free
substance contained in a flat-bottom dish, the inside dimensions
of which are approximately 55 mm. (2x% in.) in diameter, by
35 mm. (about If in.) deep (3-oz. Gill style ointment box, deep
pattern) for 5 hours.
The oven in which the substance is to be heated shall be
brought to the prescribed temperature before the sample is
introduced, and the temperature of the sample under test shall
be regarded as that of a similar quantity of the same material
immediately adjoining it in the oven, in which the bulb of a
standardized thermometer is immersed.
The oven may be either of circular or rectangular form and
the source of heat either gas or electricity.
(635)
636 Test for Loss on Heating of Asphalt.

The samples under test shall rest in the same relative posi-
tion in a single row upon a perforated circular shelf 24.8 cm.
(9.75 in.) in diameter, as shown in Fig. 1, suspended by a vertical
shaft midway in the oven, which is revolved by mechanical
means at the rate of from 5 to 6 revolutions per minute.

±/%i... Zjfr*i....&.,£<» The-

Sec+ion A-B.
9 Holes and Ribs?
Spaced Equally

Top Vi

Fig. 1. —Aluminum Shelf.

Note.
If additional periods of heating are desired, it is recommended that

they be made in successive increments of 5 hours each.

If the residue after heating is to be tested for penetration, the sample
should be thoroughly mixed by stirring until it is cool, and thereafter manipu-
lated in accordance with the directions of the Standard Test for Penetration
of Bituminous Materials (Serial Designation: D 5) of the American Society
for Testing Materials.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHODS
FOR
ROUTINE ANALYSIS OF WHITE PIGMENTS.

Serial Designation: D 34 - 17.

These methods are issued under the fixed designation D 34; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1915; Adopted, 1917.

I. METHOD FOR VERY SMALL AMOUNTS OF IRON.

Lead Pigments. —Treat sample with HNOs (l : l) in usual
manner, dilute with H 0,
add H2SO4 to precipitate bulk of lead
2

(not necessary to evaporate down) cool, filter, wash with 1 to

;

2 per cent of H2SO4, make filtrate just alkaline with NH 4 OH,

then just acid with dilute HNOs, determine iron colorimetrically
by the thiocyanate method, using same amounts of reagents in
preparing standards. sample contains insoluble matter, filter
If
out and wash with hot water till Pb-free, and to filtrate add
H 2 S04 and proceed as given. The insoluble is ignited, treated
with HF and H*S0 4 in usual manner, brought into solution (filter
out any BaS0 4 ), and added to nitrate from PbS0 4 If necessary,.

solution may be made up to volume and aliquots taken. Copper,

if present, shall be removed by precipitating the Fe with OH, NH 4

filtering, washing, redissolving Fe(OH)a and proceeding as

above.
Other Pigments. —Treat as above, omitting the addition of
H S0
s 4.

(637)
638 Methods for Analysis of White Pigments.

II. GENERAL METHOD.

True specific gravity shall be determined by Thompson's 1
method, or by means of a 50-cc. pyknometer, using c. p.
benzene and 10 to 20 g. of pigment.

Basic Carbonate of Lead.

Total Lead (Gravimetric). —Dissolve 1 g. in 20 cc. of HNOj
(1:1) in a covered beaker, heating till all C0 2 is expelled;
wash off cover, add 20 cc. of H 2 S0 4 (l:l) and evaporate to
fumes of S0 3 cool, add about 150 cc. of water and 150 cc. of
,

ethyl alcohol; let stand in cold water 1 hour, filter on a Gooch

crucible, wash with 95-per-cent ethyl alcohol, dry at 110° C,
and weigh PbS0 4 calculate to PbO or to basic carbonate. 1
;

Instead of determining the lead as sulfate, the sample may be

dissolved by boiling with acetic acid; then dilute to about 200 cc.
with water, make alkaline with 4 OH, NH
then acid with acetic
acid, heat to boiling and add 10 to 15 cc. of a 10-per-cent solu-
tion of potassium dichromate; heat till the yellow precipitate
assumes an orange color. Let settle and filter on a Gooch
crucible, washing by decantation with hot water till the washings
are colorless finally transferring all of the precipitate. Then
wash with 95-per-cent ethyl alcohol and then ether; dry at 1 10° C.
and weigh PbCr04. (Any insoluble matter should be filtered
out before precipitating the lead.)
—
Total Lead {Volumetric).- Dissolve 0.5 g. of sample in 10 cc.
of concentrated hydrochloric acid, boil till solution is effected,
cool, dilute to 40 cc, neutralize with ammonium hydroxide.
Add acetic acid until distinctly acid, dilute to 200 cc. with hot
water, boil and titrate with ammonium molybdate as follows:
Dissolve 4.25 g. of ammonium molybdate in water and
make up to one liter. To standardize this solution, dissolve
about 0.2 g. of pure lead foil in nitric acid (pure PbO or PbS0 4
may also be used), evaporate nearly to dryness, add 30 cc. of
water, then 5 cc. H
2 S0 4 (sp. gr. 1.84), cool, and filter. Drop
filter with PbS0 4 into a flask, add 10 cc. of concentrated HC1, boil

till completely disintegrated, add 15 cc. of HC1, 25 cc. of water,

1 Proceedings. Am. Soc. Test. Mats., Vol. XIII, p. 407 (1913).
• This method of weighing lead sulfate Is not accurate in the presence of calcium com-
pounds.
 Serial Designation: D 34-17. 639

and NH4OH till alkaline. Acidify with acetic acid, dilute to

200 with hot water and boil.
cc. Titrate, using an outside
indicator of one part of tannic acid in 300 parts of water.
It should be noted that when calcium is present, it forms
a more or less insoluble molybdate, and results are apt to be
high. With samples containing less than 10 per cent of lead, the
lead should be precipitated as PbS0 4 filtered, redissolved and ,

titrated as in the process of standardizing.

Carbon Dioxide. —Determine by evolution with dilute
hydrochloric acid absorbing in soda-lime or KOH solution.
Calculate C0 2 to PbC0 3, subtract PbO equivalent from total
PbO and calculate residual PbO to Pb(OH) 2 .

Acetic Acid} —Place 18 g. of the pigment in a 500-cc. flask,

add 40 cc. of sirupy phosphoric acid, 18 g. of zinc dust and
50 cc. of water. Connect to a straight Liebig condenser, apply
heat and distill down to a small bulk. Then pass steam into the
flask until it becomes about half full of condensed water, shut
off the steam and distill down to a small bulk this operation —
being conducted twice. To the total distillate which was
collected in a larger flask add 1 cc. of sirupy phosphoric acid,
connect to a Liebig condenser, using a spray trap, and distill
to a small —
volume about 20 cc. Pass steam through till about
200 water condense in the distillation flask, shut off steam
cc. of
and continue the distillation. These operations of direct and
steam distillations are conducted until 10 cc. of the distillate
require only one drop of 0.1 N
alkali to give a change in the
presence of phenolphthalein. Then titrate the total distillate
with 0. 1 N sodium hydroxide and phenolphthalein and calculate
the total acidity as acetic acid. It will be found convenient to
titrate each 200-cc. portion of the distillate as collected.
—
Weigh 50 g. of the sample into a 400-cc.
Metallic Lead. 1
beaker, add a little water and add slowly 60 cc. of 40-per-cent
acetic acid and after effervescence has ceased, boil on hot plate.
Fill the beaker with water, let settle, and decant the clear solu-
tion. To the residue add 100 cc. of a mixture of 360 cc. of strong
NH4OH, 1080 cc. of water, 2160 cc. of 80-per-cent acetic acid and
boil until all solution is complete. Fill beaker with water, let
settle and decant the clear solution. Collect residue on a watc
• Thompson '• Method. Journal, Soc. Chem. Ind., Vol. 24. p. 487 (1905).
640 Methods for Analysis of White Pigments.

glass, floating off everything but metallic lead. Dry and weigh.
Result X 2= percentage of metallic lead in sample.
The following method of A. N. Finn (unpublished) gives
total basicity of a pure white lead: Place 2 g. of pigment in an
evolution flask, add a little C0 2 -free water, connect up to the
separatory funnel and condenser (Knorr type), add through the
funnel, finally washingdown, 100 cc. of N/4 nitric acid, boil and
absorb the CO2 in soda-lime tube in usual manner (having
H2SO4 and CaCU drying tubes in train) and weigh. To the
solution in the evolution flask, add about 20 cc. of neutral
sodium-sulfate solution and titrate with N/4 sodium-hydroxide
solution (carbonate-free), using phenolphthalein. COa is

calculated to PbCC>3. The amount of N/4 acid corresponding to

the COa is calculated and deducted from the total amount of
N/4 acid neutralized by the sample and the difference calculated
to combined H 0,
2 from which Pb(OH) 2 is computed.

Basic Sulfate of Lead. 1

—
Determination of Total Lead. Dissolve 1 g. of the sample
in 100 cc. of a mixture consisting of 125 cc. of 80-per-cent acetic
acid, 95 cc. of NH OH 4 (sp. gr. 0.90) and 100 cc. of water. Add
the solution while hot and dilute with about 50 cc. of water, boil
until sample is dissolved. Dilute to 200 cc. and titrate with
standard ammonium-molybdate solution as described under
basic carbonate of lead. The ammonium-molybdate solution
contains about 8.67 g. per liter and is standardized against pure
lead foil, pure PbO or pure PbS0 4 .

—
Determination of Total Zinc. Boil 1 g. of the sample with
30cc. of water, 4 g. of NH
4 C1 and 6 cc. of concentrated HC1 (some

PbSO< or PbCl 2 may not dissolve). Dilute to 200 cc. with hot
water, add 2 cc. of a saturated solution of sodium thiosulfate

and with a standard solution of potassium ferrocyanide

titrate
in usual manner. Calculate the zinc to ZnO, 2 as follows:

1
J. A. Schaeffer's Method, Journal of Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, Vol. 6, p. 200
(1914), may
be used.
» It would probably be more accurate to remove total lead as PbS04 and titrate the tine

,n the filtrate after adding NH OH and HC1 in usual manner.

(
 Serial Designation: D 34- 17. 641

99. 7 a — percentage of ZnO found = percentage of lead constituents;

then

Molecular weight PbSO«

x Percentage of
j _ Percentage of percent-
Atomic weight Pb _ Pb found / Pb constituents age
( f

Molecular weight Pb SO«- Molecular weight PbO Pb0

"
Molecular weight PbO

/Molecular weight PbO y Percentage of \ _ Percentage of

V Atomic weight Pb
Molecular weight
Pb found )
PbO - Molecular
Pb constituents

weight PbSO«
_ ^ f
rc
^
present.
a *e
Q

Molecular weight PbSO<

Sulfur Dioxide. —Digest 2 g. of the sample with frequent

stirring in 100 cc. of freshly boiled cold water and 5 cc. of concen-
trated HC1; let stand 10 to 15 minutes, add an excess of 0.01-
normal iodine solution and titrate back with 0.01-normal sodium-
thiosulphate solution, using starch indicator. Report as SO s -

Run blank on reagents and make corrections. Or, the SO a may

be titrated directly with iodine.
Soluble Zinc Sulfate. —
Determine as under "Zinc-Lead and
Leaded Zincs."

Zinc-Lead and Leaded-Zincs (Ozlo White).

Total Lead and Zinc. —

Dissolve 1 g. of the sample by boiling
with 250 cc. of water and 20 cc. of concentrated s add 5 cc. HNO ,

of concentrated 2 S0 4 and H evaporate ,

to copious fumes of S0 8 ;

cool, add 250 cc. of water, let stand cold 1 to 2 hours, filter on
Gooch crucible, wash with 1-per-cent 2 S0 4 ignite, andH weigh as
,

PbS0 4 Report
. as PbS0 4 The PbS0 4 .may be filtered on paper
and then dissolved and titrated with ammonium-molybdate
solution as described under basic carbonate of lead. Make
filtrate from PbS0 4 alkaline with 4 OH, then NH
acid with HC1,
add 3 cc. of concentrated HC1, heat to nearly boiling, and titrate
the total zinc with potassium-ferrocyanide solution using
uranium-acetate solution as an outside indicator and calculate

• Thli figure (99.70) Is the average total percentage of PbSO«, PbO and ZnO, found In 270
total analyse* of basic lead sulfate.
642 Methods for Analysis of White Pigments.

to ZnO. (Iron, copper, or other interfering substances should

first be removed as described by Low.)
Sulfates other than Barium Sulfate. Treat 0.5 g. of the —
sample with 5 cc. of water, 3 g. of 4 C1 and 5 cc. of HC1 NH
saturated with bromine; digest (covered) on steam bath about 15
minutes, add 25 cc. of water, neutralize with dry Na 2 C0 3 and ,

add about 2 g. more, boil 10 to 15 minutes; let settle, dilute with

hot water, filter and wash with hot water; redissolve in HC1,
reprecipitate as above and wash thoroughly with hot water;
acidify united filtrates with HC1, adding a slight excess; boil
and add slight excess of 10-per-cent barium-chloride solution.
Let stand on steam bath 1 hour, filter, wash with hot water,
ignite, and weigh BaS0 4 Calculate to S0 8 (includes S0 3 formed
.

from SO2). Or, dissolve 0.5 g. of the sample in 25 cc. of water,

10 cc. of NH4OH (sp. gr. 0.90) and HC1 in slight excess; dilute
to about 150 cc. with water and add a piece of aluminum foil
which should about cover the bottom of the beaker this held —
on bottom by means of a stirring rod. Heat gently till all lead
is precipitated, decant through a filter, pressing the lead sponge

with a flattened rod, and washing with hot water. Add to the
filtrate a little pure bromine water, boil until bromine is expelled,
add 15 cc. of 10-per-cent barium-chloride solution, let stand on
steam bath one hour, filter, wash with hot water, ignite and
weigh as BaS0 4 (any SrS0 4 present is not decomposed in this
method) }
Soluble Zinc Sulfate. —
Heat nearly to boiling 2 g. of the
sample with 150 cc. of water and 50 cc. of 95-per-cent alcohol
for 30 minutes, filter, and wash with a mixture of alcohol and
water (1:3). Heat filtrate to boiling and expel most of the
alcohol; then determine S0 3 by usual method of precipitation
with BaCU. Calculate to ZnS0 4 and to SOs.
—
Note. If sample contains Ca or Mg, the Pb and Zn should be separated
by precipitation with H 2 S after dissolving in HC1, making alkaline with NH4OH
and acid with acetic acid. The PbS+ZnS is dissolved in dilute HNOj and
the Pb and Zn determined as above.

—
Sulfur Dioxide. Determine as under "Basic Sulfate of
Lead" or "Zinc Oxide."
1 The solubility of BaSOj is Increased by the presence of aluminium chloride. See J. W.
MeUor, "A Treatise on Quantitative Inorganic Analysis." p. 615.
 Serial Designation: D 34-17. 643

Zinc Oxide.
Total Zinc. —Dissolve 0.25 to 0.3 g. in 10 cc. of concentrated
HC1 and 20 cc. of H 0,
2 make alkaline with NH OH,4 then acid
with HC1, add 3 cc. more of concentrated HC1, dilute to about
H
250 cc. with 2 0, heat nearly to boiling and titrate with standard
potassium-ferrocyanide solution as described by Low. 1 Report
as ZnO (includes Cd). Iron, copper or other interfering sub-
stances should be'first removed as described by Low.
—
Total Soluble Sulfur. 2 Moisten a 10-g. sample with water,
add a few drops of bromine and then concentrated HC1, boil
to expel bromine, filter from any insoluble and wash with hot
water. Make alkaline with 4 OH, NH
then just slightly acid
with HC1, heat to boiling and add about 15 cc. of hot barium-
chloride solution. Let stand several hours (over night), filter
on a weighed Gooch crucible, wash well with hot water, dry,
ignite for five minutes, cool and weigh as BaS0 4 Calculate to S. .

—
Sulfur Dioxide. 2 Mix 5 g. of sample with 50 cc. of warm
(freshly boiled and then partly cooled) water to an emulsion and
pour into a glass-stoppered flask containing 18 cc. of HC1 and
exactly 25 cc. of 0.1-normal iodine solution, stopper and shake
until all the oxide is dissolved. Titrate the excess of iodine as
rapidly as possible with 0.1-normal sodium-thiosulfate solu-
tion. Calculate to SO2.
Soluble Zinc Sulfate. —Determine as under "Zinc-Lead and
Leaded-Zincs."

Lithopone.
PONOLITH, JERSEY LILY WHITE, BECTON WHITE,
CHARLTON WHITE, ORR'S WHITE.
—
and Total Zinc. Take 1 g. of the sample in a
Insoluble
200-cc. beaker, add 10 cc. of concentrated HC1, mix, and add
in small portions about 1 g. of KCIO3, then heat on the steam
bath unlil about half of the liqu d is evaporated. Dilute with
H2 0, add 5 cc. of dilute H 2 S0 4 (1:10); boil, let settle, filter,
wash, ignite, cool, and weigh the insoluble which should be only
BaS0 4 make a qualitative examination for alumina and silica.
;

1 Low, "Technical Methods of Ore Analysis."

• Method of G. Rl«g.
644 Methods for Analysis of White Pigments.

The examined under the microscope for

insoluble should be
the presence of natural Sample may also
crysallin barytes.
be examined direct. Make nitrate from insoluble alkaline with
NH4OH, acid with HC1, add 3 cc. of concentrated HC1, dilute
to about 250 cc. with H.-0, heat nearly to boiling and titrate
with K4Fe(CN) 6 solution as under zinc white. Calculate to Zn.
—
Zinc Oxide. Treat a 4-g. sample of the lithopone for 4
hours with 200 cc. of 1-per-cent acetic acid at room tempera-
ture, stirring occasionally. Filter by suction on a double filter

paper and wash with cold water; add to the clear nitrate 13 cc.
of concentrated 4 OH, NH
neutralize with HC1 and then add
3 cc. of concentrated HC1 in excess. Heat to boiling and titrate
with K 4 Fe(CN) 6 using uranium-acetate solution as an outside
,

indicator. Calculate to ZnO.

Calculate this result to Zn,
subtract from total Zn, and calculate the difference to ZnS.
(Any ZnC0 3 or ZnS0 4 is included in the ZnO.)
—
Zinc Sulfide. 1 Place 0.5 g. of pigment in evolution flask
with about 10 g. of "feathered" or mossy zinc, add 50 cc. of
water; insert the stopper carrying a separatory funnel and an
exit tube. Run in 50 cc. of concentrated HC1 from the funnel,
having previously connected the exit tube to two absorption
flasks in series; first flask contains 100 cc. of alkaline lead-
nitrate solution, second flask, 50 cc. of same as a safety device.
After all of the acid has run into the evolution flask, heat slowly,
finally boiling until the first appearance of steam in the first
absorption flask; disconnect, let the lead sulfide settle, filter,

wash with cold water, then with hot water till neutral to litmus
paper and washings give no test for lead.* The PbS precipitate
is dissolved in hot, dilute 3 HN0
evaporated to fumes with
,

H2SO4 and finally weighed as PbS0 4 Calculate PbS or PbSO< .

to ZnS.
The alkaline lead solution is made as follows: Into 100
cc. of KOH solution (56 g. in 140 cc. of H 0) pour a saturated
2

solution of lead nitrate (250 g. in 500 cc. of H 0) until the pre-

2

cipitate ceases to redissolve, stirring constantly while mixing.

About 3 volumes of the lead solution will be required for one of
the alkali.

• Evolution Method of W. G. Scott, "White Paints and Painting Material," p. 257; see
also Blair, "Chemical Analysis of Iron."
 Serial Designation: D 34-17. 645

Instead of absorbing the evolved H S in alkaline lead-nitrate

2

solution, a solution of 8 g. of cadmium chloride in 250 cc. of water

and 150 cc. of NH OH 4 (sp. gr. 0.90) may be used. The CdS
precipitate may be filtered on a weighed Gooch, washed with
water containing a little NH4 OH, dried at 100° C, and weighed.
Calculate to ZnS. It is better to filter the CdS on a small filter
and wash as above, then place filter and precipitate in a beaker
and dissolve in HC1 and KC10 3 (keeping at room temperature
at first), filter out any paper pulp or insoluble matter; make
filtrate alkaline NH4 OH, then just acid with HC1, heat to
with
boiling and precipitate with BaClj in usual manner. Filter,
wash, ignite, and weigh BaS04 Calculate to ZnS. .

For very rapid work the contents of the absorption flask,

after all H 2 S has been absorbed, may be washed into a vessel
with cold water and diluted to about one- liter, acidified with
concentrated HC1 and titrated with standard iodine solution,
using starch indicator. (The precipitate should be completely
dissolved.) The iodine solution is prepared by dissolving about
12.7 g. of pure resublimed iodine and 18 g. of KI in a little water
and then diluting to one liter.

Calcium Pigments,
whiting, paris white, spanish white, and chalk.
Make a qualitative examination first; should contain only
small amounts of insoluble matter (siliceous), iron, aluminum,
sulfur, water or magnesium, and should be approximately 95
per cent CaCOj.
Total Soluble Lime. 1 —Weigh out 0.75 g. of the pigment into
a small crucible, ignite cautiously to dull redness to destroy
organic matter, cool, transfer to a 400-cc. beaker, add 20 cc. of

H 0, cover, then add 15

2 cc. of concentrated HC1 and 3 or 4 drops
of concentrated HN0 8 , and boil till all the soluble matter is

dissolved and all the C0 2 expelled. Wash off and remove the
cover, dilute to about 150 cc. with freshly boiled H 2 0, heat to
and add dilute NILjOH
boiling (sp. gr. 0.96) carefully until a slight
permanent precipitate forms. Heat to boiling and add 10 cc.

1
Meade, "Portland Cement."
646 Methods for Analysis of White Pigments.

of a 10-per-cent solution of oxalic acid; stir until the oxides

of iron and aluminum are entirely dissolved and only a slight
precipitate of calcium oxalate remains. Now add 200 cc. of
boiling H 2 and sufficient saturated solution of ammonium
oxalate (20 to 25 cc.) to precipitate the lime. Boil and stir for a
few moments, remove from the heat, let settle and filter on an
11-cm. filter. Wash 10 times with 10-to-15-cc. portions of hot
water. Place beaker in which precipitation was made under the
funnel, pierce apex of filter with stirring rod and wash precipitate
into beaker with hot water, pour warm dilute 2 S0 4 (1:4) H
through paper and wash a few times; add about 30 cc. of the
dilute H
2 S0 4 (1:4), dilute to about 250 cc, heat to 90° C. and

titrate at once with standard KMn0 4 solution (solution should

not be below 60° C. when end-point is reached). The KMnO<
is best standardized against Bureau of Standards sodium oxalate. 1

Calculate to CaO and CaC0 3 .

Mixed Calcium and Magnesium Carbonates. 2 Weigh 1 g. —

of the finely powdered sample into a small porcelain dish, add
25 cc. of normal HC1, cover with a watch glass, and when efferves-
cence has ceased, heat to boiling. Cool and titrate with normal
NaOH solution, using methyl orange as indicator.
The calculation is as follows:
One gram CaO = 35.7 cc. of normal acid. CaO X 1.7844 =
CaC0 3 Subtract number of cubic centimeters of NaOH
.

required from 25, result gives number of cubic centimeters of

normal acid corresponding to the CaC0 3 -fMgC0 3 Multiply .

the weight of CaO in 1 g. of sample (as found in preceding

section on total soluble lime) by 35.7; product gives number of
cubic centimeters of normal acid corresponding to the CaO
present; subtract from total number of cubic centimeters of
acid required by CaC0 3 +MgC0 3 and multiply result by 0.042,
obtaining weight of MgC0 3 in 1 g. of sample. The MgCOj
determined by this process should not differ more than 0.25 per
cent from that obtained by more elaborate methods. It is to
be noted that this method is a measure of the total alkalinity,
and if Ca or Mg are present in other forms than carbonate, a
complete analysis would be necessary to give percentages of
CaC0 3 and MgCO,.
1 Circular No. 40. Bureau of Standards.
* J. W. Mellor, "A Treatise on Quantitative Inorganic An*ly«U," p. 522.
 "

Serial Designation: D 34-17. 647

Instead of the above, Newberry's 1 method for the simulta-

neous determination of calcium and magnesium carbonates may
be used.

GYPSUM, TERRA ALBA, PLASTER OF PARIS.

Combined Water and Moisture. —Heat 1 g. of the sample in a
covered porcelain crucible on an asbestos plate for 15 minutes,
then heat bottom of crucible dull red for 10 minutes over a
Bunsen burner, remove cover and heat for 30 to 40 minutes at a
slightly lower temperature. Cool and weigh rapidly. Repeat
to constant weight.
Combined water and moisture may also be determined by
heating in an air bath at 200° C. to constant weight.
Insoluble Matter. —
Boil 2 to 3 g. of the sample with 20 cc.
of concentrated HC1, a few drops
of 3 HN0
and about 50 cc. of ,

water; evaporate to dryness, boil residue repeatedly with 10-

per-cent HC1, decanting through a filter; finally transfer to the
filter, wash with hot water, ignite and weigh insoluble matter;

test for BaSO*. Make a qualitative examination of the filtrate

from the insoluble matter to determine if Al, Fe, or Mg are present
in abnormal amounts (should be mainly Ca and SO3). Test a
separate portion of the sample for CO2; if desired determine as
under "Basic Carbonate of Lead."

Barium Pigments,
barytes or barite, " blanc flxe."
Examine the sample microscopically
to determine uniformity
of grinding, sizeand angularity of particles, crystallin or amor-
phous. The sample should be at least 95 per cent BaSC>4.
—
Loss on Ignition. Ignite 1 g. of the sample for 30 minutes.
Loss may be due to organic matter, moisture, combined water
and COj (and S0 3 from CaSO< if present). If loss is appreciable,
test for COj.
Soluble and Insoluble Matter. —Boil 1 g. with HC1 (1:3),
filter, wash with hot water, ignite, and weigh insoluble matter.
• Meade, "Portland Cement"; Mellor, "A Treatise on Quantitative Inorganic Analysis,
p. 322; C*mtnl Engiruerint Ntws. Vol. 15, p. 35 (1903).
648 Methods for Analysis of White Pigments.

This may be treated with H2SO4 and HF in usual manner for

S1O2. In the absence of AI2O3 (from silicates) residue is con-
sidered as BaS0 4. Make qualitative tests of filtrate from the
insoluble for Al, Fe, Ca, Mg, S0 8 . Test a separate portion of
sample qualitatively for COt.

Silica Pigments.

silica or silex.
Silica or silex should be practically pure SiOj. A qualitative
examination will suffice in most cases with a determination of the
losson treating 1 g. of sample with HjSO< and HF in usual
manner.

china clay and asbestine.

A qualitative analysis of China clay to determine if essen-
tially hydrous aluminium silicate is generally all of the chemical
tests necessary. Color, fineness, etc., are more important than
analysis.
Asbestine is tested qualitatively to prove that material is as
represented. '
Color, fineness, etc., are important. Asbestine
should be examined under the microscope to note whether it is

fibrous or talcose and whether silica or China clay are admixed.

Samples of known origin should be used here as a guide for
comparison.
 .

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHODS
FOR
ROUTINE ANALYSIS OF DRY RED LEAD

Serial Designation: D 49-18.

These methods are issued under the fixed designation D 49; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1917; Adopted, 1918.

1 The approximate formula of Red Lead is Pb 3 4 (probably

Pb0 2 -2PbO).
Specific Gravity.

2. True specific gravity shall be determined by Thompson's Specific Gravity.

method, or by means of a 50-cc. pyknometer, using c p. benzine

1

and 20 g. of pigment.

. Moisture.
3. Dry 2 g. of the sample for 2 hours at 105° C. The loss Moisture,
in weight is considered as moisture.

Organic Color.
4. Boil 2 g. of the sample with 25 cc. of 95-per-cent ethyl Organic Color,

alcohol, let settle, decant off the supernatant liquid; boil residue
with water, decant as before and boil residue with very dilute
i Proceeding}. Am. Soc. Test. Mats.. Vol. XIII. p. 407 (1913).

(649)
 650 Methods for Analysis of Red Lead.

NH4OH. If either the alcohol, water or NH OH

4 is colored,
organic coloring matter is indicated.

Total Lead and Insoluble Matter.

Total Lead and 5. Treat 1 g. of the sample with 15
3 (1:1) and cc. of HN0
insoluble Matter.
su ffi c i ent H 2 2 to dissolve all Pb0 on
any insoluble
2 warming. If
matter is present, add 25 cc. of water, boil, filter and wash
with hot water. The insoluble matter contains free Si0 2 and
should be examined for BaS0 4 and silicates, if appreciable. To the
original solution or filtrate from insoluble, add 20 cc. of concen-
trated H 2 S0 4 and evaporate to S0 3 fumes; cool, add 150 cc. of
water and 150 cc. of 95-per-cent ethyl alcohol, let stand cold
2 hours, filter on a Gooch crucible, wash with 95-per-cent alcohol,
dry at 105 to 110° C. and weigh as PbS0 4 Calculate to PbO. .

Red lead is rarely adulterated, but should sample contain soluble

barium compounds, the PbS04 obtained above will contain
BaS0 4 .In this case, digest above precipitate with acid
ammonium-acetate solution, filter off BaS0 4; wash, ignite and
weigh BaS0 4 Calculate to BaO or BaC0 3
. In filtrate, deter- .

mine the lead as PbS04 or PbCr0 4 If sample contains significant

.

amounts of calcium or magnesium, the HN0 3-H 2 2 solution

is boiled till all lead is converted into nitrate and then the
lead is determined as PbCr0 4 .

If calcium and magnesium are to be determined, proceed

as follows: Precipitate the lead as sulfide from a slightly acid
(HC1) solution, dissolve the PbS in hot dilute HN0 3 and deter-
mine the lead as sulfate. Boil the filtrates from the PbS to
expel H 2 S, add a little bromine water to oxidize iron (if present),
boil to expel bromine, and then add 4 OH in slight excess.NH
Filter off any precipitate of Fe(OH) 3 -f-x\l(OH) 3 wash with ;

hot water. (If appreciable, redissolve in hot dilute HC1 and

reprecipitate with 4 OH, NH

ignite and weigh Fe2 3 +Al2 3 .)
Manganese, if present, can be precipitated by adding bromine
and NH 4 OH and warming; filter, wash with hot water, ignite

and weigh as Mn 3 4 Unite all of the filtrates, make slightly

.

acid with acetic acid, heat to boiling and pass H 2 S into the hot
solution till saturated (20 to 30 minutes); add 5 g. of 4 C1 NH
and let stand 5 hours; filter off any ZnS, wash with H2 S water,
dissolve the ZnS in hot dilute HC1 and determine the zinc by
 :

Serial Designation: D 49-18. 651

titration with K Fe(CN)

4 6. Or, boil off the H S,
2 filter out any
separated sulfur and determine the zinc as Zn 2 P 2 7 Calcium .

may be determined in the filtrate from the ZnS by expelling

HS2 and then adding NH 4 OH and ammonium oxalate in the
usual manner. Titrate with KMn0 4 In the filtrate from calcium .

determine magnesium in the usual manner by precipitating with

sodium-phosphate solution, finally weighing as Mg2 P 2 7 .

Lead Peroxide (Pb0 2 ) and True Red Lead (Pb 3 4 ).

(Method of Diehl 1 modified by Topf 1 —not applicable when substances

are present, other than oxides of lead, that liberate iodine under conditions
given.)

6. Weigh 1 g. of finely ground sample into a 200-cc. Erlen- Lead Peroxide

1'
rneyer flask, add a few drops of distilled water and rub the Lead."
mixture to a smooth paste with a glass rod flattened on end.
Mix in a small beaker 30 g. of c. p. "Tested Purity" crystallized
sodium acetate, 2.4 g. of c. p. KI, 10 cc. of water and 10 cc. of
50-per-cent acetic acid; stir until all is liquid, warming gently;
if necessary add 2 to 3 cc. of water, cool to room temperature
and pour into the Rub with the
flask containing the red lead.
glass rod until nearly all the red lead has been dissolved; add
30 cc. of water containing 5 or 6 g. of sodium acetate, and titrate
at once with decinormal sodium thiosulfate, adding the latter
rather slowly and keeping the liquid constantly in motion by
whirling the flask. When the solution has become light yellow,
rub any undissolved particles up with the rod until free iodine
no longer forms, wash off rod, add the sodium-thiosulfate solu-
tion pale yellow, add starch solution and titrate until
until
colorless, add decinormal iodine solution until blue color is
just restored and subtract the amount used from the volume
of sodium thiosulfate that had been added.
Calculation. —The iodine value of the sodium-thiosulfate
solution multiplied by 0.94193 =Pb0 2 ; the iodine value multi-
plied by 2.69973 =Pb 8 4; the PbOj value multiplied by
2.86616 = Pb s O«.
The sodium-thiosulfate solution and the starch solution
shall be prepared as follow s

1
Dinil. poly I. Jour.. Vol. 246. p. 196.
» Ztilschrift fOr anolytische Chtmie. Vol. 26, p. 296.
 652 Methods for Analysis of Red Lead.

Sodium-Thiosulfate Solution (decinormal) .

—Dissolve 24.83 g.
of c.sodium thiosulfate, freshly pulverized and dried between
p.
filter paper, and dilute with water to 1 liter at the temperature

at which the titrations are to be made. The solution is best made

with well-boiled water free from CO2, or let stand 8 to 14 days
before standardizing. Standardize with pure, re-sublimed
iodine, as described in Treadwell-Hall, "Analytical Chemistry,"
Vol. II, p. 602 (1910), and also against pure potassium iodate;
the two methods of standardization should agree within 0.1 per
cent on iodine value.
Starch Solution. — Stir up 2 to 3 g. of potato starch with
100 cc. of 1-per-cent salicylic-acid solution, and boil the mixture
till starch is practically dissolved, then dilute to 1 liter,
1
or as
2
per Lord.

Determination of Zinc.
Zinc. 7. If in appreciable amount, evaporate off the alcohol from
the filtrate from total lead, make alkaline with NH OH, 4 then
acid with HC1, add 3 cc. more
HC1, dilute to
of concentrated
about 250 cc. with water, heat nearly to boiling and titrate with
standard K2Fe(CN) 6 solution as described by Low. 3 Report
as ZnO (includes cadium). Iron, copper or other interfering
substances should first be removed as described by Low.

Water-Soluble.
Water-Soluble. 8. Digest 10 g. of sample with 200 cc. of hot water on steam

bath for 1 hour; filter on an 11-cm. S. & S. blue-ribbon paper

and wash with hot water till no residue is left on evaporating
a few drops of the washings. Evaporate filtrate to dryness on
steam bath in a weighed dish, dry 30 minutes at 105° C, cool
and weigh. Take up with water and if alkaline, titrate with
tenth normal acid and methyl orange; calculate to Na2C0 3 .

Another lot of water-soluble matter is tested for nitrates,

nitrites, carbonates, sulfates, sodium and lead.

1 —
Lead Peroxide. If sample contains an appreciable amount of nitrite (nitrate has no
effect on method), leach out water-soluble matter as below, dry residue and determine PbOi
as above, calculating to basis of original sample.
•"Notes on Metallurgical Analysis," p. 103 (1903).
•Low, "Technical Methods of Ore Analysis."
 Serial Designation: D 49-18. 653

Total Silica.

9. Digest 5 g. of the sample in a covered casserole with 5 cc. Total Silica,

of HC1 and 15 cc. of HN0

Evaporate to dryness to
3 (1 : l).

dehydrate. Cool, treat with hot water and HN0 3 boil, filter, ,

wash with hot acid ammonium-acetate solution, then dilute

HC1 and finally hot water. Ignite and weigh as Si0 2 The .

residue may be treated with H2SO4 and HF in cases of doubt

as to purity.

Carbon Dioxide.
10. Determine carbon dioxide by the evolution method, using Carbon Dioxide,
dilute HC1 and stannous chloride.

Determination of Soluble Sulfate.

11. Sulfates other than Barium Sulfate. Treat 0.5 g. of the — Soluble Sulfate,
sample with 5 cc. of water, 3 g. of NH4CI and 5 cc. of HC1
saturated with bromine; digest (covered) on steam bath about
15 minutes, add 25 cc. of water, neutralize with dry Na 2 C0 3 ,

and add about 2 g. more, boil 10 to 15 minutes; let settle, dilute

with hot water, filter and wash with hot water; redissolve in
HC1, reprecipitate as above and wash thoroughly with hot
water; acidify united filtrates with HC1, adding a slight excess;
boil and add slight excess of 10-per-cent BaCl2 solution. Let
stand on steam bath 1 hour, filter, wash with hot water, ignite,
and weigh BaS0 4 Calculate to S0 3 (includes S0 3 formed from
.

S0 2 ).
Or, dissolve 0.5 g. of the sample in 25 cc. of water, 10 cc.
of NH4OH and HC1 in slight excess; dilute to
(sp. gr. 0.90)
about 150 cc. with water and add a piece of aluminum foil
which should about cover the bottom of the beaker this held —
on bottom by means of a stirring rod. Heat gently till all lead
is precipitated, decant through a filter, pressing the lead sponge

with a flattened rod, and washing with hot water. Add to the
a little pure bromine water, boil until bromine is expelled,
filtrate

add 15 cc. of 10-per-cent BaCl 2 solution, let stand on steam

bath one hour, filter, wash with hot water, ignite and weigh as
BaS0 4 (any SrS0 4 present is not decomposed in this method). 1

1
The solubility of BaSO« is increased by the presence of aluminum chloride. See
J. W. Mellor, "A Treatise on Quantitative Inorganic Analysis." p. 615.
 654 Methods for Analysis of Red Lead.

Iron Oxide.
iron Oxide. 12. Determine iron oxide by Schaeffer's modification of 1

Thomson's colorimetric method; or, in a large beaker, treat

20 g. of the sample with 20 cc. of water, 20 cc. of HN0 3 (sp. gr.
1.4) and 3 cc. of formaldehyde solution. Warm till all Pb0 2

is dissolved, dilute with water, warm, filter off insoluble and

wash with hot water. Ignite filter and insoluble, evaporate
with H 2 S0 4 and HF. To filtrate from insoluble add 14 cc. of
H2SO4 (l l), filter off PbS0 4 and wash. Dissolve residue from
: ,

HF and H2 S0 4 in H2 S0 4 and add to filtrate from PbS0 4 dilute ;

to 500 cc. and determine iron colorimetrically in an aliquot,

using same amounts of HN0 3 H 2 S0 4 and formaldehyde in com-
,

parison solution. 2 Calculate to Fe 2 3 .

1 Journal of Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, Vol. 4, p. 659 (1912).

» Lunge-Berl, " Chemisch-technische Untersuchungs-Methoden," Bd. 2, S. 95, 6th Ed.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHODS
FOR
ROUTINE ANALYSIS OF YELLOW, ORANGE, RED,
AND BROWN PIGMENTS CONTAINING
IRON AND MANGANESE.

Serial Designation: D 50-18.

These methods are issued under the fixed designation D50; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1917; Adopted, 1918.

GENERAL METHODS.
Specific Gravity.

1. True be determined by Thompson's

specific gravity shall Specific Gravity.

method, or by means of a 50-cc. pyknometer, using c. p. benzine

1

and 10 to 20 g. of pigment.

Tinting Strength. 2
2. The be compared with a carefully
colors should always Tinting strength,

selected standard. Weigh out accurately from 0.02 to 0.05 g. of

color, place on a large glass plate, add 12 drops of bleached lin-
seed oil, 3 and rub up with a flat-bottom glass pestle or muller;
then add 1 g. of pure ZnO, and grind with a circular motion 50
• Proceedings, Am. Soc. Test. Mats.. Vol. XIII. p. 407 (1913).
' Holley, "Analysis of Paint and Varnish Products," 1912, p. 126.
• The use of "oxidized" oil should be avoided (oil that has become "fatty" by standing
around In a can or bottle). Poppy-oil could be used but it is quite as necessary to have it
reasonably fresh as when linseed oil U used. In either case " stringy" pastes are not reliable.

(655)
 656 Methods for Analysis of Colored Pigments.

times; gather up with a sharp-edge spatula and grind out twice

more in like manner, giving the pestle a uniform pressure. Next
weigh out a similar amount of the standard, and treat in exactly
the same manner as described above. Transfer portions of each
paste to a microscope slide, quite close together, and then draw a
palette knife across both samples so as to make them meet in a
line (differences in tint are then easily seen). Compare the tints
as shown on both sides of the glass. The amount of pigment
used will vary with the tinting strength, but generally it suffices
to take about 0.02 g. of the reds and about 0.05 g. of the ochers.
If it is desired to express quantitatively the tinting strength
of the pigment, consider the standard pigment as having a
tinting strength of 100, and then vary the amount of the standard
pigment until the tints are matched.
let the amount of standard pigment for 100 strength test be
For example,
0.02 g.(= A). Vary this amount in units of 5 per cent, thus 0.019 or 0.021.
Let the amount taken to match a given strength = B, then
B
— xioo
A
equals the tinting strength of the sample to be tested.
If the tone varies it may be difficult to make this measurement.

Added Coloring Matter.

Added Coloring 3. Test the pigment successively with hot water, 95-per-cent
ethyl alcohol, alcoholicNaOH or KOH
and acetic acid. Chloro-
form, NaOH,
H2SO4, HCl-stannous chloride, and other reagents
may be tried. 1 The presence of an organic color may often be
noted by the characteristic odor given off on ignition.

METHODS FOR ANALYSIS OF INDIAN REDS, RED OXIDES

(PRINCE'S METALLIC, TUSCAN RED).
LOSS AT 100° C.
Loss at 100 8 C. 4. Heat 2 g. in a steam- jacketed oven at atmospheric pressure
for three hours, or to constant weight.

1
For Coal-Tar Colors in Aniline Lakes," (English transla-
details consult Zerr, "Tests for
tion by C
Mayer); Schultz and Julius, "A Systematic Survey of the Organic Coloring
Matters;" Hall. "The Chemistry of Paints and Paint Vehicles;" and Mulliken, "Identification
of Pure Organic Compounds." Commercial Dyestuffs, Vol. III.
 Serial Designation: D 50-18. 657

Loss on Ignition.
5. Ignite a portion in a covered porcelain crucible to constant Loss on ignition,

weight. may include combined water, C0 2 organic matter,

This ,

and some S0 if much CaS0 4 is present. C0 2 may be determined

3

on a separate portion of the sample if desired. 1

Free Acid or Alkali.

6. Boil 10 g. of sample with 100 cc. of water; filter and wash. Free Acid or

Test nitrate with litmus paper; if acid, titrate with standard

alkali and methyl orange and calculate to the equivalent of
H2SO4. If alkaline, titrate with acid and calculate to the equiva-
lent of Na 2 0. Test nitrate for alkali salts and alkaline earths.

Added Coloring Matter.

7. Test as under "General Methods." Added Coloring
Matter.

Insoluble, Iron Oxdje, Etc.

8. Digest 2.5 g. of the sample (previously roasted at a low insoluble,
ron
temperature if much organic matter is present; if very low in car-
bonaceous matter a little KC10 3 or NaC10 3 may be used in effect-
ing solution) with 25 cc. of HC1 (adding a little 3 or chlorate, HN0
if not already added), wash off cover, and evaporate to dryness.

Take up with HC1 and water, filter, wash with dilute HC1 and
cold water. Make the filtrate up to 500 cc, mix, and examine as
below. 2 Ignite the residue and weigh as "insoluble matter"; 8
if this contains BaS0 4 it may be determined by fusing with six
times its weight of Na C02 3 ,
cooling, digesting with hot water,
filtering, and washing the residue with hot water until free of
sulfate.
Remove nitrate and place beaker used for the digestion
underneath the funnel, pierce the filter with the glass rod, and
wash the residue with a little water into the beaker; then pour
hot dilute HC1 (l l) over paper, and finally wash with hot
:

water. If necessary add more HC1 to the beaker to dissolve

1
It is it is known that attacking substances arc absent.
Inadvisable to use platinum unless
• For more exact work should be evaporated to dryness and SiOi removed.
this Citrate
• If the insoluble contains appreciable amounts of Fe it will be necessary to fuse It with

NatCOi or KjSiOt to determine toUil Pe In luuople*.

 658 Methods for Analysis or Colored Pigments.

the BaC0 3 ; heat to boiling, add dilute H S0

2 4 in slight excess,
let stand about one hour on steam bath; filter, wash, dry,
ignite, and weigh BaS0 4 . (This subtracted from total insoluble
will give "insoluble silicious matter," if it is desired to so report.)
If it is desirable to analyze the insoluble silicious matter, this
can be done by the usual methods for silicate analysis, but the
results should be reported as a separate analysis.
For the determination of iron place 100 cc. of the first filtrate
in a flask, add about 3 g. of granulated zinc, put a funnel into
the neck of the flask, heat when the action slackens; if basic
salts separate out add a few drops of HC1. When the reduction
is complete, add 30 cc. of 2 S0 4 (l H
2), and as soon as the :

residual zinc is dissolved, wash down the funnel inside and out
and the neck of the flask with a fine jet of water, filling the
flask (1000 cc.) about two-thirds full, cool in water, add 10 cc.
of "titrating solution" (made by dissolving 160 g. of manganese
sulfate in water, diluting to 1750 cc, adding 330 cc. of 3 P0 4 H ,

sp. gr. 1.72, and 320 cc. of concentrated H 2 S0 4 ), and titrate with
KMn0 4 (5.659 g. per liter) that has been standardized against
Bureau of Standards sodium oxalate. Run a blank on the zinc,
correct for "same and calculate total iron as Fe 2 3 Instead of .

adding the zinc to the solution, the reduction may be effected

in a zinc reductor. 1
The Fe2 3 may also be determined by the K 2 Cr8 07 method.'

Lime.

Lime. 9. Dilute an aliquot of 100 cc. of the original solution to about

200 cc, add 10 cc of HC1, make alkaline with 4 OH, add 2 HN
or 3 cc. of bromine water, and boil till excess of NH 3 is expelled.
Let settle,wash by decantation, redissolve in HC1, and reprecipi-
tate with NH 4 OH and bromine water. (Precipitate = Fe20 3 .

A12 3 Ti0 2 P2O5

. Mn0 2 .) This precipitate may be ignited and
. .

weighed if desired.
To the combined filtrates add a few drops of NH OH, 4 heat
to boiling, and add an excess of saturated ammonium-oxalate
solution; continue the boiling until the precipitate becomes

1 Lord and Demorest, "Metallurgical Analysis." 1913. pp. 28-29.

*lbid., pp. 21-26.
 Serial Designation: D 50 -18. 659

granular, let stand about 30 minutes, filter, and wash with hot
water till free of ammonium oxalate; 1 place beaker in which
precipitation was made under the funnel, pierce apex of filter
with stirring rod and wash precipitate into beaker with hot
water, pour warm dilute 2 S0 4 (1:4) through paper and wash H
a few times; add about 30 cc. of 2 S0 4 (l 4), dilute to about H :

250 cc, heat to 90° C. and titrate at once with standard 4 KMn0
solution (solution should not be below 60° C. when end-point is
reached). Calculate to CaO. (The Fe value of KMn0 X 0.5024

= CaO.) The calcium-oxalate precipitate may be ignited to

constant weight as CaO. If desired, magnesia may be deter-
mined as Mg P20
2 7 in the usual manner in the filtrate from the
calcium oxalate. 2

Soluble Sulfates.

10. Treat 1 g.
3
of the pigment (roasted gently if much organic Soluble Suifatea.

matter is add about

present) with 30 cc. of HC1, boil 10 minutes,
50 cc. of water, boil, filter, and wash with hot water. Heat the
solution to boiling, add NH 4 OH, filter and wash a few times with
hot water; dissolve precipitate in hot dilute HC1 and reprecipitate
with NH4OH, wash well with hot water. Render united filtrates
just distinctly acid with HC1, boil, add by drops with stirring
excess of 10-per-cent BaCl 2 solution, boil about 10 minutes, filter
on a Gooch crucible, wash with hot water, ignite and weigh as
BaS0 4 . Calculate to S0 3 or CaS0 4 .

Total Sulfur other than that Present as BaS0 4 .

11. Treat
5 g. of the sample in a covered porcelain dish with Total Sulfur.

50 aqua regia (l HNO3 9 HC1) and evaporate to dryness

cc. of :

on steam bath. Add 20 cc. of concentrated HC1 and about

250 cc. of water, make double NH OH
4 precipitation; determine
BaS0 4 as given under "Soluble Sulfates."

1
For more exact work this precipitate should be dissolved in HC1 and the calcium oxalate
raprecipitatcd as above.
* If desired, a direct determination of Al?Oi may be made on an aliquot of the solution or

on the HC1 solution of the \U 4 OH precipitate by Peters' phosphate method (this will include
titanic acid; as descrii ed by Blair, "The Chemical Analysis of Iron," and Philips, "Met had*
of Iron Analysis Used in tho Pittsburgh District."
• If low In soluble sulfates use a larger portion of sample.
 660 Methods for Analysis of Colored Pigments.

METHODS FOR ANALYSIS OF OCHERS.

12. Loss at 100° C, loss on ignition, insoluble matter, total or
soluble iron, alumina, lime and sulfur may be determined as
outlined under the "Methods for Analysis of Indian Reds, etc.,"
using 1 g. or an aliquot corresponding to this weight.

Tinting Strength.
Tinting strength. 13. Test as under " General Methods." Tests should be
made for solubility in water, and reaction to litmus paper.

Lead Chromate.
Lead Chromate. 14. If present, the lead is removed in the above scheme by
nearly neutralizing the filtrate from the insoluble matter with
NH OH,
4 cooling, and passing in H2 S, to precipitate PbS. Filter,
wash with water containing H 2 S, dissolve PbS in hot dilute
HNO3, add 10 cc. of concentrated H2 S0 4 evaporate till S0 3 is ,

evolved, cool, dilute to 200 cc, let stand a few hours, filter on a
Gooch crucible, wash with 1-per-cent H 2 S0 4 ignite, and weigh ,

PbS0 4 Calculate to PbO or Pb. Heat the filtrate from the PbS
.

to expel H 2 S, oxidize with a little HN0 3 and make up to volume

,

if working on more than 1 g.

The iron is best determined in an aliquot by the K 2 Cr 2 7

method. Another aliquot is treated with NH 4 OH, the precipi-
tate containing Al 2 3 .Fe203.Cr2 03.P206.Ti0 2 Lime and MgO .

may be determined in filtrate.

The NH4OH precipitate is dissolved in hot dilute HC1,

washing paper with hot water, cooled, oxidized with Na 2 2,

boiled to expel 2H2 ,

washed off, diluted to
cooled, cover glass
about 150 cc, and acidified with H 2 S0 4 Add a measured excess
.

of ferrous ammonium-sulfate solution —

(NH 4 ) 2 Fe(S0 4 ) 2 -6H 2 0,
12.4 g.; concentrated H 2 S0 4 50 cc; and water to make 1 liter,
,

and titrate back with standard K 2 Cr2 7 solution, using

K 3 Fe(CN) 6 solution as an outside indicator. The (NH 4) 2 -
Fe(S0 4 ) 2 .6H 2 solution is titrated with the K 2 Cr2 7 solution to
determine its value in terms of the latter. The Fe value of the
KiCr 2 7 solutionX0.5969 = CrO 3 .

Or, moisten 1 g. of the pigment with water, add 5 cc. of

concentrated HC1, boil a few minutes, cool, add Na 2 2 in excess,
 Serial Designation: D 50-18. 661

boil to expel H 2 2, cool, wash off cover glass, dilute, acidify

with H2SO4, and titrate Cr0 3 as above.

Venetian Red.
Analyze as given under "Methods for Analysis of Indian
15. Venetian Red.

Reds, etc." Insoluble matter may be treated with HF and

H2SO4 to determine Si0 2 by loss if desired.

METHODS FOR ANALYSIS OF SIENNAS AND UMBERS.

16. After gently roasting to destroy organic matter, test as
given under "Methods for Analysis of Indian Reds, etc."

Manganese.
17. determined by the bismuthate method. Manganese.
Manganese is
1

Ignite gently (to destroy organic matter) 1 g. of the sample in

a platinum dish, cool, add 10 cc. of water, 4 cc. of concentrated
H2SO4 and about 20 cc. of HF (if necessary, add a little sul-
furous acid). Evaporate until the 2 S0 4 fumes freely, cool H
and dissolve in 25 cc. of HN0 3 (l part concentrated HN0 3 to
3 parts water). no appreciable residue remains, transfer
If
to a 100-cc. volumetric flask, using 25 cc. of HN0 3 (1:3) to
rinse the dish, dilute to the mark with water, mix thoroughly.
If there is an appreciable residue, filter on a small filter, wash
with water, ignite residue in a platinum crucible, and fuse with
a little sodium or potassium pyrosulfate. Dissolve in water,
with the addition of a little HN0 3 add to the main filtrate, ,

evaporate nearly to dryness, take up in HN0 3 (1:3) and trans-

fer to the flask as before. Pipette an aliquot of 10 cc. into a
200-cc. Erlenmeyer flask, add 30 cc. of water and 10 cc. of
concentrated HNO3, sp. gr. 1.4; add about 0.5 g. of sodium
bismuthate, heat for a few minutes, or until the pink color has
disappeared with or without the precipitation of Mn0 2 Add a .

few small crystals of sodium or potassium nitrite to dissolve

the Mn0 2 and boil the solution several minutes to expel nitrous
fumes (a little Na 2 C0 3 will aid this). Add water to bring the
volume up to 50 cc. and cool to about 15° C; add about 0.5 g.
1
Blulr, "Th« Chemical Analysis of Iron."
662 Methods for Analysis of Colored Pigments.

of bismuthate and shake the flask well. Add 50 cc. of water

containing 30 cc. of concentrated HN0 3 to the liter, filter by suc-
tion through an asbestos felt into a 300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask
and wash with 50 to 100 cc. of the same acid. Run in a meas-
ured volume of standard ferrous ammonium-sulfate solution and
titrate to a faint pink color with standard KMn0 4 solution.
The number of cubic centimeters of the KMn0 4 solution
obtained, subtracted from the number corresponding to the
volume of ferrous solution used, will give the volume of KMn0 4
equivalent to the manganese in the sample, which, multiplied
by the value KMn04 in Mn, gives the weight of manganese
of the
in the portion of sample used.
Standard KMnOi Solution.—The solution of KMn0 4 is com-
posed of 1 g. dissolved in a liter of water. The Fe value of this
solution X 0.1968 = Mn. This solution may be standardized
against Bureau of Standards sodium oxalate (using about 0.05
to 0.1 g.) 1 Weight of Na 2 C 2 O 4 X0.1639 = Mn. Twelve grams of
(NH ) Fe(S0
4 2 4) 2 -6H 2 0, 25 cc. of concentrated H S0 2 4, and 25 cc.
of H3P0 4 , sp. gr. about 1.7, are made up to 1 liter with water.
The value of this solution should be determined against the
KMn0 4 each day as follows:
Measure into a 200-cc. Erlenmeyer flask 50 cc. of HNO«
(1 : add a little bismuthate, dilute with 50 cc. of 3-per-
3), cool,
cent HN0 3 filter by suction through an asbestos felt into a
,

300-cc. Erlenmeyer flask, and wash with 50-cc. of 3-per-cent

HNO3. Run in 25 cc. of the ferrous solution and titrate with
KMn0 4 solution. Instead of titrating the permanganic acid
formed by the bismuthate with the ferrous solution and then
titrating back with KMn04 a direct titration with standard
,

sodium arsenite solution may be made. 2

1
W. Blum, "Original Communications," Eighth International Congress of Applied
Chemistry," Vol. I, pp. 61-85.
'Lord and Demore.it. "Metallurgical Analysis," 1913. p. 82.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHOD
FOR
MAKING A MECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF SAND OR
OTHER FINE HIGHWAY MATERIAL, EXCEPT
FOR FINE AGGREGATES USED IN
CEMENT CONCRETE.
Serial Designation : D 7-18.
This method is issued under the fixed designation D 7; the final num-
ber indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of revision,
the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1911; Revised, 1916, 1918.

The method shall consist of (l) drying at not over 110° C.

(230° F.) to a constant weight a sample weighing 50 g. (2) passing ;

Table I. — A.S.T.M. Standard Sieves.

Permissible Variations.
Mesh Unit of Actual Wire
Opening.
Designation. Measure. Mesh. Diameter. Mesh. Diameter.

, cm 3.9 0.200 0.056 ±0.04 ±0 005

j
in. 0.0 0.070 0.022 ±0.1 ±0 002

20
cm. 8 0.040 ±0.2 ±0.0015
| in. 20.3 0.0335 0.0157 .±05 ±0.0006

30
cm. 12 0.050 0.033 ±0.4 ±0.0012
in. 30 5 0.0197 0.0130 ± 1 ±0.0005

to
cm. 16 0.036 026 ±06 ±00010
in. 40 6 ii
0142 0.0102 ±15 ±0 0004

50
cm. 20 029 0.021 ±0 8 ±0.0010
in. 60 8 0.0114 0.0083 ±2 ±0.0004

80
cm. 31 017 015 ±1 ±0.0008
in. 78.7 0.0059 ±3 ±0.0003

100
39 014 ±1 ±0 0008
in, 00 1 ii
0066 ±3 ±0 0003

200 |
cm. 79 0068 ±3 ±0.0005
in. ±8 ±0.0002

(663)
 .

664 Method for Mechanical Analysis.

the sample through each of the mesh sieves (American Society

for Testing Materials standard sieves) specified in Table I; 1

(3) determining the percentage by weight retained on each sieve,

the sifting being continued on each sieve until less than 1 per cent
of the weight retained on each sieve shall pass through the
sieve during the last minute of sifting; and (4) recording the
mechanical analysis in the following manner:

Passing 200-mesh sieve per cent

Passing 100-mesh sieve and retained on a 200-mesh sieve. .

Passing 80-mesh sieve and retained on a 100-mesh sieve.

Passing 50-mesh sieve and retained on an 80-mesh sieve.

100.00

1
The order in which the sieves are to be used in the process of sifting is immaterial and
shall be left optional; but in reporting results the order in which the sieves have been used
shall be stated.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association tor Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHOD
FOR
MAKING A MECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF BROKEN
STONE OR BROKEN SLAG, EXCEPT FOR
AGGREGATES USED IN CEMENT
CONCRETE.
Serial Designation: D 18-16.
This method is issued under the fixed designation D 18; the final

number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of

revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1916.

The method drying at not over 110° C.

shall consist of (l)
(230° F.) to a constant weight a sample weighing in pounds
six times the diameter in inches of the largest holes required;

(2) passing the sample through such of the following size screens
having circular openings as are required or called for by the
specifications, screens to be used in the order named: 8.89 cm.
(3£ in.), 7.62 cm. (3 in.), 6.35 cm. {2\ in.), 5.08 cm. (2 in.),
3.81 cm. {\\ in.), 3.18 cm. {\\ in.), 2.54 cm. (l in.), 1.90 cm.

(f in.), 1.27 cm. (\ in.), and 0.64 cm. {\ in.); (3) determining the
percentage by weight retained on each screen; and (4) recording
the mechanical analysis in the following manner:
Passing 0.64-cm. (1-in.) screen per cent
Passing 1.27-cm. (i-in.) screen and retained on a 0.64-cm.
(J-in.) screen "
Passing 1.90-cm. (J-in.) screen and retained on a 1.27-cm.
(J-in.) screen "
Passing 2.54-cm. (1-in.) screen and retained on a 1.90-cm.
(J-in.) screen

100 00
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHOD
FOR
MAKING A MECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF MIXTURES
OF SAND OR OTHER FINE MATERIAL WITH
BROKEN STONE OR BROKEN SLAG,
EXCEPT FOR AGGREGATES USED
IN CEMENT CONCRETE.

Serial Designation: D 19-16.

This method is issued under the fixed designation D 19; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1916.

The method shall consist of (l) drying at not over 110° C.

(230° F.) to a constant weight a sample weighing in pounds six
times thediameter in inches of the largest holes required;
(2) separating the sample by the use of a screen having circular
openings 0.64 cm. (j in.) in diameter; (3) examining the portion
retained on the screen in accordance with the Standard Method
for Making a Mechanical Analysis of Broken Stone or Broken
Slag, except for Aggregates Used in Cement Concrete (Serial

Designation: D 18) of the American Society for Testing

Materials; examining the portion passing this screen in
(4)
accordance with the Standard Method for Making a Mechanical
Analysis of Sand or Other Fine Highway Material, except for
(666J
 Serial Designation: D 19-16. 66:

Fine Aggregates Used in Cement Concrete (Serial Designation

D 7) of the American Society for Testing Materials; and
(5) recording the mechanical analysis in the following manner:

Passing 200-mesh sieve per cent

Passing 100-mesh sieve and retained on a 200-mesh sieve. . .

Passing 80-mesh sieve and retained on a 100-mesh sieve. . .

Passing 10-mesh sieve and retained on a 20-mesh sieve. . . .

Passing 0.64-cm. (J-in.) screen and retained on a 10-mesh

sieve
Passing 1.27-cm. (f-in.) screen and retained on a 0.64-cm.
( i-in.) screen
Passing 1.90-cm. (f-in.) screen and retained on a 1.27-cm.
(£-in.) screen

100.00
 . .

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD FORM
OF
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CERTAIN COMMERCIAL
GRADES OF BROKEN STONE.

Serial Designation: D 35 - 18.

This form of specifications is issued under the fixed designation D 35;
the final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the
case of revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1916; Adopted, 1918.

The broken
stone shall consist of one product of the opera-
tion of a stone-crushing and screening plant without recom-
bining or mixing, and shall conform to the following mechanical
analysis using laboratory screens:
Passing screen having smallest holes selected From . . to . . per cent
Passing screen having next to largest holes selected. . . .From . . to . .

Passing screen having largest holes selected From . . to .

Total passing screen having largest holes selected. . 100

—
Example. The broken stone shall consist of one product of the operation
of a stone-crushing and screening plant without recombining or mixing, and
shall conform to the following mechanical analysis using laboratory screens:
Passing J-in. screen 3 to 10 per cent
Passing 1-in. screen and retained on \-'m. screen 80 to 95
Passing lj-in. screen and retained on 1-in. screen 2 to 10
Total passing lj-in. screen 100

or the analysis may be expressed as follows:

Total passing J-in. screen 3 to 10 per cent

Total passing 1-in. " 90 to 98
"
Total passing 1 £-in. " 100

(668)
 :

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association tor Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHOD
FOR
DISTILLATION OF BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
SUITABLE FOR ROAD TREATMENT.

Serial Designation: D 20-18.

This method is issued under the fixed designation D 20; the final num-
ber indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

ADor-TED, 1916; Revised, 1918.

1. The sample as received shall be thoroughly stirred and Sampling,

agitated, warming, if necessary, to insure a complete mixture
before the portion for analysis is removed.
2. If the presence of water is suspected orknown, the Dehydration,
material shall be dehydrated before distillation. About 500 cc.
of the material are placed in an 800-cc. copper still provided
with a distilling head connected with a water-cooled condenser.
A ring burner is used, starting with a small flame at the top of
the and gradually lowering it, if necessary, until all the
still,

water has been driven off. The distillate is collected in a 200-cc.

separatory funnel with the tube cut off close to the stopcock.
When all the water has been driven over and the distillate
has settled out, the water is drawn off and the oih returned to
the residue in the still. The contents of the still shall have
cooled to below 100° C. before the oils are returned, and they
shall be well stirred and mixed with the residue.
3. The apparatus shall consist of the following standard Apparatus

parts
(669)
 :

670 Method for Distillation of Bituminous Materials.

(a) Flask. —The distillation flask shall be a 250-cc. Engler

distilling flask, having the following dimensions:
Diameter of bulb 8.0 cm.
Length of neck 15.0 cm.
Diameter of neck 1.7 cm.
Surface of material to lower side of tubulature 11.0 cm.
Length of tubulature 15.0 cm.
Diameter of tubulature 0.9 cm.
Angle of tubulature 75 deg.

A variation of 3 per cent from the above measurements

will be allowed.
(b) Thermometer. —
The thermometer shall conform to the
following requirements
It shall be made of thermometric glass of a quality equi-
valent to suitable grades of Jena or Corning make. It shall be
thoroughly annealed. It shall be filled above the mercury with
inert gas which will not act chemically on or contaminate the
mercury. The pressure of the gas shall be sufficient to prevent
separation of the mercury column at all temperatures of the
scale. There shall be a reservoir above the final graduation
large enough so that the pressure will not become excessive at
the highest temperature. The thermometer shall be finished at
the top with a small glass ring or button suitable for attaching a
tag. Each thermometer shall have for identification the
maker's name, a serial number, and the letters "A.S.T.M.
Distillation."
The thermometer be graduated from
shall to 400° C.
at intervals of 1° C.
Every fifth graduation shall be longer
than the intermediate ones, and every tenth graduation beginning
at zero shall be numbered. The graduation marks and numbers
shall be clear-cut and distinct.
The thermometer shall conform to the following dimensions:

Total length, maximum 385 mm.

Diameter of stem 7 " ; permissible variation, 0.5 mm.
Diameter of bulb, minimum . . 5 " ; and shall not exceed diameter
of stem.
Length of bulb 12.5 " permissible variation, 2.5 mm.
Distance from 0° to bottom
of bulb 30 " ; " " 2.5 "

Distance from 0° to 400° 295 " ; " " 10 "

 Serial Designation: D 20-18. 671

The accuracy of the thermometer when delivered to the

purchaser shall be such that when tested at full immersion the
maximum error from to 200° C. shall not exceed the following:
From to 200° C 0°.5 C.
" 200 " 300° C 1 °.0 C.
" 300 " 375° C 1°.5 C.

Pig. I. —Apparatus for Determination of Distillation.

The sensitiveness of the thermometer shall he such that

when cooled to a temperature of 74° C. below the boiling point
of water at the barometric pressure, at the time of test, and
plunged into free How of steam, the meniscus shall pass the
point 10° C. below the boiling point of water in not more than
6 seconds.
 :

672 Method for Distillation of Bituminous Materials.

The thermometer shall be set up as for the distillation test,

using water, naphthalene and benzophenone as distilling liquids.
The correctness of the thermometer shall be checked at and
100° C. after each third distillation until seasoned.
(c) Condenser. —The condenser tube shall have the following
dimensions
Adapter 70 mm.
Length of straight tube 185 "
Width of tube 12-15 "
Width of adapter end of tube 20-25 "

(d) Stands. —Two iron stands shall be provided, one with a

universal clamp for holding the condenser, and one with a
light griparm with a cork-lined clamp for holding the flask.
—
Burner and Shield. A Bunsen burner shall be provided,
(e)

with a tin shield 20 cm. long by 9 cm. in diameter. The shield

shall have a small hole for observing the flame.

(/) Cylinders. —The cylinders used in collecting the distillate

shall have a capacity of 25 cc, and shall be graduated in 0.1 cc.
Setting up the 4. The apparatus shall be set up as shown in Fig. 1, the
Apparatus.
thermometer being placed so that the top of the bulb is opposite
the middle of the tubulature. All connections should be tight.
Method. 5. One hundred cubic centimeters of the dehydrated mate-

rial to be tested shall be placed in a tared flask and weighed.

After adjusting the thermometer, shield, condenser, etc., the dis-

tillation is commenced, the rate being so regulated that 1 cc.
passes over every minute. The receiver is changed as the
mercury column just passes the fractionating point.
The following fractions should be reported:
Start of distillation to 110° C.
110 to 170° C.
170 to 235° C.
235 to 270° C.
270 to 300° C.
Residue

To determine the amount of residue, the flask is weighed

again when distillation is complete. During the distillation the
condenser tube shall be warmed when necessary to prevent
the deposition of any sublimate. The percentages of fractions
should be reported both by weight and by volume.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHOD
FOR
SAMPLING OF COAL.

Serial Designation : D 21-16.

This method is issued under the fixed designation D 21 ; the final number
indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of revision,
the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1916.

It imperative that every sample be collected and prepared

is

carefully and conscientiously and in strict accordance with the

standard methods described herein, for if the sampling is improp-
erly done, the be in error, and it may be impossible
sample will
or impracticable to take another sample; but if an analysis is
in error, another analysis can easily be made of the original
sample.
Gross samples of the quantities designated herein must be
taken whether the coal to be sampled consists of a few tons or
several hundred tons, because of the following cardinal principle
in sampling coal that must be recognized and understood;
that is, the effect of the chance inclusion or exclusion of too
many or too few pieces of slate or other impurities in what, or
from what, would otherwise have been a representative sample
will cause the analysis to be in error accordingly, regardless of
(673)
 674 Method for Sampling of Coal.

the tonnage sampled. For example, the chance inclusion or

exclusion of 10 lb. too much
or too little of impurities in or from
an otherwise representative sample of 100 lb. would cause the
analysis to show an error in ash content and in heat units of
approximately 10 per cent, whereas for a 1000-lb. sample, the
effect would be approximately only 1 per cent, being the same
whether the sample is collected from a 1-ton lot or from a lot
consisting of several hundred tons.
When this method of sampling is to be employed as a
part of any contract or agreement, the following provisions shall
be specifically agreed to by the parties to such contract or
agreement:
(a) The place at which the coal is to be sampled (see Sec-
tion l);
(b) The approximate size of the sample required when the
standard conditions do not apply (see Section 3);
(c) The number of samples to be taken or the amount of

coal to be represented by each sample when the standard con-

ditions do not apply (see Section 4).

I. FOR ALL DETERMINATIONS EXCEPT TOTAL MOISTURE.

Time of 1. The coal shall be sampled when it is being loaded into
Sampling
or unloaded from railroad cars, ships, barges, or wagons, or when
discharged from supply bins, or from industrial railway cars,
or grab buckets, or from any coal-conveying equipment, as the
case may be. crushed as received, samples usually
If the coal is
can be taken advantageously after the coal has passed through
the crusher. Samples collected from the surface of coal in piles
or bins, or in cars, ships or barges are generally unreliable.
Size of 2. To collect samples, a shovel or specially designed tool,
Increment!.
or mechanical means shall be used for taking equal portions or
increments. For slack or small sizes of anthracite, increments
as small as 5 to 10 lb. may be taken, but for run-of-mine or
lump coal, increments should be at least 10 to 30 lb.
Collection of 3. The increments shall be regularly and systematically
Grois Sample.
co ii ec ted, so that the entire quantity of coal sampled will be
represented proportionately in the gross sample, and with such
frequency that a gross sample of the required amount shall be
collected. The standard gross sample shall not be less than
 Serial Designation: D 21 - 16. 675

1000 lb., except that for slack coal and small sizes of anthracite

in which the impurities do not exist in abnormal quantities or

in pieces larger than f in., a gross sample of approximately
500 lb. shall be considered sufficient. If the coal contains an

unusual amount of impurities, such as slate, and if the pieces

of such impurities are very large, a gross sample of 1500 lb. or
more shall be collected. The gross sample should contain the
same proportion of lump coal, fine coal, and impurities as is

contained in the coal sampled. When coal is extremely lumpy,

it is best to break a proportional amount of the lumps before

taking the various increments of a sample. Provision should

be made for the preservation of the integrity of the sample.
4. A gross sample shall be taken for each 500 tons or less, Quantity

be agreed Re P «
r Bented
or in case of larger tonnages, for such quantities as may -

upon.
Table I.

Weight of Sample to be Largest Size of Coal and Impurities

Divided, lb. Allowable in Sample before Division, in.

1000 or over 1

500
i
i
250

125
f
60
i
30 _3_ or 4-mesh screen
16

5. After the gross sample has been collected, it shall be Crushing,

systematically crushed, mixed, and reduced in quantity to con-
venient size for transmittal to the laboratory. The sample may
be crushed by hand or by any mechanical means, but under
such conditions as shall prevent loss or the accidental admixture
of foreign matter. Samples of the quantities indicated in Table I
shall be crushed so that no pieces of coal and impurities will be
greater in any dimension, as judged by eye, than specified for
the sample before division into two approximately equal parts.
The method of reducing by hand the quantity of coal in a
gross sample shall be carried out as prescribed in Section 6,
even should the initial size of coal and impurities be less than
indicated in Table I.
 676 Method for Sampling of Coal.

Hand 6. The progressive reduction in the weight of the sample to

Preparation.
the quantities indicated in Table I shall be done by the following
methods, which are illustrated in Plate III:
Mixing and (a) The alternate-shovel method of reducing the gross
Reduction by
Discarding
sample shall be repeated until the sample is reduced to approxi-
Alternate mately 250 lb., and care shall be observed before each reduction
Shovelsful.
in quantity that the sample has been crushed to the fineness
prescribed in Table I.
The crushed coal shall be shoveled into a conical pile (Figs. 2
or 7, Plate III) by depositing each shovelful of coal on top of the
preceding one, and then formed into a long pile in the following
manner: The sampler shall take a shovelful of coal from the
conical pile and spread it out in a straight line (Figs. 3A or 8A)
having a width equal to the width of the shovel and a length of
5 to 10 ft. His next shovelful shall be spread directly over the
top of the first shovelful, but in the opposite direction, and so
on back and forth, the pile being occasionally flattened, until
all the coal has been formed into one long pile (Figs. 3B or 8J3).

The sampler shall then discard half of this pile, proceeding as

follows:
Beginning on one side of the pile, at either end, and shoveling
from the bottom of the pile, the sampler shall take one shovelful
(shovelful No. 1, Figs. 4 or 9) and set it aside; advancing
along the side of the pile a distance equal to the width of the
shovel, he shall take a second shovelful (shovelful No. 2) and
discard it; again advancing in the same direction one shovel
width, he shall take a third shovelful (shovelful No. 3) and add
it to the first. The fourth (shovelful No. 4) shall be taken in a
like manner and discarded, the fifth (shovelful No. 5) retained,
and so on, the sampler advancing always in the same direction
around the pile so that its size will be gradually reduced in a
uniform manner. When the pile is removed, about half of the
original quantity of coal should be contained in the new pile
formed by the alternate shovelsful which have been retained.
(Figs. 5.4 or 10A show the retained halves, and Figs. 5B or 10 B
the rejected halves.)
Mixing and (b) After the gross sample has been reduced by the above
Reduction by
Quartering.
method to approximately 250 lb., further reduction in quantity
shall be by the quartering method. Before each quartering, the
sample shall be crushed to the fineness prescribed in Table I.
 Plate III
1918 A.S.T.M. Standards.

Standard Method for Sampling of Coal.

METHOD OF PREPARING A SAMPLE OF COAL BY HAND

FIRST STAGE IN
THE PREPARATION NOTE
OF A I.000-POUN0
SAMPLE SELECT A HARD, CLEAN
SURFACE, FREE OF CRACKS
AND PROTECTED FROM
RAIN. SNOW. WIND, AND
BEATING SUN. DO NOT LET
CINDERS. SAND. CHIPPINSS
FROM FLOOR. OR ANY
OTHER FOREIGN MATTER
GET INTO THE SAMPLE.
PROTECT SAMPLE FROM
LOSS OR GAIN IN MOISTURE
BBOOND i"4CL

Cruah 250-pound eemplo 250-pounda cruihed to !$" and coned Ma by forming now con* Quarter after flattening c Sample dnrrded into quarto: Retain oppoarte quartan A, A.
(fij.m, A)to it" »» Reject quarter! B, B

FOURTH STAGE

Quarter after flattening c

Form cone after mixing Quarter after flattening con* Sample divKied into quartan

NECESSARY TOOLS: SHOVEL, TAMPER. BLANKET (MEASURING ABOUT 6 BY 8 FT.I, BROOM. AND RAKE USE RAKE FOR RAKING OVER COAL WHEN CRUSHING IT, SO THAT ALL LUMPS
WILL BE CRUSHED. SWEEP FLOOR OR BLANKET CLEAN OF ALL DISCARDED COAL AFTER EACH TIME SAMPLE IS HALVED OR QUARTERED.
 Serial Designation: D 21 - 16. 677

Quantities of 125 to 250 lb. shall be thoroughly mixed by

coning and re-coning (Figs. 12 and 13); quantities less than
125 lb. shall be placed on a suitable cloth, measuring about
6 by 8 ft., mixed by raising first one end of the cloth and then
the other (Figs. 18, 24 or 30), so as to roil the coal back and
forth,and after being thoroughly mixed shall be formed into a
conical pile by gathering together the four corners of the cloth
(Figs. 19, 25 or 31). The quartering of the conical pile shall be
done as follows:
The cone shall be flattened, its apex being pressed vertically
down with a shovel, or board, so that after the pile has been
quartered, each quarter will contain the material originally
in it. The flattened mass, which shall be of uniform thickness
and diameter, shall then be marked into quarters (Figs. 14, 20,
26 or 32) by two lines that intersect at right angles directly
under a point corresponding to the apex of the original cone.
The diagonally opposite quarters (BB in Figs. 16, 22, 28 or 34)
shall then be shoveled away and discarded and the space that
they occupied brushed clean. The coal remaining shall be
successively crushed, mixed, coned, and quartered until the
sample reduced to the desired quantity.
is

(c) The
30-lb. quantity (Fig. 29) shall be crushed to &-in.
or 4-mesh size, mixed, coned, flattened and quartered. The
laboratory samples shall include all of one of the quarters,
or all of two opposite quarters (Fig. 34), as may be required.
The laboratory sample shall be immediately placed in a suit-
able container and sealed in such a manner as to preclude
tampering.
7. Only such mechanical means as will give equally repre- Mechanical
re P aratlon -

sentative samples shall be used in substitution for the hand

method of preparation herein standardized.

II. FOR THE DETERMINATION OF TOTAL MOISTURE.

8. The sample shall weigh approximately
special moisture Collection of
e
100 lb., and be accumulated by placing in a waterproof
shall ^^J
Se
receptacle with a tight-fitting and waterproof lid small equal
parts of freshly taken increments of the standard gross sample.
The accumulated moisture sample shall be rapidly crushed and
 678 Method for Sampling of Coal.

reduced mechanically or by hand to about a 5-lb. quantity,

which shall be immediately placed in a container and sealed air-
tight and forwarded to the laboratory without delay.
Use of 9. Only when equally representative results will be ob-
rd Gross tained shall the standard gross sample be used instead of the
|^J
special moisture sample for the determination of total moisture.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHODS
FOR

LABORATORY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS OF COAL.

Serial Designation: D 22-16.

These methods are issued under the fixed designation D22; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1916.

preparation of laboratory samples.

Apparatus.
Air-Drying Oven.—The oven is to be used for air-drying
wet samples and may be of the form shown in Fig. 1 This is .

not absolutely necessary but is economical where many wet

samples are received. 1

Galvanized- Iron Pans 18 by 18 by 1.5 in. Deep. For air-drying —

wet samples.
—
Balance or Solution Scale. For weighing the galvanized-
iroD pans with samples. It should have a capacity of 5 kg. and
be sensitive to 0.5 g.

' For details of air-drying oveu see Bownocker. Lord and Somermeler, "Coal," DulUlin
So. 4th Seric. Ohio Geological Survey, p. 312 (1908); or P. M. Stanton and A.
'J. C
Fleldner,
odl of Analyzing Coal and Coke," Technical Paper No. 8, Bureau of Mines, p. 4 (1912)
or B. E. Somermeier, "Coal, Itg Composition, Analysis. Utilization and Valuation," p. 71,
McGraw-Hill Book Co. (1912;.
(679)
680 Methods for Analysis of Coal.

Jaw —For crushing coarse samples to pass a 4-mesh

Crusher.
sieve.
Roll Crusher or Coffee-Mill Type of Grinder. —For reducing
the 4-mesh product to 20-mesh. The coffee-mill type of grinder
should be entirely enclosed and have an enclosed hopper and a
receptacle capable of holding 10 lb. of coal. This is to reduce the
moisture losses while crushing.

Fig. —
1. Drier for Coarse Samples. The Outlet for Air at the Top may be
connected with a Chimney or any other Device which will furnish a
Suitable Draft. {Bulletin No. 9, Geological Survey of Ohio, p. 312.)

Abbi Ball Mill, Planetary Disk Crusher, Chrome-Steel Bucking

Board, or any Satisfactory —
Form of Pulverizer. For reducing the
20-mesh product to 60-mesh. The porcelain jars for the ball mill
should be approximately 9 in. in diameter and 10 in. high. The
flint pebbles should be smooth, hard and well rounded.
 Serial Designation: D 22-16. 681

A Large Riffle Sampler, with \ or \-in. Divisions. —For reduc-

1
ing the 4-mesh sample to 10 lb. (Fig. 2).
A Small RiffleSampler, with I or \-in. Divisions. —For divid-
ing down the 20 and 60-mesh material to a laboratory sample
(Fig. 2).
An 8-in.
60-mesh Sieve with Cover and Receiver.
Containers for Shipment to Laboratory. Samples in which —
the moisture content is important should always be shipped in

(<— - 23" -
M
Fig. 2.— Riffle Sampler. (Bulletin No. 9, Geological Survey of Ohio, p. 213.)

moisture-tight containers. A galvanized-iron or tin can with a

screw top which is sealed with a rubber gasket and adhesive tape
is best adapted to this purpose. Glass fruit jars sealed with
rubber gaskets may be used, but require very careful packing
to avoid breakage in transit. Samples in which the moisture
content is of no importance need no special protection from loss
of moisture.

• E. E. Somarmelei. "Coal. It» Composition, etc.." McGraw-HUl Book Co. (1912).

682 Methods for Analysis of Coal.

Method of Sampling.
(A) When Coal Appears Dry.
If the sample is coarser than 4-mesh (0.20 in.) and larger
in amount than 10 lb., quickly crush it with the jaw crusher to
pass a 4-mesh sieve and reduce it on the larger riffle sampler to

10 lb.; 1 then crush at once to 20-mesh by passing through rolls

or an enclosed grinder, and take, without sieving, a 60-g. total
moisture sample, immediately after the material has passed
through the crushing apparatus. This sample should be taken
with a spoon from various parts of the 20-mesh product, and
should be placed directly in a rubber-stoppered bottle.
Thoroughly mix the main portion of the sample, reduce on
the small riffle sampler to about 120 g., and pulverize to 60-mesh
by any suitable apparatus without regard to loss of moisture.
After all the material has been passed through the 60-mesh sieve,
mix and divide it on the small riffle sampler to 60 g. Transfer
the final sample to a 4-oz. rubber-stoppered bottle. Determine
moisture in both the 60 and the 20-mesh samples by the method
given under moisture.
—
Computation. Compute the analysis of the 60-mesh coal,
which has become partly air-dried during sampling, to the dry-
coal basis, by dividing each result by 1 minus its content of
moisture. Compute the analysis of the coal "as received" from
the dry-coal analysis by multiplying by 1 minus the total mois-
ture found in the 20-mesh sample.

(B) When Coal Appears Wet.

Spread the sample on tared pans, weigh, and air-dry at

room temperature, shown in
or in the special drying oven, Fig. 1,

at 10 to 15° C. above room temperature, and weigh again.

The drying should be continued until the loss in weight is not
more than 0.1 per cent per hour. Complete the sampling as
under dry coal.
Computation. —
Correct the moisture found in the 20-mesh,
air-dried sample to total moisture "as received," as follows:

i If the sample Is crushed to pass a 6-mesh screen it may be reduced to 5 lb.

 Serial Designation: D 22-16. 683

100— percentage of air-drying loss

X (percentage of moisture in 20-mesh coal)

+ (percentage of air-drying loss) = (total moisture "as received.")

Compute the analysis to "dry-coal" and "as-received"

bases as under dry coal, using for the "as-received" computa-
tion the total moisture as found by the formula in place of the
moisture found in the 20-mesh coal.

Notes.
Freshly mined or wet coal loses moisture rapidly on exposure to the air
of the laboratory, hence the sampling operations between opening the con-
tainer and taking the 20-mesh total-moisture sample must be conducted with
the utmost dispatch and with minimum exposure to air.
The accuracy of the method of preparing laboratory samples should be
checked frequently by resampling the rejected portions and preparing a
duplicate sample. The ash in the two samples should not differ more than the
following limits:

No carbonates present 0.4 per cent

"
Considerable carbonate and pyrite present 0.7
Coals with more than 12 per cent ash, containing
"
considerable carbonate and pyrite 1.0

DETERMINATION OF MOISTURE.

Apparatus.

—
Moisture Oven. This must be so constructed as to have a
uniform temperature in all parts and a minimum of air space.
It may be of the form shown in Fig. 3. Provision must be
made for renewing the air in the oven at the rate of two to four
times a minute, with the air dried by passing it through con-
centrated H2SO4.
—
Capsules with Covers. A convenient form, which allows the
ash determination to be made on the same sample, is the Royal
Meissen porcelain capsule Xo. 2, I in. deep and If in. in diame-
ter; or a fused silica capsule of similar shape. This is to be used
with a well-fitting ilat aluminum rover, illustrated in Fig. 4.
684 Methods for Analysis of Coal.

Glass capsules with ground-glass caps may also be used.

They should be as shallow as possible, consistent with convenient
handling.

Method.
(A) Sixty-Mesh Sample.
Heat the empty capsules under the conditions at which
the coal is to be dried, stopper or cover, cool over concentrated

Fig. 3. —Toluene or Glycerin and Water Oven for Determining Moisture.

(Technical Paper No. 76, Bureau of Mines, p. 16.)

H S0
2 4 sp. gr. 1.84, for 30 minutes, and weigh.
,
Dip out with a
spoon or spatula from the sample bottle approximately 1 g. of
coal; put this quickly into the capsule, close, and weigh at once.
An alternative procedure (more open to error), after trans-
ferring an amount slightly in excess of 1 g., is to bring to exactly
1 g. in weight (±0.5 mg.) by quickly removing the excess weight

of coal with a spatula. The utmost dispatch must be used in

 Serial Designation: D 22 - 16. 685

order to minimize the exposure of the coal until the weight is

found.
After removing the covers, quickly place the capsules in a
pre-heated oven (at 104 to 110° C.) through which passes a
current of air dried by concentrated H 2 S0 4 Close the oven
.

at once and heat for 1 hour. Then open the oven, cover the
capsules quickly and place them in a desiccator over concentrated
H2SO4. When cool, weigh.

Hi-

=
^
tS
ff-

Fig. 4. —Porcelain Capsule with

Flat Aluminum Cover.

(B) Twenty-mesh sample.

Use 5-g. samples, weighed with an accuracy of 2 mg., and

heat for 1^ hours; the procedure is otherwise the same as with
the 60-mesh sample. Methods of greater accuracy for the
determination of moisture are given in the preliminary report.
The permissible differences in duplicate determinations are
as follows:
Same Analyst. Different Analysts,
PER CENT. per CENT.
Moisture under 5 per cent 0.2 0.3
over 5 " 0.3 0.5
686 Methods eor Analysis of Coal.

DETERMINATION OF ASH.

Apparatus.
—
Gas or Electric Muffle Furnace. The muffle should have good
air circulation and be capable of having its temperature regulated
between 700 and 750° C.
—
Porcelain Capsules. Royal. Meissen Porcelain Capsules
No. 2, | in. deep and If in. in diameter, or similar shallow dishes.

Method.
Place the porcelain capsules containing the dried coal from
the moisture determination in a cold muffle furnace, or on the
hearth at a low temperature, and gradually heat to redness at
such a rate as to avoid mechanical loss from too rapid expulsion
of volatile matter. Finish the ignition to constant weight
(=*= 0.001 g.) at a temperature between 700 and 750° C. Cool in
a desiccator, and weigh as soon as cold.
The permissible differences in duplicate determinations are
as follows:
Same Analyst, Different Analysts,
per cent. per cent.
No carbonates present 0.2 0.3
Carbonates present 0.3 0.5
Coals with more than 12 per cent of ash,
containing carbonates and pyrite 0.5 1.0

Notes.

Before replacing the capsules in the muffle for ignition to constant weight,
the ash should be stirred with a platinum or nichrome wire. Stirring once
or twice before the first weighing hastens complete ignition.
The result obtained by this method
"uncorrected" ash.
is For "cor-
rected" ash see the preliminary report. The
actual mineral matters in the
original coal are usually very different in weight and composition from the
weight of the "uncorrected" ash.
 Serial Designation: D 22-16. 687

DETERMINATION OF VOLATILE MATTER.

Apparatus.
Platinum Crucible with Tightly Fitting Cover.— The crucible
should be of not less than 10 nor more than 20-cc. capacity; of
not less than 25 nor more than 35 mm. in diameter; of not less
than 30 nor more than 35 mm. in height.
Vertical Electric Tube Furnace; or a Gas or Electrically
Heated Muffle Furnace. —The furnace may be of the form as
shown in Fig. 5. It is to be regulated to maintain a temperature
of 950° C. (±20° C.) in the crucible, as shown by a thermo-
couple kept in the furnace. A suitable form of electric furnace
is shown in Fig. 5. If the determination of volatile matter is

not an essential featur: of the specifications under which the coal

is bought, a Meker burner may be used.

Method.
Weigh 1 g. of the coal in a weighed 10 to 20-cc. platinum
crucible, close with a capsule cover,and place on platinum or
nichrome-wire supports in the furnace chamber, which must be
at a temperature of 950° C. (±20° C). After the more rapid
discharge of volatile matter has subsided, as shown by the
disappearance of the luminous flame, tap the cover lightly to
more perfectly seal the crucible and thus guard against the
admission of air. After heating exactly 7 minutes, remove the
crucible from the furnace and, without disturbing the cover,
allow it to cool. Weigh as soon as cold. The loss of weight
minus moisture equals the volatile matter.
Modification for Sub-Bituminous Coal, Lignite, and Peat. —
Mechanical losses are incurred on suddenly heating peat, sub-
bituminous coal, and lignite; therefore they must be subjected
to a preliminary gradual heating for 5 minutes; this is best done
by playing the flame of a burner upon the bottom of the crucible
in such a manner as to bring about the discharge of volatile
matter at a rate not sufficient to cause sparking. After the
preliminary heating, transfer the crucible to the volatile-matter
furnace and heat for 6 minul 'SO C. as in the regular
method.
688 Methods for Analysis of Coal.

Platinum rhodium

Fig. 5. —Electric Tube Furnace forDetermining Volatile Matter. For

110-volt Alternating Current, 60 of Nichrome Wire, No. 17 B. & S.
ft.

gage will give the required temperature. The temperature must be

controlled by an external resistance. {Technical Paper No. 76, Bureau
of Mines, p. 21.)
 Serial Designation: D 22-16. 689

The permissible differences in duplicate determinations are

as follows:
Same Analyst, Different Analysts,
per cent. per cent.
Bituminous coals 0.5 1.0
Lignites !-0 2.0

Notes.

The cover should fit enough so that the carbon deposit from
closely
bituminous and lignite coals does not burn away from the under side.
Regulation of temperature to within the prescribed limits is important.

DETERMINATION OF FIXED CARBON.

Compute fixed carbon as follows:

100 — (moisture + ash + volatile matter) -percentage of fixed carbon.

DETERMINATION OF SULFUR BY THE ESCHKA METHOD.

Apparatus.
Gas or Electric Muffle Furnace, or Burners. For igniting coal —
with the Eschka mixture and for igniting the BaS0 4 .

Porcelain, Silica, or Platinum Crucibles or Capsules. — For

igniting coal with the Eschka mixture.
No. 1 Royal Meissen porcelain capsule, 1 in. deep and 2 in.

in diameter. This capsule, because of its shallow form, presents

more surface for oxidation and is more convenient to handle
than the ordinary form of crucible.
No. 1 Royal Berlin porcelain crucibles, shallow form, and
platinum crucibles of similar size may be used. Somewhat more
time is required to burn out the coal, owing to the deeper form,
than with the shallow capsules described above.
No. or 00 porcelain crucibles, or platinum, alundum or
silica crucibles of similar size are to be used for igniting the
BaSO,.
690 Methods for Analysis of Coal.

Solutions and Reagents.

Barium Chloride. — Dissolve 100 g. of BaCl 2 -2H 2 in

1000 cc. of distilled water.
Saturated Bromine Water. —Add an excess of bromine to
1000 cc. of distilled water.
Eschka Mixture. —Thoroughly mix 2 parts (by weight) of
light calcined MgO and 1 part of anhydrous Na C0 2 3 . Both
materials should be as free as possible from sulfur.
Methyl Orange. —Dissolve 0.02 g. in 100 cc. of hot distilled
water and filter.
Hydrochloric Acid.— Mix 500 cc. of HO, sp. gr. 1.20, and
500 cc. of distilled water.
Normal Hydrochloric Acid. —Dilute 80 cc. of HC1, sp. gr. 1.20,
to 1 liter with distilled water
Sodium Carbonate. —A saturated solution, approximately
60 g. of crystallized or 22 g. of anhydrous Na C0 2 3 in 100 cc. of
distilled water.

Sodium-Hydroxide Solution. —Dissolve 100 g. in 1 liter of

distilled water. This solution may be used in place of the
Na C0 3
2 solution.

Method.
Preparation of Sample and Mixture. Thoroughly mix on —
glazed paper 1 g.and 3 g. of Eschka mixture. Transfer
of coal
to a No. 1 Royal Meissen porcelain capsule, 1 in. deep and 2 in.
in diameter, or a No. 1 Royal Berlin crucible or a platinum cru-
cible of similar size, and cover with about 1 g.'of Eschka mixture.
Ignition. —On
account of the amount of sulfur contained
in- artificial be heated over an alcohol,
gas, the crucible shall
gasoline or natural gas flame as in procedure (a) below, or in
a gas or electrically heated muffle, as in procedure (b) below.
The use of artificial gas for heating the coal and Eschka mixture
is permissible only when the crucibles are heated in a muffle.
(a) Heat the
crucible, placed in a slanting position on a
triangle, over a very low flame to avoid rapid expulsion of the
volatile matter, which tends to prevent complete absorption of
the products of combustion of the sulfur. Heat the crucible
 Serial Designation: D 22-16. 691

slowly for 30 minutes, gradually increasing the temperature and

stirring after all black particles have disappeared, which is an
indication of the completeness of the procedure.
(b) Place the crucible in a cold muffle and gradually
raise the temperature to 870-925° C. (cherry-red heat) in about
1 hour. Maintain the maximum temperature for about 1$ hours
and then allow the crucible to cool in the muffle.
Subsequent Treatment. —Remove
and empty the contents
into a 200-cc. beaker and digest with 100 cc. of hot water for
\ to | hour, with occasional stirring. Filter and wash the
insoluble matter by decantation. After several washings in
this manner, transfer the insoluble matter to the filter and wash
5 times, keeping the mixture well agitated. Treat the filtrate,

amounting to about 250 cc, with 10 to 20 cc. of saturated bro-

mine water, make slightly acid with HC1 and boil to expel the
liberated bromine. Make just neutral to methyl orange with
NaOH or Xa2 C0 3 solution, then add 1 cc. of normal HC1. Boil
again and add slowly from a pipette, with constant stirring,
10 cc. of a 10-per-cent solution of BaCLj^H^O. Continue boil-
ing for 15 minutes and allow to stand for at least 2 hours, or
preferably over night, at a temperature just below boiling.
Filterthrough an ashless filter paper and wash with hot distilled
water until a AgNOa solution shows no precipitate with a drop
of the filtrate. Place the wet filter containing the precipitate
of BaS0 4 in a weighed platinum, porcelain, silica or alundum
crucible, allowing a free access of air by folding the paper over
the precipitate loosely to prevent spattering. Smoke the paper
off gradually and at no time allow burn with flame. After
it to
the paper is practically consumed, raise the temperature to
approximately 925° C. and heat to constant weight.
The residue of MgO, etc., after leaching, should be dis-
solved in HC1 and tested with great care for sulfur. When an
appreciable amount is found this should be determined quanti-
tatively. The amount of sulfur retained is by no means a
negligible quantity.'
Blanks and Corrections. — In all cases a correction must be
applied either (l) by running a blank exactly as described above,

Journal. Am. Chem. Soc.. Vol. 21. p. 1125 (1899).

692 Methods for Analysis of Coal.

using the same amount of all reagents that were employed in the
regular determination, or more surely (2) by determining a known
amount of sulfate added to a solution of the reagents after these
have been put through the prescribed series of operations. If
this latter procedure is adopted and carried out, say, once a week
or whenever a new supply of a reagent must be used, and for
a series of solutions covering the range of sulfur content likely
to be met with in coals, it is only necessary to add to or subtract
from the weight of BaS0 4 obtained from a coal, whatever
deficiency or excess may have been found in the appropriate
"check" in order to obtain a result that is more certain to be
correct than if a "blank" correction as determined by the former
procedure is applied. Thisis due to the fact that the solubility
error for BaS0 4 , for the amounts of sulfur in question and the
conditions of precipitation prescribed, probably die largest is

one to be considered. BaS0 4 is soluble 1 in acids and even in

pure water, and the solubility limit is reached almost imme-
diately on contact with the solvent. Hence, in the event of
using reagents of very superior quality or of exercising more
than ordinary precautions, there may be no apparent "blank,"
because the 'solubility limit of the solution for BaS0 4 has not
been reached or at any rate not exceeded.
As shown in the preliminary report, 2 the Atkinson and
sodium-peroxide methods give results in close agreement with
the Eschka method. Register 3 has shown that if 5 per cent of
nitrogen is present in the gases contained in the bomb calo-
rimeter the sulfur of a coal is almost completely oxidized to
H 2 S0 4 and the washings of the calorimeter may be used for the

determination of sulfur.
The permissible differences in duplicate determinations are
as follows:
Same Analyst, Different Analysts,
Per Cent. Per Cent.
Sulfur under 2 per cent 0.05 0.10
over 2 " 0.10 0.20

i Journal, Am. Chem. Soc, Vol. 32, p. 588 (1910); Vol. 33. p. 829 (1911).
1 Journal of Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, Vol. 5, p. 5 (1913).
>Ibid.. Vol. 6, p. 812 (1914).
 Serial Designation: D 22-16. 693

DETERMINATION OF PHOSPHORUS IN ASH.

Method No. 1. To Cover All Cases. —To the ash from 5 g.

of coal in a platinum capsule is added 10 cc. of HN0 3 and
3 to 5 cc. of HF. The liquid is evaporated and the residue
fused with 3 g. of Na 2 C03. If unburned carbon is present
0.2 g. of NaN0 mixed with the carbonate.
3 is The melt is
leached with water and the solution filtered. The residue is
ignited, fused with Na 2 C0 3 alone, the melt leached and the
solution filtered. The combined filtrates, held in a flask, are
just acidified with HN0 3 and concentrated to a volume of
100 cc. To the solution, brought to a temperature of 85° C,
is added 50 cc. of molybdate solution and the
shaken flask is
for 10 minutes. If the precipitate does not form promptly
and subside rapidly, add enough NH4NO3 to cause it to do so.
The precipitate is washed six times, or until free from acid,
with a 2-per-cent solution of KN0 3 then returned to the flask ,

and titrated with standard NaOH solution. The alkali solu-

tion may well be made equal to 0.00025 g. phosphorus per cubic
centimeter, or 0.005 per cent for a 5-g. sample of coal, and is
0.995 of one-fifth normal. Or the phosphorus in the precipitate
1

is determined by reduction and titration of the molybdenum

with permanganate.

Note on Method No. 1. —The advantage of the use of HF in

the initial
attack of the ash lies in the resulting removal of
Fusion with alkali silica.
carbonate is necessary for the elimination of titanium, which if present and
not removed will contaminate the phospho-molybdate and is said to some-
times retard its precipitation.

Method No. —When

titanium is so low as to offer no
2.
objection, the ash decomposed as under method No. 1, but
is

evaporation is carried only to a volume of about 5 cc. The

solution is diluted with water to 30 cc, boiled and filtered. If
the washings are turbid they are passed again through the
filter. The residue is ignited in a platinum crucible, fused with
a little Na C0
2 3 , the melt dissolved in II\'(> and its solution,
if clear, added to the main one. If not clear it is filtered. The
IMnmw and Buch, ChtmUal Enfinttr. Vol. 10, p 130 (1909)
694 Methods for Analysis of Coal.

subsequent procedure is as under method No. 1. The fusion

of the residue may be dispensed with in routine work on a given
coal if it is certain that it is free from phosphorus.

ULTIMATE ANALYSIS.

Carbon and Hydrogen.

The determination of carbon and of hydrogen is made with
a weighed quantity of sample in a 25-burner combustion furnace
of the Glaser type. The products of combustion are thoroughly
oxidized by being passed over red-hot CuO and PbCr0 4 and ,

are fixed by absorbing the water in a weighed Marchand tube

filled with granular CaCl 2 and by absorbing the C0 2 in a Liebig

bulb containing a 30-per-cent solution of KOH.

The apparatus used consists of a purifying train, in duplicate,
a combustion tube in the furnace, and an absorption train.
The purifying train consists of the following purifying reagents
arranged in order of passage of air and oxygen through them:
H0SO4, KOH solution, soda lime, and granular CaCl2 One of
.

the trains is for air and one for oxygen. In the H

2 S0 4 and

KOH scrubbing bottles the air and the oxygen are made to
bubble through about 5 mm. of the purifying reagent. Both
purifying trains are connected to the combustion tube by a
Y-tube, the joint being made tight by a rubber stopper.
The combustion tube is made of hard Jena glass. Its
external diameter is about 21 mm., and its total length is 1
meter. The first 30 cm. of the tube are empty; following this
empty space is an asbestos plug (acid-washed and ignited) or in
its place a roll of oxidized copper gauze may be used; the next

40 cm. are filled with "wire" CuO; a second asbestos plug

separates the copper oxide from 10 cm. of fused PbCr0 4 which ,

is held in place by another asbestos plug 20 cm. from the end

of the tube. The end of the tube is drawn out for rubber-
tubing connection with the absorption train.
 Serial Designation: D 22 - 16. 695

The absorption train consists, nrst, of a Marchand tube

filledwith granular CaCL to absorb moisture. The CaC^
should be saturated with CO2 before using. The Marchand
tube is followed by a Liebig bulb containing a 30-per-cent
KOH solution, inwhich any possible impurities, as ferrous
iron or nitrites, have been oxidized by a little KMn0 4 A
.

guard tube, containing granular CaCl 2 and soda lime, is attached

to the Liebig bulb to absorb any CO* escaping the KOH solution
and any water evaporating from that solution.
The train is connected to an aspirator which draws the prod-
ucts of combustion through the entire train. A guard tube of
CaCl 2 prevents moisture from running back into the absorption
train. The suction is maintained constant by a Mario tte
flask. The advantage of aspirating the gases through the train
rather than forcing them through by pressure is that the pres-
sure on the rubber connections is from the outside, so that
gas-tight connections are more easily maintained than if the
pressure is on the inside of the tube. The connections are made
as tight as possible. The usual test for tightness is to start
aspiration at the rate of about three bubbles of air per second
through the potash bulb, and then to close the inlet for air and
oxygen at the opposite end of the train if there is no more than
;

one bubble per minute in the potash bulb, the apparatus is

considered tight.
Before starting a determination when the train has been idle
some hours, or after any changes in chemicals or connections,
a blank is run by aspirating about 1 liter of air through the train,
which is heated in the same manner as if a determination on coal
were being made. If the Liebig bulb and the tube containing
calcium chloride show a change in weight of less than 0.5 mg.
each, the apparatus is in proper condition for use.
A porcelain or platinum boat is provided with a glass weigh-
ing tube of suitable size, which is fitted with an accurately ground
glass stopper. The tube and empty boat are weighed. Approxi-
mately 0.2 g. of the air-dry coal (60-mesh and finer, or better,
100-mesh if much free impurity is present) are quickly placed in
the boat. The boat is at once placed in the weighing tube,
which is quickly stoppered to prevent moisture change in the
coal while weighing, and transferring to the furnace. The
696 Methods for Analysis of Coal.

absorption tubes are connected and the boat and sample are
transferred from the weighing tube to the combustion tube,
which should be cool for the first 30 cm. The CuO should be
red hot and the PbCr0 4 at a dull-red heat. The transfer of
the boat from weighing tube to combustion tube should be
made as rapidly as possible. As soon as the boat is in place
near the asbestos plug at the beginning of the copper oxide
the stopper connecting with the purifying train is inserted
and the aspiration started with pure oxygen gas at the rate of
three bubbles per second. One burner is turned on about 10
cm. back from the boat, and the aspiration is continued carefully
until practically all the moisture is expelled from the sample.
The heat is then increased very gradually until all the volatile

matter has been driven off. In driving off the volatile matter
the heat must be applied gradually in order to prevent a too
rapid evolution of gas and tar, which may either escape complete
combustion or may be driven back into the purifying train.
The heat should be slowly increased by turning on more burners
under the open part of the tube until the sample is ignited;
then the temperature can be increased rapidly, but care should
be taken not to melt the combustion tube. Any moisture collect-
ing in the end of the combustion tube or in the rubber connection
joining it to the CaCl2 tube is driven over into the CaCl2 tube
by carefully warming with a piece of hot tile. The aspiration
with oxygen is continued for 2 minutes after the sample ceases
to glow, the heat is then turned off and about 1200 cc. of air
are aspirated. The absorption bulbs are then disconnected,
wiped with a clean cloth, and allowed to cool to the balance-
room temperature before weighing.

1 1. 19 X (increase in weight of CaCU tube)

Percentage of hydrogen =
Weight of sample

27. 27 X (increase in weight of KOH bulb)

Percentage of carbon =
Weight of sample.

The ash in the boat is weighed and carefully inspected for

any unburned carbon, which would destroy the value of the

determination.
 Serial Designation: D 22 - 16. 697

Method with
Electrically Heated Combustion Furnace. An —
heated combustion furnace of the Heraeus type is
electrically
used by the Bureau of Mines. 1

It consists of three independent heaters, two of which are

provided with sheave wheels, and are mounted on a track so
that they are movable along the tube; the third heater which
surrounds the PbCr0 4 is stationary.,

The furnace as provided by the manufacturer does not

include the small stationary heater. This can be made in the
laboratory by winding an alundum tube 12 cm. in length with
No. 20 nichrome II wire and enclosing it in a cylinder packed
with magnesia-asbestos. The movable heaters have very thin
platinum foil, weighing about 9 g. in all, wound on a porcelain
tube of 30 mm. internal diameter. The larger one which heats
the CuO, is 350 mm. in length, and the smaller one, which heats
the sample in the boat, is 200 mm. in length. The Jena glass
or fused silica combustion tube, of about 21 mm. external
diameter and 900 mm. in length, is supported by an asbestos-
lined nickel trough. The current through each heater is regu-
lated independently by separate rheostats, mounted on the
frame of the furnace. The two platinum-wound heaters require
an average current of about 4.5 amperes at a pressure of 220
volts, although for heating rapidly a larger amperage is
necessary.
The oxygen or air entering the combustion tube is purified
by passing through a Tauber's drying apparatus, which con-
tains the following reagents arranged in order of the passage
of air or oxygen through them: H S0 for removing possible
2 4 ,

traces of ammonia, 30-per-cent KOH solution, granular soda

lime, and granular CaCl 2 One side of the train is connected
.

directly to aLinde oxygen tank, which is provided with a reduc-

ing valve for regulating the oxygen pressure; the other side of
the train is used for purifying the air supply.
The absorption train consists of a 5 -in. U-tube, filled with
granular CaCl 2 to absorb moisture. Before using, the CaCl 2
should be saturated with C0 2 to avoid possible absorption of

i
Technical Paper No. 8, Bureau of Mines, revised edition 1913. p. 22.
698 Methods for Analysis of Coal.

CO2 during a determination by any traces of CaO that may be

present. This saturating is done most conveniently by placing
a quantity of CaCli in a large drying jar, and filling the jar with
CO2. After standing over night, dry air is drawn through the
jar to remove the C0 2 The treated CaCl 2 is kept in well-
.

stoppered bottles.
The CaCl 2 tube is connected to a Vanier potash bulb con-
taining a 30-per-cent KOH solution and granular CaCl2. Six
to eight determinations can be made without recharging this
bulb. The potash bulb is connected to an aspirator through a
guard tube containing granular CaCl 2 and soda lime, and a
Mariotte flask. The Mariotte flask keeps the pressure
constant.
In general, the method of determination is the same as the
one used with the gas furnace. By moving the heaters toward
the end of the tube where the gases enter, and cutting in the
electric current, the air can be warmed enough to thoroughly
dry the tube and its contents. The current is then cut off from
the small heater, and the large heater is moved over the CuO;
about 250 mm. of that part of the combustion tube between
the two heaters where the boat containing the sample is to be
placed is kept exposed. The full current is then turned on the
large heater to bring the CuO to a red heat. When this tem-
perature is reached it is necessary to reduce the current with
the rheostat to avoid melting the tube. In the meantime the
absorption train is weighed and connected, and the boat con-
taining the sample is placed in the exposed and cooler part
of the tube between the two heaters.
The current is then passed through the shorter heater.
By manipulating the rheostat and by gradually pushing this
heater toward the boat, the rate of evaporation of moisture and
evolution of volatile matter can be readily controlled.
After combustion is complete, the electric current is turned
off the smaller heater and this heater moved back to allow the
tube to cool for the next determination. The final aspiration
of air and the weighing of the absorption train is conducted as
described under the gas-furnace method.
 Serial Designation: D 22 - 16. 699

Note.

In place of granulated CaCl.>, concentrated H-SO,may be used for col-

lecting the water formed by combustion. In such cases the air and- oxygen
entering the combustion tube and the gas leaving the potash bulb must also
be dried by H : SO,.
Other suitable forms of absorption vessels than those indicated in the
above procedure may be used.

Nitrogen.

The Kjeldahl-Gunning method is recommended for the

determination of nitrogen. This method has the advantage
over either the simple Kjeldahl or the Gunning method, in
requiring less time for the complete oxidation of the organic
matter, and in giving the most uniform results.
—
The Kjeldahl-Gunning Method. One gram of the coal
sample is boiled with 30 cc. of concentrated H2SO4, 7 to 10 g.
of K2SO4, and 0.6 to 0.8 g. of metallic mercury in a 500-cc.
Kjeldahl flask until all particles of coal are oxidized and the
solution nearly colorless. The boiling should be continued at
least 2 hours after the solution has reached the straw-colored
stage. The total time of digestion will be from 3 to 4 hours.
The addition of a few crystals of KMn0 4 . after the solution has
cooled enough to avoid violent reaction, tends to insure complete
oxidation.
After cooling, the solution is diluted to about 200 cc. with
cold water. If the dilution with water has warmed the solution,
it should be again cooled and the following reagents added:
25 cc. K
2S solution (40 g. 2S K
per liter) to precipitate the
mercury; 1 to 2 g. of granular zinc to prevent bumping; and
finally enough strong XaOH solution (usually 80 to 100 cc. to
make the solution distinctly alkaline. The danger of loss of
XH 3 may be minimized by holding the flask in an inclined
position while the XaOH solution is being added. The alkaline
solution runs down the side of the flask and forms a layer below
the lighter acid solution. After adding the alkaline solution,
the flask is at once connected to the condensing apparatus and
the solution mixed by gently shaking the flask.
700 Methods for Analysis of Coal.

The NH distilled over into a measured amount (10 cc.)

3 is

of standard H S0 solution, to which has been added sufficient

2 4

cochineal indicator for titration. Care should be taken that

the glass connecting tube on the end of the condenser dips
under the surface of the standard acid. The solution is slowly
distilled until 150 to 200 cc. of distillate has passed over. To
avoid mechanically entrained alkali passing over into the con-
denser, the rate of distillation should not exceed 100 cc. per
hour. The distillate is titrated with standard NH 3 solution
(20 cc.NH OH solution = 10 cc. H S0 solution = 0.05 g. nitrogen).
4 2 4

Standard NaOH or KOH solution with methyl orange or methyl

red as indicator may be used instead of NH and cochineal. 3

A
blank determination should be made in exactly the same
manner as described above, except that 1 g. of pure sucrose
(cane sugar) is substituted in place of the coal sample. The
nitrogen found in this blank determination is deducted from
the result obtained with the coal sample.
The KS 2 and NaOH may be dissolved in a single stock
solution. Sufficient KS2 is dissolved in the water before adding
the NaOH, to make a solution in which the quantity necessary
for a nitrogen determination (80 to 100 cc.) contains 1 g. of
K S.
2 Twelve grams 2 of KS
and 500 g. of NaOH in one liter of
water, are required for the above proportions.
Coke and anthracite should be ground to an impalpable
powder, as they are very difficult to oxidize. Even if this is
done the digestion may require 12 to 16 hours.

Oxygen.
There being no satisfactory direct method of determining
oxygen, it is computed by subtracting the sum of the percentages
of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, sulfur, water and ash from 100.
The result so obtained is affected by all the errors incurred in the
other determinations and especially by the change in weight of
the ash-forming constituents on ignition; iron pyrite changes
to ferric oxide, increasing the ash and causing a negative error
in the oxygen equivalent to three-eighths of the pyritic sulfur.
On the other hand, there is always a loss on ignition, of water of
 Serial Designation: D 22-16. 701

composition from the clayey and shaley constituents, C0 2 from

carbonates, etc., which tends to compensate the absorption of

oxygen.
Corrected Oxygen. —
When a more correct oxygen value is
desired, it may
be obtained by making the corrections indicated
in the following formula:

Corrected oxygen = 100 -[ (C-C') + (H-H')+N+H 2 0+S'+

corrected ash],

in which

C = total carbon,
C = carbon of carbonates,
H = total hydrogen less hydrogen of water,
ZT = hydrogen from water of composition in clay, shale, etc.,
N = nitrogen,
H = moisture as found at 105° C,
2

5' = sulfur not present as pyrite or sulfate. This is usually

small. In many types of coal it may be disregarded.
Corrected ash = mineral constituents originally present in the
coal. For most purposes this can be determined with
sufficientaccuracy by adding to the ash, as found, five-
eighths of the weight of pyritic sulfur, the C0 2 of car-
bonates and the water of composition of clay, shale, etc.
See also ash determination.

CALORIMETRIC DETERMINATION.

Apparatus.
Combustion Bombs. —The Atwater, Davis, Emerson, Mahler,
Parr, Peters, Williams, or similar bombs may be used. The
bomb have an inner surface of platinum, gold, porcelain
shall
enamel, or other material which is not attacked by HNO3 and
H2SO4, or other products of combustion.
Calorimeter Jacket. —The calorimeter must be provided
with a water-jacket having a cover to protect the calorimeter
702 Methods for Analysis or Coal.

from air currents. The jacket must be kept filled with water
within 2 or 3° C. of the temperature of the room (except in calo-
rimeters which are totally submerged, where the jacket tempera-
ture is by a thermostat) and should be stirred con-
controlled
tinuously by some mechanical stirring device.
Stirring of the Calorimeter Water. —
The water in the calo-
rimeter must be stirred sufficiently well to give consistent ther-
mometer readings while the temperature is rising rapidly. The
speed of stirring should be kept constant. A motor-driven
screw or turbine stirrer is recommended and the speed should
not be excessive. This may be determined by adjusting the
temperature of the calorimeter to equality with that of the jacket
and allowing the stirrer to run continuously for ten minutes.
If the temperature of the calorimeter rises more than about
0°.01 C. in this length of time, the rate of stirring is excessive.
Accurate results cannot be obtained when too much energy is

supplied by the stirring device or when the rate of stirring is

irregular. The portion immersed in the

of the stirring device
calorimeter should be separated from that outside by non-
conducting material, such as hard rubber, to prevent conduction
of heat from the motor or outside air.
Thermometers.—Thermometers used shall have been certified
by a government testing bureau and shall be used with the
corrections given on the certificate. This shall also apply tc
electrical resistance or thermo-electric thermometers. Correc-
tion shall also be made emergent stem
for the temperature of the
of all mercurial thermometers, and for the "setting" of Beckmanri
thermometers. For accurate work, either Beckmann or special
calorimetric thermometers graduated to 0.01 or 0°.02 C. arc
required. Such thermometers should be tapped lightly just
before each reading to avoid errors caused by the sticking ol
the mercury meniscus, particularly when the temperature is
falling. A convenient method is to mount a small electric
buzzer directly on the top of the thermometer and connect it
up with a dry cell and a push button. The button should be
pressed for a few seconds immediately before each reading.
—
Oxygen. The oxygen used for combustions shall be free
from combustible material. The bomb when filled should con-
tain at least 5 per cent of nitrogen to insure complete oxidation
 Serial Designation: D 22-16. 703

of the sulfur. 1 The total amount of oxygen contained in the

bomb combustion shall not be less than 5 g. per gram of
for a
coal. But the combustion must be complete, as shown by the
absence of any sooty deposit on opening the bomb after firing.
—
Firing Wire. The coal in the bomb may be ignited by
means of either iron or platinum wire. If iron wire is used, it
should be of about No. 34 B. & S. gage and not more than 10
cm. (preferably 5 cm.) should be used at a time. A correction
of 1600 calories per gram weight of iron wire burned is to be
subtracted from the observed number of calories.
Standardization. —
The water equivalent of a calorimeter
can best be determined by the use of the standard combustion
samples supplied by the Bureau of Standards. The required
water equivalent is equal to the weight of the sample multiplied
by its heat of combustion per gram and divided by the cprrected
rise in temperature.
The calorimeter shall be standardized by the combustion
of standard samples supplied by the Bureau of Standards, and
used according to the directions given in the certificates which
accompany them. A standardization shall consist of a series of
not less than five combustions of either the same or different
standard materials. The conditions as to the amount of water,
oxygen, firing wire, method of correcting for radiation, etc.,
under which these combustions are made shall be the same as
for coal combustions. In the case of any disagreement between
contracting parties a check standardization may consist of two
or more combustions of standardizing samples.

Manipulation.

1. Preparation of Sample. —
The ground sample is to be
thorough y mixed in the bottle and an amount, approximately
1 g., is to be taken out and weighed in the crucible in which it is

to be burned. Coals which are likely to be blown out of the

crucible should be briquetted. After weighing, the sample
should preferably be immediately placed in the bomb and this
closed. This procedure is necessary to avoid sublimation in the
use of naphthalene for standardization.
1
Regiittr, Journal of Iniiuitriai and Enginrrrint Cktmislry, Vol. 16, p. 812 (1914).
704 Methods for Analysis of Coal.

2. Preparation of the Bomb. —The firing wire, if iron, should

be measured and coiled in a small spiral and connected between
the platinum terminals, using, if necessary, a piece of platinum
wire somewhat heavier than the iron wire, to make the con-
nection. The platinum and
the iron must both be clean. About
0.5 cc. ofwater should be placed in the bottom of the bomb to
saturate with moisture the oxygen used for combustion. When
the crucible is put in place in the bomb, the firing wire should
touch the coal or briquette of standard material. For the
combustion of standardizing samples iron wire is preferable to
platinum.
—
Bomb with Oxygen. Oxygen from the supply
3. Filling the

tank is be admitted slowly to avoid blowing the coal from the

to
crucible, and the pressure allowed to reach 20 atmospheres for
the larger bombs or about 30 atmospheres for the smaller bombs,
so that the bomb shall contain an amount of oxygen sufficient
for complete combustion, namely, at least 5 g. per gram of coal,
or other combustible. This method of filling will insure 4 per
cent of nitrogen in the larger bombs, irrespective of the nitrogen
contained in the oxygen.
4. Calorimeter Water. —
The calorimeter is to be filled with
the required amount of distilled water, depending upon the type
of calorimeter. The amount may be determined either by
measurement in a standardized flask or by weighing. The
amount must be kept the same as that used in standardization
of the apparatus.
5. Temperature Adjustments. —The initial temperature in the
calorimeter should be so adjusted that the final temperature,
after the combustion, will not be more than 1° C, preferably
about 0°.5 C, above that of the jacket, under which conditions
the total correction for heat gained from or lost to the surround-
ings will be small when the rise of temperature is 2 or 3° C. and
the effect of evaporation will also be small.
6. Firing Current. —
The electric current used for firing the
charge should be obtained from storage or dry cells having an
electro-motive force of not more than 12 volts, since a higher
voltage is liable to cause an arc between the firing terminals,
introducing additional heat, which cannot be measured with
certainty. The circuit should be closed by means of a switch
 Serial Designation: D 22-16. 705

which should remain closed for not more than 2 seconds. When
possible, it is recommended that an ammeter be used in the
firing circuit to indicate when the firing wire has burned out.
7. Method of Making an Observation. —
The bomb when ready
for firing, is tobe placed in the calorimeter, the firing wires
connected, the cover put in place and the stirrer and thermometer
so placed as not to be in contact with the bomb or container.
The stirrer is then started and after the thermometer reading
has become steady, not less than 2 minutes after the stirrer is
started, temperatures are read at 1 -minute intervals for 5 minutes
and the charge is then fired, the exact time of firing being noted.
Observations of temperature are then made at intervals depend-
ing upon the method computing the cooling cor-
to be used for
rection. When the temperature has reached its maximum and
is falling uniformly, a series of thermometer readings is taken at

1 -minute intervals for 5 minutes to determine the final cooling

rate.
8. Titration. —After a combustion the bomb is to be opened,
after allowing the gas to escape, and the inside examined for
traces of unburned material or sooty deposit. If these are
found, the observations shall be discarded. combustionIf the
appears complete, the bomb is to be rinsed out thoroughly and
the washings titrated with a standard alkali solution (1 cc. =
0.02173 g. HN0 3 = 5 calories) using methyl-orange or methyl-
red indicator, to determine the amount of acid formed. A
correction of 230 calories per gram of HN0 3 should be sub-
tracted from the total heat observed. An additional correction
of 1300 calories per gram of sulfur in the coal should be made
for the excess of difference in heats of formation of SO* and
aqueous H 2 SO< over the heat of formation of aqueous HNO«.

Computation of Results.
The following method of computation is recommended to
take the place of the Pfaundler or other similar formulas for
computing the cooling correction (radiation correction).
Observe (l) the rate of rise {r ) of the calorimeter tem-
x

perature in degrees per minute for 5 minutes before firing;

(2) the time (a) at which the last temperature reading is made
immediately before firing; (3) the time (b) when the rise of
706 Methods for Analysis of Coal.

temperature has reached six-tenths of its total amount (this

point can generally be determined by adding to the temperature
observed before firing, 60 per cent of the expected temperature 1

rise, and noting the time when this point is reached); (4) the

time (c) of a thermometer reading taken when the temperature

change has become uniform some 5 minutes after firing; (5) the
final rate of cooling (r 2 ) in degrees per minute for 5 minutes.
The rate fi is by the time b — a in minutes
to be multiplied
and tenths of a minute, and
product added (subtracted if
this
the temperature was falling at the time a) to the thermometer
reading taken at the time a. The rate r 2 is to be multiplied by
the time c — b and this product added (subtracted if the tempera-
ture was rising at the time c and later) to the thermometer read-
ing taken at the time c. The difference of the two thermometer
readings thus corrected, provided the corrections from the
certificate have already been applied, gives the total rise of
temperature due to the combustion. This multiplied by the
water equivalent of the calorimeter gives the total amount of
heat liberated. This result, corrected for the heats of formation
of HN0 3 and H2SO4 observed and for the heat of combustion of
the firing wire, when that is included, is to be divided by the
weight of the charge to find the heat of combustion in calories
per gram. Calories per gram multiplied by 1.8 give the British
thermal units per pound. (See example.)
The permissible differences in duplicate determinations are
as follows:
Per Cent.
Same analyst 0.3
Different analysts 0.5

In practice, the time b— a will be found so nearly constant for a given

calorimeter with the usual amounts of fuel that b need be determined only
occasionally.

1
When the temperature rise is not approximately known beforehand, it is only necessary
to take thermometer readings at 40, 50, 60 seconds (and possibly 70 seconds with some calori-
meters) after firing, and from these observations to find when the temperature rise had reached
60 per cent of the total. Thus, if the temperature at firing was 2°. 135, at 40 seconds 3 C .05, at
50 seconds 3°.92, at 60 seconds 4°. 16, and the final temperature wa3 4°.200, the total rise was
2°.07; 60 per cent of it was 1°.24. The temperature to be observed was then 2. I4+1°.24 =
3°.38. Referring to the observations at 40 and 50 seconds, the temperatures were respectively
3.05 and 3°.92. The time corresponding to the temperature of 3°.38 was therefore

3.38-3.05
40 H X 10-44 seconds.
3.92-3 05
 Serial Designation: D 22-16. 707

The be reduced to calories per gram or British thermal

results should
units per pound upon a sample
of dry coal, the moisture being determined
taken from the bottle at about the same time as the combustion sample is
taken.

Example.
Observations.

Water equivalent = 2550 g.

Weight of charge = 1.0535 g.
Approximate rise of temperature expected = 3°.2
60 per cent of approximate rise = 1 °.9

Time. Thermometer Readings. Corrected Temperature

(or corrected Beckmann thermometer readings).

10-21 15°. 244 Thermometer corrections taken from the certificate.

22 .250
23 .255
24 .261
25 .266
(a) 26 .272 15°. 276
Charge fired
(b) 27.2 17°. 2<*

31 18°. 500 18°. 497

32 .498
33 .497
34 .498
35 .494
36 .493

Computation.

n= 0°. 028-^-5 =0°.0056 per minute, b — a = 1.2 minutes.

The corrected initial temperature is
o
15 .276+0°.0056X1.2 = 15°.283
rj = 0°. 007 -7-5=0°. 0014 per minute; c-b = 3.8 minutes
The corrected final temperature is
18°. 497 4-0.0014X3 8 . = 18° 502
.

Total rise 18°. 502 -15°. 283 - 3°. 219

Total calories 2550X3.219 = 8209
Titration, etc —7

Calories from 1.0535 g. coal 8202

Calories per gram 7785
or British thermal units per pound 14013

*Ttae Initial temperature is 15'.27; 60 ptr cent of the expected rise is 1°.9. The reading
to observe Is then 17°.2.
708 Methods for Analysis or Coal.

Theresults obtained by the above method of computation and determina-

tion the total heat of combustion at constant volume, with the water in
is

the products of combustion condensed to liquid at the temperature of the

calorimeter, that is, about 20 to 35° C.
Net heat of combustion at 20°, shall refer to results corrected for latent
heat of vaporization, as follows:
Total heat of combustion in B. t. u. — 1040 (hydrogen X9)«net heat of
combustion in B. t. u. per pound.
Also
Total heat of combustion in calories — 580 (hydrogen X 9) net heat of
combustion in calories per gram.

NOTE3.
For anthracite, coke and coal of high ash content, which do not readily
burn completely, the following procedure is recommended:
The inside of the crucible is lined completely with ignited asbestos in a
thin layer pressed well down into the angles. The coal is then sprinkled
evenly over the surface of the asbestos. Otherwise the procedure is as pre-
viously described.
The method of computing the "cooling correction" described in Technical
Paper No. 8, Bureau of Mines, pages 28 to 32, may also be used.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHODS
FOR
LABORATORY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS OF COKE.

Serial Designation: D 37 - 18.

These methods are issued under the fixed designation D 37; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1916; Adopted, 1918.

DETERMINATION OF TOTAL MOISTURE

AND
PREPARATION OF LABORATORY SAMPLES.

Apparatus.
Galvanized-Iron Pans 24 by 24 by 4 in. Deep. —For total
moisture determination.
—
Balance or Solution Scale. For weighing the galvanized-
iron pans with samples. It should have a capacity of 10 kg. and
be sensitive to 1 g.
Jaw Crusher.—For crushing coarse samples to pass a 4
mesh sieve.
Roll Crusher. — For reducing the 4-mesh product to 10-mesh.
Abbi Ball Mill or Hard-Steel Diamond Mortar. — For reducing
the 10-mesh product to 60-mesh. The porcelain jars for the ball
mill should be approximately 9 in. in diameter and 10 in. high.
The flint pebbles should be smooth, hard and well rounded. .

A Large Riffle Sampler, with f or \-in. Divisions. For —

reducing the 4-mesh sample to 5 lb. (Fig. l).

(709)
710 Methods for Analysis of Coke.

A Small Riffle Sampler, with I or \-in. Divisions. — For

dividing down the 10 and 60-mesh material to a laboratory
sample.
An 8-in. 60-mesh Sieve with Cover and Receiver.
Containers for Shipment to Laboratory.—-Samples in which
the moisture content is important should always be shipped in
moisture-tight containers. A galvanized-iron or tin can with
air-tight friction top or a screw top which is sealed with a rubber
gasket and adhesive tape is best adapted to this purpose. Glass
fruit jars sealed with rubber gaskets may be used, but require

Fig. 1. —Riffle Sampler. (Bulletin No. 9, Geological Survey of Ohio, p. 213.)

very careful packing to avoid breakage in transit. Samples in

which the moisture content is of no importance need no special
protection from loss of moisture.
—
Oven, Stove or Hot Plate. For drying coke samples in the
determination of total moisture. If an oven is used it should
have openings provided for natural ventilation and should be
capable of being regulated between 104 and 200° C. If the coke
is dried on a stove or hot plate a thermometer should be placed

in it, and care exercised that the temperature does not exceed
200° C. at any point in the pan of coke.
 Serial Designation: D 37-18. 711

Method.
Total Moisture Determination. —Dry the entire sample
received at the laboratory without any preliminary crushing to
constant weight at a temperature of not less than 104 nor more
than 200° C. 1
Calculate the loss in weight to percentage of moisture, which
shall constitute the total moisture in the coke as received at
the laboratory.
The allowable difference in duplicate determinations by the
same analyst is 0.5 per cent.
—
Reduction of Sample. Crush the dried sample mechanically
with a jaw or roll crusher, or by hand on a chilled iron or hard-
steel plate by impact of a hard bar or sledge, avoiding all rubbing
action, as otherwise the ash content will be materially increased
by the addition of iron from the sampling apparatus, even though
hardened iron or steel is used. Continue the crushing until all
the sample passes through a 4-mesh screen, mix and quarter
this to not less than 5 lb.; again crush the 5-lb. sample to a
fineness of 10-mesh; mix and quarter to 400 g. Transfer this
400-g. portion to the porcelain jar of an Abbe ball mill and pul-
verize to 60-mesh. When pulverization is complete, pour the
contents of the jar on a £-in. screen and separate the sample
from the pebbles by shaking the screen. Reduce the quantity
of sample by quartering or riffling to about 50 g. Pass the entire
50-g. portion through a 60-mesh sieve, pulverizing any coarse
particles in a diamond mortar, and mix with remainder of sample,
preserving the sample for analysis in a rubber-stoppered glass
bottle.
In case a ball mill is not available for fine grinding, quarter
the 5-lb. 10-mesh sample to 200 g. and pulverize to 60-mesh,
by impact in a hard-steel diamond mortar. The use of rub-
bing surfaces such as a disk pulverizer or a bucking board is

never permissible for grinding coke.

Notes.
The accuracy of the method of preparing laboratory samples should b«
checked frequently by resampling the rejected portions and preparing a
duplicate sample. The ash in the two samples should not differ more than
0.4 per cent.

1
Experiments made at the Bureau of Mines have shown that results checking within
0.5 per cent are obtained between these temperature limits.
712 Methods for Analysis of Coke.

DETERMINATION OF MOISTURE.

Apparatus.
Moisture Oven. —An
ordinary drying oven with openings
for natural air circulation and capable of temperature regula-
tion between limits of 104 and 110° C. may be used.
—
Capsules with Covers. A convenient form, which allows
the ash determination to be made on the same sample, is a
No. 2 porcelain capsule, £ in. deep and If in. in diameter.

"A~

IS.'
16

_y

Fig. 2. —Porcelain Capsule with

Flat Aluminum Cover.

This is to be used with a well-fitting flat aluminum cover, illus-

trated in Fig. 2.
Platinum crucibles or glass capsules with ground-glass caps
may also be used. They should be as shallow as possible, con-
sistent with convenient handling.

Method.
Heat the empty capsules under the conditions at which the
coke is to be dried, stopper or cover, cool over concentrated
H S0
2 4, sp. gr. 1.84, for 30 minutes, and weigh. Transfer to
the capsule an amount slightly in excess of 1 g. and bring to
 Serial Designation: D 37-18. 713

exactly 1 g. in weight (±0.5 mg.) by quickly removing the

excess weight of coke with a spatula.
Place the capsules, uncovered, in a pre-heated oven (at
104 to 110° C). Close the oven at once and heat for 1 hour.
Then open the oven, cover the capsules quickly and place them
in a desiccator over concentrated 2 S0 4 H
When cool, weigh.
.

The percentage moisture in the 60-mesh sample shall be

used to calculate the other results to a dry basis.
The permissible differences in duplicate determinations
are as follows:
Pm Cent.

Same analyst 0.2

Different analysts 0.3

DETERMINATION OF ASH.

Apparatus.
Gas or Electric Muffle Furnace or Meker Burner. The —
muffle should have good air circulation and be capable of having
itstemperature regulated to not exceed 950° C.
Porcelain Capsules. —
No. 2 porcelain capsules, | in. deep
and if in. in diameter, or similar shallow dishes or platinum
crucibles.

Method.
Place the capsules containing the dried coke from the mois-
ture determination in a muffle furnace or over a burner, and
heat to redness at such a rate as to avoid mechanical loss. Fin-
ish the ignition to constant weight (±0.001 g.) at a temperature
not exceeding 950° C. Cool in a desiccator and weigh.
The permissible differences in duplicate determinations
are as follows:
Per Cknt.
Same analyst 0.2
Different analysts 0.3
714 Methods for Analysis of Coke.

Notes.
Before replacing the capsules in the muffle for ignition to constant weight
the ash should be stirred with a platinum or nichrome wire. Stirring once
or twice before the weighing hastens complete ignition.
first

Test the ash for unburned carbon, by moistening it with alcohol; any
carbon remaining will show as black particles.

DETERMINATION OP VOLATILE MATTER.

Apparatus.
Platinum Crucible with Tightly Fitting Cover. —The crucible
should be of 10-cc. capacity, with capsule cover having thin
flexible sides fitting down into crucible. Or the double- crucible
method may be used, in which the sample
is placed in a 10 or

20-cc. platinum crucible, which is then covered with another

crucible of such a size that it will fit closely to the sides of the
outer crucible, and its bottom will rest \ to \ in. above the bot-
tom of the outer crucible.
Tube Furnace; or a Gas or Electrically
Vertical Electric
—
Heated Muffle Furnace. The furnace may be of the form shown
in Fig. 3. It is to be regulated to maintain a temperature of
950° C. (±20° C.) in the crucible, as shown by a thermocouple
kept in the furnace. A Meker burner may be used, if satis-
factory to both parties to the contract.

Method.
Weigh g. of the coke in a weighed 10-cc. platinum cru-
1

cible, with capsule cover and place on platinum or

close
nichrome-wire supports in the furnace chamber, which must be
at a temperature of 950° C. (±20° C). After the crucible
has been heated 2 or 3 minutes tap the cover lightly to more
perfectly seal the crucible and thus guard against the admis-
sion of air. After heating exactly 7 minutes, remove the cru-
cible from the furnace and, without disturbing the cover, allow
it to cool in a desiccator. Weigh as soon as cold. The loss
of weight minus moisture equals the volatile matter.
 Serial Designation: D 37-18. 715

<Ni- chrome
Asbestos Plate

Platinum rhodium-

Fig. 3. —Electric Tube Furnace forDetermining Volatile Matter. For

110-volt Alternating Current, 60 of Nichrome Wire, No. 17 B. & S.
ft.

gage will give the required temperature. The temperature must be

controlled by an external resistance. (Technical Paper No. 76, Bureau
of Mines, p. 21.)
716 Methods for Analysis of Coke.

The permissible differences in duplicate determinations

are as follows:
Pbr Cbnt.
Same analyst 0.2
Different analysts 0.4

Alternate Method, Using Meker Burner.

Weigh 1 the coke in a weighed 10 or 20-cc. platinum
g. of
crucible, closewith capsule cover or another crucible as described
above under " apparatus," and place in the flame of a No. 4
Meker burner, having approximately an outside diameter at
the top of 25 mm. and giving a flame not less than 15 cm. high.
The temperature should be 950° C. (=*= 20° C), as determined
by placing a thermocouple through the perforated cover, which
for this purpose may be of nickel or asbestos. The junction of
the couple should be placed in contact with the center of the
bottom of the crucible; or the temperature may be indicated
by the fusion of pure K 2 Cr0 4 in the covered crucible (fusion of
K 2 Cr0 4 940° C). The crucible is placed in the flame about
,

1 cm. above the top of the burner and the heating is continued

7 minutes. Where the gas pressure is variable it is well to use

a U-tube attachment to the burner.

DETERMINATION OF FIXED CARBON.

Compute fixed carbon as follows:

100 — (moisture -f-ash+ volatile matter) = percentage of fixed carbon.

DETERMINATION OF SULFUR BY THE ESCHKA METHOD.

Apparatus.
Gas or Electric Muffle Furnace, or Burners. For igniting —
coke with the Eschka mixture and for igniting the BaSO*.
 Serial Designation: D 37 - 18. 717

Porcelain, Silica, or Platinum Crucibles or Capsules. —For

igniting coke with the Eschka mixture.
No. 1 porcelain capsule, 1 in. deep and 2 in. in diameter.
This capsule, because of its shallow form, presents more surface
for oxidation and is more convenient to handle than the ordinary
form of crucible.
No. 1 porcelain crucibles, shallow form, and platinum
crucibles of similar size may be used. Somewhat more time is
required to burn out the coke owing to the deeper form, than
with the shallow capsules described above.
No. or 00 porcelain crucibles, or platinum, alundum or
silica crucibles of similar size are to be used for igniting the
BaS0 4 .

Solutions and Reagents.

Barium Chloride.— Dissolve 100 g. of BaCl 2 -2H 2 in 1000 cc.
of distilled water.
Saturated Bromine Water. —Add an excess of bromine to
1000 cc. of distilled water.
Eschka Mixture. —Thoroughly mix 2 parts (by weight) of
light calcined MgO and 1 part of anhydrous Na C0 8
2 . Both
materials should be free as possible from sulfur.
Methyl Orange. —Dissolve 0.02 in 100 of hot g. cc. distilled
water and filter.
Hydrochloric Acid. — Mix 500 of HC1, andcc. sp. gr. 1.20,
500 of
cc. water.
distilled
Normal Hydrochloric Acid. — Dilute 80 of HC1, cc. sp. gr.
1.20,to with
1 liter water. distilled
Sodium Carbonate. —A saturated solution, approximately
60 g. of crystallized or 22 g. of anhydrous Na CO 2 a in 100 cc. of
distilled water.
Sodium-Hydroxide Solution.— Dissolve 100 g. of NaOH in
1 liter of distilled
water. This solution may be used in place
of the Na 2 C0 3 solution.

Method.
Preparation of Sample and Mixture. —Thoroughly mix on
glazed paper, 1 g. of 60-mesh coke and 3 g. of Eschka mixture.
Transfer to a No. 1 porcelain capsule, 1 in. deep and 2 in. in
718 Methods for Analysis of Coke.

diameter, or a No. 1 porcelain crucible or platinum crucible of

similar size, and cover with about 1 g. of Eschka mixture.
Ignition. —On account of the amount of sulfur contained in
artificial gas, the crucible shall be heated over an alcohol, gaso-
line or natural gas flame, as in procedure (a) below, or in a gas
or electrically heated muffle, as in procedure (b) below. The
use of artificial gas for heating the coke and Eschka mixture
is permissible only when crucibles are heated in a muffle.
(a) Heat the
crucible, placed in a slanting position on a
triangle, over alow flame at first, then gradually increase the
temperature and stir occasionally until all the black particles
disappear, which is an indication of the completeness of the
procedure.
(b) Place the crucible in a warm muffle and gradually raise

the temperature to 870-925° C. (cherry-red heat) in about

\ hour. Maintain this maximum temperature until on stirring
all black particles have disappeared.
Subsequent Treatment. —
Remove and empty the contents
into a 200-cc. beaker and digest with 100 cc. of hot water for
\ to f hour, with occasional stirring. Filter and wash the insol-
uble matter by decantation. After several washings in this
manner, transfer the insoluble matter to the filter and wash
5 times, keeping the mixture well agitated. Treat the filtrate,
amounting to about 250 cc, with 10 to 20 cc. of saturated
bromine water, make slightly acid with HC1 and boil to expel the
liberated bromine. Make just neutral to methyl orange with
NaOH or Na 2 C0 3 solution, then add 1 cc. of normal HC1. Boil
again and add slowly from a pipette with constant stirring 10 cc.
of a 10-per-cent solution of BaCl 2 -2H 2 0. Continue boiling for
15 minutes and allow to stand for at least 2 hours, or preferably
overnight, at a temperature just below boiling. Filter through
an ashless filter paper and wash with hot distilled water until an
AgN0 3 solution shows no precipitate with a drop of the filtrate
Place the wet filter containing the precipitate of BaS0 4 in a
weighted platinum, porcelain, silica or alundum crucible, allow-
ing a free access of air by folding the paper over the precipitate
loosely to prevent spattering. Smoke the paper off gradually
and at no time allow it to burn with flame. After the paper is
 Serial Designation: D 37-18. 719

practicallyconsumed raise the temperature to approximately

925° C. and heat to constant weight.
The residue of MgO, etc., after leaching, should be dis-
solved in HC1 and tested with great care for sulfur. When an
appreciable amount is found this should be determined quanti-
tatively. The amount of sulfur retained is by no means a neg-
ligible quantity. 1
—
Blanks and Corrections. In all cases a correction must be
applied either (l) by running a blank exactly as described
above, using the same amounts of all reagents that were em-
ployed in the regular determination, or, more surely, (2) by
determining a known amount of sulfate added to a solution of
the reagents after these have been put through the prescribed
series of operations. procedure is adopted and
If this latter
carried out, say, once a week or whenever a new supply of a
reagent must be used, and for a series of solutions covering the
range of sulfur content likely to be met with in coke, it is only
necessary to add or to subtract from the weigh t of BaS0 4 obtained
from a coke whatever deficiency or excess may have been found
in the appropriate "check" in order to obtain a result that is
more certain to be correct than if a "blank" correction as
determined by the former procedure is applied. This is due to
the fact that the solubility error for BaS0 4 is, for the amounts
of sulfur in question and the conditions of precipitation pre-
scribed, probably the largest one to be considered. BaS0 4 is
soluble 2 in acidsand even in pure water, and the solubility limit
is reached almost immediately on contact with the solvent.

Hence, in the event of using reagents of very superior quality

or of exercising more than ordinary precautions, there may be no
apparent "blank," because the solubility limit of the solution
for BaS0 4 has not been reached, or at any rate not exceeded.

(Weight of BaS0 — blank) X 13.73= percentage

4 of sulfur.

The permissible differences in duplicate determinations

are as follows:
Per Cent.
Same analyst . 03
Di/Terent analysts . 05

i Journal, Am. Chem. Soc.. Vol. 21, p. 1128 (1899).

• Journal. Am. Chem. Soc.. Vol. 32. p. 588 (1910); Vol. 33. p. 829 (1911).
720 Methods for Analysis of Coke.

DETERMINATION OF PHOSPHORUS IN ASH.

Method No. 1. Cases. To the ash from 5 g.

To Cover all —
of coke in a platinum capsule is added 10 cc. of HN0 3 and 3 to 5
cc. of HF. The liquid is evaporated and the residue fused with
3 g. of Na 2 C0 3 If unburned carbon is present 0.2 g. of NaN0 3
.

is mixed with carbonate. The melt is leached with water and

the solution filtered. The residue is ignited, fused with Na C0
2 3

alone, the melt leached and the solution filtered. The combined
filtrates, held in a flask, are just acidified with HN0 3 and con-
centrated to a volume of 100 cc. To the solution, brought to a
temperature of 85° C, is added 50 cc. of molybdate solution and

the flask shaken for 10 minutes. If the precipitate does not

is

form promptly and subside rapidly, add enough 4 N0 3 to NH

cause it to do so. The precipitate is washed six times, or until
free from acid, with a 2-per-cent solution of KN0 3 then returned ,

to the flask and titrated with standard NaOH solution. The

alkali solution may well be made equal to 0.00025 g. of phos-
phorus per cubic centimeter, or 0.005 per cent, for a 5-g. sample of
coke, and is 0.995 of one-fifth normal. Or the phosphorus in 1

the precipitate is determined by reduction and titration of the

molybdenum with permanganate.
Note on Method No. 1. —The advantage of the use of HF in the initial
attack of the ash lies in the resulting removal of
Fusion with alkali silica.

carbonate is necessary for the elimination of titanium, which if present and

not removed will contaminate the phospho-molybdate and is said to some-
times retard its precipitation.

Method No. —When

titanium is so low as to offer no
2.
objection, the ash decomposed as under method No. 1, but
is

evaporation is carried only to a volume of about 5 cc. The

solution is diluted with water to 30 cc, boiled and filtered. If

the washings are turbid they are passed again through the
filter. The residue is ignited in a platinum crucible, fused with
a little Na C0
2 3, the melt dissolved in HN0 3 and its solution, if

clear, added to the main one. If not clear it is filtered. The

subsequent procedure is as under method No. 1. The fusion of
the residue may be dispensed with in routine work on a given
coke if it is certain that is free from phosphorus.
» Ulmann and Buch. Chemical Engineer, VoL 10. p. 130 (1909).
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHODS
FOR
SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS OF CREOSOTE OIL.

Serial Designation: D 38-18.

These methods are issued under the fixed designation D 38; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Proposed as Tentative, 1915; Adopted, 1917; Revised, 1918.

I. SAMPLING.
1. Wherever the oil is being loaded or discharged by means continuous-
of a pump the following method shall be used: Drlp Sam P le -

A £-in. sampling pipe shall be inserted in the line through

which the oilis being pumped, on the discharge side of the

pump, preferably in a rising section of the pipe line. This

sampling pipe shall extend one-half way to the center of the
main pipe and with the inner open end of the sampling pipe
turned at an angle of 90 deg. and facing the flow of the liquid.
This pipe shall be provided with a plug cock and shall discharge
into a receiver of 50 to 100 gal. capacity. The plug cock shall
be so adjusted that, with a steady continuous flow of the oil,
the receiver shall be filled in the time required to pump the
entire shipment. The receiver shall be provided with a steam
coil sufficient to keep the contents at a temperature not exceed-
ing 120° F. Immediately upon completion of the pumping, the
(721)
 722 Methods for Analysis of Creosote Oil.

contents of the receiver shall be very thoroughly agitated and

a duplicate 1-qt. sample taken immediately for the test. The
amount of the drip sample collected shall be not less than one
gallon for each 1000 gal. of oil handled, except in the case of
large boat shipments, where a maximum of 100 gal. is sufficient.

II. ANALYSIS.
(A) Water.
Apparatus. 2. (a) Still. —
A vertical, cylindrical copper still, with
removable flanged top and yoke, of the form and approximate
dimensions shown^inJFigJl, shall be used.

[<— 9.5cm.-—>\

Fig. 1.—Copper Still.

(b) Thermometer. —The

standard distillation thermometer,
as specified under " Distillation," Section 9 (e), shall be used.
(c) Condenser. —
A copper trough condenser shall be used,
with straight-walled glass tube, having approximately the form
and dimensions shown in Fig. 2.
(d) Separatory Funnel. —A separatory funnel of the form
shown in Fig. 2 shall be used, having a total capacity of 120 cc,
and the outlet graduated in fifths of a cubic centimeter.
 A

Serial Designation: D 38 - 18. 723

3. The apparatus up as shown

shall be set in Fig. 2. Assembling
««
When any ii r
measurable amount of water
•
is present in the
i
Apparatus.
4.
w ater Te9t
distillatebelow 210° C. on testing in accordance with Part (D)
on "Distillation," the oil and water in this fraction shall be
separated, if possible, and measured separately. If more than
2 per cent of water is present, or if the water is apparently
present to an extent in excess of 2 per cent, but an accurate

<••- Thermometer

U-- 38.75cm. ->|

Connecting
m / Tube

Condenser
Ring
Burner
Separatory
Funnel,
( Capacity
120 cc.) <*0>

°<Jt>
1
v Copper Graduated
Still in 4 cc.
Y 95cm

Fig. 2. —Assembled Apparatus for Water Test.

separationis impossible, the percentage of water present shall

be determined by the following method, and the water-free oil

so obtained shall be used in the distillation test:
Measure 200 cc. of oil in graduated cylinder, and pour into
copper still, allowing the cylinder to drain into the still for
several minutes. Attach lid and clamp, using a paper gasket
slightly wet with oil around the flange of the still. Apply heat
by means of the ring burner, which shall be placed just above the
 —

724 Methods for Analysis of Creosote Oil.

level of the oil in the still at the beginning of the test, and grad-
ually lowered when most of the water has distilled over. Con-
tinue the distillation until the vapor temperature, indicated by
the thermometer with the bulb opposite the offtake of the
connecting tube, reaches 205° C. Collect distillate in separatory
funnel. When
the distillation is completed, and a clear separa-
tion of waterand oil in the funnel has taken place, read the
water by volume and draw off; and return any light oil distilled

Wafer Inlet—•-> Water Outlet

*—Hook to Support Wire

[ Condenser

\,..Cap of Filter Paper or

Alundum Ware
-Filter Cup

- Wire Support for

Filter Cup

_i__i_l
I

|<— 6Scm. —
>j

Fig. 3. —Extraction Flask.

over with the water to the oil in the still. The dehydrated oil
from the still shall be used for the distillation test.

(B) Matter Insoluble in Benzol.

Apparatus. 5. (a) Extractor. —
The extractor may be of the form shown
in Fig. 3, or any similar form in which the oil is subjected to
direct washing by the boiling vapors of the solvent.
(b) Filtering Medium. —
The filtering medium may be either
two thicknesses of S. & S. No. 575 hardened filter paper, 15 cm.
in diameter, arranged in cup shape by folding symmetrically;
 Serial Designation: D 38-18. 725

or alundum thimbles, flat bottom, 30x80 RA 98. If filter

papers are used, prior to using they shall be soaked in benzol
to remove any grease, dried in a steam oven and kept in a desic-
cator until ready to be used. The filter-paper cup may be sus-
pended in the extractor flask by a wire basket hung from two
small hooks on the under surface of the metal cover of the
flask. If the alundum thimble is used it may be supported
by making two perforations in the top of the thimble, and sus-
pending from the cover by German silver or platinum wires.
6. Weigh 10 g. of dry oil in 100-cc. beaker. Add about « insoluble in
50 cc. of pure benzol and transfer at once to the filter cup. Benzo1 " Test
The -

filter cup or thimble is previously weighed, and the paper

cup shall always be kept in a weighing bottle until ready for

use. Wash
out the beaker with benzol, passing all washings
through the cup, and place latter at once in the extraction
filter

apparatus. Extractor shall contain a suitable quantity of pure

benzol. Sufficient heat to boil the solvent shall be provided
by means of an electric heater or a steam bath. Continue the
extraction until the descending solvent is practically colorless,
and remove the cup and dry in steam oven until all solvent
filter

is driven off; cool in desiccator and weigh. The balance used

for this purpose should be accurate to 0.5 mg.

(C) Specific Gravity.

7. (a) Hydrometer. —The hydrometer shall be of the form Appuatut.

shown in Fig. 4. It shall have the following dimensions:

Length of stem 125 mm.; permissible variation, 12.5 mm.

" bulb " "
105 " 10.5 "
" scale " " " "
80 8.0
" " " "
Diameter of stem 6 0.5
" bulb " " " "
22 2.0

A set of two hydrometers with ranges 1.00 to 1.08 and 1.07

to 1.15 will suffice.
(b) Cylinder. —The cylinder shall be of the form shown in
Fig. 5. It shall have the following dimenions:

Length 300 mm.; permissible variation, 30 mm.

" "
Diameter 32 " 3 "
 726 Methods for Analysis of Creosote Oil.

Specific 8. The oil be brought to a temperature of 38° C.

shall
Gravity Test.
(100° F.), and the determination shall be made at that tem-
perature unless the oil is not entirely liquid at 38° C. In case the
oil requires to be brought to a higher temperature than 38° C. in
order to render it completely fluid, it shall be tested at the lowest
temperature at which it is completely fluid, and a correction made
by adding 0.0008 to the observed specific gravity for each degree
Centigrade above 38° C. at which the test is made. This cor-
rection factor does not apply with equal accuracy to all oils,

~\_
6 mm.

E ¥._

-*—
A 11 ->
mm.

\<22A
mm.

^Shot
Fig. 4. —Hydrometer. Fig. 5. —Cylinder.

but serious error due to its use will be avoided if the foregoing
precaution is observed, with respect to avoiding unnecessarily
high temperature. Before taking the specific gravity the oil
in the cylinder should be stirred thoroughly with a glass rod,
and this rod when withdrawn from the liquid should show no
solid particles at the instant of withdrawal. Care should be
taken that the hydrometer does not touch the sides or bottom
of the cylinder when the reading is taken, and that the oil
surface is free from froth and bubbles.
 Serial Designation: D 38-18. 727

(D) Distillation.

9. (a) Retort. —
This shall be a tubulated glass retort of the Apparatus
form and approximate dimensions shown in Fig. 6, with a
capacity of 250 to 290 cc. The capacity shall be measured by
placing the retort with the bottom of the bulb and the end of the
offtake in the same horizontal plane, and pouring water into the
bulb through the tubulature until it overflows the offtake. The
amount remaining in the bulb shall be considered its capacity.
(b) Condenser Tube. —
The condenser tube shall be a suitable
form of tapered glass tubing of the following dimensions:
Diameter of small end.... 12.5 mm.; permissible variation, 1.5 mm.
" large " " " " "
.... 28.5 3.0
" "
Length 360.0 " 4.0 "

..Approx.li9cw.

—Appnx. 2.85cm.

Capacity of Bulb
?SOtv290cc.

Fig. 6. —Retort for Distillation Test.

(c) Shield. —An abestos shield of the form and approximate
dimensions shown in Fig. be used to protect the retort
7 shall
from air currents and This may be covered
to prevent radiation.
with galvanized iron, as such an arrangement is more convenient
and more permanent.
(d) Receivers. —
Erlenmeyer flasks of 50 to 100-cc. capacity
are the most convenient form.
(e) —
Thermometer. The thermometer shall conform to the
following requirements:
The thermometer shall be made of thermometric glass of a
quality equivalent to suitable grades of Jena or Corning make.
It shallbe thoroughly annealed. It shall be filled above the
mercury with inert gas which will not act chemically on or con-
728 Methods for Analysis of Creosote Oil.

taminate the mercury. The pressure of the gas shall be suffi-

cient to prevent separation of the mercury column at all tem-

peratures of the scale. There shall be a reservoir above the
final graduation large enough so that the pressure will not
become excessive at the highest temperature. The thermometer
shall be finished at the top with a small glass ring or button
suitable for attaching a tag. Each thermometer shall have for

Fig. 7. —Asbestos Shield.

identification the maker's name, a serial number and the letters

"A. S. T. M. distillation."
The thermometer be graduated from
shall to 400° C. at
intervals of 1° C. Every fifth graduation shall be longer than
the intermediate ones, and every tenth graduation beginning
at zero shall be numbered. The graduation marks and numbers
shall be clear-cut and distinct.
The thermometer shall conform to the following dimensions:
 Serial Designation: D 38-18. 729

Total length, maximum 385 mm.

Diameter of stem 7 " ; permissible variation, 0.5
Diameter of bulb, minimum 5 " ; and shall not exceed diam-
eter of stem.
Length of bulb 12.5" ; permissible variation, 2 5 . mm.
"
Distance, 0° to bottom of bulb 30 " ; 5 "
"
Distance. to 400° 295 " ; 10

The accuracy of the thermometer when delivered to the

purchaser shall be such that when tested at full immersion the
maximum error shall not exceed the following:
From to 200° C 0°.5 C
" 200 to 300° C 1°.0 C.
" 300 to 375° C 1°.5 C.

The sensitiveness of the thermometer shall be such that

when cooled to a temperature of 74° C. below the boiling point of
water at the barometric pressure at the time of test and plunged
into free flow of steam, the meniscus shall pass the point 10° C.
below the boiling point of water in not more than six seconds.
10. The on a tripod or rings over Assembling
retort shall be supported
two sheets 20-mesh gauze,
of 6 square, as shown in Fig. A >pa r atus {o
° in. -i '
o 8. It Distillation
J >
L 1 ,
Test,
shall be connected to the condenser tube by a tight cork joint.
The thermometer shall be inserted through a cork in the tubulature
with the bottom of the bulb \ in. from the surface of the oil in the
retort. The exact location of the thermometer bulb shall be deter-
mined by placing a vertical rule graduated in divisions not exceed-
ing yV in. back of the retort when the latter is in position for the
test, and sighting the level of the liquid and the point for the

bottom of the thermometer bulb. The distance from the bulb

of the thermometer to the outlet end of the condenser tube
shall be not more than 24 nor less than 20 in. The burner
should be protected from draughts by a suitable shield or
chimney (see Fig. 7).
Exactly 100 g. of oil shall be weighed into the retort,
11. Distillation Test,
the apparatus assembled and heat applied. The distillation
shall be conducted at the rate of at least one drop and not
more than two drops per second, and the distillate collected in
weighed receivers. The condenser tube shall be warmed when-
ever necessary to prevent accumulation of solid distillates.
730 Methods for Analysis or Creosote Oil.

Fractions shall be collected at the following points: 210, 235,

270, 315 and 355° C. The receivers shall be changed as the
mercury passes the dividing temperature for each fraction.
When the temperature reaches 355°, the flame shall be removed
from the retort, and any oil which has condensed in the offtake
shallbe drained in the 355° fraction.
Theresidue shall remain in the retort with the cork and the
thermometer in position until no vapors are visible; it shall
then be weighed. If the residue is to be further tested it shall

<-Jhermometer

Shield.

Retort...

Fig. 8. —Assembled Apparatus for Distillation Test.

then be poured directly into the brass collar used in the float test1
or into a tin box and covered and allowed to cool to air tem-
perature. If the residue becomes so cool that it cannot be
poured readily from the retort, it shall be re-heated by holding
the bulb of the retort in hot water or steam, and not by the appli-
cation of flame.
For weighing the receivers and fractions, a balance accurate
to at least 0.05 g. shall be used.

»See Part {F), "Float Test of Residue.'

 Serial Designation: D 38-18. 731

During the progress of the distillation the thermometer

shall remain in its original position. No correction shall be
made for the emergent stem of the thermometer.
When any measurable amount of water is present in the
distillate it shall be separated as nearly as possible and reported
separately, all results being calculated on a basis of dry oil.
When more than 2 per cent of water is present, water-free oil
shallbe obtained by separately distilling a larger quantity of oil,
returning to the oil any oil carried over with the water, and
using dried oil for the final distillation. (See Part (A), "Water
Test.")

(E) Specific Gravity of Fractions.

As specific gravity is an absolute physical determina-

12. Specific Gravity
°
tion, any recognized method which can be applied to the quantity
and quality of material at hand to be tested must be considered
satisfactory. The following methods are convenient and
accurate means for the relatively small amounts of oil available
in determining specific gravity of fractions to be tested.

Liquid Fractions.

13. The Westphal balance may be used. Apparatus.

14. be tested is liquid at a temperature not

If the fraction to Test,

exceeding 60° C, the Westphal balance can be used with con-

venience and rapidity. A special type of Westphal balance is
obtainable, designed for testing very small quantities. How-
ever, the ordinary type of Westphal balance can be adapted to
testing small fractions by the use of a special plummet. When
using the ordinary balance with the special plummet, extra care
is needed that the adjustment of the balance be accurately made. •
The plummet can readily be made in the laboratory from a
piece of ordinary glass tubing 7 mm. outside diameter, sealed at
the end, and melting into the glass where sealed a short platinum
wire. After cooling place 9 to 10 g. of mercury in the tube,
making a column 35 to 40 mm. high. Seal off the tube within
20 mm. of the top of the mercury column with blowpipe flame.
The plummet shall have a length of about 55 to 60 mm. over all,
and shall weigh between 10 and 12 g.
 732 Methods for Analysis of Creosote Oil.

Solid and Semi-solid Fractions.

Apparatus. 15. A pan of the form shown in Fig. 9, having the following
approximate dimensions, may be used:

Diameter of base » 20 mm.

Diameter of top 25 "
Depth 12 "
Diameter of wire 1 "
Total weight 7 g.

\*-2.5cm.-*\

Fig. 9. —Platinum or Nickel Pan.

The pan and wires are made of platinum or nickel.
Test. 16. Solid or semi-solid fractions of oil which cannot be
readily liquefied can be rapidly and accurately tested in this
apparatus by the usual method of weighing in air and in water.
The usual precautions of igniting the pan before use, and avoid-
%
ing the enclosure of air or water in the sample, should be observed.

Note. — The method for liquid fractions is usually applicable to the

fractions 235 to 315° C. and the method for solid and semi-solid fractions to
the fraction 315 to 355° C.

(F) Float Test of Residue.

Apparatus. 17. (a) Float or Saucer. —The be made

float or saucer shall
of aluminum, and shall be of the form and dimensions shown
in Fig. 10.
 .

Serial Designation: D 38-18. 733

(b) Conical Collar. —

The conical collar shall be made of
brass, and be of the form and dimensions shown in Fig. 1 1
shall
18. Place the brass collar with the small end on the brass Float Test

plate, which has been previously amalgamated with mercury

by first rubbing it with dilute solution of mercuric chloride or
nitrate and then with mercury. Pour the residue to be tested
into the collar direct from the retort, as described in Part (D)
on "Distillation," or heat it in a tin box on water or steam
bath, not by direct application of flame, and then pour into the
collar in any convenient way, until slightly more than level with
the top. The surplus may be removed after the material has cooled
to room temperature, by means of spatula or steel knife which

f0.95cm}\

Wall-.

0.13 cm

_¥_
i I

\*/.27cmr>\

Fig. 10. —Float or Saucer. Fig. 11.— Conical Collar.

has been slightly heated. Then place the collar and plate in
one of the tin cups containing ice water maintained at 5° C, and
leave in this bath for at least 15 minutes.
Meanwhile, fill the other cup about three-fourths full of
water and place on the tripod; heat the water to any desired
temperature at which the test is to be made. This temperature
should be accurately maintained, and should at no time through-
out the entire test be allowed to vary- more than 0°.5 C. from the
temperature specified.
After the material to be tested has been kept in the ice.
water for at least 15 minutes and not more than 30 minutes,
remove the collar with its contents from the plate and screw
 734 Methods for Analysis of Creosote Oil.

into the aluminum float, which is then immediately floated in

the warmed bath. As the plug of residue becomes wann and
fluid, it is forced upward and out of the collar, until the water
gains entrance to the saucer and causes it to sink.
The time in seconds between placing the apparatus on the
water and when the water breaks through the residue shall be
determined by means of a stop watch, and shall be taken as a
measure of the consistency of the material under examination.

(G) Coke Residue.

Apparatus. 19. Bulb. —The bulb shall be of hard glass, as shown in
Fig. 12, and shall have the following approximate dimensions:

Diameter of bulb 15 mm.

Length of vertical neck 10 "
Length of horizontal neck 20 "
Diameter of orifice 1 "

Coke Residue 20. Warm the bulb slightly to drive off all moisture, cool
in a desiccator,and weigh. Again heat the bulb by placing it
momentarily in an open Bunsen flame and place the tubular
underneath the surface of the oil to be tested and allow the bulb
to cool until sufficient oil is sucked in to fill

the bulb about two-thirds full.

Any globules of oil sticking to the inside

of the tubular should be drawn into the bulb
by shaking or expelled by slightly heating it,
and the outer surface should be carefully wiped
off and the bulb reweighed. This procedure
Fig. 12.—Coke .
n • , .,
about 1 g. of( oil.
. ,
,, will give
B
Cut a strip of thin asbestos paper about \ in.
wide and about 1 in. long, place it around the neck of the bulb and
catch the two free ends close up to the neck with a pair of crucible
tongs. The oil should then be distilled off as in making ordinary
oil distillation, starting with a very low flame and conducting

the distillation as fast as can be maintained without spurting.

When oil ceases to come over, the heat should be increased
until the highest temperature of the Bunsen flame^is attained,
the whole bulb being heated red hot until evolution of gas ceases,
 Serial Designation: D 38-18. 735

and any carbon sticking to the outside of the tubular is com-

pletely burned off. The bulb should then be cooled in a
desiccator and weighed and the percentage of coke residue
calculated to water-free oil.
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHODS
FOR
TESTING OF COTTON RUBBER-LINED HOSE.

Serial Designation: D 15-15.

These methods are issued under the fixed designation D 15; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915.

Methods for the Chemical Analysis of Rubber Lining.

I. SAMPLING.
Samples. 1. Samples shall be taken both as to number and location
at the discretion of the inspector.
Blanks. 2. Blank tests shall be run on all determinations and deduc-
tions made accordingly.
Checks. 3. In the event of any determination not falling within the

limits given in these methods of test, a duplicate determination

which shall agree within the limits specified shall be made and
the average value taken as the true value.
Preparation of 4. A sample of not less than 15 g., taking pieces from various
Sample.
parts of the rubber for analysis, shall be prepared. The backing
shall be buffed off before grinding.
Grinding. 5. The sample shall be cut into small pieces and run through

the grinder until all of it will pass a 20-mesh sieve. Care must
be taken that the grinder does not become appreciably warm.
(736)
 Serial Designation: D 15-15. 737

6. A strong magnet shall be passed through the sample to Removal of

Care ° f
remove any metal from the grinder, and the sample shall be g°° *e d
mixed thoroughly and put in tightly stoppered bottles. It shall
not be exposed to sunlight or heat.

II. REAGENTS.
7. Acetone shall be distilled not more than 10 days before Acetone,
use over anhydrous potassium carbonate, using the fraction
which distills at 56 to 57° C.
8. Alcoholic potash shall be of normal strength, made by Alcoholic Potash

dissolving the required amount of potassium hydroxide in

absolute alcohol the day before use and allowing to settle. Only
the clear solution shall be used.
9. Barium-chloride solution shall be made by dissolving Barium-Chloride
Solutlon>
100 g. of crystallized barium chloride in one liter of distilled
water and adding two or three drops of concentrated hydro-
chloric acid. If there is any insoluble matter or cloudiness the
solution shall be heated on the steam bath over night and filtered.
All reagents shall be of a purity equal to that called for
in Krauch's "Standard Chemical Reagents; their Purity and
Test."

III. ANALYSES.
10. The extraction apparatus shall conform to that shown Acetone Extract,
in Fig. 1. be heated so that the period of filling an
It shall
empty syphon cup with acetone and completely emptying it will
be between 2\ and Z\ minutes.
Two grams of the rubber shall be extracted continuously
with acetone for 8 hours, using a sample that has been prepared
within 24 hours. Distill off the acetone and dry the flask and
contents for 4 hours at 95 to 100° C. Desiccate until cool and
weigh. Continue to dry for 2-hour periods until constant weight is
obtained. In drying, place the flask on its side but at a sufficient
angle from the horizontal so that the extract does not appreciably
run down from the side of the flask.
11. Add to the flask containing the acetone extract 50 to Free Sulfur.
60 cc. of distilled water and 2 or 3 cc. of bromine (if the acetone
 738 Methods for Testing of Rubber-Le^ed Hose.

extract indicates a large amount of free sulfur the amount of

bromine should be increased). Heat gently on the steam bath
until the solution is practically colorlessand filter into a 400-cc.
beaker. Dilute with distilled water until the volume is about
400 cc. Cover the beaker with a watch glass, heat to boiling
on the steam bath, add 10 cc. of 10-per-cent barium-chloride
solution and allow the precipitate to stand over night. The next
day filter off the precipitate, ignite the filter paper and weigh.

SO-

'8 mm Outs.Diam. Block-

-j- Tin Tubing.

Bohemian Glass
\

Assay Flask
!

(All dimensions in millimeters.)

Fig. 1. — Extraction Apparatus.

Alcoholic-Potash 12. Dry the residue from the acetone extraction at 50 to

Extract.
60° C, put into a 200-cc. Erlenmeyer flask with 50 cc. of the
alcoholic KOH solution and 4 hours under a reflux
boil for
condenser. Filter the solution into a beaker and wash twice,
using each time 25 cc. of hot absolute alcohol and then wash
thoroughly with hot water. Evaporate the solution to approxi-
mate dryness, take up in warm water and transfer to a separatory
funnel Acidify with 15 cc. 5 normal HC1, using this to rinse the
 Serial Designation: D 15 - 15. 739

beaker. Add water to make the bulk of the solution

sufficient
100 cc. When cool add 40 cc. of ether, using it to rinse the beaker

in 20-cc. portions. Shake the aqueous and ethereal solutions

thoroughly. After complete separation, draw off the aqueous
solution and treat in another separatory funnel, with a fresh
20-cc. portion of ether. Continue to shake the aqueous solution
with fresh portions of ether until a colorless portion has been
obtained, then shake out twice more. Unite the ethereal solu-
tions and wash with successive additions of water, continuing
twice after the water shows no acid reaction. Filter through a
plug of extracted cotton into a tared flask, wash the filter and
funnel with ether, evaporate the ether without boiling and dry
the residue to constant weight at 95 to 100° C. Cool in a
desiccator and weigh.
13. Mix a 0.5-g. sample with 4 g. of 2Na2 and 6 g. of Total Sulfur.

K C0
2 3 in a dry 15-cc. iron crucible. Cover and heat gradually
until the mixture fuses, proceeding cautiously, as rapid heating
willcause an explosion. Then bring to quiet fusion for 15 to 20
minutes, applying heat so as to avoid contamination with
sulfur fumes. Rotate the crucible while the melt solidifies.
When put crucible and cover into a casserole containing
cool,
200 cc. of water; add 5 to 10 cc. of bromine water and boil until
the melt is dissolved. Allow the precipitate to settle, decant the
liquid through a thick filter and wash the residue with hot water.
Acidify the nitrate with HC1, evaporate to dryness and dehydrate
if silica is present; add 2 cc. of concentrated HC1, take up in
water, filter and wash, making the total volume about 400 cc.
Heat to boiling and add slowly a slight excess of hot 10-per-cent
barium-chloride solution. Allow to stand over night, filter, wash,
ignite, weigh the BaS0 4 and calculate to sulfur.
14. Weigh out a 1-g. sample in a porcelain crucible, heat in a Ash.
muffle furnace, the temperature of which is carefully regulated so
that no material amount of visible products are given off. After
the mas^ is charred the temperature shall be raised sufficiently
to burn the carbon. The whole process shall be conducted at as
low a temperature as possible. At the end of this operation the
crucible shall be removed from the furnace, cooled in a desiccator
and weighed the ash broken up and inspected for carbon. If any
;

visible carbon is present a new determination shall be conducted.

 740 Methods for Testing of Rubber-Lined Hose.

IV. CALCULATIONS.
Calculations. 15. The percentage
of rubber shall be considered to be the
differencebetween 100 and the sum of the total sulfur and ash
expressed as percentages and figured on the total compound. If
the alcoholic-potash extract is over 2 per cent of the rubber as
first calculated, subtract this excess also from the rubber. The
organic-acetone extract shall be obtained by taking the difference
between the total acetone extract and the free sulfur. The
organic-acetone extract, free sulfur, total sulfur and alcoholic-
potash extract shall be figured on the amount of gum as found
by the above procedure.

V. CHECK ANALYSES.
Check Analysis. 16. Duplicate determinations when required shall check
within the following limits, expressed as percentages of the gum
present, as found by analysis, except as stated.

Check Within,
Per Cent.

Organic-acetone extract 0.10

Free sulfur 0. 10
Total sulfur 0. 10
Alcoholic-potash extract 0.10
Ash calculated on total compound 0. 25

Methods for the Physical Testing of Rubber Lining

and Cotton Fabric of Rubber-Lined Hose.

VI. SAMPLING OF RUBBER LINING.

Sampling. 17. Samples shall be taken both as regards to number (except

where limited by the specifications) and location at the discre-
tion of the inspector. All samples shall be cut transversely from
the hose.
Average. 18. Not less than three pieces from each sample shall be
tested and their results taken in calculating the average, unless
 — r

Serial Designation: D 15-15. 741

some individual result is apparently in error in which case a

retest shall be made.
19. Tests of rubber shall be made with
the temperature of Temperature of
the air not lower than 65 or higher than 90° F., and the samples
J^Jf s*mp?es
shall be kept at temperatures within these limits, for at least
one half hour previous to the time of test.

-IN

-
r*1*— ik'-. xif

<. 1.2-

4
'
£

Section A-B.
for*— g ~*|yi'
/

rl"

K--l/f >:

Inverted Plan. .Section C-D.

Fig. 2.—Die.

VII. PREPARATION OF TEST SPECIMENS OF RUBBER

LINING.
20. (a) Test specimens of rubber shall be stamped out with Preparation of
Test s P ecmiens
a die constructed in accordance with Fig. 2.

(b) All specimens for these tests shall have the backing
entirely removed by means of a grinder shown in Fig. 3.
 742 Methods for Testing of Rubber-Lined Hose.

Test specimens which have become burnt in buffing shall be

discarded.
(c) If it is necessary to use naphtha to separate the rubber
from the fabric, the naphtha shall be what is technically known
as 76° Baume, free from oil. When naphtha has been used the
test specimen shall be allowed to remain at rest for not less

Fig. 3. —Grinder.

than one hour before testing. In all cases after buffing the
testspecimen shall remain at rest not less than ten minutes
before testing.

VIII. PHYSICAL TESTS OF RUBBER LINING.

Friction Test. 21 . Test specimens shall be accurately cut transversely l£ in.
wide and the full length of the circumference. They shall be
 Serial Designation: D 15-15. 743

cut through the walls so that they can be laid out flat the full

length of the piece. One-quarter inch of the rubber lining shall

be carefully and cleanly trimmed off on each side without injuring
the fabric, leaving a strip of rubber lining 1 in. wide undisturbed
on a strip of cover l£ in. wide. A separation between lining and
cover of this strip shall be started for about \\ in. The free end
of fabric shall then be clamped in a fixed jaw so that the hose
will hang approximately vertical. The free end of rubber lining

Test I. Hose Straight.

-Extra Heavy Flexible Pipe

TestZ. Hose Curved on Radius of 2.-^ feet.

Test 3. Hose Kinked,

Ends Tied Together.

Fig. 4. —Apparatus for Pressure Test.

shall be clamped to a movable jaw to which is suspended a speci-

fied weight, and the rate of separation noted.
22. Tensile strength tests shall be made on an apparatus, Tensile strength,
the general designs of which conform to the "Schopper " machine.
The grips for holding the test specimens shall be such that they
will tighten automatically, exerting a uniform pressure across
the width of the piece proportionate to the applied tension.
full

The jaws shall separate at a rate of 20 in. per minute. The

thickness of the test specimens shall be accurately determined at
three points equidistant between the marks. A spring microme-
ter gage accurate to within 0.001 in. and having a circular foot
0.4 in. in diameter shall be used.
 744 Methods for Testing of Rubber-Lined Hose.

Elongation at 23. The elongation at the breaking point shall be determined

Breaking Point.
during ^ teRs[on test ag foUows:
Previous to placing in the machine for the tension test,
mark with two parallel lines 2 in. apart. For this purpose use
a stamp having two marking edges placed 2 in. apart. On the
test specimen a rule graduated to at least tV shah" be kept m -

opposite the two marks and the distance between the outside
edges of these marks noted at the instant of breaking.
Set. 24. The determination of set shall be carried out on a speci-
men which has not been stretched or used for any other test.
Mark two lines on the test sample 2 in. apart and at right
angles to the direction of pull. Place in the tension testing
machine, stretch to the amount specified by separating the jaws
at the rate of 20 in. per minute and hold in that position 10 min-
utes; immediately release and 10 minutes thereafter measure
the distance between the marks. If the sample breaks prior to
being released it shall be considered that it has failed in this test.
Defects. 25. If the break occurs outside the gage marks on the test
specimen during the tension test and the tensile strength or
stretch are below the requirements, the test shall be repeated.
The broken surfaces of test specimens shall be examined for
flaws or defects and if the results of the test confirm the observa-
tion of flaws the test shall be repeated.

IX. HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST.

Hydraulic 26. The determination of bursting or proof pressure shall
Pressure Test
of Hose.
be made in the following manner:
The hose shall be stretched on a plane surface in a straight
line and connected to the water line or pump and filled with water,
leaving the air cock open to allow the air to escape. The air
cock shall then be closed and a pressure of 10 lb. per sq. in.
applied. The test shall then begin by taking original measure-
ments with the pressure at 10 lb. per sq. in. Pressures shall be
measured with a standardized gage.
The increase in pressure shall be made at the rate of 300 lb.
per minute. The hose while making the elongation and twist
measurements shall be held at the specified pressure for not
more than two minutes.
 Serial Designation: D 15 - 15. 745

In making the bursting test in the curved position the

apparatus shown in Fig. 4 shall be used.
The kinked test shall be made on 3-ft. samples with the
ends tied together, and the couplings touching with a sharp
kink in the middle of the hose; or if made on a 50-ft. sample
the hose shall be tied together at a point 18 in. from where the
kink occurs.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD DEFINITIONS
OF
TERMS RELATING TO PAINT SPECIFICATIONS.

Serial Designation: D 16-15.

These definitions are issued under the fixed designation D 16; the
final number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case
of revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1915.

Standard. —Materials, methods, qualities, properties, etc., set

forth by specification as a basis for the measurement of
requirements.
Equal To. —The use of this term should be avoided if possible.
The avoidance of this term is recommended wherever possible
because the specifications themselves should state the qualities, etc.,
desired. In specifications having the sanction of the American Society
for Testing Materials, it is to be assumed that this feature will be
developed to its fullest extent.

Pure. —
Free from admixture of any foreign substance.
—
Commercially Pure. The use of this term should be avoided if

poss ble.
The avoidance of this term is recommended wherever possible
because it involves the acceptance of standards likely to cause dis-
pute, whereas specifications having the sanction of the American Society
for Testing Materials should involve the establishment of their own
standards.

(746)
 Serial Designation: D 16-15. 747

Adulteration. —
The partial substitution of one substance for
another without acknowledgment.
The addition of the words "without acknowledgment" makes this
definition clear. Substitution with acknowledgment involves no im-
proper motive. If it is done without acknowledgment an improper

motive may be assumed.

Adulterant. —
A substance substituted partially for another
without acknowledgment.
Bulk. —The bulk of a pigment is the total volume thereof plus voids.
In referring to the bulk of a substance, it is often convenient to
say: " Its bulk is (say) 10 g. to the cubic inch." In this case the word
bulk is synonomous with "apparent density" and involves a determina-

tion by a specific method.

Voids.—The spaces between the particles of a pigment.
Opacity. — The degree of obstruction to the transmission of
visible light.
In this sense "opacity" is a relative term, it being considered that
given a film sufficiently thin, in paint technology at least, there is no
absolutely opaque substance.

Covering Power. —The use of this term should be avoided if possible.

This term has been used so loosely that it might mean hiding power,
spreading power, or the simple property of producing a coat.

—
Hiding Power. The power of a paint or paint material as used
to obscure a surface painted with it.
In this definition the word "obscure" means to render invisible or
to cover up a surface so that it cannot be seen.
—
Spreading Rate. The rate at which a paint or paint material, as
used, is brushed out to a continuous uniform film expressed in
terms of the area to which a unit volume, as used, is applied.
This term must not be confused with the much-abused term "spread-
ing power." The use of the term "spreading rate" is illustrated in the
following sentence: "The paint when spread on a planished iron sur-
face at the rate of 600 sq. ft. to the gallon will not sag or run when
placed in a vertical position at 70° F."

Fineness. —
A term used to denote the extent of sub-division
and expressive of the number of particles of pigment in a
unit volume exclusive of voids.
According to this definition if pigment A has a specific gravity of
6 and pigment B a specific gravity of 2, and if these two pigments
have equal fineness, in 6 g. of pigment A there would be the same
number of particles as in 2 g. of pigment B.
748 Definitions of Paint Terms.

Crystallin. —Having a definite structure referable to one of the

crystallographic systems.
According to definition a material is not crystallin if it has not a
crystallinform irrespective of the optical and other properties it may
possess.

Amorphous. —Without regular or definite form.

This definition as given here has a broader meaning than it possesses
when it is used in mineralogical writings. Protozoa, if of definite form,
are not amorphous and may not be crystallin.

Paint. —A mixture of pigment with vehicle, intended to be

spread in thin coats for decoration or protection, or both.
According to this definition a mixture of pigment and vfernish is
a paint, and on the other hand a solution of stains in oil or varnish,
no pigment being present, is not a paint.
Pigment. —The fine solid particles used in the preparation of
paint, and substantially insoluble in the vehicle.
Asphaltic materials are not pigments except when they contain
substances substantially insoluble in the vehicle in which they are used.

Vehicle. —The liquid portion of a paint.

Here anything that is dissolved in the liquid portion of a paint is
a part of the vehicle.
Volatile Thinner. —All that liquid portion of a paint, water
excepted, which is volatile in a current of steam at atmos-
pheric pressure.
Non-Volatile Vehicle. —The liquid portion of a paint except-
ing its volatile thinner and water.
Tinting Strength. —The power of coloring a given quantity of
paint or pigment selected as a medium standard for esti-
mating such power.
Color. —A generic term referring inclusively to all of the colors
of the spectrum, white and black, and all tints, shades and
hues which may be produced by their admixture.
Color involves a definite effect produced by the action of light
upon the retina of the eye dependent upon the optical composition of
the light. This term is also used in reference to material substances
such as pigments, stains, dyes, etc., but in specifications it should be
recognized that color is primarily a physiological sensation.
Tint. —
A color produced by the admixture of a coloring material,
not white, with a white pigment or paint, the white pre-
dominating.
 Serial Designation: D 16-15. 749

Shade. —A term descriptive of that difference between colors

which results from a difference in luminosity only, the
other color constants being essentially equal. A darker
shade of a color is one that has a lower luminosity.
Primarily the term "shade" is akin to shadow designating darkness

or reduced illumination, and therefore when strictly used should express

only such change as depends on reduced luminosity; it has been defined
by several authorities as the mixture of black with a color, thus estab-
lishing its opposite character to "tint," but by extension of its relative
sense has been frequently and widely used to include lighter shades
it

by use of the adjective "lighter" or "paler."Although such expressions

apparently involve a contradiction, it is clear that while we may have
a shade of color or darker color of the same sort, it is easy to conceive
of another shade not quite so dark and therefore lighter.

Hue. —The predominating spectral color a color mixture. in

Tone. —The color which principally modifies a hue or a white
or a black.
Drying. —The a
solidification of film.

Drier. —A material containing metallic compounds added to

paints and painting materials for the purpose of acceler-
ating drying.
Specific Gravity. —The ratio of the weight of a unit volume of
a substance to the weight of an equal volume of water at
denned temperatures.
Density. —
The use of this term should be avoided if possible.
Density is a scientific term meaning the mass of a unit volume.
Its numerical expression will vary with the units selected, and there
is no occasion for using it when the term "specific gravity" is defined.

Confusion may be avoided by not using the word "density" in speci-

cations.

Gallon. —The measured gallon is 231 cu. in. Where a measured

gallon is called for, the temperature at which it is to be
measured should be specified. Where a gallon of definite
weight is called for, the weight should be specified or ob-
tained from the specific gravity of the material at a definite
temperature.
This is the standard United States gallon.

Water.— Dissolved water or water not definitely or chemically

combined.
Dry. — In paint materials: containing no uncombined water.
In paint films: completely solidified.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD DEFINITIONS
OP
TERMS RELATING TO MATERIALS FOR ROADS
AND PAVEMENTS.
Serial Designation: D 8-18.
These definitions are issued under the fixed designation D 8; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1912; Revised, 1915, 1918.

I. BITUMINOUS MATERIALS.
Relating in General to Bituminous Materials:
Bitumens. — Mixtures of native or pyrogenous hydrocarbons and
their non-metallic derivatives, which may be gases, liquids,
viscous liquids, or solids, and which are soluble in carbon
disulfide.
— Containing bitumen
Bituminous. or constituting the source
of bitumen.
Bituminous Emulsion. —A liquid mixture in which minute
globules of bitumen are held in suspension in water or
a watery solution.
—
Cut-Back Products. Petroleum or tar residuums which have
been fluxed with distillates.
Flux. — Bitumens, generally liquid, used in combination with
harder bitumens for the purpose of softening the latter.
—
Liquid Bituminous Materials. Those having a penetration at
25° C. (77° F.), under a load of 50 g. applied for 1 second,
of more than 350.

(750)
 Serial Designation: D 8-18. 751

—
Semi-Solid Bituminous Materials. Those having a penetration
at 25° C. (77° F.), under a load of 100 g. applied for 5
seconds, of more than 10, and a penetration at 25° C.
(77° F.), under a load of 50 g. applied for 1 second, of not
more than 350.
Solid Bituminous Materials. — Those having a penetration at 25°
C. (77° F.), under a load of 100 g. applied for 5 seconds, of
not more than 10.

Relating Specifically to Petroleum or Asphalts:

Asphalts. — Solid or semi-solid native bitumens, solid or semi-
solid bitumens obtained by refining petroleum, or solid or
semi-solid bitumens which are combinations of the bitumens
mentioned with petroleums or derivatives thereof, which
melt upon the application of heat and which consist of a
mixture of hydrocarbons and their derivatives of complex
structure, largely cyclic and bridge compounds.
—
Artificial Asph It. Recommended that the use of term be dis-
continued.
Asphalt Cement. — A fluxed or unfiuxed asphalt specially prepared
as to quality and consistency for direct use in the manu-
facture of bituminous pavements, and having a penetration
at 25° C. (77° F.) of between 5 and 250, under a load of
100 g. applied for 5 seconds.
Liquid Asphalt.—This a trade term not subject definition.
is to
Native Asphalt.—Asphalt occurring as such nature. in
Road Asphalt. — This a trade term not subject to definition.
is

Rock Asphalt. — Sandstone or limestone naturally impregnated

with asphalt.
Petroleum. — Li uid bitumen occurring as such in nature.
Blown Petroleums. —Semi-solid or solid products produced
primarily by the action of air upon liquid native bitumens
which arc heated during the blowing process.
—
Topped Petroleum. Petroleum deprived of its more volatile
constituents.
Asphaltenes. —
The components of the bitumen in petroleums,
petroleum products, malthas, asphalt cements and solid
native bitumens, which are soluble in carbon disulphide
but insoluble in paraffin naphthas.
 ;

752 Definitions of Terms Relating to Roads.

Carbenes. — The components of the bitumen in petroleums,

petroleum products, malthas, asphalt cements and solid
native bitumens, which are soluble in carbon disulphide
but insoluble in carbon tetrachloride.

Relating Specifically to Tars and Pitches:

Tars. —Bitumens which yield pitches upon fractional distillation
and which are produced as distillates by the destructive
bitumens, pyrobitumens or organic materials.
distillation of
Coal Tar. —Themixture of hydrocarbon distillates, mostly
unsaturated ring compounds, produced in the destructive
distillation of coal.
—
Gas-House Coal Tar. Coal tar produced in gas-house retorts in
the manufacture of illuminating gas from bituminous coal.
—
Coke-Oven Tar. Coal tar produced in by-product coke ovens
in the manufacture of coke from bituminous coal.
—
Oil-Gas Tars. Tars produced by cracking oil vapors at high
temperatures in the manufacture of oil gas.
—
Water-Gas Tars. Tars produced by cracking oil vapors at high
temperatures in the manufacture of carburetted water-gas.
—
Dehydrated Tars. Tars from which all water has been removed.
—
Refined Tar. Tar freed from water by evaporation or distillation
which is continued until the residue is of desired consistency
or a product produced by fluxing tar residuum with tar
distillate.
Dead Oils. — Oils
with a density greater than water which are
from tars.
distilled
Pitches. —Solid residues produced in the evaporation or distilla-
tion of bitumens, the term being usually applied to residues
obtained from tars.
Straight-run Pitch. —
A pitch run to the consistency desired, in
the initial process of distillation, without subsequent fluxing.
—
Free Carbon in Tars. Organic matter which is insoluble in
carbon disulfide.

Relating Specifically to Tests:

Normal Temperature. —As applied to laboratory observations of

the physical characteristics of bituminous materials, is

25° C. (77° F.).

 i

Serial Designation: D 8 -IS. 753

—The degree of solidity or

Consistency. of bituminous
fluidity
materials.
Fixed Carhon. —The organic matter of the residual coke obtained
upon burning hydrocarbon products in a covered vessel in
the absence of free oxygen.
Penetration. —
The consistency of a bituminous material expressed
as the distance that a standard needle vertically penetrates
a sample of the material under known conditions of loading,
time and temperature. Where the conditions of test are
not specifically mentioned, the load, time and temperature
are understood to be 100 g., 5 seconds, and 25° C. (77° F.),
respectively, and the units of penetration to indicate hun-
dredths of a centimeter.
Viscosity. —The measure of the resistance to flow of a bituminous
material, usually stated as the time of flow of a given
amount of the material through a given orifice.

II. NON-BITUMINOUS MATERIALS.

Relating in General to Non-Bituminous Materials:
Aggregate. —The inert such as sand, gravel, shell,
material,
slag or broken stone or combinations thereof, with which
the cementing material is mixed to form a mortar or concrete.
—
Matrix. The binding material or mixture of binding material
and fine aggregate in which the large aggregate is embedded
or held in place.
Crusher-Run. —The total unscreened product of a stone crusher.
Stone Chips. — Small angular fragments of stone containing no
dust.
Tailings.—Stones which after going through the crusher do not
pass through the largest openings of the screen.
Rubble. — Rough stones of irregular shapes and sizes, broken from
larger masses either naturally or artificially, as by geological
action, in quarrying, or in stone cutting or blasting.

Relating Specifically to Mater

Bank Gravel. — Gravel found in natural deposit, usually more
or less intermixed with fine material, such as sand or
clay, or combinations thereof; gravelly clay, gravelly
754 Definitions of Terms Relating to Roads.

sand, clayey gravel and sandy gravel, indicate the varying

proportions of the materials in the mixture.
Clinker. —
Generally a fused or partly fused by-product of the
combustion of coal, but also including lava and Portland-
cement clinker, and partly vitrified slag and brick.
Chert.— Compact silicious rock formed of calcedonic or opaline
or both.
silica,

Granite. —A granitoid igneous rock consisting of quartz, ortho-

more or
clase, biotite and muscovite.
less oligoclase,
Granitoid. —A textural term to describe those igneous rocks which
are entirely composed of recognizable minerals.
Slag. — Fused or partly fused compounds of in combination
silica

with lime or other bases, resulting in secondary products

from the reduction of metallic ores.
Soil. — A mixture of fine earthy material with more or less organic
matter resulting from the growth and decomposition of
vegetation or animal matter.

Relating Specifically to Tests:

Mesh. —The square opening of a sieve.

Screen. — In laboratory work an apparatus, in which the apertures
are separating
circular, for of material.
sizes
Sieve.— In laboratory work an apparatus, in which the apertures
are square, for separating sizes of material.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD DEFINITIONS
OF
TERMS RELATING TO STRUCTURAL TIMBER.
Serial Designation: D 9-15.
These definitions are issued under the fixed designation D 9; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

Adopted, 1907; Revised, 1915.

I. DEFINITION OF STRUCTURAL TIMBER.

By Timber" is understood all such
the term "Structural
products of wood
which the strength of the timber is the
in
controlling element in their selection and use. The following
is a list of products which are recommended for consideration
as structural timbers:
Trestle Timbers. — Stringers, caps, posts, mud sills, bracing,
bridge ties, guard rails.

Car Timbers. — Car framing, including upper framing; car

sills.

Framing for Buildings. —Posts, mud sills, girders, framing

joists.

—
Ship Timbers. Ship timbers, ship decking.
Cross A rms for Poles.

II STANDARD DEFECTS.
Measurements which refer to the diameter of knots or holes
should be considered as referring to the mean or average diameter.
(755)
756 Definitions of Terms Relating to Timber.

1. Sound Knot. —A sound knot is one which is solid across

its face and which is as hard as the wood surrounding it; it may
be either red or black, and is so fixed by growth or position that
it will retain its place in the piece.
2. —A loose knot one not firmly held in place
Loose Knot. is

by growth or position.
Pith Knot. —A pith knot
3. a sound knot with a pith hole
is

not more than \ in diameter in the center.

in.

Encased Knot. —An encased knot

4. one whose growth is

rings are not intergrown and homogeneous with the growth

rings of the piece it is in. The encasement may be partial or
complete; intergrown partially or so fixed by growth or posi-
if

tion that it will retain its place in the piece, it shall be con-
sidered a sound knot; if completely intergrown on one face,
it is a watertight knot.

5. Rotten Knot. —A rotten knot is one not as hard as the

wood it is in.

6. —A pin knot a sound knot not over \

Pin Knot. is in.

in diameter.
Standard Knot. —A standard knot
7. a sound knot not is

over 1 in diameter.
1 in.

Large Knot. —A large knot

8. a sound knot, more than is

1? in diameter.
in.

Round Knot. —A round knot

9. one which oval or is is cir-

cular in form.
Spike Knot. —A spike knot
10. one sawn in a lengthwise is

direction; the mean or average width shall be considered in

measuring these knots.
11. Pitch Pockets. —Pitch pockets are openings between the
grain of the wood containing more or less pitch or bark. These
shall be classified as small, standard and large pitch pockets.
(a) —A small pitch pocket one not
Small Pitch Pocket. is

over | in. wide.

Standard Pitch Pocket. —A standard pitch pocket
(b) one is

not over | wide, or 3 in. in length. in.

Large Pitch Pocket. —A large pitch pocket

(c) one over is

f wide, or over 3
in. in length. in.
Pitch Streak. —A pitch streak
12. a well-defined accumu- is

lation of pitch at one point in the piece. When not sufficient

 Plate IV
1918 A.S.T.M. Standards.

Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Structural Timb

Fig. 1.— Loose Knot. Fig. 2.— Pith Knot.

Pig. J. Bm ased Knot

PlG. 4.— Rotten Knot
 Plate V
1918 A.S.T.M. Standards.

Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Structural Timber.

Fig. 6. — Standard Knot.

I
ti >. 7. — Large Knot.
 Plate VI
1918 A.S.T.M. Standards.

Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Structural Timber.

Fig. 5. — Pin Knot. Fig. 8. — Spike Knot.

Fig. 10.— Pitch Streak.

Pig, 9. —Pit< h Pocket.

 Serial Designation: D 9- 15. 757

to develop a well-defined streak, or where the fiber between

grains, that the coarse-grained fiber, usually termed "spring
is,

wood," is not saturated with pitch, it shall not be considered

a defect.
—
Wane. Wane is bark, or the lack of wood from any
13.
cause, on edges of timbers.
14. Shakes. —
Shakes are splits or checks in timbers which
usually cause a separation of the wood between annual rings.
15. Rot, Dote and Red Heart. —
Any form of decay which
may be evident either as a dark red discoloration not found in
the sound wood, or the presence of white or red rotten spots,
shall be considered as a defect.
16. —
Ring Shake. An opening between the annual rings.
17. Through Shake. —
A shake which extends between two
faces of a timber.

III. STANDARD NAMES FOR STRUCTURAL TIMBERS.

—
Southern Yellow Pine. This term includes the species
1.

of yellow pine growing in the southern states from Virginia to

Texas, that is, the pines hitherto known as longleaf pine (Pinus
palustris), shortleaf pine (Pinus echinata), loblolly pine (Pinus
taeda), Cuban pine (Pinus heterophylla) and pond pine (Pinus
serotina).
Under this heading, two classes of timber are designated:
(a) dense southern yellow pine and (b) sound southern yellow
pine. It is understood that these two terms are descriptive
of quality rather than of botanical species.
(a) Dense southern yellow pine shall show on either end
an average of at least six annual rings per inch and at least
one-third summer wood, or else the greaternumber of the rings
shall show at least one-third summer wood, all as measured
over the third, fourth, and fifth inches on a radial line from
the pith. Wide-ringed material excluded by this rule will be
acceptable, provided that the amount of summer wood as above
measured be at least one-half.
shall
The contrast in color between summer wood and spring
wood shall be sharp and the summer wood shall be dark in
color, except in pieces having considerably above the minimum
requirement for summer wood.
758 Definitions of Terms Relating to Timber.

(b) Sound southern yellow pine shall include pieces of

southern pine without any ring or summer-wood requirement.

2. Douglas Fir. —
The term "Douglas Fir" is to cover the
timber known likewise as yellow fir, red fir, western fir, Wash-
ington fir, Oregon or Puget Sound fir or pine, norwest and west
coast fir.

3. Norway Pine, to cover what is known also as "Red

Pine."
4. Hemlock, to cover Southern or Eastern hemlock; that
is, hemlock from all States east of and including Minnesota.

5. Western Hemlock, to cover hemlock from the Pacific

coast.
6. Spruce, to cover Eastern spruce; that is, the spruce
timber coming from points east of and including Minnesota.
7. Western Spruce, to cover the spruce timber from the

Pacific coast.
White Pine, to cover the timber which has hitherto been
8.

known as white pine, from Maine, Michigan, Wisconsin and

Minnesota.
9. Idaho White Pine, the variety of white pine from western
Montana, northern Idaho, and eastern Washington.
10. Western Pine, to cover the timber sold as white pine
coming from Arizona, California, New Mexico, Colorado, Oregon
and Washington. This is the timber sometimes known as
"Western Yellow Pine," or "Ponderosa Pine," or "California
White Pine," or "Western White Pine."
11. Western Larch, to cover the species of larch or tamarack
from the Rocky Mountain and Pacific coast regions.
12. Tamarack, to cover the timber known as "Tamarack,"
or "Eastern Tamarack," from States east of and including Min-
nesota.
13. Redwood, to include the California wood usually known
by that name.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS
PHILADELPHIA, PA., U. S. A.

AFFILIATED WITH THE

International Association for Testing Materials.

STANDARD METHODS
FOR
TESTING.

Serial Designation: E 1-18.

These methods are issued under the fixed designation E 1; the final
number indicates the year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision.

I. Adopted, 1910; Revised, 1916, 1918.

II. Adopted, 1910; Revised, 1916.
III. Adopted, 1911.
IV. Adopted, 1915.
V. Adopted, 1910.

I. METHODS FOR TENSION TESTS OF METALS.

1. Definition of Terms.
Elastic Limit is the greatest load per unit of original cross-
section which does not produce a permanent set.

This determination is rarely made in the commercial testing of materials.

Proportional Limit is the load per unit of original cross-

section at which the deformations cease to be directly pro-
portional to the loads.
This determination is rarely made in the commercial testing of materials.

Yield Point is the load per unit of original cross-section

at which a marked increase deformation of the specimen
in the
occurs without increase of load. It is usually determined by
the drop of the beam of the testing machine, or by the use of
dividers.
(759)
760 Methods for Testing.

2. Information obtained from the various laboratories in

which tension tests are made shows that in many cases the forms
and dimensions of specimens as recommended by the American
Society for Testing Materials are in use, and that in other cases
these forms and dimensions most nearly reconcile the differences
that exist between the various forms employed.
3. It is therefore recommended that the selection of speci-
mens, and their forms and dimensions, shall conform to the
specifications for each material, as are now adopted by the
American Society for Testing Materials.
In the case of flats \ in. or under in thickness, the dimen-
sions shall be as follows: Width equal to 5 times the thickness
of the specimen, except that in no case shall the width be less
than f in.; gage length equal to 24 times the thickness of the
specimen, except that in no case shall the gage length be less
than 2 in.

4. It is believed that the distance between the end of gage

length and beginning of shoulders, as prescribed in the standard
specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials, is
ample to avoid interference with proper elongation, and no
grounds are found for recommending any change.
5. The pulling speed has a marked influence on the tensile

properties shown by materials tested, an increase in speed

increasing the values found for yield point and tensile strength.
In testing steel and wrought iron in gage lengths of 2 and 8 in.
in accordance with the specifications of the American Society
for Testing Materials, the speed of the machine, by which is
meant the speed of the cross-head when the machine is running
idle, shall conform to the following requirements:

The crosshead speed of the testing machine shall be such

that the beam of the machine can be kept balanced, but in no
case shall the values given in the following table be exceeded:

Maximum Crosshead Speed,

Specified Minimum Tensile Strength of Material,
Gage Length,
in. per minute, in Determining
lb. per sq. in.
Yield Point. Tensile Strength.

2 0.50 3.0
80 000 or under. 2.00 0.0
8

2 0.25 1.0
Over 80 000 0.50 2.0
8
 Serial Designation: E 1 - IS. 761

6. In determining elastic limit (so-called) by the

the
method prescribed in the American Society for Testing Materials
Specifications for forgings and cold-rolled axles (Serial Desig-
nations: A 18, A 19, A 63 and A 22), the crosshead speed for
the 2-in. gage length shall not exceed 0.125 in. per minute.
7. In determining the proportional limit, the crosshead

speed shall not exceed 0.025 in. per inch of gage length per
minute.
In determining the modulus of elasticity, the elastic
8.

limit,and the proportional limit, the extensometer should be

attached to at least two sides of the specimen, to compensate
for unequal elongation, for improper holding, or for any slight
bending that may exist in the specimen.
9. All authorities seem to regard it as desirable to measure
the elongation on two or more sides of the test specimen, and
most extensometers provide for so doing.
10. The greatest accuracy is required in determining the
modulus of elasticity, since small errors in measuring elongation
are of considerable consequence in the result.
11. Since the modulus is determined for points well within
the elastic limit, the total elongation to be measured is much
smaller than at the elastic limit.
12. The elastic limit should be determined with great care,

but any inaccuracy will cause less proportionate error than in

the case of the modulus. The yield point, being less well defined,
cannot be so closely determined, and it is believed that in most
cases the use of dividers instead of an extensometer will give
sufficiently accurate results.
13. It is considered undesirable in accurate determinations
of the modulus of elasticity to use a shorter gage length than
8 in. It is evident that the greater the total elongation measured,
the less will be the error due to inaccuracy of the reading, and
the accuracy thus appears to increase directly as the gage length.
14. That the difference between short and long gage lengths
has a greater influence in affecting results than other factors
(personal error, inaccuracy of the testing machine, etc.), is shown
by the closely agreeing readings obtained with the greater lengths.
15. The effect of improper methods of holding specimens
could not be established from the results of actual tests. The
 :

762 Methods for Testing.

result of improper methods of gripping materials of low elonga-

tion, such as cast iron, is well known, and it is probable that in
material of a more ductile nature, the effect is largely local and
does not extend to the portion of the specimen within the gage
marks.

Conditions to Ensure Correct Testing Machines.

recommended that in machines on which specimen
16. It is
tests are made, whether the power be applied hydraulically or
by means of screws and gears, the load be measured by a sepa-
rate system of levers and knife edges, or by a method similar
to that employed in the Emery testing machines.
17. All knife edges shall be kept sharp, and free from oil and
dirt, and the machine shall be sensitive to a variation in load
of one two-hundred-and-fiftieth of the load carried. Design and
workmanship on testing machines shall be good, and they shall be
calibrated at least once every six months by the following method

Calibration of Testing Machines.

18. Test for accuracy by loading the weighing table with
standard weights, and compare the actual weight at each addi-
tion with the reading of the beam. If the table is uniformly
loaded in this manner with the full amount of weights that it
will accommodate, the proportionality of the levers and the
weighing beam can be This relation,
successfully established.
in a properly designed machine, will remain constant for all
loads, but as a further test for sensitiveness under greater loads
than can be accommodated in this manner, the following pro-
cedure is recommended:
19. Place in the machine a tension bar of such cross-section
that the maximum capacity will not stress it to the elastic limit.
Stress this bar to various extents through the full range of the
machine, and at each load balance the beam and place upon the
weighing table standard weights of 100 lb. A weight one two-
hundred-and-fiftieth of the total load on the machine should
produce a readable movement of the beam.
20. Where evidence of the accuracy of the machine over its
whole range is desired, a known load may be applied by means
 Serial Designation: E 1-18. 763

of an extensometer and calibrated bar, whose modulus of elas-

ticity has been determined with exactness.
21. It is recommended that a device be adopted conform-
ing to the following requirements, in which the extensometer
and bar are permanently attached to each other:
(a) The bar shall be of high-elastic-limit material, and of
such cross-section that this limit will be well above
the total capacity of the machine on which it is

to be used.
(b) This bar shall be annealed or otherwise treated so as
to eliminate internal or unequal stress in the mate-
rial, and to ensure its elastic modulus being uniform

for successive tests.

(c) The extensometer shall be permanently attached to
the bar, and shall measure the elongation on two
opposite sides.
(d) The extensometer shall be preferably of the indicating
or direct-reading type, and shall indicate to ten-
thousandths of an inch or less.

(e) The method of securing the bar in the drawheads of

the machine shall be positive and without slip, and

shall ensure its axial location.

(J) The length of the bar measured by the extensometer

shall be sufficient that the smallest extensometer
division, that is, 0.0001 in., shall correspond to a
difference in loading of 0.2 per cent of the capacity
of the machine, or less.
(g) The extensometer shall be protected from injury by a
permanently attached case with cover removable
for reading the scale.
(h) The apparatus shall be plainly marked with the maxi-
mum load that can be safely applied without injury.
(i) The apparatus shall itself be calibrated either by the
United States Bureau of Standards, or in a man-
ner that will ensure equally trustworthy results.

Methods of Gripping Test Specimens.

22. It is recommended that for specimens of rolled mate-
rial, serrated grips, flat and V-shaped, be adopted, the former
764 Methods for Testing.

for rectangular and the latter for round specimens. Serrated

grips with curved faces appear to have no advantage, and to
cause crushing of the material.
23. Wedges with ball and socket do not seem to be neces-
sary, and for commercial testing their use has been generally
discontinued.
24. Specimens of turned form, with threaded ends, should
be secured in such a manner that side bending stresses are
avoided.
25. It is considered important for correct results that the
specimen be located in the exact center of the heads, and to
better secure this condition, the openings in the heads should
be lined up with each other by means of a plumb-bob and be
tested for parallelism with a spirit level. Each pair of packing
pieces and wedges that are to be used together in the same
head should correspond exactly in thickness and other dimen-
sions, and the wedges should be inserted an equal distance when
the specimen is in place.

Selection and Preparation of Specimen.

26. Specimens representative of steel castings may be cut
from the bottom of a sink head or riser, or from a coupon
attached to the casting. In either case the part from which
the specimen is taken should be relatively large in proportion
to the size of the casting and should be annealed with it.
27. Workmanship on specimens shall be of the most careful
nature, and surfaces should be free from nicks and tool marks.
All wire edges should be removed and corners generously
rounded.
28. If specimens of rolled material are sheared in the rough
from sections, at least f in. of the material should be removed
from the sheared edges in machining.

General Requirements for the Measuring of

Elongation.
modulus of elasticity and the elastic
29. In determining the
recommended that when practicable the elongation
limit, it is
be measured in a length not less than 8 in., and that the follow-
ng requirements be provided for:
 Serial Designation: E 1-18. 765

(a) The specimen shall be round in section, finished as

smooth as possible, and shall be provided with
threaded ends for attachment to the draw-heads
of the machine.
(b) The specimen shall be placed in the exact center of the
heads, and be secured in some positive manner, so
that slip and side bending stresses do not occur.
(c) The extensometer should be of a type to measure the
elongation on two or more sides of the specimen.
(d) It should read to 0.0001 in. or less.
(e) It should be of such a design that no change of zero
will occur upon release of the load in determining
the real elastic limit.
(/) The load shall be applied so slowly that simultaneous
readings of elongation and load can be obtained
with certainty.
(g) The testing machine shall have previously been cali-

brated for accuracy and sensitiveness, and heads

lined up and made parallel.

II. METHODS FOR COMPRESSION TESTS OF METALS.

1. Definition of Terms.

Elastic Limit is the greatest load per unit of original cross-

section which does not produce a permanent set.

This determination is rarely made in the commercial testing of materials.

Proportional Limit is the load per unit of original cross-

section at which the deformations cease to be directly propor-
tional to the loads.

This determination is rarely made in the commercial testing of materials.

Yield Point is the load per unit of original cross-section at

which a marked increase in the deformation of the specimen
occurs without increase of load. It is usually determined by the
drop of the beam of the testing machine, or by the use of dividers.

2. The test specimen shall be a cylinder having plane ends

truly normal to its axis.
766 Methods for Testing.

Only two replies from testing laboratories mention cubes. A cylindrical

specimen will usually be cheaper to prepare than a cube. The stresses are
probably less uniformly distributed over a square than over a circular sec-
tion, owing to the influence of the corners, this being especially the case with
the internal shearing stresses which accompany the compression.

3. The diameter of the specimen shall be not less than 1 in.

nor greater than 1.13 in. A specimen 1 in. in diameter is to

be preferred.
The range of diameter mentioned in the replies from testing laboratories
is from 1 in. to 1.129 in. A diameter of 1.1284 in. gives a section area of
1 sq. in.

4. The length of the specimen should be between 2.5 and

4 diameters.

Two testing laboratories use a length of 1 diameter, one a length of

from 1.5 to 2 diameters, one a length of 2.6 diameters, and one a length of
10.5 diameters. a length less than 2.5 diameters is not
It is believed that
be properly developed, and that such short
sufficient for the internal shear to
lengths give a fictitious strength owing to the friction of the bearing plates
of the machine, which causes the specimen to assume a barrel-like form.

5. No bedding should be used for the ends of the specimen.

Only one reply favors bedding. It is known by general experience that
bedding modifies the breaking load and that different kinds of bedding have
different influences.

6. The bearing
blocks which transmit the pressure from
the testing machine should be truly normal to the plane ends
of the To secure this, one of the blocks should be
specimen.
provided with a hemispherical bearing which can turn freely.
These requirements seem essential in order that the load may not be
eccentrically applied to the specimen, and are generally recommended in
the replies from testing laboratories.

7. The speed
of compression should be slow, not exceeding
0.1 in. per minute. Near the elastic limit and yield point, the
load should be increased very slowly.
A lower speed than that stated might be advisable if permitted by the
testing machine. Evidently a higher speed may be allowed with a long
specimen than with a short one.

For determining modulus of elasticity, the linear com-

8.

pression of the specimen should be observed by a precise com-

 Serial Designation: E 1 - 18. 767

pressometer which is attached to the specimen and does not

touch the bearing blocks of the machine. Readings of the

compressometer should be taken for three loads, the first at
about one-fourth, the second at about one-half, and the third
at about three-fourths of the elastic limit.

It is believed that these measurements are sufficient for most commercial

work. Nothing is said about the release of the specimen from load, since
opinions differ as to its advisability.

9. To determine the elastic and also the proportional limit,

several readings of the compressometer should be taken as that
limit is approached for load increments of 1000 lb. per sq. in.

This requirement seems sufficient to determine the proportional limit

for materials in which such a limit exists. It does not seem wise to require
the first permanent set to be observed for ordinary commercial work.

10. The yield point is to be noted as corresponding to that

load for which the compressometer shows a linear compression
without an increase in load. In the absence of a compresso-
meter this point may be noted, for ductile materials, by the
drop of the scale beam.
This requirement corresponds to the usual practice of testing laboratories.
It is regarded as important that the term "elastic limit" should not be used
to designate the yield point.

11. Measurements for the modulus of elasticity, elastic

limit, proportional limit, and yield point may be made, if desired,
on a specimen ranging in length from 10 to 15 diameters.
This clause is inserted because it may often be difficult to apply a com-
pressometer in a length shorter than 4 in.

12. The record of the test should mention any phenomena

observed near the elastic limit, proportional limit, and yield
point. The manner of final failure should also be noted when
the test is carried to this limit.

This requirement furnishes data for comparing the behavior of brittle

and ductile metals near critical points of molecular change.

III. METHODS FOR TRANSVERSE TESTS OF METALS.

1. In the case of cast metals, when transverse tests are to
be used to aid in determining the quality of the material, the
768 Methods for Testing.

specimen used shall be cast vertical, shall be 1| in. in diameter,

and long enough to use a span of at least 15 times the diameter.
important that a definite and uniform standard be adopted so that
It is
the resultsmay be comparable with each other; hence the diameter specified
above (sectional area corresponding to practically one square inch). The
determination of span is at present the subject of international tests to decide
upon a definite distance to replace the present standard of 12 in. It will
probably be 16 to 18 in.
The circular section will best secure a uniform thickness of skin, and
thus avoid this irregularity when other sections are employed.

In the case of ductile materials (except in impact tests)

transverse tests shall never be used to determine the quality of
the material, tension tests being those suitable for the purpose.
In small round or square bars of ductile material, both the modulus of
rupture and the transverse elastic Emit vary considerably with the span.

In the case of tests made for determining constants to be

used for designing, the specimen shall conform as nearly as
possible with the form and size of the piece to be used. Thus,
if I or T-sections are to be used, the specimens shall be of I

or T-section. In the case of flat springs or plate glass, they

shall be flat; in the case of timber, rectangular; etc.

It is well known that the modulus of rupture varies with the shape of
the section, being very much greater in the case of round than in I-sections.
Hence the modulus of rupture suitable for use for one would be entirely un-
suitable for the other.
In rolled sections, the smaller ones are subjected to a more thorough
working in the process of rolling than the larger.

In the case of the "Arbitration Bar" adopted for cast

2.

iron, the span has been fixed at 12 ir.., but may be extended
as above stated. The bar will serve for cast and brittle materials,
In the case of ductile materials, when the modulus of rup-
ture is desired, the span shall generally be less than 12 or 15
times the depth. Exceptions, however, occur, as in flat springs
and in some cases in full-size pieces, when the spans and methods
of supporting the ends, etc., shall conform to the conditions of
service.
3.In the case of cast and brittle metals, the speed of test-
ing shall not exceed 0.2 in. per minute. For other specimens
the speed shall be correspondingly low.
 Serial Designation: E 1-18. 769

4. The preparation of the specimen shall be such that it

truly represents the material itself. The introduction of extra-

neous influences should be avoided as far as the knowledge of
the material will permit. Thus, in cast metals no coupons shall
be used; cast materials for tests shall go into dry molds stand-
ing vertical.
No specimen shall be machined before testing, except when
information is specifically desired regarding the strength of such

machined specimens.
5. The transverse yield point for ductile materials shall be

noted approximately by the drop of the scale beam.

6. If the transverse elastic limit is to be determined for

comparison with that obtained in the tensile test, the succes-

sive increments of load in the neighborhood of the transverse
elastic limit shall be comparatively small, and after each load
has been applied and the corresponding deflection measured by
means of the deflectometer, the load shall be removed and the
deflection measured again to determine the permanent set.
In those cases where the arbitration bar is used for such
cast materials as have an elastic limit, the increment of load
used near the transverse elastic limit shall be 250 lb.
It is well known
that when the transverse elastic limit is determined
of course by means a transverse test, the extreme fiber stress at this trans-
of
verse elastic limit is not the same as that at the tensile elastic Emit of the
material; and moreover, that it varies with both the section and the span;
hence the desirability of comparing the transverse elastic limit with the
tensile elastic limit.

7. In the case of ductile materials, the arrangement of the

supports shall be such that longitudinal tension in the specimen

due to the rigidity of the supports is avoided.
In the case of ductile materials, special care" shall be
8.

used when determining the ultimate load. For this purpose it

willbe necessary when approaching the ultimate (that is, the
maximum) load, to make the speed of testing slow enough to
enable the observer to note the maximum load.
In many cases, as in I and T-beams, the maximum load
can be easily ascertained, while in others, such as round or flat
sections with short spans, it may not be possible to determine it
exactly; but it will almost always be possible to determine it
with sufficient accuracy for all practical purposes.
770 Methods for Testing.

IV. METHODS FOR BRINELL HARDNESS TESTS OF METALS.

Chemical Composition and Heat Treatment of Balls.
1. The chemical composition, as far as carbon and chrom-
ium are concerned, should be from 1 to 1.2 per cent of carbon,
and from 1 to 1.5 per cent of chromium.
2. The heat treatment should be such as will result in
making the hard as possible, consistent with the
balls as ability
to resist the pressure without cracking or crushing.

While a long series of careful experiments would be needed to justify the

specifications of more exact conditions in these regards, and while some users
of these tests think that the chemical composition (within limits) plays a very
small part, if any, in the problem, it is believed that the above requirements
will be found satisfactory for commercial work, until such time as suitable
experiments shall have furnished the data necessary for making the conditions
more precise.

Diameter and Form of Balls.

3. The standard diameter of balls should be 10 mm. with a
permissible variation of 0.0025 mm. (0.0001 in.) plus or minus;
no ball either new or old showing a greater variation is to be
employed. The standard diameter should always be employed,
except in very rare cases when some other is absolutely nec-
essary. If, at any time in testing, a hardness of No. 600 be

exceeded, the balls should be remicrometered.

Thus far there is not sufficient evidence to show that the hardness numbers
will be the same when different diameters of balls are used, and some of the
evidence indicates that the reverse is the case; hence the importance of adher-
ing to one size of ball.

Pressure.

4. The standard pressures used should be 3000 kg. for steel,

and 500 kg. for softer metals. Departure from these pressures
should never be tolerated, except in rare cases where it is
unavoidable. The time of pressure should be at least 30 seconds

The fact that, with our present light on the subject, we can only regard
the results as comparative, renders it important to employ as few different
pressures as possible.
 Serial Designation: E 1 - 18. 771

Measurement of Diameter or Depth of Indentation.

5. Whether the diameter or the depth of the indentation is

measured, apparatus should be used that will give results as

accurately as a microscope mounted on, and moved by, a
micrometer screw.

As to the choice between the two, there exists a very decided difference
of opinion, some thinking one and some the other more conducive to accuracy.
The source measuring apparatus to be
of error in either case (assuming the
accurate) is the depression or the elevation of the metal immediately sur-
rounding the indentation.

V. METHODS FOR METALLOGRAPHIC TESTS OF METALS.

Microscopic Examination.

For unhardened iron and steel, the following process has

given satisfaction:
1. After polishing, examine under a magnification of 50 to
150 diameters. Look for slag or cinder in wrought iron, man-
ganese sulphide, etc., in steel, 1 and size and shape of graphite
in cast iron.
2. Etch with a saturated solution of picric acid in alcohol
for 15 seconds. This reveals the pearlite 2 by turning it darker
than the accompanying ferrite or cementite. In wrought iron,
any pearlite present shows up, and the general appearance will
sometimes show whether the material was puddled, etc., or
made from reheated scrap. Those who wish to bring out the
ferrite grains can do so easily and quickly by etching with nitric
acid. To this end, nitric acid of 1.42 specific gravity should
be diluted with either:

(a) 90 parts by volume of water to 10 of acid,

{b) 75 " . " " " " " 25 " " or preferably
(c) 96 " " " " amyl alcohol to 4 of acid.

3. Near the eutectoid point, that is, 0.6 to 1.0 per cent of
carbon, it is often difficult to distinguish between thin envel-

> Arnold and Waterhouse, Journal. Iron and Steel Inst., 1903, Vol. I, p. 136; E. F. Law.
Journal. Iron and Steel Inst.. 1907, Vol. II, p. 94; Fay, Proceedings, Am. Soc. Teat. Mats.,
Vol. VIII. p. 74 (1908).
> IgevsVy. Ret. He Met.. Vol. II; Lejeune. Ret. de Met.. Vol. III. p. 426.
772 Methods for Testing.

opes of ferrite and cementite. This difficulty can be overcome

by etching with a solution of sodium picrate, which turns
cementite dark brown or black but does not color the other
constituents. The solution is made by adding 2 parts of picric
acid to 98 parts of a solution containing 25 per cent of caustic
soda, and is used at 100° C. 1
4. In order to interpret the results of such an etching, they

should be compared with standard etched specimens.

5. In the case of hardened and tempered steel the 'ndica-
tions are less decisive than in the case of un hardened steel,
probably because the former class has been studied less than the
latter. Coarse grain, segregation of constituents, presence of
oxide, etc., are all signs of bad material. For etching use a
solution of 4 parts of nitric acid, specific gravity 1.42, in 96 of
amyl alcohol. The time needed has to be found by trial in
each case. Hence etch for 5 seconds, examine, re-etch if neces-
sary, 2 etc.

Macroscopic Examination.

Macroscopic examination shows up defects due to segre-

6.

gation, blowholes, piping, and the like, and when used in con-
nection with microscopic examination yields valuable informa-
tion. A section is cut with a saw, filed smooth, and polished
with No. and No. 00 emery paper; it is then ready for etching.
Quite a number of etching reagents have been used 3 to
develop the structure. Whichever solution is chosen, the speci-
men is first carefully washed with a strong caustic potash solu-
tion, well rinsed under the tap, and then immersed in the
etching solution. The following may be mentioned:

(a) Freshly prepared solution of 20 g. of I and 30 g. of KI,

in 1000 g. of water.
(b) Dilute HC1 or H S0
2 4 up to 30 per cent acid, using
the 1.2 and 1.84 specific gravity respectively.

» KourbatoS, Rev. de Met.. Vol. Ill, p. 648.

» Kourbatoff, Rev. de Met., Vol. Ill, p. 648; Lejeune, Rev. de Met.. Vol. Ill, p. 426; Heyn,
Mitt, aus dera Konig. Materialspruf. Gross-Llchterfelde. West, 1906, 29.
•Fremont, Rev. de Met., Vol. V. p. 669. Ast, International Assoc. Test. Mats., 1907.
Fourth Congress, Problem 2.
 Serial Designation: E 1-18. 773

(c) Nitric acid, from 10 to 30 per cent of the 1.42 specific

gravity 1 acid in 90 to 70 per cent of water.
(d) Concentrated HC1, specific gravity 1.2.
(e) A solution of 10 or 12 parts of double copper- ammonium
chloride in 90 or 88 parts of water.

To bring out the structure of wrought iron rapidly, (d) is

used, while (c) or (b) will bring it out more slowly.

For steel, first etch with (a), which shows up the segrega-
tion of carbon very well. Take care not to over-etch ; 5 seconds
is enough for some materials. To show up the impurities and
the segregation of MnS, slag, etc., (d) acts quickly, but (b)
gives better results though taking longer.
Some prefer light etching, say after 1 or 2 minutes, but an
older method is to etch with (b) very deeply, indeed to a depth
so great that several hours may
be needed to reach it. In this
way the segregation of the carbon and the impurities like slag
and MnS shown simultaneously. A picture of the object
are
thus etched can be had by treating it like an engraving, that is,
inking it with printer's ink, and printing on white paper directly
from it. A common letter-copying press is convenient for this
printing.

1
Stead. Proc. Cleteland Inst, of Engrs., Sept., 1906, p. 3.
DATA RELATIVE TO COMMITTEES
AND PUBLICATIONS
 OFFICERS

OF THE

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

President
GUILLIAM H. CLAMER

Vice-Presidents

EDWARD ORTON, Jr. GEORGE S. WEBSTER

(Term Expiring in 1919) (Term Expiring in 1920)

Secretary-Treasurer

Office: University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pa.

MEMBERS OF EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE

(Term Expiring in 1919)

J. A. CAPP W. M. KINNEY
\V. P. M. GOSS C. D. YOUNG
(Term Expiring in 1920)

GUILLIAEM AERTSEN G. B. HECKEL

GEORGE K. BURGESS K. W. ZIMMERSCHIED

(Ex-Officio)

MANSFIELD MERRIMAN A. A. STEVENSON W. H. BIXBY

(Term Expiring in 1910) (Term Expiring in 1990} (Term Expiring in

Finance Committee
GUILLIAEM aertsen (Chairman) GEORGE K. BURGESS C. D. YOUNG

(775)
 . .. .. —
., .

TABULAR LIST OF STANDING COMMITTEES.*

(October, 1918.)

A. Ferrous Metals.

No. Titlb. Year of Chairman. Secretary. Paqb.

Creation.

A-l On Steel 1893 J. A. Capp C.L.Warwick.. 778

A-2 On Wrought Iron 1909 H.E.Smith J.B.Young 788

A-3 On Cast Iron 1903 R. Moldenke. . . G. C. Daviea. . . 788

A-4 On Heat Treatment of Iron and Steel 1898 J.H.Hall H. M. Boylston , 790

A-6 On Corrosion of Iron and Steel 1906 S. S. Voorhees.. J. A. Aupperle . 791

A-e On Magnetio Properties 1903 C. W. Burrows. 792

A-7 On Malleable Castings 1918 H. E. Diller E. Touceda. 793

A-8 On Magnetio Analysis 1918 (In course of organization.) 793

B. Non-Ferrous Metals.

B-l On Copper Wire 1909 J. A. Capp 793

B-2 On Non-Ferrous Metals and Alloys . 1909 William Campbell. 794

C. Cement, Lime, Gypsum, and Clay Products.

C-l 1902 R. S. Greenman . . P.H.Bates 797

C-2 1903 R. L. Humphrey... S. T. Wagner 800

C-3 On Brick 1903 Edward Orton, Jr.. A. V. Bleininger 800

C-4 1904 R. Hering G. T. Hammond . 801

C-5 1904 I. H. Woolson R.P.Miller 802

C-8 On Drain Tile 1911 J.T.Stewart 802

C-7 1912 D. K. Boyd N. G. Hough 803

C-8 1914 A. V. Bleininger. . W. H. Fulweiler. . 803

C-9 On Concrete and Concrete Aggregates 1914 S. E. Thompson . . A. T. Goldbeck.... 805

C-10 On Hollow Building Tile 1915 L. H. Provine E. V. Johnson 807

C-ll 1915 R. J. Wig V. G. Marani 808

(776)
 . . . ... . .

Tabular List of Standing Committees. 777

D. Miscellaneous Materials.

No. TlTLB. Ybar of Chairman. SsCRETART. 1'AOB.

Cbbation.

D-l On Preservative Coatings for Struc-

tural Materials 1902 P.H.Walker G.W.Thompson. 810

D-2 On Lubricants 1904 C. P. Van Gundy. E. G. Mackemie... 814

D-3 On Methods of Sampling and Analysis

of Coal 1910 S. W. Parr 815

D-4 On Road Materials , 1903 L.W.Page P.Hubbard. 815

D-5 On Coal 1903 G. S. Pope 810

D-6 On Coke 1904 R. Moldenke. . . A. C. Fieldner. 816

D-7 On Timber 1904 H. von Schrenk . J. A. Newlin. 817

D-8 On Waterproofing 1905 F. P. Smith .... L. M. Law 818

D-0 On Electrical Insulating Materials . 1909 C. E. Skinner. . 819

D-10 On Shipping Containers 1914 J. A. Newlin .... W.S. Topping. 820

D-ll On Rubber Product* 1912 E. A. Barrier S. C. Potts 821

D-12 {Discontinued)

D-l 3 On Textile Materials 1914 G. B. Haven. D. E. Douty. 823

E. Miscellaneous Subjects.

E-l On Methods of Testing.. 1904 G. Lanza S. V. Hunnings 826

E-2 On Electrical Standards 1912 C. E. Skinner 827

E-3 (Discontinued.)

E-4 On Magnification Scales for Micro-

graphs 1916 W. H. Bassett. 827

E-5 On Standing Committees .. 1912 828

E-6 On Papers and Publications. 1913 820

E-7 (Discontinued.)
 PERSONNEL OF STANDING COMMITTEES
OF THE
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS.
(October, 1918.)

A. FERROUS METALS.
Committee A-i on Steel.

J. A. Capp, Chairman.
Guilliaem Aerisen, Vice-Chairman.
F. M. Waring, Vice-Chairman.
C L. Warwick, Secretary.

Non-Producers (73).

Abbott, R. R. Crawford, J. C.
American Bureau of Shipping, Cromwell, O. C.
G. C. Sharp. Deans, John Sterling.
American Car and Foundry Co., Edwards, L. N.
A. E. Ostrander. Force, H. J.
American Engineering Co., General Electric Co.,
G. E. Smith. .
J. A. Capp (Chairman).
American Locomotive Co., J. M. Darke.
F. J. Cole. W. L. Merrill
E. J. Edwards. General Motors Co.,
American Welding Co., K. W. Zimmerschied.
C. L. Rowland. Gibboney, J. H.
Baldwin Locomotive Works, Hunt and Co., Robert W.
H. V. Wille. Job, Robert.
Beall, F. F. Johnson, R. P.
Bethlehem Shipbuilding Corporation, Kellogg Co., The M. W.,
H. P. Phelps. P. F. Johnson.
Browne, F. A. Kingdon, F. H.
Bureau of Construction and Repair, Lanza, Gaetano.
U. S. N. Laverie, R. H.
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U. S. N. Lloyds' Register of Shipping,
Inspection Division. Tames French.
Machinery Division. N. E. McClelland.
Cain, R.
J. Lothrop, M. T.
Campbell, William. MacFarland, H. B.
Churchill, C. S. MacPherran, R. S.
Clark, F. H. McDonnell, M. E.
Colby, Albert Ladd. McMahon, H. R.
Committee C-2 on Reinforced Con- National Cash Register Co.,
crete, A. B. Beaver.
Richard L. Humphrey. Nelson, J. H.
H. H. Quimby. Newkirk, W. M.
Cramp and Sons Ship and Engine Newport News Shipbuilding and Dry
Building Co., William, Dock Co.,
W. A. Dobson. J. W. Gray.
(778)
 .

Standing Committees. 779

Committee A-i (Continued).

Non-Producers (Continued).

New York Central Railroad Co., Southern Railway,

A. W.
Carpenter. J. C. Ramage.
H. E. Smith. Standard Parts Co.,
Northern Pacific Railway Co., R. A. Townsend.
H. G. Burnham. Standard Screw Co.,
Pierce-Arrow Motor Car Co., E. H. Ehrman.
David Fergusson. Studebaker Corporation,
Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory, C. N. Dawe.
A. R. Ellis. Van Gundy, C. P.
Pressed Steel Car Co., Wallis, J. T.
J. F. Streib. Waring, F. M. (Vice-Chairman).
Quimby, H. H. Warwick, C. L. (Secretary).
Remington Arms andAmmunitionCo., Webster, William R. _

N. A. Chase. Westinghouse Electric and Manu-

Rigg, E. H. facturing Co.,
Robinson, A. F. T. D. Lynch.
Scofield, H. H. Whittemore, H. L.
Seattle Construction and Dry Dock Wickhorst,M. H.
Co., Winchester Repeating Arms Co.,
C. W. Wiley. J. S. Gravelv.
Smith, H. T. Young, C. D.
Snow, F. A. Young, J. B.
Snow, J. P. Zelenj% Frank.

Producers (48).

American Clay Machinery Co., Carpenter Steel Co.,

H. D. Van Doom. J. H. Parker.
American Steel and Wire Co., Central Iron and Steel Co.,
S. M. Rodgers. R. H. Irons.
American Steel Foundries, Columbia Steel and Shafting Co.,
C. Davis.
J. E. T. Ickes.
Bacon, C. G., Jr. Davis, J. A.
Bethlehem Steel Co., Bethlehem Eagan-Rogers Steel and Iron Co.
Plant, J. I. Rogers.
F. D. Carney. Heppenstall Forge and Knife Co.,
Bethlehem Steel Co., Steel ton Plant, G. D. Chamberlain.
F. A. Robbins, Jr. Illinois Steel Co.,
Birdsboro Steel Foundry and Machine P. E. Carhart.
Co., Johnson, A. L.
L. E. Thomas. Jones and Laughlin Steel Co.,
I'radlce and Co., A. E. Crockett.
T. E. Newbold. J. J. Shuman.
Bunnell, F. O. F. S. Slocum.
Cambria Steel Co., Lackawanna Steel Co.,
E. F. Kenney. F. E. Abbott.
G. E. Thackray. Lewis, Wilfi
Carbon Steel Co., Locomotive Superheater Co.,
C. F. Blue, Jr. H. B. Oatley.
Carnegie Steel Co., Lukens Iron and Steel Co.,
L. W. Conroy. Charles L. Huston.
G. A. Hopkins. toward Taggarl
1

J. O. Leech.
Mathews, J. A.
C. F. W. Rys. 1< Kaj !o., Tames,
I

H. P. Tiemann. !
I'
780 Standing Committees.

Committee A-i (Continued)

Producers (Continued).
Midvale Steel Co., Schmid, M. H.
Guilliaem Aertsen (Vice-Chair- Standard Steel Works Co.,
man). L. H. Fry.
Radclyffe Furness. A. A. Stevenson.
National Malleable Castings Co., Steel Co. ofCanada,
W. G. Kranz. G. Morrow.
J.
E. F. Kitteridge. Titanium Alloy Manufacturing Co.,
National Tube Co., G. A. White.
F. N. Speller.
Union Drawn Steel Co.,
Norris, G. L.
F. N. Beegle.
Penn Seaboard Steel Corporation,
United States Alloys Corporation,
H. T- Klaer.
Pollak, j. A.
N. Petinot.
Power, C. M. Washington Steel and Ordnance Co.
Rail Steel Bar Manufacturers Asso- V. Hunnings.
S.

ciation, Woodroffe, G. H.
A. S. Hook. Wood Iron and Steel Co., Alan,
E. E. Hughes. W. A. Cooper.
W. H. Woodcock. Worth Brothers Co.,
Railway Steel Spring Co., J. L. Hughes.
A. S. Henry. Youngstown Sheet and Tube Co.,
A. N. Lukens. E. T. McCleary.
Sargent, G. W.

Sub-Committees of Committee A-i.

Advisory Committee.
General Electric Co., Colby, Albert Ladd.
J. A. Capp (Chairman). Gibboney, J. H.
J. M. Darke. Jones and Laughlin Steel Co.,
American Locomotive Co., J. J. Shuman.
F. J. Cole. Lackawanna Steel Co.,
Baldwin Locomotive Works, F. E. Abbott.
H. V. Wille. Lanza, Gaetano.
Bethlehem Steel Co., Steelton Plant, MacFarland, H. B.
F. A. Robbins, Jr. Midvale Steel Co.,
Bureau of Construction and Repair, Guilliaem Aertsen.
U. S. N. Standard Steel Works Co.,
Cambria Steel Co., A. A. Stevenson.
E. F. Kenney. Waring, F. M.
Carnegie Steel Co., Warwick, C. L.
C. F. W. Rys.
H. P. Tiemann.

Sub-Committee I on Steel Rails and Accessories.

Cambria Steel Co., Churchill, C. S.
E. F. Kenney (Chairman). Colby, Albert Ladd.
Bethlehem Steel Co., Steelton Plant, Crawford, J. C.
F. A. Robbins, Jr. Illinois Steel Co.,
Carnegie Steel Co., P. E. Caxhart.
C. F. W. Rys.
 Standing Committees. 781

Committee A-i (Continued).

Sub-Committee I (Continued).

Lackawanna Steel Co. Snow, J. P.

F. E. Abbott. Steel Co. ofCanada,
MacFarland, H. B. G. Morrow.
J.
National Tube Co., Wickhorst, M. H.
F. N. Speller. Young, J. B.

Sub-Committee II on Structural Steel for Bridges,

Buildings and Rolling Stock.
Lackawanna Steel Co., Jones and Laughlin Steel Co.,
F. E.Abbott (Chairman). J. J. Shuman.
American Car and Foundry Co., Kellogg, TheM. W. Co.,
A. E. Ostrander. P. F. Johnson.
American Welding Co., National Tube Co.,
F. N. Speller.
C. L. Rowland.
New York Central Railroad Co.,
Bacon, C. G., Jr.
A. W. Carpenter.
Bureau of Construction and Repair, Pressed Steel Car Co.,
U. S. N. F. Streib.
T.
Cambria Steel Co., Quimby, H. H.
E. F. Kenney. Robinson, A. F.
Carnegie Steel Co., Snow, J. P.
J. O. Leech. Waring, F. M.
Deans, J. S. Youngstown Sheet and Tube Co.,
Edwards, L. N. E. T. McCleary.

Sub-Committee III on Structural Steel for Shd?s.

Bureau and Repair,
of Construction Davis, J. A.
U. S. N. (Chairman). Laverie, R. H.
Bethlehem Shipbuilding Corporation, Lloyds' Register of Shipping,
H. P. Phelps. James French.
Bethlehem Steel Co., Steelton Plant, Newport News Shipbuilding and Dry
F. A. Robbins, Jr. Dock Co.,
Cambria Steel Co., J. W. Gray.
E. F. Kenney. Rigg, E. H.
Carnegie Steel Co., Seattle Construction and Dry Dock
J. O. Leech. Co.,
Central Iron and Steel Co., C. W. Wilev.
R. H. Irons. Worth Brothers Co.,
Cramp and Sons Ship and Engine J. L. Hughes.
Building Co., William,
W. A. Dobson.

Sub-Committee IV on Spring Steel and Steel Springs.

MacFarland, H. B. (Chairman). Cambria Steel Co.,
American Locomotive Co., E. F. Kenney.
E. J. Edv. Carnegie Steel Co.,
Bethlehem Steel Co., Steelton Plant, H. P. Tiemann.
F. A. Robbins. Jr. Carpenter Steel Co.,
Bureau of Construction and Repair, J. H. Parker.
U. S. N.
782 Standing Committees.

COMMITTEE A-l (Continued).

Sub-Committee IV (Continued).

General Motors Co., Northern Pacific Railway Co.

K. W. Zimmerschied. H. G. Burnham.
Lanza, Gaetano. Railway Steel Spring Co.,
Mathews, J. A. A. N. Lukens.
McMahon, H. R. Sargent, G. W.
Standard Parts Co.,
Mid vale Steel Co.,
R. A. Townsend.
Guilliaem Aertsen.
Standard Steel Works Co.,
Newkirk, W. M. L. H. Fry.
New York Central Railroad Co., A. A. Stevenson.
H. E. Smith. Waring, F. M.
Norris, G. L. Zeleny, Frank.

Sub-Committee V on Steel Reinforcement Bars.

Carnegie Steel Co., Jones and Laughlin Steel Co.,
C. F. W. Rys (Chairman). J. J. Shuman.
Cambria Steel Co., Lanza, Gaetano.
G. E. Thackray. Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory,
Colby, Albert Ladd. A. R. Ellis.
Rail Steel Bar Manufacturers' Asso-
Committee C-2 on Reinforced Con-
ciation,
crete,
A. S. Hook.
Richard L. Humphrey. E. E. Hughes.
H. H. Quimby. W. H. Woodcock.
Hunt and Co., R. W., Scofield, H. H.
H. H. Morgan. Steel Co. of Canada,
Johnson, A. L. J. G. Morrow.

Sub-Committee VI on Steel Forgings and Billets.

Carnegie Steel Co., General Electric Co.,
H. P. Tiemann (Chairman). T. A. Capp.
American Locomotive Co., J. M. Darke.
F. J. Cole. Gibboney, J. H.
Baldwin Locomotive Works, Heppenstall Forge and Knife Co.
H. V. Wille. G. D. Chamberlain.
Bethlehem Steel Co., Bethlehem Jones and Laughlin Steel Co.,
Plant, J. J. Shuman.
F. D. Carney. Lloyds' Register of Shipping,
Bethlehem Steel Co., Steelton Plant, N. E. McClelland.
F. A. Robbins, Jr. MacFarland, H. B.
Bureau of Construction and Repair, MacPherran, R. S.
U. S. N. Midvale Steel Co.,
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U. S. Guilliaem Aertsen.
N., Inspection Division. Nelson, J. H.
Cambria Steel Co., New York Central Railroad Co.,
E. F. Kenney. H. E. Smith.
Campbell, William. Norris, G. L.
Carpenter Steel Co., Pollak, J. A. •

J. H. Parker. Schmid, M. H.
Colbv, Albert Ladd. Standard Steel Works Co.,
Force, H. J. L. H. Fry.
 ,

Standing Committees. 783

Committee A-i (Continued).

Sub-Committee VI (Continued).

Titanium Alloy Manufacturing Co., Westinghouse Electric and Manu-

G. A. White. facturing Co.,
United States Allovs Corporation, T. D. Lynch.
N. Petinot. Young, J. B.
Waring, F. M. Zeleny, Frank.
Washington Steel and Ordnance Co.,
S. V. Hunnings.

Sub-Committee VII on Rolled Steel Wheels and Steel

Tires.
Standard Steel Works Co., MacFarland, H. B.
A. A. Stevenson (Chairman). Midvale Steel Co.,
Bacon, C. G., Jr. Guilliacm Aertsen.
Bunnell, F. O. New York Central Railroad Co.
Cambria Steel Co., H. E. Smith.
_

E. F. Kenney. Railway Steel Spring Co.,

Carnegie Steel Co., A. S. Henry.
L. W. Conroy. Waring, F. M.
Cromwell, O. C. Zeleny, Frank.
Gibboney, J. H.

Sub-Committee VIII on Steel Castings.

Bethlehem Steel Co., Steelton Plant, General Electric Co.,
F. A. Robbins, Jr., (Chairman). J. A. Capp.
American Locomotive Co., J. M. Darke.
E. J. Edwards. National Malleable Castings Co.,
American Steel Foundries, W. G. Kranz.
J. C. Davis. Penn Seaboard Steel Corporation,
Birdsboro Steel Foundry and Ma- H. T. Klaer.
chine Co., Standard Steel Works Co.,
L. E. Thomas. L. H. Fry.
Bureau of Construction and Repair, A. A. Stevenson.
U. S. N. Waring, F. M.
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U. S.N. Westinghouse Electric and Manu-
Inspection Division. facturing Co.,
Colby, Albert Ladd. T. D. Lynch.
Eagan-Rogers Steel and Iron Co., Young, J. B.
J. I. Rogers.

Sub-Committee IX on Steel Tubing and Pipe.

Baldwin Locomotive Works, National Tube Co.,
H. V. Wille (Chairman). P. N. Speller.
American Locomotive Co., New York Central Railroad Co.
F. J. Cole. II. E. Smith.
Bethlehem Steel Co., Steelton Plant, Wallis,J. T.
P. A. Robbins, Jr. Woodroffe, G. II.
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U. S. N., Wort !
Co.,
Inspection Division. J. L. I In,
Locomotive Superheater Co., Zeleny, Frank.
H. B. Oatley.
 ,

784 Standing Committees.

Committee A-l (Continued).

Sub-Committee X on Automobile Steels.

Colby, Albert Ladd (Chairman). General Motors Co.,
Abbott, R. R. K. W. Zimmerschied.
American Locomotive Co., Heppenstall Forge and Knife Co.,
E. J. Edwards. G. D. Chamberlain.
Lothrop, M. T.
American Steel and Wire Co.,
M. Rodgers. Mathews, J. A.
S.
Nelson, J. H.
Beall, F. F.
Norris, G. L.
Bethlehem Steel Co., Bethlehem Pierce- ArrowMotor Car Co.,
Plant, David Fergusson.
F. D. Carney.
Sargent, G. W.
Bethlehem Steel Co., Steelton Plant, Schmid, M. H.
F. A. Robbins, Jr. Snow, F. A.
Cambria Steel Co., Standard Parts Co.,
E. F. Kenney. R. A. Townsend.
Carnegie Steel Co., Studebaker Corporation,
J. O. Leech. C. N. Dawe
Carpenter Steel Co., Washington Steel and Ordnance Co.
J. H. Parker. S. V. Hunnings.

Sub-Committee XI on Boiler Steel.

American Locomotive Co., Clark, F. H.
F. J. Cole (Chairman). Illinois Steel Co.,
Baldwin Locomotive Works, P. E. Carhart.
H. V. Wille. Lukens Iron and Steel Co.,
Bethlehem Steel Co., Bethlehem C. L. Huston.
Plant, Howard Taggart.
D. Carney.
F. Southern Railway,
Bethlehem Steel Co., Steelton Plant, C. Ramage.
J.
F. A. Robbins, Jr.
Waring, F. M.
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U. S. N.
Inspection Division.
Wood Iron and Steel Co., Alan,

Cambria Steel Co.,

W. A. Cooper.
,

E. F. Kenney. Worth Brothers Co.,

Carbon Steel Co., J. L. Hughes.
C. F. Blue, Jr. Young, J. B.
Carnegie Steel Co., Zeleny, Frank.
J. O. Leech.

Sub-Committee XII on Methods of Chemical Analysis.

Gibboney, J. H. (Chairman). Hunt and Co., R. W.,
American Locomotive Co., J. H. Campbell.
E. J. Edwards. Illinois Steel Co.,

Cain, J. R.
William Brady.
Cambria Steel Co., Job, Robert.
McDonnell, M. E.
E. F. Kenney.
Van Gundy, C. P.
Carnegie Steel Co., Washington Steel and Ordnance Co.
G. A. Hopkins. S. V. Hunnings.
 Standing Committees. 785

Committee A-i (Continued).

Sub-Committee XIII on Methods of Physical Tests.

Lanza, Gaetano (Chairman). Colby, Albert Ladd.
American Locomotive Co., General Electric Co.,
F. J. Cole. J. M. Darke.
Baldwin Locomotive Works, Gibboney, J. H.
H. V. Wille. Jones and Laughlin Steel Co.
Bethlehem Steel Co., Steelton Plant, J. J. Shuman.
F. A. Robbins, Jr. Lackawanna Steel Co.,
Bureau of Construction and Repair, F. E. Abbott.
U. S. N. MacFarland, H. B.
Cambria Steel Co., Standard Steel Works Co.,
E. F. Kenney. A. A. Stevenson.
Carnegie Steel Co., Waring, F. M.
C. F. W. Rys. Warwick, C. L.
H. P. Tiemann.

Sub-Committee XIV on Tool Steel.

General Electric Co., Carpenter Steel Co.,

J. M. Darke (Chairman). J. H. Parker.
American Locomotive Co., Colby, Albert Ladd.
E. J. Edwards. Johnson, R. P.
Baldwin Locomotive Works, Kingdon, F. H.
H. V. Wille. Mathews, J. A.
Beall. F. F. McDonnell, M. E.
Bethlehem Steel Co., Bethlehem Midvale Steel Co.,
Plant, Radclyffe Furness.
F. D. Carney. Sargent, G. W.
Bureau of Construction and Repair, Smith, H. T.
U. S. N. Washington Steel ani Ordnance Co.,
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U. S. N., S. V. Hunnings.
Machinery Division.

Sub-Committee XV on Cold-Drawn Steel.

Jones and Laughlin Steel Co., National Cash Register Co.,
J. J. Shuman (Chairman). A. B. Beaver.
American Steel and Wire Co., Remington Arms - Union Metallic
S. M.Rodgers. Cartridge Co.,
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U.S. N., N. A. Chase.
Inspection Division. Standard Screw Co.,
Cambria Steel Co., E. H. Ehrman.
E. F. Kenney. Union Drawn Steel Co.,
Carnegie Steel Co., F. N. Beegle.
J. O. Leech. Westinghouse Electric and Manu-
Columbia Steel and Shafting Co., facturing Co.,
E. T. Ickes. T. D. Lynch.
General Electric Co., Winchester Repeating Arms Co.,
J. A. Capp. J. S. Gravely.
 ,

786 Standing Committees.

Committee A-i (Continued).

Sub-Committee XVI on Cast Steel Chain.

Waring, F. M.
(Chairman). General Electric Co.,
American Bureau of Shipping, W. L. Merrill.
G. C. Sharp. Jones and Laughlin Steel Co.,
American Clay Machinery Co., A. E. Crockett.
H. D. Van Doom. Lewis. Wilfred.
American Engineering Co., Lloyds' Register of Shipping,
G E. Smith. James French.
Bethlehem Shipbuilding Corporation, McKay Co., James,
H. P. Phelps. R. McKay.
J.
Bradlee and Co., National Malleable Castings Co.
T. E. Newbold. E. F. Kitteridge.
Browne, F. A. Power, C. M.
Bureau of Construction and Repair, Rigg, E. H.
U. S. N. Whittemore, H. L.

Sub- Committee XVII on Literary Form.

Warwick, C. L. (Chairman). Carnegie Steel Co.,
J. O. Leech.

Committee A-2 on Wrought Iron.

H. E. Smith, Chairman.
J. B. Young, Secretary.

Non-Producers (20).

American Electric Railway Asso- Davidson, G. M.

ciation. Doke, G. E,
American Locomotive Co., Gannon, T. J.
E. J. Edwards. Lloyds' Register of Shipping,
Baldwin Locomotive Works, James French.
H. V. Wille. Smith, H. E. (Chairman).
Bureau of Construction and Repair, Snow, J. P.
U. S. N. Southern Railway,
Bureau of Steam Engineering,. U. S.N. J. C. Ramage.
Inspection Division. Waring, F. M.
Clark, F. H. Washington Steel and Ordnance Co.,
Colby, J. A. S. V. Hunnings.
Cramp and Sons Ship and Engine Young, C. D.
Building Co., William, Young, J. B. (Secretary).
W. A. Dobson. Zeleny, Frank

Producers (20)
American Iron and Steel Manu- Burden Iron Co.,
facturing Co., J. A. Burden.
J. P. Brock. Byers Co., A. M.,
Beale, H. A., Jr. James Aston.
Brown and Co., Inc., Columbus McKinnon Chain Co.,
James Neale. G. J. Armstrong.
 Standing Committees. 787

Committee A-2 {Continued).

Producers {Continued).

Crockett, A. E. Reading Iron Co.,

Gillespie, J. M. George Schuhmann.
Glasgow Iron Co., Rome Iron Mills, Inc.,
Roe.
J. P. C. C. Osterhaut.
Hayden Corbett Chain Co., Ryerson Co., J. T.,
F. Corbett.
J. H. A. Gray.
McKay Co., James, Stafford, B. E. D.
T. J. McKay. Thomas, David.
Molleson, G. E. Woodroffe, G. H.
Pittsburgh Forge and Iron Co., Worth Brothers Co.,
F. E. Richardson. J. L. Hughes.

SUB-COMMITTEES OF COMMITTEE A-2.

Sub- Committee I on Tubes and Pipe.

Beale, H. A., Jr. {Chairman). Gannon, T. J.
Baldwin Locomotive Works, Molleson, G. E.
H. V. Wille. Reading Iron Co.,
Bureau of Construction and Repair, George Schuhmann.
U. S. N. Woodroffe, G. H.
Clark, F. H. Worth Brothers Co.,
Doke, G. E. J. L. Hughes.

SUB-COMMITTEE II ON MERCHANT BAR IRON.

Young, J. B. {Chairman). Gillespie, J. M.
American Electric Railway Asso- Pittsburgh Forge and Iron Co.
ciation. F. E. Richardson.
American Iron and Steel Manufactur- Reading Iron Co.,
ing Co., George Schuhmann.
J. P. Brock. Snow, J. P.
Baldwin Locomotive Works, Southern Railway,
H. V. Wille. J. C. Ramage.
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U.S.N.

SUB-COMMITTEE III ON STAYBOLT AND ENGINE-BOLT IRON.

American Locomotive Co., Rome Iron Mills, Inc.,
E. J. Edwards {Chairman). C. C. Osterhaut.
American Electric Railway Asso- Ryerson Co., J. T.,
ciation. H. A. Gray.
Brown and Co., Inc., Smith, H. E.
James Neale. Stafford, B. E. D.
Burden Iron Co., Thomas, David.
J. A. Bui Washington Steel an 1 Ordnance Co.
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U. S. N. S. V. Hunnings.
Gillespie, J. M. Young, C. D.

SUB-COMMITTEE IV ON PLATES AND SHAPES.

Glasgow Iron Co., Gannon, T. J.
J. P. Row
{Chairman). Gillespie, J. M.
Bureau of Construction and Repair, Reading Iron Co.,
U. S. N. George Schuhmann.
Colby, J. A. Snow, J. P.
 .

788 Standing Committees.

COMMITTEE A-2 (Continued).

Sub- Committee V on Chain Iron and Iron Chain.

Waring, F. M. (Chairman). Crockett, A. E.
Burden Iron Co., Hayden Corbett Chain Co.,
A. Burden.
J. T. Corbett.
J.
Bureau of Construction and Repair, Lloyds' Register of Shipping,
U. S. N. James French.
Columbus McKinnon Chain Co., McKay Co., James,
G. J. Armstrong. T. J. McKay.
Cramp and Sons Ship and Engine Ryerson Co., J. T.,
Building Co., William, H. A. Gray.
W. A. Dobson.

Sub-Committee VI on Wrought Iron Blooms and

Forgings.
Smith, H. E. (Chairman). Lloyds' Register of Shipping,
American Locomotive Co., James French.
E. J. Edwards. Pittsburgh Forge and Iron Co.,
Baldwin Locomotive Works, F. E. Richardson.
H. V. Wille. Southern Railway,
Brown and Co.,
James Neale. J. C. Ramage.
Cramp and Sons Ship and Engine Thomas, David.
Building Co., William, Washington Steel and Ordnance Co.
W.A. Dobson. S. V. Hunnings.
Glasgow Iron Co., Young, C. D.
J. P. Roe.

COMMITTEE A-3 ON CAST IRON.

Richard Moldenke, Chairman.
Walter Wood, Vice-Chairman.
G. C. Davies, Secretary.

Non •Producers (30).

Campbell, William. Koch, G. B.
Davidson, G. M. Kreuzpointner, Paul.
Davies, G. C. (Secretary) Lanza, Gaetano.
Detroit Testing Laboratory, MacFarland, H. B.
W. P. Putnam. MacPherran, R. S.
Diller, H. E. Marsh, L. S.
DuComb, W. C, Jr. McKenna, C. F.
Electric Boat Co., Merica, P. D.
H. B. Hanley. Merriman, Mansfield.
Gibboney, T- H. Moldenke, Richard (Chairman).
Gibbs, A. W. Outerbridge, A. E., Jr.
Hildreth, P. S. Saunders, W. M.
Howe, H. M. Sauveur, Albert.
Hunt and Co., Robert W., Southern Railway,
J. C. Ogden. J. C. Ramage.
International Harvester Co., Touceda, Enrique.
J. G. Wood. Wille, H. V.
Job, Robert.
 Standing Committees. 789

Committee A-3 (Continued).

Producers (18).
American Car and Foundry Co.. •Jones and Laughlin Steel Co.,
D. M. Knox. Robt. Geddis.
American Foundrymen's Ass'n., Lemoine, L. R.
A. O. Backert. •Olsen, Tinius.
•American Locomotive Co., Peckitt, Leonard.
E. J. Edwards. Vial, F. K.
Bethlehem Steel Co., Washington Steel and Ordnance Co.,
F. W. Wood. S. V. Hunnings.
Central Foundry Co., Westinghouse Electric and Manu-
R R. Rust. facturing Co.,
Colorado Fuel and Iron Co., B. F Fuller.
J. B. McKennan. •Wood, Walter (Vice- Chairman).
Elliot, G. K. York Manufacturing Co.,
•Flagg, S. G., Jr. F. L. Hiller.
•Johnson, R. K.

Sub-Committees of Committee A-3.

Sub-Committee I on Pig Iron.

Davies, G. C. (Chairman). Moldenke, Richard.
American Locomotive Co., Peckitt, Leonard.
E. J. Edwards. Washington Steel and Ordnance Co.
International Harvester Co., S. V. Hunnings.
J. G. Wood.

Sub- Committee II on Pipe.

Wood, Walter (Chairman). Hunt and Co., R. W.,
American foundrymen's Ass'n., J. C. Ogden.
I. F. Kent. Lemoine, L. R.
Central Foundry Co., Marsh, L. S.
R. R. Rust.

Sub-Committee III on Cylinders.

Wille,H. V. (Chairman). Koch, G. B.
American Locomotive Co., MacFarland, H. B.
E. J. Edwards. Washington Steel and Ordnance Co.,
Gibboney, J. H. S. V. Hunnings.

Sub-Committee IV on Car Wheels.

Koch, G. B. (Chairman). Job, Robert.
American Car and Foundry Co.. Merica, P. D.
D. M. Knox. Outerbridge, A. E., Jr.
American Foundrymen's Ass'n., Southern Railway,
H. W. Ufer.
J. C. Ramage.
Davidson, G. M. Vial, F. K.
Gibbs, A. W.
•These members of Committee A-3, claisei as Producers, stand in the relation 01
Producer to certain product*, and in that of Mom Producer to other produot. within the
prorinoe of the Committee.
 . ,

790 Standing Committees.

COMMITTEE A-3 (Continued).

Sub-Committee V on Cast Iron Scrap.

Westinghouse Electric and Manu-
facturing Co.,
B. F. Fuller (Chairman).

Sub-Committee VI on General Castings.

H. E. (Chairman).
Diller, Hildreth, P. S.
American Foundrymen's Ass'n., Saunders, W. M.
R. S. MacPherran. York Manufacturing Co.,
H. B. Swan. F. L. Hiller.
Electric Boat Co.,
H. B. Hanley.

Sub-Committee VII on Microstructure of Cast Iron.

Campbell, William (Chairman). Flagg, S. G., Jr.
Davies, G. C. Koch, G. B.
Diller, H. E. Wille, H. V.
Elliott, G. K. Wood, Walter.

Sub-Committee VIII on Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

Central Foundry Co., Marsh, L. S.
R. R. Rust (Chairman). Moldenke, Richard.
Davies, G. C: Wood, Walter.

Sub- Committee IX on Molding Sand.

Electric Boat Co.,
H. B. Hanley (Chairman).

Committee A-4 on Heat Treatment of Iron and Steel.

J.H. Hall, Chairman.
H. M. Boylston, Secretary.

Non-Producers (8).

Barlow, W. E. Campbell, William.

Boylston, H. M. (Secretary). Howe, H. M.
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U. S.N. Sauveur, Albert.
Naval Engineering Experiment Stansfield, Alfred.
Station, Annapolis, Md. Stoughton, Bradley.
Inspector of Ordnance, Philadel-
phia.

Producers (5).

Bethlehem Steel Co., Bethlehem Plant, Midvale Steel Co.,

F. D. Carney. Guilliaem Aertsen.
Hall, J. H. (Chairman) Radclyffe Furness.
Kenney, E. F. Unger, J. S.
 ,

Standing Committees. 791

Committee A-5 on Corrosion of Iron and Steel.

S. S. Voorhees, Chairman.
J. H. Gibboney, Vice-Chair man.
J. 0. Handy, Vice-Chairman.
J. A. Aupperle, Secretary.

Non-Producers (22).

Bureau of Construction and Repair, McDonnell, M. E.

U. S. N. New York Central Railroad Co.
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U. S. N., Engineering Department,
Naval Engineering Experiment A. W. Carpenter.
Station, Annapolis, Md. Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory,
Burgess, C. F. J. O. Handy (Vice- Chair man).
Burgess, G. K. Potts, S. C.
Campbell, William. Rawdon, H. S.
Capp, J. A. Sagendorph, G. A.
Colby, Albert Ladd. Smith, H. E.
Finn, A. N. U. S. A. Quartermaster's Corps,
Gibboney, J. H. {Vice-Chairman). F. B. Wheaton.
Howe, H. M. Voorhees, S. S. (Chairman).
iob, Robert, Westinghouse Church Kerr and Co.,
ynch, T. D. C. M. Chapman.

Producers (19).

American Metal Co., Ltd., Hay, J. T.

H. M. Burkey. Hess, Henry.
American Steel and Wire Co., National Tube Co.,
S. M. Rodgers. F. N. Speller.
American Zinc.Lead and Smelting Co. Potthoff, K. L.
E. Shramm. Stone, G. C.
Aston, James. United States Sherardizing Co.,
Aupperle, ]. A. (Secretary). C. J. Kirk.
Buck, D. M. Walker, \Y. H.
Carnegie Steel Co., Whitaker Glessner Co.,
J. S. Unger. G. W. Moore.
Cooper, W. A. Youngstown Sheet and Tube Co.
Cushman, A. S. G. A. Reinhardt.
Fleming, W. R.

SUB-COMMITTEES OF COMMITTEE A-5.

Advisory Committee.
Voorhees, S. S. (Chairman). Gibboney, J. H.
Buck, D. M. National Tube Co.,
Burgess, G. K. F. N. Speller.
Cooper, W. A. Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory,
Cushman, A. S. J. O. Handy.
Fleming, W. R. Walker, W. H.
792 Standing Committees.

Committee A-5 (Continued).

Sub-Committee I on Construction.
Buck, D. M. (Chairman). Fleming, W. R.
Cooper, W. A. Gibboney, J. H.
Cushman, A. S.

Sub-Committee II on Preservative Metallic Coatings

for Metals.
Burgess, G. K. (Chairman). Hess, Henry.
American Metal Co., Ltd., McDonnell, M. E.
H. M. Burkey. National Tube Co.,
American Steel and Wire Co., F. N. Speller.
S. M. Rodgers. New York Central Railroad Co.,
American Zinc.Lead and Smelting Co., Engineering Department,
E. Shramm. A. W. Carpenter.
Aston, James. Potthoff, K. L.
Aupperle, T. A. Potts, S. C.
Buck, D. M. Rawdon, H. S.
Bureau of Construction and Repair, Stone, G. C.
U. S. N. United States Sherardizing Co.,
Capp, J. A. C. J. Kirk.
Cushman, A. S. Westinghouse Church Kerr & Co.,
Gibboney, J. H. • C. M. Chapman.

Sub-Committee III on Inspection.

Gibboney, J. H. (Chairman).
'
Cushman, A. S.
Buck, D. M. Fleming, W. R.
Bureau of Steam Engineering U. S. N., McDonnell, M. E.
Naval Engineering Experi- Smith, H. E.
ment Station. U. S. A. Quartermaster's Corps,
Cooper, W. A. F. B. Wheaton.

Sub-Committee IV on the Corrosion of Iron and

Steel in Cement and Patent Plaster.
Aston, James (Chairman). Finn, A. N.

Committee A-6 on Magnetic Properties.

C. W. Burrows, Chairman.
Non-Producers (7).
Burrows, C. W. (Chairman). Skinner, C. E.
Capp, J. A. Smith, I. B.
Crocker- Wheeler Co., Splitdorf Electrical Co.,
E. H. Waring. J. K. Leibing.
Follansbee Bros. Co.,
J. G. Homan.
Producers (5).
Beck, W. J. Pinkerton, Andrew.
Browne, Vere. Sargent, G. W.
Mathews, J. A.
 Standing Committees. 793

Committee a-7 on Malleable Castings.

H. E. Diller, Chairman.
Enrique Touceda, Secretary.
Non-Producers (10).

Ballentine,W. I. Job, Robert.

Davidson, G. M. Kimmel, H. R.
Detroit Testing Laboratory, Koch, G. B.
W. P. Putnam. Moldenke, Richard.
H. E. {Chairman).
Diller, Patrick, W. W.
Gibboney, J. H.
Producers (10).

American Foundrymen's Associa- Haswell, J. C.

tion, National Malleable Castings Co.,
E Touceda {Secretary). W. G. Kranz.
Coates, J. B. Northern Malleable Iron Co.,
Flagg, S. G., Jr. F. R. Angell.
Forbes, W A. Sivver, F. L.
Fort Pitt Malleable Iron Co., Symington Co., T. H.,
A. M. Fulton. D. S. Barrows.

Committee A-8 on Magnetic Analysis.

C. W. Burrows, Chairman.
W. J. Kouwenhoven, Vice-C'hair-man.
R. L. Sanford, Secretary.

Burrows, C. W. {Chairman). New Jersey Zinc Co.,

Devries, R. P. B. F. Tillson.
Dudley, P. H. Sanford, R. L. {Secretary).
Fahy, F. P. Smith, C. M.
Hess-Bright Manufacturing Co., Waggoner, C. W.
E. W. Rubencame, Jr. Winchester Repeating Arms Co.,
Kouwenhoven, W. J. {Vice-Chair- J. S. Gravely.
man).

B. NON-FERROUS METALS.
Committee B-i on Copper Were.
J. A. Capp, Chairman.

Non-Producers (5).
General Electric Co., Westinghouse Electric and Manu-
J. A. Capp {Chairman). facturing Co.,
Macl'hcrran, R. S. T. D. Lynch.
Western Electric Co., White Engineering Corporation,
J. W. Harris. The J. G.,
C. D. Gray.
794 Standing Committees.

Committee B-i (Continued).

Producers (5).

American Brass Co., Standard Underground Cable Co.,

W. H. Bassett. C. C. Baldwin.
American Steel and Wire Co., Waclark Wire Co.,
E. H. Peirce. F. W. Wallace.
Roebling's Sons Co., J. A.,
H. J. Horn.

Committee B-2 on Non-Ferrous Metals and Alloys.

William Campbell, Chairman.
Vice-Chair men.
W. H. Bassett. W. A. Cowan.
G. H. Clamer. P. D. Merica.
W. M. Corse. W. Reuben Webster.
Non-Producers (32).

American Locomotive Co., Harrington, C. O.

F. J. Cole. Herreshoff, J. B., Jr.
E. J. Edwards. Hillebrand, W. F.
American Steel and Wire Co., Inland Steel Co.,
S. M. Rodgers.
_
G. H. Jones.
Bethlehem Shipbuilding Corporation, Lindsay, C. F.
H. P. Phelps. Lumen Bearing Co.,
Bregowsky, I. M. N. K. B. Patch.
Buell, W. H. MacPherran, R. S.
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U.S. N., McKinney, P. E.
Inspection Division. Merica, P. D. (Vice-Chairman).
Burgess, G. K. Norris, G. L.
Campbell, William (Chairman). Olson, L. W.
Chase, C. E. Reinhardt, G. A.
Cramp and Sons Ship and Engine Shepard, W. K.
Building Co., William, Smith, H. E.
N. H. Schwenk. Southern Railway,
deForest, A. V. J. C. Ramage.
General Electric Co., Walker, A. L.
J. A. Capp, Waring, F. M.
J. M. Darke. Webbert, L. P.
Greene, H. L. Wille, H. V.

Producers* (29).

Addicks, Leonard. Aluminum Co. of America,

Ajax Metal Co., E. Blough.
G. H. Clamer (Vice- Chair man) American Brass Co.,
Aluminum Castings Co., W. H. Bassett (Vice-Chair man).
Zay Jeffries. Alden Merrell.

* The members of Committee B-2, classed as Producers, stand In the relation of

Producer to certain products, and In that of Non-Producer to other products within th*
province of the Committee.
 ' 1

Standing Committees. 795

COMMITTEE B-2 (Continued).

Producers* (Continued).
American Manganese Bronze Co., Hendricks Brothers, Inc.,
C. R. Spare. E. J. Keane.
American Metal Co., Johnston, R. L.
H. M. Burkey. Klaustermeyer, C. H.
American Smelting and Refining Co., New Jersey Zinc Co.,
H. H. Alexander. L. S. Holstein.
American Zinc, Lead and Smelting G. C. Stone.
Co., Price, W. B.
A. W. Dodd. Raritan Copper Works,
Bridgeport Brass Co., F. L. Antisell.
Charles Ferry. A. C. Clark.
W. Reuben Webster (Vice-Chair- Thompson, J. F.
man). United States Metals Refining Co.,
Bryden, W. O. W. R. Deacon.
Cairns, F. J. United States Smelting, Refining and
Calumet and Hecla Mining Co., Mining Co.,
R. L. Agassiz. F. F. Colcord.
Chiwis, Norman. Westinghouse Electric and Manu-
Corse,W. M. (Vice- Chair man). facturing Co.,
Cowan, W. A. (Vice-Chairman). J. L. Jones.
Damascus Bronze Co., Winchester Repeating Arms Co.,
W. K. Frank. J. S. Gravely.
General Aluminum and Brass Manu-
facturing Co.,
V. Skillman.

Sub-Committees of Committee B-2.

Sub-Committee I on Pure Metals in Ingot Form.

American Brass Co., Herreshoff, J. B., Jr.
W. H. Bassett (Chairman). New Jersey Zinc Co.,
Addicks, Leonard. G. C. Stone.
Ajax Metal Co., Olson, L. W.
G. H. Clamer. Price, W. B.
American Metal Co., Raritan Copper Works,
H. M. Burkey. F. L. Antisell.
American Smelting and Refining Co., Reinhardt, G. A.
H. H. Alexander. Shepard, W. K.
American Steel and Wire Co., United States Metals Refining Co.,
S. M. Rodgers. W. R. Deacon.
American Zinc, Lead and Smelting United States Smelting, Refmr
Co., Mining Co.,
A. W. Dodd. F. F. Colcord.
Bridgeport Brass Co., Walker, A. L.
(
'ha' Webbert, L. P.
Bryden. W. O. Westinghouse Electric and Manu-
Cojsc. W. M. facturing Co.,
Cowan, W. A. J. L.
]"
* The members of Committee B-2. i icks, stand I

rn products, and in that of N'on-Produckr to oih<r prodoctl wi'hin the

province of the Committee.
796 Standing Committees.

Committee B-2 (Continued).

Sub- Committee II on Wrought Metals and Alloys.

Bridgeport Brass Co., Price, W.
B.
W. R. Webster (Chairman). Smith, H. E.
American Brass Co., Thompson, J. F.
W. H.Bassett. Westinghouse Electric and Manu-
deForest, A. V. facturing Co.,
General Electric Co., J. L. Jones.
J. A. Capp. Winchester Repeating Arms Co.,
Lindsay, C. F. J. S. Gravely.
MacPherran, R. S.

Sub-Committee III on Sand-Cast Metals and Alloys.

Corse,W. M. (Chairman). Olson, L. W.
Ajax Metal Co., Thompson, J. F.
G. H. Clamer. Webbert, L. P.
American Manganese Bronze Co., Westinghouse Electric and Manu-
C. R. Spare. facturing Co.,
Bregowsky, I. M. J. L. Jones.
Lumen Bearing Co.,
N. K. B. Patch.

Sub-Committee IV on White Metals —Tin, Lead, and Zinc

Base.
Ajax Metal Co., MacPherran, R. S.
G. H. Clamer (Chairman). Smith, H. E.
Chase, C. E.' Westinghouse Electric and Manu-
Corse,W. M. facturing Co.,
Cowan, W. A. Jesse L. Jones.

Sub-Committee V on Plates, Tubes and Staybolts

eor Locomotives.
Bridgeport Brass Co., Calumet and Hecla Mining Co.,
W. R. Webster (Chairman). R. L. Agassiz.
American Brass Co., Hendricks Brothers, Inc.,
W. H. Bassett. E. j. Keane.
American Locomotive Co., Raritan Copper Works,
F. J. Cole. A. C. Clark.
_

American Smelting and Refining Co., WiUe, H. V.

H. H. Alexander. Winchester Repeating Anns Co.,
Burgess, G. K. J. S. Gravely.
Cairns, F. J.

Sub-Committee VI on Non-Ferrous Alloys for Railroad

Equipment.
Ajax Metal Co., Smith, H. E.
G. H. Clamer (Chairman). Southern Railway,
American Locomotive Co., J. C. Ramage.
E. T- Edwards. Waring, F. M.
Corse, W. M. Wille, H. V.
Damascus Bronze Co.,
W. K. Frank.
 Standing Committees. 797

Committee B-2 (Continued).

Sub-Committee VII on Methods of Chemical Analyses.

Cowan, W. A. (Chairman). New Jersey Zinc Co.
American Brass Co., L. S. Holstein.
Alden Mcrrell. G. C. Stone.
General Electric Co., Price, W. B.
J. A. Capp.

Sub-Committee VIII on Aluminum Alloys, Cast and

Wrought.
Merica, P. D. (Chairman). General Electric Co.,
Aluminum Castings Co., J. M. Darke.
Zay Jeffries. Greene, H. L.
Aluminum Co. of America, Harrington, C. O.
E. Blough. Johnston, R. L.
Bethlehem Shipbuilding Corporation, McKinney, P. E.
H. P. Phelps. Norris, G. L.
Cramp and Sons Ship and Engine Westinghouse Electric and Manu-
Building Co., William, facturing Co.,
N. H. Schwenk. J. L. Jones.
General Aluminum and Brass Manu-
facturing Co.,
V. Skillman.

C. CEMENT, LIME, GYPSUM, AND CLAY PRODUCTS.

Committee C-i on Cement.
R. S. Greenman, Chairman.
H. B. MacFarland, Vice-Chairman.
W. M. Kinney, Vice-Chair man.
P. H. Bates, Secretary.

Non-Producers (32).

American Institute of Architects, Greenman, R. S. (Chairman).

Thomas Nolan. Hatt, W. K.
American Railway Engineering Asso- Hoist, J. L.
ciation, Humphrey, Richard L.
H. A. Cassil. Johnson, N. C.
F. P. Sisson. Loweth, C. F.
J. J. Yates. Lucas, G. L.
Bates, P. H. (Secretary). MacFarland, H. B. (Vice-Chairman).
Boynton, C. W. Phillips, A. E.
Bureau of Yards and Docks, Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory,
C. D. Thurber. J. L. Miner.
Edwards, L. N. Potts S. C.
Froehling and Robertson, Porter, J. M.
H. C. Froehling. Rav, G. J.
Goldbeck, A. T. Robinson, A. F.
798 Standing Committees.

Committee C-l (Continued).

Non-Producers (Continued).

Schall, F. E. Walter, L. W.
Smith, Emery and Co., Webster, G. S.
E. E. Smith. Westinghouse Church Kerr and Co.,
Union Pacific Railroad, C. M. Chapman.
N. F. Harriman. Wig, R. J.
U. S. Reclamation Service, Wiltsee, W. P.
A. P. Davis. Wilson, P. H.

Producers (22).

Abrams, D. A. Kelley, F. W.
Ackerman, E. R. Kinney, W. M. (Vice-Chairman).
Ashton, Ernest. Klein, W. H.
Brobston, Joseph. Lesley, R. W.
Conn, C. F. Lober, W. D.
Consolidated Rosendale Cement Co., Newberry, Spencer B.
C. F. McKenna. Portland Cement Association,
Diekmann, G. P. HE. Hilts.
Drew, Harry. Potter, N. S., Jr.
Harding, W. H. Spackman Engineering Co., H. S.,
Hart, O. C. H. S. Spackman.
Hartzell, H. S. Tagge, A. C.
Hicks, T. A.

SUB-COMMITTEES OF COMMITTEE C-l.

Advisory Committee.
Greenman, R. S. (Chairman). Kelley, F. W.
Ashton, Ernest. Kinney, W. M.
Bates, P. H. (Secretary). MacFarland, H. B.
Hatt, W. K. Potts, S. C.
Hicks, T. A. Wig, R. J.
Humphrey, Richard L.

Sub- Committee I on Definition and Chemical

Limitations.
Hicks, T. A. (Chairman). Lucas, G. L.
American Railway Engineering Asso- Newberry, S. B.
ciation,
H. A. Cassil.

Sub-Committee II on Specific Gravity.

Potts, S. C. (Chairman). Tagge, A. C.
Diekmann, G. P. Wilson, P. H.
Schall, F. E.
 Standing Committees. 799

Committee C-i (Continued).

Sub-Committee III on Fineness.

Wig, R. J. {Chairman). Spackman Engineering Co., H. S.,
Abrams, D. A. H. S. Spackman.
Ashton, Ernest. Union Paciiic Railroad,
Brobston, Joseph. TT
N F Harriman.
- -

Drew, Harry. U S. Reclamation Service,

-
#

"' \- Dav)*\
MacFarland, H. B.
kT , A r> '
w *
uv
Westinghouse Church Kerr and Co., An
Newberry, S. B.
c M chapman.

Sub-Committee IV on Soundness and Constancy

of Volume.
Humphrey, Richard L. (Chairman). Harding, W. H.
American Railway Engineering Asso- Hicks, T. A.
ciation. Ray, G. J.
P. E. Schall. Webster, G. S.

Sub-Committee V on Normal Consistency.

Hatt, W. K.
(Chairman). Boynton, C. W.
American Railway Engineering Asso- Goldbeck, A. T.
ciation. Hartzell, H. S.

Sub-Committee VI on Time of Setting.

Kelley, F. W. (Chairman). Bates, P. H.
American Railway Engineering Asso- Loweth, C. F.
ciation, Smith, Emery and Co.
J. J. Yates. Spackman, Engineering Co., H. S.

Sub-Committee VII on Strength.

Greenman, R. S. (Chairman). Ashton, Ernest.
Abrams, D. A. Bates, P. H.
American Railway Engineering Asso- Kinney, W. M.
ciation, Newberry, S. B.
F. P. Sisson. Walter, L. W.

Sub-Committee VIII on Sampling, Storage, Packages

and Inspection.
Kinney, W. M. (Chairman). Phillips, A. E.
Goldbeck, A. T. Potter, N. S., Jr.
Hoist, J. L. Walter, L. W.

Sub-Committee IX on General Clauses.

Ashton, Ernest (Chairman). v, K. W.
American Institute of Architects, Porter, J. M.
Thomas Nolan. Wil on, I'. If.
800 Standing Committees.

Committee C-i (Continued).

Sub-Committee X on Natural Cement.

Bates, P. H. (Chairman). McFarland, H. B.
Ackerman E. R. Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory,
Consolidated Rosendale Cement Co., J. L. Miner.
C. F. McKenna. Westinghouse Church Kerr and Co.,
Goldbeck, A. T. C. M. Chapman.
Lesley, R. W. Wilson, P. H.

Committee C-2 on Reinforced Concrete.

Richard L. Humphrey, Chairman.

R. W. Lesley, Vice-Chairman.
S. T. Wagner, Secretary.

Non-Producers (8).

Humphrey, Richard L. (Chairman). Thompson, S. E.

Lanza, Gaetano. Turneaure, F. E.
Moisseiff, L. S. Wagner, S. T. {Secretary).
Quimby, H. H. Webster, G. S.

Producers (3).

Franklin Steel Co., Lesley, R. W. (Vice-Chairman).

E. E. Hughes.
Johnson, A. L.

Committee C-3 on Brick.

Edward Orton, Jr., Chairman.

A. V. Blelninger, Secretary.

Non-Producers (8).

Bleininger, A. V. (Secretary). Talbot, A. N.

Emley, W. E. Testing Laboratory, City of St. Louis,
Lawson, T. R. E. P. Withrow.
Lazell, E. W. Woolson, I. H.
Orton, Edward, Jr. (Chairman).

Producers (6).

W. P.
Blair, Rathjens, George.
Crume, W. H. Salmen, F.
Randall, T. A. Schlake, William.
 Standing Committees. 801

Committee C-4 on Clay and Cement Sewer Pipe.

Rudolph Hering, Chairman.

A. J. Provost, Jr., Vice-Chairman.
G. T. Hammond, Secretary.

Non-Producers (12).

Barbour, F. A. Marston, A.
Bleininger, A. V. Provost, A. J., Jr. {Vice- Chairman).
Eddy, H. P. Shelley, H. T.
Hammond, G. T. {Secretary). Testing Laboratory, City St. of Louis,
Hering, Rudolph {Chairman). E. P. Withrow.
Howe, M. A. Webster, G. S.
Humphrey, Richard L.

Producers (12).

American Concrete Pipe Association, McCombe, A. S.

J. H. Libberton. Oberkirch, Frank.
Ashton, Ernest. 1 ortland Cement Association,

Bent, A. S. Coleman Meriwether.

Blackmer, L. G. Starr, J. J.
Dickey, W. S. Zeidler, J. L.
Kilgus, H. E.
Lock Joint Pipe Co.,
A. M. Hirsch.

Sub-Committees of Committee C-4.

Sub-Committee I on Absorption and Hydrostatic

Pressure Test Requirements.
Shelley,H. T. {Chairman). Starr, J. J.
Blackmer, L. G. Testing Laboratory, City of St. Louis,
Hammond, G. T. E. P. Withrow.
Portland Cement Association,
Coleman Meriwether.

Sub-Committee II on Chemical Requirements.

Portland Cement Association, Hammond, G. T.
Coleman Meriwether {Chairman). Kilgus, II. E.
Ashton, Ernest. Provost, A. J., Jr.
Dickey, W. S.

Sub-Committee III on Dimensions and Their Permissible

VARIATI'
Eddy, H. P. (Chairman). Portland Cement Association,
Bent, A. S. Coleman Meriwether.
Blackmer, L. G. Provost, A. L, Jr.
Dickey, W. S. Shelley, H. T.
McCombe, A. S. Zeidler, J. L.
 .

802 Standing Committees.

COMMITTEE C-4 (Continued).

Sub-Committee IV on Certain Legal Definitions.

Dickey, W. S. (Chairman) Portland Cement Association,
Webster, G. S. Coleman Meriwether.

Sub-Committee V on Glossary of Terms.

Eddy, H. P. (Chairman). Provost, A. J., Jr.
Dickey, W. S. Shelley, H. T.

Committee C-5 on Fireproofing.

I.H. Woolson, Chairman.
R. P. Miller, Secretary.

Non-Producers (8).

Boiler, Hodge and Baird, Miller, R. P. (Secretary).

W. H. Hodge. Norton, C. L.
Ewing, W. W. Waid, D. E.
Freeman, J. R. Woolson, I. H. (Chairman).
Macgregor, J. S.

Producers (5).

Associated Metal Lath Manufac- Haigh, D. L.

turers, Lindau, A. E.
Z. W.
Carter. Perrine, Harold.
Bevier, P. H.

Committee C-6 on Drain Tile.

A. Marston, Chairman.
A. N. Talbot, Vice-Chairman.
J. T. Stewart, Secretary.
D. A. Abrams, Assistant Secretary.

Non-Producers (8).

Chatburn, G. R. Talbot, A. N. (Vice- Chairman).

Hering, Rudolph. Turneaure, F. E.
Marston, A. (Chairman). U. S. Bureau of Irrigation,
Orton, Edward, Jr. Samuel Fortier.
Stewart, J. T. (Secretary).

Producers (7).

Abrams, D. A. (Assistant Secretary). Portland Cement Association,

Brooks, Benjamin. Coleman Meriwether.
Diekmann, G. P. Rawson, C. A.
Hammen, J. J. Tefft, G. H.
 Standing Committees. 803

Committee C-7 on Lime.

D. K. Boyd, Chairman.
H. C. Berry, Vice-Chairman.
Charles Warner, Vice-Chairman.
N. G. Hough, Secretary.

Non-Producers (7).

American Institute of Architects, Shorey, W. E.

D. K. Boyd {Chairman). Spackman Engineering Co.,
Berry, H. C. {Vice- Chairman). E. L. Conwell.
Emley, W. E. Upham, C. M.
Kirkpatrick, F. A.

Producers (7).

Hough, N. G. {Secretary). McNulty, B. M.

Kelley Island Lime and Transport Security Cement and Lime Co.,
Co., J.J.Porter.
F. A. Jones. Warner, Charles {Vice- Chairman).
Lime Association, The Wood, G. B.
W. E. Carson.

Committee C-8 on Refractories.

A. V. Bleintnger, Chairman.
W. H. Fulweiler, Secretary.

Non-Producers (21).

American Smelting and Refining Co., Moldenke, Richard.

E. P. Mathewson. Montgomery, R. J.
Bleininger, A. V. {Chairman). Norton, C. L.
Boeck, P. N. Norton Co.,
Camp, A. D. Ross C. Purdy.
Carroll, A. W. Orton, Edward, Jr.
Department of Ceramics, Rutgers Parmelee, C. W.
College, Stone, G. C.
G. H. Brown. Stull, R. T.
Fulweiler, W. H. {Secretary). Unger, J. S.
International Harvester Co., United States Metals Refining Co.,
J. C. Warnes. R. W. Deacon.
Kenney, L. H. Van Arsdale, G. D.
Kerr, C. H.

Producers (20).

Allen, E. M. Claiborne, C. H.
Balz, G. A. Davis, R. P. M.
Borgner, Cyrus. Green, J. L.
Cavendar, J. H. Howe, R. M.
804 Standing Committees.

Committee C-8 (Continued).

Producers (Continued).
Kier, P. S. Seaver, Kenneth.
Kurtz, T. N. Stowe, C. B.
Laclede-Christy Clay Products Co., Stuhler, H. E.
R. D. Hatton. Taylor, A. P.
McKinley, J. M. Tredennick. H. L.
Ramsay, J. D. Weinfurtner, E. M.
Reed, C. S.

Sub-Committees of Committee C-8.

Sub-Committee I on Fusion Tests.

Parmelee, C. W. (Chairman). Orton, Edward, Jr.
Davis, R. P. M Stowe, C. B.
Howe, R. M. Stuhler, H. E.
Kenney, L. H. Van Arsdale, G. D.
Norton Co.,
R. C. Purdy.

Sub-Committee II on Analysis.
Kerr, C. H. (Chairman). International Harvester Co.,
American Smelting and Refining Co., J. C. Warnes.
E. P Mathewson. McKinley, J. M.
Camp, A. D. Unger, J. S.
Howe, R. M. Weinfurtner, E. M.

Sub-Committee III on Industrial Survey.

Allen, E. M. (Chairman). Howe, R. M.
American Smelting and Refining Co., Kenney, L. H.
E. P. Mathewson. Moldenke, Richard.
Balz, G. A. Seaver, Kenneth.
Bleininger, A. V. Stone, G. C.
Borgner, Cyrus. Van Arsdale, G. D.
Cavender, J. H.

Sub-Committee IV on Thermal Conductivity and

Thermal Expansion.
Boeck, P. A. (Chairman). Norton, C. L.
Balz, G. A. Norton Co.,
Fulweiler, W. H. R. C. Purdy.
Howe, R. M. Seaver, Kenneth.

Sub-Committee V on Porosity and Permanent

Volume Change.
Norton Co., Green, J. L.
R. C. Purdy (Chairman). Howe, R. M.
Bleininger, A. V. Kerr, C. H.
Department of Ceramics, Rutgers Kurtz, T. N.
College,
G. H. Brown.
 Standing Committees. 805

Committee C-8 (Continued).

Sub-Committee VI on Load Tests at High Temperatures.

Fulweiler, W. H. (Chairman). Taylor, A. P.
Bleininger, A. V. Tredennick, H. L.
Camp, A. D. Unger, J. S.
Kier, P. S. United States Metals Refining Co.,
Montgomery, R. J. R. W. Deacon.

Sub-Committee VII on Spalling Action.

R. T. (Chairman).
Stull, Kier, P. S.
Department of Ceramics, Rutgers Montgomery, R. J.
College, Reed, C. S.
G. H. Brown. United States Metals Refining Co.,
Howe R. M. R. W. Deacon.

Sub-Committee VIII on Slagging Action.

Unger, J. S. (Chairman). Orton, Edward Jr.,
W.
Carroll, A. Ramsay, J D.
Howe, R. M. Seaver, Kenneth.
Kerr, C. H. United States Metals Refining Co.,
Laclede-Christy Clay Products Co., R. W. Deacon.
R. D. Hatton.

Committee C-9 on Concrete and Concrete

Aggregates.

S. E. Thompson, Chairman.
C. M. Chapman, Vice-Chair man.
A. T. Goldbeck, Secretary.

Non-Producers (18).

Abrams, D. A. Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory,

Edwards, L. N. P. J. Freeman.
Ferguson, L. R. Spackman Engineering Co., H. S.,

Goldbeck, A. T. (Secelary). H - s Spackman.

-

Graf S H Talbot, A. X
Gree'nman,' R. S.
Tt, c a
„ t txA.
Johnson,
w^T'wW. K
Walter, L.
^ Chairman ^
j Westinghouse Church Kerr and Co.,
Johnson, N. C. r M Chapman ( Vice-Chairman).
Lucas, G. L. Wig, R. J.
Mattimore, H. S. Witney M. O. ,

Producers (8).

Ashton, Ernest. Kinney, W. M.

Boyer, E. D. Love, H. J.
Donaldson, W. E Moore, H. A.
Kellcy, F. W. Renwick, F. W.
806 Standing Committees.

Sub-Committees of Committee C-9.

Advisory Committee.
Thompson, S. E. (Chairman). Goldbeck, A. T.
Westinghouse Church Kerr and Co., Kelly, F. W.
C. M. Chapman. Moore, H. A.

Sub- Committee I on Definitions.

Ferguson, L. R. (Chairman). Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory
P. J. Freeman.

Sub-Committee on Laboratory Tests for Concrete

II
and Laws of Mechanical Mixtures.
Abrams, D. A. (Chairman). Renwick, F. W.
Edwards, L. N. Talbot, A. N.
Graf, S. H. Withey, M. O.

Sub-Committee III on Sampling and Testing Field

Concrete.
Kinney, W. M. (Chairman). Walter, L. W.
Greenman, R. S. Wig, R. J.
Johnson, J. S. A.

Sub- Committee IV on Relative Values of Various

Strength Tests.
Goldbeck, A. T. (Chairman). Spademan Engineering Co., H. S.,
Greenman, R. S. H. S. Spackman.

Sub-Committee V on Impurities Affecting Fine

Aggregates.
Kelley, F. W. (Chairman). Ferguson, L. R.
Abrams, D. A. Johnson, N. C.
Boyer, E. D.

Sub-Committee VI on Methods of Tests for Vodds,

Weights, Density, Specific Gravity and
Consistency.
Westinghouse Church Kerr and Co., Lucas, G. L.
C. M. Chapman (Chairman). Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory,
Goldbeck, A. T. P. J. Freeman.
 Standing Committees. 807

Committee C-9 (Continued).

Sub-Committee VII on Methods of Tests of Coarse

Aggregates.
Ashton, Ernest (Chairman). Moore, H. A.
Donaldson, W. E. Renwick, F. W.
Love, H. J. Westinghouse Church Kerr and Co.,
Mattimore, H. S. C. M. Chapman.

Sub-Committee VIII on Available Aggregates for

Concrete.
Mattimore, H. S. (Chairman). Kinney, W. M.
Ferguson, L. R. Wig, R. J.

Sub-Committee IX on Specifications for Fine

Aggregates.
Westinghouse Church Kerr and Co., Boyer, E. D.
C. M. Chapman (Chairman). Kelly, F. W.
Abrams, D. A. Talbot, A. N.

Committee C-io on Hollow Building Tile.

L. H. Provtne, Chairman.
P. H. Bevier, Vice-Chairman.
E. V. Johnson, Secretary.

Non-Producers (8).

Griffith, J. H. Morris, C. T.
Johnson, E. V. (Secretary). Orton, Edward, Jr.
Miller, R. P. Pro vine, L. H. (Chairman).
Mills, A. P. Shankland, E. C.

Producers (8).

Bevier, P. H. (Vice- Chair man). National Fireproofing Co.,

Clay Products Co., The, H. S. Brightly.
H. H. Potter. *

Jenkins Brick Co., *

*
J. M. Jenkins, Jr.
Mason City Brick and Tile Co.,
B. C. Keeler.

Sub-Committees of Committee C-io.

Sub-Committee I on Strength and Load Tests.

Griffith, J. II. (Chairman). National Fireproofing Co.,
Mills, A. P. H. S. Brightly.
Morris, C. T. Shankland, E. C.

•Vacancy to be filld.
808 Standing Committees.

Committee C-io (Continued).

Sub-Committee II on Fire Tests.

Johnson, E. V. (Chairman). Miller,R. P.
Clay Products Co., The, Shankland, E. C.
H. H. Potter.

Sub-Committee III on Absorption and Frost Resistance.

Orton, Edward, Jr. (Chairman). Mason City Brick and Tile Co.,
Bevier, P. H. B. C. Keeler.

Sub- Committee IV on Insulation and Acoustics.

(Chairman). *
Johnson, E. V.
Orton, Edward, Jr.

Committee C-n on Gypsum.

R. Wig, Chairman.
J.
F. A. Wilder, Vice-Chairman.
R. P. Miller, Vice-Chairman.
V. G. Marani, Secretary.

Non-Producers (20).

Abrams, D. A. Miller, R. P. (Vice- Chairman).

American Institute of Architects, Mills, A. P.
J. R. Rockart. Norton, C. L.
Ashton, Ernest. Riddle, G. W.
Emley, W. E. Slater, W. A.
Froehling and Robertson, Tagge, A. C.
Henry Froehling. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Hicks, T. A. W. C. Robinson.
Hull, W. A. Waid, D. E.
Kirkpatrick, F. A. Wig, R. J. (Chairman).
Macgregor, J. S. Woolson, I. H.
Menefee, F. N.

Producers (11).

American Cement Plaster Co., Neale, L. I.

Edward Tupper. Pacific Portland Cement Co., Consoli-
C. A. Berryhill. dated,
Brown, H. J. T. S. Montgomery.
Grand Rapids Plaster Co., Southern Gypsum
Co.,
A. H. Apted. P. A. Wilder (Vice- Chair man).
Gypsum Industries Association, Tomkins, Calvin.
V. G. Marani (Secretary). United States Gypsum Co.,
Haigh, D. L. Charles Henning.
King and Co., J. B., G. L. Southard.
J. C. Seguine.

* Vacancy to be filled.
 Standing Committees. 809

Sub-Committees of Committee c-ii.

Sub-Committee I on Gypsum for Various Uses.

American Cement Plaster Co., Hull, W. A.
Edward Tupper. Macgregor, J. S.
C. A. Berryhill. Menefee, F. N.
Ashton, Ernest. Southern Gypsum Co.,
Brown, H. J. F. A. Wilder (Chairman).
Emley, W. E. Tagge, A. C.
Gypsum Industries Association, United States Gypsum Co.,
V. G. Marani. G. L. Southard.
Hicks, T. A. Charles Henning.

Sub-Committee II on Gypsum Plasters.

Haigh, D. L. (Chairman). Kirkpatrick, F. A.
Abrams, D. A. Miller, R. P.
American Cement Plaster Co., Norton, C. L.
Edward Tupper. Southern Gypsum Co.,
Brown, H. J. F. A. Wilder.
Emley, W. E. Tomkins, Calvin.
Grand Rapids, Plaster Co., United States Gypsum Co.,
A. H. Apted. G. L. Southard.
King and Co., J. B., Waid, D. E.
J. C. Seguine.

Sub-Committee III on Structural Gypsum Products.

Slater, W. A. (Chairman). King and Co. J. B.,
American Cement Plaster Co., J. C. Seguine,
C. A. Berryhill.
Miller, R. P.
Riddle, G. W.
Gypsum Industries Association,
United States Gypsum Co.,
V. G. Marani. Charles Henning.
Hull, W. A. Woolson, I. H.

Sub-Committee IV on Testing Methods.

Emley, W. E. (Chairman). Mills, A. P.
Abrams, D. A. Norton, C. L.
American Cement Plaster Co.. Tomkins, Calvin.
Edward Tupper. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.,
Froehling and Robertson, W. C. Robinson.
Henry Froehling. United States Gypsum Co.,
Gypsum Industries Association, G. L. Southard.
V. G. Marani. Woolson, I. H.
Haigh, D. L.

Sub-Committee V on Nomenclature.
(Chairman). Gypsum Industries Association,
American Cement Plaster Co., V. G. Marani.
Edward Tup; Macgregor, J. S.
American Institute of Architects, United States Gypsum Co.,
J. R. Rockart. G. L. Southard.
Grand Rapids Plaster Co., Waid, D E
A. H. Apted. Woolson, I. H.
810 Standing Committees.

D. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS.
Committee D-i on Preservative Coatings for
Structural materials.
P. H. Walker, Chairman.
G. B. Heckel, Vice-Chairman.
G. W. Thompson, Secretary.

Non-Producers (44).

Aiken, W. A. Perry, R. S.
Akin, T. B. Polk, Anderson.
Bacon, C. V. Rogers, Allen.
Boughton, E. W. Smith, H. E.
Bragg, C. T. Smither, F. W.
Bureau of Construction and Repair, Southern Railway,
U. S. N.
J. C. Ramage.
Dewar, John.
Stillwell Laboratories,
Finn, A. N.
A. G. Stillwell.
Fitch, R. O.
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.,
Force, H. J.
Gibboney, J. H. A. H. Nuckolls.
Gill, A. H. Union Pacific Railroad,
Illinois Steel Co., Warehouse Dept., N. F. Harriman.
H. N. Copthorne. Van Gundy, C. P.
Job, Robert. Veitch, F. P.
Johnsen, A. M. Victor Talking Machine Co.,
Kellogg, J. W. E. F. Hicks.
Lunn, Charles A. Von Schrenk, Hermann.
Macnichol, Charles. Voorhees, S. S.
Marsh, L. S. Walker, P. H. {Chairman).
McDonnell, M. E.
Walker, W. H.
Mcllhiney, P. C.
Ware, E. E.
Millwood, J. P.
Muckenfuss, A. M. Wertz, F. A.
New York Central Railroad Co., Engi- Westinghouse Church Kerr and Co.
neering Department, C. M. Chapman.
A. W. Carpenter. Young, J. B.

Producers (51).

Acme White Lead and Color Works, Coleman, R. E.

C. S. Neal. Cooke, G. W.
American Zinc, Lead and Smelting Davis, S. D.
Co., Dixon Crucible Co., Joseph,
L. E. Hemple. Malcolm McNaughton.
•Ashby, G. E. Edgerly, D. W.
•Atlantic Refining Co., The, Evans, S. M.
F. C. Robinson. Felton, G. E.
Ball, G. L. Forrest, C. N.
Cheesman, F. P. Gardner, H. A.
These members of Committee D-l. classed as Producers, stand In the relation of
Producer to certain products, and In that of Non-Producbr to other product* within the
province of the Committee.
 — .

Standing Committees. 811

Committee D-l (Continued).

Producers (Continued).

•Gray, G. W. *Pickard, G. H.
Gregory, E. D. Rinald, C. D.
•Heckel, G. B. (Vice- Chairman). Rogers, R. E.
Horn, A. C. Sabin, A. H.
Ingalls, F. P. Sanderson, J. McE.
•Klotz, J. R. M. Schaeffer, J. A.
Kohr, D. A. Seaton, M. Y.
•Langmuir, A. C. Sherwin-Williams Co., The,
Lindsay, R. W. E. C. Holton.
Lucas and Co., Inc., John, Standard Varnish Works
G. W. Storey. E. G. Bloch.
MacGregor, J. R. Thompson, G. W. (Secretary).
•Mackenzie, K. G. Toch, Maximilian.
•Maitland, H. T. Turpentine and Rosin Producers'
Moller and Schumann Co., Association,
E. J. Cole. C. F. Speh.
Murphy Varnish Co., United States Gutta Percha Paint Co.,
W. F. Burleigh. W. W. Rice.
Nemzek, L. P. Van Gundy, M. C.
•New Jersey Zinc Co., Washburn, W. F.
F. G. Breyer. •Weiss, J. M.
Homer Hendricks. White, G. D.
G. C. Stone. Wilhelm Co., The A.,
•Paisley, J. W. W. S. Davis.
Pat ton Paint Co.,
Ben Solomon.

Sub-Committees of Committee D-l.

Sub-Committee I, Advisory Committee.

Walker, P. H. (Chairman). Heckel, G. B.
Aiken, W. A. Ingalls, F. P.
Dixon Crucible Co., Pickard, G. H.
Malcolm McNaughton. Thompson, G. W.
Gardner, H. A. Voorhees, S. S.
Gibboney, J. H.

Sub-Committee II. (Discontinued)

Sub-Committee III on Testing of Paint Vehicles.

Gardner, H. A. (Chairman). Nemzek, L. P.
Bacon, C. V. Pickard, G\ H.
Boughton, E. W. Rogers, Allen.
Bragg, C. T. Sabin, A. H.
Kohr, D. A. Schaeffer, J. A.
Lindsay, R. W. White, G. D.
Lucas and Co., Inc., John,
G. W. Storey.

•These member! of C>nrniUee D-l. classed a; Producers, stand In ths relation of

Producer to cer'ain produc's, and in that of Non-Producer to other products within the
province of the C
 ——

812 Standing Committees.

Committee D-i (Continued).

Sub-Committee IV. (Discontinued).

Sub-Committee V on Linseed Oil.

Pickard, G. H. (Chairman). Lucas and Co., Inc., John,
Bacon, C. V. G. W. Storey.
Boughton, E. W. Seaton, M. Y.
Kohr, D. A. Thompson, G. W.

Sub-Committee VI on Definitions of Terms Used in Paint

Specifications.
Thompson, G. W. (Chairman). Mcllhinev, P. C.
Gibboney, T. H. Walker, P. H.
Heckel, G. B. White, G. D.
Kohr, D. A.

Sub-Committee VII on Accelerated Tests and the

Influence of Pigments on Corrosion.
Gardner, H. A. (Chairman). Walker, W. H.
Smith, H. E.

Sub-Committee VIII on Methods of Analysis of Paint

Materials.
Smither, F. W. (Chairman). Mcllhiney, P. C.
Gibboney, J. H. Thompson, G. W.
Ingalls, F. P. Voorhees, S. S.
Lucas and Co., Inc., John,
G. W. Storey.

Sub-Committee LX on Varnish.
Rogers, Allen (Chairman). Moller and Schumann Co.,
Bragg, C. T. E. J. Cole.
Dewar, John. Murphy Varnish Co.,
Heckel, G. B. W. F. Burleigh.
Holton, E. C. Nemzek, L. P.
Ingalls, F. P. Sabin, A. H.
Lindsay, R. W. Sanderson, J. McE.
Lucas and Co., Inc., John, Seaton, M. Y.
G. W. Storey. Standard Varnish Works,
Macnichol, Charles. E. G. Bloch.
McDonnell, M. E. Wertz, F. A.
Mcllhiney, P. C. Young, J^B.

Sub-Committee X. (Discontinued).
 Standing Committees. 813

Committee D-i (Continued).

Sub-Committee XI on Paint Thinners other than

Turpentine.
Westinghouse Church Kerr and Co., Lunn, C. A.
C. M. Chapman (Chairman). Mackenzie, K. G.
Atlantic Refining Co., The, Maitland, H. T.
F. C. Robinson. Nemzek, L. P.
Bacon, C. V. Patton Paint Co.,
Bragg, C. T. Ben Solomon.
Edgerly, D. W. Underwriters' Laboratories,
Forrest, C. N. A. H. Nuckolls.
Gray, G. W. Van Gundy, M. a
Tohnsen, A. M. Veitch, F. P.
Lindsay, R. W. Voorhees, S. S.
Lucas and Co., Inc., John, Weiss, J. M.
G. W. Storey.

Sub-Committee XII on Turpentine.

Veitch, F. P. (Chairman). Voorhees S. S.
Boughton, E. W. Westinghouse Church Kerr and Co.,
Gardner, H. A. C. M. Chapman.
Gibboney, J. H.

Sub-Committee XIII on Shellac.

Langmuir, A. C. (Chairman). Stillwell Laboratories,
Ashby, G. E. A. G. Stillwell.
Bragg, C. T. Victor Talking Machine Co.,
Mcllhiney, P. C. E. F. Hicks.
Paisley, J. W.

Sub-Committee XIV on the Preparation of Iron

and Steel Surfaces for Painting.
New York Central Railroad Co., Cheesman, F. P.
Engineering Department, Job, Robert.
A. W. Carpenter (Chairman). McDonnell, M. E.
Aiken, W. A. Sabin, A. H.

Sub-Committee XV on Speculations for Pigments

Dry and in Oil when Marketed in the Form.
New Jersey Zinc Co., SchaeftVr, J. A.
G. C. Stone (Chairman). Thompson, G. W.
Gardner, H. A. White, G. D.
In«alli», P. P.
814 Standing Committees.

Committee D-i (Continued).

Sub-Committee XVI on Terms Used in Reporting the

Condition of Painted Surfaces.
Nemzek, L. P. (Chairman). Sabin, A. H.
Lucas and Co., Inc., John, Southern Railway,
G. W. Storey. J. C. Ramage.
Heckel, G. B. Van Gundy, C. P.
McDonnell, M. E.

Sub-Committee XVII on Testing of Pigments for

Fineness by the Use of Screens.
Thompson, G. W. (Chairman). Other members to be appointed.

Sub-Committee XVIII on Physical Properties of

Paint Materials.
(Chairman).
Ingalls, F. P. Seaton, M. Y.
Gardner, H. A. Thompson, G. W.

Committee D-2 on Lubricants.

-
C. P. Van Gundy, Chairman.
P. H. Conradson, Vice-Chairman.
K. G. Mackenzie, Secretary.

Non-Producers (19).

Ammon, M. A. General Electric Co.,

Bureau of Steam Engineering, U. S. N., J. A. Capp.
Naval Engineering Experiment J. M. Darke.
Station, Annapolis, Md. Jeffers, J. M.
Bacon, C. V. Jumper, C. H.
Blakeley, A. G. Lafayette College Library,
Day, D. T. E. C. Bingham.
Dow, A. W. Parish, W. F.
Dunbar, W. O. Upton, G. B.
Flowers, A. E. Van Gundy, C. P. (Chairman).
France, G. P. Waters, C. E.
French, D. K. Westinghouse Air Brake Co.,
H. C. Loudenbeck.

Producers (10).

Atlantic Refining Co., Mackenzie, K. G. (Secretary).

F. C. Robinson. Maitland, H. T.
Conradson, P. H. (Vice- Chairman). Organ, T. O.
Faragher, W. F. Stalknecht, A. C.
Gary, J. L. Vacuum Oil Co.,
Gundlach, A. C. F. R. Baxter.
 Standing Committees. 815

Committee D-3 on Methods of Sampling and Analysis

of Coal.
S. W. Parr, Chairman.
(Forming part of a joint committee on this subject with a committee of
the American Chemical Society.)
Dickinson, H. C. Parr, S. W. {Chairman).
Haas, F. R. Voorhees, S. S.

Committee D-4 on Road Materials.

Logan Waller Page, Chairman.
Prevost Hubbard, Secretary.
Non-Producers (24).
Agg, T. R. Kleeburg, Felix.
Blanchard, A. H. Mattimore, H. S.
Broadhurst, W. H. Mickey, C. E.
Clark, K. A. Myers, J. E.
Crosby, W. W. Page, Logan Waller {Chairman).
Dow, A. W. Pennsylvania State Highway Depart-
Fitch, R. O. ment,
Fletcher, A. B. J. W. Hunter.
Geological Survey of New Jersey, Roman, F. L.
R. B. Gage. Sargent, P. D.
Goldbeck, A. T. Scofield, H. H.
Greenman, R. S. Smith, F. P.
Hubbard, PreVost {Secretary). Thompson, S. E.
Jackson, F. H.
Producers (19).
Abrams, D. A. Love, H. J.
Cobb, E. B. Mclntyre, W. A.
Ferguson, L. R. Miller, J. S., Jr.
Forrest, C. N. Pollock, C. D.
Fulweiler, W. H. Pullar, H. B.
Hemstreet, G. P. Reeve, C. S.
Herbst, A. W. Sharpies, P. P.
Interocean Oil Co., Spencer, Herbert.
L. M. Law. Warner-Quinlan Asphalt Co.,
Tohnson, A. N. W. C. Monsell.
Kershaw, W. H.
Sub-Committees of Committee D-4.
Sub-Committee I on Bituminous Road and Paving
Materials.
Dow, A. W. {Chairman). Interocean Oil Co.,
Blanchard, A. H. L. M. Law.
Broadhurst, W. H. Kershaw, W. H.
Cobb, E. B. Miller, J. S., Jr.
Myers, E.
Crosby, W. W. J.
Pullar, ft. B.
Forrest, C. N.
Reeve, C. S.
Fulweiler, W. H. Sharpies, P. P.
Geological Survey of New Jersey, Smith, F. P.
R. B. Gage. Spencer, Herbert.
Iremstreet, G. P. r-Quinlan Asphalt Co.
Hubbard, Prdvost. W C. Monsell.
 816 Standing Committees.

Committee D-4 (Continued).

Sub-Committee II on Non-Bituminous Road and Paving

Materials.
Blanchard, A. H. (Chairman). Hubbard, PreVost.
Abrams, D. A. Jackson, F. H.
Agg, T. R. Johnson, A. N.
Broadhurst, W. H. Love, H. J.
Clark, K. A. Mattimore, H. S.
Crosby, W. W. Mclntyre, W. A.
Ferguson, L. R. Pollock, C. D.
Fletcher, A. B. Sargent, P. D.
Goldbeck, A. T. Scofield, H. H.
Greenman, R. S. Smith, F. P.
Herbst, A. W. Thompson, S. E.

Committee D-5 on Coal.

G. S. Pope, Chairman.

Non-Producers (19).
Brady, William. Hume, A. P.
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U. S. N. Hunnings, S. V.
Fuel Division. Moldenke, Richard.
Capp, J. A. Parr, S. W.
Carney, F. D. Pope, G. S. (Chairman).
Fernald, R. H. United Gas Improvement Co.,
Force, H. J. Walton Clark.
Forstall, A. E. Voorhees, S. S.
Gibbs, A. W. White, A. H.
Goodenough, Walter. Woodwell, J. E.
Harris, J. R.

Producers (7).

Belden, A. W. Haas, F. R.
Blakeley, A. G. McCreath and Son, Andrew S.,
Fisher,Thomas. A. S. McCreath.
Fleming, H. S. Wadleigh, F. R.

Committee D-6 on Coke.

Richard Moldenke, Chairman.
A. C. Fleldner, Secretary.

Non-Producers (10).
Anaconda Copper Mining Co., Hunnings, S. V.
Frederick Laist. Johnson, R. K.
Blakeley, A. G. Lynch, T. D.
Bole, W. A. Moldenke, Richard (Chairman).
Fieldner, A. C. (Secretary). Wood, Walter.
Haldeman, H. L.
 . .

Standing Committees. 817

Committee D-6 (Continued).

Producers (5).

Belden, A. W. Mcllvain, E. M.
Haas, F. R. Wentz, D. B.
Ireland, W. G.

Committee D-7 on Timber.

Hermann von Schrenk, Chairman.
J. A. Newlin, Secretary.

Non-Producers (21).

Bateman, Ernest. Newlin, A. (Secretary).

J.
Bebb, C. H. Paul, CE.
Betts, H. S. Robinson, A. F.
Bohland, J. A. Russell, E. J.
Bureau of Construction and Repair, Schreiber, Martin.
U. S. N. Sterling, E. A.
Davidson, G. M. Taylor, C. M.
Hatt, W. K. Vanderpoel, W. K.
Hoxie, F. J. von Schrenk, Hermann (Chairman)
Kleeburg, Felix. Westinghouse Church Kerr and Co.
Lasier, E. L. C. M. Chapman.
Lohmann, H. W.
Producers (13).

Calder, R. J. Noyes, A. H.
Church, S. R. Roper Lumber Co., John L.,
Fulwciler, W. H. C. I. Millard.
Goss, O. P. M. Shipley, G. B.
Jayne, Howard. Southern Pine Association,
Kaul. J. L. W. H. Sullivan.
Kellogg, R. S. Swan, O. T.
Kuehn, A. L.

SUB-COMMITTEES OF COMMITTEE D-7.

Sub-Committee I on Classification and Designation of

Southern Yellow Pines.
(Chairman) Newlin, J. A.
Hatt, W. K. Roper Lumber Co., John L.
Hoxie, F. J. C.Millard.
I.
Kaul, J. L. Southern Pine Association,
Lohmann, H. W. W. H. Sullivan.

Sub-Committee II on Uses of Untreated Yellow Pdnes.

Sterling, E. A. (Chairman). Roper Lumber Co., John L.,
Betts, H. S. C. Millard.
I.
Taul, <
Russell, E. J.
Schreiber, Martin.
 .

818 Standing Committees.

Committee D-7 (Continued).

Sub-Committee III on Pacific Coast Timbers.

(Chairman). Goss, O. P. M.
Bebb, C. H. Jayne, Howard.
Betts, H. S. Newlin, J. A.
Bohland, J. A. Paul, C. E.

Sub-Committee IV on Wooden Paving Blocks.

Westinghouse Church Kerr and Co., Shipley, G. B.
C. M. Chapman (Chairman) Southern Pine Association,
Bateman, Ernest. W. H. Sullivan.
Kleeburg, Felix. Sterling, E. A.
Noyes, A. H.

Sub-Committee V on Methods of Preservative Treatment

of Timber.
Robinson, A. F. (Chairman). Shipley, G. B.
Kaul, J. L. Sterling, E. A.
Kuehn, A. L. Vanderpoel, W. K.

Sub-Committee VI on Timber Preservatives.

Church, S. R. (Chairman). Kuehn, A. L.
Bateman, Ernest. Taylor, C. M.
Davidson, G. M. Westinghouse Church Kerr and Co.,
Fulweiler,W.'H. C. M. Chapman.
Hatt, W. K.

Sub-Committee VII on Inspection of Treated Timber.

Taylor,
aylor, C. M
M. (Chairman). Robinson, A. F.
~dd R.
Calder, J.

Sub-Committee VIII on Fireproofing of Timber.

Bateman, Ernest (Chairman). Hoxie, F. J.
Church, S. R. Lasier, E. L.
Fulweiler, W. H. Swan, O. T.

Committee D-8 on Waterproofing.

F. P. Smith, Chairman.
C. N. Forrest, Vice-Chairman.
L. M. Law, Secretary.

Non-Producers (13).
Aiken, W. A. Little, Inc., A. D.,
Barbour, F. A. H. S. Mork.
Ferguson, L. R. Schreiber, Martin.
Fitch, R. O. Sherrerd, M. R.
Force, H. J. Smith, F. P. (Chairman).
Gill, A. H. Walter, L. W.
Hubbard, Prevost. Wig, R. J.
 .

Standing Committees. 819

Committee D-8 (Continued).

Producers (10).

Abraham, Herbert. Interocean Oil Co.,

Barrett Co., The, L. M. Law (Secretary).
W. Babcock.
S. Kershaw, W. H.
S. R. Church. Mackenzie, K. G.
DeKnight, E. W. Reeve, C. S.
Forrest, C. N. {Vice- Chairman) Spencer, Herbert.
Toch, Maximilian.

Committee D-9 on Electrical Insulating Materials.

C. E. Skinner, Chairman.

Non-Producers (7).

Bureau of Standards, Electrical Testing Laboratories,

P. G. Agnew. F. M. Farmer.
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U. S. N. Underwriters Laboratories,
D. J. McAdam. Dana Pierce.
Commonwealth Edison Co., H. S.
Vassar..
E. O. Schweitzer. Western Electric Co.,
J. W. Harris.

Producers* (10).

American Vulcanized Fiber Co. Rossi, Louis.

William Eves, III. Schenectady Varnish Co.,
Boonton Rubber Co., J. H. Shugg.
R. W. Seabury. Sherwin-Williams Co.,
General Electric Co., A. F. Roche.
J. A. Capp, Vacuum Oil Co.,
L. E. Barringer. F. R. Baxter.
Goodrich Co., B. F., Westinghouse Electric and Manu-
A. A. Brewster. facturing Co.,
Ohio Insulator Co., The, C. E. Skinner (Chairman).
A. 0. Austin.

SUB-COMMITTEES OF COMMITTEE D-9.

Sub-Committee I on Insulating Varnishes.

Electrical Testing Laboratories, Schenectady Varnish Co.,
F. M. Farmer (Chairman). J. H. Shugg.
Bureau of Standards. Sherwin-Williams Co.,
P. G. Agnew. A. F. Roche.
General Electric Co., Underwriters Lai 'oratories,
J. A. Capp. Dana Peirce.
Vassar, H. S.

•The members Committee D-9, classed as Producers, stand in the relation of Produce
of
and in that of Non-Producer to other products within the province of
to certain products,
the Committee. With respect to each of the specific subjects assigned to the five sub-
committees of Committee D-9, tho number of Non-Producers exceeds that of the Producers.
 .

820 Standing Committees.

Committee D-9 (Continued).

Sub-Committee II on Molded Insulated Materials.

Underwriters Laboratories, Rossi, Louis.
Dana Peirce (Chairman). Western Electric Co.,
Boonton Rubber Co., J. W. Harris.
R. W. Seabury Westinghouse Electric and Manu-
General Electric Co., facturing Co.,
L. E. Barringer. C. E. Skinner.
Goodrich Co., B. F.,
A. A. Brewster.

Sub-Committee III on Sheet Insulation.

Westinghouse Electric and Manu- Commonwealth Edison Co.,
facturing Co., E. O. Schweitzer.
C. E. Skinner (Chairman). Vassar, H. S.
American Vulcanized Fiber Co., Western Electric Co.,
William Eves, III. J. W. Harris.
Bureau of Standards,
P. G. Agnew,

Sub-Committee IV on Liquid Insulation.

Bureau of Standards, Vassar, H. S.
P. G. Agnew (Chairman). Westinghouse Electric and Manu-
General Electric Co., facturing Co.,
J. A. Capp. C. E. Skinner.
Vacuum Oil Co.,
F. R. Baxter.

Sub- Committee V on Porcelain Insulation.

General Electric Co., Vassar, H. S.
L. E. Barringer (Chairman). Westinghouse Electric and Manu-
Commonwealth Edison Co., facturing Co.,
E. O. Schweitzer. C. E. Skinner.
Ohio Insulator Co.,
A. O. Austin.

COMMITTEE D-10 ON SHIPPING CONTAINERS.

J. A. Newlin, Chairman.
W. S. Topping, Secretary.

Non-Producers (19).

Bitting, A. W. MacFarland, H. B.
Dunn, B. W. Markey, I. G.
Fairburn, W. A. Manufacturing Chemists' Association
Heckel, G. B. of the United States,
Hodges, George. Henry Howard.
Lucas and Co., Inc., John, Nellis, J. C.
F. L. Campbell. Newlin, J. A. (Chairman)
 ,

Standing Committees. 821

Committee D-io (Continued).

Non-Producers (Continued).

Pease, O. D. A. Swan, O. T.
Peters, M. C Topping, W. S. (Secretary).
Powe, W. R. Uniform Classification Committee,
Stone, G. C. J. E. Williams.
Sturcke, H. E.

Producers (11).

Hinde and Dauch Paper Co. Ohio Boxboard Co.,

Institute of Makers of Explosives, T. W. Ross.
T. W. Bacchus. Pressed Steel Tank Co.,
Masters, B. F. R. H. Hackney.
National Association of Corrugated Sexton, W. D.
Fiber Box Manufacturers, Wellford, W. L.
B. C. Tomlin. Wirebounds Corporation,
National Tube Co., D. P. Murphy.
F. N. Speller. Yegge, C. F.

SUB-COMMITTEES OF COMMITTEE D-10.

Sub-Committee I on Wooden Boxes.

Newlin, J. A. (Chairman). Pease, O. D. A.
Bitting, A. W. Wirebounds Corporation,
Fairbura, W. A. D. P. Murphy.
Masters, B. F. Yegge, C. F.
Nellis, J. C.

Committee D-n on Rubber Products.

E. A. Barrdzr, Chairman.
S. C. Potts, Secretary.

Non-Producers (15).

Bureau of Construction and Repair, MacFarland, H. B.

U. S. N. Newcomb, R. E.
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U. S. N. New York Central Railroad Co.
Electrical Division. C. B. Martin.
Electrical Testing Laboratories, Potts, S. C (Secretary).
F. M. Farmer. Turner Co., J. S.,
Force, H. J. C. S. Cook.
I[arvey )can.
I Vassar, H. S.
Inspection Department, Associated Waring, F. M.
Factory Mutual Fire Insur- Wormeley, P. L.
ance Co., Young, J. B.
E. A. Barrier (Chairman).
 , — .

822 Standing Committees.

Committee D-il (Continued).

Producers (15).

Ajax Rubber Co., Gutta Percha and Rubber Manu-

H. P. Underwood. facturing Co.,
Bierer, J. M. W. E. Campbell.
Boggs, C. R. Hewitt Rubber Co.,
Davis. J. E. W. S. Kimley.
Ellinwood, G. H.
Manhattan Rubber Manufacturing
Co.,
Gage, R. M.
W. L. Sturtevant.
General Electric Co., Miller Rubber Co.,
W. S. Clark. A. E. Warner.
Goodrich Co., B. F., Republic Rubber Co.,
N. S. Noble. Seth Clark.
Goodyear Tire and Rubber Co., United States Rubber Co.,
W. P. Keith. A. A. Somerville.

SUB-COMMITTEES OF COMMITTEE D-ll.

Sub-Committee I on Air Hose.
New York Central Railroad Co., Goodrich Co., B. F.,
C. B. Martin (Chairman). N. S. Noble.
Gutta Percha and Rubber Manufac- Goodyear Tire and Rubber Co.,
turing Co., W. P. Keith.
W. E. Campbell. Miller Rubber Co.,
A. E. Warner.

Sub-Committee II on Belting.
Gutta Percha and Rubber Manu- Goodrich Co., B. F.,
facturing Co., N. S. Noble.
W. E. Campbell (Chairman). New York Central Railroad Co.,
Bierer, J. M. C. B. Martin.
Potts, S. C.

Sub-Committee III on Cold-Water Hose.

Inspection Department, Associated Bureau of Construction and Repair,
Factory Mutual Fire Insur- U. S. N.
ance Co., Gutta Percha and Rubber Manu-
E. A. Barrier (Chairman). facturing Co.,
Bierer, J. M. W. E. Campbell.

Sub-Committee IV. (Discontinued)

Sub-Committee V on Insulated Were.

Potts, C. (Chairman).
S. General Electric Co.,
Boggs, C. R. W. S. Clark.
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U. S. N. Harvey, Dean.
Electrical Division. Wormeley, P. L.
Electrical Testing Laboratories,
F. M. Farmer.
 .

Standing Committees. 823

Committee D-n (Continued).

Sub-Committee VI on Packings, Gaskets and Pump Valves.

{Temporarily Discontinued)

Sub-Committee VII on Steam Hose.

Young, J. B. (Chairman). Goodrich Co., B. P.,
N. S. Noble.

Sub-Committee VIII on Definitions and Nomenclature.

(Chairman). Turner Co., J. S.,
M.
Bierer, J. C. S. Cook.
Gage, R. M.

Sub-Committee IX on Rubber Insulating Tape.

Bierer, J. M. (Chairman). Electrical Testing Laboratories,
Boggs, C. R. F. M. Farmer.
Waring, F. M.

COMMITTEE D-12. —{Discontinued).

Committee D-13 on Textile Materials.

G. B. Haven, Chairman.
A. H. Clarke, V ice-Chairman.
A. E. Jury, Vice-Chairman.
D. E. Douty, Secretary.

Non-Producers (25).

Abrams, D. A. Douty, D. E. (Secretary).

Ajax Rubber Co., Firestone Tire and Rubber Co.,
L. T. Vance. J. W. Cooper.
Aldridge. E. V. Fisk Rubber Co.,
Barker, E. H. \ W. Sanderson.
(

Bureau of Standards, Gage, R. M.

W. D. Walen. Goodyear Tire and Rubber Co.
Dalton, G. S. J. E. H. Barnwell.
Daniels, F. W. Haven, G. B. (Chairman).
 .

824 Standing Committees.

Committee D-13 (Continued).

Non-Producers (Continued).

Hicks, T. A. Scott and Co., H. L.,

Lee Tire and Rubber Co., H. L. Scott.
E. E. Dearth. Tidewater Portland Cement Co.,
Little, Inc., A. D., W. B. Welch.
C. E. Swett. United and Globe Rubber Manu-
Marble, E. H. facturing Cos.,
Miller Rubber Co., G. W. Skirm.
A. E. Warner, United States Rubber Co.,
R. T. Griffith. A. E. Jury ( Vice-Chairman)
Republic Rubber Co., Worcester Tire Fabric Co.,
L. A. Watts. C. R. Brownell.
Robbins, C. W.

Producers (14).

Beaver Mills, Jenckes Spinning Co.,

G. E. Huggins. H. P. Babcock.
Bemis Brothers Bag Co., Lane and Co., J. H.,
A. H. Clarke (Vice- Chairman). C. B. Finckel.
Brighton Mills, Manhasset Manufacturing Co.
R. A. Ballou.
H. V. R. Scheel.
Moller, Kenneth.
Dallis, Roy.
Rutledge, J. T.
Eagles, R. P. M. Turner, Spencer.
Hartshorne, W. D. Turner Co., J. S.,
Jaquith, Horace. C. S. Cook.

SUB-COMMITTEES OF COMMITTEE D-13.

Advisory Committee.
Haven. G. B. (Chairman). Little, Inc., A. D.,
Bemis Brothers Bag Co., C. E. Swett.
A. H. Clarke. Moller, Kenneth.
Bureau of Standards, United States Rubber Co.
W. D. Walen. A. E. Jury.
Douty, D. E.
Goodyear Tire and Rubber Co.,
E. H. Barnwell.

Sub- Committee I on Humidity.

Moller,Kenneth (Chairman). Hartshorne, W. D.
Brighton Mills, Jenckes Spinning Co.,
H. V. R. Scheel. H. P. Babcock.
Bureau of Standards, United States Rubber Co.,
W. D. Walen. A. E. Jury.
Daniels, F. W.
 Standing Committees. 825

Committee d-13 (Continued).

Sub-Committee II on Specimens.
United States Rubber Co., Lee Tire and Rubber Co.,
A. E. Jury (Chairman). E. E. Dearth.
Firestone Tire and Rubber Co., Miller Rubber Co.,
J. W. Cooper. R. T. Griffith.
Gage, R. M. Rutledge, J. T.

Sub-Committee III on Testing M achines .

Bureau of Standards, Scott and Co., H. L.,

W. D. Walen (Chairman). H. L. Scott.
Ajax Rubber Co., United and Globe Rubber Manu-
L. T. Vance. facturing Cos.,
Aldridge, E. V. G. W. Skirm.
Barker, E. H.
Brighton Mills,
H. V. R. Scheel.

Sub-Committee IV on Classification and Identification

of Fibers and Fabrics.

Little, Inc., A. D., Eagles, R. P. M.

C. E. Swett (Chairman). Hicks, T. A.
Abrams, D. A. Turner, Spencer.
Beaver Mills,
G. E. Huggins.

Sub-Committee V on Nomenclature and Specifications.

Bemis Brothers Bag Co., Tidewater Portland Cement Co.,

A. H. Clarke (Chairman). W. B. Welch.
Dallis, Ray. Turner and Co., J. S.,
Jaquith, Horace. C. S. Cook.

Sub-Committee VI on Imperfections and Tolerances.

Goolycar Tire and Rubber Co., Marble, E. H.

E. H. Barnwell (Chairman). Miller Rubber Co.,
Lane and Co., J. II., A. E. Warner.
C. B. Finckel. Republic Rubber Co ,

Manhasset Manufacturing Co., L. A. Watts.

R. A. Ballou.
826 Standing Committees.

E. MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS.
Committee E-i on Methods of Testing.
Gaetano Lanza, Chairman.
H. P. Ttemann, V ice-Chairman.
S. V. Hunnings, Secretary.

Abbott, R. R. Hatt,W. K.
Baldwin Locomotive Works, Howard, J. E.
H. V. Wille. Howe, H. M.
Boylston, H. M. Hume, A. P.
Bureau of Construction and Repair, Humphrey, Richard L.
U. S. N. Hunnings, S. V. (Secretary).
Bureau of Steam Engineering, U.S. N., Job, Robert.
Naval Engineering Experi- Lanza, Gaetano (Chairman).
ment Station, Annapolis, Lothrop, M. T.
Md., Inspection Division. Lynch, T. D.
Burrows, C. W. Macgregor, J. S.
Cambria Steel Co., Merriman, Mansfield.
G. E. Thackray. Moldenke, Richard.
Campbell, William. Moore, H. F.
Carnegie Steel Co., Nelson, E. D.
H. P. Tiemann (Vice-Chairman). Robbins, C. W.
Colbv, Albert Ladd. Sconeld, H. H.
Deans, J. S. Standard Steel Works Co.,
Devries, R. R, A. A. Stevenson.
Diller, H. E. Webster, W. Reuben.
Douty, D. E. Zimmerschied, K. W.

Sub-Committees of Committee E-i.

Sub-Committee I on Hardness Tests.

Devries, R. P. (Chairman). Douty, D.E.
Abbott, R. R. Lothrop, M. T.
Boylston, H. M. Macgregor, J. S.

Sub-Committee II on Nicked Bar Impact Tests.

Devries, R. P. (Chairman). Merriman, Mansfield.
Bureau of Steam Engineering, Scofield, H. H.
Howe, H. M.

Sub-Committee III on Methods for Determining

Modulus of Elasticity, Elastic Limit,
Proportional Limit, Etc.
Burrows, C. W. (Chairman). Other members to be appointed.
 Standing Committees. 827

Committee E-i (Continued).

Sub-Committee IV on Determination of Density.

Burrows, C. W. (Chairman). Other members to be appointed.

Sub- Committee V on Effect of Form and Size of

Test Pieces on Results of Tensile Tests.
Moore, H. F. (Chairman). _
Lynch, T. D.
Bureau of Steam Engineering, Tiemann, H. P.
Cambria Steel Co., Wille, H. V.
G. E. Thackray. Zimmerschied, K. W.

Sub-Committee VI on Speed of Testing.

Lynch, T. D. (Chairman). Tiemann, H. P.
Moore, H. F. '
Webster, W. R.
Standard Steel Works Co.,
A. A. Stevenson.

Sub-Committee VII on Form.

Standard Steel Works Co., Lynch, T. D.
A. A. Stevenson (Chairman). Tiemann, H. P.
Hunnings, S. V. Wille, H. V.

Committee E-2 on Electrical Standards.

C. E. Skixner, Chairman.

Burrows, C. W. Skinner, C. E. (Chairman).

Capp, J. A.

Committee E-3. — {Discontinued).

Committee E-4 on Magnification Scales for
Micrographs.

\Y. H. Bassett, Chairman.

Non-Producers (8)

B it s, I'. If. Howe, If. M.

Bur eau of Construction and Repair, Johnson, N. C.
U. S. N. Saun.l. rs, W. M.
Burgess, G. K. Waring, P. M.
Campbfll, Wm.
828 Standing Committees.

Committee E-4 (Continued).

Producers (7)

American Brass Co., Price,W. B.

W. H. Bassett (Chairman). Roebling's Sons Co., John A.
Hall, J. H. H. C. Boynton.
National Tube Co., Thompson, G. W.
P. N. Speller. Tiemann, H. P.

Committee E-5 on Standing Committees.

This Committee consists of the Chairmen of all Standing Com-
mittes, or Representatives designated by the Respective Chairmen.
The Duties ofthis Committee are the Formulation of (a) Regulations
Governing Standing Committees; (b) Regulations Governing the Form
but not the Substance of Standards, and (c) The Classification of
Standards.

, Chairman.
C. E. Skinner, Vice-Chairman.

Representing - Representing
Committee. Committee.

A-l Guilliaem Aertsen. C-9 S.E.Thompson.

A-2 H. E. Smith. C-10 L. H. Provine.
A-3, D-6 Richard Moldenke. C-ll R.J. Wig.
A-4 J. H. Hall. D-l P. H. Walker.
A-5 S. S. Voorhees. D-2 C. P. Van Gundy.
A-6 C. W. Burrows. D-3 S. W. Parr.
A-7 H. E. Diller. D-4 L. W. Page.
B-l J. A. Capp. D-5 G. S. Pope.
B-2 William Campbell. D-7 Hermann von Schrenk.
C-l R. S. Greenman. D-8 F. P. Smith.
C-2 Richard L. Humphrey D-9, E-2 C. E. Skinner (Vice
C-3 T. R. Lawson. Chairman).
C-4 Rudolph Hering. D-10 J. A. Newlin.
C-5 I. H. Woolson. D-ll E. A. Barrier.
C-6 A. Marston. D-13G. B. Haven
C 7 E-l Gaetano Lanza.
C-8 A. V. Bleininger. E-4 W. H. Bassett.

Advisory Committee.
(Chairman). Greenman, R. S.
Guilliaem Aersten. Skinner, C. E.
Burrows, C. W. Smith, H. E.
Capp, J. A.
 Standing Committees. 829

Committee E-6 on Papers and Publications.

, Chairman.

Berry, H. C. Page, L. W.
Clamer, G. H. Stevenson, A. A.
Humphrey, Richard L. Talbot, A. N.
Moldenke, Richard. Voorhees, S. S.

Advisory Committee.
{Chairman). Humphrey, Richard L.
Berry, H. C. Stevenson, A. A.
Clamer, G. H.

COMMITTEE E-7.—{Discontinued).
 :

REGULATIONS GOVERNING STANDING

COMMITTEES.

Adopted, 1910; Latest Revision, 1918.

Note. —By action of the Executive Committee on January 6, 1912, the

responsibility for the general Regulations Governing Standing Committees is
vested in the Executive Committee and Committee E-5 on Standing Com-
mittees, with the understanding (1) that a proposed change in these Regula-
tions originating with Committee E-5 shall be subject to approval by the
Executive Committee of the Society; (2) that the Executive Committee of the
Society shall make no changes in these Regulations without first referring the
same to Committee E-5 and (3) that proposed changes in these Regulations
;

thus adopted shall be announced in the next circular to members and become
effective from the date of issue of that circular.

I. ORGANIZATION OF STANDING COMMITTEES.

1. Creation. —
The creation of a standing committee shall be
subject to the authorization of the Executive Committee, acting
either on a recommendation adopted by majority vote at an
annual meeting of the Society, or on its own initiative.
2. —
Appointments. Appointments on standing committees
shall be made by the Executive Committee subject to the
following provisions:

(a) On committees dealing with subjects having a commer-

an equal numeric balance shall be
cial bearing, either
maintained between the representatives of producing
and non-producing interests; or the latter may be
allowed to predominate by majority vote of the former.
(b) The classification of the members of a committee into
producers and non-producers shall be left to each
committee, subject to the following provisions, and with
the understanding that a member dissatisfied with this
classification has the right of appeal to the Executive
Committee
(l) A member who stands in the relation of producer
to any product within the province of the com-
mittee shall be classed as a producer, although at
the request of the officers of the committee con-
(830)
 1

Regulations Governing Standing Comaiitiees. S3

cerned, attention shall be called to the status of

such members in a footnote worded as follows:

These members of Committee classed as Pro-

,

ducers, stand in the relation cf Producers to certain

products, and in that of Non-Producers to other products
within the province of the committee.

(2) A nominally unattached expert, who is perma-

nently retained by producing interests in the field
of activities of the committee with which he is
connected, shall be classed as a producer. The
qualification "permanently retained" is to be
understood to mean that the expert receives a
regular monthly or yearly retainer from one or
more producing interests under an indefinitely
continuing arrangement.
(c) As a general policy, only one individual connected with a
given firm, company, corporation, laboratory, or other
institution shall be eligible to membership on a given
committee, although exceptions to this rule may be
permitted at the discretion of the committee concerned.
In case two or more members of a committee are con-
nected with the same firm, company, corporation,
laboratory', or other institution, they shall, when a
division is demanded, jointly command only a single
vote.

(d) Additional appointments on existing committees shall be

made only on the recommendation of, or with the
approval of, such committees.
(e) Only members of the Society shall be eligible, in general,
to appointment on committees, although exceptions
may be authorized by the Executive Committee in
favor of representatives of government branches or
other societies.

3. Preliminary Organization. —
The President of the Society
willappoint the chairman pro tern, of a new committee from the
representatives of the non-producing interests. The chairman
pro tern., after communicating with the other members of the
committee, will fix the place and time of the first meeting. He
may, at his discretion, appoint one or more members of the
committee to prepare matter in advance for consideration at
832 Regulations Governing Standing Committees.

that meeting or he may prepare such matter himself. This

procedure is recommended as calculated to economize time
at the meeting and to afford a definite basis for discussion.

4. Permanent Organization. —
At the first meeting of a com-
mittee a permanent organization shall be effected by the elec-
tion of a permanent chairman from among the representatives
of non-producing interests, and such other officers and sub-
committees as the committee may desire. The duties and
powers assigned to these officers and sub-committees, and
the details of management and administration in general, shall
be at the discretion of each committee, subject to the limitations
of these regulations.

II. DIRECTIONS FOR CONDUCT OF BUSINESS.

5. Meetings. —The meetings of standing committees and
sub- committees shall be open only to their own members and to
such visitors whose proposed invitation has been approved by
the chairman.
6. Proxies. —
A member of a standing committee shall be
authorized to delegate any desired individual as his proxy with
voting power, or without voting power, if so specified; but no
individual shall have more than one vote at a meeting of a
committee.
7. Election of Officers. —Every standing committee shall hold
an election of the annual meeting of the
officers at or before
Society occurring in the even years. The term of office of every
officer shall be two years and officers shall be eligible for
re-election.

8. Resignations. —
Proposed resignations from office or from
membership on a standing committee shall be reported directly
to the chairman or the secretary of the committee concerned, and
the result of any action taken in such matters shall be reported to
the Secretary-Treasurer of the Society.
9. Sub-Committees. —Sub-committees
shall have no stand-
ing in the Society except through their parent committees.
Sub- committees on proposed complete standard specifications for
materials shall consist of not fewer than six members, and at
least one-half of the membership shall be composed of non-
producers. Departures from this requirement for exceptional
reasons may be authorized by the Executive Committee.
 Regulations Governing Standing Committees. 833

III. REPORTS OF STANDING COMMITTEES.

10. Reports. —
The reports of standing committees shall be
presented at the annual meetings. The report of every sub-
committee shall be made to the parent committee and not to
the Society direct. If such a report is embodied wholly or in
part in the report of the parent committee to the Society, the
latter shall make definite references to such features in its
own report and recommendations, if any, based thereon.
The report of a standing committee, before its presentation
at the annual meeting, shall first have been submitted to letter
ballot of the committee and shall have received the approval of
the majority of those voting.
A statement of the following form shall appear at the close
of every committee report:

This report has been submitted to letter ballot of the committee which
consists of members, of whom have voted affirmatively,
negatively, and have refrained from voting.

Dissenting members shall have the right to present minority

reports individually or jointly.

IV. STANDARDS AND RECOMMENDED PRACTICE.

11.
—
Standards. "The term 'Standards' shall be applied
collectively to (a) standard specifications, (b) standard tests,
(c) standard methods, and (d) standard definitions." 1
(a) The term "Standard Specifications" shall be applied to
specifications designed to govern the purchase of materials.
Such specifications may or may not include reference to tests,
but they shall include limits for physical, chemical or other
properties.
(b) The term "Standard Tests" shall be applied to pre-
scribed directions for tests of specific materials, but shall not
include limits for physical, chemical or other properties.
(c) The term "Standard Methods" shall be applied to pre-
scribed methods of procedure in the conduct of physical, chemical
or other tests.
(d) The term "Standard Definitions" is self-explanatory.
Tentative Standards.—The term "Tentative Standards"
12.
shall be applied to proposed standards which are published in
the Proceedings for one or more years with a view of eliciting

'Quoted from by-laws. Article VI, Section I.

834 Regulations Governing Standing Committees.

criticism, of which the committee concerned will take due cog-

nizance before recommending final action towards their adoption
as standard.
13. Recommended —"The
term 'Recommended
Practice.
and methods not ordinarily
Practice' shall be applied to processes
subject to contract between purchaser and manufacturer." 1

14. Matters of Engineering Design. —

In the preparation
of proposed standards the consideration of matters of engineering
design or construction shall not in general be regarded as falling
within the province of the Society. If, however, it should appear
to a given committee that the consideration of such matters is,
for special reasons, indispensable in specifications designed to
cover the customary relations between the producers and con-
sumers of a given product, then reference to such matter in
proposed specifications for that product shall be permitted
within the scope necessary for the particular purpose above
stated. Proposed standards embodying features of the character
in question shall be submitted by the committee concerned to
the Executive Committee for consideration and comment not
later than the quarterly meeting immediately preceding the
annual meeting at which the proposed standards are to be
presented.
15. Preparation of Standards. —
Proposed new standards or
proposed amendments of existing standards shall originate in
the particular committee within whose province such standards
properly belong. No action affecting standards shall be taken
by any standing committee except at meetings called for that
purpose. Action at such meetings shall be subject to majority
vote of those voting, and subsequently to majority vote of those
voting on letter ballot of the entire committee. The results of
each letter ballot as to the number of affirmative votes, the
number of negative votes, and the number of members not
voting, shall be announced in the report of the committee to the
Society. Dissenting members shall have the right to present
minority reports, individually or jointly, at the annual meeting
of the Society at which the majority report is presented.
16. Advance Distribution of Standards. — The annual
reports of the standing committees shall be transmitted to the
Secretary-Treasurer of the Society as early in the calendar year
as possible and not less than eight weeks in advance of the date
of the annual meeting. Preprints of these reports shall be mailed
'Quoted from by-laws. Article VI, Section 1.
 Regulations Governing Standing Committees. 835

by the Secretary-Treasurer to every member of the Society at

the earliest possible subsequent date and not less than four
weeks before the annual meeting, so that members may come to
the meeting prepared to discuss such reports and that members
not intending to be present at the meeting may contribute dis-
cussions by letter.

17. Procedure Governing the Adoption of Standards.—Any

recommendations affecting standards presented by the appro-
priate committees at the annual meeting of the Society shall
be subject to the following provisions in Article VI, Section 1,
of the by-laws:
"Proposed new standards shall be presented at an annual
meeting, at which they may be amended by a two-third votes of
those voting. On two-thirds vote of those voting, they shall
be printed, as presented or as amended, in the Proceedings and
separately under the title "Tentative Standards," on which
written discussions addressed to the appropriate committee shall
be invited. At the next annual meeting tentative standards shall
be subject to amendment by a two-thirds vote of those voting.
They may then be referred, by a like vote, to letter ballot of the
Society, in which case a two-thirds vote of those voting shall be
required for adoption; or, on the recommendation of the com-
mittee concerned, they may be continued as tentative, as printed
or as amended, in which case the above prescribed procedures
shall apply at any succeeding annual meeting.
'Proposed amendments of existing standards shall be pre-
sented at an annual meeting, at which they may be amended
by a two-thirds vote of those voting. On two-thirds vote of
those voting they shall be printed, as presented or as amended,
in the Proceedings as part of the report of the appropriate com-
mittee; and collectively under the same cover with the Tentative
Standards for that year. At any succeeding annual meeting
they shall be subject to amendment by a two-thirds vote of
those voting; and at the annual meeting in the year in which the
book of A.S.T.M. Standards will next be published, they shall
be subject to reference by a like vote to letter ballot of the
Society, in which case a two-thirds vote of those voting shall
be required for adoption.
"The above requirement by which final action on proposed
new standards or proposed amendments of existing standards
-hall be deferred for one or more years may, f< iiorial

a nine- tenths vote of those voting at

annual meeting at which they are first presented. In
 836 Regulations Governing Standing Committees.

that case the above prescribed vote as to amendments, as

to reference to letter ballot, and as to adoption shall remain
unaffected."
"The above requirements governing action on proposed
new standards or proposed amendments of existing standards
shall be applicable also to proposed Recommended Practice."
18. Standards Involving Patents. —"Reports
resolutions and ;

recommendations pertaining to or involving the use, or pro-

posed use, in a standard or tentative standard, of any device
or process which forms the subject matter of any existing patent,
shall first be submitted to the Executive Committee, and shall
be submitted to the Society only with the approval of the
Executive Committee." 1

V. COOPERATION WITH COMMITTEES OF OTHER BODIES.

Methods of Initiating Cooperation. A standing com-
19. —
mittee desiring to cooperate with committees of other bodies on
like or cognate subjects, or to bring about the appointment of
similar committees by other bodies for purposes of cooperation,,
shall address a recommendation to that effect to the Executive
Committee and, on the approval of the latter, negotiations to
the desired end shall be conducted by the Secretary-Treasurer
of the Society. Such cooperative relations shall entail no condi-
tions at variance with these regulations, and shall impose no
restrictions upon the free and independent action of the standing
committee.
20. Regulations Governing Cooperative Relations.
At the 1917 annual meeting of the Society, a resolution was
adopted:
"That the Executive Committee be requested to give
consideration to the general subject of the formation of and
methods of procedure to be followed by joint committees and
the publication of joint reports; whether these joint committees
be made up from various committees of this Society or of
representatives of this Society and other societies and organ-
izations."

In pursuance of this resolution a sub-committee of the Execu-

tive Committee was appointed to report on this subject to the
Executive Committee. This report was then referred to Committee
E-5 on Standing Committees for consideration and advice. Com-
1
Quoted from by-laws, Article VI, Section 2.
 Regulations Governing Standing Committees. 837

mittee E-5 approved Committee

the previous report to the Executive
on this subject, but recommended certain minor changes. Upon
reconsideration, the Executive Committee concluded that it would
be unwise to confirm their previous action by the adoption of the
report of the original sub-committee with the proposed slight amend-
ments recommended by Committee E-5.
The Executive Committee further concluded that action on
u
Section 20 of the proposed revised Regulations Governing Stand-
ing Committees" on Regulations Governing Cooperative Relations
had better be deferred pending further developments in certain
closely related matters, notably the completion of the proposed final
report of the American Engineering Standards Organization
Committee to the proposed five founder societies, including the
American Society of Civil Engineers, American Society of Mechan-
ical Engineers, American Institute of Alining Engineers, American
Institute of Electrical Engineers, and the American Society for
Testing Materials, which is expected to become available prior to
the annual meeting of this Society in June, 1918. 1
For the reasons stated, this section is temporarily left blank in
anticipation of supplying its contents later.

VI. PUBLICATIONS.
21. Publications. —
Committees shall have no right to issue
matter for publication through other than the regular Society
channels, unless so authorized, for exceptional reasons, by the
Executive Committee.

VII. EXPENSES OF STANDING COMMITTEES.

22. Current Expenses. —
Expenses for postage incurred in con-
nection with the business of committees will be refunded by
the Secretary-Treasurer of the Society on vouchers approved by
the chairman of these committees.
23. Stationery. —
Correspondence relating to the business of
committees or sub-committees shall be conducted on official
stationery which will be furnished by the Secretary-Treasurer
of the Society.
24. Extraordinary Expenses. —
Expenses for items other than
postage will not be assumed by the Society, unless such expendi-
tures were incurred in pursuance of previous authorization of the
Executive Committee, on recommendation of the chairman of
1
The report her' r eferred I annual meetiig i.i June, 1918. and
adopted by letter ballot of the Society on August ?f>. 1918.— Ed.
838 Regulations Governing Standing Committees.

the committee concerned, and within amounts specifically fixed

by the Executive Committee.
25. Special Funds. —
Committees engaged on subjects having
a commercial bearing shall be authorized to solicit contributions
from manufacturers towards research funds. Contributions
from consumers to funds for this and other purposes shall be
solicited only by the Executive Committee. All funds thus col-
lected shall be transmitted to the Secretary-Treasurer of the Society
and deposited by him in bank and placed to the credit of the com-
mittees on the books of the Society, subject to disbursement only
on vouchers signed by the chairman of the committee concerned.
26. Salaries and Fees. — Committees shall not be authorized to
pay salaries or professional fees in any form to any of their officers
or members. Assistants in connection with research work may
be engaged at salaries or special compensation fixed by the
committees concerned, provided that funds for such salaries or
compensations shall previously have been deposited with the
Secretary-Treasurer of the Society. Payments for such purposes
shall be made by the Secretary-Treasurer of the Society only on
vouchers approved by the chairman of the committee concerned.

VIII. DISCHARGE OF STANDING COMMITTEES.

27. —
Discharge of Standing Committees.- Standing com-
mittees may be discharged by the Executive Committee, either
at their own request or with their consent, on the completion of
the work for which they were appointed, or in consequence of
protracted inactivity. A standing committee which fails to
present a report at three successive annual meetings of the
Society will be required to show cause, in a written communi-
cation to the Executive Committee, why it should not be
discharged.
Standing committees may be discharged for cause by the
Executive Committee at its own initiative.

American Representation on Committees of the Inter-

national Association for Testing Materials.
—
Nominations. In making nominations for appointment of
American members on International committees on a subject,
falling within the province of an American standing com-
 —

REGULATION'S GOVERNING STANDING COMMITTEES. 839

mittee, the sense of the latter committee as to the selection of

the nominee shall be obtained before final action on the part
of the Executive Committee.
Relation between American Representatives on International
Committees and American Committees on the same Subjects.
The American representative or representatives on an Interna-
tional committee dealing with subjects falling within the province
of an American standing committee shall keep that committee
fully advised as to the important developments in the work
of the International committee. Formal recommendations to
the International committee on the part of such representative
or representatives, and their vote on letter ballot of that com-
mittee, shall be subject to advance approval on the part of the
American committee.

Recommendations to Standing Committees.

The following recommendations to standing committees
have been approved by the Executive Committee and Committee
E-5:
It is recommended that the various standing committees
should formulate proposed standard definitions of terms in
matters falling in their respective fields, and that in the case of
terms which come within the province of two or more com-
mittees, such definitions be formulated by joint action, through
sub-committees, on the part of the committees concerned.
Such proposed standard definitions of terms will be subject to
adoption by the Society under the provisions of the by-laws and
the Regulations Governing Standing Committees.
An alphabetic glossary of standard definitions of terms
will be published in the Book of A.S.T.M. Standards as soon
as their number appears to warrant such action.

Cooperative Possibilities between U. S. Government

Laboratord-:s and A.S.T.M. S i ttf.fs.

The basis on which various government branches may

cooperate with the committees of this Society is indicated on
841-843. Any committee desiring to establish such
cooperative relations shall address a recommendation to that
effect to the Executive Committee, and on approval of the
latter, negotiations to the 1 end shall be conducted by
the Secretary-Treasurer of the Society.
 3

840 Regulations Governing Standing Committees.

Supplementary Regulations Governing Standing

Committees.
The standing committees of the Society may adopt supple-
mentary regulations governing their various activities. Such
regulations have been adopted by the following committees of
the Society: Committee A-l on Steel, Committee C-l on
Cement, Committee C-7 on Lime, Committee C-ll on Gypsum,
Committee D-l on Preservative Coatings for Structural Mate-
rials, Committee D-l 1 on Rubber Products, and Committee D-l

on Textile Materials.
 BASIS OF COOPERATION BETWEEN VARIOUS
GOVERNMENT BRANCHES AND THE
STANDING COMMITTEES OF THE
SOCIETY.

For the information of the membership at large, and espe-

cially the standing committees, the Executive Committee has
authorized the following announcements, in alphabetical order,
of the conditionsunder which certain government branches are
prepared to cooperate with the work of the standing com-
mittees, these announcements having been prepared by, or
with the approval of, the directing heads of the government
branches concerned. Any committee desiring to establish such
cooperative relations shall address a recommendation to that
effect to the Executive Committee, and on approval of the
latter, negotiations to the desired end shall be conducted by
the Secretary-Treasurer of the Society.
Bureau of Chemistry. — This Bureau is equipped to do all

kinds of chemical work and to participate in cooperative work

whenever it can be done within the scope of the functions of
the Bureau and under the law, inasmuch as the activities of
the Bureau are specifically prescribed by acts of Congress.
This cooperative feature would include the investigations under
way and such as might be undertaken in connection with the
work of the Bureau along the lines of its natural growth and
development.
In so far as the Bureau has equipment suitable to carry
on investigations and cooperative work on such subjects as
are related to chemistry, and with which the American Society
for Testing Materials is directly concerned, and where the proper
authorization exists and funds are available or the purpose, it
would be glad to be of assistance to the committees of the
Society.
Bureau of of Mines may make tests
Mines.— The Bureau
of fuels, and certain mining appliances, such as
explosives
lamps, timbering, etc. When such work is performed other
than for the Government of the United States or state govern-
(841)
842 Cooperation with Government Branches.

ments, a reasonable fee to cover the necessary expenses is

charged.
The Bureau is prepared to cooperate, and will welcome
opportunities for cooperation, with committees of the American
Society for Testing Materials to the extent of being represented
on such committees as are concerned in tests or investigations
of fuels, explosives or miners' lamps, and
conduct investi-
will
gations or tests concerning any phase of these which may be
brought to its attention by your committees as needing solution,
providing it concerns subjects in which the Bureau is interested
on behalf of increasing safety in mining or use of fuels purchased
for or belonging to the United States.
—
Bureau of Standards. The. Bureau of Standards is equipped
to conduct investigations covering the standardization of weights
and measures, electrical measurements, the determinations of
heat constants and temperature measurements, optical proper-
ties of materials, chemical problems, investigations of struc-
tural and engineering materials, and metallurgical investigations.
In addition to general research investigations, it studies problems
which arise in the preparation of specifications or the develop-
ment of methods of testing required in the determination of the
qualities of materials. Much of the work is closely allied to
the work of the standing committees of the American Society
for Testing Materials, and it is the desire of the Bureau to
coope ate in those investigations where the Bureau is equipped
for them. Investigations may be referred to the Bureau which
fall within the authorized scope of its functions, and will be

taken up as far as equipment and funds will permit.

Forest Products Laboratory. —
It is the aim of the Forest
Products Laboratory to promote economy and efficiency in the
utilization of wood and in the processes by which forest mate-
rials are converted into commercial products. Investigations
at the laboratory are being made along the following lines:

Mechanical and physical properties of woods and derived

products.
Principles of seasoning and kiln drying.
Decay, preservative treatment, and fireproofing of wood.
Manufacture of pulp and paper.
 Cooperation with Government Branches. 843

Distillation and chemical constituents of forest products.

Specifications and grading rules for forest products.
Efficient design or composition of articles obtained or
manufactured from forest products.
Design of apparatus, specifications for material, and im-
proving of processes to promote a more efficient and
closer utilization of forest products.

In order to further the application of the work of the lab-

oratory it is necessary to correlate the results of all technical
investigations with the uses of the products and to make all

information available to the public.

The laboratory, in all matters within its scope, will be glad
American Society for Testing Materials
to cooperate with the
so far as funds and equipment are available.
Office of Public Roads and Rural Engineering. The Office —
of Public Roads and Rural Engineering will cooperate with the
American Society for Testing Materials along all lines of labora-
tory or field work relating to road materials. The Office has
all the necessary equipment for making such tests. The
Office can also cooperate along an)- reasonable lines of field

investigations.
Watertown Arsenal.- -The laboratory of the Watertown
Arsenal is conducting physical tests of metals
equipped for
and materials, including impact and repeated stress tests;
metallographic ex ins of metals, chemical analysis, pyro-

metric work and inv ins on the manufacture and heat

treatment of steels. 1 sting laboratory is limited by law

to investigate tests and tests of material in connection with
the manufacturing work of the Ordnance Department, except
as modified by authority to make tesl :s for private
parties paying the cost of the test. Within these limits the
Watertown Arsenal will be glad to i ite with the standing
<ommittees of the American Society for Testing Materials.
REGULATIONS GOVERNING THE FORM BUT NOT
THE SUBSTANCE OF STANDARDS.

Adopted, 1912; Revised, 1913.

1. These Regulations not be retroactive with respect

shall
to existing standards, although they may be applied to such
standards on the recommendation of, or with the consent of,
the standing committee concerned.
2. These Regulations have been adopted with the under-

standing (l) that the standing committees shall make an earnest

effort to comply with these Regulations; (2) that departures
from these Regulations shall not be made by the standing
committees except on what they believe to be strong grounds;
(3) that the judgment of the standing committees concerning
such departures shall, in general, be regarded as conclusive;
but that in case of disagreement on matters which the Advi-
sory Committee of Committee E-5 may regard as of sufficient
importance, it shall have the right to appeal to the Executive
Committee of the Society, whose decisions in all such matters
shall be final.
3. These Regulations shall be subject to annual review and
revision by Committee E-5.

(A) Arrangement, Lettering and Numbering.

4. The material in each standard shall be grouped under
sub-titles, numbered consecutively by Roman numerals. The
principal divisions under a sub-title shall be designated by
upper-case italic letters, in parentheses: (A), (B), (C), etc.
The sections in each standard shall be numbered con-
5.

tinuously by Arabic numerals. Sub-divisions under a single

section shall be distinguished by lower-case italics, in parentheses:
( a )y (b), (c), etc. This side-lettering shall not run continuously
throughout a given standard, but shall begin with (a) in each
section.
(844)
 Regulations Governing Form of Standards. 845

6. The general arrangement of standards shall be as follows:

TITLE.
Matter of an introductory or general nature (see Section 7, below).

I. Sub-Title.

{A) Principal divisions under a sub-title.

1. Sections (numbers to run consecutively throughout the standard).
(a) Sub-divisions of a section (letters to run consecutively throughout
a section only).

(B) FORM AND SEQUENCE OF SUB-TITLES.

7. Directly after the title of the standard insert sections

of an introductory, descriptive or general character; for example,
matter descriptive of the products the standards are designed
to cover. No sub-title shall be used for such matter. Such
terms as "introductory," "general," etc., are lacking in definite
meaning, and may in some cases be wholly inappropriate.
8. The matter following these opening sections (if any)

shall be grouped in general under the following sub-titles in

the sequence indicated:

I. Manufacture.
II. Chemical Properties and Tests.
III. Physical Properties and Tests.

(A) Mechanical.
(B) Electrical.
(C) Magnetic.
(D) Thermal.
(E) Other properties and tests under appropri-
ately descriptive headings.

Under II and III the method of sampling and the standard

test specimens shall be defined.

IV. Standard Sizes, Dimensions, Weights, Gages, etc.

9. This sub-title is to be used in a form appropriate to the

matter to which it refers and shall be followed immediately by
846 Regulations Governing Form of Standards.

appropriate sections covering "permissible variations." If the

matter under "permissible variations" is lengthy and contains
numerous sections, an appropriate special sub-title shall be
used. Such a sub-title shall also be used in case the standard
contains no matter under Sub-Title IV.

V. Workmanship and Finish.

VI. Packing, Marking and Shipping.

10. If the sections under Sub-Title VI are limited in a given

standard to only one or two of the above three items, the sub-
title shall be abridged accordingly.

VII. Inspection and Rejection.

11. The term "inspection" shall be interpreted here in

the restricted sense of surface or outward inspection of the
finished product.

VIII. Definition of Terms.

12. If a standard contains numerous terms that admit

of ambiguity, they shall be denned under this sub-title. If,

on the other hand, a standard contains only a few such terms,

they shall preferably be denned where they are first used. The
definition of the same term in different standards shall, if
possible, be identical.

IX. Special Sub-Titles.

13. Sections that cannot appropriately be placed under any

of the above sub-titles shall be grouped under special sub-titles,
inserted in their most logical position. Such special sub-titles
shall be indicative of the contents of the sections to which they
pertain. The use of such sub-titles as "General," "Miscella-
neous," be avoided.
etc., shall
In so far as the above standard sub- titles are used, the
14.
sequence in which they are given above shall, if possible, be
adhered to.
 Regulations Governing Form or Standards. 847

(C) Marginal Headings.

15. Every numbered section shall have a marginal heading
in bold-face type, briefly indicative of its content.
16. The sequence of matter under a given sub-title
shall be
left to the judgment of the committee concerned.
In so far
as possible, the same sequence of marginal headings shall be
observed in different specifications prepared by a given commit-
tee. The requirements for standards prepared by different
committees vary so widely, that it is not considered practicable
to extend this provision to the work of different committees.
The Secretary of the Society shall endeavor, however, to
secure such uniformity between standards prepared by different
committees.

(D) Specified Values.

"Desired values" rather than "permissible limits"

17.
shall be given, followed by a statement with respect to "per-
missible variations." The term "permissible variations" shall
be used in general, rather than the term "tolerance," except in
connection with subjects in which the latter term is in better
accord with recognized trade usage.
18. In so far as practicable, specified values shall be expressed
in tabular form.

(E) Units of Measurement.

19. Units of measurement shall be expressed in both the
English and Metric systems, if, in the judgment of the committee
concerned, it is desirable to do so. Temperatures shall be ex-
pressed in Centigrade values, and also in Fahrenheit values,
if, in the judgment of the committee concerned, it is desirable
to do so.

(F) Standard Typography, Terms, Abbreviations,

Spelling, Etc. 1

20. Committee E-5 has final authority in all matters per-

taining to standard typography, terms and forms of expression,
abbreviations, spelling etc.

1
This matter has been adapted in large part fro-n the Style Sheet of the American Society
of Mechanical Enaineer*.
848 Regulations Governing Form of Standards.

The following standards have been adopted not with the

view of anticipating all possible questions that may arise as to
typography, abbreviation, spelling, etc but of providing for ,

consistency of practice in matters of common occurrence.

21. Abbreviations.
When abbreviations are used, they shall conform to the
following requirements. The policy will be to abbreviate too
little rather than too much. Terms which seldom occur will,
in general, not be abbreviated.For further rules regarding
abbreviations, see "Numerals" and "Footnotes."

(a) Units of Length. (b) Units of Area.

Centimeter cm. Circular mil cir. mil.

Decimeter dm. Square sq.

Foot ft. Square foot sq. ft.

Inch in. Square inch sq. in

Kilometer km.
Linear lin.

Meter spell out

Mile spell out
Millimeter mm.
Yard -. yd.

(c) Units of Volume. (d) Units of Weight.

Barrel bbl. Centigram eg.
Bushel bu. Decigram dg.
Centiliter cl. Grain gr.

Cubic cu. Gram g.

Cubic centimeter cc. Kilogram kg.
Decaliter dal. Milligram mg.
Deciliter dl. Ounce oz.
Gallon gal. Pound lb.

Hectoliter hi. Ton spell out

Liter spell out
Milliter ml.

(e) Units of Time. (/) Electrical and Magnetic Terms.

Afternoon p. m. Ampere spell out
Day spell out Electric horse power e. h. p.
Forenoon a.m. Electromotive force e.m. f.
Hour hr. Magnetomotive force m. m. f.
Minute min. Ohm spell out
Month spell out Volt spell out
Second sec.
Week spell out
Year spell out
 Regulations Governing Form of Standards. 849

Abbreviations (Continued).

(g) Units of Power. (h) Units of Heat.

Brake horse power b. h. p. British thermal unit B. t. u.

Horse power h. p. Calorie cal.

Indicated horse power. . . . i. h. p. Centigrade1 C.

c
Kilowatt kw. Degree 1
Watt spell out Fahrenheit1 F

(*) Miscellaneous Technical Terms. (j) Miscellaneous General Terms.

Birmingham wire gage B. w. g. Figure Fig.

Browne & Sharpe (gage) . . B. & S. Number No.
Chemically pure c. p. Per spell out
Degree (angular measure) . deg. Per centum per cent
Diameter spell out Proceedings Proc.
Revolutions per minute. . . r. p. m. Plate spell out

Specific gravity sp.gr. Table spell out

Tensile strength tens. str. Transactions Trans.
United States (gage) U. S. Volume Vol.

(k) Use abbreviations only afternouns denoting a definite

quantity, except in tabular work. For example: "The tensile
strength is 45,000 lb. per sq. in"; but "The tensile strength in
pounds per square inch is "
(I) When terms are used in an abstract or descriptive
sense, they shall not be abbreviated. For example, use "the
magnetomotive force is applied"; not, "the m.m.f. is applied."
(m) Use a period after each abbreviation, except after per
cent, and as noted in Paragraph (0).

(n) All abbreviations shall be used in the singular. Thus,

"two inches" shall be abbreviated "2 in."; not "2 ins."
(o) Compound Words. The abbreviations for compound —
words, when used, shall be formed by connecting the abbrevia-
tions of the separate words by a hyphen, and omitting the
period preceding the hyphen. Thus, "ft-lb., watt-hr., kw-hr.,
m-kg.," etc.

(p) Symbols. —Avoid the use of symbols. Do not use (')

or (") in either text or tables; their use is permissible in illus-

trations. The symbol (%) shall not be used in the text, but
may be used in tables when lack of space requires it. See
Paragraph (r).
1
So« paragraph (r).
850 Regulations Governing Form op Standards.

(q) The word "percentage"

shall be used when not follow-
ing a number. Thus, "the percentage of carbon shall be"; not,
"the per cent of carbon shall be." But, "0.35 per cent of
carbon."
(r) After numerals, use the following abbreviations: "62° F.,
36° C." In expressions like the following, omit the degree mark
after the first figure: "75 to 80°C." In a table heading, use
"Temperature, deg. Fahr." or "deg. Cent."
(s) In expressing dimensions, use the following form: "2
by 4 in. in section;" not "2x4 in. in section," nor "2 in. by 4 in.
in section."
(t) Spell out the names of the months: as, "January 25."
Do not use the form "January 25th."
(«) In text, do not abbreviate "namely" and "that is."
(v) Spell out names of companies, railroads, etc., using the

ampersand (&) only between proper names. Abbreviate "Com-

pany" in firm names. For example: "Brown & Sharpe Manu-
facturing Co.," "Philadelphia & Reading Railway Co."; but,
"American Steel and Wire Co."
(w) In giving a title, use Dr., Prof., Genl., etc., where
initials or full name is given; spell out where surname only
is given.

22. Numerals!
(a) Romannumerals will be used in designating tables
and plates: thus,"Table VI"; not "Table 6." Arabic numerals
will be used in designating figures: thus, "Fig. 3"; not "Fig.
III."
(b) Spell out all numbers from one to twelve, with the fol-
lowing exceptions:

1. Use numerals when the quantity is partly or wholly

fractional: as, 1.15, l£, ^.
2. Use numerals when followed by an expression having
a standard abbreviation: as, 1 in., 6 lb., etc.; except where
the statement is vague in nature, in which case neither
numerals nor abbreviations shall be used: as, "about six
Pounds," etc.
3. If for any reason the standard abbreviation of the
expression following the number is not used, or if the
 Regulations Governing Form of Standards. 851

expression does not admit of abbreviation (as ohm, Ion,

etc.) the use of numerals shall be optional, unless covered
in the following paragraphs.
4. In contrasted statements, if some numbers must be
numerals, use numerals for all: as, "2 miles and 16
miles."
5. In a series of connected numerical statements im-
plying precision, as, "2 years, 5 months,
use numerals:
3 days." The use of numerals (especially the "1") is
not recommended for numbers occurring in precise state-
ments similar to the following: "By connecting the two
test coils;" "shall consist of two equal and uniformly wound
solenoids," etc.
6. Use numerals after abbreviations: as, Vol. 6, Fig. 2,

etc.

(c) Use numerals for all numbers exceeding twelve, with

the following exceptions:

1. Do not begin a sentence with a numeral.

2. Round numbers used in an indefinite sense shall be
spelled out: as, "A
hundred feet or so," etc".
3. Numbers shall be spelled out when used in the fol-
lowing manner: fifteen 2-in. rods," etc.

(d) In expressing percentages, precise figures, etc., use

decimals: as, "4.5 per cent"; not "4§ per cent."
(e) In decimal numbers having no units, a cipher shall
be placed before the decimal point: as, "0.65 in."; not
".65 in."
(/) Omit unnecessary ciphers in sums of money: as, "$3";
not "$3.00."
(g) In pointing off numbers of more than four figures, use
commas in the text (1,234,567) and spaces in tabular matter
(1 234 567). Numbers of four figures shall not be pointed off
in either text or tabular matter (1234), except when they
occur in a table containing any number of more than four
figures.
(//) Always use numerals for the day of the month
the month is given (January 25, 1913) and for the time of day
(2.30 p. m.).
852 Regulations Governing Form of Standards.

23. Spelling and Punctuation.

(a) Simple Words. —The following spelling shall be used:
aging fulfil oxide
briquette gage paraffin
center gasoline program
crystallin glycerin reinforced
disfe iodine skiliful

embed insure sul/ur

fiber mold turpentine
formulae

(b) Compound Words. —The following spelling shall be used:

Spell with hyphen.
cold-roll re-anneal
cross-section re-treat
one-half rough-forge
open-hearth stop-cock

Spell without hyphen when used as noun.

cast iron . plaster of Paris
crank shaft testing machine
drop test water bath
engine bolt wrought iron
piston rod
Spell as one word.

cooperate reheat
eyebar reroll
firebox retest
fireproof reweigh
footnote sinkhead
limewater staybolt
quicklime

(c) Compound adjectives shall be hyphenated; as "2-in.

gage," "cast-iron cylinder," "500-horse-power (or 500-h.-p.)
motor," "0.20-per-cent-carbon steel," etc. Such expressions as
the following shall be written without the hyphen after the first
numeral: "2 and 6-in. specimens."
(d) Do not hyphenate such expressions as "newly puddled
iron," where the adverb is a regular modifier of the adjective.

24. Capitals.

(a) Use capitals sparingly.

(b) Capitalize the principal words in headings, titles of
books, papers, etc. (nouns, verbs, adjectives and adverbs).
 Regulations Governing Form of Standards. 853

(c) Use capital initial "C" for "committee" when used

as a title: thus, "Committee A-l," "Committee on Papers."

In all other cases use lower-case "c"; thus, "The committee
recommends "
(d) Use capital initial "B" for Bessemer; "P" for Port-
land.
(e) Use initial capitals in reference to volumes, figures,
plates, etc.: as, Vol. 6, Fig. 2, Plate VI, Table III.
(/) Use the form "test No. 1," "specimen A," etc.

25. Standard Terms and Forms of Expression.

(a) The numbered sections of a standard shall be re-

ferred to as "Section 6"; the lettered sub-divisions of a section

shallbe referred to either as "Paragraph (a)," or "Section 6(a)."
The former shall be used only when the reference occurs in the
section containing the paragraph referred to; in all other cases
the latter form shall be used.
(b) Use "shall" wherever the standards are to be made

binding on parties of the first or second part.

(c) Use "will" wherever the standards are intended to
express a declaration of purpose not mandatory upon the parties
of the first or second part.
(d) Use "may" wherever the standards provide definitely
for alternative courses.

Use "full-size tests"; not "full-sized tests," etc.

(e)

(/) Use "gage length"; not "gaged length."

(g) Use "test specimen") not "test piece" In case the
term "test specimen" is repeated several times in the same
section, the word "specimen", may be used after the first use

of "test specimen."
(h) Use "f in. or over in thickness"; not "f in. and over."

(i) In referring to dimensions, use simply "2 in."; not

"two inches (2 in.)," or "two (2) inches."

(J) Use the form "without cracking" in

referring to bend
tests of metals; not "without sign oj cracking."
(k) Use "melt" to mean "melt of steel," "blow of steel,"
and "heat of steel" as distinguished from " treating-plant
heat," etc.
854 Regulations Governing Form of Standards.

(/) Use "reduction of area"; not "reduction in area" or

''contraction in area."
(m) Use "acid number" "iodine number" etc.; not "acid
value" "iodine value" etc.

26. Footnotes.
(a) Use superior figures instead of asterisks, etc., except
in connection with numerals, for which use letters.

(b) The names of journals, proceedings, bulletins, etc.,

shall be printed in without quotation marks; the titles

italics,

of papers and reports shall be printed in Roman and enclosed in

quotation marks.
(c) Abbreviate the names of societies.

(d) When reference is made to a paper or report by title,

only the initial page shall appear in the footnote. Thus:
(Name of Author) « (Titie <rf Paper) » Proceedings,
f

Am. Soc. Test. Mats., Vol. XIII, p. 450 (1913).

When such titles are not given, or when reference is made

to certain parts of papers, reports, etc., page numbers shall be
indicated, as follows:

Railway Age Gazette, Feb. 16, 1912, pp. 280-282.

(e) When volume numbers are given, the year of publica-

tion shall appear in parentheses at the end of the footnote.
Otherwise, the date of publication shall appear immediately
after the name of publication. (See above examples.)
(/) Footnotes shall always appear at the bottom of the
page on which the reference is made.
(g) References, by the use of such terms as ibid., etc., to
previous footnotes, shall not be used unless the footnote referred
to is given on the same page; otherwise the footnote in ques-
tion shall be repeated.
REGULATIONS GOVERNING PAPERS, COMMITTEE
REPORTS AND DISCUSSIONS.
Adopted, 1913; Revised, 1914, 1916.

1. Authority of Committee. — Committee E-6 on Papers and

Publications has been given authority by the Executive
full

Committee in all matters affecting the acceptance, rejection,

editing and publication of papers, committee reports and
discussions.

I. PREPRINTS.
2. Preprinting of Papers and Committee Reports. —The Com-
mittee on Papers and Publications will use its best endeavors
to put the papers and committee reports to be presented
at annual meetings in type for advance circulation. To
render this practicable, the manuscripts should be sent to
the Secretary-Treasurer at least two months in advance of
the meeting at which they are to be presented. The com-
mittee will then endeavor to issue preprints to the member-
ship at large one month in advance of the meeting. It is
manifest, however, that if all papers forming part of a com-
prehensive program should be received only two months in
advance of the meeting, it would not be practicable to have
them all put in type in a single month. Authors and chair-
men of committees are accordin ted to furnish their manu-
scripts as far in advance of the meeting as possible.
In general, the sequence in which the papers are received
will determine the sequence in which they will be printed.
Manuscripts received too late for printing and advance circula-
tion will be put in type, in so far as practicable, with a view of
having them available in printed form at the meeting.
The committee reserves the right to reject papers received
too late for printing and advi althouj
tions may be authorized at the <li nmittee.
!'
provisionally accepted by title onrj
rs f which
the manuscripts have not been received before the final program
(855)
856 Regulations Governing Papers.

goes to press, shall not be announced by title on this program.

Their authors shall be however,
notified, that such of these
papers as may subsequently be accepted will be introduced at
the end of the appropriate sessions and read by title or other-

wise, as time may admit.

3. Standards. —
The Regulations Governing Standing Com-
mittees contain the follwoing provisions relating to the advance
1

distribution of standards: "The annual reports of the standing

committees shall be transmitted to the Secretary-Treasurer of
the Society as early in the calendar year as possible and not
less than eight weeks in advance of the date of the annual meet-
ing. Preprints of these reports shall be mailed by the Secretary-
Treasurer to every member of the Society at the earliest possi-
ble subsequent date and not less than four weeks before the
annual meeting, so that members may come to the meeting
prepared to discuss such reports and that members not intend-
ing to be present at the meeting may contribute discussions by
letter."

II. EDITING AND REJECTION OF PAPERS.

4. Editing of Papers and Discussions. —
The Committee on
Papers and Publications will edit and revise papers for publica-
tion. If such editing and revision is not acceptable to the
author, the committee will endeavor to meet the wishes of the
author as far as possible, but if a revision acceptable to both
the committee and the author cannot be reached, the papers
shall not be presented or published.
The above provisions are applicable also to written or
verbal discussion.
In the editing of matter for the publications of the Society,
the requirements as to "typography, standard terms, abbrevia-
tions, spelling, etc.," contained in the Regulations Governing
the Form but not the Substance of Standards, 2 will be adhered
to. It is recommended that authors assist the committee by
following these requirements in the preparation of their
manuscripts.
5. Rejection of Papers. —The rejection of papers will be
determined chiefly on the following grounds:
>See pp. 834-835.
•See pp. 844-834.
 Regulations Governing Papers. 857

(a) That the subject matter does not fall within the field

of the Society's activities.

(b) That the contents are of an advertising character.
(c) That the author controverts well-established facts.
(d) That the subject matter is essentially of a speculative
nature.
(e) That the subject matter is not new.
(/) That the treatment is seriously defective as to literary
form and structure, continuity of thought, clarity of
expression, etc.

The committee reserves the right, however, to reject papers

on grounds other than those above stated; for example, a paper
in which sweeping generalizations are premised on manifestly
inadequate data; a paper embodying trade secrets, for example,
one descriptive of the properties of a product whose composition
or manufacture are not disclosed; or, again, a paper containing
the results of tests calculated to do injury to commercial
interests, unless representatives of those interests witnessed the
tests, or are given the opportunity of preparing discussions for
presentation concurrently with the paper.

III. PRESENTATION AND DISCUSSION OF PAPERS AND

COMMITTEE REPORTS AT ANNUAL MEETINGS.
6. Presentation of Papers. —
Papers by members in attend-
ance at the meeting shall take precedence over papers by absent
members. The latter may, at the discretion of the chair, be
presented only by title. Authors will be expected to confine
themselves to brief references to the principal features of their
papers. In general, the time allotted to the presentation of
a paper shall be limited to ten minutes. The time may be
extended, however, for special reasons, at the discretion of
the chair, or by vote of the meeting.
7. Presentation of Committee Reports. — Committee reports
shall also be limited in their presentation to a brief summary
of their principal features; but matters which are to be referred
to letter ballot of the Society shall either be read in extenso,
or acted on as printed without reading, according to the
expressed sense of the meeting.
858 Regulations Governing Papers.

8. Discussions. —All written discussions shall be placed in

the hands of the Secretary-Treasurer prior to the session at
which they are to be presented. Such written discussions
shall take precedence over oral discussions. In the presenta-
tion of written or oral discussions the speaker will in general
be limited to five minutes, but this time may be extended at
the discretion of the chair, or by vote of the meeting.

IV. PUBLICATION IN THE TECHNICAL PRESS.

9. No paper, committee report, or written discussion shall

be released for publication in the daily or technical press in

advance of its presentation, except by authority of the Com-
mittee on Papers and Publications; nor after its presentation,
unless it has previously been edited by the committee or the
committee agrees to release it without editing.
No person shall receive monetary compensation from
reprinting any paper or discussion presented before the Society,
without previous authorization from the committee, and in all
reprints credit shall be given to the Society.
 1

LIST OF STANDARDS
ADOPTED BY THE

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS. 1

These Standards are copyrighted in the name of the American Society

all

for Testing Materials. Permission to reprint any of these Standards can

be obtained only from the Executive Committee on application to the Secre-
tary-Treasurer.
The designations A 1, A 2, etc., of the Standards are fixed; the final
numbers 14, 12, etc., indicate the year of adoption as standard, or in the case
of revision, the year of last revision.The serial designations of Standards
which have for any reason been discontinued are permanently dropped. In
ordering Standards, the complete serial designations should be stated, thus
A 1-14, A 2-12, etc.

A. FERROUS METALS.
STEEL.
(See also WROUGHT IRON: A 56-18.)

Standard Specifications.

Steel Rails and Accessories.

A 1-14. For Carbon-Steel Rails. 2

Proposed in 1900 (Vol. I, pp. 101-105).
Adopted in amended form in 1901 (Vol. I, p. 253).
First revision adopted in 1907 (Vol. VII, pp. 44-47).
Second revision adopted in 1908 (Vol. VIII, pp. 44-47).
Third revision adopted in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 62-63 and 66-69).
Fourth revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Tart T, p. 86).

A 2-12. For Open-hearth Steel Girder and High Tee Rails.

Adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 122-126).

1
For complete list of Standards by titles with serial designations In continuous numeric
sequence, see pp. 10-14.
1 These specifications were or 1 "Standard
under the title S-

cations for Steel Hails." In 1909 the lattei and divided b

re revised

specifications entitled "Standard Specifications for Bessemer Steel Rails" and "Si
Specifications for Open-hearth Steel Rails." which were revised in 1914, ami combined under
the present title.
860 List of Stand ards.

A 3-14. For Low-Carbon-Steel Splice Bars. 1

Proposed in 1900 (Vol. I, pp. 107-109).

Adopted in amended form in 1901 (Vol. I, p. 253).
First revision adopted in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 56-57).
Second revision adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 127-128).
Third revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 68-69).
Fourth revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 99 and 109).

A 4-14. For Medium-Carbon-Steel Splice Bars.

Adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 131-134).

First revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 99 and 110).

A 5-14. For High-Carbon-Steel Splice Bars.

Adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 135-138).

First revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 99 and 110).

A 6-14. For Extra-High-Carbon-Steel Splice Bars.

Adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 139-142).

First revision adopted in 1914 (Voi. XIV, Part I, pp. 99 and 110-111).

A 49-15. For Quenched High-Carbon-Steel Splice Bars.

Adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 81-82).

A 50-16. For Quenched Carbon-Steel Track Bolts.

Adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 81-82).
First revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, p. 145).

A 51-16. For Quenched Alloy-Steel Track Bolts.

Adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 81-82).

First revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, p. 145).

A 65-18. For Steel Track Spikes.

Proposed as tentative in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 410-411).

Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

A 66-18. For Steel Screw Spikes.

Proposed as tentative in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 412-413).

Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

1 These specifications were designated "Standard Specifications for Steel Splice Bars"
till 1913, when they were revised and the present title was adopted.
 List of Standards. 861

Structural Steels.

A 7-16. For Structural Steel for Bridges. 1

Proposed in 1900 (Vol. I, pp. 81-86).
Adopted in amended form in 1901 (Vol. I, p. 250).
First revision adopted in 1905 (Vol. V, pp. 48-52).
Second revision adopted in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 37-41).
Third revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 69-72).
Fourth revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 99 and Hi-
ll 3).
Fifth revision adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 82 and 111).
Sixth revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 94 and 1 1 1-1 13).
A 8-16. For Structural Nickel Steel.
Adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 135-140).
First revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 72-74).
Second revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 99 and 1 13).
Third revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 94 and 111-
113).

A 9-16. For Structural Steel for Buildings.

Proposed in 1900 (Vol. I, pp. 87-92).
Adopted in amended form in 1901 (Vol. I, p. 250).
First revision adopted in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 47-50).
Second revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 75-77).
Third revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 99 and 113-
114).
Fourth revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 94 and 111-
113).

A 10-16. For Structural Steel for Locomotives. 1

Adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 254-257).
First revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 91-92).
Second revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 99 and 1 14—
115).
Third revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 94 and 111-
113).

A 11-16. For Structural Steel for Cars.

Adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 89).
First revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 94 and 1 1 1-1 13).

'These specifications, when first adopted in 1901, were combined with the Specifications
for Structural Steel for Ships under the title' 'Standard Specifications for Structural Steel for
Bridges and Ships." In 1905. these latter specifications were made to apply to ship material
only, by striking out the words "Bridges and" from the title, and revised "Standard Specifica-
tions for Structural Steel for Bridges" were adopted.
• These specifications were designated "Standard Specifications for Locomotive Mate-
rials: Steel Shapes. _Unlverial_Mill Plates, and Bars" till 1914, when they were revised and
the present title was adopted.
862 List of Standards.

A 12-16. For Structural Steel for Ships. 1

Proposed in 1900 (Vol. I, pp. 81-86).

Adopted in amended form in 1901 (Vol. I, p. 250).
First revisionadopted in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 42-46).
Second revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 143-147).
Third revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 99).
Fourth revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 94 and 111-
113).

A 13-14. For Rivet Steel for Ships. 1

Proposed in 1900 (Vol. I, pp. 81-86).

Adopted in amended form in 1901 (Vol. I, p. 250).
First revision adopted in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 42-46).
Second revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 148-152).
Third revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 99).

Spring Steel and Springs.

A 14-16. For Carbon-Steel Bars for Railway Springs.

Adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 90).
First revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 95 and 113).

A 68-18. For Carbon-Steel Bars for Railway Springs with

Special Silicon Requirements.

Proposed as tentative in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 418-420).

Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
A 58-16. For Carbon-Steel Bars for Vehicle and Automobile
Springs.

Proposed as tentative in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 83-84; 1915

Year-Book, pp. 486-488).
Adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, p. 95).

A 59-16. For Silico-Manganese-Steel Bars for Automobile and

Railway Springs.
Proposed as tentative in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 83-84; 1915
Year-Book, pp. 489-491).
Adopted in amended form in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 95 and 1 13).

1
See footnote to "Standard Specifications for Structural Steel for Bridges." In 1913
the "Standard Specifications for Structural Steel for Ships" were revised and divided Into
two specifications, entitled "Standard Specifications for Structural Steel for Ships" and
" Standard Specifications for Rivet Steel for Ships."
 List of Standards. 863

A 60-16. For Chrome-Vanadium-Steel Bars for Automobile

and Railway Springs.
Proposed as tentative in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 83-84; 1915
Year-Book, pp. 492-494).
Adopted in amended form in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 95 and 13). 1

A 61-16. For Helical Steel Springs for Railways.

Proposed as tentative in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, p. 84; 1915 Year-

Book, pp. 495-505).
Adopted in amended form in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, p. 96).

A 62-16. For Elliptical Steel Springs for Railways.

Proposed as tentative in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, p. 84; 1915 Year-

Book, pp. 495-505).
Adopted in amended form in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, p. 96).

A 69-18. For Elliptical Steel Springs for Automobiles.

Proposed as tentative in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 421-428).
Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

Reinforcement Bars.

A 15-14. For Billet-Steel Concrete Reinforcement Bars. 1

Adopted XI, pp. 66-68).
in 1911 (Vol.
First revisionadopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 161-164).
Second revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 77-78).
Third revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 99 and 115).

A 16-14. For Rail-Steel Concrete Reinforcement Bars.

Adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 153-155).
First revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 99).

Steel Blooms, Forgings and Axles.

A 17-18. For Carbon-Steel and Alloy-Steel Blooms, Billets and

2
Slabs for Forgings.
Adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 166-168).
First revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Pari !,

pp. 97-99 and adopted in amended form in 1918 (Vol. XVIII,

Part I, pp. — ).

'These specifk.v at ions for Stool Reinforcing

Bars" till 1913, when they were revised and the present title was adopted.
•These specifications were Standard Specifications for Blooms, Billets and
Sl.iMi for Cfcrb m Steel Porgingt" till 1918, when they were revised and the present title w«j
adop'
864 List of Standards.

A 18-18. For Carbon-Steel and Alloy-Steel Forgings. 1

Proposed in 1900 (Vol. I, pp. 119-123).
Adopted in amended form in 1901 (Vol. I, p. 254).
First revision adopted in 1905 (Vol. V, pp. 59-62).
Second revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 91-93).
Third revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 96-98, 114
and 116).
Fourth revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I,

p. 99 and adopted in amended form in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I,

pp. — ).

A 19-18. For Quenched-and-Tempered Carbon-Steel Axles,

Shafts and Other Forgings for Locomotives and
Cars. 2
Adopted XI, pp. 63-65).
in 1911 (Vol.
First revisionadopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 169-173).
Second revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 91-93).
Third revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 96-99 and
114-115).
Fourth revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I,
pp. 99-101) and adopted in amended form in 1918 (Vol. XVIII,
Part I, pp. — ).

A 63-18. For Quenched-and-Tempered Alloy-Steel Axles, Shafts,

and Other Forgings for Locomotives and Cars.
Proposed as tentative in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 84-85; 1915
Year-Book, pp. 512-518).
Adopted in amended form in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 96-99
and 116).
First revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I,
pp. 99-101) and adopted in amended form in 1918 (Vol. XVIII,
Part I, pp. — ).

A 20-16. For Carbon-Steel Forgings for Locomotives. 8

Adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 250-253).
First revisionadopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 90-91).
Second revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 91-94).
Third revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 96-97 and 115).

These specifications were designated "Standard Specifications for Steel Forgirgs" till
1

1914, when they were revised and the present title was adopted.
1 These specifications were designated "Standard Specifications for
Heat-Treated Car-
bon-Steel Axles, Shafts and Similar Objects" till 1914, when they were revised and the present
title was adopted.
These specifications were successively designated "Standard Specifications for Annealed
•

Steel Forgings" till 1913, and "Standard Specifications for Steel Forgings" till 1914, wh«n

they were revised, and the present title was adopted.

 List of Standards. 865

A 21-18. For Carbon-Steel Car and Tender Axles. 1

Proposed in 1900 (Vol. I, pp. 111-114).
Adopted in amended form in 1901 (Vol. I, p. 254).
First revision adopted in 1905 (Vol. V, pp. 56-58).
Second revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 78-79).
Third revision adopted in 1914 (Vol XIV, Part I, p. 116).
Fourth revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I.

pp. 118-119) and adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

A 22-16. For Cold-Rolled Steel Axles.

Proposed in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 48-51).
Adopted in amended form in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 156-159).
First revison adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 99 and 117).
Second revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 96-97
and 116).

Steel Wheels and Tires.

A 57-16. For Wrought Solid Carbon-Steel Wheels for Steam

Railway Service. 2
Proposed in 1911 (Vol. XI, pp. 55-58 and 59-62).
Adopted in amended form in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 174-178 and
179-183).
First revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 99-100).

A 25-16. For Wrought Solid Carbon-Steel Wheels for Electric

Railway Sendee.
Adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 160-165).
First revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 99-102).

A 26-16. For Steel Tires.

Proposed in 1900 (Vol. I, pp. 115-118).
Adopted in 1901 (Vol. I, p. 254).
First revision adopted in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 58-61).
Second revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 80-81).
Third revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 99).
Fourth revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 9V ami
102-103).
(Correction adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ) without
change in year of last revision.)

'These specifications were designated "Standard Specifications for Steel Axles" till
1913. when they were revised and the present title was adopted.
>Prior to 1916. the following two specifications were in force: "Standard Spe< ifi< atlons
for Forged and Rolled. Forged, or Rolled Solid Carbon-Steel Wheels for Engine-Truck. Tender,
and Passenger Service." Serial Designation: A 23; and "Standard Specifications for Forged
and Rolled. Forged, or Rolled Solid Carbon-Steel Wheels for Frc .
'ice," Serial
Designation: A 24. In 1916 these two specifications were revised and combined under th«
present title and serial designation A 57.
866 List of Standards.

Steel Castings.

A 27-16. For Steel Castings.

Proposed in 1900 (Vol. I, pp. 125-128).

Adopted in 1901 (Vol. I, p. 254).
First revision adopted in 1905 (Vol. V, pp. 53-55).
Second revision adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 192-195).
Third revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 81-84).
Fourth revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 99).
Fifth revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 103 and 116-
117).

Steel Tubes and Pipe.

A 28-18. For Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel Boiler Tubes for
Locomotives. 1
Adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 258-260).
First revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 84-86).
Second revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 103 and
117-120).
Third revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I,
pp. 101-103) and adopted in amended form in 1918 (Vol.
XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
A 52-18. For Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel and Wrought-
Iron Boiler Tubes for Stationary Service. 2
Adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, p. 86).
First revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I,
pp. 103-108) and adopted in amended form in 1918 (Vol. XVIII,
Part I, pp. — ).

A 53-18. For Welded Steel Pipe. 3

Adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, p. 86).

First revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp.
108-109) and adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

1 These specifications were successively designated "Standard Specifications for Lap-

Welded and Seamless Steel Boiler Tubes and Safe Ends, 2\ in. diameter and under" till 1913,
"Standard Specifications for Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel Boiler Tubes, Safe Ends, and
Arch Tubes" till 1916, and "Standard Specifications for Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel Boiler
Tubes, Boiler Flues, Superheater Pipes, Safe Ends, and Arch Tubes for Locomotives" till
1918, when they were revised and the present title was adopted.
J These specifications were designated "Standard Specifications for Lap-Welded and Seam-

less Boiler Tubes for Stationary Service" till 1916, when the title was changed to the present
form at the direction of the Executive Committee.
•These specifications were originally adopted in 1915 under the title "Standard Specifica-
tions for Welded Steel and Wrought-Iron Pipe." In 1918 they were revised and divided into
two specifications covering steel pipe (A 53) and wrought-iron pipe (A 72).
 List of Standards. 867

Automobile Steels (see also Spring Steel).

A 29-18. For Automobile Carbon and Alloy Steels.

Adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 196-203).

First revisionadopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 86-88).
Second revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part 1, p. 99).
Third revision adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 86 and 111-114).
Fourth revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, p. 145).
Fifth revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I,
pp. 109-110) and adopted in amended form in 1918 (Vol.
XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
Boiler Steels.

A 30-18. For Boiler and Firebox Steel for Locomotives. 1

Proposed in 1900 (Vol. I, pp. 93-99).

Adopted in amended form in 1901 (Vol. I, p. 251).
First revision adopted in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 51-55).
Second revision adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 152-156).
Third revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, p. 88).
Fourth revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 99).
Fifth revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 103-104 and
120-122).
Sixth revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I,

pp. 110 and 120) and adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I,

pp. — ).

A 31-14. For Boiler Rivet Steel. 1

Proposed in 1900 (Vol. I, pp. 93-99).

Adopted in amended form in 1901 (Vol. I, p. 251).
First revision adopted in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 51-55).
Second revision adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 157-160).
Third revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 88-90).
Fourth revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 99).

Cold-Drawn Steels.

A 32-14. For Cold-Drawn Bessemer Steel Automatic Screw

Stock.
Proposed in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 191-192).
Adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 172-173).

1
These specifications were originally adopted in 1901 under the title "Standard Specifica-
tions for Open-hearth Boiler Plate and Rivet Steel." In 1902 these latter specifications were
! into two specifications, entitled "Standard Specifications for Boiler and
Pirebox Steel " and "Stan lard Specifications for Boiler Rivet Steel." In 1916 the first of these
specifications (now designated A 30) was revised and the present title was adopted.
868 List of Standards.

A 54—15. For Cold-Drawn Open-hearth Steel Automatic Screw

Stock.

Proposed in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 193-194) and published as ten-

tative in amended form in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 172-175;
1914 Year-Book, pp. 368-369).
Adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, p. 132).

Standard Tests.
A 34-18. For Magnetic Properties of Iron and Steel. 1

Adopted in 1911 (Vol. XI, pp. 110-114).

First revision adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 210-214).
Second revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 170-171).
Third revision proposed as tentative in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I,

pp. 580-582) and adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

Standard Methods.

A 33-14. For Chemical Analysis of Plain Carbon Steel.

Adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 96).

A 55-15. For Chemical Analysis of Alloy Steels.

Adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, p. 87).

Recommended Practice.
A 35-11. For Annealing of Miscellaneous Rolled and Forged
Carbon-Steel Objects.

Adopted in 1911 (Vol. XI, pp. 86-91).

A 36-14. For Annealing of Carbon-Steel Castings.

Adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 169).

A 37-14. For Heat Treatment of Case-Hardened Carbon-

Steel Objects.

Proposed in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 188-189).

Adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 169).

•These tests were designated "Standard Magnetic Tests of Iron and Steel" till 1916,
when the title was changed to the present form at the direction of the Executive Committee.
 List of Standards. 869

WROUGHT IRON.
(See also STEEL: A 52-18.)

Standard Specifications.
A 38-18. For Lap- Welded Charcoal-Iron Boiler Tubes for
Locomotives. 1
Adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 264-266).
First revision adopted in 1916 (Vol.XVI, Part I, pp. 147-149).
Second revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
A 72-18. For Welded Wrought-Iron Pipe. 2

Proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 130 an'

568-572).
Adopted in amended form in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

A 39-18. For Staybolt Iron. 3

Proposed in 1907 (Vol. VII, pp. 157-158).

Adopted in amended form in 1910 (Vol. X, pp. 94-95).
First revision adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 261-263).
Second revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 144-145).
Third revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I,
pp. 130 and 564-567) and adopted in amended form in 1918
(Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
A 40-18. For Engine-Bolt Iron. 3

Adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 215-217).

First revisionadopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, p. 183).
Second revision adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

A 41-18. For Refined Wrought-Iron Bars. 3

Adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 218-221).

First revisionadopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, p. 183).
Second revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I,
pp. 131-132) and adopted in amended form in 1918 (Vol. XVIII
Part I, pp. — ).

A 42-18. For Wrought-Iron Plates.

Adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 185-187).
First revision adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

•These specifications were designated "Standard Specifications for Lap Welded Iron
Boiler Tubes" til: 1916, when they were revised and the present title was adopted.
'These specifications supersede, as regards wrought-iron pipe only, the "Standard
Specifications for Welded Steel and Wrought-Iron Pipe" adopted in 1915. See footnote to
Specifications A 53.
•These specifications supersede the "Standard Specifications for Wrought Iron," which
were proposed in 1900, (Vol. I, pp. 129-134). and adopted in amended form in 1901 (Vol. I,

pp. 231-235).
870 List of Standards.

A 56-18. For Iron and Steel Chain.

Adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 121-122).
First revision adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

A 73-18. For Wrought-Iron Rolled or Forged Blooms and

Forgings for Locomotives and Cars.
Proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 132 and
573-575).
Adopted in amended form in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

PIG IRON, CAST IRON, AND FINISHED CASTINGS.

Standard Specifications.
A 43-09. For Foundry Pig Iron.
Proposed in 1904 (Vol. IV, p. 44).
Adopted in amended form in 1904 (Vol. IV, pp. 103-104).
First revision adopted in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 111-112).

A 44-04. For Cast-Iron Pipe and Special Castings.

Adopted in 1904 (Vol. IV, pp. 57-66).

A 74-18. For Cast-iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

Proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 133 and 576-
581).
Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

A 45-14. For Cast-Iron Locomotive Cylinders. 1

Proposed in 1904 (Vol. IV, pp. 69-70).
Adopted in amended form in 1904 (Vol. IV, p. 69).
First revision proposed in 1911 (Vol. XI, pp. 83-84) and adopted
in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 147-148).

A 46-05. For Cast-iron Car Wheels.

Proposed in 1904 (Vol. IV, pp. 74-79).
Adopted in amended form in 1905 (Vol. V, pp. 65-70).

A 47-15. For Malleable-Iron Castings. 2

Proposed in 1904 (Vol. IV, pp. 95-96).
Adopted in amended form 1904 (Vol. IV, p. 96).
First revision adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 123-125).

These specifications were designated "Standard Specifications for Locomotive Cylinders"

1

till when the title was changed to the present form at the direction of the Executive
1916,
Committee.
'These specifications were designated "Standard Specifications for Malleable Castings"
till 1915, when they were revised and the present title was adopted.
 List of Standards. 871

A 48-18. For Gray-Iron Castings.

Proposed in 1904 (Vol. IV, pp. 97-100).

Adopted in amended form in 1905 (Vol. V, pp. 71-74).
First revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, p. 133)
and adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
Standard Methods.

A 64-15. For Sampling and Analysis of Pig and Cast Iron.

Proposed as tentative in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 123-125; 1915

Year-Book, pp. 519-540).
Adopted in amended form in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 150-151).

B. NON-FERROUS METALS.
Standard Specifications.
Ingot Copper.

B 4-13. For Lake Copper Wire Bars, Cakes, Slabs. Billets,

Ingots, and Ingot Bars. 1

Adopted in 1911 (Vol. XI, pp. 143-145).

First revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 214-217).

B 5-13. For Electrolytic Copper Wire Bars, Cakes, Slabs,

Billets, Ingots, and Ingot Bars. 1

Adopted in 1911 (Vol. XI, pp. 143-145).

First revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 218-220).

Spelter.

B 6-18. For Spelter.

Adopted in 1911 (Vol. XI, pp. 146-149).

First revisionadopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 1

Second revision proposed as tentative in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I,

pp. 583-589), continued as tentative in amended form in 1917
(Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 178 and 615-621) and ado P tr<1 in 1918
(Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

1 These specifications were originally adopted in 1911 under the title "Standard Specifi-
cations for Copper Wire Bars, Cakes, Slabs, Billets, Ingots, and Ingot Bars." In 1913 the»«
latter specifications were revised a; TO specifications, covering Lake iu»d
I

sly.
872 List of Standards.

Bronze.

B 7-14. For Manganese-Bronze Ingots for Sand Castings. 1

Adopted in 1911 (Vol. XI, pp. 150-151).

First revision adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 178-179).

B 10-18. For the Alloy: Copper, 88 per cent; Tin, 10 per

cent; Zinc, 2 per cent.

Proposed as tentative in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 137-138; 1915

Year-Book, pp. 550-552).
Adopted in amended form in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
Wire and Cable.
B 1-15. For Hard-Drawn Copper Wire.
Adopted in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 311-318).
First revisionadopted in 1911 (Vol. XI, pp. 134-138).
Second revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 200-201).
Third revision adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 133-136).

B 2-15. For Medium Hard-Drawn Copper Wire.

Adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 277-285).

First revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, p. 201).
Second revision adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 133-136).

B 3-15. For Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.

Adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, pp. 286-291).

First revision adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, p. 201).
Second revision adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 133-136).

B 8-16. For Bare Concentric-Lay Copper Cable: Hard,

Medium-Hard, or Soft.

Proposed as tentative in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 133-136; 1915

Year-Book, pp. 541-545).
Adopted in amended form in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 177-179).

B 9-16. For High-Strength Bronze Trolley Wire, Round and

Grooved: 40 and 65-per-cent Conductivity.
Proposed as tentative in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 133-136; 1915
Year-Book, pp. 546-549)
Adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 177-179).

•These specifications were designated "Standard Specifications for Manganese-Bronze

Ingots"till 1914, when they were revised and the present title was adopted.
 List of Standards. 873

Copper and Brass Plates, Tubes, etc.

B 11-18. For Copper Plates for Locomotive Fireboxes.

Proposed as tentative in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 437-440).
Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
B 12-18. For Copper Bars for Locomotive Staybolts.
Proposed as tentative in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 441-443).
Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
B 13-18. For Seamless Copper Boiler Tubes.
Proposed as tentative in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 444-447).
Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

B 14-18 For Seamless Brass Boiler Tubes.

Proposed as tentative in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 448-451).
Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
B 15-18. For Brass Forging Rod.

Proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 178 and 603-
605).
Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

B 16-18. For Free-Cutting Brass Rod for Use in Screw

Machines.
Proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol XVII, Part I, pp. 178 and
606-609).
Adopted in amended form in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

C. CEMENT, LIME, GYPSUM, AND CLAY PRODUCTS.

Standard Specifications.
C 9-17. Standard Specifications and Tests for Portland Cement. 1

Adopted in 1904 (Vol. IV, pp. 107-119).

First revisionadopted in 1908 (Vol. VIII, pp. 149-164).
Second revision adopted in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 116-130).
Third revision adopted in 1916, to become effective January 1, 1917
(Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 200-202).

These specifications were originally adopted in 1904 under the title "Standard Specifica-
1

tion! for Cement." and were later designated C 1. In 1916, the requirements for Portland
cement were revised while those for natural cement were left unchanged; the former (a pub-
lished under its present title and serial designation C 9, the latter under the designation C 10.
874 List of Standards.

C 10-09. For Natural Cement. 1

Adopted in 1904 (Vol. IV, pp. 107-119).
First revision adopted in 1908 (Vol. VIII, pp. 149-164).
Second revsion adopted in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 116-130).

C 4-16. For Drain Tile.

Adopted in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 208-212).
First revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 259-261).

C 5-15. For Quicklime.

Proposed in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 313-319) and published as tentative
in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 213-220: 1914 Year-Book, pp.
370-372).
Adopted in amended form in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 167-170).

C 6-15. For Hydrated Lime.

Proposed in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 313-319) and published as ten-
tative in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 213-220; 1914 Year-
Book, pp. 373-375).
Adopted in amended form in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 167-170).

C 7-15. For Paving Brick.

Proposed in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 289-300) and continued in amended
form in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 191-192).
Adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 158-159).

C 19-18. For Fire Tests of Materials and Construction. 2

Proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 295-299 and
679-680).
Adopted in amended form in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

Standard Definitions.
C 8-15. Of Terms Relating to Sewer Pipe.
Proposed in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I,pp. 202-205).
Adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 163-164).

These specifications were originally adopted in 1914 under the title "Standard Specifica-
1

tions for Cement," and were later designated C 1. In 1916, the requirements for Portland
cement were revised while those for natural cement were left unchanged; the former is pub-
lished under its present title and serial designation C 9, the latter under the designation C 10.
• In 1917 there were proposed "Tentative Methods for Control of Fire Tests and Classi-

fication of Materials and Construction as Determined by Test." In 1918 these were revised
to include the requirements of the Standard Test for Fireproof Floor Construction (C 2-08) and
the Standard Test for Fireproof Partition Construction (C 3-09), and were adopted as specifica-
tions under the present title. The Standard Tests C 2-08 and C 3-09 were then discontinued.
The history of these is as follows:
C 2-08.—Proposed in 1906 (Vol. VI, pp. 126-128); adopted in 1907 (Vol. VII, pp. 179-
180); first revision adopted in 1908 (Vol. VIII
pp. 210-212).
C 3-09.— Proposed in 1908 (Vol. VIII, pp. 207-209); adopted in 1909 (Vol. IX. pp. 281-
282).
 List of Standards. 875

D. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS.
Standard Specifications.
Preservative Coatings.

D 1-15. For Purity of Raw Linseed Oil from North American

Seed.
Adopted in 1913 (Vol. XIII, pp. 399-401).
First revision adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 186 and 224-
232).

D 11-15. For Purity of Boiled Linseed Oil from North Amer-

ican Seed.

Adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 186 and 224-232).

D 12-16. For Purity of Raw Tung Oil. 1

Adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 186and 204-213).

First revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 270 and 273).

D 13-15. For Turpentine.

Proposed in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 342-343).

Adopted in amended form in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 187 and
263-265).

Coke.
D 17-16. For Foundry Coke.
Proposed as tentative in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 359-361; 1915
Year-Book, pp. 559-562).
Adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 325-326).

Timber.
D 10-15. For Yellow-Pine Bridge and Trestle Timbers.
Proposed in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 283-286).
Adopted in 1910 (Vol. X, pp. 159-161).
First revision adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 362-363).

Rubber.
D 14-15. For 2f-in. Cotton Rubber-Lined Fire Hose for Pri-
vate Department Use.
Adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 408-410).

'These ipecific&ttonj were designated "Standard Specifications for Purity of Raw

Chinese Wood Oil'' till 1916,when they were revised and the present title was adopted.
876 List of Standards.

D 26-18. For 2 |, 3, and 3£-in. Double- Jacketed Cotton Rubber-

Lined Fire Hose for Public Fire Department Use.
Proposed as tentative in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 487-491).
Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
D 46-18. For Air-Line Hose for Pneumatic Tools.
Proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 494-495 and
763-766).
Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

Standard Tests,
Preservative Coatings.

D 28-17. For Paint Thinners other than Turpentine.

Proposed as tentative in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 187 and 259-
262; 1915 Year-Book, pp. 567-570) and continued as tentative
in amended form in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 518-521).
Adopted in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 363 and 460).

D 29-17. For Shellac.

Proposed in part in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 344-350), and in
part in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 187 and 266; 1915 Year-
Book, pp. 571-577); continued as tentative in amended form
in' 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 522-528).
Adopted in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 363 and 460).

Lubricants.

D 47-18. For Lubricants.

Proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 462 and 767-
772).
Adopted in amended form in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

Road Materials.

D 2-08. For Abrasion of Road Material.

Proposed in 1904 (Vol. IV, pp. 193-194).
Adopted in 1908 (Vol. VIII, pp. 197-198).

D 3-18. For Toughness of Rock. 1

Proposed in 1905 (Vol. V, pp. 102-103).
Adopted in 1908 (Vol. VIII, pp. 199-200).
First revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I,

pp. 470 and 773-775) and adopted in amended form in 1918

(Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

1
This test was designated "Standard Test for Toughness of Macadam Rock" till 1918,
when it was revised and the present title was adopted.
 List of Standards. 877

D 30-18. For Determination of Apparent Specific Gravity of

Coarse Aggregates.
Proposed as tentative in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 529-530) and
continued as tentative in amended form in 1917 (Vol. XVII,
Part I, pp. 470 and 776-777).
Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
D 4-11. For Soluble Bitumen.

Adopted in 1911 (Vol. XI, pp. 245-246).

D 5-16. For Penetration of Bituminous Materials. 1

Proposed in 1910 (Vol. X, p. 153).

Adopted in amended form in 1911 (Vol. XI, p. 247).
First revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 300-305; also
Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 352-355).

D 6-16. For Loss on Heating of Oil and Asphaltic Compounds.

Proposed in 1910 (Vol. X, p. 153).
Adopted in amended form in 1911 (Vol. XI, p. 248).
First revision adopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 300-305).

Standard Methods.
Preservative Coatings.

D 34-17. For Routine Analysis of White Pigments.

Proposed in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 187 and 238; 1915 Year-
Book, pp. 579-590) and continued as tentative in 1916 (Vol.
XVI, Part I, pp. 536-547).
Adopted in amended form in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, 363 and 460).

D 49-18. For Routine Analysis of Dry Red Lead.

Proposed in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 281-183) and published as

tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 363 and 796-801).

Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

D 50-18. For Routine Analysis of Yellow, Orange, Red and

Brown Pigments containing Iron and Manganese.
Proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 363 and
802-809).
Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

'This t«st was designated "Standard Test for Penetration o( Bitumen" till 1916. whM
it wu revised and the present title was adopted.
 List of Standards.

Road Materials.

D 7-18. For Making a Mechanical Analysis of Sand or Other

Fine Highway Material, except for Fine Aggregate?
Used in Cement Concrete. 1

Adopted XI, p. 249).

in 1911 (Vol.
First revisionadopted in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 300-305).
Second revision adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
D 18-16. For Making a Mechanical Analysis of Broken Stone
or Broken Slag, except for Aggregates Used in
Cement Concrete.
Proposed as tentative in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 381; see also
Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 338-340).
Adopted in amended form in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 300-305).

D 19-16. For Making a Mechanical Analysis of Mixtures of

Sand or Other Fine Material with Broken Stone
or Broken Slag, except for Aggregates Used in
Cement Concrete.
Proposed as tentative in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, p. 382; see also
Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 338-340).
Adopted in amended form in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 300-305).

D 35-18. Form of Specifications for Certain Commercial

Grades of Broken Stone.
Proposed as tentative in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, p. 548).
Adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
D 20^18. For Distillation of Bituminous Materials Suitable for
Road Treatment.
Proposed as tentative in 1911 (Vol. XI, pp. 241-244).
Adopted in amended form in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 300-305).
First revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I,
pp. 471 and 474-475) and adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I,
pp. — ).

Coal and Coke.

D 21-16. For Sampling of Coal.

Proposed as tentative in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 357-358; 1915
Year-Book, pp. 591-595).
Adopted in amended form in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 319-324)
1 This method was designated "Standard Method for Sizing and Separating the Aggregate

in Asphalt Paving Mixtures" till 1916, when it was revised and the present title was adopted.
 List of Standards. 879

D 22-16. For Laboratory Sampling and Analysis of Coal.

Proposed as tentative in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 409-452) and

in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 453-455; 1915 Year-Book, pp. 596-
624).
Adopted in amended form in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, p. 299).

D 37-18. For Laboratory Sampling and Analysis of Coke.

Proposed as tentative in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 551-563).

Adopted in amended form in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
Timber Preservatives.
D 38-18. For Sampling and Analysis of Creosote Oil.

Proposed in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 365-366; 1915 Year-Book,

pp. 625-63 1 ) and continued as tentative in amended form in 1916
(Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 564-571).
Adopted in amended form in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 483-486).
First revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I,
pp. 483-486 and 826-828) and adopted in amended form in
1918 (Vol. XVIIT, Part I, pp. ). —
Rubber.
D 15-15. For Testing of Cotton Rubber-Lined Hose.

Adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 408-410).

Standard Definitions.
D 16-15. Of Terms Relating to Paint Specifications.

Proposed in 1911 (Vol. XI, pp. 223-224); supplemented in 1913

(Vol. XIII, pp. 402-405) and in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I,
224-226).
Adopted in amended form in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 186 and
237).

D 8-18. Of Terms Relating to Materials for Roads and Pave-

ments. 1
Adopted in 1912 (Vol. XII, p. 362).
First revisionadopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 325-331).
Second revision proposed as tentative in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I,
pp. 303-305), supplemented in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 471-
472) and adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
1
The32 definitions were designated "Standard Definitions of Terms Applicable to Matr-
rials Relating to Roali an 1 Pavements" till 1916, when the title was changed to the present
form at the direction of the Executive Committee.
880 List of Standards.

D 9-15. Of Terms Relating to Structural Timber. 1

Proposed in 1906 (Vol. VI, pp. 129-133).

Adopted in amended form in 1907 (Vol. VII, pp. 187-192).
First revision adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 362-363 and
367-368).

E. MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS.
Standard Methods.
E 1-18. For Testing.

I. For Tension Tests of Metals.

Proposed in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 263-270).
Adopted in 1910 (Vol. X, p 12).
First revision adopted in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 443-448).
Second revision proposed as tentative in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I,
pp. 443-448) and adopted in amended form in 1916 (Vol. XVI,
Part I, pp. 390-392).
Third revision proposed as tentative in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I,
pp. 499-501) and adopted in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
II. For Compression Tests of Metals.
Proposed in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 263-270).
Adopted in 1910 (Vol. X, p. 12).
First revision proposed as tentative in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I,
pp. 443-448) and adopted in amended form in 1916 (Vol. XVI,
Part I, pp. 390-392).

III. For Transverse Tests of Metals.

Adopted in 1911 (Vol. XI, pp. 259-261).

IV. For Brinell Hardness Tests of Metals.

Proposed in 1914 (Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. 391-392).

Adopted in amended form in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 443-448).

V. For Metallographic Tests of Metals.

Proposed in 1909 (Vol. IX, pp. 270-272).
Adopted in 1910 (Vol. X, p. 12).

'These definitions originally included "Standard Specifications for Bridge and Trestle
Timbers," and were designated "Standard Specifications for Structural Timber" till the
adoption, in 1910, of separate "Standard Specifications for Yellow-Pine Bridge and Trestle
Timbers." Till 1915 they were designated "Standard Classification of Structural Timber,"
when they were revised and the present title was adopted.
 LIST OF TENTATIVE STANDARDS
PUBLISHED BY THE

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS.

The term Tentative Standards is applied to a proposed Standard which is

printed in the Proceedings for one or more years with a view of eliciting
criticism, of which the committee concerned will take due cognizance before
recommending final action towards the adoption of such Tentative Standards
by formal action of the Society.
These Tentative Standards are all copyrighted in the name of the Ameri-
can Society for Testing Materials. Permission to reprint any of these Tenta-
tive Standards can be obtained only from the Executive Committee on
application to the Secretary-Treasurer.
The designations A 67, A 70, etc., of the Tentative Standards are fixed;
they follow in numeric sequence the designations of the Standards, and are
retained when a Tentative Standard is adopted as Standard. The final
number, as 18, indicates the year of original issue, or in the case of
revision, the year of last revision. The letter "T" is appended to the
designation ofall Tentative Standards. The serial designations of Tentative
Standards which have for any reason not been adopted as standard, and
have been discontinued, are permanently dropped. In ordering Tentative
Standards, the complete serial designations should be stated, thus,
A 67-18 T, etc.

A. FERROUS METALS.
STEEL.

Tentative Specifications.

A 67-18 T. For Steel Tie Plates.

Proposed in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 414-417).
Revised in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 84 and 541-545).
Revised in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
A 70-18 T. For Boiler and Firebox Steel for Stationary Service.
Proposed in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 429-433).
Revised in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 110 and 557-561).
Revised in 1918 (Vol. XVTII, Part I, pp. ). —
(881)
882 List of Tentative Standards.

A 71-17 T. For Carbon Tool Steel.

Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 562-563).

A 76-18 T. For Low-Carbon-Steel Track Bolts.

Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

A 77-18 T. For Electric Cast Steel Anchor Chain.

Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

CAST IRON.
Tentative Specifications.
A 75-18 T. For Malleable Castings. 1
Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 133 and 582-584).
Revised in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

B. NON-FERROUS METALS.
Tentative Specifications.
B 17-18 T. For Non-Ferrous Alloys for Railway Equipment
in Ingots, Castings, and Finished Car and
- Tender Bearings.
Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 610-614).
Revised in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

B 19-18 T. For Cartridge Brass.

Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

B 20-18 T. For Cartridge Brass Disks.

Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

B 21-18 T. For Naval Brass Rods for Structural Purposes.

Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

B 22-18 T. For Bronze Bearing Metals for Turntables and

Movable Railroad Bridges.
Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

B 23-18 T. For White Metal Bearing Alloys (known commer-

cially as "Babbitt Metal").

Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

1 When
proposed in 1917, these specifications were entitled "Tentative Specification* for
Railroad Malleable-Iron Castings."
 List of Tentative Standards. 883

B 24-18 T. For Aluminum Ingots for Remelting and for

Rolling.
Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

B 25-18 T. For Aluminum Sheet.

Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

B 26-18 T. For Light Aluminum Casting Alloys.

Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

Tentative Methods.

B 18-17 T. For Chemical Analysis of Alloys of Lead, Tin,

Antimony and Copper.
Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 622-629).

B 27-18 T. For Chemical Analysis of Manganese Bronze.

Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

B 28-18 T. For Chemical Analysis of Gun Metal.

Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

C. CEMENT, LIME, GYPSUM, AND CLAY

PRODUCTS.

Tentative Specifications.

C 9-16 T. Specifications and Tests for Compressive Strength

of Portland-Cement Mortars.

Proposed in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 590-593).

To be added, when adopted, to the Standard Specifications
and Tests for Portland Cement (Serial Designation: C 9-17).

C 13-18 T. For Clay Sewer Pipe.

Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 634-646).
Revised in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
C 14-18 T. For Cement Concrete Sewer Pipe.
Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 647-658).
Revised in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).
884 List of Tentative Standards.

C 15-17 T. For Required Safe Crushing Strengths of Sewer

Pipe to Carry Loads from Ditch Filling.
Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 659-660).

C 6-17 T. For Masons' Hydrated Lime.

Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 661-664).
To replace, when adopted, the Standard Specifications for
Hydrated Lime (Serial Designation: C'6-l 5).

Tentative Tests.
C 16-18 T. For Refractory Materials under Load at High
Temperatures.
Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 665-668).
Revised in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

C 17-17 T. For Slagging Action of Refractory Materials.

Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 669-670).

Tentative Methods.
C 18-18 T. For Ultimate Chemical Analysis of Refractory
Materials.
Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 671-678).
Revised in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
C 20-18 T. For Determination of Porosity and Permanent
Volume Changes in Refractory Materials.
Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

Tentative Definitions.

C 11-16 T. Of Terms Relating to the Gypsum Industry.

Proposed in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 452-471).

Tentative Recommended Practice.

C 12-17 T. For Laying Sewer Pipe.

Proposed in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 163-164; 1915 Year-Book,
pp. 553-558).
Revised in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 472-478).
Revised in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 293 and 701-703).
 List of Tentative Standards. 885

D. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS.
Tentative Specifications.
Preservative Coatings.

D 51-18 T. For Foots Permissible in Properly Clarified Pure

Raw Linseed Oil from North American Seed.
Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

Timber.
D 23-16 T. For Selected Structural Douglas Fir Bridge and
Trestle Timbers.
Proposed in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 479-482).

D 24-15 T. For Southern Yellow-Pine Timber to be Creosoted.

Proposed in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 365-366; 1915 Year-Book,
pp. 563-564).

D 25-15 T. For Southern Yellow-Pine Piles and Poles to be

Creosoted.
Proposed in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 365-366; 1915 Year-Book,
pp. 565-566).

D 52-18 T. For Wooden Paving Blocks for Exposed Pavements.

Proposed in 1918 (Vol; XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

Waterproofing.

D 40-17 T. For Asphalt for Use in Damp-proofing and Water-

proofing.
Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 712-715).

D 41-17 T. For Primer for Use with Asphalt for Use in Damp-
proofing and Waterproofing.
Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, p. 716).

D 42-17 T. For Coal-Tar Pitch for Use in Damp-proofing

and Waterproofing.
Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVIT, Part I, pp. 717-720).

D 43-17 T. For Creosote Oil for Priming Coat with Coal-

Tar Pitch for Use in Damp-proofing and Water-
proofing.
Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 721-722).
886 List of Tentative Standards.

Shipping Containers.

D 44-17 T. For Canned Foods Boxes, Nailed and Lock-

Corner Construction.
Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 723-729).

D 45-17 T. For Canned Foods Boxes, Wirebound Construc-

tion.

Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 730-731).

Rubber Products.
D 27-16 T. For Insulated Wire and Cable: 30-per-cent Hevea
Rubber.
Proposed in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 492-517).

D 53-18 T. For Rubber Belting for Power Transmission.

Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

D 54-18 T. For Steam Hose.

Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

Tentative Tests.
D 28-18 T. For Flash Point of Paint Thinners other than
Turpentine.
Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
To be added, when adopted, to the Standard Tests for Paint
Thinners other than Turpentine (Serial Designation: D 28-17).

D 55-18 T. For Determination of Apparent Specific Gravity

of Sand, Stone, and Slag Screenings, and Other
Fine Non -Bituminous Highway Materials.
Proposed in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. — ).

D 48-17 T. For Molded Insulating Materials.

Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 778-790).

Tentative Methods.
D 36-16 T. For Determination of Softening Point of Bitu-
minous Materials other than Tar Products.
Proposed in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 549-550).
 List of Tentative Standards. 887

D 39-18 T. For Testing Cotton Fabrics. 1

Proposed in 1915 (Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 440-442; 1915 Year-Book,

pp. 574-578).
Revised in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I, pp. 572-578).
Revised in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —

E. MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS.
Tentative Definitions.
E 2-18 T. Definitions and Rules Governing the Preparation
of Micrographs of Metals and Alloys.

Proposed in 1917 (Vol. XVII, Part I, pp. 838-841).

Revised in 1918 (Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. ). —
•This tentative method was revised in 1918, and in revised form replaced the following
Tentative Tests: For Automobile Tire Fabrics (D 31-16 T), proposed in 1916 (Vol. XVI.
Part I, pp. 531-532); for Cotton Fabrics for Use in Hose, Belting and Similar Articles
(D 32-16 T), proposed in 1916 (Vol. XVI. Part I. p. 533); for Cotton Fabrics for Use in
Bags and Bagging Material (D 33-16 T), proposed in 1916 (Vol. XVI, Part I. pp. 534-535).
 PRICE LIST OF PUBLICATIONS
OF THE

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS.

PROCEEDINGS.
The Proceedings of the Society may be obtained in the
form of single volumes or complete sets at the prices indicated
below, except that Volumes I and III, of which comparatively
few copies are available, can be furnished only in connection
with orders for complete sets.
BINDING.
Paper. Cloth. Half-Leather.
Volume I, 1898-1901, containing Bulletins
Nos. 1 to 28 incl. (266 pp.) $3 00a $350 $4 00
Volume II, 1902 (388 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
Volume III, 1903 (490 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
Volume IV, 1904 (655 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
Volume V, 1905 <565 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
Volume VI, 1906 (712 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
Volume VII, 1907 (759 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
Volume VIII, 1908 (706 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
Volume IX, 1909 (698 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
Volume X, 1910 (671 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
Volume XI, 1911 (890 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
Volume XII, 1912 (600 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
Volume XIII, 1913 (1141 pp.) 7 50 8 00 8 50
Part I. Committee —
Reports (484 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
Volume XIV, 1914
Part II.—Technical
Papers (678 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
—
Part I. Committee
Reports (485 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
Volume XV, 1915
Part II.—Technical
Papers (477 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
—
Part I. Committee
Reports (613 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
Volume XVI, 1916
Part II.—Technical
Papers (501 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00

"Volume I consists of 28 separate bulletins, and cannot be furnished in paper binding,

The price quoted is for the complete set of bulletins, unbound.

(888)
 :

Price List of Publications. 889

Part I. —Committee
Reports (875 pp.) $5 00 $5 50 $6 00
Volume XVII, 1917 <

—
Part II. Technical
Papers (675 pp.) 5 00 5 50 6 00
—
Part I. Committee
Reports (. pp.) . . 5 00 5 50 6 50
Volume XVIII, 1918 _ *L
( . J-
—
Part II. Technical
. . .

{ Papers (. pp.) . . 5 00 5 50 6 50

Members of the Society may obtain back Proceedings for

the completion of their personal files at the following special
prices
BINDING.
Paper. Cloth. Half-Leather.
Volume I $2 00* $2 50 $3 00
Volumes II to XII, incl., price per volume 3 00 3 50 4 00
Volume XIII 5 00 5 50 6 00
/Part 3 00 50 4 00
Volume VT
,. 1 3
XIV < _
\ Part II
. TT ,.„«•--«*
3 00 3 50
«»
4 00
Parti 3 00 3 50 4 00
Volume XV Part II 3 00 3 50 4 00
/Part 1
volume XVI < _.
\
.

Part II
TT
3 00
„
3 00
.„-»--„
3 50
3 50
4 00
4 00
._ __.. TT Part 1 3 00 3 50 4 00
,
Volume XVII j
<
1
_.
Part II
TT „
3
„
00
.
3
rn
50
. „_
4 00

SPECIAL PRICES FOR VOLS. I-XII INCLUSIVE.

Members. Non-Members.
Paper binding $25 00 $35 00
Cloth binding 30 00 40 00
Half-leather binding 35 00 45 00

INDEX OF VOLUMES l-XII INCLUSIVE.

An Index (158 pp.) of Volumes I-XII inclusive of the

Proceedings may be obtained at the following prices:
Members. Non-Members.
Cloth binding $1 00 $1 50
Half-leather binding 1 50 2 00

BOOK OF A.S.T.M. STANDARDS.

The Book of A.S.T.M. Standards, which contains the
128 Standards of the Society in their latest revised form, will

"Volume I consists of 28 separate bulletins, and cannot tie furnished In paper binding.
The price quoted is for the complete set of bulletins, unbound.
 : :

890 Price List of Publications.

be published triennially, beginning with the 1918 edition.

Copies of this edition (908 pp.) may be obtained at the follow-
ing prices
Ci.oth. Half-Leathkr.
To non-members $9 00 $10 00
To members, for extra copies 6 00 7 00

Copies of earlier editions of the Book of A.S.T.M. Standards

are not kept in stock.

BOOK OF A.S.T.M. TENTATIVE STANDARDS.

The Tentative Standards, which are published in Part I
of the Proceedings, are also published in the form of a separate
volume issued only in paper binding. This volume contains
the 49 Tentative Standards of the Society in their latest form.
Copies of the 1918 edition (about 300 pp.) may be obtained
at the following prices

To non-members $3 00
To members •
2 00

Copies of earlier editions of the Book of A.S.T.M. Tentative

Standards are not kept in stock.

INDIVIDUAL STANDARDS AND TENTATIVE STANDARDS.

The Standards and Tentative Standards of the Society
may also be obtained separately at the following prices:
Single copies 25 cents.
For lots of 10 to 25 20 cents each.
" " " 25 " 100 15 "
'
100 " 500 10 "

Members of the Society may obtain extra copies of these

Standards or Tentative Standards at the following special prices:
Single copies 15 cents.
For lots of 25 to 100 10 cents each.

In ordering, the serial designation of each Standard or

Tentative Standard should be stated.

1918 MEMBERSHIP PAMPHLET.

This pamphlet (297 pp.), containing the membership list,
the charter and by-laws, the list and personnel of the standing
 Price List of Publications. 891

committees, the listof Standards and Tentative Standards, and

other data, may be obtained at the following prices:
To non-members $1 00
To members for extra copies 50

REPORTS OF COMMITTEE D-1 ON PRESERVATIVE COATINGS

FOR STRUCTURAL MATERIALS.
The valuable annual reports of Committee D-1 on Pre-
servative Coatings for Structural Materials from 1903 to 1914,
inclusive, are published in the form of a single volume of 567
pages, which may be obtained at the following price:
In cloth binding $3 50

These prices are subject to a discount of 25 per cent in lots

of 100 or over.

FINAL REPORT OF JOINT COMMITTEE ON CONCRETE AND

REINFORCED CONCRETE.
This report was prepared by a joint committee of the
American Society of Civil Engineers, American Society for
Testing Materials, American Railway Engineering Association,
the Portland Cement Association, and the American Concrete
Institute.

Issued in 1917 (62 pp.) 50 cents.

DUDLEY MEMORIAL VOLUME.

In 1911 the Society issued a memorial volume (267 pp.)
commemorative of the life and life-work of its late President,
Charles B. Dudley. This volume is out of print.

DISCOUNTS.
Libraries, publishers and bookdealers, and Government
departments (for theduration of the war), are allowed a discount
of 20 per cent on the list prices to non-members of all publications
of the Society.

Orders for publications should be ad to:

American Soci tag Materia

University of Pennsylvania,
Philadelphia, Pa.
 INDEX
OF THE

STANDARDS.
[This Index is limited in general to the terms in the titles of the Standards]

A
Abrasion.
— of Road Material, 623.
Aggregates.
Determination of Apparent Specific Gravity of Coarse 628. — ,

Making a Mechanical Analysis of Broken Stone or Broken Slag, except

for —
Used in Cement Concrete, 665.
Making a Mechanical Analysis of Mixtures of Sand or Other Fine Mate-
rial with Broken Stone or Broken Slag, except for Used in Cement —
Concrete,- 666.
Making a Mechanical Analysis of Sand or Other Fine Highway Material,
except for Fine —
Used in Cement Concrete, 663.
Air-Line Hose.
See Hose.
Alloys.
The Alloy: Copper, 88 per cent; tin, 10 per cent; zinc, 2 per cent, 447.
Alloy Steel (see also Chrome-Vanadium Steel, Nickel Steel, Silico-Manganese
Steel).
Automobile Carbon and Alloy Steels, 245.
Carbon-Steel and —-Steel Blooms, Billets and Slabs Forgings, for 155.
Carbon-Steel and — Forgings, 160.
Chemical Analysis Alloy
of 299.Steels,
Quenched-and-Tempered — Axles, Shafts, and other Forgings Loco- for
motives and Cars, 178.
Quenched — Track Bolts, 57.
Analysis.
Chemical — Alloy
of 299.
Steels,
Chemical — of Plain Carbon 275. Steel,
Laboratory Sampling and — of Coal, 679.
Laboratory Sampling and — Coke, 709. of
Making a Mechanical — Broken Stone or Broken
of except Slag, for
Aggregates Used in Cement Concrete, 665.
(892)
 Index of the Standards. 893

Analysis (Continued):
Making a Mechanical —
of Mixtures of Sand or Other Fine Material
with Broken Stone or Broken Slag, except for Aggregates Used in
Cement Concrete, 666.
Making a Mechanical —
of Sand or Other Fine Highway Material, except
for Fine Aggregates Used in Cement Concrete, 663.
Routine —
of Dry Red Lead, 649.
Routine —
of White Pigments, 637.
Routine —
of Yellow, Orange, Red and Brown Pigments Containing Iron
and Manganese, 655.
Sampling and —
of Creosote Oil, 721.
Sampling and —
of Pig and Cast Iron, 410.
Annealed Wire.
Soft or Annealed Copper Wire, 467.
Annealing (see also Heat Treatment).
— of Carbon-Steel Castings, 334.
— of Miscellaneous Rolled and Forged Carbon-Steel Objects, 328.
Asphalt.
Loss on Heating of Oil and Asphaltic Compounds, 635.
Automatic Screw Stock.
See Screw Stock.
Automobiles.
Elliptical-Steel Springs for — , 140.
Automobile Springs.
Carbon-Steel Bars for Vehicle and 115. — ,

Chrome- Vanadium-Steel Bars for Automobile and Railway Springs, 121.

Elliptical Steel Springs for Automobiles, 131.
Silico-Manganese-Steel Bars for Automobile and Railway Springs, 118.
Automobile Steel.
Automobile Carbon and Alloy Steels, 245.
Axles.
Carbon-Steel Car and Tender — , 192.
Cold-Rolled Steel , —
196.
Quenched-and-Tempered Alloy-Steel — Shafts, and Other Forgings for
,

Locomotives and Cars, 178.

Quenched-andTempered Carbon-Steel — Shafts, and Other Forgings
, for
Locomotives and Cars, 169.

B
Bars.
Billet-Steel Concrete Reinforcement — , 148.
Carbon-Steel — for Railway Springs, 109.
Carbon-Steel — for Railway Springs with Special Silicon Requirements,
112.
Carbon-Steel — for Vehicle and Automobile Springs, 115.
Chrome- Vanadium-StcH — for Automobile and Railway Springs, 121.
 ,

894 Index or the Standards.

Bars {Continued):
Copper — forLocomotive Staybolts, 485.
Electrolytic Copper Wire —
Cakes, Slabs,, Billets, Ingots, and Ingot —
434.
—
Extra-High-Carbon-Steel Splice , 45.
—
High-Carbon-Steel Splice , 41.
Lake Copper Wire — Cakes, Slabs, , Ingots, and Ingot — Billets, , 430.
Low-Carbon-Steel Splice — , 34.
Medium-Carbon-Steel Splice — , 37.
Quenched High- Carbon- Steel Splice — , 49.
Rail-Steel Concrete Reinforcement — , 152.
Refined Wrought-Iron — 355. ,

Silico-Manganese-Steel — for Automobile and Railway Springs, 118.

Bessemer Steel.
Cold-Drawn — Automatic Screw Stock, 264.
Billets.
Billet-Steel Concrete Reinforcement Bars, 148.
Carbon-Steel and Alloy-Steel Blooms, — and Slabs for Forgings, 155.
Electrolytic Copper Wire Bars, Cakes, —
Slabs, , Ingots, and Ingot
Bars, 434.
Lake Copper Wire Bars, Cakes, Slabs, —», Ingots, and Ingot Bars, 430.
Bituminous Materials.
Distillation of —
Suitable for Road Treatment, 669.
Penetration of — , 632.
Soluble Bitumen, 630.
Blooms.
Carbon-Steel and Alloy-Steel — , Billets and Slabs for Forgings, 155.
Wrought-Iron Rolled or Forged — and Forgings for Locomotives and
Cars, 369.
Boilers.
Boiler and Firebox Steel for Locomotives, 253.
Boiler Rivet Steel, 259.
Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel and Wrought-Iron Boiler Tubes for
Stationary Service, 232.
Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel Boiler Tubes for Locomotives, 226.
Lap-Welded Charcoal-Iron Boiler Tubes for Locomotives, 338.
Seamless Brass Boiler Tubes, 492.
Seamless Copper Boiler Tubes, 488.
Bolts.
Engine-Bolt Iron, 351.
Quenched Alloy-Steel Track — , 57.
Quenched Carbon-Steel Track — , 53.
Brass.
— Forging Rod, 496.
Free-Cutting — Rod Use in Screw Machines, 499.
for
Seamless — Boiler Tubes, 492.
Brick.
Paving — 549. ,
 Index of the Standards. 895

Bridges.
Structural Steel for — , 65.
Yellow-Pine Bridge and Trestle Timbers, 588.
Bronze.
High-Strength —
Trolley Wire, Round and Grooved: 40 and 65 -per-
cent Conductivity, 477.
Manganese Ingots for Sand Castings, 444.
Brown Pigments.
Routine Analysis of Yellow, Orange, Red and Brown Pigments Contain-
ing Iron and Manganese, 655.
Buildings.
Structural Steel for —,79.

C
Cable (see also Wire).
Bare Concentric-Lay Copper — : Hard, Medium-Hard or Soft, 472.
Cakes.
Electrolytic Copper Wire Bars, — , Slabs, Billets, Ingots, and Ingot
Bars, 434.
Lake Copper Wire Bars, — , Slabs, Billets, Ingots, and Ingot Bars, 430.
Carbon Steel.
Annealing of —
Castings, 334.
Annealing of Miscellaneous Rolled and Forged Objects, 328. —
Automobile Carbon and Alloy Steels, 245.
— and Alloy-Steel Blooms, Billets and Slabs for Forgings, 155.
— and Alloy-Steel Forgings, 160.
— Bars Railway Springs,
for 109.
— Bars for Railway Springs with Special Silicon Requirements, 112.
— Bars for Vehicle and Automobile Springs, 115.
— Car and Tender Axles, 192.
— Forgings for Locomotives, 187.
— Rails, 20.
Chemical Analysis Plain — 275.
of ,

Extra-High — Splice Bars, 45.

Heat Treatment of Case-Hardened — Objects, 336.
High Splice Bars, 41.
Low Splice Bars, 34.
Medium- — Splice Bars, 37.
Quenched-and-Tcmpered —
Axles, Shafts, and other Forgings for Loco-
motives and Cars, 169.
Quenched —
Track Bolts, 53.
Quenched High Splice Bars, 49.
Wrought Solid —
Wheels for Electric-Railwa 208. ,

Wrought Solid —
Wheels for Steam Railway Service, 200.
Cars.
Carbon-Steel Car and 1 I 92.
Cast-iron Car Wheels, 397.
 896 Index of the Standards.

Cars (Continued):
Quenched-and-Tempered Alloy-Steel Axles, Shafts, and other Forgings
for Locomotives and 178. — ,

Quenched-and-Tempered Carbon -Steel Axles, Shafts, and other Forgings

for Locomotives and 169. — ,

Structural Steel for — , 92.

Wrought-Iron Rolled or Forged Blooms and Forgings for Locomotives
and 369. — ,

Case-Hardened Objects.
Heat Treatment of Case-Hardened Carbon-Steel Objects, 336.
Cast Iron.
— Car Wheels, 397.
— Locomotive Cylinders, 393.
— Pipe and Special Castings, 377.
— Pipe and
Soil 387. Fittings,
Sampling and Analysis of Pig and — , 410.
Castings.
Annealing of Carbon-Steel — 334.
,

Cast- Iron Pipe and Special — 377. ,

Gray-Iron 406. — ,

Malleable-Iron — , 403.
Manganese-Bronze Ingots for Sand — , 444.
Steel — , 220.
Cement.
Making a Mechanical Analysis of Broken Stone or Broken Slag, except
for Aggregates — Concrete, 665. Used in
Making a Mechanical Analysis of Sand or Other Fine Highway Material,
except Fine Aggregates Used in — Concrete, 663.
for
Making a Mechanical Analysis
of Mixtures of Sand or Other Fine Mate-
with Broken Stone or Broken Slag, except for Aggregates Used
rial
in —
Concrete, 666.
Natural 523. — ,

Portland —,503.
Chain.
— 363.
Iron and Steel ,

Charcoal-Iron.
Lap-Welded — Boiler Tubes, Locomotives, 338. for
Chemical Analysis also Analysis). (see
— of Alloy 299. Steels,
— Plain Carbon
of 275. Steel,
Chrome-Vanadium-Steel.
— Bars for Automobile and Railway Springs, 121.
Coal.
Laboratory Sampling and Analysis of — , 679.
Sampling of 673. — ,

Coke.
Foundry — , 584.
Laboratory Sampling and Analysis of — , 709.
 i

Index of the Standards. 897

Cold-Drawn Steel.
Cold-Drawn Bessemer Steel Automatic Screw Stock, 264.
Cold-Drawn Open-hearth Steel Automatic Screw Stock, 266.
Cold-Rolled Axles.
Cold-Rolled Steel Axles, 196.
Concentric-Lay Cable.
Bare Concentric- Lay Copper Cable:' Hard, Medium-Hard]or~Soft, 472.
Concrete (see also Cement).
Billet-Steel — Reinforcement Bars, 148.
Making a Mechanical Analysis of Broken Stone or Broken Slag, except
for Aggregates Used in Cement —
665. ,

Making a Mechanical Analysis of Sand or Other Fine Highway Material,

except for Fine Aggregates Used in Cement 663. — ,

Making a Mechanical Analysis of Mixtures of Sand or Other Fine Mate-

rial with Broken Stone or Broken Slag, except for Aggregates Used in

Cement — 666.
,

Rail-Steel — Reinforcement Bars, 152.

Conductivity.
High-Strength Bronze Trolley Wire, Round and Grooved: 40 and 65-
per-cent — , 477.
Construction.
Fire Tests of Materials and — , 561.
Copper.
Bare Concentric- Lay — Cable: Hard, Medium-Hard or Soft, 472.
— Bars for Locomotive Staybolts, 485.
— Plates for Locomotive Fireboxes, 481.
Electrolytic — Wire Bars, Cakes, Slabs, Ingots, and Ingot Bars,
Billets,

434.
Hard-Drawn — Wire, 451.
Lake — Wire Bars, Cakes, Slabs, Ingots, and Ingot Bars, 430.
Billets,

Medium Hard-Drawn — Wire, 460.

Seamless — Boiler Tubes, 488.
Soft or Annealed — Wire, 467.
The Alloy: — 88 per cent; 10 per cent;
tin, per cent, 447.zinc, 2

Cotton Hose.
See Hose.
Creosote Oil.
Sampling and Analysis of — , 721.
Cylinders.
Cast-Iron Locomotive — , 393.

D
Definitions.
— of Terms Relating to Materials for Roads and Pavements, 750.
— of Terms Relating to Paint Specifications, 746.
— of Terms Relating to Sewer Pipe, 566.
— of Terms Relating to Structural Timber, 755.
898 Index or the Standards.

Distillation.
— of Bituminous Materials Suitable for Road Treatment, 65'}.
Drain Tile.
— 526.
,

Drawm Wire.
Hard- Drawn Copper Wire, 451.
Medium- Hard- Drawn Copper Wire, 460.

E
Electric Railway Service.
Wrought Solid Carbon-Steel Wheels for — , 208.
Electrolytic Copper.
See Copper.
Elliptical-Steel Springs.
— for Automobiles, 140.
— for Railways, 131.
Engines (see also Locomotives) .

Engine-Bolt Iron, 351.

F
Fire Hose.
See Hose.
Firebox Steel.
— for Locomotives, 253.
Boiler and.
Fireboxes.
Copper Plates for Locomotive — 481. ,

Fire Tests.
— of Materials and Construction, 561.
Fittings.
Cast-iron Soil Pipe and — , 387.
Forgings.
Annealing of Miscellaneous Rolled and Forged Carbon-Steel Objects, 328.
Brass Forging Rod, 496.
Carbon-Steel and Alloy-Steel Blooms, Billets and Slabs for — , 155.
Carbon-Steel and Alloy-Steel 160. — ,

Carbon-Steel — for Locomotives, 187.

Quenched-and-Tempered Alloy-Steel Axles, Shafts, and Other for —
Locomotives and Cars, 178.
Quenched-and-Tempered Carbon-Steel Axles, Shafts, and Other for —
Locomotives and Cars, 169.
Wrought-Iron Rolled or Forged Blooms and for Locomotives and Cars, —
369.
Foundry Coke.
— , 584.
Foundry Pig Iron.
See Pig Iron.
 Index of the Standards. 899

Q
Girder Rails.
Open-hearth Steel Girder and High Tee Rails, 29.
Gray-Iron Castings.
— , 406.
Grooved Trolley Wire.
High-Strength Bronze Trolley Wire, Round and Grooved: 40 and 65-
per-cent Conductivity, 477.

H
Hard Copper Cable.
Bare Concentric-Lay Copper Cable: Hard, Medium-Hard or Soft, 472.

Hard-Drawn Wire.
Hard- Drawn Copper Wire, 451.
Medium Hard-Drawn Copper Wire, 460.
Heat Treatment (see also Annealing).
— of Case-Hardened Carbon-Steel Objects, 336.
Helical-Steel Springs.
— for Railways, 124.
Highway Material (see also Roads).
Making a Mechanical Analysis of Sand or Other Fine — , except for
Fine Aggregates used in Cement Concrete, 663.
Hose.
Air-Line —
for Pneumatic Tools, 602.
2f-in. Cotton Rubber-Lined Fire —
for Private Department Use, 592.

2$, 3, and 3j-in. Double- Jacketed Cotton Rubber-Lined j_Fire for —

Public Fire Department Use, 597.
Testing of Cotton Rubber-Lined 736. — ,

Hydrated Lime.
— , 546.

Ingots.
Electrolytic Copper Wire Bars, Cakes, Slabs, Billets, — , and Ingot
Bars, 434.
Lake Copper Wire Bars, Cakes, Slabs, Billets, — , and Ingot Bars, 430.
Manganese- Bronze —
for Sand Castings, 444.
Iron.
Cast Car Wheels, 397.
Cast Locomotive Cylinders, 393.
Cast Pipe and Special Castings, 377.
Cast- —
Soil Pipe and Fittings, 387.
Engine-Bolt —.351.
Foundry Pig —
373. ,

Gray Castings, 406.

— and Steel Chain, 363.
Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel and Wrought [ron Boiler Tubes for
Stationary Service, 232.
Lap-Welded Charcoal- — Boiler Tubes Eoi Locomotives, 338.
900 Index or the Standards.

Iron (Continued):
Magnetic Properties of — and Steel, 268.
Malleable Castings, 403.
Refined Wrought Bars, 355.
Routine Analysis of Yellow, Orange, Red, and Brown Pigments Con-
taining— and Manganese, 655.
Sampling and Analysis of Pig and Cast 410. •,

Staybolt — , 347.
Welded Wrought- Pipe, 342. —
Wrought Plates, 360.
Wrought Rolled or Forged Blooms and Forgings for Locomotives and
Cars, 369.

L
Lake Copper.
See Copper.
Lap- Welded Tubes.
Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel and Wrought-Iron Boiler Tubes for
Stationary Service, 232.
Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel Boiler Tubes for Locomotives, 226.
Lap-Welded Charcoal-Iron Boiler Tubes for Locomotives, 338.
Lead.
Routine Analysis of Dry Red — , 649.
Lime.
Hydrated — , 546.
Quicklime, 543.
Linseed Oil.
Purity of Boiled — from North American Seed, 573.
Purity of Raw — from North American Seed, 570.
Locomotives (see also Table of Contents, page 8).
Boiler and Firebox — 253. Steel for ,

Carbon-Steel Forgings for — , 187.

Cast-Iron Locomotive Cylinders, 393.
Copper Bars — Staybolts, 485.
for
Copper Plates for — Fireboxes, 481.
Lap- Welded and Seamless Steel Boiler Tubes for , 226. —
Lap- Welded Charcoal-Iron Boiler Tubes for 338. — ,

Quenched-and-Tempered Alloy-Steel Axles, Shafts, and Other Forgings

for —
and Cars, 178.
Quenched-and-Tempered Carbon-Steel Axles, Shafts, and Other Forgings
for —
and Cars, 169.
Structural Steel for — , 86.
Wrought-Iron Rolled or Forged Blooms and Forgings for — and Cars,
369.
Loss on Heating.
— of Oil and Asphaltic Compounds, 635.
Lubricants (see also Oil).
— , 617.
 Index of the Standards. 901

M
Magnetic Properties.
— of Iron and Steel, 268.
Malleable Castings.
Malleable-Iron Castings, 403.
Manganese.
Routine Analysis of Yellow, Orange, Red, and Brown Pigments Con-
taining Iron and — , 655.
Manganese Bronze.
—Ingots for Sand Castings, 444.
Manganese Steel.
Silico Bars for Automobile and Railway Springs, 118.
Materials.
Abrasion of Road Material, 623.
Definition of Terms, Relating to —
for Roads and Pavements, 750.
Fire Tests of —
and Construction, 561.

N
Natural Cement.
— , 523.
Nickel Steel.
Structural — ,72.
o
Oil (see also Lubricants).
Loss on Heating of —
and Asphaltic Compounds, 635.
Purity of Boiled Linseed —
from North American Seed, 573.
Purity of Raw Linseed —
from North American Seed, 570.
Purity of Raw Tung — , 576.
Sampling and Analysis of Creosote 721. — ,

Open-hearth Steel.
Cold-Drawn —
Automatic Screw Stock, 266.
— Girder and High Tee Rails, 29.
Orange Pigments.
Routine Analysis of Yellow, Orange, Red, and Brown Pigments Con-
taining Iron and Manganese, 655.

P
Paint (see also Oil, Turpentine).
Definitions Terms Relating
of — Specifications, 746.
to
— Thinners other than Turpentine, 606.
Pavements.
Definitions of Terms Relating to Materials for Roads and — , 750.
Paving Brick.
— 549.
,

Penetration.
— of Bituminous Materials, 632.
902 Index of the Standards.

Pig Iron.
Foundry — , 373.
Sampling and Analysis of Pig and Cast Iron, 410.
Pigments.
Routine Analysis of White 637. — ,

Routine Analysis of Yellow, Orange, Red, and Brown — Containing Iron

and Manganese, 655.
Pine.
See Timber.
Pipe.
Cast-Iron — and Special Castings, 377.
Cast-Iron Soil— and Fittings, 387.
Definitions Terms Relating to Sewer —
of , 566.
Welded Steel — 240. ,

Welded Wrought-Iron — 342. ,

Plates.
Copper —
for Locomotive Fireboxes, 481.
Wrought-Iron 360. — ,

Pneumatic Tools.
Air-Line Hose for 600. — ,

Portland Cement.
— , 503.

Q
Quenched-and-Tempered Forgings.
Quenched-and-Tempered Alloy-Steel Axles, Shafts, and Other Forgings
for Locomotives and Cars, 178.
Quenched-and-Tempered Carbon-Steel Axles, Shafts and Other Forg-
ings for Locomotives and Cars, 169.
Quicklime.
— , 543.

R
Rails.
Carbon-Steel — , 20.
Open-hearth Steel Girder and High Tee 29. — ,

Rail-Steel Concrete Reinforcement Bars, 152.

Railway Springs.
Carbon-Steel Bars for 109. — ,

Carbon-Steel Bars for —

with Special Silicon Requirements, 112.
Chrome- Vanadium-Steel Bars for Automobile and 121. — ,

Elliptical-Steel Springs for Railways, 131.

Helical-Steel Springs for Railways, 124.
Silico-Manganese-Steel Bars for Automobile and — , 118.
Red Lead.
Routine Analysis of Dry — , 649.
Red Pigments.
Routine Analysis of Yellow, Orange, Red and Brown Pigments Con-
taining Iron and Manganese, 655.
 Index of the Standards. 903

Reinforcement Bars.
Billet-Steel Concrete — , 148.
Rail-Steel Concrete — , 152.
Rivet Steel.
Boiler — 259. ,

— for Ships, 104.

Roads.
Abrasion of Road Material, 623.
Definitions of Terms Relatingto Materials for and Pavements, 750. —
Distillation of Bituminous Materials Suitable for Road Treatment, 669.
Rock.
Toughness of 625. — ,

Rods.
Brass Forging Rod, 496.
Free-Cutting Brass Rod for Use in Screw Machines, 499.
Rolled Blooms and Forgings.
Wrought-Iron Rolled or Forged Blooms and Forgings for Locomotives
and Cars, 369.
Rolled Carbon Steel.
Annealing of Miscellaneous Rolled and Forged Carbon-Steel Objects, 328.
Round Trolley Wire.
High-Strength Bronze Trolley Wire, Round and Grooved: 40 and 65-
per-cent Conductivity, 477.
Rubber.
Testing of Cotton Lined Hose, 736.
2|-in. Cotton Lined Fire Hose for Private Department Use, 592.
2j, 3 and 3^-in. Double- Jacketed Cotton Lined Fire Hose for Public
Fire Department Use, 597.

Sampling.
Laboratory — and Analysis of Coal, 679.
Laboratory —
and Analysis of Coke, 709.
— and Analysis of Creosote Oil, 721.
— and Analysis of Pig and Cast Iron, 410.
— of Coal, 673.
Sand.
Making a Mechanical Analysisof Mixtures of or Other Fine Material —
with Broken Stone or Broken Slag, except for Aggregates Used in
Cement Concrete, 666.
Making a Mechanical Analysis of — or Other Fine Highway Material,
except for Fine Aggregates Used in Cement Concrete, 663.
Sand Castings.
Manganese-Bronze Ingots for — , 444.
Screw Machines.
Free-cutting Brass Rod for Use in — , 499.
Screw Spikes.
Steel — , 63.
 1

904 Index of the Standards.

Screw Stock.
Cold- Drawn Bessemer Steel Automatic 264. — ,

Cold-Drawn Open-hearth Steel Automatic 266. — ,

Seamless Tubes.
Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel and Wrought-Iron Boiler Tubes for
Stationary Service, 232.
Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel Boiler Tubes for Locomotives, 226.
Seamless Brass Boiler Tubes, 492.
Seamless Copper Boiler Tubes, 488.
Sewer Pipe.
Definitions of Terms Relating to — , 566.
Shafts.
Quenched-and-Tempered Alloy-Steel Axles, — and Other Forgings for
,

Locomotives and Cars, 178.

Quenched-and-Tempered Carbon-Steel Axles, — and Other Forgings for
,

Locomotives and Cars, 69. 1

SheUac.
— , 610.
Ships.
Rivet Steel for — , 104.
Structural Steel for — , 98.
Si!ico-Manganese-Steel.
— Bars for Automobile and Railway Springs, 1 8.

Silicon.
Carbon -Steel Bars for Railway Springs with Special — Requirements, 1 12.

Slabs.
Carbon-Steel and Alloy-Steel Blooms, Billet and for Forgings, 155. —
ElectrolyticCopper Wire Bars, Cakes, Billets, Ingots, and Ingot — ,

Bars, 434.
Lake Copper Wire Bars, Cakes, — , Billets, Ingots, and Ingot Bars, 430.
Slag.
Making a Mechanical Analysis of Broken Stone or Broken except for — ,

Aggregates Used in Cement Concrete, 665.

Making a Mechanical Analysis of Mixtures of Sand or Other Fine Mate-
rial with Broken Stone or Broken except for Aggregates Used in — ,

Cement Concrete, 666.

Soft Copper Cable.
Bare Concentric-Lay Copper Cable: Hard, Medium-Hard or Soft, 472.

Soft Wire.
Soft or Annealed Copper Wire, 467.
Soil Pipe.
— and Fittings, 387.
Cast- Iron
Specific Gravity.
Determination Apparent — of Coarse Aggregates, 628.
of

Spelter.
— , 437.
 . ,

Index of the Standards. 905

Spikes.
Steel Screw — , 63.
Steel Track—, 61.
Splice Bars.
Extra-High-Carbon-Steel — , 45.
High-Carbon-Steel — , 41
Low-Carbon-Steel —
, 34.
Medium-Carbon-Steel 37. — ,

Quenched High-Carbon-Steel — , 49.

Springs.
Carbon-Steel Bars for Railway — , 109.
Carbon-Steel Bars for Railway — with Special Silicon Requirements, 112.
Carbon-Steel Bars for Vehicle and Automobile — , 115.
Chrome- Vanadium-Steel Bars for Automobile and Railway — , 121.
Elliptical-Steel — for Automobile, 140.
Elliptical-Steel — for Railways, 131.
Hellical-Steel — for Railways, 124.
Silico-Manganese-Steel Bars for Automobile and Railway — , 1 18.
Stationary Service.
Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel and Wrought-Iron Boiler Tubes for —
232.
Staybolt Iron.
— , 347.
Staybolts.
Copper Bars for Locomotive 485. — ,

Steam Railway Service.

Wrought Solid Carbon-Steel Wheels for — , 200.
Steel.
Annealing of Carbon Castings, 334.
Annealing of Miscellaneous Rolled and Forged Carbon Objects, 328.
Automobile Carbon and Alloy Steels, 245.
Billet Concrete Reinforcement Bars, 148.
Boiler and Firebox —
for Locomotives, 253.
Boiler Rivet —
259. ,

Carbon and Alloy Blooms, Billets and Slabs for Forgings, 155.
Carbon and Alloy Forgings, 1 60.
Carbon Bars for Railway Springs, 109.
Carbon Bars for Railway Springs with Special Silicon Requirements,
112.
Carbon- —
Bars for Vehicle and Automobile Springs, 115.
Carbon Car and Tender Axles, 192.
Carbon- —
Forgings for Locomotives, 187.
Carbon Rails, 20.
Chemical Analysis of Alloy Steels, 299.
Chemical Analysis of Plain Carbon 275. — ,

Chrome-Vanadium- —
Bars for Automobile and Railway Springs, 121.
Cold-Drawn Bessemer —
Automatic Screw Stock, 264.
906 Index of the Standards.

Steel (Continued):
Cold-Drawn Open-hearth — Automatic Screw Stock, 266.
Cold-Rolled— Axles, 196.
— Springs Automobiles,
Elliptical- for 140.
— Springs Railways,
Elliptical- for 131.
Extra-High-Carbon- — Splice Bars, 45.
Heat Treatment of Case-Hardened Carbon Objects, 336.
Helical Springs for Railways, 124.
High-Carbon Splice Bars, 41.
Iron and —
Chain, 363.
Lap-Welded and Seamless — and Wrought Iron Boiler Tubes Sta- for
tionary Service, 232.
Lap- Welded and Seamless — Boiler Tubes for Locomotives, 226.
Low-Carbon Splice Bars, 34.
Magnetic Properties of Iron and — 268. ,

Medium-Carbon Splice Bars, 37.

Open-hearth — Girder and High Tee Rails, 29.
Quenched Alloy Track Bolts, 57.
Quenched-and-Tempered Alloy- — Axles, Shafts, and Other Forgings for
Locomotives and Cars, 178.
Quenched-and-Tempered Carbon Axles, Shafts, and Other Forgings
for Locomotives and Cars, 169.
Quenched Carbon Track Bolts, 53.
Quenched High-Carbon —
Splice Bars, 49.
Rail Concrete Reinforcement Bars, 152.
Rivet — for Ships, 104.
Silico-Manganese-— Bars Automobile and Railway Springs,
for 118.
— Castings, 220.
— Tires, 215.
— Screw Spikes, 63.
— Track Spikes, 61.
Structural Nickel — , 72.
Structural — Bridges,
for 65.
Structural — Buildings,
for 79.
Structural — Cars,
for 92.
Structural — Locomotives,
for 86.
Structural — Ships,
for 98.
Welded — Pipe, 240.
Wrought Solid Carbon Wheels Electric Railway Service, 208.
for
Wrought Solid Carbon- — Wheels Steam Railway Service, 200.
for
Stone.
Form of Specifications Certain Commercial Grades
for Broken — 668. of ,

Making a Mechanical Analysis Broken — or Broken

of except for Slag,
Aggregates Used in Cement Concrete, 665.
Making a Mechanical Analysis of Mixtures of Sand or Other Fine Mate-
rial with Broken — or Broken Slag, except for Aggregates Used in
Cement Concrete, 666.
 Index of the Standards. 907

Structural Steel.
See Steel.
Structural Timber.
See Timber.

T
Tee Rails.
Open-hearth Steel Girder and High, — 29.
Tempered Forgings.
See Quenched-and-Tempered Forgings.
Tenders.
Carbon-Steel Car and Tender Axles, 192.
Testing.
Fire Tests of Materials and Construction, 561.
Methods for — , 759.
— of Cotton Rubber-Lined Hose, 736.
Tile.
Drain — , 526.
Timber.
Definitions of Terms Relating to Structural — , 755.
Yellow-Pine Bridge and Trestle Timbers, 588.
Tin.
The Alloy: Copper, 88 per cent; — , 10 per cent; zinc, 2 per cent, 447.
Tires.
Steel—, 215.
Toughness.
—
of Rock, 625.
Track Bolts.
Quenched Alloy-Steel — ,57.
Quenched Carbon-Steel — , 53.
Track Spikes.
Steel —.61.
Trestles.
Yellow-Pine Bridge and Trestle Timbers, 588.
Trolley Wire.
High-Strength Bronze — , Round and Grooved: 40 and 65-per-cent Con-
ductivity, 477.
Tubes.
Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel and Wrought-Iron Boiler — for Sta-
tionary Service, 232.
Lap-Welded and Seamless Steel Boiler for Locomotives, — 226.
Lap- Welded Charcoal-Iron Boiler for Locomotives, 338. —
Seamless Brass Boiler — 492.
,

Seamless Copper Boiler — 488. ,

Tung Oil.
Purity of Raw — , 576.
Turpentine.
— , 581.
Paint Thinners other than — , 606.
908 Index of the Standards.

V
Vanadium Steel.
Chrome for Automobile and Railway Springs, 121.
Vehicle Springs.
Carbon-Steel Bars for Vehicle and Automobile Springs, 115.

w
Welded Pipe.
Welded Steel Pipe, 240.
Welded Wrought-Iron Pipe, 342.
Wheels.
Cast-iron Car — , 397.
Wrought Solid Carbon-Steel — for Electric Railway Service, 208.
Wrought Solid Carbon-Steel — for Steam Railway Service, 200.
White Pigments.
Routine Analysis of — 637. ,

Wire (see also Cable).

Electrolytic Copper — Bars, Cakes, Slabs, Billets, Ingots, and Ingot
Bars, 434.
Hard-Drawn Copper — 451. ,

High-Strength Bronze Trolley — , Round and Grooved: 40 and 65-per-

cent Conductivity, 477.
Lake Copper — Bars, Cakes, Slabs, Billets, Ingots, and Ingot Bars, 430.
Medium Hard-Drawn Copper — 460. ,

Soft or Annealed Copper — 467. ,

Wood.
See Timber.
Wrought Iron.
Lap- Welded and Seamless Steel and — Boiler Tubes for Stationary Ser-
vice, 232.
Refined — Bars, 355.
Welded — Pipe, 342.
— Plates, 360.
— Rolled or Forged Blooms and Forgings for Locomotives and Cars, 369.

Y
Yellow Pigments.
Routine Analysis of Yellow, Orange, Red, and Brown Pigments Con-
taining Iron and Manganese, 655.
Yellow Pine.
— Bridge and Trestle Timbers, 588.

Z
Zinc.
The Alloy: Copper, 88 per cent; tin, 10 per cent; — 2 per cent, 447.
 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR MEMBERSHIP

American Society for Testing Materials,

University of Pennsylvania,

Philadelphia, Pa.

Dear Sirs:

The undersigned recommends the following gentlemen (or

corporations, firms, etc.) for membership in the Society. It is
suggested that you send them general information concerning
the Society as well as application blanks for membership.
(In case of a firm, corporation, etc., indicate the name and
title of the officer who should be addressed.)

Yours truly,

(Signed)....

Mem. Am. Soc. Test. Mats.

Date
JVm*rtcsm j§5ocietrr £ot (Testing £$\,txt*rx&l&.

ArPTLIATED WITT1 THE

Intehnationai. Association for Testing Matbhial*

Upplicsntion tor 3rlcmbet:£.ljip.

The undersigned hereby appliks for membership in

the Amehi'jax Society for Testing Materials. If this
application be duly approved, he agrees to be governed i1v
the Charter and By-Laws of the Society and to further
it! objects as laid down therein.

N'ame of Applicant.

Represented by
(ircOKPOHiTIOIOR fium)

Occupation ok Official Title

1 '<
1ST < IKI'ICK A I)I>K ICSS

Date of- BlRTB

(ir I'KTIIH THIRTY YKaBH . > K l(ll{

Recommenoko ItY '

( j \% n »].M llk.1* ) I

[ApplicatlOl I lOuld be mailed to the AMERICAN Si ii n n i "k TESTING MATERIALS,

Unlvi lit of I'' no ylvania, Philadelphia, Pa.]
TA American Society for Testing
4.01 Materials
A64. Book of A.S.T.M. standards

tugia^ermg

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE

CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY

it;